JP2021192800A - Game machine - Google Patents

Abstract

To increase a performance effect.SOLUTION: A game machine in which a game can be played comprises: detection means capable of detecting a motion of a player; and specific display execution means for performing a specific display corresponding to the detection means. The specific display execution means can display, as a specific display, a first specific display and a second specific display having a higher degree of advantage for a player than that of the first specific display. In an ineffective period of detection by the detection means, the first specific display is changed to the second specific display after the first specific display is displayed. In an effective period of detection by the detecting means, a motion performance using the second specific display after the change is executed.SELECTED DRAWING: Figure 29

Description

The present invention relates to a gaming machine.

As a game machine, a game medium such as a game ball is launched into a game area by a launching device, and when the game medium wins a prize in a prize area such as a prize opening provided in the game area, a prize game medium such as a predetermined number of prize balls is generated. There is something given to the player. Further, a variable display device capable of variablely displaying (also referred to as "variable") identification information when the game medium wins a prize (starting condition is satisfied) in a predetermined winning area (starting winning opening) is provided, and the variable display device is provided. When the display result of the variable display of the identification information becomes the specific display result, there is one configured to be controllable to an advantageous state such as a specific game state (big hit game state) which is advantageous for the player.

Further, as the above-mentioned gaming machine, a gaming machine that displays an operation promotion image corresponding to the operating means during the valid period of the operating means (button or the like) is known (see, for example, Patent Document 1). According to Patent Document 1, if the operation is not performed, the operation promotion image may gradually become larger, or the operation promotion image in the shape of a button may change to the operation promotion image in the shape of a patrol lamp.

Japanese Unexamined Patent Publication No. 2016-83473

However, the operation promotion image corresponding to the operation means changes with time, and the operation promotion image does not change when the operation is performed early, so that there is a problem that the effect is poor.

The present invention has been made in view of the above points, and an object of the present invention is to provide a gaming machine having an improved effect.

(1) In order to achieve the above object, the gaming machine according to one aspect of the present invention can play a game and is controlled to an advantageous state (for example, a big hit gaming state, a probable change state, a time saving state, etc.) that is advantageous to the player. Possible game machines (for example, pachinko game machines, slot machines, etc.) and motion detection means (for example, push button 31B, stick controller 31A, touch sensor, infrared sensor, camera, etc.) capable of detecting the player's motion. And the specific display corresponding to the motion detecting means (for example, small button (white) D1, large button (white) D2, large button (red) D3, stick D4, small shown in FIGS. 25 and 32 to 38). Specific display execution means (for example, button development effect processing (S529), variable display medium effect process (S172), etc.) for performing a button (white) D1U, a large button (white) D2U, a large button (red) D3U, a stick D4U, etc. ), A detection means capable of detecting the game medium used for the game (for example, the game area 9010, etc.) (for example, the out-ball detector 90710 shown in FIGS. 144, 148, etc.), and detection from the detection means. A signal line through which a signal is transmitted (for example, a signal line 90734 shown in FIG. 144) and a receiving means for receiving the detection signal (for example, a main board 9011, a predetermined connection portion provided on the main board 9011 side, etc.) ), An abnormality detecting means capable of detecting an abnormality in the reception state of the detection signal (for example, a CPU 90103 that executes the error notification process of FIG. 145), and a predetermined condition are satisfied (for example, a normal first start winning opening). Winning ball device 906A, normal variable winning ball device 906B which is the second starting winning opening, general winning opening 9050A to 9050D which is the general winning area, special variable winning ball device 907 which is the big winning opening, etc.) A payout means (for example, a ball payout device, a payout mechanism, etc.) that pays out the game medium based on the above, and a predetermined state (for example, a normal state, etc.) different from the advantageous state. The number of gaming media detected by the detection means (for example, the number of hit balls, etc.) in the state in which all of the middle flags are off, and the number of gaming media paid out by the payout means in the predetermined state (for example, the number of balls to be driven). Information display means (for example, performance display is possible) that can display predetermined information (for example, performance information in FIG. 124) calculated based on the number of prize balls obtained by winning each winning opening. When an abnormality in the reception state is detected by the abnormality detecting means. In addition, the display by the information display means is restricted (for example, an error is notified and the performance display is restricted as shown in FIGS. 146 and 147), and the specific display execution means is the first specific display as the specific display. A specific display (for example, a small button (white) D1 etc.) and an advantage for the player over the first specific display (for example, a big hit expectation, a 16R probability variable big hit (see FIG. 7), an expectation, and a normal big hit. The second specific display (for example, when the first specific display is the small button (white) D1), the second specific display is the large button (white) D2, Large button (red) D3, stick D4, etc. When the first specific display is the large button (white) D2, the second specific display is the large button (red) D3, stick D4, etc., and the first specific display is the large button. (Red) In the case of D3, the second specific display can display stick D4 or the like), and the non-valid period of detection by the motion detecting means (for example, T4 to T11 shown in FIGS. 29 to 38). After displaying the first specific display, the first specific display is changed to the second specific display (for example, after displaying the small button (white) D1 as shown in FIG. 32 (C), the small button is displayed. (White) D1 is changed to a large button (white) D2 as shown in FIG. 33 (G), and a large button (white) D2 is changed to a large button (red) D3 as shown in FIG. 33 (I). In the valid period of detection by the motion detecting means (for example, T11 to T13 shown in FIGS. 29 to 38), the second specific display after the change (for example, FIGS. 33 (J) and 33 (for example)). As shown in K), an operation effect using a large button (red) D3, a large button (red) D3U, etc.) (for example, as shown in FIG. 33 (K), an operation is urged and shown in FIG. 33 (L). It is characterized in that the effect of notifying the result, etc.) is executed.

According to the above configuration, the effect of production is improved.

(2) In the gaming machine of the above (1), the first specific display is an action effect acting on the specific display (for example, a weak action effect, a medium action effect, and a strong action effect shown in FIG. 27 (C)). Is executed to change to the second specific display (for example, the small button (white) D1 shown in FIG. 34 (C) is a small button (for example, as shown in FIGS. 34 (D) and 34 (E)). White) By executing the weak action effect of displaying the image JS1 and the image JS2 acting on D1, the large button (white) changes to D2 as shown in FIG. 34 (E), and the large button (white) is changed to D2 as shown in FIG. 35 (G). As shown in FIGS. 35 (H) and 35 (I), the button (white) D2 is subjected to a medium-action effect of displaying the image TS1, the image TS2, and the image TS3 acting on the large button (white) D2. As shown in FIG. 35 (I), the small button (white) D1 shown in FIG. 38 (A) is changed to the stick D4 as shown in FIG. ) The stick D4 may be changed as shown in FIG. 38 (C) by executing the strong action effect of displaying the image TK1, the image TK2, and the image TK3 acting on the D1).

According to the above configuration, the effect is improved by the action effect.

(3) In the gaming machine of the above (1) or (2), there are a plurality of types of action effects acting on the specific display (for example, a weak action effect, a medium action effect, and a strong action shown in FIG. 27 (C) and the like. There is an effect, etc.), and the rate of change to the second specific display differs depending on which of the action effects is executed (for example, as shown in FIG. 27C, there is a change from the case without change). Since the determination ratios of the weak action effect, the medium action effect, and the strong action effect are different in the case of (weak change, medium change, or strong change), the second action effect is performed depending on which button or the like action effect is executed. The rate of change to a specific display is different).

According to the above configuration, it is possible to increase the expectation for the action effect.

(4) In any of the game machines (1) to (3) above, there are a plurality of types of action effects acting on the specific display (for example, the weak action effect and the medium action effect shown in FIG. 27C). There are multiple types of display modes of the specific display after the change (for example, large button (white) D2, large button (red) D3, stick D4 shown in FIGS. 25 and 32 to 38). , Large button (white) D2U, large button (red) D3U, stick D4U, etc.), and the ratio of which specific display is changed depends on which effect effect is executed (for example). , As shown in FIG. 27 (C), the weak action effect and the medium action are obtained in the case of weak change (1 step change), medium change (2 step change), and strong change (3 step change). Since the determination ratios of the effect and the strong effect effect are different, the ratio of weak change, medium change, and strong change is different depending on which button or the like action effect is executed. For example, before the change. When the small button (white) D1 is executed, the small button (white) D1 changes to the large button (white) D2 when the weak change is executed, and the small button (white) D1 becomes the large button when the medium change is executed. It changes to (red) D3, and when a strong change is executed, the small button (white) D1 changes to stick D4. Therefore, which specific display is used depending on which button or other action effect is executed. The rate of change may be different).

According to the above configuration, it is possible to increase the expectation for the action effect.

(5) In any of the gaming machines (1) to (4), there are a plurality of types of motion detecting means (for example, push button 31B, stick controller 31A, etc.), and the specific display after the change is supported. The motion effect detected by the motion detection means is executed (for example, as shown in FIG. 37, the motion effect detected by the push button 31B corresponding to the large button (white) D2 after the change is executed, and FIG. 33 The operation effect detected by the push button 31B corresponding to the large button (red) D3 after the change is executed as shown in FIG. 35, and the stick controller corresponding to the stick D4 after the change is executed as shown in FIGS. 35 and 38. The operation effect detected by 31A may be executed).

According to the above configuration, it is possible to pay attention to which operation means corresponds to the specific display.

(6) In any of the gaming machines (1) to (5), the specific display executing means has a non-valid period of detection by the motion detecting means (for example, T4 to T11 shown in FIGS. 29 to 38). When the specific display is displayed in (etc.), the specific display is displayed in an manner indicating that the non-valid period is reached (for example, as shown in FIGS. 29 to 38, a small button on which the regulation line K is superimposed). (White) D1, large button (white) D2 on which the regulation line K is superimposed, large button (red) D3 on which the regulation line K is superimposed, and stick D4 on which the regulation line K is superimposed are displayed) good.

According to the above configuration, it is easy to understand that the period is non-valid.

(7) In any of the gaming machines (1) to (6), the specific display executing means displays the specific display over a plurality of variable displays (for example, a plurality of (re) variable displays as pseudo-continuous fluctuations). The specific display may be displayed over, the specific display may be displayed over a plurality of variable displays by pre-reading, etc.), and the specific display may be changed.

According to the above configuration, it is possible to increase the expectation over a plurality of variable displays.

(8) A notice effect (for example, a cut-in effect) for notifying that the gaming machine according to any one of (1) to (7) above is controlled to an advantageous state (for example, a big hit gaming state) that is advantageous to the player. , Countdown effect, character drop effect, etc.), the action effect acting on the specific display is executed by executing the advance notice effect, and the second specific effect is executed by executing the action effect. It may be changed to the display.

According to the above configuration, it is possible to increase the expectation for a specific advance notice effect.

(9) The gaming machine according to any one of (1) to (8) above sets the setting state related to the effect to the first state (for example, the state in which the auto button function is disabled) or the second state (for example, the state in which the auto button function is disabled). A setting means that can be set to a state in which the auto button function is enabled (for example, the auto button setting process shown in FIG. 39) and a specific effect (for example, a button notice) when the effect execution condition is satisfied. It is possible to execute a display that reduces the scale of the gauge display, a notice display, a pass / fail display, etc., based on the detection of the operation of the push button 31B in the effects A to C and the decision button effect. The specific effect executing means (for example, the effect processing during variable display shown in FIG. 22) is provided, and the specific effect executing means is the effect in the first state based on the detection result of the motion detecting means. While the specific effect can be executed assuming that the execution condition is satisfied, in the second state, the specific effect can be executed assuming that the effect execution condition is satisfied regardless of the detection result of the operation detecting means (for example, auto). When the button function is enabled, even if the push button 31B is not operated, a notice display, a pass / fail display, a display for reducing the scale of the gauge display, etc. are performed), the setting means. Can change the setting from the first state to the second state based on the detection result of the motion detecting means during execution of the variable display (for example, a portion for executing the process of steps S7103 to S7104 in FIG. 39). It may be.

According to the above configuration, it is possible to prevent the hobby from being lowered.

Further, the embodiment for carrying out the invention described later includes the inventions relating to the following means C1 to means C4. Conventionally, in gaming machines, as shown in Japanese Patent Application Laid-Open No. 10-118314, a gaming machine that displays information (base value) regarding the number of hit balls (number of hit balls, number of out balls) and the number of prize balls has been used. Are known. However, for example, if the out sphere is not detected accurately, there is a risk of displaying inaccurate information. In view of this point, it is required to provide a gaming machine capable of preventing display of inaccurate information.

The gaming machine of means C1 is
A gaming machine (for example, a pachinko gaming machine, a slot machine, etc.) that can execute a game and can be controlled to an advantageous state (for example, a jackpot gaming state, a probability change state, a time saving state, etc.) that is advantageous to the player.
A detection means capable of detecting a game medium used for a game (for example, a game area 9010, etc.) (for example, an out-ball detector 90710, etc. shown in FIGS. 144, 148, etc.) and
A signal line to which the detection signal from the detection means is transmitted (for example, the signal line 90734 shown in FIG. 144) and the like.
A receiving means for receiving the detection signal (for example, a main board 9011, a predetermined connection portion provided on the main board 9011 side, etc.) and
An abnormality detecting means capable of detecting an abnormality in the reception state of the detection signal (for example, a CPU 90103 that executes the error notification process of FIG. 145) and
Predetermined conditions are satisfied (for example, the normal winning ball device 906A which is the first starting winning opening, the ordinary variable winning ball device 906B which is the second starting winning opening, the general winning opening 9050A-9050D which is the general winning area, and the large winning opening. A payout means (for example, a ball payout device, a payout mechanism, etc.) for paying out the game medium based on the special variable winning ball device 907, etc.
The number of gaming media detected by the detection means in a predetermined state different from the advantageous state (for example, a normal state or the like; specifically, a state in which all of the probability change flag, the time saving flag, and the round gaming flag are off, etc.) For example, predetermined information (for example, the number of prize balls to be won in each winning opening) calculated based on the number of balls to be driven and the number of game media paid out by the payout means in the predetermined state (for example, the number of prize balls by winning each winning opening). For example, it is provided with an information display means (for example, the display monitor 901130 of FIG. 148) capable of displaying (for example, performance display is possible) of the performance information of FIG. 124.
When an abnormality in the reception state is detected by the abnormality detecting means, the display by the information display means is restricted (for example, an error is notified and the performance display is restricted as shown in FIGS. 146 and 147).
According to this, it is possible to prevent the information display means from performing an inaccurate display.

The gaming machine of means C2 is
It is a gaming machine of means C1 and
When the abnormality of the reception state is detected by the abnormality detecting means, the display mode of the information display means is changed to indicate that the abnormality of the reception state is detected (for example, as shown in FIGS. 146 and 147). Is notified by changing etc.).
According to this, it is possible to confirm without providing a new display means.

The gaming machine of means C3 is
A gaming machine of means C1 or means C2,
The abnormality detecting means can detect the disconnection of the signal line (for example, it can be detected by monitoring the signal input from the out-ball detector 90710).
It is possible to notify the outside (for example, a game effect lamp 909, a speaker 908L, 908R, a card unit display device, a call lamp device, a hall computer, etc.) that the disconnection of the signal line is detected.
According to this, it is possible to recognize without performing the door opening work.

The gaming machine of means C4 is
Any gaming machine selected from means C1 to C3.
The detection means is configured as a unit (for example, the out-ball detector 90710 is configured as a unit that can be arranged on the game board 902 as shown in FIG. 148 (B)).
This facilitates maintenance. Also, different models can be used in common.

Further, the embodiment for carrying out the invention described later includes the inventions relating to the means B1 to the means B9 shown below.

The gaming machine of means B1 is
A gaming machine (pachinko game) having a starting winning area (first starting winning opening, second starting winning opening) and a general winning area (first to fourth general winning openings 9050A to 9050D) into which a game medium (game ball) can enter. Machine 901)
Variable display when the game medium enters the starting winning area (first starting winning opening, second starting winning opening) (variable display of the first special figure, variable display of the second special figure, variable display of the decorative symbol) (1st special symbol display device 904A, 2nd special symbol display device 904B, image display device 905) and
A granting means (game control microcomputer 90100) that grants a specific value (prize ball, score) when a game medium enters the general prize area, and
During a specific period (1 minute, 2 minutes, or 5 minutes from the general winning) after the gaming medium enters the general winning area, the effective starting winning and reach to the first starting winning opening or the second starting winning opening. It is provided with an effect executing means (effect control CPU 90120) for executing a specific effect (specific effect F (pre-reading notice effect), specific effect G (variation result advance notice effect)) when the state is established. It is a characteristic gaming machine (pachinko gaming machine 901 of the 47th effect form to the 49th effect form).
According to this, it is possible to make an interest in whether or not a predetermined condition is satisfied in a specific period after the game medium enters the general prize area, and the specific effect is performed after the game medium enters the general prize area. It can enhance the interest until it is executed.

The gaming machine of means B2 is
It is a gaming machine of means B1 and
Execution of a notification effect for executing a notification effect (any of the characters A to C appears immediately after winning a prize in the general winning opening) so as to be able to identify and specifically notify the state after the game medium has entered the general winning area. It is a gaming machine characterized by further providing means.
According to this, it is possible to make the player recognize that the game medium has entered the general winning area.
In addition, as a notification effect for notifying the state after the game medium has entered, the player determines whether or not a predetermined specific period has elapsed since the game medium entered the general winning area. It includes both a production that is difficult to grasp and a production that makes it easy for the player to grasp whether or not a predetermined specific period has elapsed since the game medium entered the general winning area. For example, as the former effect, there is an effect of outputting a sound effect for a relatively short period (for example, about 0.5 to 2 seconds) immediately after the game medium enters the general prize area, and as the latter effect, there is a general prize area. There is an effect that the character is continuously displayed on the image display device from immediately after the game medium enters until a predetermined specific period (for example, 1 minute) elapses.

The gaming machine of means B3 is
It is a gaming machine of means B2,
The notification effect is an effect of notifying whether or not the specific period is specified (the specific period (character display period) differs depending on which of the characters A to C is displayed).
It is a gaming machine characterized by this.
According to this, it is possible to enhance the interest of the game until the specific production is executed.

The gaming machine of means B4 is
A gaming machine of means B2 or means B3,
The specific period differs depending on the mode of the notification effect (the display period when the character A appears is 1 minute, the display period when the character B appears is 2 minutes, and the display when the character C appears. The period will be 5 minutes)
It is a gaming machine characterized by this.
According to this, it is possible to improve the interest by paying attention to the mode of the notification effect.
The configuration of the gaming machine according to the means B4 may be, for example, as follows.
First, based on the fact that the game medium has entered the general winning area, the effect control means (for example, the effect control CPU 90120) has a plurality of predetermined specific periods (for example, 1 minute, 2 minutes, and 3 minutes). One of the specific periods is selected, an effect mode (for example, the type of character to be displayed on the image display device 905) is determined based on the selected specific period, and a notification effect (character is displayed for a specific period) is determined according to the determined effect mode. The effect to be displayed) is executed.
For example, when the first specific period (for example, 1 minute) is selected, the first effect mode (for example, display of character A) is set as compared with the case where the second specific period (for example, 2 minutes) is selected. It is better to increase the determined ratio. Further, when the second specific period (for example, 2 minutes) is selected, the second effect mode (for example, the display of the character B) is set as compared with the case where the first specific period (for example, 1 minute) is selected. It is better to increase the determined ratio.
When the specific period and the effect mode of the notification effect correspond to one-to-one (1 minute for character A, 2 minutes for character B, and 3 minutes for character C). In), the effect control means (for example, the effect control CPU 90120) determines one of a plurality of predetermined effect modes based on the fact that the game medium has entered the general winning area. , It is preferable to execute the notification effect (the effect of displaying the character for a specific period) according to the determined effect mode.

The gaming machine of means B5 is
Any gaming machine selected from means B1 to means B4.
The variable display means has a starting condition based on the entry of the game medium into the starting winning area (a game ball wins a prize in the first starting winning opening when the first reserved storage number does not reach the upper limit value (effective starting winning). ), And the game ball won a prize (valid start prize) in the second start winning opening when the second reserved memory number has not reached the upper limit value), and then the start condition (controlled to the jackpot game state) The variable display is executed based on the fact that the variable display of the special figure game is not executed).
The effect executing means corresponds to a notice effect (in the start winning prize storage display area 905H, a variable display game to be notified) for announcing a display result of a variable display in which the start condition is satisfied but the start condition is not satisfied. It is a gaming machine (pachinko gaming machine 901 of the 47th effect form and the 49th effect form) characterized by executing the hold change effect of changing the display portion from the normal aspect to the special aspect as the specific effect.
According to this, the game medium enters the general prize area by creating a hobby of notifying the display result of the variable display for which the start condition is not satisfied when the game medium enters the general prize area. It is possible to further enhance the interest from the beginning to the execution of the specific production.

The gaming machine of means B6 is
It is a gaming machine of means B5,
Hold information corresponding to the variable display in which the start condition is satisfied but the start condition is not satisfied (the display color is changed in response to the existence of the variable display game in which the start condition is satisfied but the start condition is not satisfied. Further provided with a hold information display control means (CPU 90120 for effect control) for displaying the display portion) on the display device (image display device 905).
The advance notice effect is to announce the display result of the variable display corresponding to the hold information according to the mode of the hold information (if the start winning prize determination result designation command is a command to specify "big hit", the notice effect is applicable. It is characterized by a pending change effect that changes the display part corresponding to the command from a normal mode (for example, blue or red) to a special mode (for example, gold) at a higher rate than the command for designating "off". It is a game machine.
According to this, it is possible to further enhance the interest of notifying the display result of the variable display for which the start condition is not satisfied when the game medium enters the general winning area.

The gaming machine of means B7 is
It is a gaming machine of means B6,
By displaying the objects (characters A to C) on the display device, the effect executing means can clearly notify that the state is after the game medium has entered the general winning area (to the general winning opening). (Any of the characters A to C will appear immediately after winning the prize) Perform the notification effect and
The advance notice effect is an effect that the player can recognize when the object changes the mode of the reserved information (a mode of a display portion corresponding to the reserved special figure game in which the displayed character performs some action). It is a gaming machine characterized in that it is an effect of changing from a normal mode to a special mode).
According to this, it becomes possible to suggest the entry of the game medium into the general winning area and the advance notice of the display result of the variable display for which the start condition is not satisfied by the common object, and the game to the general winning area. It is possible to further enhance the interest from the entry of the medium to the execution of the specific production.
Specifically, the player can recognize that the object changes the mode of the hold information by making the effect that the mode of the hold information changes according to the change of the display mode of the object (for example, a predetermined action). Become.

The gaming machine of means B8 is
Any gaming machine selected from means B1 to means B7.
A gaming machine characterized in that the specific effect is not executed unless the predetermined condition is satisfied in the specific period (the specific effect F and the specific effect G are not executed if the predetermined condition is not satisfied within the character display period). be.
According to this, it is possible to make the player interested in whether or not the predetermined condition is satisfied in a specific period.

The gaming machine of means B9 is
Any gaming machine selected from means B1 to means B8.
There are a plurality of the general winning areas (four of the first general winning opening 9050A to the fourth general winning opening 9050D).
The specific period differs depending on the general winning area in which the gaming medium has entered (when winning the first general winning opening 9050A or the second general winning opening 9050B, 1 minute, 2 minutes, or 5 minutes from the general winning opening is specified. It can be a period (characters A to C can appear), but if you win the 3rd general prize 50C or the 4th general prize opening 9050D, only 5 minutes from the general prize can be a specific period (only character C can appear). It is a gaming machine characterized by being able to appear)).
According to this, it is possible to improve the interest by paying attention to which general winning area the game medium enters.

Further, the embodiment for carrying out the invention described later includes the inventions relating to the means B10 to the means B21 shown below.

The gaming machine of means B10 is
A gaming machine (pachinko game) having a starting winning area (first starting winning opening, second starting winning opening) and a general winning area (first to fourth general winning openings 9050A to 9050D) into which a game medium (game ball) can enter. Machine 901)
Variable display when the game medium enters the starting winning area (first starting winning opening, second starting winning opening) (variable display of the first special figure, variable display of the second special figure, variable display of the decorative symbol) (1st special symbol display device 904A, 2nd special symbol display device 904B, image display device 905) and
A granting means (game control microcomputer 90100) that grants a specific value (prize ball, score) when a game medium enters the general prize area, and
Motion detection means (operation button 9030 and effect control CPU 90120) capable of detecting the player's motion, and
When the player's motion (continuous hitting operation, each symbol stop operation, all symbol stop operation) is detected by the motion detecting means after the gaming medium has entered the general winning area, a specific effect (cut-in notice effect, pseudo-ream) is detected. It is a gaming machine (pachinko gaming machine 901 of the 50th production form to the 53rd production form) characterized by being provided with an effect execution means (CPU 90120 for effect control) capable of executing a notice effect and a chance eye advance notice effect. ..
According to this, after the game medium enters the general prize area, the specific effect is executed triggered by the action of the player, so that the interest when the game medium enters the general prize area can be enhanced.

The gaming machine of means B11 is
It is a gaming machine of means B10,
The state after the game medium has entered the general winning area is identifiablely notified (in the 50th effect mode and the 51st effect mode, the button icon 904000 is increased for each prize in the general winning opening, 52nd. In the effect form and the 53rd effect form, the advance notice effect (“cut-in”, “pseudo-ream”, “chance eye”) that can be executed for each prize in the general winning opening is determined, and the character 904000a according to the determination result is determined. The gaming machine is further provided with a notification effect execution means (effect control CPU 90120) for executing a notification effect (displayed in ~ 904000c).
According to this, the player can recognize that the game medium has entered the general winning area.

The gaming machine of means B12 is
It is a gaming machine of means B11,
Depending on the type of operation (continuous striking operation, each symbol stop operation, all symbol stop operation) for enabling the specific effect, the mode of the notification effect (character 904000a of "cut-in", "pseudo-ream"). It is a gaming machine characterized in that the characters 904000b and the characters 904000c of "chance eyes" are different.
According to this, the player can recognize which type of operation enables the specific effect to be executed.

The gaming machine of means B13 is
A gaming machine of means B11 or means B12,
There are a plurality of general winning areas (1st to 4th general winning openings 9050A to 9050D),
The rate at which the notification effect is executed differs depending on which general prize area the game medium has entered (in the 52nd effect mode and the 53rd effect mode, the first general prize opening 9050A of the left game area 9010A or When the second general winning opening 9050B is won, the notification is given at a higher rate than when the third general winning opening 9050C or the fourth general winning opening 9050D of the right gaming area 9010B is won). It is a game machine.
According to this, it is possible to improve the interest by paying attention to which general winning area the game medium enters.

The gaming machine of means B14 is
Any gaming machine selected from means B11 to means B13.
There are a plurality of general winning areas (1st to 4th general winning openings 9050A to 9050D),
The mode of the notification effect differs depending on which general winning area the game medium has entered (in the 52nd effect mode and the 53rd effect mode, the first general winning opening 9050A or the second general winning opening 9050B is won. In this case, either the character 904000a of "cut-in" or the character 904000b of "pseudo-ren" can be displayed, and if the third general winning opening 9050C or the fourth general winning opening 9050D is won, " It is a gaming machine characterized in that it can display either the character 904000a of "cut-in" or the character 904000c of "chance eye").
According to this, it is possible to improve the interest by paying attention to which general winning area the game medium enters.

The gaming machine of means B15 is
Any gaming machine selected from means B11 to means B14.
The rate at which the notification effect is executed differs depending on the state when the game medium enters the general prize area (in the 52nd effect mode and the 53rd effect mode, the general prize opening is won in the normal state. In the case (when winning the first general winning opening 9050A or the second general winning opening 9050B of the left game area 9010A), when the general winning opening is won in the probable change state or the time saving state (the first of the right game area 9010B). 3) If you win a prize in the general winning opening 9050C or the 4th general winning opening 9050D), you will be notified at a higher rate)
It is a gaming machine characterized by this.
According to this, it is possible to appropriately change the interests according to the state of the game.

The gaming machine of means B16 is
Any gaming machine selected from means B11 to means B15.
The mode of the notification effect differs depending on the state when the game medium enters the general winning area (in the 51st effect mode and the 53rd effect mode, in the normal state, the characters 904000a of "cut-in" and "pseudo". The character 904000b of "ream" can be displayed, and the character 904000a of "cut-in" and the character 904000c of "chance eye" can be displayed in the probabilistic state or the time saving state.)
It is a gaming machine characterized by this.
According to this, it is possible to appropriately change the interests according to the state of the game.

The gaming machine of means B17 is
Any gaming machine selected from means B10 to means B16.
The effect executing means can execute the specific effect when the predetermined operation is performed after the game medium has entered the general winning area a plurality of times (generally in the 50th effect mode and the 51st effect mode). Pseudo-repeated notice can be executed when the winning opening is won twice or more, and chance eye notice can be executed when the general winning opening is won three or more times.)
It is a gaming machine characterized by this.
According to this, it is possible to be interested in the number of entry of the game medium into the general winning area.

The gaming machine of means B18 is
Any gaming machine selected from means B10 to means B17.
There are a plurality of general winning areas (1st to 4th general winning openings 9050A to 9050D),
The execution rate of the specific effect differs depending on which general winning area the game medium has entered (in the 52nd effect mode and the 53rd effect mode, the first general winning opening 9050A or the second general winning opening 9050B is used. If a prize is won, the advance notice effect will be executed at a higher rate than if the third general winning opening 9050C or the fourth general winning opening 9050D is won.)
It is a gaming machine characterized by this.
According to this, it is possible to improve the interest by paying attention to which general winning area the game medium enters.

The gaming machine of means B19 is
Any gaming machine selected from means B10 to means B18.
There are a plurality of general winning areas (1st to 4th general winning openings 9050A to 9050D),
The type of specific effect that can be executed differs depending on which general prize area the game medium has entered (in the 52nd effect form and the 53rd effect form, the first general prize opening 9050A or the second general prize opening). If the 9050B is won, either the cut-in notice effect or the pseudo-continuous notice effect can be executed, and if the third general prize opening 9050C or the fourth general prize opening 9050D is won, the cut-in notice effect is produced. And any of the chance eye notice effects can be executed)
It is a gaming machine characterized by this.
According to this, it is possible to improve the interest by paying attention to which general winning area the game medium enters.

The gaming machine of means B20 is
Any gaming machine selected from means B10 to means B19.
The execution rate of the specific effect differs depending on the state when the game medium enters the general winning area (in the 52nd effect mode and the 53rd effect mode, when the general winning opening is won in the normal state (in the 52nd effect mode and the 53rd effect mode). In the case of winning the first general winning opening 9050A or the second general winning opening 9050B of the left game area 9010A, the general winning opening is won in the probable change state or the time saving state (the third general of the right game area 9010B). (When winning a prize in the winning opening 9050C or the 4th general winning opening 9050D), a notification is given to enable the specific effect to be executed at a higher rate than the winning opening 9050C).
It is a gaming machine characterized by this.
According to this, it is possible to appropriately change the interests according to the state of the game.

The gaming machine of means B21 is
Any gaming machine selected from means B10 to means B20.
The types of specific effects that can be executed differ depending on the state when the game medium enters the general winning area (in the 51st effect form and the 53rd effect form, the cut-in notice effect and the pseudo-ream in the normal state. Either of the notice effects can be executed, and either the cut-in notice effect or the chance eye notice effect can be executed in the probable change state or the time saving state).
It is a gaming machine characterized by this.
According to this, it is possible to appropriately change the interests according to the state of the game.

Further, the embodiment for carrying out the invention described later includes the inventions related to the means B22 to the means B28 shown below.

The gaming machine of means B22 is
A gaming machine (pachinko game) having a starting winning area (first starting winning opening, second starting winning opening) and a general winning area (first to fourth general winning openings 9050A to 9050D) into which a game medium (game ball) can enter. Machine 901)
Variable display when the game medium enters the starting winning area (first starting winning opening, second starting winning opening) (variable display of the first special figure, variable display of the second special figure, variable display of the decorative symbol) (1st special symbol display device 904A, 2nd special symbol display device 904B, image display device 905) and
A granting means (game control microcomputer 90100) that grants a specific value (prize ball, score) when a game medium enters the general prize area, and
It is equipped with a specific effect execution means (CPU90120 for effect control) capable of executing a specific effect (specific effect C: point granting effect, specific effect A: fluctuation result notice effect, specific effect B: look-ahead notice effect).
When the variable display is being executed (during the period during which the variable display of the special symbol is being executed, within the period during which the variable display of the special symbol is being executed or is determined to be executed), the general winning area It is also determined that the variable display of the special symbol is not executed and is executed when the game medium enters the machine and when the variable display is not executed (during the period when the variable display of the special symbol is not executed). Pachinko machines (27th to 30th pachinko) characterized in that the rate at which the specific effect is executed differs between when the game medium enters the general winning area (within the period during which the game is not played). It is a gaming machine 901).
According to this, the execution ratio of the specific effect differs between the case where the variable display is executed and the case where the variable display is not executed, so that the interest when the game medium enters the general winning area is enhanced. Can be done.

The gaming machine of means B23 is
It is a gaming machine of means B22,
Further provided with an advantageous state control means (game control microcomputer 90100) capable of controlling an advantageous state (big hit game state) advantageous to the player when the display result of the variable display becomes a specific display result (big hit symbol). ,
The specific effect is an effect not related to the display result of the variable display (specific effect C: point-giving effect) in a gaming machine (27th effect form, 29th effect form pachinko gaming machine 901). be.
According to this, even when the variable display is not executed, it is possible to appropriately enhance the interest when the game medium enters the general winning area.

The gaming machine of means B24 is
It is a gaming machine of means B22,
Further provided with an advantageous state control means (game control microcomputer 90100) capable of controlling an advantageous state (big hit game state) advantageous to the player when the display result of the variable display becomes a specific display result (big hit symbol). ,
The specific effect is an effect related to the display result of the variable display (specific effect A: variable result notice effect, specific effect B: look-ahead notice effect), and the general winning area when the variable display is not executed. It is a gaming machine (pachinko gaming machine 901 in the 28th effect mode and the 30th effect form), which is characterized in that it is not executed when the game medium enters the machine.
According to this, when the variable display is executed, it is possible to further enhance the interest when the game medium enters the general winning area.

The gaming machine of means B25 is
A gaming machine (pachinko game) having a starting winning area (first starting winning opening, second starting winning opening) and a general winning area (first to fourth general winning openings 9050A to 9050D) into which a game medium (game ball) can enter. Machine 901)
Variable display when the game medium enters the starting winning area (first starting winning opening, second starting winning opening) (variable display of the first special figure, variable display of the second special figure, variable display of the decorative symbol) (1st special symbol display device 904A, 2nd special symbol display device 904B, image display device 905) and
A granting means (game control microcomputer 90100) that grants a specific value (prize ball, score) when a game medium enters the general prize area, and
It is equipped with a specific effect execution means (CPU90120 for effect control) capable of executing a specific effect (specific effect C: point granting effect, specific effect A: fluctuation result notice effect, specific effect B: look-ahead notice effect).
When the variable display is being executed (during the period during which the variable display of the special symbol is being executed, within the period during which the variable display of the special symbol is being executed or is determined to be executed), the general winning area It is also determined that the variable display of the special symbol is not executed and is executed when the game medium enters the machine and when the variable display is not executed (during the period when the variable display of the special symbol is not executed). A gaming machine (31st effect form and 32nd effect form pachinko gaming machine 901) characterized in that different specific effects are executed when the game medium enters the general winning area (within a period not specified). ).
According to this, it is possible to enhance the interest when the game medium enters the general winning area by different specific effects depending on whether the variable display is executed and the variable display is not executed. ..

The gaming machine of means B26 is
It is a gaming machine of means B25,
Further provided with an advantageous state control means (game control microcomputer 90100) capable of controlling an advantageous state (big hit game state) advantageous to the player when the display result of the variable display becomes a specific display result (big hit symbol). ,
When the game medium enters the general winning area while the variable display is being executed, an effect related to the display result of the variable display (specific effect A: variation result notice effect, specific effect B: look-ahead notice effect). Is executed as the specific effect,
When the gaming medium enters the general winning area when the variable display is not executed, an effect not related to the display result of the variable display (specific effect C: point-giving effect) is executed as the specific effect. It is a characteristic gaming machine (pachinko gaming machine 901 in the 31st effect form and the 32nd effect form).
According to this, when the variable display is executed, the interest when the game medium enters the general winning area can be further enhanced, and even when the variable display is not executed, the general winning area can be further enhanced. It is possible to appropriately enhance the interest when the game medium enters the game.

The gaming machine of means B27 is
Any gaming machine selected from means B22 to means B26 (pachinko gaming machine 901 in the 27th effect form to the 32nd effect form).
The rate at which the specific effect is executed differs depending on the state when the game medium enters the general winning area while the variable display is being executed (for example, a special figure game when winning a prize in the general winning opening). The classification of whether or not is executed, the classification of the number of reserved memories at the time of winning the general winning opening, and the gaming state at the time of winning the general winning opening is the normal state, or the probabilistic state or the time saving state. Perform specific effects at different rates depending on the classification, etc.)
It is a gaming machine characterized by this.
According to this, it becomes possible to make an interest in the state when the game medium enters the general prize area, and it is possible to further enhance the interest when the game medium enters the general prize area.

The gaming machine of means B28 is
Any gaming machine selected from means B22 to means B27 (pachinko gaming machine 901 in the 27th effect form to the 32nd effect form).
When the variable display is executed, different specific effects are executed according to the state when the game medium enters the general winning area (for example, the special figure game is executed when the general winning opening is won. Whether or not the game is in the normal state, the number of stored memories at the time of winning the general winning opening, and whether the gaming state at the time of winning the general winning opening is in the normal state, or in the probabilistic state or the shortened time state. Execute different types of specific effects according to the classification, etc.)
It is a gaming machine characterized by this.
According to this, it becomes possible to make an interest in the state when the game medium enters the general prize area, and it is possible to further enhance the interest when the game medium enters the general prize area.

Further, the embodiment for carrying out the invention described later includes the inventions related to the means B29 to the means B39 shown below. Conventionally, as shown in Japanese Patent Application Laid-Open No. 2015-139628 (FIG. 74), a winning rate for a starting winning opening in a gaming machine is calculated, and a character wearing different color clothes is used according to the calculated winning rate. A gaming machine that executes an effect display to be displayed has been proposed. However, it is necessary not only to display information on the number of game media that have entered the entry area such as the start winning opening on the information display means, but also to make the information easier to see. The inventions according to the means B29 to the means B39 have been made in view of the above circumstances, and an object thereof is to make it easy to visually recognize information regarding the number of gaming media that have entered the approach area.

The invention according to means B29 is
It is a gaming machine (pachinko gaming machine 901) having an entry area (first starting winning opening, second starting winning opening, first to fourth general winning openings 9050A to 9050D, etc.) into which a game medium (game ball) can enter. hand,
Information that can display entry information regarding the number of game media that have entered the entry area (for example, the number of winnings in the general winning opening, the number of winnings in the first starting winning opening, the number of winnings in the second starting winning opening, etc.). Equipped with a display means (image display device 905)
The information display means displays effect information (for example, a decorative symbol, a fourth symbol, etc.) different from the approach information in a region where the visibility of the approach information is not hindered (as illustrated in FIG. 83, each winning opening). It is a gaming machine characterized in that it is displayed in the second area β), which is different from the first area α in which the number of winnings is displayed.
According to this, it is easy to visually recognize the approach information regarding the number of game media that have entered the approach area.

The invention according to the means B30 is
It is a gaming machine of means B29,
The information display means can display the approach information regardless of the mode of the effect information (as illustrated in FIG. 83, regardless of whether or not the decorative symbol is variably displayed, and the fourth symbol. Regardless of whether or not is variablely displayed, the number of winnings to the general winning opening, the number of winnings to the first starting winning opening, the number of winnings to the second starting winning opening, etc. are displayed in the first area α. The displayed number of winnings can be updated according to the winnings to each winning opening.)
It is a gaming machine characterized by this.
According to this, the approach information can be visually recognized regardless of the mode of the effect information.

The invention according to means B31 is
It is a gaming machine (pachinko gaming machine 901) having an entry area (first starting winning opening, second starting winning opening, first to fourth general winning openings 9050A to 9050D, etc.) into which a game medium (game ball) can enter. hand,
Error detecting means (abnormality detecting sensor group 9026) for detecting an error (for example, magnetic abnormality, vibration abnormality, radio wave abnormality, etc.) and
Information that can display entry information regarding the number of game media that have entered the entry area (for example, the number of winnings in the general winning opening, the number of winnings in the first starting winning opening, the number of winnings in the second starting winning opening, etc.). A display means (image display device 905) is provided.
The information display means transfers error information (for example, an error message) notifying the occurrence of the error to each winning opening as illustrated in FIGS. 83 and 84, in which the visibility of the entry information is not hindered. It is a gaming machine characterized in that it is displayed in the second area β), which is different from the first area α in which the number of winnings is displayed.
According to this, it is easy to visually recognize the approach information regarding the number of game media that have entered the approach area.

The invention according to means B32 is
It is a gaming machine of means B31.
The information display means can display the entry information even when the error information is displayed (as illustrated in FIG. 84, regardless of whether or not an error message is displayed, a general winning opening. The number of winnings, the number of winnings in the first starting winning opening, the number of winnings in the second starting winning opening, etc. are displayed in the first area α, and are displayed according to the winnings in each winning opening. The number of winning prizes can be updated)
It is a gaming machine characterized by this.
According to this, the approach information can be visually recognized even when the error information is displayed.

The invention according to means B33 is
It is a gaming machine (pachinko gaming machine 901) having an entry area (first starting winning opening, second starting winning opening, first to fourth general winning openings 9050A to 9050D, etc.) into which a game medium (game ball) can enter. hand,
Information that can display entry information regarding the number of game media that have entered the entry area (for example, the number of winnings in the general winning opening, the number of winnings in the first starting winning opening, the number of winnings in the second starting winning opening, etc.). Equipped with a display means (image display device 905)
The information display means displays the display result of the variable display (for example, the display result of the definite decorative symbol (final stop symbol) or the fourth symbol) executed based on the entry of the gaming medium into the start area, as the entry information. The gaming machine is characterized in that it is displayed in an area where the visibility of the player is not obstructed (as illustrated in FIG. 83, a second area β different from the first area α in which the number of winnings to each winning opening is displayed). Is.
According to this, it is easy to visually recognize the approach information regarding the number of game media that have entered the approach area.

The invention according to means B34 is
It is a gaming machine of means B33,
The information display means can display the approach information even when the variable display is being executed (as illustrated in FIG. 83, regardless of whether or not the decorative symbol is variablely displayed, and also. Regardless of whether or not the 4th symbol is variably displayed, the number of winnings to the general winning opening, the number of winnings to the 1st starting winning opening, the number of winnings to the 2nd starting winning opening, etc. are set to the 1st area α. It can be displayed and the displayed number of winnings can be updated according to the winnings to each winning opening.)
It is a gaming machine characterized by this.
According to this, the approach information can be visually recognized even when the variable display is being executed.

The invention according to means B35 is
Any gaming machine selected from means B29 to means B34.
Operable operation means (operation button 9030) and
Display setting means for setting whether or not to display the approach information on the information display means according to the operation of the operation means (as illustrated in FIG. 46, to each winning opening based on the setting by the operation button 9030. The gaming machine is further provided with an effect control CPU 90120) for setting whether or not to display the winning information related to the number of winnings in the first area α.
According to this, it is possible to arbitrarily set whether or not to display the approach information.

The invention according to the means B36 is
Any gaming machine selected from means B29 to means B35.
Operation means (operation button 9030) that can be operated by the player,
The aggregation period setting means (as illustrated in FIG. 87, the effect control CPU 90120 that sets the aggregation period based on the setting by the operation button 9030) that sets the aggregation period of the approach information according to the operation of the operation means. It is a gaming machine characterized by further providing.
According to this, the aggregation period can be set according to the judgment of the player.

The invention according to means B37 is
Any gaming machine selected from means B29 to means B36.
Further equipped with a game state control means (game control microcomputer 90100) capable of controlling a game state (big hit game state, probability change state, time saving state, low base state, high base state, etc.).
The information display means can display the approach information according to the gaming state (as illustrated in FIG. 86, the number of winnings in the low base state and the number of winnings in the high base state can be displayed separately. Is)
It is a gaming machine characterized by this.
According to this, it is possible to grasp the approach information according to the gaming state.

The invention according to means B38 is
It is a gaming machine of means B37,
Variable display means for executing variable display (variable display of the first special figure, variable display of the second special figure) based on the game medium entering the starting area (first starting winning opening, second starting winning opening). (1st special symbol display device 904A, 2nd special symbol display device 904B) is further provided.
The game state control means has a low frequency state (a low base state in which the high opening control targeting the second start winning opening is not executed) and a high frequency state (the first) in which the frequency at which the game medium enters the start region is different. 2 It is possible to control to the high base state where the high opening control for the starting winning opening is executed).
The information display means has the entry information (such as the number of general prizes in the low base state exemplified in FIG. 86) regarding the period controlled to the low frequency state and the entry regarding the period controlled to the high frequency state. It is a gaming machine characterized in that it can display information (general winning numbers in a high base state exemplified in FIG. 86, etc.).
According to this, it is possible to grasp the approach information according to the low frequency state and the approach information according to the high frequency state.

The invention according to means B39 is
Any gaming machine selected from means B29 to means B38.
Notification is performed when the entry information satisfies a predetermined condition (as illustrated in FIG. 87, when the number of winnings per set aggregation period does not reach a predetermined reference value, a notification to that effect is given. The gaming machine is further provided with a notification means (image display device 905) (which displays a message).
According to this, it becomes possible to easily grasp that the approach information satisfies the predetermined condition.

Further, the embodiment for carrying out the invention described later includes the inventions related to the means B40 and the means B41 shown below. Conventionally, as shown in Japanese Patent Application Laid-Open No. 2015-139628 (FIGS. 73 and 74), when a player accepts a game start by inputting a password, the winning rate to the starting winning opening in the gaming machine is calculated. , A gaming machine that executes an effect display that displays characters dressed in different colors according to the calculated winning rate has been proposed. However, it has not been possible for only a person other than the player (for example, a clerk at the game hall) to be able to confirm the information regarding the fact that the game medium has entered the entry area such as the start winning opening. The invention according to the means B40 and the means B41 is made in view of the above circumstances, and is intended to allow only a person other than the player (for example, a clerk of the game hall) to confirm the information.

The invention according to the means B40 is
A gaming machine (for example, a pachinko machine) having an entry area (for example, a first start winning opening, a second starting winning opening, first to fourth general winning openings 9050A-9050D, etc.) into which a game medium (for example, a game ball) can enter. It is a gaming machine 901),
A granting means (for example, a game control microcomputer 90100) for imparting a game value (for example, a prize ball) based on the fact that the game medium has passed through the approach area.
Specific operating means (for example, mode changeover switch 9031, reset button) that cannot be operated by the player,
A notification means for notifying cumulative value information (for example, the number of payouts of each general winning opening, the number of payouts of each starting winning opening, and the total number of payouts) regarding the cumulative value of the game value given by the granting means (for example, the number of payouts of each general winning opening). For example, an image display device 905) is provided.
The notification means notifies the cumulative value information based on the operation of the specific operation means (for example, when the mode changeover switch 9031 is operated to enter the maintenance mode, the information of the winning number management table is displayed as an image display device. Display on 905)
It is a gaming machine characterized by this.
According to this, only a person other than the player (for example, a clerk at the game hall) can confirm the information.

The "specific operating means that cannot be operated by the player" may be, for example, any means that can be operated by a clerk at the game hall or an inspector / inspector of the gaming machine.

The invention according to the means B41 is
It is a gaming machine of means B40,
It is provided with an effect executing means (for example, an effect control CPU 90120) for executing an effect related to a game.
The notification means notifies the cumulative value information according to the mode of the effect executed by the effect execution means (for example, the character appearing during the advance notice effect or the reach effect outputs the information of the winning number management table). (Displays aloud and outputs voice)
It is a gaming machine characterized by this.
According to this, it is possible to easily recognize which type of gaming machine information is from the mode of notification.

Further, the embodiment for carrying out the invention described later includes the inventions related to the means B42 to the means B51 shown below. Conventionally, as shown in Japanese Patent Application Laid-Open No. 2014-73187 (FIG. 108), when a game ball enters a normal winning opening (general winning area), the number of balls entered is counted up and displayed on the effect display device. , A gaming machine has been proposed in which when the number of counts being counted up reaches the number of execution opportunities determined by lottery, the player is informed that a villa in memory will occur. In the gaming machine shown in Japanese Patent Application Laid-Open No. 2014-73187, when a gaming ball enters a normal winning opening, the number of balls entered is uniformly counted up and displayed one by one. Therefore, in a gaming machine having such a general winning area, there is room to further enhance the interest when the gaming medium enters the general winning area. The inventions according to the means B42 to the means B51 have been made in view of the above circumstances, and an object thereof is to enhance the interest of a game in a gaming machine having a general winning area.

The gaming machine of means B42 is
A gaming machine (pachinko game) having a starting winning area (first starting winning opening, second starting winning opening) and a general winning area (first to fourth general winning openings 9050A to 9050D) into which a game medium (game ball) can enter. Machine 901)
Variable display when the game medium enters the start winning area (first start winning opening, second starting entrance examination opening) (variable display of the first special figure, variable display of the second special figure, variable display of the decorative symbol) (1st special symbol display device 904A, 2nd special symbol display device 904B, image display device 905) and
A granting means (game control microcomputer 90100) for imparting a specific value (prize ball, score) when a game medium enters the general prize area, and
A specific effect (specific effect D in which the filling area 902100a in the gauge image 902100 is gradually increased from a minimum of 0 stages to a maximum of 10 stages) is provided in which the effect mode is gradually changed according to the entry of the game medium into the general winning area. A specific effect executing means (CPU 90120 for effect control) that can be executed is provided.
The specific according to the state when the game medium enters the general winning area (division between the period during which the variable display of the special symbol is executed and the period during which the variable display of the special symbol is not executed). The rate at which the effect mode changes in the effect is different (the rate at which the effect of increasing the filling area 902100a in the gauge image 902100 by one step is different) is different.
It is a gaming machine (pachinko gaming machine 901 of the 33rd effect form to the 37th effect form).
According to this, the rate at which the production mode changes in a specific effect differs depending on the state when the game medium enters the general prize area, thereby enhancing the interest when the game medium enters the general prize area. Can be done.

The gaming machine of means B43 is
It is a gaming machine of means B42,
The variable display means (image display device 905) executes the variable display (variable display of decorative symbols) for a predetermined period (variable display period corresponding to the variable pattern designation command received by the effect control CPU 90120). To do
Depending on the remaining period of the variable display when the gaming medium enters the general winning area (the case where the remaining time until the definite decorative symbol is derived and displayed is 10 seconds or more and the case where the remaining time is less than 10 seconds). , The gaming machine (the pachinko gaming machine 901 of the 34th effect form) characterized in that the rate of change of the effect mode is different in the specific effect.
According to this, it is possible to further enhance the interest of the specific effect by changing the rate at which the effect mode changes in the specific effect according to the remaining period of the variable display when the game medium enters the general prize area.

In the gaming machine of means B43
The remaining period of the variable display executed when the game medium enters the general winning area (the case where the remaining time until the definite decorative symbol is derived and displayed is 10 seconds or more and the case where the remaining time is less than 10 seconds). ) And the display result (big hit symbol, missed symbol) of the variable display executed when the game medium enters the general winning area, so that the rate at which the effect mode changes in the specific effect is different. May be. Specifically, when the remaining time of the variable display of the special symbol executed when the game medium enters the general winning area is within a predetermined range (for example, less than 10 seconds), the display result of the variable display is Correspondingly, the rate at which the effect mode changes in the specific effect may be different (for example, in the case of a big hit symbol, it changes at a high rate, and in the case of an out-of-order symbol, it changes at a lower rate). ..

The gaming machine of means B44 is
A gaming machine of means B42 or means B43,
The variable display means (image display device 905) ends the start condition (variable display based on the previous start prize) after the game medium enters the start prize area (first start prize opening, second start prize opening). The variable display (variable display of the first special figure, variable display of the second special figure, variable display of the decorative symbol) is executed based on the establishment of the fact that the game is not controlled even in the big hit game state. ,
When the display result of the variable display becomes a specific display result (big hit symbol), an advantageous state control means (game control microcomputer 90100) capable of controlling an advantageous state (big hit game state) advantageous to the player, and
A notice effect (pre-reading notice effect) for notifying that the display result of the variable display will be a specific display result is executed before the start condition of the variable display is satisfied (variable display that is the target of the pre-reading notice effect). Further equipped with a notice effect executing means (CPU 90120 for effect control) to be executed before).
The period from when the gaming medium enters the general winning area until the variable display, which is the target of the advance notice effect, is executed (when the effect control CPU 90120 receives the general winning opening designation command, the target of the look-ahead advance notice effect). A gaming machine characterized in that the rate at which the effect mode changes in the specific effect differs depending on the variable display number of times until the variable display is executed (35th effect form pachinko game machine). 901).
According to this, the rate at which the effect mode changes in the specific effect differs depending on the period from the entry of the game medium into the general winning area to the execution of the variable display that is the target of the advance notice effect. It is possible to further enhance the interest of the production.

In the gaming machine of means B44
The period from the entry of the game medium into the general winning area to the execution of the variable display that is the target of the advance notice effect (the target of the look-ahead advance notice effect when the effect control CPU 90120 receives the general prize opening designation command). According to the variable display number of times until the variable display is executed) and the display result (big hit symbol, missed symbol) of the variable display that is the target of the advance notice effect, the effect is produced in the specific effect. The rate at which the aspects change may be different. Specifically, the variable display count until the variable display (variable display that is the target of the look-ahead notice) that is the target of the notice effect when the game medium enters the general winning area is executed is within a predetermined range. In the case of within (for example, twice or less), the rate at which the effect mode changes in the specific effect differs depending on the display result of the variable display that is the target of the advance notice effect (high in the case of a big hit symbol). It changes at a rate, and if it becomes an outlier, it changes at a lower rate).

The gaming machine of means B45 is
Any gaming machine selected from means B42 to means B44.
A reach effect executing means (CPU 90120 for effect control) that executes a reach effect in association with the variable display (variable display of the first special figure, variable display of the second special figure, variable display of the decorative symbol) is further provided.
When the gaming medium enters the general winning area before the execution of the reach effect (when the timing when the game ball wins the general winning opening is before the reach state is established in the reach fluctuation), after the execution of the reach effect. The rate at which the production mode changes in the specific effect differs depending on whether the game medium enters the general prize area (when the timing at which the game ball wins the general prize opening is after the reach state is established in the reach fluctuation). It is a gaming machine (Pachinko gaming machine 901 in the 36th production form).
According to this, the effect mode changes in the specific effect depending on whether the game medium enters the general winning area before the reach effect is executed or the game medium enters the general prize area after the reach effect is executed. By having different ratios, it is possible to further enhance the interest of the specific production.

The gaming machine of means B46 is
Any gaming machine selected from means B42 to means B45.
It has a plurality of the general winning areas (first to fourth general winning openings 9050A to 9050D).
Depending on the general winning area in which the gaming medium has entered (when the game ball wins in any of the second general winning opening 9050B and the third general winning opening 9050C, and the first general winning opening 9050A and the fourth general winning opening 9050D). It is a pachinko gaming machine (37th pachinko gaming machine 901) characterized in that the rate at which the effect mode changes in the specific effect is different depending on whether the game ball wins a prize in any of the above cases).
According to this, it is possible to further enhance the interest of the specific production by changing the rate at which the production mode changes in the specific production according to the general winning area in which the game medium has entered.

The gaming machine of means B47 is
A gaming machine (pachinko game) having a starting winning area (first starting winning opening, second starting winning opening) and a general winning area (first to fourth general winning openings 9050A to 9050D) into which a game medium (game ball) can enter. Machine 901)
Variable display when the game medium enters the start winning area (first start winning opening, second starting entrance examination opening) (variable display of the first special figure, variable display of the second special figure, variable display of the decorative symbol) (1st special symbol display device 904A, 2nd special symbol display device 904B, image display device 905) and
A granting means (game control microcomputer 90100) that grants a specific value (prize ball, score) when a game medium enters the general prize area, and
A specific effect (specific effect D in which the filling area 902100a in the gauge image 902100 is gradually increased from a minimum of 0 stages to a maximum of 10 stages) is provided in which the effect mode is gradually changed according to the entry of the game medium into the general winning area. A specific effect executing means (CPU 90120 for effect control) that can be executed is provided.
The specific according to the state when the game medium enters the general winning area (division between the period during which the variable display of the special symbol is executed and the period during which the variable display of the special symbol is not executed). The stages in which the production mode changes in the production are different (the number of stages (+1 to +3) for increasing the filling region 902100a in the gauge image 902100 is different).
It is a gaming machine (pachinko gaming machine 901 of the 38th production form to the 42nd production form).
According to this, the stage at which the production mode changes in the specific effect differs depending on the state when the game medium enters the general prize area, thereby enhancing the interest when the game medium enters the general prize area. Can be done.

The gaming machine of means B48 is
It is a gaming machine of means B47,
The variable display means (image display device 905) executes the variable display (variable display of decorative symbols) for a predetermined period (variable display period corresponding to the variable pattern designation command received by the effect control CPU 90120). To do
Depending on the remaining period of the variable display when the gaming medium enters the general winning area (the case where the remaining time until the definite decorative symbol is derived and displayed is 10 seconds or more and the case where the remaining time is less than 10 seconds). It is a gaming machine (Pachinko gaming machine 901 of the 39th effect form) characterized in that the stage in which the effect mode changes is different in the specific effect.
According to this, the stage in which the production mode changes in the specific production differs depending on the remaining period of the variable display when the game medium enters the general winning area, so that the interest of the specific production can be further enhanced.

In the gaming machine of means B48
The remaining period of the variable display executed when the game medium enters the general winning area (the case where the remaining time until the definite decorative symbol is derived and displayed is 10 seconds or more and the case where the remaining time is less than 10 seconds). ) And the display result (big hit symbol, missed symbol) of the variable display executed when the game medium enters the general winning area, so that the stage at which the effect mode changes in the specific effect is different. May be. Specifically, when the remaining time of the variable display of the special symbol executed when the game medium enters the general winning area is within a predetermined range (for example, less than 10 seconds), the display result of the variable display is Depending on the specific effect, the stage in which the effect mode changes is different (for example, in the case of a big hit symbol, the number of stages changes, and in the case of an out-of-order symbol, the number of stages changes less than that). good.

The gaming machine of means B49 is
A gaming machine of means B47 or means B48.
The variable display means (image display device 905) ends the start condition (variable display based on the previous start prize) after the game medium enters the start prize area (first start prize opening, second start prize opening). The variable display (variable display of the first special figure, variable display of the second special figure, variable display of the decorative symbol) is executed based on the establishment of the fact that the game is not controlled even in the big hit game state. ,
When the display result of the variable display becomes a specific display result (big hit symbol), an advantageous state control means (game control microcomputer 90100) capable of controlling an advantageous state (big hit game state) advantageous to the player, and
A notice effect (pre-reading notice effect) for notifying that the display result of the variable display will be a specific display result is executed before the start condition of the variable display is satisfied (variable display that is the target of the pre-reading notice effect). Further equipped with a notice effect executing means (CPU 90120 for effect control) to be executed before).
The period from when the gaming medium enters the general winning area until the variable display, which is the target of the advance notice effect, is executed (when the effect control CPU 90120 receives the general winning opening designation command, the target of the look-ahead advance notice effect). A gaming machine characterized in that the stage at which the production mode changes in the specific effect is different depending on the variable display number of times until the variable display is executed (the pachinko gaming machine of the 40th effect form). 901).
According to this, depending on the period from the entry of the game medium into the general winning area to the execution of the variable display that is the target of the advance notice effect, the stage in which the effect mode changes in the specific effect is different. It is possible to further enhance the interest of the production.

In the gaming machine of means B49
The period from the entry of the game medium into the general winning area to the execution of the variable display that is the target of the advance notice effect (the target of the look-ahead advance notice effect when the effect control CPU 90120 receives the general prize opening designation command). According to the variable display number of times until the variable display is executed) and the display result (big hit symbol, missed symbol) of the variable display that is the target of the advance notice effect, the effect is produced in the specific effect. The stage at which the aspect changes may be different. Specifically, the variable display count until the variable display (variable display that is the target of the look-ahead notice) that is the target of the notice effect when the game medium enters the general winning area is executed is within a predetermined range. In the case of within (for example, twice or less), the stage at which the effect mode changes in the specific effect differs depending on the display result of the variable display that is the target of the advance notice effect (for example, in the case of a big hit symbol). The number of steps may change, and if the symbol is out of order, the number of steps may change less than that.)

The gaming machine of means B50 is
Any gaming machine selected from means B47 to means B49.
A reach effect executing means (CPU 90120 for effect control) that executes a reach effect in association with the variable display (variable display of the first special figure, variable display of the second special figure, variable display of the decorative symbol) is further provided.
When the gaming medium enters the general winning area before the execution of the reach effect (when the timing when the game ball wins the general winning opening is before the reach state is established in the reach fluctuation), after the execution of the reach effect. The stage at which the production mode changes in the specific effect differs depending on whether the game medium enters the general prize area (when the timing at which the game ball wins the general prize opening is after the reach state is established in the reach fluctuation). It is a gaming machine (Pachinko gaming machine 901 in the 41st production form).
According to this, the effect mode changes in the specific effect depending on whether the game medium enters the general winning area before the reach effect is executed or the game medium enters the general prize area after the reach effect is executed. By different stages, it is possible to further enhance the interest of the specific production.

The gaming machine of means B51 is
Any gaming machine selected from means B47 to means B50.
It has a plurality of the general winning areas (first to fourth general winning openings 9050A to 9050D).
Depending on the general winning area in which the gaming medium has entered (when the game ball wins in any of the second general winning opening 9050B and the third general winning opening 9050C, and the first general winning opening 9050A and the fourth general winning opening 9050D). The pachinko gaming machine 901 is characterized in that the stage in which the production mode changes in the specific effect is different depending on whether the game ball wins a prize in any of the above (42nd effect form pachinko game machine 901).
According to this, the stage in which the production mode changes in the specific production differs depending on the general winning area in which the game medium has entered, so that the interest of the specific production can be further enhanced.

Further, the embodiment for carrying out the invention described later includes the inventions related to the means B52 to the means B56 shown below. Conventionally, as shown in Japanese Patent Application Laid-Open No. 2014-73187 (FIG. 108), when a game ball enters a normal winning opening (general winning area), the number of balls entered is counted up and displayed on the effect display device. , A gaming machine has been proposed in which when the number of counts being counted up reaches the number of execution opportunities determined by lottery, the player is informed that a villa in memory will occur. In the gaming machine shown in Patent Document 1, the effect (count-up display) is executed every time the gaming ball enters the ordinary winning opening. In a gaming machine having such a general winning area, if the gaming medium does not enter the general winning area, it is necessary to grasp this, but this is not considered in the prior art. The inventions according to the means B52 to the means B56 have been made in view of the above circumstances, and are intended to make it possible to grasp that the game medium does not enter the general winning area.

The gaming machine of means B52 is
A gaming machine (pachinko game) having a starting winning area (first starting winning opening, second starting winning opening) and a general winning area (first to fourth general winning openings 9050A to 9050D) into which a game medium (game ball) can enter. Machine 901)
Variable display when the game medium enters the starting winning area (first starting winning opening, second starting winning opening) (variable display of the first special figure, variable display of the second special figure, variable display of the decorative symbol) (1st special symbol display device 904A, 2nd special symbol display device 904B, image display device 905) and
A granting means (game control microcomputer 90100) that grants a specific value (prize ball, score) when a game medium enters the general prize area, and
When the number of entry of the game medium into the general winning area in a predetermined period is less than the predetermined number (when the number of winnings in the general winning opening in 10 minutes when it is detected that the game is being played is 0, or when the game is played. When the number of winnings to the general winning opening is less than 3 in the 30 minutes when it is detected to be inside, a specific effect (an image imitating the form of the general winning opening and "There is no general winning" is said. The gaming machine is characterized by comprising a specific effect executing means (effect control CPU 90120) capable of executing a specific effect E) for displaying a broadcast image 902200 or the like including characters on an image display device 905.
According to this, the player and the game hall can grasp that the number of the game media entering the general winning area is less than the predetermined number.

The gaming machine of means B53 is
It is a gaming machine of means B52,
A setting means for setting whether or not to allow the execution of the specific effect by the specific effect executing means (an effect that determines whether or not to execute the specific effect E based on the game hall setting and the player setting in the display setting table. Control CPU 90120) and
Further equipped with a clerk operation reception means (display changeover switch 9032) that accepts setting operations by the clerk.
When the setting operation is received by the clerk operation receiving means, the setting means sets to allow the execution of the specific effect (specific effect E (notifying that there is no general prize) based on the setting of the display changeover switch 9032). ， Notify that the number of general prizes is small)
It is a gaming machine characterized by this.
According to this, it is possible to reflect the intention of the amusement park regarding whether or not to execute the specific effect.

The gaming machine of means B54 is
A gaming machine of means B52 or means B53.
A storage means (a winning number counter area formed in the RAM 90122) for storing the number of entries of the game medium into the general winning area (the number of winnings for 30 minutes) is further provided.
The gaming machine is characterized in that the number of entries stored in the storage means is not held at the time of power failure (the value in the winning number counter area is erased by power failure).
According to this, it is possible to reduce the control load for retaining the memory of the number of intrusions at the time of power failure.

The gaming machine of means B55 is
Any gaming machine selected from means B52 to means B54.
The rate at which the specific effect is executed differs depending on the state of the gaming machine (for example, the specific effect E is executed at a different rate depending on the case of the normal state and the case of the probability change state or the time saving state).
It is a gaming machine characterized by this.
According to this, it is possible to further enhance the interest of the specific production.

The gaming machine of means B56 is
Any gaming machine selected from means B52 to means B55.
Different specific effects are executed according to the state of the gaming machine (for example, the specific effects E are executed in different modes depending on the case of the normal state and the case of the probabilistic change state or the time saving state).
It is a gaming machine characterized by this.
According to this, it is possible to further enhance the interest of the specific production.

Further, the embodiment for carrying out the invention described later includes the inventions related to the means B57 to the means B64 shown below. Conventionally, as shown in Japanese Patent Application Laid-Open No. 2015-80531 (FIG. 124), the number of prize balls (added value) obtained by the game medium entering the big winning opening during the execution of the big hit game, There has been proposed a gaming machine that performs an effect of displaying a numerical image that distinguishes the number of prize balls (added value) obtained by the game medium entering the ordinary winning opening (general winning area). In a gaming machine having such a general winning area, the intentions of the game hall and the player are not reflected with respect to whether or not to execute the effect when the gaming medium enters the general winning area. The inventions relating to the means B57 to the means B64 have been made in view of the above circumstances, and reflect the intentions of the game hall and the player regarding whether or not to execute the effect when the game medium enters the general winning area. The purpose is to make it possible.

The gaming machine of means B57 is
A gaming machine (pachinko game) having a starting winning area (first starting winning opening, second starting winning opening) and a general winning area (first to fourth general winning openings 9050A to 9050D) into which a game medium (game ball) can enter. Machine 901)
Variable display means for variably displaying identification information (first special figure, second special figure, decorative pattern) when a game medium enters the start winning area (first starting winning opening, second starting winning opening). (1st special symbol display device 904A, 2nd special symbol display device 904B, image display device 905) and
A granting means (game control microcomputer 90100) that grants a specific value (prize ball, score) when a game medium enters the general prize area, and
When the game medium enters the general winning area, the information of the winning number management table is displayed in the maintenance mode based on the setting of the mode switching switch 9031, and the setting of the display switching switch 9032 and the operation button 9030 are used. Based on the settings, the object is increased each time the game ball enters the general winning opening, the number of winnings to the general winning opening in the big hit game state is displayed, specific effect A: fluctuation result notice effect, specific effect B: look-ahead. Notification means (image display device 905) capable of executing a notice effect) and
The gaming machine is characterized by comprising setting means (mode changeover switch 9031, display changeover switch 9032, and operation button 9030) for setting whether or not to permit execution of the specific effect by the specific effect execution means. ..
According to this, it is possible to reflect the intentions of the amusement park and the player regarding whether or not to execute the specific effect.

The gaming machine of means B58 is
It is a gaming machine of means B57,
Further equipped with a clerk operation receiving means (mode changeover switch 9031, display changeover switch 9032) for accepting setting operations by the clerk.
The setting means sets to allow the execution of the specific effect when the setting operation is received by the clerk operation receiving means (based on the setting of the mode changeover switch 9031, the winning number management table in the maintenance mode). Display the information of, increase the object every time the game ball enters the general winning opening based on the setting of the display changeover switch 9032, display the number of winnings to the general winning opening in the big hit game state, specific effect A : Makes it possible to execute the fluctuation result advance notice effect, Specific effect B: Makes it possible to execute the look-ahead advance notice effect)
It is a gaming machine characterized by this.
According to this, it is possible to reflect the intention of the amusement park regarding whether or not to execute the specific effect.

The gaming machine of means B59 is
A gaming machine of means B57 or means B58.
Further equipped with a player operation receiving means for accepting setting operations by the player,
The setting means sets to allow the execution of the specific effect when the setting operation is received by the player operation receiving means (general winning opening based on the setting by the operation button 9030 on the demo screen display). The object is increased each time the game ball enters the game, and the number of winnings to the general winning opening in the big hit game state is displayed based on the setting by the operation button 9030 on the demo screen display. Specific effect B: Pre-reading notice effect can be executed)
It is a gaming machine characterized by this.
According to this, it is possible to reflect the intention of the player regarding whether or not to execute the specific effect.

The gaming machine of means B60 is
Any gaming machine selected from means B57 to means B59.
The specific effect specifically notifies the number of entry of the game medium into the general winning area during a predetermined period (the period controlled by the big hit gaming state) (the number of winning balls to the big winning opening and the number of winning balls). The number of prize balls according to the above, the number of prize balls to the general winning opening, and the number of prize balls according to the number of prize balls are displayed separately).
According to this, it is possible to improve the playability in a predetermined period.

The gaming machine of means B61 is
Any gaming machine selected from means B57 to means B60.
The specific effect executing means executes the specific effect (executes the effects of the 25th effect form and the 26th effect form) when the number of entries of the game medium into the general winning area reaches a predetermined number. It is a characteristic gaming machine.
According to this, it is possible to be interested in the number of entry of the game medium into the general winning area.

The gaming machine of means B62 is
Any gaming machine selected from means B57 to means B61.
The specific effect executing means is characterized in that it executes different specific effects according to the number of entry of the game medium into the general winning area (executes the effects of the 25th effect form and the 26th effect form). Is.
According to this, it is possible to be interested in the number of entry of the game medium into the general winning area.

The gaming machine of means B63 is
Any gaming machine selected from means B57 to means B62.
The specific effect is an effect of identifiablely notifying the number of entry of the game medium into the general winning area (the object is increased each time the game ball enters the general winning opening).
When the game is not performed on the gaming machine (the variable display of the decorative symbol is not executed, and the start winning opening designation command, the general winning opening designation command, and the large winning opening winning command are received for a predetermined period. The effect control CPU 90120 that determines the end of the game based on the fact that the game has not been completed), and in the specific effect, it is identifiable that the number of entry of the game medium into the general winning area is 0 (the end of the game is determined). In that case, all the objects corresponding to the number of winnings to the general winning opening displayed on the image display device 905 are deleted).
It is a gaming machine characterized by this.
According to this, it is possible to prevent other players from grasping the number of entry of the game medium into the general winning area.

The gaming machine of means B64 is
Any gaming machine selected from means B57 to means B63.
The specific effect is a gaming machine characterized by displaying display information (object corresponding to the number of winnings in the general winning opening) corresponding to the number of entries of the gaming medium into the general winning area.
According to this, it becomes possible to easily grasp the number of entry of the game medium into the general winning area.

Further, the embodiment for carrying out the invention described later includes the invention according to the means B65 to the means B77 shown below. Conventionally, as shown in Japanese Patent Application Laid-Open No. 2014-200305 (paragraph 0208, FIG. 100), when a game ball wins a general winning opening during a big hit, one aspect of the start memory display changes and the start memory is stored. A gaming machine has been proposed that notifies whether the special figure variation display game corresponding to the display is "hit" or "missing". In a gaming machine having such a general winning opening, there is room to further enhance the interest when a game ball wins in the general winning opening. The invention according to the means B65 to the means B77 has been made in view of the above circumstances, and an object thereof is to enhance the interest of a game in a gaming machine having a general winning opening.

The gaming machine of means B65 is
A gaming machine (pachinko game) having a starting winning area (first starting winning opening, second starting winning opening) and a general winning area (first to fourth general winning openings 9050A to 9050D) into which a game medium (game ball) can enter. Machine 901)
Variable display means for variably displaying identification information (first special figure, second special figure, decorative pattern) when a game medium enters the start winning area (first starting winning opening, second starting winning opening). (1st special symbol display device 904A, 2nd special symbol display device 904B, image display device 905) and
A granting means (game control microcomputer 90100) that grants a specific value (prize ball, score) when a game medium enters the general prize area, and
It is equipped with a specific effect execution means (effect control CPU 90120) for executing a specific effect (specific effect A: variation result advance notice effect).
When the game medium enters the general winning area in the first gaming state (normal state) and when the game medium enters the general winning area in the second gaming state (probability change or time saving state). , The ratio of executing the specific effect is different (in the normal state, the specific effect is executed at a higher rate than the probability change or the time saving state).
It is a gaming machine (pachinko gaming machine 901 of the first effect form to the fourth effect form).
According to this, it is possible to improve the interest when the game medium enters the general winning area.

The gaming machine of means B66 is
A gaming machine (pachinko game) having a starting winning area (first starting winning opening, second starting winning opening) and a general winning area (first to fourth general winning openings 9050A to 9050D) into which a game medium (game ball) can enter. Machine 901)
Variable display means for variably displaying identification information (first special figure, second special figure, decorative pattern) when a game medium enters the start winning area (first starting winning opening, second starting winning opening). (1st special symbol display device 904A, 2nd special symbol display device 904B, image display device 905) and
A granting means (game control microcomputer 90100) that grants a specific value (prize ball, score) when a game medium enters the general prize area, and
It is equipped with a specific effect execution means (CPU90120 for effect control) that executes a specific effect (specific effect A: variable result notice effect, specific effect B: look-ahead notice effect).
When the game medium enters the general winning area in the first gaming state (normal state) and when the game medium enters the general winning area in the second gaming state (probability change or time saving state). , Execute different specific effect (execute specific effect A in normal state, execute specific effect B in probable change or time saving state)
It is a gaming machine (pachinko gaming machine 901 of the fifth effect form to the twelfth effect form).
According to this, it is possible to improve the interest when the game medium enters the general winning area.

The gaming machine of means B67 is
A gaming machine of means B65 or means B66 (pachinko gaming machine 901 of the second effect form to the fourth effect form, the tenth effect form to the twelfth effect form).
In the first gaming state (normal state), when the number of entries of the game medium into the general winning area reaches the first entry number, the specific effect is executed.
In the second gaming state (probability change or time saving state), the specific effect is executed when the number of entries of the gaming medium into the general winning area is a second entry number different from the first entry number. It is a gaming machine characterized by this.
According to this, it is possible to be interested in the number of entry of the game medium into the general winning area.

The gaming machine of means B68 is
A gaming machine (pachinko game) having a starting winning area (first starting winning opening, second starting winning opening) and a general winning area (first to fourth general winning openings 9050A to 9050D) into which a game medium (game ball) can enter. Machine 901)
Variable display means for variably displaying identification information (first special figure, second special figure, decorative pattern) when a game medium enters the start winning area (first starting winning opening, second starting winning opening). (1st special symbol display device 904A, 2nd special symbol display device 904B, image display device 905) and
A granting means (game control microcomputer 90100) that grants a specific value (prize ball, score) when a game medium enters the general prize area, and
It is equipped with a specific effect execution means (effect control CPU 90120) for executing a specific effect (specific effect A: variation result advance notice effect).
The above-mentioned when the game medium enters the general winning area during the first period (after the reach state of the reach fluctuation is established) and during the second period (period other than the reach fluctuation or before the reach state of the reach fluctuation is established). The ratio of executing the specific effect differs depending on whether the game medium enters the general winning area (after the reach fluctuation state is established, it is specified at a higher ratio than before the reach state of the reach fluctuation or the period other than the reach fluctuation is established. The production is executed)
It is a gaming machine (pachinko gaming machine 901 of the thirteenth production form to the sixteenth production form).
According to this, it is possible to improve the interest when the game medium enters the general winning area.

The gaming machine of means B69 is
A gaming machine (pachinko game) having a starting winning area (first starting winning opening, second starting winning opening) and a general winning area (first to fourth general winning openings 9050A to 9050D) into which a game medium (game ball) can enter. Machine 901)
Variable display means for variably displaying identification information (first special figure, second special figure, decorative pattern) when a game medium enters the start winning area (first starting winning opening, second starting winning opening). (1st special symbol display device 904A, 2nd special symbol display device 904B, image display device 905) and
A granting means (game control microcomputer 90100) that grants a specific value (prize ball, score) when a game medium enters the general prize area, and
It is equipped with a specific effect execution means (CPU90120 for effect control) that executes a specific effect (specific effect A: variable result notice effect, specific effect B: look-ahead notice effect).
The above-mentioned when the game medium enters the general winning area during the first period (after the reach state of the reach fluctuation is established) and during the second period (period other than the reach fluctuation or before the reach state of the reach fluctuation is established). A different specific effect is executed depending on whether the game medium enters the general winning area (after the reach state is established, the specific effect A is executed, and before the reach state is established, the specific effect B is executed. Execute the specific effect A, and execute the specific effect B during the period other than the reach fluctuation or before the reach state of the reach fluctuation is established.)
It is a gaming machine (pachinko gaming machine 901 of the 17th effect form to the 24th effect form).
According to this, it is possible to improve the interest when the game medium enters the general winning area.

The gaming machine of means B70 is
A gaming machine of means B68 or means B69 (pachinko gaming machine 901 of the 14th effect form to the 16th effect form, the 22nd effect form to the 24th effect form).
During the first period (after the reach state of the reach fluctuation is established), the specific effect is executed when the number of entries of the game medium into the general winning area becomes the first number of entries.
During the second period (a period other than the reach fluctuation or before the reach state of the reach fluctuation is established), the number of entries of the gaming medium into the general winning area is the number of second entries different from the number of first entries. It is a gaming machine characterized by executing the specific effect in some cases.
According to this, it is possible to be interested in the number of entry of the game medium into the general winning area.

The gaming machine of means B71 is
Means B65 to any of the gaming machines selected from means B70 (second effect form, sixth effect form, tenth effect form to twelfth effect form, 14th effect form, 18th effect form, 22nd effect form). Pachinko game machine 901)
It has a plurality of the general winning areas (first to fourth general winning openings 9050A to 9050D).
It is a gaming machine characterized in that the specific effect is executed when a gaming medium enters each of a plurality of the general winning areas.
According to this, it is possible to be interested in which of the plurality of general winning areas the game medium enters.

The gaming machine of means B72 is
Means B65 to any of the gaming machines selected from means B71 (pachinko gaming machines 901 in the 5th to 12th effects and the 17th to 24th effects).
The variable display means has started conditions (variable display based on the previous start winning prize has ended and a big hit game state) after the game medium has entered the starting winning area (first starting winning opening, second starting winning opening). The identification information (first special figure, second special figure, decorative pattern) is variably displayed based on the fact that it is not controlled.
When the display result of the variable display of the identification information becomes the specific display result (big hit symbol), the advantageous state control means (game control microcomputer 90100) that can control the advantageous state (big hit game state) advantageous to the player. )When,
Before the start condition is satisfied, the pre-start determination means for determining whether or not the advantageous state is controlled (control to the jackpot gaming state based on the jackpot determination random number extracted at the start winning prize). Further equipped with a game control microcomputer 90100) for determining whether or not to do so.
The specific effect executing means is
Based on the pre-start determination, the effect of notifying that the control is controlled to the advantageous state (pre-reading advance notice effect) is performed before the start condition of the variable display to be targeted is satisfied, the specific effect (specific effect B). It is a gaming machine characterized by being executed as.
According to this, it is possible to make the specific effect more interesting by foretelling that the variable display start condition is controlled to an advantageous state before the start condition is satisfied.

The gaming machine of means B73 is
Any gaming machine selected from means B65 to means B72 (pachinko gaming machine 901 in the first effect mode to the 24th effect form).
The variable display means has started conditions (variable display based on the previous start winning prize has ended and a big hit game state) after the game medium has entered the starting winning area (first starting winning opening, second starting winning opening). The identification information (first special figure, second special figure, decorative pattern) is variably displayed based on the fact that it is not controlled.
When the display result of the variable display of the identification information becomes the specific display result (big hit symbol), the advantageous state control means (game control microcomputer 90100) that can control the advantageous state (big hit game state) advantageous to the player. )When,
When the start condition is satisfied, the start time determination means for determining whether or not the advantageous state is controlled (for the jackpot determination stored when the variable display of the special symbol is started). Further equipped with a game control microcomputer 90100) that determines whether or not to control the jackpot game state based on a random number.
The specific effect executing means is
It is a gaming machine characterized in that an effect (variation result advance notice effect) for notifying control of the advantageous state is executed as the specific effect based on the start time determination.
According to this, it is possible to make the specific effect more interesting by foretelling that the control is performed in an advantageous state.

The gaming machine of means B74 is
Any gaming machine selected from means B65 to means B73 (pachinko gaming machine 901 in the third effect form and the fifteenth effect form).
It is a gaming machine characterized in that the execution rate of the specific effect varies depending on the frequency of entry of the game medium into the general winning area (the number of winnings within 120 seconds from the first winning to the general winning opening).
According to this, it is possible to be interested in the frequency of entry of the game medium into the general winning area.

The gaming machine of means B75 is
Any gaming machine selected from means B65 to means B74 (pachinko gaming machine 901 in the eleventh effect form and the 23rd effect form).
It is a gaming machine characterized in that different specific effects are executed according to the frequency of entry of the gaming medium into the general winning area (the number of winnings within 120 seconds from the first winning to the general winning opening).
According to this, it is possible to be interested in the frequency of entry of the game medium into the general winning area.

The gaming machine of means B76 is
Any gaming machine selected from means B65 to means B75 (pachinko gaming machine 901 in the 4th effect form, the 8th effect form, the 12th effect form, the 16th effect form, the 20th effect form, and the 24th effect form). And,
It has a plurality of the general winning areas (first to fourth general winning openings 9050A to 9050D).
The specific effect executing means is
It is a gaming machine characterized in that the specific effect is executed based on the order in which the gaming media enter the plurality of general winning areas in a predetermined order.
According to this, it is possible to be interested in the order of entry of the game medium into the general winning area.

The gaming machine of means B77 is
One of the gaming machines selected from the means B65 to the means B76 (pachinko gaming machine 901 of the 4th effect form, the 8th effect form, the 12th effect form, the 16th effect form, the 20th effect form, and the 24th effect form). And,
It has other winning areas (first starting winning opening, second starting winning opening) different from the general winning area.
The specific effect executing means is
It is a gaming machine characterized in that the specific effect is executed based on the order in which the game medium enters the general winning area and the game medium enters the other winning area in a specific order. ..
According to this, it is possible to be interested in the order of entry of the game medium into the general winning area and other winning areas.

Further, the embodiment for carrying out the invention described later includes the inventions relating to the means A1 to the means A9 shown below. Conventionally, as shown in Japanese Patent Application Laid-Open No. 2014-117576, a gaming machine in which a windmill for changing the flow direction and speed of a gaming ball and a large number of gaming nails are provided on the surface of the gaming board has been proposed. In this type of gaming machine, the passing ratio of the winning opening and the passing gate varies depending on the adjustment of the gaming nails provided on the gaming board, and the payout rate of the gaming balls is designed by adjusting the gaming nails and the like. Sometimes. However, since it was not possible to recognize from the outside of the gaming machine what kind of adjustment was made to the gaming nails, it was difficult to judge whether or not the payout rate would be as designed. The inventions according to the means A1 to the means A9 have been made in view of the above circumstances, and an object thereof is to provide a gaming machine capable of recognizing what kind of adjustment has been made.

The gaming machine of the means A1 (for example, a pachinko gaming machine 901, a slot machine, etc.)
Predetermined conditions are satisfied (for example, a normal variable winning ball device 906B as a second starting winning slot, a special variable winning ball device 907 as a large winning slot, a normal winning ball device 906A as a first starting winning slot, and a general winning area. It is a gaming machine in which the game value (for example, a game ball, a slot machine medal, etc.) is paid out by winning a prize in the general winning openings 9050A to 9050D, displaying a predetermined symbol combination on the effective line of the slot machine, etc.). Predetermined information regarding the game value provided on the main board (for example, the main board 9011, the main board of the slot machine, etc.) for controlling the game (for example, the combination (combination), combination, machine allocation, etc.) ) Is provided with information display means (for example, display monitor 9029, slot machine display monitor, etc.), and the door frame (for example, game machine frame 903, slot machine door frame, etc.) can be opened and released. In response to the occurrence of an error (for example, an error requiring door opening such as error 1 to error 7 shown in FIG. 106), the display of the predetermined information is restricted (for example, the display of the combination (combination) combination ratio is stopped). It is characterized by that.
According to the above configuration, it is possible to recognize what kind of adjustment has been made. In addition, it is possible to prevent the player from seeing the predetermined information when the error is canceled when the door frame is opened.

The gaming machine of means A2 is
A gaming machine of means A1 (for example, a pachinko gaming machine 901, a slot machine, etc.).
When the error (for example, an error requiring door opening such as error 1 to error 7 shown in FIG. 106) occurs, the limitation (for example, the display of the combination (combination) combination ratio is stopped) is performed.
According to the above configuration, it is possible to prevent the player from seeing the predetermined information.

The gaming machine of means A3 is
A gaming machine of means A1 (for example, a pachinko gaming machine 901, a slot machine, etc.).
When the door frame (for example, a game machine frame 903, a slot machine door frame, etc.) is opened after the error (for example, an error requiring door opening such as error 1 to error 7 shown in FIG. 106) occurs. (For example, for example, the display of the combination (combination) combination ratio is stopped).
According to the above configuration, it is possible to prevent the player from seeing the predetermined information.

The gaming machine of means A4 is
Any gaming machine selected from means A1 to A3 (for example, pachinko gaming machine 901, slot machine, etc.).
The information display means (for example, display monitor 9029, slot machine display monitor, etc.) is conditioned on the condition that the error (for example, an error requiring door opening such as error 1 to error 7 shown in FIG. 106) has not occurred. As the above-mentioned predetermined information (for example, combination (combination ratio), combination ratio, machine allocation, etc.) is displayed.
According to the above configuration, it is possible to prevent the player from seeing the predetermined information.

The gaming machine of means A5 is
Any gaming machine selected from means A1 to A4 (for example, pachinko gaming machine 901, slot machine, etc.).
After canceling the error (for example, an error requiring door opening such as error 1 to error 7 shown in FIG. 106), a predetermined time (for example, the measurement time t measured by the measurement timer in the display restriction confirmation process of FIG. 104) or the like. ) Has elapsed, and then the predetermined information (for example, combination (combination ratio), combination ratio, machine allocation, etc.) is displayed.
According to the above configuration, it is possible to prevent the player from seeing the predetermined information.

The gaming machine of means A6 is
Any gaming machine selected from means A1 to A5 (for example, pachinko gaming machine 901, slot machine, etc.).
The information display means (for example, a display monitor 9029, a display monitor of a slot machine, etc.) displays a plurality of the predetermined information (for example, a combination (combination ratio), a combination ratio, a machine allocation, etc.) for a predetermined period (for example, 30 seconds). It can be switched and displayed each time.
According to the above configuration, the increase of members can be suppressed.

The gaming machine of means A7 is
Any gaming machine selected from means A1 to A6 (for example, pachinko gaming machine 901, slot machine, etc.).
The information display means (for example, display monitor 9029, display monitor of a slot machine, etc.) has a predetermined unit (for example, the number of prize balls) as the predetermined information (for example, combination (combination ratio), combination ratio, machine allocation, etc.). Displays information for each (60,000).
According to the above configuration, the numerical value of the period corresponding to the predetermined unit can be easily recognized.

The gaming machine of means A8 is
Any gaming machine selected from means A1 to A7 (for example, pachinko gaming machine 901, slot machine, etc.).
The information display means (for example, display monitor 9029, display monitor of a slot machine, etc.) provides information for each predetermined unit (for example, combination) as the predetermined information (for example, combination (combination ratio), combination ratio, machine allocation, etc.). Short-term combination (relationship), short-term combination ratio) and cumulative information (for example, cumulative combination (relationship), cumulative combination ratio) are switched and displayed.
According to the above configuration, the information for each predetermined unit and the cumulative information can be compared.

The gaming machine of means A9 is
Any gaming machine selected from means A1 to A8 (for example, pachinko gaming machine 901, slot machine, etc.).
The information display means (for example, display monitor 9029, slot machine display monitor, etc.) is provided with the main board (for example, main board 9011, slot machine main board, etc.) and is crimped. It is housed in 90201, 202).
According to the above configuration, fraud can be prevented.

It is a front view of the pachinko gaming machine according to one aspect of this invention. It is a block diagram which shows various control boards mounted on a pachinko gaming machine. It is explanatory drawing which shows an example of the content of an effect control command. It is explanatory drawing which illustrates the random number for a game which is counted on the side of a main board. It is explanatory drawing explaining an example of a variation category and variation pattern. It is a figure which shows the configuration example of the display result determination table. It is a figure which shows the configuration example of the jackpot type determination table. It is a block diagram which shows the structural example of the data holding area for game control. It is a figure which shows the structural example of the effect control pattern. It is a block diagram which shows the configuration example of the data holding area for effect control. It is a flowchart which shows an example of the timer interrupt processing for game control. It is a flowchart which shows an example of a special symbol process process. It is a flowchart which shows an example of the start winning a prize determination process in a special symbol process process. It is a flowchart which shows an example of the process at the time of a start winning. It is a flowchart which shows an example of the random value value determination processing at the time of a prize. It is a figure which shows the selection example of the variation category determination table. It is a figure which shows the configuration example of the variation category determination table. It is a flowchart which shows an example of the special symbol normal processing. It is a figure which shows the structural example of the fluctuation pattern determination table. It is a flowchart which shows an example of an effect control main process. It is a flowchart which shows an example of a command analysis process. It is a flowchart which shows the effect control process process. It is a flowchart which shows an example of the production decision processing at the time of a prize. It is a flowchart which shows an example of the variable display start setting process. It is explanatory drawing explaining an example of a button development effect category and a button development effect pattern. It is a flowchart which shows an example of a button development effect determination process. It is explanatory drawing explaining the decision ratio of a button development effect. It is explanatory drawing explaining the determination ratio of a button development effect pattern. It is explanatory drawing explaining the various period in the button development production, and the flow of a specific button development production. It is explanatory drawing explaining the flow of concrete button development production. It is explanatory drawing explaining the flow of concrete button development production. It is a figure which shows the display operation example in the display area of an image display device. It is a figure which shows the display operation example in the display area of an image display device. It is a figure which shows the display operation example in the display area of an image display device. It is a figure which shows the display operation example in the display area of an image display device. It is a figure which shows the display operation example in the display area of an image display device. It is a figure which shows the display operation example in the display area of an image display device. It is a figure which shows the display operation example in the display area of an image display device. It is a flowchart which shows an example of an auto button setting process. It is explanatory drawing which shows the specific example of the display mode at the time of setting the function of an auto button to enable or disable. It is explanatory drawing which shows the comparative example of the automatic continuous hitting by a long press operation, and the automatic repeated hitting by an auto button function. It is a front view of the pachinko gaming machine in another form example. It is a block diagram which shows various control boards mounted on a pachinko gaming machine. (A) It is a figure which shows the prize number information managed by the prize number management table, and (b) is a figure which shows the prize number information which is managed by a display control table. It is explanatory drawing which shows the relationship between the playground setting and the player setting. It is explanatory drawing in the case of setting the display by the operation button which a player can operate. It is explanatory drawing in the case of displaying the object corresponding to the prize in the general prize opening. It is explanatory drawing in the case of displaying the number of winnings to a general winning opening in a big hit game state. It is explanatory drawing which shows each effect performed according to the fluctuation pattern. It is explanatory drawing which shows the specific example of the fluctuation result advance notice effect and the look-ahead advance notice effect. It is explanatory drawing which shows the specific example of the 1st effect form to the 4th effect form. It is explanatory drawing which shows the specific example of the 5th effect form to the 8th effect form. It is explanatory drawing which shows the specific example of the 9th effect form to the 12th effect form. It is explanatory drawing which shows the specific example of the 13th effect form to the 16th effect form. It is explanatory drawing which shows the specific example of the 17th effect form to the 20th effect form. It is explanatory drawing which shows the specific example of the 21st effect form to the 24th effect form. It is explanatory drawing which shows the specific example of the 25th effect form and the 26th effect form. It is a figure which shows the prize number information managed by the prize number management table. It is explanatory drawing which shows the specific example of the point giving effect. It is explanatory drawing which shows the specific example of the 27th effect form to the 30th effect form. It is explanatory drawing which shows the specific example of the 31st effect form and the 32nd effect form. It is explanatory drawing which shows the specific example of the gauge update effect. It is explanatory drawing which shows the specific example of the 33rd effect form to the 36th effect form. It is explanatory drawing which shows the specific example of the 37th effect form. It is explanatory drawing which shows the specific example of the 38th effect form to the 41st effect form. It is explanatory drawing which shows the specific example of the 42nd production form. It is explanatory drawing which shows the specific example of the non-winning notification effect. It is explanatory drawing which shows the specific example of the 43rd effect form to the 46th effect form. It is a figure which shows the appearance ratio of the character A to C in the 47th effect form to the 49th effect form. It is a figure which shows the display period of the characters A to C in the 47th effect form to the 49th effect form. It is explanatory drawing which shows the specific example of the 47th effect form to the 49th effect form. It is explanatory drawing which shows the specific example of the hold change effect in the 47th effect form. It is explanatory drawing which shows the specific example of the variation result notice effect in the 48th effect form. It is a timing chart which shows the execution timing and execution period of each effect in the 47th effect form and the 48th effect form. It is explanatory drawing which shows the specific example of the 50th effect form and the 51st effect form. It is explanatory drawing which shows the specific example of the continuous hit operation notification and the cut-in notice effect. It is explanatory drawing which shows the specific example of each symbol stop operation notification and pseudo-continuous notice effect. It is explanatory drawing which shows the specific example of each symbol stop operation notification and pseudo-continuous notice effect. It is explanatory drawing which shows the specific example of the all symbol stop operation notification and the chance eye notice effect. It is explanatory drawing which shows the specific example of the all symbol stop operation notification and the chance eye notice effect. It is explanatory drawing which shows the specific example of the 52nd effect form and the 53rd effect form. It is explanatory drawing which shows the execution ratio of each advance notice effect for every general winning opening in the 52nd effect form and the 53rd effect form. It is explanatory drawing which shows the specific example of the display area of each effect information in the setting which displays the winning number information. It is explanatory drawing which shows the specific example of the display mode of an error message. It is explanatory drawing which shows the specific example of the display area of each effect information in the setting which does not display the winning number information. It is explanatory drawing which shows the item example of the prize number information which can be displayed in the 1st area. It is explanatory drawing which shows the specific example of the setting method of the aggregation period. It is explanatory drawing which shows the other example of the display area of each effect information in the setting which displays the winning number information, and the setting which does not display the winning number information. It is explanatory drawing which shows the other example of the display area of each effect information in the setting which displays the winning number information, and the setting which does not display the winning number information. It is a block diagram which shows in more detail various control boards and the like mounted on a pachinko gaming machine. It is a rear view of a pachinko machine. (A) is a simplified front view of the main board, and (B) is an explanatory view for explaining the display contents of the display monitor. It is a figure which shows the structure of a part of the storage area in the RAM of a main board. It is a figure which showed the memory map of the CPU in the main board. It is a figure which showed the memory map of the built-in ROM area in a CPU. It is a figure which shows the structure of the used area program area and the non-used area program area in the built-in ROM area. It is a table which shows the call instruction used in the built-in ROM area. It is a figure which shows the other configurations of the used area program area and the non-used area program area in a built-in ROM area. (A) is a diagram conceptually showing the processing procedure of the first interrupt processing, (B) is a diagram conceptually showing the processing procedure of the second interrupt processing, and (C) is a processing procedure of the third interrupt processing. Is a diagram conceptually showing. (A) is a time chart showing the display time of items displayed on the display monitor, and (B-1) to (B-5) are explanatory diagrams illustrating changes in the display contents of the display monitor. It is explanatory drawing explaining the movement of the data stored in the storage area of a ring buffer. It is a flowchart which shows the procedure of the combination (relationship) / combination-related processing. It is a flowchart which shows the procedure of the combination (relationship) / combination display control processing. It is a flowchart which shows the procedure of display restriction confirmation processing. It is a flowchart which shows the procedure of a display switching control process. It is a table which shows the type of an error in a gaming machine. (A) is a time chart showing the relationship between the signal flow when the third interrupt process is executed and the display state of the monitor or the like, and (B) is the signal flow and the monitor when the first interrupt process is executed. It is a time chart which shows the relationship with the display state such as. It is a figure which shows the arrangement of each LED of the display part in a display monitor. It is a perspective view of the main board in which a display monitor is arranged in the 1st display monitor arrangement mode. It is a perspective view which shows the state which the frame for a game machine to which a main board is attached is opened from the outer frame. (A) is a perspective view of a main board in which a display monitor is arranged in a second display monitor arrangement mode, and (B) is a perspective view of a main board in which a display monitor is arranged in a third display monitor arrangement mode. (A) is a perspective view of a main board in which a display monitor is arranged in a fourth display monitor arrangement mode, and (B) is a perspective view of a main board in which a display monitor is arranged in a fifth display monitor arrangement mode. (A) is a perspective view of the main board in which the display monitor is arranged in the sixth display monitor arrangement mode, and (B) is a perspective view of the main board in which the display monitor is arranged in the seventh display monitor arrangement mode. (A) is a perspective view of the main board in which the display monitor is arranged in the eighth display monitor arrangement mode, and (B) is a perspective view of the main board in which the display monitor is arranged in the ninth display monitor arrangement mode. It is a front view of the gaming machine provided with the blade type variable winning ball device. It is a front view which looked at the variable winning ball device provided in the game board from the front. It is explanatory drawing which shows the example of the counter of the total number of acquired balls, the number of characters acquired by a character, and the number of balls acquired by a continuous character. (A) to (D) are front views which simplified the modification of the main board. It is explanatory drawing which showed the example which changed to the ring buffer format as the aggregation and calculation method of the information about the prize of a game. It is explanatory drawing which showed the example which changed to the ring buffer format as the aggregation and calculation method of the information about the prize of a game. It is explanatory drawing which showed the example which changed to the ring buffer format as the aggregation and calculation method of the information about the prize of a game. It is explanatory drawing which showed the example which changed to the ring buffer format as the aggregation and calculation method of the information about the prize of a game. It is explanatory drawing which showed the example which changed to the ring buffer format as the aggregation and calculation method of the information about the prize of a game. It is explanatory drawing about the performance information. It is explanatory drawing about the performance information. It is a front view of a pachinko machine. It is a block diagram which shows various control boards mounted on a pachinko gaming machine. It is a flowchart which shows an example of the special figure processing (special figure process processing). It is a flowchart which shows an example of the state control processing. It is a flowchart which shows an example of the special symbol stop processing. It is a flowchart which shows an example of the big hit opening preprocessing. It is a flowchart which shows an example of the process of opening a big hit. It is a flowchart which shows an example of the big prize opening determination process. It is a flowchart which shows an example of the big hit opening post-processing. It is a flowchart which shows an example of the jackpot end processing. It is explanatory drawing explaining the state change switching waiting time and the like. It is a front view of a pachinko machine. It is a block diagram which shows various control boards mounted on a pachinko gaming machine. It is explanatory drawing explaining the state change switching waiting time and the like. It is a front view of a pachinko machine. It is a block diagram which shows various control boards mounted on a pachinko gaming machine. It is a flowchart which shows an example of the state control processing. It is explanatory drawing explaining the state change switching waiting time and the like. This is a configuration example of the out-ball detector. It is a flowchart which shows an example of error notification processing. This is an example of a display mode for notifying an error. This is an example of a display mode for notifying an error. It is a flowchart which shows an example of the timer interrupt processing for game control. It is a flowchart which shows an example of the performance information update process. It is a flowchart which shows an example of the performance information update process. This is an example of the placement position of the out-ball detector.

Hereinafter, embodiments of the present invention will be described in detail with reference to the drawings. FIG. 1 is a front view of the pachinko gaming machine 1 according to the embodiment of the present invention, and shows an arrangement layout of main members. The pachinko gaming machine 1 is roughly divided into a gaming board (gauge board) 2 constituting a game board surface and a gaming machine frame (underframe) 3 for supporting and fixing the game board 2. The game board 2 is formed with a substantially circular game area surrounded by guide rails.

A normal winning ball device 6A and a normal variable winning ball device 6B are provided in the lower portion of the game area in the game board 2. The ordinary winning ball device 6A forms a first starting winning opening as a starting region (first starting region) that is always kept in a constant open state by, for example, a predetermined ball receiving member. The ordinary variable winning ball device 6B is an electric motor having a pair of movable wing pieces that are changed into a normally open state in a vertical position and an expanded open state in a tilted position by a solenoid 81 for an ordinary electric accessory shown in FIG. It is equipped with a tulip-shaped accessory (ordinary electric accessory) and forms a starting area (second starting area) and a second starting winning opening. When the first starting winning opening and the second starting winning opening are not particularly distinguished, they are simply referred to as "starting winning openings".

The game ball that has passed (entered) the first starting winning opening formed by the normal winning ball device 6A is detected by, for example, the first starting opening switch 22A shown in FIG. The game ball that has passed (entered) the second starting winning opening formed by the normally variable winning ball device 6B is detected by, for example, the second starting opening switch 22B shown in FIG.

In addition, game balls that have passed (entered) the winning openings such as the starting winning opening (the first starting winning opening and the second starting winning opening) and the large winning opening (described later) are provided corresponding to the respective winning openings. Detection by a switch (first start port switch 22A, second start port switch 22B, count switch 23 (described later)) is referred to as "winning". Of the "winnings", the winning of the starting winning opening (the first starting winning opening or the second starting winning opening) is called the "starting winning", and in particular, the winning of the first starting winning opening is called the first starting winning. , The prize in the second start prize opening is referred to as the second start prize.

Based on the occurrence of the first start winning prize (detection of the game balls by the first start port switch 22A), a predetermined number (for example, three) of game balls are paid out as prize balls, and the first special figure reserved memory number (described later). ) Is equal to or less than a predetermined upper limit value (for example, "4"), the decorative symbol executed in the first special symbol game (described later) or the image display device 5 (described later) executed in the first special symbol display device 4A. The first start condition (also referred to as the first execution condition) for executing the variable display game such as the variable display of is satisfied.

Based on the occurrence of the second start winning prize (detection of the game balls by the second start port switch 22B), a predetermined number (for example, three) of game balls are paid out as prize balls, and the second special figure reserved memory number (described later). ) Is equal to or less than a predetermined upper limit value (for example, "4"), the decorative symbol executed in the second special symbol game (described later) or the image display device 5 (described later) executed in the second special symbol display device 4B. A second start condition (also referred to as a second execution condition) for executing a variable display game such as a variable display of is satisfied. The number of prize balls paid out based on the first starting prize and the number of prize balls paid out based on the second starting prize may be the same number or different numbers. good.

The first special figure reservation number is the number of variable display games (variable display games due to the occurrence of the first start winning) that are not immediately executed when the first start winning is generated and the execution is temporarily suspended. Even if the first start condition for executing the variable display game such as the first special figure game (described later) or the variable display of the decorative symbol is satisfied by the occurrence of the first start prize, the first start prize is generated. When the first start condition that allows the start of the above-mentioned variable display game is not satisfied (for example, the variable display game based on the first or second start condition that is satisfied earlier is being executed or pachinko. When the gaming machine 1 is controlled to the jackpot gaming state), the execution of the variable display game is suspended (the variable display game is in a waiting state for execution). That is, the first special figure hold storage number is the number of games of the variable display game due to the occurrence of the first start winning prize in the execution waiting state. The number of reserved first special figures is decremented by one each time one of the first start conditions is satisfied.

It should be noted that although the first start condition by a certain first start prize is satisfied, the variable display corresponding to the first start prize does not satisfy the first start condition that allows the start of the variable display game by the first start prize. Information regarding the above is stored (held) as hold data (first special figure hold information) until the first start condition for allowing the start of the variable display game by the first start prize is satisfied. In other words, the reserved first special figure holding information is digested one by one each time the first start condition is satisfied, and the variable display game based on the digested first special figure holding information is executed.

The second special figure hold storage number is the number of variable display games (variable display games due to the occurrence of the second start prize) that are not immediately executed when the second start prize is generated and the execution is temporarily suspended. Even if the second start condition for executing the variable display game such as the second special figure game (described later) or the variable display of the decorative symbol is satisfied by the occurrence of the second start prize, the second start prize is generated. When the second start condition that allows the start of the above-mentioned variable display game is not satisfied (for example, the variable display game based on the first or second start condition that is satisfied earlier is being executed or pachinko. When the gaming machine 1 is controlled to the jackpot gaming state), the execution of the variable display game is suspended (the variable display game is in a waiting state for execution). That is, the second special figure hold storage number is the number of games of the variable display game due to the occurrence of the second start winning prize that is in the state of waiting for execution. The number of reserved second special figures is reduced by 1 each time one of the second start conditions is satisfied.

It should be noted that although the second start condition by a certain second start prize is satisfied, the variable display corresponding to the second start prize is not satisfied by the second start condition that allows the start of the variable display game by the second start prize. Information is stored (held) as hold data (second special figure hold information) until the second start condition for allowing the start of the variable display game by the second start prize is satisfied. In other words, the reserved second special figure holding information is digested one by one each time the second start condition is satisfied, and a variable display game based on the digested second special figure holding information is executed.

The number of reserved storages obtained by adding the number of reserved storages of the first special figure and the number of reserved storages of the second special figure is referred to as "total number of reserved storages". When the first special figure holding memory number, the second special figure holding storage number, and the total holding storage number are not particularly distinguished, it is also simply referred to as "special figure holding storage number" or "holding storage number". That is, one or two of the first special figure reserved storage number, the second special figure reserved storage number, and the total reserved storage number when simply referred to as "special figure reserved storage number" or "holding storage number". Or it may refer to three. Further, when the first start condition and the second start condition are not particularly distinguished, they are also simply referred to as "start condition" or "execution condition". Further, when the first start condition and the second start condition are not particularly distinguished, they are also simply referred to as "start condition". Further, when the first special figure holding information and the second special figure holding information are not particularly distinguished, they are also simply referred to as "special figure holding information".

A special variable winning ball device 7 is provided in the lower portion of the game area on the game board 2. The special variable winning ball device 7 forms a large winning opening that changes between a closed state in which the game ball cannot pass (enter) and an open state in which the game ball can pass (enter). Specifically, the special variable winning ball device 7 includes, for example, a large winning opening door that is opened and closed by a solenoid 82 for the large winning opening door shown in FIG. 2, and is in a state of the large winning opening by opening and closing the large winning opening door. Change (open state, closed state).

As an example, the special variable winning ball device 7 closes the big winning door when the solenoid 82 is off to close the big winning door, and opens the big winning door when the solenoid 82 is on. The big winning opening is opened. The game ball that has passed (entered) the large winning opening that has been opened is detected by, for example, the count switch 23 shown in FIG. That is, by opening the large winning opening, a prize is generated in the large winning opening.

A predetermined number (for example, 12) of game balls are paid out as prize balls based on the occurrence of a prize in the large prize opening (detection of game balls by the count switch 23). The number of prize balls paid out based on the occurrence of a prize in the large prize opening (for example, 12) is the number of prize balls paid out based on the occurrence of the first start prize (for example, 3), and the second start prize. More than the number of prize balls paid out based on the occurrence of (for example, 3). That is, the state of the big winning opening (open state, closed state) greatly affects whether or not it is advantageous for the player.

A first special symbol display device 4A and a second special symbol display device 4B are provided on the right side portion of the game area on the game board 2. The first special symbol display device 4A is composed of, for example, a 7-segment LED (light emitting diode) of a dot matrix or the like. The same applies to the second special symbol display device 4B. The first special symbol display device 4A variably displays (variably displays) a special symbol (also referred to as "special symbol") which is a plurality of types of identification information (special identification information) capable of identifying each of them. The same applies to the second special symbol display device 4B. The special symbol (special symbol) variably displayed on the first special symbol display device 4A is also referred to as "first special symbol" or "special diagram 1", and is variably displayed on the second special symbol display device 4B. (Special figure) is also referred to as "second special figure" or "special figure 2". Further, a game executed with variable display of identification information (or variable display of identification information itself) is referred to as a variable display game. In particular, the variable display game (variable display game for variablely displaying the first special symbol) executed by the first special symbol display device 4A is also referred to as the first special symbol game, and the variable display game executed by the second special symbol display device 4B. (Variable display game in which the second special figure is variably displayed) is also referred to as a second special figure game. Further, when the first special figure game and the second special figure game are not distinguished, it is also simply referred to as a "special figure game".

The first special symbol display device 4A (the same applies to the second special symbol display device 4B) is a special symbol game of a plurality of types composed of numbers indicating "0" to "9", symbols indicating "-", and the like. Variable display of special symbols. Each special symbol has a symbol number corresponding to each.

A first hold display 25A and a second hold display 25B are provided on the right side portion of the game area (upper part of the first special symbol display device 4A and the second special symbol display device 4B) in the game board 2. .. The first hold display 25A is configured to include, for example, four LEDs, and specifies the first special figure hold storage number (the number of hold of the first special figure game) based on the hold data (first special figure hold information). The first hold display to be displayed as possible is performed. The second hold indicator 25B is configured to include, for example, four LEDs, and specifies the second special figure hold storage number (the number of hold of the second special figure game) based on the hold data (second special figure hold information). The second hold display to be displayed as possible is performed.

When the first hold display and the second hold display are not particularly distinguished, it is also simply referred to as "hold display". Further, the expression "hold display" may refer to an operation (LED lighting control by the first hold display 25A and the second hold display 25B), or may refer to the display itself (display by LED). .. For example, the hold display when it is said that the hold display is newly added indicates the newly added display itself. The same applies to the "hold display" in the start winning memory display area 5H (described later) and the "active display" (described later) in the active display area AHA (described later).

On the left side of the game area on the game board 2, a passage gate 41, a normal symbol display 20, and a normal map hold display 25C are provided. The game ball that has passed through the passing gate 41 is detected by, for example, the gate switch 21 shown in FIG. Based on the fact that the game ball that has passed through the passing gate 41 is detected by the gate switch 21, if the number of reserved memory (described later) is equal to or less than a predetermined upper limit value (for example, "4"), the normal symbol display 20 The normal map start condition for executing the normal map game (described later) executed in is satisfied.

The ordinary symbol display 20 is composed of a 7-segment LED, a dot matrix LED, or the like, similarly to the first special symbol display device 4A and the second special symbol display device 4B. The ordinary symbol display 20 variably displays (variably displays) an ordinary symbol (also referred to as a "normal diagram" or "ordinary symbol") which is a plurality of types of identification information different from the special symbol. A variable display game in which a normal symbol is variably displayed is also referred to as a normal figure game (or "normal figure game"). Information about the Fuzu game in which the Fuzu start condition is satisfied but the Fuzu start condition (described later) is not satisfied is stored (held) as hold data (Public map hold information).

The normal figure hold display 25C is configured to include, for example, four LEDs, and displays the number of normal figure hold storages based on the hold data (normal figure hold information), for example, by the number of LEDs to be turned on. The normal figure hold storage number is the number of normal figure games whose execution is temporarily suspended without being executed immediately when the game ball that has passed through the passing gate 41 is detected by the gate switch 21. That is, the number of reserved fuzu is the number of games of the fuzu game that are waiting to be executed. The number of reserved normal maps is reduced by 1 each time one condition for starting a normal map is satisfied.

An image display device 5 is provided near the center of the game area on the game board 2. The image display device 5 is composed of, for example, an LCD (liquid crystal display device) or the like, and forms a display area for displaying various effect images.

Decorative pattern display areas 5L, 5C, and 5R are arranged in the display area of the image display device 5. In the decorative pattern display areas 5L, 5C, and 5R, decorative patterns, which are a plurality of types of identification information that can identify each of them, are variably displayed. Specifically, in the decorative symbol display areas 5L, 5C, and 5R, the variation of the decorative symbol is started in conjunction with (corresponding to) the special symbol game, and the fixed decorative symbol (also referred to as the final stop symbol) is stopped and displayed. .. The decorative symbol corresponding to the decorative symbol display area 5L is also referred to as a left symbol, the decorative symbol corresponding to the decorative symbol display area 5C is also referred to as a medium symbol, and the decorative symbol corresponding to the decorative symbol display area 5R is also referred to as a right symbol. Variable display of decorative patterns is also included in the variable display game.

Further, a start winning memory display area 5H is arranged in the display area of the image display device 5. In the start winning prize storage display area 5H, the hold display corresponding to the hold information is performed. In the start winning prize memory display area 5H, for example, the hold display may be performed left-justified. That is, when the number of holdings of the special figure game increases due to the establishment of the new starting condition, the new holding display is consumed in order from the left end of the starting winning memory display area 5H (the closest side to the active display area AHA). May be added. When the number of holdings of the special figure game decreases due to the establishment of the new start condition, the holding display (the oldest holding display) displayed at the left end of the start winning memory display area 5H is deleted and the hold display is deleted. , When there is another hold display, move (shift) the other hold display (each hold display when there are multiple other hold displays) to the left.

Further, an active display area (also referred to as a display area this time, an active hold display area, a display area at the time of digestion, etc.) AHA is arranged in the display area of the image display device 5. In the active display area, active display (also referred to as digestion display, current display, etc.) is performed based on the fact that the hold display is deleted from the start winning memory display area 5H when the start condition is satisfied. That is, when the start condition is satisfied, the hold display displayed at the left end of the start winning memory display area 5H is moved (shifted) to the active display area AHA, and the active display is displayed. Hereinafter, the active display displayed based on the deletion of a certain hold display M may also be referred to as an active display corresponding to the hold display M.

In the present embodiment, the active display area AHA is arranged on the left side of the start winning memory display area 5H as shown in FIG. 1, but the active display area AHA is any one of the display areas of the image display device 5. It suffices if it is placed in a position.

An upper plate and a lower plate are provided at predetermined positions of the gaming machine frame 3 below the gaming area. A stick controller 31A that can be gripped and tilted by a player is attached to a member forming the lower plate, for example, at a predetermined position on the front side of the upper surface of the lower plate body (for example, the central portion of the lower plate). There is. The member forming the upper plate includes, for example, a push button 31B that allows a player to perform a predetermined instruction operation by a pressing operation or the like at a predetermined position on the front side (for example, above the stick controller 31A) on the upper surface of the upper plate body. It is provided.

A voice output member is provided in the peripheral portion of the gaming area of the gaming machine frame 3. In the example shown in FIG. 1, the speaker 8UL and the speaker 8UR are installed at the upper left and right positions of the gaming machine frame 3, and the speaker 8LL and the speaker 8LR are placed at the lower left and right slanted lower part of the upper plate (the upper left and right slanted upper part of the lower plate). It is installed. Hereinafter, when the speakers 8UL, 8UR, 8LL, and 8LR are not particularly distinguished, they are simply referred to as the speaker 8.

A movable accessory (movable body) that operates as an effect or decoration is provided inside and around the game area of the gaming machine frame 3. In the example shown in FIG. 1, the upper position of the image display device 5 is from the first position (initial position shown in FIG. 1) to the second position (lower end position, for example, the position in front of the display area of the image display device 5). A movable accessory 17 that can be moved up to is provided.

Further, a light emitting member (light emitting body) that emits light as an effect or decoration is provided inside and around the game area of the gaming machine frame 3. In the example shown in FIG. 1, the light emitting member 9CC is installed on the movable accessory 17, the light emitting member 9CL and the light emitting member 9CR are installed at the left and right positions of the image display device 5, and the light emitting member is installed at the upper position of the gaming machine frame 3. The light emitting member 9SL and the light emitting member 9SR are installed at the left and right positions of the 9U and the gaming machine frame 3. Hereinafter, when each of the light emitting members 9CC, 9CL, 9CR, 9U, 9SL, and 9SR is not particularly distinguished, it is simply referred to as a lamp 9.

The image display device 5, the speaker 8, the lamp 9, and the movable accessory 17 described above are effect devices for executing the effect, but the gaming machine 1 is, for example, another effect such as a device having a vibrating portion and a device having a blower portion. It may be equipped with a device.

Next, the progress of the game in the pachinko gaming machine 1 will be schematically described.

In the pachinko gaming machine 1, the normal symbol game by the normal symbol display 20 is started based on the fact that the normal map start condition is satisfied after the normal map start condition is satisfied. In the normal symbol game, after the variable display of the normal symbol is started (after the fluctuation of the normal symbol is started), when the predetermined time that becomes the normal symbol fluctuation time elapses, the fixed normal symbol that becomes the variable display result of the normal symbol is confirmed. Is stopped and displayed (derivative display). At this time, if a specific normal symbol (design per normal symbol) such as a number indicating "7" is stopped and displayed as a confirmed normal symbol, the variable display result of the normal symbol is "per normal symbol (per normal symbol)". ". On the other hand, if a normal symbol other than the normal symbol, such as a number or symbol other than the number indicating "7", is stopped and displayed as a confirmed normal symbol, the variable display result of the normal symbol is "normal" loss (normal). Design loss) ”. In response to the fact that the variable display result of the normal symbol is "hit the normal figure", the expansion / opening control (tilted control) is performed in which the movable wing piece of the electric tulip constituting the normal variable winning ball device 6B is in the tilted position. However, normal open control is performed to return to the vertical position after a predetermined time has elapsed.

In the pachinko gaming machine 1, the first special figure game is started based on the fact that the first start condition is satisfied after the first start condition is satisfied, and the second start condition is satisfied after the second start condition is satisfied. Based on this, the second special figure game is started. In the special symbol game, after the variable display of the special symbol is started (after the fluctuation of the special symbol is started), when the variable display time as the special symbol fluctuation time elapses, the variable display result of the special symbol is confirmed special. The design (special figure display result) is derived and displayed. At this time, if a specific special symbol (big hit symbol) is stopped and displayed as a confirmed special symbol, it becomes a "big hit" as a specific display result, and if a special symbol different from the jackpot symbol is stopped and displayed as a confirmed special symbol, " It becomes "missing". If a predetermined special symbol (small hit symbol) different from the big hit symbol or the small hit symbol is stopped and displayed, it may be a "small hit" as a predetermined display result.

In the pachinko gaming machine 1 of the present embodiment, as an example, a special symbol showing the numbers “3”, “5”, and “7” is used as a jackpot symbol, and a special symbol indicating the symbol “−” is used as a lost symbol. Note that different special symbols in the first special figure game and the second special figure game may be used as jackpot symbols.

After the variable display result in the special figure game becomes "big hit", the pachinko gaming machine 1 is controlled to the big hit gaming state which is a specific gaming state. The pachinko gaming machine 1 controls the big winning opening formed by the special variable winning ball device 7 to be in the open state in the big hit gaming state. The jackpot gaming state in which the jackpot is controlled to be open is an example of an advantageous state that is advantageous to the player. Further, after the variable display result in the special figure game becomes "small hit", the pachinko gaming machine 1 is controlled to a small hit gaming state which is a special gaming state different from the big hit gaming state.

Specifically, the pachinko gaming machine 1 determines a round (also referred to as “round game”) that is advantageous to the player in the big hit game state after the variable display result in the special figure game becomes “big hit”. The number of times (predetermined number of rounds) is executed. The round is an open cycle of the big winning opening. In each round (each round), the pachinko gaming machine 1 opens and closes the large winning opening door of the special variable winning ball device 7 to change the state of the large winning opening (open state, closed state). For example, the pachinko gaming machine 1 opens the big prize opening door at the start of the round to change the big winning opening from the closed state to the open state, keeps the big winning opening open, and then closes the big winning door. The big winning opening is changed from the open state to the closed state, and one round is completed. In the round, the big winning opening is whether a predetermined upper limit opening time (for example, 29 seconds) elapses after opening the big winning opening door, or a predetermined number of winnings (for example, 9 pieces) occur in the big winning opening. It is maintained in the open state until any of the conditions is satisfied.

The pachinko gaming machine 1 repeatedly executes rounds in the jackpot gaming state until the number of rounds executed reaches a predetermined upper limit. Even before the number of rounds executed reaches the predetermined upper limit, the pachinko gaming machine 1 executes the rounds when a predetermined condition is satisfied (for example, the game ball does not win in the large winning opening). May be terminated. In the present embodiment, the predetermined upper limit is two types (8 times corresponding to 8R and 16 times corresponding to 16R; see FIG. 7), but may be one type or three or more types. You may.

In the decorative symbol display areas 5L, 5C, and 5R arranged in the display area of the image display device 5, variable display of the decorative symbol is started in response to the start of the special symbol game. In addition, the reach state may be reached during the period from the start of the variable display of the decorative symbol to the end of the variable display due to the stop display of the fixed decorative symbol. The reach state is a decorative symbol that has not yet been stopped and displayed when the decorative symbol that has been stopped and displayed in the display area of the image display device 5 constitutes a part of the jackpot combination (also referred to as a "reach variable symbol"). Is a display state in which fluctuations continue, or a display state in which all or part of the decorative symbols are changed in synchronization while forming all or part of the jackpot combination. The production in the reach state is called the reach production.

As the effect operation in the reach effect, a plurality of types of effect patterns (also referred to as "reach patterns") having different operation modes (reach modes) may be prepared in advance. Then, depending on the effect pattern, the possibility that the jackpot combination or the like is finally stopped and displayed after the reach effect (also referred to as “big hit expectation” or “big hit reliability”) may be different.

The degree of expectation of a big hit by a certain effect is, for example, (probability that the effect is executed at the time of a big hit) × (probability of being a big hit) / {(probability that the effect is executed at the time of a big hit) × (probability of being a big hit). It is calculated by + (probability that the effect is executed other than at the time of big hit) x (probability that it does not become big hit)}. If a certain effect is always executed as a "big hit", the expected degree of big hit of the effect is "1". The same applies to the degree of expectation of super reach due to a certain production.

The reach production is a production that gives notice and suggests to the player that the expectation of a big hit is high, but the pachinko gaming machine 1 gives a notice to the player that the expectation of a big hit is high in addition to the reach production. It is possible to execute a suggestive effect (for example, a hold effect, a pseudo-continuous effect, etc.). Further, the pachinko gaming machine 1 can execute an effect (for example, a hold effect, a slip effect, etc.) that gives notice and suggests to the player that any reach effect or a certain reach effect will be executed. Hereinafter, the effect of notifying or suggesting to the player that any reach effect or a certain reach effect may be executed or that the expectation of a big hit is high may be collectively referred to as a notice effect.

It should be noted that the notification (notice, suggestion) by the advance notice effect may be performed before the player recognizes whether or not the notification content is realized. For example, the advance notice effect for notifying the possibility of reaching the reach state may be performed before the reach state (or non-reach state) is reached. Further, the advance notice effect for notifying the possibility that the variable display result may be a "big hit" may be performed before the final decoration symbol is stopped and displayed.

The advance notice effect may include a pre-reading advance notice effect (also referred to as "preliminary determination advance notice effect"). Before starting the variable display that is the target of the advance notice, the pre-reading notice effect determines whether or not the variable display result is a "big hit" based on the hold information of the special figure game. (Look ahead), it is a notice effect to be executed based on the determination result. In the following description, the hold information targeted for the pre-reading notice effect is referred to as the target hold information, the hold display corresponding to the target hold information is referred to as the target hold display, and the variable display corresponding to the target hold information is referred to. Also called variable display of the target. The active display corresponding to the hold display of the target (active display displayed during the variable display of the target) is also referred to as the active display of the target.

The display mode of the active display may be determined at the time of winning, at the time of the hold display (before the active display is reached), or at the time of the active display (at the start of the fluctuation). May be decided. Further, the display mode of the hold display and the display mode of the active corresponding to the hold display (active display displayed by deleting the hold display) may be the same (or substantially the same). They may be related to each other. The same (or substantially the same) display mode means that, for example, an active display having the same or substantially the same display mode as the display mode of the hold display before erasure is displayed.

The display modes are related to each other. For example, there are three types of display modes (expectation of display mode a> expectation of display mode b> expectation of display mode c) as display modes of hold display. However, as the display mode of the active display, three types of display modes having different jackpot expectations (expectation of display mode s> expectation of display mode t> expectation of display mode u. However, the display mode s is display mode a, Different from any of b and c, the display mode t is different from any of the display modes a, b and c, and the display mode u is different from any of the display modes a, b and c). When the hold display is deleted, the active display of the display mode s is displayed, when the hold display of the display mode b is deleted, the active display of the display mode t is displayed, and when the hold display of the display mode c is deleted, the display is displayed. The active display of aspect u is displayed. When the active display effect at the time of addition, which will be described later, is executed, the active display of the display mode t or the display mode u is displayed when the hold display of the display mode a is deleted, and the hold display of the display mode b is deleted. When this is done, the active display of the display mode u is displayed.

In the present embodiment, as the pre-reading notice effect, it is possible to execute the hold effect according to the display mode of the hold display in the start winning prize storage display area 5H. For the hold effect, for example, the hold display to be added to the start winning memory display area 5H is displayed in a notice mode (blue or red in the present embodiment) different from the normal mode (white in the present embodiment) (hold at the time of addition). The effect) and the effect (hold change effect) of changing the already displayed hold display to the notice mode (including the change from one notice mode to another notice mode) are included.

Further, in the present embodiment, as the pre-reading notice effect, it is an effect to be executed when the hold display is changed to the notice mode, and a character or the like is displayed in the display area of the image display device 5 to directly display the hold display or directly to the hold display. It is possible to execute an effect that indirectly acts (holding action effect. It may be referred to as "holding action success effect" to distinguish it from "holding action failure effect" described later). Further, it may be possible to execute an effect (holding action failure effect) that is executed when the hold display is not changed to the advance notice mode, which is an effect common to the hold action success effect and at least a part of the effect modes.

Further, in the present embodiment, as the advance notice effect (or the look-ahead advance notice effect), the active display effect according to the display mode of the active display in the active display area AHA may be feasible. The active display effect includes, for example, an effect of displaying the active display to be added to the active display area AHA in the notice mode (active display effect at the time of addition) when the hold display at the time of erasure is in the normal mode, or a display in the normal mode. It includes an effect (active display change effect) in which the active display is changed to a notice mode (including a change from one notice mode to another notice mode). When the hold change effect and the active display change effect are not particularly distinguished, they may be referred to as "hold change effect".

Further, when the active display effect is feasible, the hold action success effect is executed when the active display is changed to the advance notice mode, and the character or the like is displayed in the display area of the image display device 5 to be the active display. It may be an effect that acts directly or indirectly. Similarly, the hold action failure effect may be an effect executed when the active display is not changed to the advance notice mode.

Further, in the present embodiment, it is possible to execute a concealment effect that conceals the hold display in the start winning prize memory display area 5H. The concealment effect is an effect that makes it difficult to visually recognize at least a part of the hold display. For example, in the concealment effect, it is difficult to visually recognize the hold display so that even the number of hold displays displayed in the start winning memory display area 5H cannot be recognized at all (for example, an image for concealment is displayed on the front surface (upper layer)). It becomes like a silhouette as a whole and is vague and difficult to see, an image for concealment is displayed on the front and it is difficult to see partially, and the hold display itself becomes difficult to see (smaller and semi-transparent) It may be an effect that makes it difficult or impossible (for example, an image for concealment is displayed on the front surface and is completely invisible, or is completely invisible due to transparency or non-display). Further, although the number of hold displays displayed in the start winning memory display area 5H is somehow recognizable (for example, recognizable by a silhouette), it may be an effect that makes it difficult or impossible to visually recognize each display mode. .. Further, although the display mode is recognizable, it may be an effect that makes it difficult or impossible to visually recognize the number. For example, it may notify the presence or absence of a hold display (for example, a red hold display) in a certain display mode. Further, in the case of the hold display in which the notice mode is expressed not in the whole but in a part (for example, the upper part), it is difficult for the concealment effect to visually recognize the upper part of each hold display displayed in the start winning memory display area 5H. Alternatively, it may be an effect that makes it impossible.

Further, as the concealment effect, the active display in the active display area AHA may be concealed in place of or in addition to the hold display in the start winning memory display area 5H.

In the present embodiment, as a definite special symbol in the special symbol game, a special symbol indicating the number "3" among the special symbols (special symbols indicating the numbers "3", "5", "7") that are the jackpot symbols is shown. When the symbol or the special symbol indicating the number "5" is stopped and displayed, it becomes "8R probability variation jackpot" which is one aspect of "big hit". Further, when the special symbol indicating the number "7" is stopped and displayed, it becomes "16R probability variation big hit" which is one aspect of "big hit". After the end of the 16R probability variation jackpot or the 8R probability variation jackpot, the probability variation control (probability fluctuation control) is performed together with the time reduction control (time reduction control).

By performing the probability variation control, the probability that the variable display result becomes a "big hit" in each special figure game is improved so as to be higher than when the probability variation control is not performed. The probabilistic control is performed under either a condition of executing a special figure game with a predetermined number of STs (also referred to as a probabilistic number of times) after the end of the jackpot gaming state, or a condition when the variable display result is "big hit". Ends when is first established. Therefore, even if the variable display result does not become a "big hit" when the probabilistic change control is performed, the probabilistic change control is performed when the special figure game of a predetermined number of STs (probability change number) is exhausted. finish. The predetermined number of STs is, for example, 70 times.

Further, by performing the time saving control, the variable display time (special figure fluctuation time) of the special symbol in the special figure game is shortened as compared with the case where the time saving control is not performed. The time reduction control is performed when either of the conditions that the special figure game of a predetermined number of time reductions is executed after the end of the big hit game state and that the variable display result is "big hit" are satisfied first. It ends in. Therefore, even if the variable display result does not become a "big hit" when the time reduction control is being performed, the time reduction control ends when the special figure game of a predetermined number of time reductions is exhausted. The predetermined number of time reductions is, for example, 70 times.

When the time reduction control is performed, the normal symbol display 20 controls the fluctuation time of the normal symbol (normal symbol fluctuation time) in the normal symbol game to be shorter than when the time reduction control is not performed, or is normal in each normal symbol game. In the normal variable winning ball device 6B based on the control that improves the probability that the variable display result of the symbol becomes "per ordinary figure" compared to the time when the time saving control is not performed, and the variable display result becomes "per ordinary figure". The game ball wins the second start, such as control to make the tilt control time for tilt control of the movable wing piece longer than when time reduction control is not performed, and control to increase the number of tilts compared to when time reduction control is not performed. Control that is advantageous to the player is performed by making it easier to pass (enter) the mouth and increasing the possibility that the second starting condition is satisfied. As described above, the control that makes it easier for the game ball to enter the second start winning opening due to the time saving control and is advantageous for the player is also referred to as a high opening control. As the high open control, any one of these controls may be performed, or a plurality of controls may be combined and performed.

By performing the high opening control, the frequency of the second start winning opening being in the expanded open state is increased as compared with the case where the high opening control is not performed. Therefore, the second start condition for executing the second special figure game by the second special symbol display device 4B becomes easy to be satisfied, and the second special symbol game can be executed frequently, so that the variable display result is next. Is shortened until it becomes a "big hit". The period during which the high opening control can be executed is also referred to as a high opening control period, and this period may be the same as the period during which the time saving control is performed.

The gaming state in which both the time saving control and the high opening control are performed is also referred to as a time saving state or a high base state. Further, the gaming state in which the probability change control is performed is also referred to as a high probability state or a probability change state. The time saving state (high base state) and the high probability state (probability change state) are examples of advantageous states that are advantageous to the player.

The gaming state in which the time saving control and the high opening control are performed together with the probability change control, that is, the gaming state which is both the high probability state (probability change state) and the high base state (time reduction state), is the high accuracy high base state or the time reduction probability change state. Also called. A gaming state in which only probabilistic control is performed and time saving control or high opening control is not performed, that is, a gaming state in which a high probability state (probability change state) but not a high base state (time saving state) is performed is a high probability low base state. Alternatively, it is also referred to as a time-saving uncertain change state. In addition, only the high accuracy high base state (probability change state with time reduction) may be referred to as "probability change state". A gaming state in which time reduction control or high opening control is performed without probability change control, that is, a gaming state that is not a high probability state (probability change state) but a high base state (time reduction state) is also called a low probability high base state. Will be done. A gaming state in which probabilistic control is not performed and time reduction control or high opening control is not performed, that is, a gaming state that is neither a high probability state (probability change state) nor a high base state (time reduction state) is also called a low probability low base state. Will be done. The low-accuracy low-base state is a normal state in which no probability variation control, time-saving control, or high-opening control is performed. Sometimes referred to as "normal state". The initial setting state of the pachinko gaming machine 1 (a state after the initialization process is executed after the power is turned on, for example, when a system reset is performed) is a normal state.

In addition, in this embodiment, even if the variable display result does not become a "big hit" when the probability change control is performed, when the special figure game of a predetermined number of STs (probability change number) is digested. Although the probability variation control ends, the probability variation control may not be terminated until the variable display result becomes a "big hit" without providing the number of STs (probability variation number). That is, a probabilistic jackpot may be provided to continue the probabilistic control until the next jackpot. When a probabilistic jackpot that continues the probabilistic control until the next big hit is provided, a normal jackpot in which the probabilistic change control is not performed after the end may be further provided.

The pachinko gaming machine 1 is equipped with various control boards such as a main board 11, an effect control board 12, a voice control board 13, and a lamp control board 14, as shown in FIG. 2, for example. Further, the pachinko gaming machine 1 is also equipped with a relay board 15 for relaying various control signals transmitted between the main board 11 and the effect control board 12. In addition, various boards such as a payout control board, an information terminal board, a launch control board, and an interface board are arranged on the back surface of the game board 2 and the like in the pachinko gaming machine 1.

The main board 11 is a control board on the main side, and is equipped with various circuits for controlling the progress of the game in the pachinko gaming machine 1. The main board 11 is mainly addressed to a sub-side control board including a random number setting function used in a special figure game, a function of inputting a signal from a switch or the like arranged at a predetermined position, and an effect control board 12. , It has a function to output and transmit a control command as an example of command information as a control signal, and a function to output various information to a hall management computer. Further, the main board 11 controls lighting / extinguishing of each LED (for example, a segment LED) constituting the first special symbol display device 4A and the second special symbol display device 4B to control the lighting / extinguishing of the first special symbol and the second special symbol. Variable display of predetermined identification information, such as controlling the variable display of the normal symbol and controlling the variable display of the normal symbol by the normal symbol display 20 by controlling the lighting / extinguishing / coloring of the normal symbol display 20. It also has a control function.

On the main board 11, for example, a game control microcomputer 100, a switch circuit 110 that takes in detection signals from various switches for game ball detection and transmits them to the game control microcomputer 100, and a game control microcomputer 100. A solenoid circuit 111 or the like that transmits a solenoid drive signal to the solenoids 81 and 82 is mounted.

The effect control board 12 is a control board on the sub side independent of the main board 11, receives a control signal transmitted from the main board 11 via the relay board 15, and receives an image display device 5, a speaker 8, and a lamp. Various circuits for controlling the effect operation by the movable accessory 17 and the like are installed.

The audio control board 13 is a control board for audio output control provided separately from the effect control board 12, and is for outputting audio from the speaker 8 based on commands and control data from the effect control board 12. It is equipped with a processing circuit that executes voice signal processing. The lamp control board 14 is a control board for lamp output control provided separately from the effect control board 12, and is driven to turn on / off the lamp 9 or the like based on commands and control data from the effect control board 12. It is equipped with a lamp driver circuit to perform. The accessory control board 16 is a control board for controlling the operation of the accessory provided separately from the effect control board 12, and drives the movable accessory 17 based on commands and control data from the effect control board 12. A circuit that outputs a drive signal is mounted on an actuator (not shown).

As shown in FIG. 2, a wiring for transmitting a detection signal from the gate switch 21, the first start port switch 22A, the second start port switch 22B, and the count switch 23 is connected to the main board 11. The gate switch 21, the first start port switch 22A, the second start port switch 22B, and the count switch 23 have an arbitrary configuration capable of detecting a game ball as a game medium, such as a sensor. It should be. In addition to the gate switch 21, the first start port switch 22A, the second start port switch 22B, and the count switch 23, the game machine 1 also has other switches connected to the main board 11 (for example, a glass door (not shown)). ) May be provided with a switch for detecting the open / closed state of the game board 2, a switch for detecting the open / closed state of the game board 2, a switch for detecting illegal vibration, and a switch for detecting an illegal electromagnetic wave). Further, on the main board 11, the first special symbol display device 4A, the second special symbol display device 4B, the normal symbol display 20, the first hold display 25A, the second hold display 25B, and the normal figure hold display 25C Wiring for transmitting a command signal for performing display control such as is connected.

The control signal transmitted from the main board 11 to the effect control board 12 is relayed by the relay board 15. The control command transmitted from the main board 11 to the effect control board 12 via the relay board 15 is, for example, an effect control command transmitted and received as an electric signal.

FIG. 3A is an explanatory diagram showing an example of the contents of the effect control command used in the present embodiment. The effect control command has, for example, a 2-byte configuration, the first byte represents MODE (command classification), and the second byte represents EXT (command type). The first bit (bit 7) of the MODE data is always "1", and the first bit of the EXT data is "0". The command form shown in FIG. 3A is an example, and other command forms may be used. Further, in this example, the effect control command is composed of two control signals, but the number of control signals constituting the effect control command may be one or a plurality of three or more. good.

The information constituting each effect control command may be stored in the command table in the ROM 101, for example. When a certain effect control command is transmitted to the effect control board 12, the storage address of the effect control command in the above command table is specified by the transmission command pointer in the transmission command buffer as a setting for transmitting the effect control command. It may be stored in the created buffer area. After that, the command control process (step S17) of the game control timer interrupt process (FIG. 11) is executed, so that the effect control command set as described above is transmitted from the main board 11 to the effect control board 12. Is transmitted.

A part of FIG. 3A will be described. For example, the command 8001H is a first variable start command that specifies the start of the first special figure game. The command 8002H is a second variable start command that specifies the start of the second special figure game. The command 81XXH is a variable pattern designation command for designating a variable pattern such as a decorative symbol that is variablely displayed in each decorative symbol display area 5L, 5C, 5R corresponding to the variable display of the special symbol in the special symbol game. XXH indicates that it is an unspecified hexadecimal number, and may be a value arbitrarily set according to the content of instruction by the effect control command. In the variation pattern specification command, different EXT data are set according to the variation pattern to be specified.

Command 8CXXXH is a variable display result notification command for notifying a variable display result. In the variable display result notification command, for example, as shown in FIG. 3B, the determination result and the jackpot type of whether the variable display result is "missing", "16R probability variation jackpot", or "8R probability variation jackpot". Different EXT data are set according to the determination result of.

The command B100H is a first start opening winning notification command for notifying that the first starting condition has been satisfied (sometimes referred to as a first starting opening winning designation command or a first starting opening winning command). The command B200H is a second start opening winning notification command for notifying that the second starting condition for executing the second special symbol game by the second special symbol display device 4B is satisfied (second starting opening winning designation command). , It may be called a command at the time of winning the second starting port).

The command C1XXH is a first hold storage number notification command for notifying the first special figure hold storage number. The command C2XXH is a second reserved storage number notification command for notifying the second special figure reserved storage number. For example, when the first start winning is generated (when the number of reserved storages in the first special figure increases), the first holding storage number notification command is transmitted together with the first starting opening winning notification command. Further, when the second start winning is generated (when the second special figure reserved storage number increases), the second starting opening winning notification command and the second reserved storage number notification command are transmitted.

The command C4XXH and the command C6XXH are effect control commands (commands for designating a winning determination result) indicating the contents of the winning determination result. The command C4XXH is a symbol designation command indicating a determination result of whether or not the variable display result is a "big hit" as a winning determination result, and a determination result of the big hit type. Further, the command C6XXH is a variation category designation command (also referred to as "variation category command") indicating a determination result of a variation category (also referred to as "variation pattern type") as a winning determination result. The variation category is a name when the variation patterns of decorative patterns are classified (aggregated) by type. In other words, the variation category is the group name of each group including the variation pattern of one or more decorative symbols categorized into a common group.

In the present embodiment, in the winning random number value determination process (FIG. 15), when the starting winning is generated, the variable category is excluded except for some cases (for example, when the first starting winning is given in a high base state or the like). The fluctuation category is determined based on the random value MR3 for determination. Then, a value corresponding to the determination result is set in the EXT data of the variable category command, and control is performed to transmit the value to the effect control board 12. The effect control CPU 120 mounted on the effect control board 12 has a variable display based on the start prize based on the value set in the variable category command transmitted from the main board 11 when the start prize is generated. It is possible to recognize whether or not it becomes.

The game control microcomputer 100 mounted on the main board 11 is, for example, a one-chip computer, which is a ROM (Read Only Memory) 101 for storing game control programs, fixed data, and the like, and a game control work. RAM (Random Access Memory) 102 that provides an area, CPU (Central Processing Unit) 103 that executes a game control program to perform control operations, and updates of numerical data indicating random values independently of CPU 103. It is configured to include a random number circuit 104 to be performed and an I / O (Input / Output port) 105.

FIG. 4 is an explanatory diagram illustrating a random number value that is counted (updated) on the side of the main board 11. As shown in FIG. 4, in the present embodiment, on the side of the main board 11, the random number value MR1 for determining the special figure display result, the random number value MR2 for determining the jackpot type, the random number value MR3 for determining the variable category, and the general drawing. Numerical data indicating each of the random value MR4 for determining the display result and the random value MR5 for determining the fluctuation pattern are controlled so as to be countable. In addition, random values other than these may be used in order to enhance the game effect. Random numbers used to control the progress of such games are also referred to as game random numbers.

The random number circuit 104 may count numerical data indicating a part or all of the random numbers MR1 to MR5. The CPU 103 uses a random counter different from the random number circuit 104, such as a random counter provided in the game control counter setting unit 154 shown in FIG. 8, and updates various numerical data by software, whereby the random number values MR1 to 1 Numerical data indicating a part of MR5 may be counted.

FIG. 5 is an explanatory diagram illustrating an example of a variation category and a variation pattern in the present embodiment. In FIG. 5, the fluctuation category “PA1” is a shortened / non-reach (loss) fluctuation category. The fluctuation pattern "PA1-1" belongs to the fluctuation category "PA1". The variable category "PA2" is a non-reach (missing) variable category. Fluctuation patterns "PA2-1" and "PA2-2" belong to the variation category "PA2". The fluctuation category "PA3" is a normal reach (loss) fluctuation category. Fluctuation patterns "PA3-1" and "PA3-2" belong to the variation category "PA3". The fluctuation category "PA4" is a super reach α (loss) fluctuation category. Fluctuation patterns "PA4-1" to "PA4-3" belong to the variation category "PA4". The fluctuation category "PA5" is a super reach β (loss) fluctuation category. Fluctuation patterns "PA5-1" to "PA5-3" belong to the variation category "PA5". The variable category "PB1" is a shortened / reach (big hit) variable category. The fluctuation pattern "PB1-1" belongs to the fluctuation category "PB1". The variable category "PB3" is a normal reach (big hit) variable category. Fluctuation patterns "PB3-1" and "PB3-2" belong to the variation category "PB3". The variable category "PB4" is a super reach α (big hit) variable category. Fluctuation patterns "PB4-1" to "PB4-3" belong to the variation category "PB4". The variable category "PB5" is a super reach β (big hit) variable category. Fluctuation patterns "PB5-1" to "PB5-3" belong to the variation category "PB5".

A part of FIG. 5 will be described. For example, the fluctuation pattern “PA3-1” belonging to the fluctuation category “PA3” is a normal reach (loss) fluctuation pattern in which the special figure fluctuation time is a normal length. Further, the fluctuation pattern "PA3-2" is a normal reach (loss) fluctuation pattern in which a pseudo-continuous fluctuation (effect) is executed once. The fluctuation pattern "PA4-1" belonging to the fluctuation category "PA4" is a super reach α (loss) fluctuation pattern in which the special figure fluctuation time is a normal length. The variation pattern "PA4-2" is a super reach α (loss) variation pattern in which a pseudo-continuous variation (effect) is executed once. The variation pattern "PA4-3" is a super reach α (loss) variation pattern in which the pseudo-continuous variation (effect) is executed twice. The fluctuation pattern "PB3-1" belonging to the fluctuation category "PB3" is a normal reach (big hit) fluctuation pattern in which the special figure fluctuation time is a normal length. Further, the fluctuation pattern "PB3-2" is a normal reach (big hit) fluctuation pattern in which the pseudo-continuous fluctuation (effect) is executed once. The fluctuation pattern "PB1-1" belonging to the fluctuation category "PB1" is a shortened / reach (big hit) fluctuation pattern in which the special figure fluctuation time is shorter than that of the fluctuation pattern "PB3-1". The fluctuation pattern "PB4-1" belonging to the fluctuation category "PB4" is a super reach α (big hit) fluctuation pattern in which the special figure fluctuation time is a normal length. The variation pattern "PB4-2" is a super reach α (big hit) variation pattern in which a pseudo-continuous variation (effect) is executed once. The variation pattern "PB4-3" is a super reach α (big hit) variation pattern in which the pseudo-continuous variation (effect) is executed twice.

FIG. 6 shows a configuration example of the display result determination table stored in the ROM 101. The display result determination table 130 shown in FIG. 6 converts the special figure display result into a random number value MR1 for determining the special figure display result before the variable display result (special figure display result) of the special figure game is derived and displayed. A table that is referenced to make decisions based on. In the display result determination table 130 shown in FIG. 6, the determination value (for determining the special figure display result) assigned to each special figure display result (“big hit”, “missing”) according to the gaming state in the pachinko gaming machine 1. The number of random values (values to be compared with MR1) is different. According to the display result determination table 130 shown in FIG. 6, when the gaming state is in the high probability state, more determination values are assigned to the “big hit” than in the low probability state. In other words, when it is in the high probability state, the probability of becoming a "big hit" is higher than when it is in the low probability state.

FIG. 7 shows a configuration example of the jackpot type determination table 131 stored in the ROM 101. The jackpot type determination table 131 shown in FIG. 7 is for determining the jackpot type to be selected from a plurality of types when the special figure display result is determined to be controlled to the jackpot gaming state as "big hit". It is a table referred to for determination based on a random number value MR2. In the jackpot type determination table 131 shown in FIG. 7, depending on whether the variable special figure is the first special figure or the second special figure (that is, whether the first special figure game is executed or the second special figure game is executed). If the number of judgment values (values compared with the random value MR2 for determining the jackpot type) assigned to each jackpot type (“16R probability variation jackpot”, “8R probability variation jackpot”) is different. I'm letting you. According to the jackpot type determination table 131 shown in FIG. 7, when the variable special map is the second special map (when the second special map game is executed), it is higher than when the variable special map is the first special map. (More than when executing the first special figure game), many judgment values are assigned to "16R probability variation jackpot". That is, in the second special figure game, the probability of becoming a "16R probability variation big hit" is higher when the "big hit" is made than in the first special figure game.

Further, the ROM 101 has a variation category determination table referred to for determining a variation category to any one of a plurality of types, and a variation pattern referred to for determining a variation pattern to any one of a plurality of types. The decision table is stored.

The RAM 102 holds various data used for controlling the progress of the game in the pachinko gaming machine 1. The RAM 102 is a backup RAM in which a part or all of the data to be held is backed up by a backup power source created in a predetermined power supply board.

FIG. 8 is a block diagram showing a configuration example of a game control data holding area provided in the RAM 102. The RAM 102 is provided with a game control data holding area 150 as shown in FIG. 8, for example, as an area for holding various data used for controlling the progress of the game in the pachinko gaming machine 1. The game control data holding area 150 shown in FIG. 8 includes a first special figure holding storage unit 151A, a second special figure holding storage unit 151B, a holding specific information storage unit 151C, a normal figure holding storage unit 151D, and a game. It includes a control flag setting unit 152, a game control timer setting unit 153, a game control counter setting unit 154, and a game control buffer setting unit 155.

The first special figure reservation storage unit 151A stores the hold data (first hold information) of the first special figure game. As an example, the first special figure reservation storage unit 151A associates the holding number with the winning order (the order of detecting the game ball) to the first starting winning opening, and random numbers are generated by the CPU 103 based on the passage (entry) of the game ball. Numerical data indicating random number values extracted from the circuit 104 or the like (for example, numerical data indicating random number values MR1 to MR3) is set as pending data and stored until the stored number reaches a predetermined upper limit value (for example, "4"). do.

The second special figure reservation storage unit 151B stores the hold data (second hold information) of the second special figure game. As an example, the second special figure reservation storage unit 151B associates the winning order (the order of detecting the game ball) with the holding number with the second starting winning opening, and random numbers are generated by the CPU 103 based on the passage (entry) of the game ball. Numerical data indicating random number values extracted from the circuit 104 or the like (for example, numerical data indicating random number values MR1 to MR3) is stored as reserved data until the number reaches a predetermined upper limit value (for example, "4"). ..

The hold specific information storage unit 151C has a winning order of the entire hold data including the hold data stored in the first special figure hold storage unit 151A and the hold data stored in the second special figure hold storage unit 151B ( It is the hold data (first hold information) based on the occurrence of the first start prize, or the hold data (second hold information) based on the occurrence of the second start prize in relation to the hold number which is the detection order of the game ball). Stores information indicating whether or not. In the reserved specific information storage unit 151C shown in FIG. 14, "first" indicates that it is the first reserved information, and "second" indicates that it is the second reserved information.

The Fuzu hold storage unit 151D stores the hold information of the Fuzu game. For example, the normal map holding storage unit 151D associates the game ball with the hold number in the order of passing through the passing gate 41, and determines the normal figure display result extracted from the random number circuit 104 or the like by the CPU 103 based on the passing of the game ball. Numerical data indicating the random number value MR4 for use is stored as reserved data until the number reaches a predetermined upper limit value (for example, “4”).

The game control flag setting unit 152 is provided with a plurality of types of flags whose state can be updated according to the progress of the game in the pachinko gaming machine 1. For example, the game control flag setting unit 152 stores data indicating a flag value and data indicating an on state or an off state for each of a plurality of types of flags.

The game control timer setting unit 153 is provided with various timers used to control the progress of the game in the pachinko gaming machine 1. For example, the game control timer setting unit 153 stores data indicating timer values for each of a plurality of types of timers.

The game control counter setting unit 154 is provided with a plurality of types of counters for counting the count values used for controlling the progress of the game in the pachinko gaming machine 1. For example, in the game control counter setting unit 154, the first reserved storage number count value and the second special figure reserved storage number, which are the stored values of the first reserved storage number counter for counting the first special figure reserved storage number, are stored in the game control counter setting unit 154. The second hold storage count value, which is the storage value of the second hold storage counter for counting, the total hold storage count value, which is the storage value of the total hold storage counter for counting the total hold storage number, etc. Will be remembered.

The game control buffer setting unit 155 is provided with various buffers for temporarily storing data used for controlling the progress of the game in the pachinko gaming machine 1. For example, the game control buffer setting unit 155 stores data indicating buffer values in each of a plurality of types of buffers.

The I / O 105 included in the game control microcomputer 100 shown in FIG. 2 has an input port for capturing various signals transmitted to the game control microcomputer 100 and various signals to the outside of the game control microcomputer 100. It is configured to include an output port for transmission.

As shown in FIG. 2, the effect control board 12 provides an effect control CPU 120 that performs a control operation according to a program, a ROM 121 that stores an effect control program, fixed data, and the like, and a work area of the effect control CPU 120. RAM 122, a display control unit 123 that executes processing for determining the control content of the display operation in the image display device 5, and a random number that updates numerical data indicating a random number value independently of the effect control CPU 120. The circuit 124, the I / O 125, and the RTC (real-time clock) circuit 126 are mounted.

The effect control CPU 120, ROM 121, and RAM 122 may be included in a one-chip effect control microcomputer mounted on the effect control board 12.

Wiring for transmitting an information signal (video signal) indicating an effect image to the image display device 5 and information signal (effect sound signal) indicating a command to the voice control board 13 are transmitted to the effect control board 12. Wiring, wiring for transmitting an information signal (illuminated signal) indicating a command to the lamp control board 14, and the like are connected. Further, on the effect control board 12, wiring for transmitting an information signal (operation detection signal) indicating that the player's operation action to the stick controller 31A has been detected from the controller sensor unit 35A, and a game for the push button 31B. A wiring for transmitting an information signal (operation detection signal) indicating that a person's operation action has been detected from the push sensor 35B is also connected.

In the effect control board 12, for example, a random number circuit 124 or the like counts updatable numerical data indicating various random number values used for controlling the effect operation. The random number used to control such an effect operation is also referred to as an effect random number.

The ROM 121 mounted on the effect control board 12 shown in FIG. 2 stores various data used for controlling the effect operation in addition to the program for effect control. For example, the ROM 121 stores data constituting a plurality of determination tables, determination tables, setting tables, etc. prepared for the effect control CPU 120 to perform various determinations, determinations, and settings.

Further, the ROM 121 is provided with a plurality of effect control patterns used by the effect control CPU 120 to control the effect operation by various effect devices (for example, an image display device 5, a speaker 8, a lamp 9, a movable accessory 17, etc.). The constituent data is stored. Each effect control pattern is composed of data indicating control contents of various effect operations executed according to the progress of the game in the pachinko gaming machine 1. That is, various effect operations are realized by setting the effect control pattern. For example, the variable display operation of the decorative symbol corresponding to each variation pattern is realized by setting the effect control pattern corresponding to each variation pattern. Hold effects, active display effects, fanfare effects, effects during round games (opening effects, closing effects), ending effects, etc. are also realized by setting production control patterns corresponding to each effect.

FIG. 9A shows a configuration example of the effect control pattern. The effect control pattern is a control for controlling various effect operations such as an effect control process timer judgment value, display control data, voice control data, lamp control data, operation detection control data, movable accessory control data, and end code. It may be composed of data, and the contents of various effect controls, the switching timing of the effect control, and the like may be set in chronological order. In addition, the effect control pattern may include, for example, movable member control data that specifies the content of motion control in the movable member provided inside or outside the game area. The effect control process timer judgment value is a value (judgment value) to be compared with the value of the effect control process timer (effect control process timer value) provided in a predetermined area of the effect control RAM built in the effect control microcomputer. Therefore, a determination value corresponding to the execution time (effect time) of each effect operation is set in advance. In addition, instead of the effect control process timer determination value, for example, a predetermined effect control command was received from the main board 11, or a predetermined process was executed as a process for controlling the effect operation in the effect control microcomputer. Data indicating the switching timing of the effect control and the like may be set corresponding to the predetermined control content and processing content.

The display control data includes data showing the display mode of the effect image in the display area of the image display device 5, such as data showing the variation mode of each decorative symbol during the variable display of the decorative symbol. That is, the display control data is data that specifies the display operation of the effect image in the display area of the image display device 5. The voice control data includes data indicating a voice output mode from the speaker 8, such as data showing an output mode such as an effect sound linked to a variable display operation of the decorative symbol during variable display of the decorative symbol. That is, the voice control data is data that specifies the voice output operation from the speaker 8. The lamp control data includes, for example, data indicating a light emitting operation mode of the lamp 9. That is, the lamp control data is data that specifies the light emission operation of the lamp 9. The operation detection control data includes data indicating a period for effectively detecting an operation on an operation unit such as a push button 31B, a control content of an effect operation when the operation is effectively detected, and the like. That is, the operation detection control data is data that specifies an effect operation according to an operation on the operation unit. The movable accessory control data includes, for example, data indicating an operation mode of the movable accessory 17. That is, the movable accessory control data is data that specifies the operation of the movable accessory 17. It should be noted that these control data do not have to be included in all the effect control patterns, and the effect control pattern is configured to include a part of the control data according to the content of the effect operation by each effect control pattern. There may be.

FIG. 9B is a diagram for explaining various effect operations executed according to the contents of the effect control pattern. The effect control CPU 120 determines the control content of the effect operation according to various control data included in the effect control pattern. For example, when the effect control process timer value matches any of the effect control process timer determination values, the decorative symbol is displayed in the manner specified by the display control data associated with the effect control process timer determination value, and the character is displayed. Control is performed to display an effect image such as an image or a background image on the screen of the image display device 5. Further, the operation specified by the operation detection control data is performed by controlling the speaker 8 to output the voice in the mode specified by the voice control data and controlling the lamp 9 to emit light in the mode specified by the lamp control data. During the valid period (sometimes referred to simply as the valid period), the operation for the stick controller 31A and the push button 31B is accepted and the control for determining the effect content is performed. Dummy data (data for which control is not specified) may be set for the data corresponding to the effect device that is not the control target even if it corresponds to the effect control process timer determination value.

The effect operation shown in FIG. 9B corresponds to the entire period from the start of the variation of the decorative symbol to the final stop, but is not limited to this, and is in the variable display of the decorative symbol. An effect control pattern for executing an effect operation may be provided corresponding to a part of the period (for example, a period for executing the advance notice effect). Alternatively, in order to execute the effect operation corresponding to a predetermined period other than the variable display of the decorative symbol (for example, a period during which the round is being executed in the jackpot game state, a period during which the ending effect is executed at the end of the jackpot game state, etc.). The effect control pattern may be provided.

When setting the effect control pattern, the pattern data constituting the corresponding effect control pattern may be read from the ROM 121 and temporarily stored in a predetermined area of the RAM 122, or the pattern data constituting the corresponding effect control pattern may be temporarily stored. The storage address in the ROM 121 may be temporarily stored in a predetermined area of the RAM 122, and the reading position of the stored data in the ROM 121 may be specified. After that, every time the effect control process timer value is updated, it is determined whether or not it matches any of the effect control process timer determination values, and if it matches, the effect operation corresponding to the corresponding various control data is performed. To control. As described above, the effect control CPU 120 has the effect device (for example, the image display device 5, the speaker 8, and the lamp) according to the contents of the process data # 1 to the process data # n (n is an arbitrary integer) included in the effect control pattern. 9. Advance the control of the movable accessory 17 etc.). In each process data # 1 to process data # n, display control data # 1 to display control data # n and voice control data # 1 to voice control associated with the effect control process timer determination values # 1 to # n. Data # n, lamp control data # 1 to lamp control data # n, operation detection control data # 1 to operation detection control data # n, movable accessory control data # 1 to movable accessory control data # n are productions of each. The effect control execution data # 1 to the effect control execution data # n that indicate the control content of the effect operation in the device and specify the execution of the effect control are configured.

A command according to the effect control pattern set in this way is output from the effect control CPU 120 to the display control unit 123, the voice control board 13, the lamp control board 14, the accessory control board 16, and the like. For example, in the display control unit 123 that receives a command from the effect control CPU 120, for example, a predetermined VDP or the like reads the image data indicated by the command from an image data memory such as CGROM and temporarily stores the image data in the VRAM. Let me. Further, in the voice control board 13 that receives a command from the effect control CPU 120, for example, the voice synthesis IC reads the voice data indicated by the command from the voice data ROM and temporarily stores the voice data in the voice RAM or the like. ..

FIG. 10A is a block diagram showing a configuration example of an effect control data holding area provided in the RAM 122. The RAM 122 is provided with, for example, an effect control data holding area 190 as shown in FIG. 10A as an area for holding various data used for controlling the effect operation in the pachinko gaming machine 1. The effect control data holding area 190 shown in FIG. 10A includes an effect control flag setting unit 191, an effect control timer setting unit 192, an effect control counter setting unit 193, and an effect control buffer setting unit 194. There is.

The effect control flag setting unit 191 has a plurality of types capable of updating the state according to the effect operation state such as the display state of the effect image on the screen of the image display device 5 and the effect control command transmitted from the main board 11. Flag is provided. For example, the effect control flag setting unit 191 stores data indicating a flag value and data indicating an on state or an off state for each of a plurality of types of flags.

The effect control timer setting unit 192 is provided with a plurality of types of timers used for controlling the progress of various effect operations such as the display operation of the effect image on the screen of the image display device 5. For example, the effect control timer setting unit 192 stores data indicating timer values for each of a plurality of types of timers.

The effect control counter setting unit 193 is provided with a plurality of types of counters used for controlling the progress of various effect operations. For example, the effect control counter setting unit 193 stores data indicating the count values of the plurality of types of counters.

The effect control buffer setting unit 194 is provided with various buffers for temporarily storing data used for controlling the progress of various effect operations. For example, the effect control buffer setting unit 194 stores data indicating buffer values in each of a plurality of types of buffers.

In the present embodiment, the data constituting the start winning reception command buffer 194A as shown in FIG. 10B is stored in a predetermined area of the effect control buffer setting unit 194. The start winning command receive command buffer 194A is provided with a storage area (area corresponding to the buffer numbers “1” to “8”) corresponding to the maximum value (for example, “8”) of the total number of reserved storages. When there is a start winning to the 1st start winning opening or the 2nd starting winning opening, the starting opening winning designation command (1st starting opening winning designation command or the 2nd starting opening winning designation command), the symbol designation command, the variable category command , A set of four commands, a hold storage number notification command (first hold storage number notification command or second hold storage number notification command), is transmitted from the main board 11 to the effect control board 12. A storage area is secured in the start winning reception command buffer 194A so that these start opening winning designation commands, symbol designation commands, variable category commands, and hold storage number notification commands can be stored in association with each other.

The effect control CPU 120 stores commands in the order received at the start winning, starting from the beginning in the free area of the start winning command buffer 194A. At the time of the start winning, the command is transmitted in the order of the starting opening winning designation command, the symbol designation command, the variable category command, and the hold storage count notification command. Therefore, if the command reception is performed normally, as shown in FIG. 10B, the start opening prize designation command, the symbol designation command, and the variation are stored in the storage areas corresponding to the buffer numbers "1" to "8". It will be stored in the order of category command and pending memory count notification command. The command stored in the start winning command receive command buffer 194A shown in FIG. 10B is the first storage area (the area corresponding to the buffer number "1") every time the variable display of the decorative symbol is started. It is deleted from what is stored in, and the subsequent stored contents are shifted.

Further, in the present embodiment, the data constituting the pre-reading advance notice buffer 194B as shown in FIG. 10C is stored in a predetermined area of the effect control buffer setting unit 194. The read-ahead notice buffer 194B is provided with a storage area (area corresponding to the buffer numbers "1" to "8") corresponding to each data constituting the start winning command receive command buffer 194A. That is, in the look-ahead notice buffer 194B, the decision contents regarding the look-ahead notice effect regarding the reserved information determined by the effect control CPU 120 and the like are stored in association with the buffer numbers "1" to "8". .. For example, when the pending data (one set of commands) associated with a certain buffer number is deleted in the start winning command receive command buffer 194A due to the start of variable display of the decorative symbol, the read-ahead notice buffer 194B is used. , The content associated with the buffer number is also deleted. Further, when the pending data (one set of commands) associated with a certain buffer number is shifted to another buffer number in the start winning command receive command buffer 194A due to the start of variable display of the decorative symbol, etc. In the read notice buffer 194B, the content associated with the buffer number is also shifted to the other buffer number.

Next, the operation (action) of the pachinko gaming machine 1 in the present embodiment will be described.

On the main board 11, when the power supply from the predetermined power supply board is started, the game control microcomputer 100 is started, and the CPU 103 executes a predetermined process which is the game control main process. When the game control main process is started, the CPU 103 sets the interrupt disabled and then performs the necessary initial settings. In this initial setting, for example, RAM 102 is cleared. In addition, the register of the CTC (counter / timer circuit) built in the game control microcomputer 100 is set. As a result, after that, an interrupt request signal is sent from the CTC to the CPU 103 every predetermined time (for example, 2 milliseconds), and the CPU 103 can periodically execute the timer interrupt process. When the initial setting is completed, interrupt processing is permitted and then loop processing is started. In the game control main process, the process for returning the internal state of the pachinko gaming machine 1 to the state at the time of the previous power supply stop may be executed, and then the loop process may be started.

When the CPU 103 that has executed such a game control main process receives the interrupt request signal from the CTC and receives the interrupt request, it executes the game control timer interrupt process shown in the flowchart of FIG. When the game control timer interrupt process shown in FIG. 11 is started, the CPU 103 first executes a predetermined switch process to enter the gate switch 21, the first start port switch 22A, and the second start port via the switch circuit 110. The state of the detection signal input from various switches such as the switch 22B and the count switch 23 is determined (step S11). Subsequently, by executing a predetermined main side error processing (including sensor error notification processing), an abnormality diagnosis of the pachinko gaming machine 1 is performed, and a warning can be generated if necessary according to the diagnosis result (step). S12).

Following the process of step S12, the CPU 103 executes a predetermined information output process to supply jackpot information, start information, and probability fluctuation information to, for example, a hall management computer installed outside the pachinko gaming machine 1. Data such as is output (step S13).

Following the information output process in step S13, the CPU 103 executes a game random number update process (step S14). In the game random number update process in step S14, for example, at least a part of the game random numbers (for example, random number values MR1 to MR5, etc.) used on the side of the main board 11 is updated by software. As an example, the CPU 103 may update numerical data indicating a game random number counted by a random counter of the game control counter setting unit 154 by software.

Following the game random number update process in step S14, the CPU 103 executes a special symbol process process (step S15). In the special symbol process processing, the value of the special symbol process flag provided in the game control flag setting unit 152 is updated according to the progress of the game in the pachinko gaming machine 1, and the first special symbol display device 4A and the second special symbol are updated. Various processes are selected and executed in order to control the display operation in the display device 4B and set the opening / closing operation of the large winning opening in the special variable winning ball device 7 according to a predetermined procedure.

Following the special symbol process processing, the CPU 103 executes the normal symbol process processing (step S16). By executing the normal symbol process processing, the display operation (for example, turning on and off of the segment LED) in the normal symbol display 20 is controlled, and the variable display of the normal symbol and the movable wing piece in the normal variable winning ball device 6B are performed. Allows you to set the tilting motion of.

Following the normal symbol process process, the CPU 103 executes a command control process to transmit a control command from the main board 11 to a control board on the sub side such as the effect control board 12 (step S17). As an example, in the command control process, among the output ports included in the I / O 105, the effect control corresponds to the setting in the command transmission table specified by the value of the transmission command buffer provided in the game control buffer setting unit 155. After setting the control data in the output port for transmitting the effect control command to the board 12, the predetermined control data is set in the output port of the effect control INT signal and the effect control INT signal is turned on for a predetermined time. By turning off the command, it is possible to transmit the effect control command based on the settings in the command transmission table. After executing the command control process, the interrupt enable state is set, and then the game control timer interrupt process is terminated.

FIG. 12 is a flowchart showing an example of the special symbol process processing executed in step S15 of the game control timer interrupt processing shown in FIG. In the special symbol process process, the CPU 103 first executes the start winning determination process (step S101). FIG. 13 is a flowchart showing an example of the start winning determination process executed in step S101 of the special symbol process process (step S15) shown in FIG.

In the start winning determination process (step S101) shown in FIG. 13, the CPU 103 first receives a detection signal from the first starting opening switch 22A provided corresponding to the first starting winning opening formed by the normal winning ball device 6A. Based on this, it is determined whether or not the first start port switch 22A is on (step S201). When it is determined in step S201 that the first start port switch 22A is on (step S201; YES), the CPU 103 has a predetermined number of first special figure hold storages (number of holdes of the first special figure game). It is determined whether or not it is the upper limit value (for example, "4" as the upper limit storage number) (step S202). The CPU 103 may specify the first special figure reserved storage number by reading, for example, the first reserved storage number count value which is the stored value of the first reserved storage number counter provided in the game control counter setting unit 154.

When it is determined in step S202 that the number of reserved first special figure is not the upper limit value (step S202; NO), the CPU 103 is a storage value (starting) of the start port buffer provided in the game control buffer setting unit 155. “1” is set in the mouth buffer value) (step S207). Following the process of step S207, the CPU 103 executes a start winning process (FIG. 14) (step S208), and sets (clears) "0" in the start port buffer value (step S209).

When it is determined in step S201 that the first start port switch 22A is not on (step S201 (NO)), or when it is determined in step S202 that the number of reserved first special figures has reached the upper limit. (Step S202 (YES)), after executing the process of step S209, the CPU 103 is from the second start opening switch 22B provided corresponding to the second start winning opening formed by the normally variable winning ball device 6B. Based on the detection signal, it is determined whether or not the second start port switch 22B is ON (step S203). When it is determined in step S203 that the second start port switch 22B is on (step S203; YES), the CPU 103 has a predetermined number of second special figure hold storages (number of holdes of the second special figure game). It is determined whether or not it is the upper limit value (for example, "4" as the upper limit storage number) (step S204). The CPU 103 may specify the second special figure reserved storage number by reading, for example, the second reserved storage number count value which is the stored value of the second reserved storage number counter provided in the game control counter setting unit 154.

When it is determined in step S204 that the number of reserved second special figure is not the upper limit value (step S204; NO), the CPU 103 is a storage value (starting) of the start port buffer provided in the game control buffer setting unit 155. “2” is set in the mouth buffer value) (step S210). Following the process of step S210, the CPU 103 executes a start winning process (FIG. 14) (step S211), sets (clears) the start port buffer value to "0" (step S212), and performs a start winning determination process. To finish.

When it is determined in step S203 that the second start port switch 22B is not on (step S203 (NO)), or when it is determined in step S204 that the second special figure reserved storage number has reached the upper limit value. (Step S204 (YES)) ends the start winning determination process without performing the processes of steps S210, S211 and S212.

According to the start winning determination process shown in FIG. 13, even when the start winning of the game ball is simultaneously detected in the first starting port switch 22A and the second starting port switch 22B, the processing based on the respective detections. Can be completed.

FIG. 14 is a flowchart showing an example of the start winning process (step S208, step S211). In the start winning process shown in FIG. 14, the CPU 103 first updates the special figure hold storage number corresponding to the start port buffer value by 1 (step S215). For example, when the start port buffer value is "1", the first hold storage count value is added by 1, while when the start port buffer value is "2", the second hold storage count value is added by 1. In this way, the first reserved memory count value is updated so as to increase by 1 when the game ball passes (enters) the first start winning opening and the first start condition is satisfied. Further, the second reserved memory count value is updated so as to increase by 1 when the game ball passes (enters) the second start winning opening and the second start condition is satisfied. Following the process of step S215, the total number of reserved storages is updated to be added by 1 (step S216). For example, the total hold storage count value, which is the storage value of the total hold storage counter provided in the game control counter setting unit 154, may be updated to be added by 1.

Following the process of step S216, the CPU 103 determines the random number value MR1 for determining the special figure display result and the jackpot type determination from the numerical data updated by the random number circuit 104 and the random counter of the game control counter setting unit 154. Numerical data indicating the random number value MR2 and the random number value MR3 for determining the variation category are extracted (step S217). Numerical data indicating each random value extracted in this way is stored by being set as hold information at the beginning of an empty entry in the special figure hold storage unit 151 corresponding to the start port buffer value (step S218). For example, when the start port buffer value is "1", the numerical data indicating the random numbers MR1 to MR3 is set in the first special figure reservation storage unit 151A, while when the start port buffer value is "2", the start port buffer value is set to "2". Numerical data indicating random numbers MR1 to MR3 are set in the second special figure holding storage unit 151B. Further, the reserved specific information storage unit 151C stores information according to the start port buffer value.

Following the process of step S218, the CPU 103 makes a setting for transmitting the start opening winning notification command according to the start opening buffer value to the effect control board 12 (step S219). For example, when the start port buffer value is "1", a setting for transmitting the first start port winning notification command is made. Further, when the start port buffer value is "2", a setting for transmitting the second start port winning notification command is made. The start opening winning notification command set in step S219 is mainly generated by executing the command control process (step S17) of the game control timer interrupt process shown in FIG. 11 after the special symbol process process is completed. It is transmitted from the board 11 to the effect control board 12.

Following the process of step S219, the CPU 103 executes a winning random number value determination process (step S220). After that, the CPU 103 makes a setting for transmitting the hold storage number notification command (step S221). For example, when the start port buffer value is "1", a setting for transmitting the first hold storage number notification command is made. Further, when the start port buffer value is "2", a setting for transmitting the second hold storage number notification command is made. Then, the process at the time of starting and winning is completed. The hold storage number notification command set in step S221 may be executed, for example, by executing the command control process (step S17) of the game control timer interrupt process shown in FIG. 11 after the special symbol process process is completed. , Is transmitted from the main board 11 to the effect control board 12.

FIG. 15 is a flowchart showing an example of the winning random number value determination process (step S220). In the winning random number value determination process shown in FIG. 15A, the CPU 103 first identifies the current gaming state of the pachinko gaming machine 1 (step S401). In the process of step S401, the CPU 103 identifies whether or not the game is in the big hit game state by checking the state of the big hit flag provided in the game control flag setting unit 152 or the like. Specifically, the CPU 103 specifies that it is in the jackpot gaming state when the jackpot flag is on, and specifies that it is not in the jackpot gaming state when the jackpot flag is not in the on state (when it is in the off state). Further, in the process of step S401, the CPU 103 identifies whether it is in the high base state or the low base state by checking the state of the high base flag provided in the game control flag setting unit 152 or the like. Specifically, the CPU 103 specifies that the high base flag is in the high base state when it is in the on state, and specifies that it is in the low base state when the high base flag is not in the on state (when it is in the off state). .. Further, in the process of step S401, the CPU 103 may specify whether it is in the high-accuracy state or the low-accuracy state by confirming the state of the high-accuracy flag provided in the game control flag setting unit 152. good. Specifically, the CPU 103 specifies that the high-accuracy flag is in the high-accuracy state when the high-accuracy flag is on, and identifies it as the low-accuracy state when the high-accuracy flag is not in the on state (when it is in the off state). May be.

The CPU 103 sets the high base flag to the ON state in the jackpot end process (step S117). Further, the CPU 103 clears the high base flag to the off state in the special symbol stop process (step S113). For example, the CPU 103 sets an initial value of zero in the fluctuation number counter that is compared with the number of time reductions in the jackpot end processing, and updates (counts up) the value of the fluctuation number counter when a loss occurs in the special symbol stop processing. At the same time, when the value of the fluctuation counter reaches the number of time reductions, the high base flag is cleared to the off state. Further, the CPU 103 sets the high accuracy flag to the ON state in the jackpot end processing. Further, the CPU 103 clears the high accuracy flag to the off state in the special symbol stop processing. For example, the CPU 103 sets an initial value of zero in the fluctuation number counter to be compared with the number of STs in the jackpot end processing, and updates (counts up) the value of the fluctuation number counter when a loss occurs in the special symbol stop processing. At the same time, when the value of the fluctuation counter reaches the high probability count, the high probability flag is cleared to the off state. The value of the fluctuation number counter is stored in, for example, the game control counter setting unit 154.

Following the process of step S401, the CPU 103 determines whether or not it is currently in the jackpot gaming state (step S402). That is, it is determined whether or not it is specified that the game is in the big hit game state in the process of step S401. When it is determined in step S402 that the game is not in the jackpot gaming state (step S402; NO), the CPU 103 determines whether or not it is currently in the high base state (step S403). That is, it is determined whether or not the high base state is specified in the process of step S401.

When it is determined in step S402 that the game is in the big hit game state (step S402; YES), or when it is determined in step S403 that the base state is high (step S403; YES), the CPU 103 determines the start port buffer value. Is determined to be "2" (step S404). That is, it is determined whether or not it is the second starting prize (starting prize in which the variable special figure is the second special figure). When it is determined in step S404 that the start port buffer value is not "2" (step S404; NO), the winning random number value determination process is terminated.

When it is determined in step S403 that the base state is not high (step S403 (NO)), or when it is determined in step S404 that the start port buffer value is "2" (step S404 (YES)), The CPU 103 sets (selects) a special figure display result determination table according to the current gaming state (step S405). Specifically, when the CPU 103 is not in the high accuracy state, the table data for the low accuracy state (value in the range of "8000" to "8329" is "big hit" from the display result determination table 130 shown in FIG. The table data assigned to the special figure display result is set, and when the high accuracy state is set, the table data for the high accuracy state ("8000" to "8818") is displayed from the display result determination table 130 shown in FIG. Set the table data to which the value in the range is assigned to the special figure display result of "big hit". The CPU 103 specifies that the high accuracy flag is in the high accuracy state when the high accuracy flag is on, and the high accuracy flag is set. When it is not in the on state (when it is in the off state), it may be specified as a low probability state. Further, a display result determination table different between the first special figure and the second special figure (first special figure display result determination). When using the table, the second special figure display result determination table), if the start port buffer value is "1", the first special figure display result determination table is used, and the start port buffer value is "2". In some cases, the second special figure display result determination table may be used.

Following the process of step S405, the CPU 103 has numerical data indicating the random number value MR1 for determining the special figure display result extracted in step S217 of the start winning process shown in FIG. 14 within a predetermined jackpot determination range. It is determined whether or not there is (step S406). For example, the CPU 103 compares the numerical data indicating the random number value MR1 with the individual determination value assigned to the special figure display result of "big hit" in the special figure display result determination table data set in step S405. Then, it is determined whether or not there is a determination value that matches the numerical data indicating the random value MR1. Alternatively, the CPU 103 is the minimum value (lower limit value) of the determination value assigned to the special figure display result of "big hit" in the numerical data indicating the random number value MR1 and the special figure display result determination table data set in step S405. ) And the maximum value (upper limit value), and it may be determined whether or not the numerical data indicating the random value MR1 is within the range of the minimum value and the maximum value of the determination value.

When it is determined in step S406 that it is within the jackpot determination range (step S406; YES), the random number value MR2 for determining the jackpot type extracted in step S217 of the start winning process shown in FIG. 14 is shown. The jackpot type is determined based on the numerical data (step S407). Specifically, first, the CPU 103 responds to the fluctuation special figure (“first special figure” corresponding to “1” or “second special figure” corresponding to “2”) specified by the start port buffer value. Set (select) the jackpot type determination table. Specifically, the CPU 103 sets the table data according to the fluctuation special chart from the jackpot type determination table 131 shown in FIG. 7. Subsequently, the CPU 103 compares, for example, the numerical data indicating the random number value MR2 for determining the jackpot type with the determination value of each jackpot type in the table data for determining the jackpot type set according to the fluctuation special chart. Then, the jackpot type that matches the numerical data indicating the random number value MR2 may be determined.

Following the process of step S407, the CPU 103 makes a setting for transmitting the symbol designation command according to the determination result of the process of step S407 to the effect control board 12 (step S408). On the other hand, if it is determined in step S406 that it is not within the jackpot determination range (step S406; NO), a setting is made to send a symbol designation command according to the loss to the effect control board 12 (step). S409). The symbol designation command set in step S409 is mainly executed by, for example, after the special symbol process processing is completed, the command control processing (step S17) of the game control timer interrupt processing shown in FIG. 11 is executed. It is transmitted from the board 11 to the effect control board 12.

After executing the process of step S408 or the process of step S409, the CPU 103 determines whether or not it is in the high base state (step S410). When it is determined in step S410 that the state is not in the high base state (step S410; NO), that is, in the case of the scene 1 or the scene 3, the CPU 103 is for the low base state according to the special figure display result. The variable category determination table is set (selected) (step S411). On the other hand, when it is determined in step S410 that the state is in the high base state (step S410; YES), that is, in the case of the scene 2 or the scene 4, the CPU 103 is in the high base state according to the special figure display result. The variable category determination table for is set (selected) (step S412).

FIG. 16 is a diagram showing a selection example of the variable category determination table. FIG. 16A is an example of selection in which one of the variable category determination tables is selected from the plurality of variable category determination tables in the low base state. According to FIG. 16A, when the special figure display result is “missing” in the low base state, three types of variable category determination tables (“C-TBL1” and “C” in the figure are used according to the number of reserved storages. -A variable category determination table is selected from "TBL2" and "C-TBL3"). Specifically, as shown in FIG. 16A, when the number of reserved storages is 0 or 1, the variable category determination table "C-TBL1" is selected, and when the number of reserved storages is 2 or 3, the variable category determination table "C-TBL1" is selected. The variable category determination table "C-TBL2" is selected, and when the number of reserved storages is 4 or more, the variable category determination table "C-TBL3" is selected. Further, according to FIG. 16A, when the special figure display result is “big hit” in the low base state, one kind of variable category determination table (“C-TBL4” in the figure) regardless of the number of reserved storages. ) Is selected.

FIG. 16B is an example of selection in which one of the variable category determination tables is selected from the plurality of variable category determination tables in the high base state. According to FIG. 16B, when the special figure display result is “missing” in the high base state, two types of variable category determination tables (“C-TBL1” and “C” in the figure are used according to the number of reserved storages. -TBL3 "), one of the variable category determination tables is selected. Further, according to FIG. 16B, when the special figure display result is set to “big hit” in the high base state, one kind of variable category determination table (“C-TBL5” in the figure) regardless of the number of reserved storages. ) Is selected.

FIG. 17 is a diagram showing a configuration example of the variable category determination table. FIG. 17 (A) is the variation category determination table “C-TBL1” shown in FIGS. 16 (A) and 16 (B). Variable category determination table "C-TBL1" in FIG. 17 (A) (variable category determination table "C-TBL2" in FIG. 17 (B), variable category determination table "C-TBL3" in FIG. 17 (C), FIG. 17 The variable category determination table “C-TBL4” in (D) and the variable category determination table “C-TBL5” in FIG. 17 (E) are also numerical values (decision values) to be compared with the random number value MR3 for determining the variable category. ) Is assigned to multiple types of variable categories.

For example, in the setting example of the variable category determination table "C-TBL1" in FIG. 17A, 0 out of 100 determination values of the random number value MR3 (values in the range of "0" to "99") are 70 (values in the range of "0" to "69") are assigned to the variable category "PA1", and 27 (values in the range of "70" to "96") are assigned to the variable category "PA2". Assigned to the variable category "PA3", two (values in the range "97" to "98") are assigned to the variable category "PA4", and one (value "99") is assigned to the variable category "PA5". Has been done. That is, in the setting example of the variation category determination table “C-TBL1” in FIG. 17A, the variation category “PA1” is 0% (0 ÷ 100), the variation category “PA2” is 70% (70 ÷ 100), and so on. The variable category "PA3" is determined at a ratio of 27% (27 ÷ 100), the variable category “PA4” is determined at a ratio of 2% (2 ÷ 100), and the variable category “PA5” is determined at a ratio of 1% (1 ÷ 100).

The variable category determination table “C-TBL2” shown in FIG. 17 (B), the variable category determination table “C-TBL3” shown in FIG. 17 (C), and the variable category determination table “C” shown in FIG. 17 (D). -TBL4 ”and the variation category determination table“ C—TBL5 ”shown in FIG. 17 (E) are the same, and thus the description thereof will be omitted.

Return to FIG. 15 (A). In the process of step S411 to be executed when it is determined in step S410 that the state is not in the high base state, the variable category determination table is executed when the CPU 103 determines in step S406 that the special figure display result is "big hit". If the table data constituting "C-TBL4" is set and it is determined that the special figure display result is "missing", the variable category determination table "C-TBL1" to the variable category determination according to the number of reserved storages. Set the table data constituting any one of the tables "C-TBL3". Further, in the process of step S412 executed when it is determined in step S410 that the state is in the high base state, when the CPU 103 determines in step S406 that the special figure display result is "big hit", it is a variable category. If the table data constituting the determination table "C-TBL5" is set and it is determined that the special figure display result is "missing", the category determination table "C-TBL1" or the variation is changed according to the number of reserved storages. Set the table data constituting any of the category determination table "C-TBL3".

After executing the process of step S411 or the process of step S412, the CPU 103 determines (determines) the variable category based on the numerical data indicating the random number value MR3 for determining the variable category (step S413). Specifically, the CPU 103 includes numerical data indicating the random value MR3 for determining the variation category extracted in step S217 of the start winning process shown in FIG. 14, and the variation category set in step S411 or S412. It may be determined which of the determination values matches the numerical data indicating the random value MR3 by comparing with the determination value assigned to each variation category in the table data of the determination table. Following the process of step S413, the CPU 103 transmits one of the variable category commands shown in FIG. 15B to the effect control board 12 according to the determination result (decision result) of the process of step S413. (Step S414), the random value determination process at the time of winning is terminated.

Following the start winning determination process (step S101), the CPU 103 selects and executes any of the processes of steps S110 to S117 according to the value of the special figure process flag provided in the game control flag setting unit 152. (See FIG. 12).

The special symbol normal process in step S110 is a process executed when the value of the special symbol process flag is “0”. The special symbol normal process includes a process of determining (predetermining) whether or not a variable display result of a special symbol or a decorative symbol is a "big hit" before the variable display result is derived and displayed. In the special symbol normal processing, when the variable display result is determined in advance, the value of the special symbol process flag is updated to "1".

The variation pattern setting process in step S111 is a process executed when the value of the special figure process flag is “1”. The variation pattern setting process includes a process of determining a variation pattern, a setting process for transmitting a variation pattern specification command, a variable display result notification command, a first variation start command (or a second variation start command), and the like. There is. In the fluctuation pattern setting process, the value of the special figure process flag is updated to "2".

The special symbol variation process in step S112 is a process executed when the value of the special symbol process flag is “2”. The special symbol variation processing includes processing for varying (variable display) a special symbol in the first special symbol display device 4A and the second special symbol display device 4B, and the elapsed time after the start of the variation is the special symbol variation time (FIG. 5). It includes processing to determine whether or not it has been reached. In the special symbol variation processing, when the elapsed time after the start of the variation reaches the special symbol variation time, the value of the special symbol process flag is updated to "3".

The special symbol stop process in step S113 is a process executed when the value of the special symbol process flag is “3”. The special symbol stop process is a process of stopping the fluctuation of the special symbol in the first special symbol display device 4A and the second special symbol display device 4B to stop display (derive) the confirmed special symbol, and the jackpot flag is turned off. If this is the case (when it is determined in advance that the variable display result is "missing" in the special symbol normal processing (step S110)), the processing for transitioning the gaming state of the pachinko gaming machine 1 and the jackpot flag Includes a setting process for sending a hit start specification command (fanfare command) as a process to be executed when is turned on (when it is predetermined that the variable display result is a "big hit"). .. In the special symbol stop processing, when the jackpot flag is off, the value of the special figure process flag is updated to the initial value "0", and when the jackpot flag is on, the special figure process flag is updated. Update the value of to "4".

The jackpot opening pre-processing in step S114 is a process executed when the value of the special figure process flag is “4”. The big hit pre-opening process is a process for setting the big winning opening to be open (for example, setting a solenoid drive signal for the solenoid 82 for the big winning opening door to open the big winning opening). , Includes setting processing for sending notification commands such as the opening of the big winning door. In the jackpot opening preprocessing, the value of the special figure process flag is updated to "5".

The process during opening of the jackpot in step S115 is a process executed when the value of the special figure process flag is “5”. The big hit opening process is large based on whether or not the elapsed time after opening the big winning opening has passed a predetermined time and whether or not the number of game balls detected by the count switch 23 has reached a predetermined number. A process for determining the timing for returning the winning opening from the open state to the closed state, and a setting for closing the large winning opening (for example, for the solenoid 82 for the large winning opening door for closing the large winning opening). It includes processing to set the solenoid drive signal, etc., and setting processing to send a notification command after opening the big winning opening. In the process of opening the jackpot, the value of the special figure process flag is updated to "6".

The process after opening the jackpot in step S116 is a process executed when the value of the special figure process flag is “6”. The big hit post-opening process is a process to determine whether the number of executions of the round that opens the big winning opening has reached the maximum number of opening of the big winning opening, or when the maximum number of opening of the big winning opening has not been reached. As a process to be executed, it includes a setting process for sending a notification command during opening of the big winning opening, and a setting process for sending a hit end specification command as a process to be executed when the maximum number of times the big winning opening is opened is reached. I'm out. In the big hit opening post-processing, when the number of round executions has not reached the maximum number of big winning opening openings, the value of the special figure process flag is updated to "5", and when the maximum number of big winning opening opening times is reached, The value of the special figure process flag is updated to "7".

The jackpot end process of step S117 is a process executed when the value of the special figure process flag is “7”. The jackpot end process is a process for determining whether or not the jackpot end effect waiting time (waiting time corresponding to the ending effect execution period) has elapsed, and a process to be executed when the jackpot end effect waiting time has elapsed. It includes a process of setting the gaming state of the pachinko gaming machine 1 to a high accuracy and high base state, a process of setting the number of STs and the number of time reductions, and the like. In the jackpot end process, when the waiting time corresponding to the execution period of the ending effect has elapsed, the value of the special figure process flag is updated to "0" which is the initial value.

In addition, the big hit opening process (step S115), the big hit opening post-processing (step S116), the big hit opening pre-processing (step S114), and the big hit end processing (step S117) are big prizes when the count switch 23 is turned on. Includes send settings for sending oral prize notification commands.

FIG. 18 is a flowchart showing an example of the special symbol normal processing (step S110). In the special symbol normal processing shown in FIG. 18, the CPU 103 first determines whether or not the total number of reserved storages is “0” (step S230). For example, in the process of step S230, the total reserved storage number count value stored in the game control counter setting unit 154 may be read out, and it may be determined whether or not the read value is “0”.

When the total number of reserved storages is other than "0" in step S230 (step S230; NO), it is determined whether or not the reserved data to be digested first (the first reserved data won) is the second reserved information. Determination (step S231). For example, in the process of step S231, whether or not the information stored in the hold specific information storage unit 151C corresponding to the hold number "1" is the information indicating that it is the second hold information. You just have to judge.

When the hold data first digested in step S231 is the second hold information (step S231; YES), the hold stored in the second special figure hold storage unit 151B corresponding to the hold number "1". As data, the random number value MR1 for determining the special figure display result and the random number value MR2 for determining the jackpot type are read out (step S232). The numerical data read at this time may be stored in, for example, a random number buffer for fluctuation and temporarily stored.

Following the process of step S232, for example, by subtracting 1 from the second reserved storage number count value and updating, the second special figure holding storage number is updated to be subtracted by 1, and the second special figure holding storage is updated. The hold data indicating the random number values MR1 to MR3 stored in the entries lower than the hold number "1" (for example, the entries corresponding to the hold numbers "2" to "4") in the unit 151B is shifted upward one entry at a time. (Step S233). Further, in the process of step S233, the information stored in the entries lower than the hold number "1" in the hold specific information storage unit 151C is shifted to the upper position one entry at a time. Further, in the process of step S233, the game control counter setting unit 154 updates the total hold storage count value stored in the total hold storage counter so as to subtract one. Following the processing in step S233, the variable special map designation buffer value, which is the stored value of the variable special map designation buffer, is updated to "2" (step S234).

When the hold data first digested in step S231 is not the second hold information (step S231; NO), the hold data stored in the first special figure hold storage unit 151A corresponding to the hold number "1". As a result, the random number value MR1 for determining the special figure display result and the random number value MR2 for determining the jackpot type are read out (step S236). The numerical data read at this time may be stored in, for example, a random number buffer for fluctuation and temporarily stored.

Following the process of step S236, for example, by subtracting 1 from the first reserved storage number count value and updating, the first special figure holding storage number is updated to be subtracted by 1, and the first special figure holding storage is updated. The hold data indicating the random number values MR1 to MR3 stored in the entries lower than the hold number "1" (for example, the entries corresponding to the hold numbers "2" to "4") in the unit 151A is shifted upward one entry at a time. (Step S237). Further, in the process of step S237, the information stored in the entries lower than the hold number "1" in the hold specific information storage unit 151C is shifted to the upper position one entry at a time. Further, in the process of step S237, the game control counter setting unit 154 updates the total hold storage count value stored in the total hold storage counter so as to subtract one. Following the process of step S237, the variable special map designation buffer value is updated to "1" (step S238).

After executing any of the processes of steps S234 and S238, the CPU 103 sets (selects) a special figure display result determination table according to the current gaming state (step S239). For example, the CPU 103 may set the special figure display result determination table in the same manner as in step S405 of the winning random number value determination process (step S220) shown in FIG. 15A. Subsequently, the CPU 103 displays the special figure based on the numerical data indicating the random number value MR1 for determining the special figure display result stored in the random number buffer for variation and the special figure display result determination table set in step S239. The result is determined (step S240). In the process of step S240, the CPU 103 has the numerical data indicating the random number value MR1 and the special feature set in step S239, as in step S406 of the winning random number value determination process (step S220) shown in FIG. Whether to make the special figure display result ("big hit" or "miss"" by comparing each judgment value assigned to the special figure display result of "big hit" in the table data for determining the figure display result. ) Should be decided.

Following the process of step S240, the CPU 103 determines whether or not the special figure display result determined in step S240 is a "big hit" (step S241). If it is determined in step S241 that it is a "big hit" (step S241; YES), the CPU 103 sets the big hit flag provided in the game control flag setting unit 152 to the ON state (step S242). The jackpot flag is cleared (reset) to the off state in the jackpot end process of step S117. Following the process in step S242, the CPU 103 executes a jackpot type determination process (S244). The jackpot type determination process in step S244 is the same as the jackpot type determination process executed in step S407 of the winning random number value determination process (step S220) shown in FIG. 15 (A). Following the jackpot type determination process in step S244, the CPU 103 is a storage value of the jackpot type buffer provided in, for example, the game control buffer setting unit 155, corresponding to the jackpot type determined in the jackpot type determination process in step S244. The jackpot type buffer value is set (step S245). That is, what is the jackpot type determined in the jackpot type determination process in step S244 is stored. As an example, the CPU 103 sets the jackpot type buffer value to "1" if the jackpot type determined in the jackpot type determination process in step S244 is "16R probability variation jackpot", and if it is "8R probability variation jackpot", the jackpot type. Set the buffer value to "2".

When it is determined in step S241 that it is not a "big hit" (step S241 (NO)), or after the process of step S245 is executed, the CPU 103 determines the special figure display result determined in the process of step S240, or the special figure display result. In the case of a big hit, a fixed special symbol is set corresponding to the big hit type determined in the process of step S244 (step S248). After setting the confirmed special symbol in step S248, the value of the special symbol process flag is updated to "1" which is a value corresponding to the fluctuation pattern setting process (step S249), and then the special symbol normal process is terminated. ..

When the total number of reserved storages is "0" in step S230 (step S230; YES), the demo display setting (step S250) is executed, and the special symbol normal processing is terminated. In the demo display setting in step S250, a customer waiting demo designation command for designating a demonstration display (demo screen display) by displaying a predetermined effect image on the image display device 5, for example, is transmitted from the main board 11 to the effect control board 12. On the other hand, it is determined whether or not the transmission has been completed. At this time, if it has already been sent, the demo display setting is terminated as it is. On the other hand, if it has not been sent, the setting for sending the customer waiting demo designation command is made, and then the demo display setting is terminated.

FIG. 19 is a diagram showing a configuration example of a variation pattern determination table referred to in the variation pattern setting process (step S111). In the variation pattern setting process, the CPU 103 determines the variation category as in the process of step S413 of the winning random number value determination process (step S220) shown in FIG. 15A, and the variation pattern corresponding to the determined variation category. The determination table is selected (set), and the variation pattern is determined using the selected variation pattern determination table. For example, when the CPU 103 determines the variation category "PA2", the CPU 103 selects the variation pattern determination table corresponding to the variation category "PA2" shown in FIG. 19B, and sets the random value MR5 for determining the variation pattern. When the numerical data to be shown is in the range of "0" to "39", the fluctuation pattern "PA2-1" is determined, and when the numerical data is in the range of "40" to "99", the fluctuation pattern "PA2-2" is determined. .. Further, for example, when the CPU 103 determines the variation category "PA3", the CPU 103 selects the variation pattern determination table corresponding to the variation category "PA3" shown in FIG. 19 (C), and the random number value MR5 for determining the variation pattern. When the numerical data indicating the above is in the range of "0" to "79", the fluctuation pattern "PA3-1" is determined, and when the numerical data is in the range of "80" to "99", the fluctuation pattern "PA3-2" is determined. do. The same applies when other variable categories are determined.

According to FIGS. 5, 6, 16, 17, 17, 19 and the like, the relationship between the normal reach and the jackpot expectation of the super reach is super reach β> super reach α> normal reach. Further, in the normal reach, the expectation of a big hit is higher in the case with the pseudo-continuous fluctuation than in the case without the pseudo-continuous fluctuation. In super reach α (same for super reach β), the expectation of big hit is higher when there is pseudo-ream fluctuation than when there is no pseudo-ream fluctuation, and when the number of pseudo-ream is 2 times, it is 1 time. Expectations are higher than in the case.

The random number value MR5 for determining the variation pattern may be extracted at the time of executing the process, or the random value MR3 for determining the variation category may be extracted in step S217 of the start winning process (step S208, step S211) as in the case of the random value MR3 for determining the variation category. It may be extracted in step S232 (or step S236) of the special symbol normal process (step S110) to be extracted as pending data.

In the present embodiment, the set value of the number of STs (probability change number) and the set value of 70 times are the same (both 70 times), but the set value of the number of STs (probability change number) and the time reduction are set. The number of times may be different from the set value of 70 times. Further, in the present embodiment, the set value of the ST number (probability variation number) in the case of the 8R probability variation jackpot and the setting value of the ST number (probability variation number) in the case of the 16R probability variation jackpot are set to the same value (both 70 times). However, the set value of the number of STs (probability variation number) in the case of the 8R probability variation jackpot and the setting value of the ST number (probability variation number) in the case of the 16R probability variation jackpot may be different. Further, in the present embodiment, the set value of the number of time reductions in the case of the 8R probability variation jackpot and the set value of the number of time reductions in the case of the 16R probability variation jackpot are set to the same value (both 70 times), but in the case of the 8R probability variation jackpot. The set value of the number of time reductions in the case of 16R probability variation jackpot may be different from the setting value of the number of time reductions.

Next, the operation on the effect control board 12 will be described.

FIG. 20 is a flowchart showing an example of the effect control main process. In the effect control board 12, when the power supply voltage is supplied from the power supply board or the like, the effect control CPU 120 is activated to execute the effect control main process as shown in FIG. 20.

In the effect control main process shown in FIG. 20, the effect control CPU 120 first executes a predetermined initialization process (step S71), clears the RAM 122, sets various initial values, and mounts the effect control board 12. The registered CTC (counter / timer circuit) registers are set. After that, it is determined whether or not the timer interrupt flag is in the ON state (step S72). The timer interrupt flag is set to the ON state every time a predetermined time (for example, 2 milliseconds) elapses, based on the register setting of the CTC, for example. If it is determined that the timer interrupt flag is not in the ON state (step S72; NO), the process of step S72 is repeatedly executed and waits.

Further, on the side of the effect control board 12, an interrupt for receiving an effect control command or the like is generated from the main board 11 in addition to the timer interrupt. This interrupt is, for example, an interrupt generated when the effect control INT signal from the main board 11 is turned on. When an interrupt occurs due to the effect control INT signal being turned on, the effect control CPU 120 automatically sets the interrupt disabled, but if a CPU that is not automatically interrupt disabled is used, the interrupt is interrupted. It is desirable to issue a prohibition order (DI command). The effect control CPU 120 executes, for example, a predetermined command reception interrupt process in response to an interrupt caused by the effect control INT signal being turned on. In this command reception interrupt processing, among the input ports included in the I / O 125, a control that becomes an effect control command or the like is performed from a predetermined input port that receives a control signal transmitted from the main board 11 via the relay board 15. Capture the signal.

The effect control command captured at this time is stored in, for example, an effect control command reception buffer provided in the effect control buffer setting unit 194. As an example, when the effect control command has a 2-byte configuration, the first byte (MODE) and the second byte (EXT) are sequentially received and stored in the effect control command reception buffer. After that, the effect control CPU 120 sets the interrupt enable, and then ends the command reception interrupt process.

When it is determined in step S72 that the timer interrupt flag is in the on state (step S72; YES), the effect control CPU 120 clears the timer interrupt flag and puts it in the off state (step S73). The command analysis process is executed (step S74). In the command analysis process executed in step S74, for example, after reading various effect control commands transmitted from the game control microcomputer 100 of the main board 11 and stored in the effect control command reception buffer, the reading thereof is performed. Settings and controls corresponding to the issued production control commands are performed.

Following the command analysis process in step S74, the effect control CPU 120 executes an error notification process (step S75). In the error notification process in step S75, for example, an error notification corresponding to a magnetic anomaly notification designation command transmitted from the main board 11 is performed for an act of illegally guiding a game ball to a winning opening using a magnet.

Following the error notification process in step S75, the effect control CPU 120 executes the effect control process process (step S76). In the effect control process process of step S76, various effect devices (for example, an image display device 5, a speaker 8, a lamp 9, a movable accessory 17, etc.) are used based on an effect control command or the like transmitted from the main board 11. Judgments, decisions, and settings are made regarding the production operation that was performed.

Following the effect control process process in step S76, the effect control CPU 120 executes the effect random number update process (step S77). In the effect random number update process in step S77, for example, at least a part of the effect random numbers used on the side of the effect control board 12 is updated by software. As an example, the effect control CPU 120 may update the numerical data indicating the effect random number counted by the random number of the effect control counter setting unit 193 by software. After that, the process returns to the process of step S72.

It has been explained that the interrupt for receiving the effect control command or the like from the main board 11 on the effect control board 12 side is an interrupt generated when the effect control INT signal from the main board 11 is turned on. However, the method of generating an interrupt for receiving an effect control command or the like is not limited to the above. For example, an interrupt for receiving an effect control command or the like may be generated by an interrupt request by the first bit of serial communication.

FIG. 21 is a flowchart showing an example of the command analysis process (step S74). In the command analysis process shown in FIG. 21, the effect control CPU 120 first confirms the stored contents of the effect control command reception buffer, and thus receives commands from the main board 11 transmitted via the relay board 15. It is determined whether or not there is (step S501). If it is determined that there is no receive command (step S501; NO), the effect control CPU 120 ends the command analysis process.

If it is determined in step S501 that there is a receive command (step S501; YES), the effect control CPU 120 determines whether or not the receive command is the first start opening winning notification command (step S502). .. The effect control CPU 120 may, for example, confirm the MODE data of the reception command and specify the type of the reception command (see FIG. 3).

If it is determined in step S502 that the command is the first start opening winning notification command (step S502; YES), the effect control CPU 120 sets the first hold storage number notification waiting time (step S503). For example, the effect control CPU 120 may set a predetermined timer initial value as the reception waiting time of the first hold storage number notification command in the command reception control timer provided in the effect control timer setting unit 192.

If it is determined in step S502 that it is not the first start opening winning notification command (step S502; NO), the effect control CPU 120 determines whether or not the receiving command is the second starting opening winning notification command. (Step S504). If it is determined in step S504 that the command is the second start opening winning notification command (step S504; YES), the effect control CPU 120 sets the second hold storage number notification waiting time (step S505). For example, the effect control CPU 120 may set a predetermined timer initial value as the reception waiting time of the second hold storage number notification command in the command reception control timer.

If it is determined in step S504 that the command is not the second start opening winning notification command (step S504; NO), the effect control CPU 120 determines whether or not the reception command is a symbol designation command (step S506). ). If it is determined in step S506 that it is not a symbol designation command (step S506; NO), the effect control CPU 120 determines whether or not the received command is a variable category command (step S507). If it is determined in step S507 that it is not a variable category command (step S507; NO), the effect control CPU 120 determines whether or not the received command is the first reserved storage number notification command (step S508). ). When it is determined in step S508 that the command is the first hold storage number notification command (step S508; YES), for example, by initializing the timekeeping operation by the command reception control timer, the first hold storage number notification waiting time. Is cleared (step S509).

If it is determined in step S508 that it is not the first reserved storage number notification command (step S508; NO), the effect control CPU 120 determines whether or not the receiving command is the second reserved storage number notification command. (Step S510). When it is determined in step S510 that the command is the second hold storage number notification command (step S510; YES), for example, by initializing the timekeeping operation by the command reception control timer, the second hold storage number notification waiting time is reached. Is cleared (step S511).

When it is determined in step S506 that it is a symbol designation command (step S506 (YES)), when it is determined in step S507 that it is a variable category command (step S507 (YES)), step S503, step S505, After executing any of the processes of step S509 and step S511, the effect control CPU 120 stores the received command at the beginning of the free area in the start winning command receive command buffer 194A (step S512). Following the process of step S512, the process returns to the process of step S501.

If it is determined in step S510 that the reception command is not the second hold storage number notification command (step S510; NO), the effect control CPU 120 determines whether or not the reception command is a variation pattern specification command. (Step S513). If it is determined that the command is a variation pattern specification command (step S513; YES), the effect control CPU 201 stores the variation pattern specification command in the variation pattern specification command storage area formed in the RAM (step S515). .. Following the process of step S515, the process returns to the process of step S501.

If it is determined in step S513 that the reception command is not a variation pattern designation command (step S513; NO), the effect control CPU 120 makes settings and the like according to the other reception commands (step S518). For example, when the reception command is a game state designation command, the effect control CPU 120 may analyze the game state designation command to specify the current game state. Following the process of step S518, the process returns to the process of step S501.

FIG. 22 is a flowchart showing an example of the effect control process process (step S76). In the effect control process process shown in FIG. 22, the effect control CPU 120 first executes the effect determination process at the time of winning (step S150). In the winning effect determination process, the effect control CPU 120 checks the stored contents in the start winning command buffer 194A, and determines whether or not the start opening winning notification command is received as a reception command. , Processing for determining various effects is executed.

Following the winning effect determination process (step S150), the effect control CPU 120 selects any of the processes of steps S170 to 177 according to the value of the effect process flag provided in the effect control flag setting unit 191 and the like. And execute.

The variable display start waiting process in step S170 is a process executed when the value of the effect process flag is “0”, which is the initial value. The variable display start waiting process displays an image based on whether or not a first variable start command (or a second variable start command), a variable pattern specification command, a variable display result notification command, etc. transmitted from the main board 11 are received. It includes a process of determining whether or not to start variable display of a decorative pattern in the device 5. In the variable display start waiting process, when it is determined to start the variable display of the decorative symbol (that is, when a variable pattern designation command or the like is received), the value of the effect process flag is updated to "1".

The variable display start setting process in step S171 is a process executed when the value of the effect process flag is “1”. The variable display start setting process is a setting for performing variable display of decorative symbols on the image display device 5 in response to variable display of special symbols on the first special symbol display device 4A and the second special symbol display device 4B (for example). , Processing to perform effect control pattern corresponding to fluctuation pattern (special figure fluctuation time), setting of fluctuation time timer value, etc.), and setting to perform display operation such as hold display, active display (for example, the display operation). It includes the process of setting the effect control pattern corresponding to the above). In the variable display start setting process, the value of the effect process flag is updated to "2".

The variable display effect process in step S172 is a process executed when the value of the effect process flag is “2”. In the variable display effect processing, whether or not the variable time timer set in the variable display start setting process (step S171) has timed out (the elapsed time after the variable display start of the decorative symbol on the image display device 5 is the special figure fluctuation time). It includes the process of determining (whether or not it has reached). In the variable display effect process, the value of the effect process flag is updated to "3" when the variable time timer times out.

The special figure hit waiting process in step S173 is a process executed when the value of the effect process flag is “3”. The special figure hit waiting process is a variable time game state setting process for setting the gaming state of the pachinko gaming machine 1 as a process to be executed when the confirmed decorative symbol is "missing", or when the confirmed decorative symbol is "big hit". The process to be executed includes a process of setting a fanfare effect (for example, setting an effect control pattern corresponding to the fanfare effect). In the special figure hit waiting process, when the fixed decoration symbol is "missing", the value of the effect process flag is updated to "0" which is the initial value, and when the confirmed decoration symbol is "big hit", the effect process flag is set. Update the value to "4".

The jackpot start process in step S174 is a process executed when the value of the effect process flag is “4”. The jackpot start process is a process of determining whether or not a big prize opening notification command has been received, and a process of being executed when a big winning opening notification command is received (special variable winning in each round). It includes a process of setting (for example, setting an effect control pattern corresponding to an effect during opening) for performing an effect (for example, an effect to be executed when the ball device 7 is in the open state). In the big hit start process, when the notification command during the opening of the big winning opening is received, the value of the effect process flag is updated to "5".

The process during the round of step S175 is a process executed when the value of the effect process flag is “5”. During the round, the process is closed as a process to determine whether or not the notification command after opening the big prize opening has been received, and a process to be executed when the notification command after opening the big winning opening is received (special variable winning in each round). It includes a process of setting (for example, setting an effect control pattern corresponding to an effect during closure) for performing an effect (for example, an effect to be executed when the ball device 7 is in the closed state). In the process during the round, when the notification command after opening the big winning opening is received, the value of the effect process flag is updated to "6".

The round post-processing in step S176 is a process executed when the value of the effect process flag is “6”. The round post-processing is a process of determining whether or not a large winning opening opening notification command or a winning end designation command has been received, and a processing of opening as a process to be executed when a large winning opening opening notification command is received. (For example, setting of the effect control pattern corresponding to the effect during opening) and the setting for performing the ending effect as the process to be executed when the hit end designation command is received (for example, for the ending effect). It includes processing for setting the corresponding effect control pattern and the value of the ending effect execution time timer, etc.). In the round post-processing, the value of the effect process flag is updated to "5" when the notification command for opening the big winning opening is received, and the value of the effect process flag is updated to "7" when the hit end designation command is received. do.

The post-hit processing in step S177 is a processing executed when the value of the effect process flag is “7”. In the post-hit processing, whether or not the ending effect execution time timer set in the round post-processing (step S176) has timed out (whether the elapsed time after the start of execution of the ending effect in the image display device 5 has reached the set time). Includes processing to determine (whether or not). In the post-hit processing, when the ending effect execution time timer times out, the value of the effect process flag is updated to the initial value "0".

FIG. 23 is a flowchart showing an example of the winning effect determination process (S150). In the effect determination process at the time of winning shown in FIG. 23, the effect control CPU 120 first checks the stored contents in the start winning reception command buffer 194A (step S151), and first, as a new reception command, the first start opening winning designation command. Is determined (step S152). When it is determined in step S152 that the first start opening winning designation command has not been received (step S152; NO), the effect control CPU 120 receives the second starting opening winning designation command as a new reception command. It is determined whether or not it is present (step S154). When it is determined in step S154 that the second start opening winning designation command has not been received (step S154; NO), the winning effect determination process is terminated.

When it is determined in step S152 that the first start opening winning designation command has been received (step S152; YES), the effect control CPU 120 refers to, for example, the high base flag provided in the effect control flag setting unit 191. Then, it is determined whether or not the time is shortened (high accuracy and high base state) (step S155). When it is determined that the time is not shortened (step S155: NO), the effect control CPU 120 executes a hold effect determination process (step S160). In the process of determining the hold effect, etc. in step S160 (the same applies to the process of determining the hold effect, etc. in step S163), there is a process of determining the hold effect, the active display effect, the action effect (hold action failure effect, hold action failure effect, etc.). include. Details will be described later.

After executing the hold effect determination process (step S160), the effect control CPU 120 stores the determined content of the hold effect determination process (step S161). Specifically, for example, the effect control CPU 120 determines the content of the hold effect determination process in association with the buffer number of the look-ahead advance notice buffer 194B corresponding to the start prize buffer number in the start prize reception command buffer 194A. Remember.

After executing the process of step S161, the effect control CPU 120 adds a new hold display to the start winning prize storage display area 5H based on the determination content stored in step S161 (step S162). More specifically, the effect control CPU 120 provides an effect control pattern for displaying the hold display according to the display mode at the time of addition stored in association with the buffer number of the pre-reading advance notice buffer 194B in the start winning memory display area 5H. It is determined in the hold effect determination process by setting it as a usage pattern and transmitting the display control command specified by the display control data included in the set effect control pattern to the VDP or the like of the display control unit 123. The hold display displayed in the display mode at the time of addition is added to the start winning memory display area 5H. Then, the production determination process at the time of winning is completed.

When it is determined in step S154 that the second start opening winning designation command has been received (step S154; YES), the effect control CPU 120 refers to, for example, the high base flag provided in the effect control flag setting unit 191. Then, it is determined whether or not the time is shortened (high accuracy and high base state) (step S156). When it is determined that the time is shortened (high accuracy and high base state) (step S156: YES), the effect control CPU 120 executes a hold effect determination process (step S163). The process of determining the hold effect or the like in step S163 is the same as the process of determining the hold effect or the like in step S160.

After executing the hold effect determination process (step S163), the effect control CPU 120 executes the processes of step S163, step S164, and step S165, and ends the prize-winning effect determination process. The processing of each of step S163, step S164, and step S165 is the same as the processing related to each of the processing of step S160, step S161, and step S162.

When it is determined in step S155 that the time is shortened (step S155: YES), or when it is determined in step S156 that the time is not shortened (step S156: NO), the hold addition process according to the start opening winning designation is executed. (S166). Specifically, the effect control CPU 120 has a normal display mode (display mode at the time of addition and after each shift, as in the case where it is determined not to execute the hold effect in the hold effect determination process (steps S160, S163). For example, information indicating white) is stored, and a hold display displayed in a normal display mode is added to the start winning memory display area 5H. Then, the production determination process at the time of winning is completed.

FIG. 24 is a flowchart showing an example of the variable display start setting process (S171). In the variable display start setting process shown in FIG. 24, the effect control CPU 120 first reads, for example, the EXT data in the variable display result notification command transmitted from the main board 11, so that the special figure display result is “missed”. (Step S522).

When it is determined in step S522 that the special figure display result is "missing" (step S522; YES), the effect control CPU 120 determines the combination of the definite decorative symbols (final stop symbols) constituting the losing combination (step S522; YES). Step S524). As an example, the effect control CPU 120 has a random number value updated by a random counter or the like provided in the effect control counter setting unit 193 (for example, a random value for determining a left confirmed symbol, a random value for determining a right confirmed symbol, middle). Numerical data indicating a fixed symbol (random value for determination, etc.) is extracted, and a predetermined symbol determination table (for example, left confirmed symbol determination table, right confirmed symbol determination table, middle confirmed symbol determination table, etc.) stored in advance in ROM 121 or the like is extracted. ), Etc., as a combination of the definite decorative symbols constituting the loss combination, the decorative symbols finally stopped and displayed in the decorative symbol display areas 5L, 5C, and 5R are determined.

When it is determined in step S522 that the special figure display result is not "missing" (step S522; NO), that is, when the special figure display result is "big hit (16R probability variation big hit, 8R probability variation jackpot)", it is for effect control. The CPU 120 determines a combination of fixed decorative symbols constituting the jackpot combination (step S528). As an example, the effect control CPU 120 extracts numerical data indicating a random number value (for example, a random number value for determining a jackpot confirmed symbol) updated by a random counter or the like provided in the effect control counter setting unit 193, and ROM 121. By referring to a predetermined symbol determination table (for example, a jackpot confirmed symbol determination table, etc.) stored in advance in the above, as a combination of the final decorative symbols constituting the jackpot combination, the decorative symbol display areas 5L, 5C, and 5R Each of them decides the decorative pattern that will be finally stopped and displayed. It should be noted that the effect control CPU 120 may determine the combination of the fixed decorative symbols constituting the jackpot combination depending on which jackpot type (16R probability variation jackpot, 8R probability variation jackpot) is, whether or not there is a promotion effect, and the like. good.

After executing either the process of step S524 or the process of step S528, the effect control CPU 120 executes the button development effect determination process (step S529). The button development effect determination process includes a process of determining whether or not to execute the button development effect (described later), a process of determining the effect mode of the button development effect when it is determined to execute the button development effect, and the like. The details of the button development effect determination process will be described later.

After executing the process of step S529, the effect control CPU 120 executes the hold digestion process (step S530). Specifically, the hold display displayed at the left end of the start prize memory display area 5H is moved (shifted) to the active display area AHA, and when there is another hold display in the start prize memory display area 5H, about each. Move it to the left.

After executing the hold digestion process in step S530, the effect control CPU 120 executes the effect control pattern set process (step S532). For example, the effect control CPU 120 sets an effect control pattern corresponding to the variation pattern of the variation as a usage pattern. That is, the effect control CPU 120 sets the variation pattern specified by the variation pattern designation command transmitted from the main board 11 as the usage pattern. Further, for example, the effect control CPU 120 sets an effect control pattern corresponding to the button development effect determined in the button development effect determination process of step S529 as a usage pattern. That is, when the effect control CPU 120 determines that the button development effect is to be executed in the button development effect determination process of step S529, the effect control mode (for example, the button development effect pattern described later) is determined. In the process of step S532, the effect control pattern corresponding to the effect mode of the button development effect determined in the button development effect determination process of step S529 is set as the usage pattern. As a result, in the variable display effect processing (S172), the display operation in the display area of the image display device 5 is performed according to the variation pattern specified by the variation pattern designation command and the determination content of the button development effect determination process (S532). (See, for example, FIGS. 30-38).

After executing the process of step S532, the effect control CPU 120 sets the initial value of the effect control process timer of the process data of the effect control pattern set in step S532 (step S534), and starts the effect control process timer (step S534). Step S535), the effect device (effect component) such as the image display device 5 is controlled according to the contents of the process data (step S536). Subsequently, the effect control CPU 120 sets a value corresponding to the fluctuation time (special figure fluctuation time shown in FIG. 5) specified by the fluctuation pattern command in the fluctuation time timer (step S537).

Subsequently, the effect control CPU 120 digests the command stored in the start winning command buffer 194A (step S538). Specifically, the effect control CPU 120 deletes and deletes the command (1 set) stored in the area corresponding to the smallest buffer number among the commands associated with the start winning command receive command buffer 194A. The commands stored in the area corresponding to the buffer number larger than the buffer number of the issued command are shifted while maintaining the winning order. Further, in the process of step S538, the information stored in the pre-reading advancement buffer 194B provided in the RAM 122 or the like is also deleted or shifted according to the deletion or shift of the command. After that, the value of the effect process flag is updated to "2", which is a value corresponding to the effect process during variable display (step S539), and then the variable display start setting process is terminated.

The button development effect will be described in detail below. The button development effect is an effect of changing (developing) an image corresponding to a button or the like (push button 31B, stick controller 31A) (button image imitating push button 31B, stick controller image imitating stick controller 31A). .. Hereinafter, the image corresponding to the button or the like may be referred to as "button or the like image" or "button or the like display".

The effect control CPU 120 may change the display mode of an image such as one type of button (for example, change the display mode (display color, display size) of the button image) or one type of button as a button development effect. Equal image is changed to another kind of button etc image (for example, button image is changed to stick controller image).

In the following description, as a button or the like image, a small-sized white button image imitating a push button 31B may be referred to as a “small button (white)” or a “first aspect”. Further, a large-sized white button image imitating the push button 31B may be referred to as a "large button (white)" or a "second aspect". Further, a large-sized red button image imitating the push button 31B may be referred to as a "large button (red)" or a "third mode". Further, the stick controller image imitating the stick controller 31A may be referred to as a "stick" or a "fourth aspect".

FIG. 25 is an explanatory diagram illustrating an example of a button development effect category and a button development effect pattern in the present embodiment. The button development effect pattern indicates an effect mode (display mode) of the button development effect. The button development effect category is a name when the button development effect patterns are classified (aggregated) by type. In other words, the button development effect category is a group name of each group including one or more button development effect patterns categorized into a common group.

In FIG. 25, "initial" is an initial display. "Final" is the final display. "Timing 1" is the first timing at which the image such as a button can change. "Timing 2" is the second timing at which the image such as a button can change. "Timing 3" is the third timing at which the image such as a button can change. The "timing 1", "timing 2", and "timing 3" may be different depending on the fluctuation pattern.

Further, in FIG. 25 (the same applies to other figures), "no change" indicates that there is no change in the image such as a button. "Weak change" indicates that there is a one-step change (one-step change) in the image such as a button. Specifically, the "weak change (1st → 2nd)" is a one-step change from the "first mode" to the "second mode", that is, from the "small button (white)" to the "large button (white)". It shows that there is a change to. "Weak change (2nd → 3rd)" is a one-step change from "second mode" to "third mode", that is, a change from "large button (white)" to "large button (red)". It shows that there is. "Weak change (3rd → 4th)" indicates that there is a one-step change from "third mode" to "fourth mode", that is, a change from "large button (red)" to "stick". ing. "Medium change" indicates that there is a two-step change (two-step change) in the image such as a button. Specifically, the "medium change (1st → 3rd)" is a two-step change from the "first mode" to the "third mode", that is, from the "small button (white)" to the "large button (red)". It shows that there is a change to. "Medium change (2nd → 4th)" indicates that there is a two-step change from "second aspect" to "fourth aspect", that is, a change from "large button (white)" to "stick". ing. "Strong change" indicates that there is a three-step change (three-step change) in the image such as a button. Specifically, "strong change (1st → 4th)" is a three-step change from "first mode" to "fourth mode", that is, a change from "small button (white)" to "stick". Indicates that there is.

In FIG. 25, in the button development effect category "BH1", the "final" is the "first mode (small button (small button)" without changing the image such as the button at any of the three timings (timing 1, 2, 3). White)) ”, which is a button development production category. The button development effect pattern "BH1-1" belongs to the button development effect category "BH1".

In the case of the button development effect pattern "BH1-1", the image of the button or the like does not change at any of timing 1, timing 2, and timing 3, so that the image of the button and the like according to the button development effect pattern "BH1-1" is The first period ("initial", that is, before "timing 1"), the second period ("timing 1" to "timing 2"), and the third period ("timing 2" to "timing 3") are the first. The period of 4 (“final”, that is, after “timing 3”) is also the “first aspect (small button (white))”.

In the button development production category "BH2", the image such as a button changes slightly at any one of the three timings, and the "final" becomes the "second mode (large button (white))". It is a development production category. The button development effect category "BH2" includes a button development effect pattern "BH2-1" with a weak change at timing 1, a button development effect pattern "BH2-2" with a weak change at timing 2, and a weakness at timing 3. The button development production pattern "BH2-3" with changes belongs to it.

For example, in the case of the button development effect pattern "BH2-1", the image of the button or the like changes weakly at the timing 1 and does not change at the timing 2 or the timing 3, so that the image of the button or the like according to the button development effect pattern "BH2-1" is , In the first period (before "timing 1"), it becomes "first mode (small button (white))", and in the second period ("timing 1" to "timing 2") and the third period ("timing"). 2 ”to“ Timing 3 ”) and the fourth period (“Timing 3” and later) are “second mode (large button (white))”.

In the button development effect category "BH3a", the image of the button or the like changes slightly at any two of the three timings, and the "final" becomes the "third mode (large button (red))". It is a development production category. In the present embodiment, the button development effect category "BH3a" includes a button development effect pattern "BH3a-1" having a weak change at timing 1 and timing 3, and a button development effect pattern having a weak change at timing 2 and timing 3. "BH3a-2" belongs to it.

For example, in the case of the button development effect pattern "BH3a-1", the image of the button or the like changes weakly at timing 1 or timing 3 and does not change at timing 2, so that the image of the button or the like according to the button development effect pattern "BH3a-1" is , In the first period (before "timing 1"), it becomes "first mode (small button (white))", and in the second period ("timing 1" to "timing 2") and the third period ("timing"). 2 ”to“ Timing 3 ”) is the“ second aspect (large button (white)) ”, and in the fourth period (“Timing 3” or later), it is the “third aspect (large button (red))”.

In the button development effect category "BH3b", the image of the button or the like changes in the middle at any one of the three timings, and the "final" becomes the "third mode (large button (red))". It is a development production category. In the button development effect category "BH3b", there are a button development effect pattern "BH3b-1" having a medium change in timing 1, a button development effect pattern "BH3b-2" having a medium change in timing 2, and a medium change in timing 3. The button development effect pattern "BH3b-3" with a change belongs to it.

For example, in the case of the button development effect pattern "BH3b-1", the image of the button or the like changes in the middle at the timing 1 and does not change at the timing 2 or the timing 3, so that the image of the button or the like according to the button development effect pattern "BH3b-1" is , In the first period (before "timing 1"), it becomes "first mode (small button (white))", and in the second period ("timing 1" to "timing 2") and the third period ("timing"). 2 ”to“ Timing 3 ”) and the fourth period (“Timing 3” and later) are the “third mode (large button (red))”.

In the button development effect category "BH4a", at any two of the three timings, the image of the button etc. changes in the middle at the earlier timing, the image of the button etc. changes slightly at the later timing, and the "final" is This is a button development effect category, which is the "fourth mode (stick)". In the present embodiment, the button development effect category "BH4a" includes a button development effect pattern "BH4a-1" having a medium change at timing 1 and a weak change at timing 3, a medium change at timing 2, and a weak change at timing 3. There is a button development effect pattern "BH4a-2" to which.

For example, in the case of the button development effect pattern "BH4a-1", the image such as a button changes in the middle at the timing 1, weakly changes at the timing 3, and does not change at the timing 2, so that the button development effect pattern "BH4a-1" is used. The image such as a button becomes the "first mode (small button (white))" in the first period (before "timing 1"), and becomes the second period ("timing 1" to "timing 2") or the third. In the period ("timing 2" to "timing 3"), it becomes the "third mode (large button (red))", and in the fourth period (after "timing 3"), it becomes the "fourth mode (stick)".

In the button development effect category "BH4b", at any two of the three timings, the image of the button etc. changes slightly at the earlier timing, the image of the button etc. changes at the later timing, and the "final" is This is a button development effect category, which is the "fourth mode (stick)". In the present embodiment, the button development effect category "BH4b" includes a button development effect pattern "BH4b-1" having a weak change at timing 1 and a medium change at timing 3, a weak change at timing 2, and a medium change at timing 3. There is a button development effect pattern "BH4b-2" to which.

For example, in the case of the button development effect pattern "BH4b-1", the image such as a button changes weakly at timing 1, medium changes at timing 3, and does not change at timing 2, so that the button development effect pattern "BH4a-1" is used. The image such as a button becomes the "first mode (small button (white))" in the first period (before "timing 1"), and becomes the second period ("timing 1" to "timing 2") or the third. In the period (“timing 2” to “timing 3”), it becomes the “second aspect (large button (white))”, and in the fourth period (after “timing 3”), it becomes the “fourth aspect (stick)”.

In the button development effect category "BH4c", the image of the button or the like changes strongly at the timing of any one of the three timings (timing 3 in this embodiment), and the "final" is the "fourth mode (stick)". It is a button development production category. In the present embodiment, the button development effect category "BH4c" belongs to the button development effect pattern "BH4c-1" which has a strong change at the timing 3.

In the case of the button development effect pattern "BH4c-1", the image of the button or the like changes strongly at the timing 3 and does not change at the timing 1 or the timing 2. Therefore, the image of the button or the like according to the button development effect pattern "BH4a-1" is the first. In the first period (before "timing 1"), the second period ("timing 1" to "timing 2"), and the third period ("timing 2" to "timing 3"), the "first mode (small button") (White)) ”, and in the fourth period (after“ timing 3 ”), it becomes the“ fourth aspect (stick) ”.

FIG. 26 is a flowchart showing an example of the button development effect determination process (S529). FIG. 27 is an explanatory diagram for explaining the determination ratio of the button development effect and the like. FIG. 28 is an explanatory diagram illustrating the determination ratio of the button development effect pattern. In FIG. 27 (A) (the same applies to other figures), the fluctuation pattern “PA4-X” is the fluctuation pattern of the super reach α (loss) (specifically, the fluctuation patterns “PA4-1” and “PA4-”. 2 ”or“ PA4-3 ”). The fluctuation pattern "PA5-X" is a fluctuation pattern of the super reach β (loss) (specifically, any one of the fluctuation patterns "PA5-1", "PA5-2", and "PA5-3"). The fluctuation pattern "PB4-X" is a fluctuation pattern of the super reach α (big hit) (specifically, any one of the fluctuation patterns "PB4-1", "PB4-2", and "PB4-3"). The fluctuation pattern "PB5-X" is a fluctuation pattern of super reach β (big hit) (specifically, any one of the fluctuation patterns "PB5-1", "PB5-2", and "PB5-3").

In the button development effect determination process shown in FIG. 26, the effect control CPU 120 first determines whether or not the button development effect is executed (S550). Specifically, the effect control CPU 120 determines whether or not to execute the button development effect based on the variation pattern specified by the variation pattern designation command at a determination ratio as shown in FIG. 27 (A). ..

For example, the effect control CPU 120 determines that the button development effect is executed at a rate of 5% when the variation pattern specified by the variation pattern designation command is the variation pattern “PA4-X”. For example, the ROM 121 stores a button development effect execution presence / absence determination table for super reach α (loss), which is referred to when the fluctuation pattern specified by the fluctuation pattern designation command is the fluctuation pattern “PA4-X”. In the table, the numerical values to be compared with the random number value for determining whether or not the button development effect is executed (for example, the random number value updated in the effect random number update process (S77)) are "no execution" and "execution". It suffices if it is assigned to "yes" at a ratio of 5:95.

Further, for example, the effect control CPU 120 determines that the button development effect is executed at a rate of 10% when the variation pattern specified by the variation pattern designation command is the variation pattern “PA5-X”. For example, the ROM 121 stores a button development effect execution presence / absence determination table for super reach β (loss), which is referred to when the fluctuation pattern specified by the fluctuation pattern designation command is the fluctuation pattern “PA5-X”. Then, in the table, a numerical value to be compared with a random value for determining whether or not to execute the button development effect may be assigned to "without execution" and "with execution" at a ratio of 10:90.

In the effect control CPU 120, the fluctuation pattern specified by the fluctuation pattern designation command is a super reach fluctuation pattern (“PA4-X”, “PA5-X”, “PB4-X”, “PB5-X”). When the fluctuation pattern is other than (“PA1-X”, “PA2-X”, “PA3-X”, “PB1-X”, “PB3-X”), it is always determined not to execute the button development effect.

According to FIG. 27 (A), since the button development effect is always super reach when the button development effect is executed, the jackpot expectation is higher when the button development effect is executed than when it is not executed.

In addition, the jackpot expectation when the button development effect is executed in the super reach α in the low probability state is (probability that "executed" in "PB4-X") × (low probability state). Sometimes "PB4-X") / {(Probability of "Execution" in "PB4-X") x (Probability of "PB4-X" in low probability state) + ("PA4" -X "is" probability of "execution") x (probability of "PA4-X" when in a low probability state)}, which is about 18.5%. The probability of "execution" for "PB4-X" is 15%, and the probability of "execution" for "PA4-X" is 5% (FIG. 27 (A)). Further, since the jackpot probability in the low probability state is about 1/199 (see FIG. 6), the probability of becoming "PB4-X" in the low probability state is (1/199) × (30/100). Yes, the probability of becoming "PA4-X" in the low probability state is (198/199) × (2/100) (see FIGS. 16 and 17). On the other hand, the jackpot expectation when Super Reach α is executed in the low probability state is the probability of becoming "PB4-X" in the low probability state / ("PB4-X" in the low probability state. It is obtained from the probability of becoming "PB4-X" + the probability of becoming "PA4-X" in a low probability state), and is about 7%. From the above, when the button development effect is executed in Super Reach α, the jackpot expectation is higher than when it is not executed.

In addition, the jackpot expectation when the button development effect is executed in the super reach β in the low probability state is (probability that "executed" in "PB5-X") × (low probability state). Sometimes "PB5-X") / {(Probability of "Execution" in "PB5-X") x (Probability of "PB5-X" in low probability state) + ("PA5" -X "is" probability of "execution") x (probability of "PA5-X" when in a low probability state)}, which is about 50%. The probability of "execution" for "PB5-X" is 40%, and the probability of "execution" for "PA5-X" is 10% (FIG. 27 (A)). Further, since the jackpot probability in the low probability state is about 1/199 (see FIG. 6), the probability of becoming "PB5-X" in the low probability state is (1/199) × (50/100). Yes, the probability of becoming "PA5-X" in the low probability state is (198/199) × (1/100) (see FIGS. 16 and 17). On the other hand, the jackpot expectation when the super reach β is executed in the low probability state is the probability of becoming "PB5-X" in the low probability state / ("PB5-X" in the low probability state. It is obtained from the probability of becoming "PB5-X" + the probability of becoming "PA5-X" in a low probability state), and is about 20%. From the above, when the button development effect is executed in Super Reach β, the jackpot expectation is higher than when it is not executed.

Return to FIG. After executing the process of step S550, the effect control CPU 120 determines whether or not it is determined to execute the button development effect in the process of step S500 (S551). If it is determined not to execute the button development effect (step S551; NO), the button development effect determination process is terminated.

On the other hand, when it is determined to execute the button development effect (step S551; YES), the effect control CPU 120 determines the button development effect category (S552). Specifically, the effect control CPU 120 determines the button development effect category at a determination ratio as shown in FIG. 27 (B) based on the variation pattern specified by the variation pattern designation command.

For example, when the fluctuation pattern specified by the fluctuation pattern designation command is the fluctuation pattern "PA4-X", the effect control CPU 120 determines the button development effect category "BH1" at a rate of 30%, and determines the button development effect category "BH1". "BH2" is determined at a rate of 20%, button development effect category "BH3a" is determined at a rate of 20%, button development effect category "BH3b" is determined at a rate of 10%, and button development effect category "BH4a" is determined. Is determined at a rate of 10%, the button development effect category "BH4b" is determined at a rate of 10%, and the button development effect category "BH4c" is determined at a rate of 0%. For example, the ROM 121 stores a button development effect category determination table for super reach α (loss), which is referred to when the fluctuation pattern specified by the fluctuation pattern designation command is the fluctuation pattern “PA4-X”. In the table, the numerical values to be compared with the random number value for determining the button development effect category (for example, the random number value updated in the effect random number update process (S77)) are "BH1", "BH2", and "BH2". It suffices that "BH3a", "BH3b", "BH4a", "BH4b" and "BH4c" are assigned at a ratio of 30:20:20:10:10:10: 0.

Further, for example, when the fluctuation pattern specified by the fluctuation pattern designation command is the fluctuation pattern "PA5-X", the effect control CPU 120 determines the button development effect category "BH1" at a rate of 0%, and the button development effect. The category "BH2" is determined at a rate of 30%, the button development effect category "BH3a" is determined at a rate of 20%, the button development effect category "BH3b" is determined at a rate of 20%, and the button development effect category "BH3a" is determined. "BH4a" is determined at a rate of 15%, the button development effect category "BH4b" is determined at a rate of 10%, and the button development effect category "BH4c" is determined at a rate of 5%. For example, the ROM 121 stores a button development effect category determination table for super reach β (loss), which is referred to when the fluctuation pattern specified by the fluctuation pattern designation command is the fluctuation pattern “PA5-X”. In the table, the numerical values to be compared with the random value for determining the button development effect category are "BH1", "BH2", "BH3a", "BH3b", "BH4a", "BH4b" and "BH4c". It suffices if it is assigned at a ratio of 0:30:20:20:15: 10: 5.

According to FIG. 27 (B), in the super reach α, the determination ratio of the button development effect category “BH4a” or “BH4b” to the determination ratio of the button development effect category “BH1” or “BH2” is the fluctuation pattern “PB4”. The case of "-X" is higher than the case of the fluctuation pattern "PA4-X". That is, in the super reach α, the case where the image such as a button finally changes to the fourth aspect (stick) is the first aspect (small button (white)) or the second aspect (large button (white)). Expectations for big hits are higher than when it stops at. Further, in the super reach β, the determination ratio of the button development effect category “BH4a” or “BH4b” or “BH4c” to the determination ratio of the button development effect category “BH2” is the case where the fluctuation pattern “PB5-X” is used. This is higher than the case where the fluctuation pattern is "PA5-X". That is, in the super reach β, the jackpot expectation is higher when the image such as a button finally changes to the fourth mode (stick) than when it stops at the second mode (large button (white)). It was explained that the relationship of the jackpot expectation degree is super reach β> super reach α, but according to FIG. 27 (B), the case where the super reach β is the case is higher than the case where the super reach α is achieved. Images such as buttons are likely to change to the fourth aspect in the end. From the above, the big hit expectation of the fourth aspect (stick)> the big hit expectation of the third aspect (large button (red))> the big hit expectation of the second aspect (large button (red))> the first aspect (small button) (White)) is the expected degree of big hit.

Further, according to FIG. 27 (B), the determination ratio of the button development effect category "BH3b" to the determination ratio of the button development effect category "BH3a" is the variation pattern "PB4-X" in the case of the variation pattern "PB4-X". It is higher than the case of "PA4-X", and higher in the case of the fluctuation pattern "PB5-X" than in the case of the fluctuation pattern "PA5-X". That is, in the case where the "final" becomes the "third mode" due to one middle change (two-step change) (BH3b), the "final" becomes the "third" due to the two weak changes (one-step change). The expectation of a big hit is higher than in the case of "aspect" (BH3a).

Further, according to FIG. 27 (B), the determination ratio of the button development effect category "BH4c" to the determination ratio of the button development effect category "BH4a" or "BH4b" is the case where the fluctuation pattern "PB5-X" is used. Is higher than when is the fluctuation pattern "PA5-X". In other words, when the "final" becomes the "fourth mode" (BH4c) due to one strong change (three-step change), one weak change (one-step change) and one medium change (2). The expectation of a big hit is higher than in the case where the "final" becomes the "fourth aspect" (BH4a, BH4b) due to the step change). Further, the determination ratio of the button development effect category "BH4b" to the determination ratio of the button development effect category "BH4a" is higher in the case of the variation pattern "PB4-X" than in the case of the variation pattern "PA4-X". It is higher, and the case of the fluctuation pattern "PB5-X" is higher than the case of the fluctuation pattern "PA5-X". In other words, when the "final" becomes the "third mode" (BH4b) in the order of weak change (1 step change) and medium change (2 step change), medium change (2 step change) and weak change (2 step change) The degree of expectation of a big hit is higher than that in the case where the "final" becomes the "third mode" (BH4a) in the order of (one-step change).

Return to FIG. After executing the process of step S552, the effect control CPU 120 determines one button development effect pattern belonging to the button development effect category determined in step S552 (S553).

For example, when the button development effect category “BH2” is determined in step S552, in the effect control CPU 120, as shown in FIG. 28B, the variation pattern designated by the variation pattern designation command is the variation pattern “ When it is "PA4-X" or "PA5-X", the button development effect pattern "BH2-1" is determined at a rate of 36%, and the button development effect pattern "BH2-2" is determined at a rate of 33%. The button development effect pattern "BH2-3" is determined at a rate of 31%, and when the variation pattern specified by the variation pattern specification command is the variation pattern "PB4-X" or "PB5-X", the button development effect pattern "BH2-1" is determined at a rate of 31%, the button development effect pattern "BH2-2" is determined at a rate of 33%, and the button development effect pattern "BH2-3" is determined at a rate of 36%. For example, the ROM 121 has a button development effect pattern for super reach (loss), which is referred to when the fluctuation pattern specified by the fluctuation pattern designation command is the fluctuation pattern "PA4-X" or "PA5-X". (BH2-X) A determination table is stored, and a numerical value to be compared with a random number value for determining a button development effect pattern (for example, a random number value updated in the effect random number update process (S77)) is stored in the table. , "BH2-1", "BH2-2" and "BH2-3" may be assigned at a ratio of 36:33:31. Further, the button development effect pattern (BH2-X) for super reach (big hit), which is referred to when the fluctuation pattern specified by the fluctuation pattern designation command is the fluctuation pattern "PB4-X" or "PB5-X". ) The determination table is stored, and the numerical values to be compared with the random value for determining the button development effect pattern are 31:33 in "BH2-1", "BH2-2", and "BH2-3". It may be assigned at a ratio of: 36.

Further, for example, when the button development effect category “BH3a” is determined in step S552, in the effect control CPU 120, as shown in FIG. 28C, the variation pattern specified by the variation pattern designation command is the variation pattern. When it is "PA4-X" or "PA5-X", the button development effect pattern "BH3a-1" is determined at a rate of 55%, and the button development effect pattern "BH3a-2" is determined at a rate of 45%. , When the fluctuation pattern specified by the fluctuation pattern specification command is the fluctuation pattern "PB4-X" or "PB5-X", the button development effect pattern "BH3a-1" is determined at a rate of 45%, and the button development effect is produced. The pattern "BH3a-2" is determined at a rate of 55%. For example, the ROM 121 has a button development effect pattern for super reach (loss), which is referred to when the fluctuation pattern specified by the fluctuation pattern designation command is the fluctuation pattern "PA4-X" or "PA5-X". (BH3a-X) A determination table is stored, and in the table, the numerical value to be compared with the random number value for determining the button development effect pattern is 55:45 between "BH3a-1" and "BH3a-2". It suffices if it is assigned by. Further, the button development effect pattern (BH3a-X) for super reach (big hit), which is referred to when the fluctuation pattern specified by the fluctuation pattern designation command is the fluctuation pattern "PB4-X" or "PB5-X". ) A determination table is stored, and a numerical value to be compared with a random value for determining a button development effect pattern is assigned to "BH3a-1" and "BH3a-2" at a ratio of 45:55. Just do it.

If the button development effect category "BH1" is determined in step S552, one type of button development effect pattern (button development effect pattern "BH1-1") belongs to the button development effect category "BH1". Therefore, as shown in FIG. 28 (A), the fluctuation pattern specified by the fluctuation pattern designation command is the fluctuation pattern "PA4-X", "PA5-X", "PB4-X", "PB5-X". In any case, the button development effect pattern "BH1-1" is determined. Further, when the button development effect category "BH4c" is determined in step S552, only one type of button development effect pattern (button development effect pattern "BH4c-1") belongs to the button development effect category "BH4c". Therefore, as shown in FIG. 28 (G), the fluctuation pattern specified by the fluctuation pattern designation command is the fluctuation pattern "PA4-X", "PA5-X", "PB4-X", "PB5-X". In any case, the button development effect pattern "BH4c-1" is determined.

According to FIG. 28B, the determination ratio of the button development effect category “BH2-3” to the determination ratio of the button development effect pattern “BH2-1” is the fluctuation pattern “PB4-X” or “PB5-X”. In some cases, it is higher than in the case of the variation pattern "PA4-X" or "PA5-X". Further, according to FIG. 28C, the determination ratio of the button development effect category “BH3a-2” to the determination ratio of the button development effect pattern “BH3a-1” is the fluctuation pattern “PB4-X” or “PB5-X”. Is higher than the case of the variation pattern "PA4-X" or "PA5-X". The same applies to FIGS. 28 (D) to 28 (F). That is, the jackpot expectation is higher when the change is made at a later timing than when the change is made at an earlier timing.

Return to FIG. After executing the process of step S553, the effect control CPU 120 determines an action effect such as a button (simply "action effect" in the figure) (S554), and ends the button development effect determination process. In the process of step S554, specifically, the effect control CPU 120 changes the image such as a button at timings 1 to 3 (“no change”, “weak change”, “medium change”, “strong change”. ), The presence / absence of execution of the button or the like action effect (and the effect mode when the action effect is performed) is determined at the determination ratio as shown in FIG. 27 (C).

In the following description, as the button and other action effects performed on the image display device 5, the effect in which a character appears (character appearance) is referred to as a "weak effect effect", and the effect in which a cannon is fired (cannon) is referred to as "cannon". It is called "medium-action effect", and the effect with lightning strike (lightning strike) may be called "strong-action effect".

For example, when the change mode of the image such as a button at a certain timing (timings 1 to 3) is "no change", the effect control CPU 120 sets "no action effect" by 70% as shown in FIG. 27 (C). The "weak action effect" is determined at a rate of 20%, the "medium effect effect" is determined at a rate of 10%, and the "strong effect effect" is determined at a rate of 0%. For example, the ROM 121 stores a button or the like action effect determination table that is referred to when there is no change, and is compared with a random value for determining the button or the like action effect in the table. Numerical values may be assigned to "no action effect", "weak action effect", "medium action effect", and "strong action effect" at a ratio of 70:20:10: 0.

Further, for example, when the change mode of the image such as a button at a certain timing (timings 1 to 3) is "weak change", the effect control CPU 120 sets "no action effect" to 20 as shown in FIG. 27 (C). %, "Weak effect" is determined at 70%, "Medium effect" is determined at 8%, and "Strong effect" is determined at 2%. For example, the ROM 121 stores a table for determining the action of a button or the like at the time of a weak change, which is referred to when the change is "weak", and the table is compared with a random value for determining the action of the button or the like. Numerical values may be assigned to "no action effect", "weak action effect", "medium action effect", and "strong action effect" at a ratio of 20: 70: 8: 2.

That is, in step S533, for example, when the button development effect pattern "BH4b-1" is determined, the timing 1 is "weak change", the timing 2 is "no change", and the timing 3 is "medium change". However (see FIG. 25), in the process of step S554, the effect control CPU 120 determines "no action effect" at a rate of 20% for the action effect such as the button for the "weak change" of the timing 1, and "weak effect". "Direction" is determined at a rate of 70%, "Medium action effect" is determined at a rate of 8%, and "Strong action effect" is determined at a rate of 2%. Further, the effect control CPU 120 determines "no action effect" at a rate of 70% and "weak effect effect" at a rate of 20% for the action effect such as a button for "no change" at timing 2. The "medium action effect" is determined at a rate of 10%, and the "strong effect effect" is determined at a rate of 0%. Further, the effect control CPU 120 determines "no action effect" at a rate of 5% and "weak action effect" at a rate of 20% for the action effect such as a button for the "medium change" of the timing 3. The "medium action effect" is determined at a rate of 55%, and the "strong effect effect" is determined at a rate of 20%. Further, in step S533, for example, when the button development effect pattern “BH1-1” is determined, all the timings 1 to 3 are “no change” (see FIG. 25), but in the process of step S554, The effect control CPU 120 determines "no action effect" at a rate of 70% and "weak effect effect" at a rate of 20% for the action effects such as buttons for each "no change" at timings 1 to 3. Then, the "medium action effect" is determined at a rate of 10%, and the "strong effect effect" is determined at a rate of 0%.

According to FIG. 27 (C), when the button or the like action effect (weak action effect, medium action effect, strong action effect) is executed, the image such as the button changes (weak change, medium change,) as compared with the case where it is not executed. (Strong change) is easy. In addition, when the strong action effect is executed, the image such as a button always changes (weak change, medium change, strong change), and when the medium action effect is executed, the weak action effect is executed as compared with the case where the weak action effect is executed. Images such as buttons are easily changed (weak change, medium change, strong change). Further, when the strong action effect is executed, it is more likely to change strongly than when the strong action effect is not executed, and when the medium action effect is executed, it is more likely to change during the middle action than when the medium action effect is not executed. When the weak action effect is executed, it is more likely to change weakly than when the weak action effect is not executed.

As described above, in step S532 of the variable display start setting process (S171), the effect control pattern corresponding to the effect mode of the button development effect is also set as the usage pattern, so that the effect control CPU 120 is used for the button development effect. The decision content determined in the determination process (for example, (button development effect pattern), the effect mode of the action effect such as the button ("no action effect", "weak effect effect", "medium effect effect" in each of the timings 1 to 3), Information that identifies the distinction of the "strong action effect") is stored in the RAM 122 or the like, and in step S532 of the variable display start setting process (S171), the RAM 122 or the like is referred to, and the effect control corresponding to the effect mode of the button development effect or the like is referred to. The pattern may also be set as the pattern to be used.

FIG. 29A is an explanatory diagram illustrating various periods in the button development effect. Before explaining FIG. 29 (A), "T1" to "T14" shown in FIGS. 29 to 38 will be described. "T1" represents the start timing of the fluctuation. "T14" represents the end timing of the fluctuation. "T2" represents the timing of reaching. "T3" represents the timing of developing into super reach. Super reach developed from "T3" ends in "T13". That is, "T13" represents the timing at which the result of super reach (win / loss, etc.) is displayed (notified).

"T4" represents the timing of starting the display of an image such as a button. Images such as buttons displayed from "T4" are deleted by "T13". That is, "T4" to "T13" are button and the like display periods (button and the like image display periods).

“T6” represents “timing 1” in FIG. 25. “T8” represents “timing 2” in FIG. 25. “T10” represents “timing 3” in FIG. “T5” represents the timing of starting execution of the button or the like action effect corresponding to the change or the like (no change, weak change, medium change, strong change) of the button or the like image at the timing 1 (T6). The action effect such as buttons started at "T5" ends at "T6". That is, "T5" to "T6" are execution periods of the button or the like action effect corresponding to the change of the button or the like image at the timing 1. “T7” represents the timing of starting execution of the button or the like action effect corresponding to the change of the button or the like image at the timing 2 (T8). The action effects such as buttons started at "T7" end at "T8". That is, "T7" to "T8" are execution periods of the button or the like action effect corresponding to the change of the button or the like image at the timing 2. “T9” represents the timing of starting execution of the button or the like action effect corresponding to the change of the button or the like image at the timing 3 (T10). The action effects such as buttons started at "T9" end at "T10". That is, "T9" to "T10" are execution periods of the button or the like action effect corresponding to the change of the button or the like image at the timing 3. In addition, "T11" and "T12" will be described later.

As shown in FIG. 29 (A), a part of the button or the like display period (T4 to T13) (T11 to T13) is the valid period (operation is valid) of the button or the like (push button 31B, stick controller 31A). The other period (T4 to T11) is a non-valid period (a period during which the operation is not valid) such as a button. That is, "T11" represents the timing at which the operation of the button or the like becomes effective. During the non-valid period (T4 to T11), a "regulation line" is displayed by superimposing it on an image such as a button as an image for notifying that the non-valid period is in effect. During the valid period (T11 to T13), the "regulation line" is not displayed. That is, the "regulation line" is erased at "T11".

The period (T13 to T14) following the button or the like display period (T4 to T13) is a period for displaying the result (win or lose, etc.). More specifically, if there is no operation during the valid period (T11 to T13), the image of the button or the like is deleted when the valid period ends (T13), and the period following the button or the like display period (T13 to T14). ), The result is displayed. On the other hand, if there is an operation during the valid period, the image such as a button is deleted when the operation is performed, and the result is displayed from the time when the operation is performed. If there is an operation during the valid period, the valid period ends when the operation is performed. An effect of displaying an image of a button or the like during the valid period (T11 to T13) and displaying a result (win or lose) after the image of the button or the like is deleted may be referred to as an "operation effect".

Each of FIGS. 29 (B) to 31 (B) is an explanatory diagram illustrating a specific flow of button development effect.

(Specific example 1)
FIG. 29B shows the flow of the button development effect in the first embodiment. In Specific Example 1, it is assumed that the variation pattern specified by the variation pattern designation command is the variation pattern “PA4-X”. Further, the effect control CPU 120 determines to execute the button development effect (S550) in the button development effect determination process (S529), determines the button development effect category "BH1" (S552), and determines the button development effect pattern "BH1". -1 ”is determined (S553),“ no action effect ”is determined (S554) for the action effect such as buttons for timing 1 (“no change” in “BH1-1”), and timing 2 (“BH1-1”) is determined. Then, the "weak action effect (character appearance)" is determined for the button action effect for "no change") (S554), and the "action" for the button action effect for timing 3 ("no change" in "BH1-1"). It is assumed that "no production" has been decided. The determination content is set in step S532 of the variable display start setting process (S171), and the button development effect is executed as shown in FIG. 29 (B).

In the case of the button development effect pattern "BH1-1" determined in the specific example 1, the image of the button or the like has the first period (before "timing 1" / T4 to T6) as well as the second period ("timing 1" to. Small buttons (white) for both "Timing 2" / T6 to T8), the third period ("Timing 2" to "Timing 3" / T8 to T10), and the fourth period ("Timing 3" and later / T10 to T13). ) (See FIG. 25), and since the “regulation line” is displayed during the non-valid period (T4 to T11) regardless of the button development effect pattern, FIG. 29 (B) is shown in Specific Example 1. The button development effect is executed as shown. Further, in the specific example 1, since the "weak action effect (character appearance)" is determined for the timing 2 (no change), the character appears in "T7" to "T8", but the image such as the button is not changed. (Failure production).

(Specific example 2)
FIG. 30A shows the flow of the button development effect in the second embodiment. In Specific Example 2, the variation pattern specified by the variation pattern designation command is assumed to be the variation pattern “PA4-X”. Further, the effect control CPU 120 determines to execute the button development effect (S550) in the button development effect determination process (S529), determines the button development effect category "BH2" (S552), and determines the button development effect pattern "BH2". -1 ”is determined (S553), and“ weak effect effect ”is determined (S554) for timing 1 (“weak change (1st → 2nd) ”in“ BH2-1 ”). Regarding the action effect of buttons and the like for 2 (“no change” in “BH2-1”), “no action effect” is determined (S554), and the action effect of buttons and the like for timing 3 (“no change” in “BH2-1”). It is assumed that the "weak effect production" has been decided. The determination content is set in step S532 of the variable display start setting process (S171), and the button development effect is executed as shown in FIG. 30 (A).

In the case of the button development effect pattern "BH2-1" determined in the specific example 2, the image such as a button is the "first mode (small button (white)" in the first period (before "timing 1" / T4 to T6). ) ”, And the second period (“Timing 1” to “Timing 2” / T6 to T8), the third period (“Timing 2” to “Timing 3” / T8 to T10), and the fourth period (“Timing 2” to “T10”). After "Timing 3" / T10 to T13), it becomes "second mode (large button (white))" (see FIG. 25), and any button development effect pattern is during the non-valid period (T4 to T11). In the second embodiment, the button development effect is executed as shown in FIG. 30 (A) in order to display the “regulation line”. Further, in the specific example 2, since the "weak action effect (character appearance)" is determined for the timing 1 (weak change), the character appears in "T5" to "T6" and the image such as a button is displayed in "T6". The "first aspect (small button (white))" is changed to the "second aspect (large button (white))" (one-step change) (success production). Further, in the specific example 2, since the "weak action effect (character appearance)" is determined for the timing 3 (no change), the character appears in "T9" to "T10", but the image such as a button is displayed in "T10". Not changed (failure production).

(Specific example 3)
FIG. 30B shows the flow of the button development effect in the specific example 3. In Specific Example 3, the variation pattern specified by the variation pattern designation command is assumed to be the variation pattern “PB4-X”. Further, the effect control CPU 120 determines to execute the button development effect (S550) in the button development effect determination process (S529), determines the button development effect category "BH3a" (S552), and determines the button development effect pattern "BH3a". -2 "is determined (S553), and" no action effect "is determined for timing 1 ("no change" in "BH3a-2"), and "no action effect" is determined (S554), and timing 2 ("BH3a-2"). Then, "no action effect" is determined for the action effect such as buttons for "weak change (1st → 2nd)" (S554), and "weak change (2nd → 3rd)" in timing 3 ("BH3a-2"). It is assumed that the "weak action effect" has been decided for the action effect such as buttons for "). The determination content is set in step S532 of the variable display start setting process (S171), and the button development effect is executed as shown in FIG. 30 (B).

In the case of the button development effect pattern "BH3a-2" determined in the specific example 3, the image of the button or the like is the first period (before "timing 1" / T4 to T6) or the second period ("timing 1" to. "Timing 2" / T6 to T8) is the "first mode (small button (white))", and the third period ("timing 2" to "timing 3" / T8 to T10) is the "second mode (large)". Button (white)) ”, and in the fourth period (“Timing 3” and later / T10 to T13), it becomes “third mode (large button (red))” (see Fig. 25), and any button development effect. Even if it is a pattern, since the "regulation line" is displayed during the non-valid period (T4 to T11), in the specific example 3, the button development effect is executed as shown in FIG. 30 (B). Further, in the specific example 3, since "no action effect" is determined for the timing 2 (weak change), the image such as a button is displayed in "T8" without the character appearing in "T7" to "T8". The mode (small button (white)) is changed to the "second mode (large button (white))" (changed by one step). Further, in the specific example 3, since the "weak action effect (character appearance)" is determined for the timing 3 (weak change), the character appears in "T9" to "T10" and the image such as a button is displayed in "T10". The "second mode (large button (white))" is changed (one step change) to the "third mode (large button (red))" (success production).

(Specific example 4)
FIG. 31 (A) shows the flow of the button development effect in the specific example 4. In Specific Example 4, the variation pattern specified by the variation pattern designation command is assumed to be the variation pattern “PB5-X”. Further, the effect control CPU 120 determines to execute the button development effect (S550) in the button development effect determination process (S529), determines the button development effect category "BH4b" (S552), and determines the button development effect pattern "BH4b". -1 ”is determined (S553), and“ weak effect effect ”is determined (S554) for timing 1 (“weak change (1st → 2nd)” in “BH4b-1”). "No action effect" is determined for the action effect such as buttons for 2 ("No change" in "BH4b-1") (S554), and "Medium change (2nd → 4th)" in Timing 3 ("BH4b-1"). It is assumed that the "medium action effect" has been decided for the action effect such as buttons for "). The determination content is set in step S532 of the variable display start setting process (S171), and the button development effect is executed as shown in FIG. 31 (A).

In the case of the button development effect pattern "BH4b-1" determined in the specific example 4, the image such as the button is the "first mode (small button (white)" in the first period (before "timing 1" / T4 to T6). ) ”, And in the second period (“Timing 1” to “Timing 2” / T6 to T8) and the third period (“Timing 2” to “Timing 3” / T8 to T10), the “second mode (large) Button (white)) ”, and in the fourth period (“Timing 3” and later / T10 to T13), it becomes “fourth mode (stick)” (see FIG. 25), and any button development effect pattern. In order to display the "regulation line" during the non-valid period (T4 to T11), in the specific example 4, the button development effect is executed as shown in FIG. 31 (A). Further, in the specific example 4, since the "weak action effect (character appearance)" is determined for the timing 1 (weak change), the character appears in "T5" to "T6" and the image such as a button is displayed in "T6". The "first aspect (small button (white))" is changed to the "second aspect (large button (white))" (one-step change) (success production). Further, in the specific example 4, since the "medium action effect (cannon)" was determined for the timing 3 (medium change), the cannon was made to appear in "T9" to "T10", and the image such as a button was displayed in "T10". The second mode (large button (white)) is changed to the "fourth mode (stick)" (two-step change) (success production).

(Specific example 5)
FIG. 31B shows the flow of the button development effect in the specific example 5. In Specific Example 5, the variation pattern specified by the variation pattern designation command is assumed to be the variation pattern “PB5-X”. Further, the effect control CPU 120 determines to execute the button development effect (S550) in the button development effect determination process (S529), determines the button development effect category "BH4c" (S552), and determines the button development effect pattern "BH4c". -1 ”is determined (S553),“ no action effect ”is determined for timing 1 (“no change” in “BH4c-1”), and “no action effect” is determined (S554), and timing 2 (“BH4c-1”” is determined. Then, "no action effect" is determined for the action effect of the button etc. for "no change") (S554), and the action effect of the button etc. for the timing 3 ("strong change (1st → 4th)" in "BH4c-1"). It is assumed that the "strong action production" has been decided.

In the case of the button development effect pattern "BH4c-1" determined in the specific example 5, the image of the button or the like is the first period (before "timing 1" / T4 to T6) or the second period ("timing 1" to. In the "timing 2" / T6 to T8) and the third period ("timing 2" to "timing 3" / T8 to T10), it becomes the "first mode (small button (white))" and the fourth period ("" After "Timing 3" / T10 to T13), it becomes the "fourth mode (stick)" (see FIG. 25), and any button development effect pattern is "regulated" during the non-valid period (T4 to T11). In order to display the "line", in the specific example 5, the button development effect is executed as shown in FIG. 31 (B). Further, in the specific example 5, since the "strong action effect (lightning strike)" is determined for the timing 3 (strong change), a thundercloud appears in "T9" to "T10" and an image such as a button is displayed in "T10". The first mode (small button (white)) is changed to the "fourth mode (stick)" (three-step change) (success production).

32 to 38 are diagrams showing an example of display operation in the display area of the image display device 5. In FIGS. 32 to 38, character C1 is an ally character appearing in super reach α and super reach β, character C2 is an enemy character appearing in super reach α, and character C3 is an enemy character appearing in super reach β. Is.

32 and 33 show a display operation example of the specific example 3 (T2 or later) shown in FIG. 30 (B). Specifically, FIG. 32 (A) → FIG. 32 (B) → FIG. 32 (C) → FIG. 32 (D) → FIG. 32 (E) → FIG. 32 (F) → FIG. 33 (G) → FIG. 33 ( H) → FIG. 33 (I) → FIG. 33 (J) → FIG. 33 (K) → FIG. 33 (L) → FIG. 33 (M). FIG. 32 (A) is a scene (T2) of reaching. FIG. 32 (B) is a scene (T3) in which the super reach α is reached. FIG. 32 (C) is a scene (T4) in which the display of the small button (white) D1 is started. Since it is a non-valid period (T4 to T11), the regulation line K is displayed superimposed on the small button (white) D1 in FIG. 32 (C).

FIG. 32 (D) is a scene (T5) in which the execution of the action effect such as a button corresponding to the change or the like (no change, weak change, medium change, strong change) at the timing 1 is started. In the specific example 3, since the action effect such as the button corresponding to the change at the timing 1 is not executed, the display in FIG. 32 (D) is the same as that in FIG. 32 (C) (excluding the operation of the characters C1 and C2). ing. FIG. 32 (E) is a scene (T6) in which a change or the like at timing 1 is performed. Since there is no change in the timing 1 in the specific example 3, the display in FIG. 32 (E) is the same as that in FIG. 32 (D) (excluding the operations of the characters C1 and C2).

FIG. 32 (F) is a scene (T7) in which the execution of the action effect such as a button corresponding to the change or the like (no change, weak change, medium change, strong change) at the timing 2 is started. In the specific example 3, since the action effect such as the button corresponding to the change at the timing 2 is not executed, the display in FIG. 32 (F) is the same as that in FIG. 32 (E) (excluding the operation of the characters C1 and C2). ing. FIG. 33 (G) is a scene (T8) in which a change or the like at timing 2 is performed. In Specific Example 3, since the change is weak at the timing 2, in FIG. 33 (G), the small button (white) D1 is changed to the large button (white) D2 (one-step change). Since it is a non-valid period (T4 to T11), in FIG. 33 (G), the regulation line K is displayed superimposed on the large button (white) D2.

FIG. 33 (H) is a scene (T9) in which the execution of the action effect such as a button corresponding to the change or the like (no change, weak change, medium change, strong change) at the timing 3 is started. In the specific example 3, since the weak action effect (character appearance) is executed as the action effect such as a button corresponding to the change at the timing 3, in FIG. 33 (H), the character JS (the code "JS" is not used as the weak action effect). The image JS1 praying (illustrated. The same applies hereinafter) is displayed. FIG. 33 (I) is a scene (T10) in which a change or the like at the timing 3 is performed. In Specific Example 3, since the change is weak at the timing 3, in FIG. 33 (I), the large button (white) D2 is changed to the large button (red) D3 (one-step change). Since it is a non-valid period (T4 to T11), in FIG. 33 (I), the regulation line K is displayed superimposed on the large button (red) D3. Further, in FIG. 33 (I), the image JS2 that the character JS is pleased with is also displayed.

FIG. 33 (J) is a scene (T11) in which the operation corresponding to the large button (red) D3 (operation of the push button 31B) is enabled. Since the valid period (T11 to T13) has been reached, the regulation line K is not displayed in FIG. 33 (J). FIG. 33 (K) is a scene (T12) immediately after FIG. 33 (J). In order to encourage the player to operate the push button 31B, the large button (red) D3 displayed at the lower right of the display area in FIG. 33 (J) is displayed as the large button (red) D3U in FIG. 33 (K). It is displayed large in the center of the area. In addition, in FIG. 33 (K), information (gauge, numerical value) for notifying the amount of the remaining valid period may be displayed. The same applies to FIGS. 35 (K), 36 (E), 37 (E), and 38 (E). In FIG. 30B, the position of T12 is shown away from the position of T11 for convenience of illustration. The same applies to other figures such as FIG. 29 (B).

FIG. 33 (L) shows a scene when the player operates the push button 31B during the valid period (T11 to T13), or the player pushes during the valid period (T11 to T13). It is a scene (T13) when the valid period when the button 31B is not operated ends. In Specific Example 3, since it is a big hit, the ally character C1 wins. That is, as a result of the operation (operation of the push button 31B) corresponding to the large button (red) D3 (large button (red) D3U), the victory or defeat (winning of the character C1) is notified. In FIG. 33 (L), T13 is described as a case where the player does not operate the push button 31B. The same applies to other figures. FIG. 33 (M) is a scene (T14) at which the variable display ends. Immediately after FIG. 33 (M), the fanfare effect is executed.

34 and 35 show a display operation example of the specific example 4 (T2 or later) shown in FIG. 31 (A). Specifically, FIG. 34 (A) → FIG. 34 (B) → FIG. 34 (C) → FIG. 34 (D) → FIG. 34 (E) → FIG. 34 (F) → FIG. 35 (G) → FIG. 35 ( H) → FIG. 35 (I) → FIG. 35 (J) → FIG. 35 (K) → FIG. 35 (L) → FIG. 35 (M). FIG. 34 (A) is a scene (T2) of reaching. FIG. 34 (B) is a scene (T3) in which the super reach β is reached. FIG. 34 (C) is a scene (T4) in which the display of the small button (white) D1 is started. Since it is a non-valid period (T4 to T11), the regulation line K is displayed superimposed on the small button (white) D1 in FIG. 34 (C).

FIG. 34 (D) is a scene (T5) in which the execution of the action effect such as a button corresponding to the change or the like (no change, weak change, medium change, strong change) at the timing 1 is started. In the specific example 4, since the weak action effect (character appearance) is executed as the action effect such as a button corresponding to the change at the timing 1, in FIG. 34 (D), the image JS1 prayed by the character JS is displayed as the weak action effect. ing. FIG. 34 (E) is a scene (T6) in which a change or the like at timing 1 is performed. In Specific Example 4, since the change is weak at the timing 1, in FIG. 34 (E), the small button (white) D1 is changed to the large button (white) D2 (one-step change). Since it is a non-valid period (T4 to T11), the regulation line K is displayed superimposed on the large button (white) D2 in FIG. 34 (E). Further, in FIG. 34 (E), the image JS2 that the character JS is pleased with is also displayed.

FIG. 34 (F) is a scene (T7) in which the execution of the action effect such as a button corresponding to the change or the like (no change, weak change, medium change, strong change) at the timing 2 is started. In the specific example 4, since the action effect such as the button corresponding to the change at the timing 2 is not executed, the display in FIG. 34 (F) is the same as that in FIG. 34 (E) (excluding the operation of the characters C1 and C3). ing. FIG. 35 (G) is a scene (T8) in which a change or the like at timing 2 is performed. Since there is no change in the timing 2 in the specific example 4, the display in FIG. 35 (G) is the same as that in FIG. 34 (F) (excluding the operations of the characters C1 and C3).

FIG. 35 (H) is a scene (T9) in which the execution of the action effect such as a button corresponding to the change or the like (no change, weak change, medium change, strong change) at the timing 3 is started. In the specific example 4, since the medium action effect (cannon) is executed as the action effect such as a button corresponding to the change at the timing 3, in FIG. 35 (H), the image TS1 of the cannon is displayed as the medium action effect. FIG. 35 (I) is a scene (T10) in which a change or the like at the timing 3 is performed. In the specific example 4, since the change is medium at the timing 3, in FIG. 35 (I), the large button (white) D2 is changed to the stick D4 (change in two steps). Since it is a non-valid period (T4 to T11), the regulation line K is displayed superimposed on the stick D4 in FIG. 35 (I). Further, in FIG. 35 (I), the image TS2 of the smoke of firing and the image TS3 of the impact at the time of hit are also displayed. If there is no change in the medium action effect (that is, if it is a failure effect), for example, it may not be fired, or it may not be hit even if it is fired.

FIG. 35 (J) is a scene (T11) in which the operation corresponding to the stick D4 (operation of the stick controller 31A) is enabled. Since the valid period (T11 to T13) has been reached, the regulation line K is not displayed in FIG. 35 (J). FIG. 35 (K) is a scene (T12) immediately after FIG. 35 (J). In order to encourage the player to operate the stick controller 31A, the stick D4 displayed at the lower right of the display area in FIG. 35 (J) is displayed in a large size in the center of the display area as the stick D4U in FIG. 35 (K). ing.

FIG. 35 (L) shows a scene when the player operates the stick controller 31A during the valid period (T11 to T13), or the player sticks during the valid period (T11 to T13). It is a scene (T13) when the valid period when the controller 31A is not operated ends. In the specific example 4, since it is a big hit, the ally character C1 wins. That is, as a result of the operation corresponding to the stick D4 (stick D4U) (operation of the stick controller 31A), the victory or defeat (winning of the character C1) is notified. FIG. 35 (M) is a scene (T14) at which the variable display ends. Immediately after FIG. 35 (M), the fanfare effect is executed.

FIG. 36 shows a display operation example of the specific example 1 (T8 or later) shown in FIG. 29 (B). Specifically, the transition is as follows: FIG. 36 (A) → FIG. 36 (B) → FIG. 36 (C) → FIG. 36 (D) → FIG. 36 (E) → FIG. 36 (F) → FIG. 36 (G). do. FIG. 36 (A) is a scene (T8) in which a change or the like at timing 2 is performed. Since there is no change in timing 2 in the specific example 1, in FIG. 36 (A), the small button (white) D1 is displayed as in the case of timing 1 and later. Since it is a non-valid period (T4 to T11), the regulation line K is displayed superimposed on the small button (white) D1 in FIG. 36 (A). In Specific Example 1, a weak action effect (character appearance) is executed as an action effect such as a button corresponding to a change or the like (no change, weak change, medium change, strong change) at timing 2, but the change at timing 2 is Since there is no such thing (that is, because it is a failure effect), the image JS2 that the character JS is pleased with is not displayed in FIG. 36 (A).

FIG. 36 (B) is a scene (T9) in which the execution of the action effect such as a button corresponding to the change at the timing 3 is started. In Specific Example 1, since the action effect such as a button corresponding to the change at the timing 3 is not executed, the display in FIG. 36 (B) is the same as that in FIG. 36 (A) (excluding the operation of the characters C1 and C2). ing. FIG. 36 (C) is a scene (T10) in which a change or the like at timing 3 is performed. Since there is no change in the timing 3 in the specific example 1, the display in FIG. 36 (C) is the same as that in FIG. 36 (B) (excluding the operations of the characters C1 and C2).

FIG. 36 (D) is a scene (T11) in which the operation corresponding to the small button (white) D1 (operation of the push button 31B) is enabled. Since the valid period (T11 to T13) has been reached, the regulation line K is not displayed in FIG. 36 (D). FIG. 36 (E) is a scene (T12) immediately after FIG. 36 (D). In order to encourage the player to operate the push button 31B, the small button (white) D1 displayed at the lower right of the display area in FIG. 36 (D) is displayed as the small button (white) D1U in FIG. 36 (E). It is displayed large in the center of the area.

FIG. 36 (F) shows a scene when the player operates the push button 31B during the valid period (T11 to T13), or the player pushes during the valid period (T11 to T13). It is a scene (T13) when the valid period when the button 31B is not operated ends. In the specific example 1, the character C2, which is an enemy character, has won because it is lost. That is, as a result of the operation (operation of the push button 31B) corresponding to the small button (white) D1 (small button (white) D1U), the victory or defeat (winning of the character C2) is notified. FIG. 36 (G) is a scene (T14) at which the variable display ends. Immediately after FIG. 36 (G), the following variable display is executed.

FIG. 37 shows a display operation example of the specific example 2 (T8 or later) shown in FIG. 30 (A). Specifically, the transition is as follows: FIG. 37 (A) → FIG. 37 (B) → FIG. 37 (C) → FIG. 37 (D) → FIG. 37 (E) → FIG. 37 (F) → FIG. 37 (G). do. FIG. 37 (A) is a scene (T8) in which a change or the like at timing 2 is performed. Since there is no change in the timing 2 in the specific example 2, in FIG. 37 (A), the large button (white) D2 is displayed as in the case of the timing 1 and later. Since it is a non-valid period (T4 to T11), the regulation line K is displayed superimposed on the large button (white) D2 in FIG. 37 (A).

FIG. 37 (B) is a scene (T9) in which the execution of the action effect such as a button corresponding to the change at the timing 3 is started. In the specific example 2, since the weak action effect (character appearance) is executed as the action effect such as a button corresponding to the change at the timing 3, in FIG. 37 (B), the image JS1 prayed by the character JS is displayed as the weak action effect. ing. FIG. 37 (C) is a scene (T10) in which a change or the like at timing 3 is performed. Since there is no change in the timing 3 in the specific example 2, the display in FIG. 37 (C) is the same as that in FIG. 37 (B) (excluding the operations of the characters C1 and C2). Since it is a failure effect, the image JS2 that the character JS is pleased with is not displayed in FIG. 37 (C).

FIG. 37 (D) is a scene (T11) in which the operation corresponding to the large button (white) D2 (operation of the push button 31B) is enabled. Since the valid period (T11 to T13) has been reached, the regulation line K is not displayed in FIG. 37 (D). FIG. 37 (E) is a scene (T12) immediately after FIG. 37 (D). In order to encourage the player to operate the push button 31B, the large button (white) D2 displayed at the lower right of the display area in FIG. 37 (D) is displayed as the large button (white) D2U in FIG. 37 (E). It is displayed large in the center of the area.

FIG. 37 (F) shows a scene when the player operates the push button 31B during the valid period (T11 to T13), or the player pushes during the valid period (T11 to T13). It is a scene (T13) when the valid period when the button 31B is not operated ends. In the specific example 2, the character C2, which is an enemy character, has won because it is lost. That is, as a result of the operation (operation of the push button 31B) corresponding to the large button (white) D2 (large button (white) D2U), the victory or defeat (winning of the character C2) is notified. FIG. 37 (G) is a scene (T14) at which the variable display ends. Immediately after FIG. 37 (G), the following variable display is executed.

FIG. 38 shows a display operation example of the specific example 5 (T8 or later) shown in FIG. 31 (B). Specifically, the transition is as follows: FIG. 38 (A) → FIG. 38 (B) → FIG. 38 (C) → FIG. 38 (D) → FIG. 38 (E) → FIG. 38 (F) → FIG. 38 (G). do. FIG. 38 (A) is a scene (T8) in which a change or the like at timing 2 is performed. Since there is no change in the timing 2 in the specific example 2, in FIG. 38 (A), the small button (white) D1 is displayed as in the case of the timing 1 and later. Since it is a non-valid period (T4 to T11), the regulation line K is displayed superimposed on the small button (white) D1 in FIG. 38 (A).

FIG. 38 (B) is a scene (T9) in which the execution of the action effect such as a button corresponding to the change at the timing 3 is started. In the specific example 5, since the strong action effect (lightning strike) is executed as the action effect such as a button corresponding to the change at the timing 3, in FIG. 38B, the image KS1 of the thundercloud is displayed as the strong action effect. FIG. 38 (C) is a scene (T10) in which a change or the like at timing 3 is performed. In Specific Example 5, since the change is strong at the timing 3, the small button (white) D1 is changed to the stick D4 (change in 3 steps) in FIG. 38 (C). Since it is a non-valid period (T4 to T11), the regulation line K is displayed superimposed on the stick D4 in FIG. 38 (C). Further, in FIG. 38 (C), the image KS2 of the lightning bolt and the image KS3 of the impact at the time of hitting are also displayed. According to FIG. 27 (C), the change is always performed in the strong effect effect, but if it does not change in the strong effect effect (that is, in the case of a failure effect), for example, there is no lightning strike or there is a lightning strike. May not hit.

38 (D) to 38 (G) are the same as FIGS. 35 (J) to 35 (M), and thus the description thereof will be omitted.

As the operation during the valid period (T11 to T13), the player may be requested to perform a continuous striking operation (described later) or a long press operation (described later). Further, during the valid period (T11 to T13), the auto button and the automatic continuous striking function described below may be enabled.

(About auto button and auto repeated hits)
Next, the auto button will be described. The effect control CPU 120 sets, for example, whether to enable or disable the function of the auto button (described later) before executing the winning effect determination process (S150) of the effect control process process (S76). You may execute the auto button setting process of. That is, the effect control CPU 120 executes the auto button setting process in the effect control process process (S76), subsequently executes the winning effect determination process (S150), and subsequently executes the effect control flag setting unit 191 and the like. Any of the processes of steps S170 to 177 can be selected and executed according to the value of the effect process flag provided in. The auto button setting process may be executed regardless of the value of the effect process flag. For example, the auto button setting process is performed after the winning effect determination process (S150) is executed in the effect control process process (S76). The process may be executed, or the auto button setting process may be executed before the effect control process process (S76) is executed in the effect control main process (FIG. 20).

In the following description, the button notice effect is executed during the variable display of the decorative pattern, and the notice display is based on the detection of a single operation or a continuous hit operation of a button or the like (push button 31B, stick controller 31A) in the button notice effect. Shall be displayed. The "single-shot operation" means that the button or the like is operated once, and the "continuous hit operation" means that the button or the like is continuously operated a plurality of times.

The button advance notice effect is the above-mentioned button development effect, and displays the result of super reach (win / loss, etc.) based on the detection of a single operation or repeated hit operation of a button or the like during the button development effect (during the valid period). You may.

Further, the "auto button" is a function of executing a process assuming that the button or the like is actually operated, although the button or the like (push button 31B, stick controller 31A) is not actually operated by the player. Is. That is, when the function of the auto button is enabled, even if the button or the like is not operated, the process is executed assuming that the button or the like is operated once or repeatedly, and the notice display is displayed.

Further, "automatic continuous hitting" is actually a continuous operation of a button or the like by a player (for example, long press of push button 31B, long extension of stick controller 31A, etc.) "long press" and long extension are not distinguished. Although it is sometimes called a "push operation"), the button or the like is continuously operated multiple times (for example, the push button 31B is repeatedly hit, the stick controller 31A is continuously pulled, etc.). It is a function to detect as. That is, when the automatic continuous striking function is enabled, even if the buttons or the like are not continuously operated multiple times, the processing is executed assuming that the buttons or the like are repeatedly striking, and the notice display is displayed. do.

Further, the button notice effect may be one type, but may be a plurality of types. Hereinafter, as a plurality of types of button notice effects, button notice effects A, button notice effects B, and button notice effects C) are prepared. For example, when the valid period of the button advance notice effect A and the button advance notice effect B is started, a gauge display according to the number of operations of the push button 31B is displayed, and each time the operation of the push button 31B is detected, the gauge display is displayed. The display is updated so that the scale of the gauge is reduced by one, and when the number of times the operation is detected reaches a predetermined number (that is, when the scale of the gauge display becomes 0), it is determined that the operation condition is satisfied. It is like displaying a notice display (for example, a character string such as "super heat!" Or "chance!"). Further, for example, when the operation of the push button 31B is detected once during the valid period, the button advance notice effect C determines that the operation condition is satisfied and displays a notice display (for example, character A or character B). It's like doing.

In the following description, apart from the button advance notice effect, a back button advance notice effect that causes the light emitting member 9CC or the like to emit light in a predetermined manner based on the detection of the operation of the button or the like during the valid period is provided. do. In the button notice effect, when the valid period is started, a notification is given to indicate that the operation is valid or to prompt the operation, while in the back button notice effect, the valid period (hereinafter, valid in the button notice effect). Even if (sometimes referred to as a special validity period) is started to distinguish it from the period, no notification is given to indicate that the operation is valid or to prompt the operation. Therefore, there is a fun way to find out and execute the special validity period in the back button notice production. Due to the characteristics of the back button notice effect, in the present embodiment, even if the auto button function is enabled, if the operation of the button or the like is not detected during the special valid period, the back button notice is given. It is configured so that the light emitting member 9CC or the like is not controlled to emit light according to a predetermined mode by the effect.

In the present embodiment, the auto button setting process is executed at an arbitrary timing (for example, a period during which the demo screen is displayed, a period during which the decorative symbol is variablely displayed, or a period during which the jackpot game is in progress). It is possible to set whether to enable or disable the auto button function based on the operation of the button or the like. Further, in the present embodiment, in addition to the auto button setting by the auto button setting process, the auto button can be set from the setting menu (menu screen in which the background image, volume, brightness, etc. can be set). And. In this embodiment, it is assumed that the automatic continuous hitting function is always effective, but like the auto button function, it may be possible to set whether to enable or disable it.

FIG. 39 is a flowchart showing an example of the auto button setting process. In FIG. 39 (the same applies to FIGS. 40 and 41), the operation of the push button 31B will be described as the operation of the buttons and the like, but the same applies to the stick controller 31A.

In the auto button setting process, the effect control CPU 120 confirms whether or not the auto button enable flag indicating that the auto button function is valid is set (step S7101).

When it is determined that the auto button valid flag is not set (step S7101; NO), the effect control CPU 120 is set with the operation valid period flag indicating that the operation in the button advance notice effect is in the valid period. It is confirmed whether or not it is (step S7102). If the flag is set during the operation valid period (step S7102; YES), the auto button setting process ends.

When it is determined that the flag is not set during the operation valid period (step S7102; NO), the effect control CPU 120 confirms whether or not the long press operation of the push button 31B is detected (step S7103). .. If the long press operation of the push button 31B is not detected (step S7103; NO), the auto button setting process ends. Regarding whether or not the long press operation of the push button 31B is detected, for example, in the timer interrupt, when the push operation of the push button 31B is detected, the operation detection flag is set, and when the press operation is not detected, the operation is detected. It is determined that the long press operation is detected when the flag is configured to be reset, the operation detection flag is set, and the state in which the push operation of the push button 31B is detected continues for a predetermined period. You may do so.

When the long press operation of the push button is detected (step S7103; YES), the effect control CPU 120 sets the auto button valid flag (step S7104).

Next, the effect control CPU 120 controls to display the auto button valid display indicating that the auto button function is valid on the image display device 5 (step S7105). Further, the effect control CPU 120 controls to output an auto button effective sound effect indicating that the auto button function is effective (step S7106). Further, the effect control CPU 120 has an auto button function effectively set, in which the push button LED (LED provided on the push button 31B) is different from the normal light emitting mode (for example, emitting white light). (For example, it emits light in red) is controlled to emit light (step S7107).

When it is determined that the auto button valid flag is set (step S7101; YES), the effect control CPU 120 has a special operation valid period flag indicating that the operation in the back button advance notice effect is in the valid period. It is confirmed whether or not it is set (step S7108). If the flag is set during the special operation valid period (step S7108; YES), the auto button setting process ends.

If it is determined that the flag is not set during the special operation valid period (step S7108; NO), is the effect control CPU 120 set with the setting menu display flag indicating that the setting menu is being displayed? It is confirmed whether or not (step S7109), and if it is set (step S7109); YSE), the auto button setting process is terminated.

When the setting menu display flag is not set (step S7109; NO), the effect control CPU 120 confirms whether or not the pressing operation (single-shot operation) of the push button 31B is detected (step S7110). If the pressing operation (single-shot operation) of the push button 31B is not detected, the auto button setting process ends.

When the pressing operation (single-shot operation) of the push button 31B is detected (step S7110; YES), the effect control CPU 120 resets the auto button valid flag (step S7111).

Next, the effect control CPU 120 controls to display the auto button invalid display indicating that the auto button function is invalid on the image display device 5 (step S7112). Further, the effect control CPU 120 controls to output an auto button invalid sound effect (a sound effect different from the above auto button effective sound effect) indicating that the function of the auto button is invalid (step S7113). Further, the effect control CPU 120 controls the push button LED to emit light according to the normal light emitting mode (step S7114).

Although the auto button setting process has been described above with reference to FIG. 39, the auto button function can be enabled or disabled at any timing by executing the auto button setting process shown in FIG. 39. Specifically, the player can enable the auto button function by pressing and holding the push button 31B when the auto button function is disabled (see steps S7101, S7103, and S7104). ), When the push button 31B is pressed (single-shot operation) while the auto button function is enabled, the auto button function can be disabled (see steps S7101, S7110, and S7111). With such a configuration, it is possible to easily change the setting of the auto button function not only during the period when the demo screen is displayed, but also during the period when the decorative pattern is variablely displayed or during the big hit game. can. That is, the setting of the auto button function can be easily changed without interrupting the game, and it is possible to prevent the interruption from deteriorating the interest.

However, in the present embodiment, an exceptional period is provided in which the setting change of the auto button function is not accepted. For example, when the auto button function is disabled, a long press operation may be performed to display the notice display during the valid period in the button notice effect, but the auto button function is performed in response to this long press operation. If the setting of is changed, the setting change not intended by the player will be made. Therefore, in the present embodiment, even if the long press operation of the push button 31B is detected during the valid period of the operation in the button notice effect (that is, when the flag during the operation valid period is set), the auto button is displayed. It is configured not to change the function from disabled to enabled (see step S7102). With such a configuration, it is possible to prevent the setting of the auto button function from being unintentionally changed.

It should be noted that, during the valid period of the operation in the back button notice effect, or based on the detection of the push button 31B pressing operation (single-shot operation) during the valid period, the hit / fail display indicating whether or not the hit is a big hit is displayed. Since the predetermined control is performed based on the detection of the pressing operation (single-shot operation) during the valid period in the effect (the effect of displaying), the player does not need to perform the long pressing operation. However, since it is assumed that a single-shot operation is intended to be a long-press operation as a result, it is during the valid period of the operation in the back button notice effect (that is, when the special operation valid period flag is set). Also, while the operation in the decision button effect is valid (when the decision button effect operation valid period flag indicating that the operation in the decision button effect is valid is set), the push button 31B is pressed and held. Even if an operation is detected, the function of the auto button may be configured not to be changed from disabled to enabled. Similarly, a single-shot operation of the push button 31B may be performed to change the background image setting or the auto button setting from the displayed setting menu, but as a result, a long-press operation is performed with the intention of performing the single-shot operation. Therefore, even if the long press operation of the push button 31B is detected even while the setting menu is being displayed (that is, when the setting menu display flag is set), the function of the auto button is displayed. It may be configured not to change from invalid to valid.

Further, in the present embodiment, even when the auto button function is enabled, the push button 31B must be pressed in order to execute the back button advance notice effect. ing. Therefore, an operation for executing the back button notice effect may be performed during the valid period of the operation in the back button notice effect. Therefore, in the present embodiment, even if the pressing operation of the push button 31B is detected during the valid period of the operation in the back button notice effect (that is, when the flag during the special operation valid period is set), the auto button is displayed. It is configured not to change the function of the above from valid to invalid (see step S7108). With such a configuration, it is possible to prevent the setting of the auto button function from being unintentionally changed.

Further, in the present embodiment, the push button 31B may be pressed in order to change the background image setting or the auto button setting from the setting menu. Therefore, in the present embodiment, even if the push operation of the push button 31B is detected while the setting menu is being displayed (that is, when the setting menu display flag is set), the function of the auto button is disabled from valid. It is configured not to change to (see step S7109). With such a configuration, it is possible to prevent the setting of the auto button function from being unintentionally changed.

Further, in the present embodiment, the button advance notice effect is started when the auto button function is enabled, and when the player operates the push button 31B in response to the button advance notice effect, the auto button is activated. The function of is changed from enabled to disabled (for example, realized by the processing of steps S7101, S7108 to S7111), but in addition to the function of the auto button being changed from enabled to disabled, the detection result of the operation is changed. May be reflected in the button notice effect. With such a configuration, even if the auto button function is enabled, if the player wants to perform an operation, the operation can be immediately reflected in the production.

When the player operates the push button 31B in response to the button advance notice effect started when the auto button function is enabled, the auto button function is changed from enabled to disabled. Instead of the configuration, for example, the auto button function setting may not be changed during the execution of the button advance notice effect, and the auto button function may be changed from enabled to disabled after the button advance notice effect is completed. good. A configuration for changing the function of the auto button from valid to invalid after the button advance notice effect is completed can be realized, for example, by executing the following processing. When the effect control CPU 120 detects the operation of the push button 31B in step S7111, the process of steps S7111 to S7114 is executed unless the button advance notice effect is valid, and the auto button function is enabled during the valid period. The process of setting the auto button change hold flag indicating that the change to invalid is suspended is executed, and the auto button setting process is terminated without executing the processes of steps S7111 to S7114. Then, if the auto button change hold flag is set at the end of the button advance notice effect (for example, the timing when the notice display is displayed or the end timing of the valid period), the effect control CPU 120 has the function of the auto button. Change from enabled to disabled (ie, reset the auto button enable flag and reset the auto button change hold flag). For the configuration in which the auto button function is changed from valid to invalid after the button advance notice effect is completed (configuration in which the setting change of the auto button function is temporarily suspended), the push button 31B is repeatedly pressed. Of the button notice effect A and the button notice effect B in which the notice display is displayed based on the detection, and the button notice effect C in which the notice display is displayed based on the detection of the single operation of the push button 31B. It may be applied to only one of the above, or it may be applied to both.

Further, when the player operates the push button 31B in response to the button advance notice effect, the auto button function may be changed from valid to invalid after the button advance notice effect is completed, for example, the auto button. In addition to the fact that the operation of the push button 31B is detected at predetermined intervals by the function, the player may detect that the push button 31B is actually operated and reflect it in the effect. That is, the continuous striking operation by the auto button and the actually performed operation may be reflected in the effect. In such a configuration, for example, when the auto button change hold flag is set, the value of the operation count counter (the effect corresponding to the value is performed) is updated by the function of the auto button at predetermined intervals. In addition, it is realized by updating the value of the operation count counter according to the operation of the push button 31B.

Further, for example, when the push button 31B is configured to be deformable and the push button 31B is deformed into a shape different from the normal state due to a predetermined effect (that is, an effect accompanied by the deformation of the push button 31B is being executed. Even if the pressing operation of the push button 31B is detected, the setting of the auto button may not be changed. For example, when the operation is strongly urged by deforming the push button 31B, it is conceivable that there is no intention of changing the setting even if the operation is performed. When the push button 31B is deformed into a shape different from the normal state, for example, when the button portion is deformed to a state of protruding toward the player side from the normal state, or when the push button 31B is deformed to a shape different from the normal state, it is combined. In addition to the case where the button part is split, the case where multiple button part parts are combined to form one button part, etc., it is rotatable (for example, about the rotation axis in the vertical direction). It also includes the case where the button portion that is rotatable or rotatable about the horizontal rotation axis is rotating.

Next, a display mode when the auto button function is enabled or disabled will be described. FIG. 40 is an explanatory diagram showing a specific example of a display mode when the function of the auto button is set to be enabled or disabled. In FIG. 40, the mode of the display screen changes in the order of (1), (2), and (3). In the case of FIG. 40 (1), it is assumed that the auto button function is disabled.

As shown in FIG. 40 (1), when the player presses and holds the push button 31B while the variable display of the decorative symbol is being executed, the auto button is performed as shown in FIG. 40 (2). Is enabled, and a character string such as "auto button enabled" is displayed on the image display device 5, indicating that the auto button function is enabled. At this time, the push button 31B is controlled to emit light by a special light emitting mode as well as the control to output the auto button effective sound effect from the speaker 8 (see steps S7103 to S7107).

Further, if the push button 31B is pressed (single-shot operation) by the player while the auto button function is enabled, the auto button function is invalid as shown in FIG. 40 (3). At the same time, a character string such as "auto button invalid" is displayed on the image display device 5, and a display indicating that the auto button function is disabled is displayed. At this time, the push button 31B is controlled to emit light according to the normal light emitting mode, as well as the control to output the auto button invalid sound effect from the speaker 8 (see steps S711 to S7114).

In the example of FIG. 40, the setting of the auto button function is changed during the variable display of the decorative symbol, but in the present embodiment, by performing the same operation, the setting is not limited to the variable display of the decorative symbol. The setting of the auto button function can be changed even during the demo screen display period or the jackpot game period.

Next, the difference between the case where the automatic continuous hitting is performed by the long press operation and the case where the automatic continuous hitting is performed by the auto button function will be described. FIG. 41 is an explanatory diagram showing a comparative example of automatic continuous striking by a long press operation and auto continuous striking by an auto button function. In addition, in the automatic continuous hitting by the long press operation during the valid period, the continuous hit determination is turned on after the predetermined start waiting period elapses after the long press operation of the push button 31B is started, but the start waiting period is the button notice effect. It may be different depending on the type. In the description of FIG. 41, it is assumed that the start waiting period of the button notice effect A is 4 seconds and the start waiting period of the button notice effect A is 2 seconds. In the example shown in FIG. 41, it is assumed that the execution of the button notice effect A is determined.

Regarding the button notice effect A, when the automatic continuous striking by the long press operation is performed after the start of the valid period, as shown in FIG. 41 (A), the start standby is performed after the long press operation of the push button 31B is started. After the period (4 seconds) has elapsed, the continuous hitting judgment is turned on (that is, the process is executed assuming that the continuous hitting operation has been performed after 4 seconds of the long press operation, and the scale of the gauge display is reduced. go).

On the other hand, in the case of the button advance notice effect A, when the auto button function is used for automatic continuous striking, as shown in FIG. 41 (B), the continuous striking determination is turned on immediately after the start of the valid period (that is,). Immediately after the start of the valid period, the process is executed assuming that the repeated hitting operation is being performed, and the scale of the gauge display decreases). With such a configuration, when the auto button function is enabled and the long press operation is not performed, and when the auto button function is disabled and the long press operation is performed, the effect (for example, the scale of the gauge display is reduced). ) Can be executed at different timings, and the effect of production can be enhanced.

Further, regarding the button advance notice effect B, when the automatic continuous striking by the long press operation is performed after the start of the valid period, although not shown, the start waiting period (2) after the long press operation of the push button 31B is started. After 2 seconds have passed, the continuous hit judgment is turned on (that is, the process is executed assuming that the continuous hit operation has been performed since 2 seconds after the long press operation, and the scale of the gauge display is reduced), and the button notice is given. When the automatic continuous hitting is performed by the auto button function for the effect B, the continuous hitting determination is turned on immediately after the start of the valid period. That is, in both cases of the button advance notice effect A and B, the effect is produced when the auto button function is valid and the long press operation is not performed, and when the auto button function is invalid and the long press operation is performed. (For example, the reduction of the gauge display scale) is configured to be executed at different timings.

Although the embodiment of the present invention has been described above, the device configuration, the data configuration, the processing shown in the flowchart, the image display operation in the image display device 5, and the like are arbitrarily changed and modified without departing from the spirit of the present invention. Is possible.

For example, in the above embodiment, the display start timing of the image such as a button (“this place” in FIG. 25) is after the development of super reach (see FIG. 29 (A)), but the display start timing of the image such as a button is set. It may be before the development of super reach or at the time of development of super reach. Further, in the above embodiment, the change timing of the image such as a button (“timing 1”, “timing 2”, “timing 3” in FIG. 25) was after the development of super reach (see FIG. 29 (A)). , Buttons, etc. The change timing of the image may be before the development of super reach or at the time of development of super reach.

In addition, the fluctuation pattern of super reach with pseudo-continuous fluctuation ("PA4-2", "PA4-3", "PA5-2", "PA5-3", "PB4-2", "PB4-3", " In all or part of the fluctuation patterns of "PB5-2" and "PB5-3"), the temporary stop display or the revariable display may be performed after the super reach is reached.

Further, the button development effect may be executed (display of an image such as a button) over a plurality of variable displays (or re-variable displays) in the pseudo-continuous fluctuation. As an example, when the fluctuation pattern "PB4-2" progresses in the order of variable display start → reach → first temporary stop display and revariable display → development to super reach β → final stop display, the fluctuation. The display and change timing of images such as buttons in the pattern "PB4-2" ("this place", "timing 1", "timing 2", "timing 3" in FIG. 25) is, for example, "initial" before reach. The period between the reach and the first temporary stop display may be "timing 1", the period between the first temporary stop display and the revariable display may be "timing 2", and the period after the revariable display may be "timing 3". Therefore, when the button development effect pattern "BH3a-1" is determined in the fluctuation pattern "PB4-2", the variable display start → small button (white) is displayed ("initial") → reach → large button (white). ) (Timing 1) → 1st temporary stop display → No change (Timing 2) → Re-variable display → Change to large button (red) (Timing 3) → Final stop display. As another example, the fluctuation pattern "PB5-3" develops into variable display start → reach → first temporary stop display and revariable display → super reach β → second temporary stop display and revariable display → final stop. In the case of progressing such as display, the display and change timing of the image such as a button in the fluctuation pattern "PB5-3" is, for example, "initial" between the reach and the first temporary stop display, and the first time. "Timing 1" is set between the temporary stop display and the revariable display, "Timing 2" is set between the development of Super Reach β and the second temporary stop display, and "Timing" is set after the second revariable display. It may be "3". Therefore, when the button development effect pattern "BH3a-1" is determined in the fluctuation pattern "PB5-3", the variable display start → reach → small button (white) is displayed (“initial”) → the first provisional Stop display → Change to large button (white) (timing 1) → re-variable display → develop into super reach β → no change (timing 2) → second temporary stop display → re-variable display → change to large button (red) (Timing 3) → Proceed in the order of final stop display.

Further, in the above embodiment, when the variable display of a certain variable display is started, whether or not the button development effect is executed is determined based on the variable pattern of the variable display (FIGS. 24, 26, 27 (FIG. 24, 26, 27). A)), you may decide whether or not to execute the button development effect at other timings. For example, when there is a start prize, it may be determined whether or not to execute the button development effect based on the variable category or the like. In addition, at other timings (for example, at the time of winning a start), in addition to whether or not the button development effect is executed, the effect mode of the button development effect (button development effect pattern, etc.) and the effect mode of the button or the like action effect may be determined. good.

When deciding whether or not to execute the button development effect, the effect mode of the button development effect (button development effect pattern, etc.), and the effect effect of the button, etc. when there is a start prize, the button is before the variable display related to the start prize. The button development effect may be started during the variable display related to the start prize without starting the development effect, or the button development effect may be started before the variable display related to the start prize.

If the button development effect is started before the variable display related to the start prize (so-called pre-reading to execute the button development effect), the button development effect is immediately started (displays an image such as a button) at the start prize. Alternatively, the button development effect may be started at the start of the variable display corresponding to the prize before the start prize (when the hold display is shifted), or the variable display corresponding to the prize before the start prize is being displayed (when the hold display is shifted). It may be before the reach or after the reach), and the button development effect may be started. The period from the start of the button development effect during the look-ahead period (when the display of the button or the like display starts) to the predetermined timing of the variable display related to the start winning prize (for example, T13 in FIG. 29) is the button or the like display period. be.

Further, in the above embodiment, the button or the like action effect (weak action effect, medium action effect, strong action effect) is suddenly executed without any warning (for example, as shown in FIG. 33 (H), the image JS1 is used. Suddenly displayed, the image TS1 is suddenly displayed as shown in FIG. 35 (H), the image KS1 is suddenly displayed as shown in FIG. 38 (B), etc.). A notice effect for notifying that the image is controlled to the game state (for example, a character drop effect for dropping the movable accessory 17 to a position in the center of the display area of the image display device 5, a cut-in effect for cutting in the image, etc. A button or the like action effect may be executed by executing a countdown effect (such as a countdown effect for displaying a number). Specifically, at least, there may be a case where the action effect such as a button is executed by executing the advance notice effect and a case where the action effect such as a button is executed without executing the advance notice effect (notice effect). Is executed, but it may or may not be present when the action effect such as a button is not executed). It should be noted that the ratio of whether the image such as a button changes depending on whether the action effect such as a button is executed by executing the advance notice effect or the action effect such as a button is executed without executing the advance notice effect. Or, the ratio of which button or the like changes to the image may be different.

Further, in the above embodiment, the degree of expectation of a big hit differs depending on the type of display such as a button (“small button (white)”, “large button (white)”, “large button (red)”, “stick”). (See FIG. 27 (B)), the degree of expectation of a 16R probability variation jackpot may differ depending on the type of display such as a button. Specifically, for example, the determination ratio of the button development effect category may be different depending on the jackpot type (see FIG. 7). Further, when a normal jackpot is provided in addition to the probability variation jackpot as the jackpot type, the degree of expectation of the probability variation jackpot may differ depending on the type of display such as a button.

(A1) As described above, the pachinko gaming machine 1 according to the embodiment of the present invention is a gaming machine capable of playing a game, and is an motion detecting means (for example, a push button 31B, a stick controller) capable of detecting the motion of a player. 31A, etc.) and a specific display corresponding to the motion detecting means (for example, small button (white) D1, large button (white) D2, large button (red) D3, stick shown in FIGS. 25 and 32 to 38. Specific display execution means for performing D4, small button (white) D1U, large button (white) D2U, large button (red) D3U, stick D4U, etc. S172), etc.), and the specific display executing means has a first specific display (for example, a small button (white) D1 or the like) as the specific display, and is more advantageous to the player than the first specific display. (For example, the expectation of a big hit, the expectation of a 16R probability variation jackpot (see FIG. 7), the expectation of a probability variation jackpot when there is a normal jackpot and a probability variation jackpot), the second specific display (for example, the first specific display). When the small button (white) D1 is used, the second specific display is the large button (white) D2, the large button (red) D3, the stick D4, etc., and when the first specific display is the large button (white) D2. The second specific display can display a large button (red) D3, stick D4, etc., and when the first specific display is a large button (red) D3, the second specific display can display a stick D4, etc.). After displaying the specific display, the second specific display is displayed by executing the action effect (for example, the weak action effect, the medium action effect, and the strong action effect shown in FIG. 27 (C)) acting on the specific display. Displayable (for example, after displaying the small button (white) D1 as shown in FIG. 34 (C), the image acting on the small button (white) D1 as shown in FIGS. 34 (D) and 34 (E). The large button (white) D2 can be displayed as shown in FIG. 34 (E) by executing the weak action effect for displaying JS1 and the image JS2, and the large button (white) can be displayed as shown in FIG. 34 (E). After displaying D2, as shown in FIGS. 35 (H) and 35 (I), the medium action effect of displaying the image TS1, the image TS2, and the image TS3 acting on the large button (white) D2 is executed. As shown in FIG. 35 (I), the stick D4 can be displayed, etc.).

According to the above configuration, the effect of production is improved. For example, by changing the specific display depending on the action effect, the effect is easy to understand and the effect is improved.

(A2) The gaming machine according to (A1) is described after displaying the first specific display during the non-valid period of detection by the motion detecting means (for example, T4 to T11 shown in FIGS. 29 to 38). By executing the action effect, the first specific display is changed to the second specific display (for example, after displaying the large button (white) D2 as shown in FIG. 34 (E), FIG. 35 (H). And the large button (white) as shown in FIG. 35 (I) The large button as shown in FIG. (White) D2 is changed to stick D4), and in the valid period of detection by the motion detecting means (for example, T11 to T13 shown in FIGS. 29 to 38), the second specific display (for example, FIG. 35 (for example) As shown in J) and FIG. 35 (K), an operation effect using stick D4, stick D4U, etc. (for example, as shown in FIG. 35 (K), prompting an operation and as shown in FIG. 35 (L)). The effect of notifying the result, etc.) is executed.

According to the above configuration, it is possible to increase the expectation before the validity period.

(A3) In the game machine of the above (A1) or (A2), there are a plurality of types of the action effects (for example, the weak action effect, the medium action effect, the strong action effect, etc. shown in FIG. 27C). The rate of change to the second specific display differs depending on which of the action effects is executed (for example, as shown in FIG. 27 (C), there is no change and there is a change (weak change, medium). Since the determination ratios of the weak action effect, the medium action effect, and the strong action effect are different depending on the case of (change or strong change), the display changes to the second specific display depending on which button or the like action effect is executed. The proportions are different).

According to the above configuration, it is possible to increase the expectation for the action effect.

(A4) In any of the game machines (A1) to (A3), the action effect is a plurality of types (for example, a weak action effect, a medium action effect, a strong action effect, etc. shown in FIG. 27 (C)). There are a plurality of types of display modes of the specific display after the change (for example, the large button (white) D2, the large button (red) D3, the stick D4, and the large button (white) shown in FIGS. 25 and 32 to 38. ) D2U, large button (red) D3U, stick D4U, etc.), and the ratio of which specific display is changed depends on which of the action effects is executed (for example, FIG. 27 (C). ), Weak effect effect, medium effect effect, strong effect effect in the case of weak change (1 step change), medium change (2 step change), and strong change (3 step change). Since the determination ratio of each is different, the ratio of weak change, medium change, and strong change depends on which button action effect is executed. For example, the small button (white) before the change. In the case of D1, the small button (white) D1 changes to the large button (white) D2 when the weak change is executed, and the small button (white) D1 changes to the large button (red) D3 when the medium change is executed. When it changes and a strong change is executed, the small button (white) D1 changes to the stick D4. Therefore, the ratio of which specific display changes depending on which button or the like action effect is executed. Is different).

According to the above configuration, it is possible to increase the expectation for the action effect.

(A5) In any of the game machines (A1) to (A4), there are a plurality of types (for example, push button 31B, stick controller 31A, etc.) of the motion detecting means, and the specific display after the change is supported. The motion effect detected by the motion detection means is executed (for example, as shown in FIG. 37, the motion effect detected by the push button 31B corresponding to the large button (white) D2 after the change is executed, and FIG. 33 The operation effect detected by the push button 31B corresponding to the large button (red) D3 after the change is executed as shown in FIG. 35, and the stick controller corresponding to the stick D4 after the change is executed as shown in FIGS. 35 and 38. Execute the operation effect detected by 31A).

According to the above configuration, it is possible to pay attention to which operation means corresponds to the specific display.

(A6) In any of the gaming machines (A1) to (A5), the specific display executing means has a non-valid period of detection by the motion detecting means (for example, T4 to T11 shown in FIGS. 29 to 38). Etc.), when the specific display is displayed, the specific display is displayed in an manner indicating that the period is not valid (for example, as shown in FIGS. 29 to 38, a small button on which the regulation line K is superimposed). (White) D1, large button (white) D2 on which the regulation line K is superimposed, large button (red) D3 on which the regulation line K is superimposed, and stick D4 on which the regulation line K is superimposed are displayed).

According to the above configuration, it is easy to understand that the period is non-valid.

(A7) In any of the gaming machines (A1) to (A6), the specific display executing means displays the specific display over a plurality of variable displays (for example, a plurality of (re) variable displays as pseudo-continuous fluctuations). The specific display can be displayed over, and the specific display can be displayed over multiple variable displays by pre-reading).

According to the above configuration, it is possible to increase the sense of expectation over a plurality of variable displays.

(A8) A notice effect (for example, a cut-in effect) for notifying that the gaming machine according to any one of (A1) to (A7) is controlled to an advantageous state (for example, a big hit game state) that is advantageous to the player. , Countdown effect, character drop effect, etc.), and the action effect is executed by executing the advance notice effect.

According to the above configuration, it is possible to increase the expectation for a specific advance notice effect.

(A9) In any of the game machines (A1) to (A8) above, the setting state related to the effect is set to the first state (for example, the state in which the auto button function is disabled) or the second state (for example, the state in which the auto button function is disabled). A setting means that can be set to a state in which the auto button function is enabled (for example, the auto button setting process shown in FIG. 39) and a specific effect (for example, a button notice) when the effect execution condition is satisfied. It is possible to execute a display that reduces the scale of the gauge display, a notice display, a pass / fail display, etc., based on the detection of the operation of the push button 31B in the effects A to C and the decision button effect. The specific effect executing means (for example, the effect processing during variable display shown in FIG. 22) is provided, and the specific effect executing means is the effect in the first state based on the detection result of the operation detecting means. While the specific effect can be executed assuming that the execution condition is satisfied, in the second state, the specific effect can be executed assuming that the effect execution condition is satisfied regardless of the detection result of the operation detecting means (for example, auto). When the button function is enabled, even if the push button 31B is not operated, a notice display, a pass / fail display, a display for reducing the scale of the gauge display, etc. are performed), the setting means. Can change the setting from the first state to the second state based on the detection result of the motion detecting means during execution of the variable display (for example, a portion for executing the process of steps S7103 to S7104 in FIG. 39). Is.

According to the above configuration, it is possible to prevent the hobby from being lowered.

(B1) The pachinko gaming machine 1 according to the embodiment of the present invention is a gaming machine capable of playing a game, and is an motion detecting means (for example, a push button 31B, a stick controller 31A, etc.) capable of detecting a player's motion. ), And a specific display corresponding to the motion detecting means (for example, small button (white) D1, large button (white) D2, large button (red) D3, stick D4 shown in FIGS. 25 and 32 to 38. Specific display execution means (for example, button development effect processing (S529), variable display medium effect process (S172)) for performing a small button (white) D1U, a large button (white) D2U, a large button (red) D3U, a stick D4U, etc.) Etc.), and the specific display executing means has a first specific display (for example, a small button (white) D1 or the like) as the specific display, and is more advantageous to the player than the first specific display (for example). , Expectation of big hit, expectation of 16R probable big hit (see Fig. 7), expectation of normal big hit and probable big hit when there is a normal big hit and probable big hit) 2nd specific display (for example, 1st specific display is a small button When (white) D1, the second specific display is the large button (white) D2, large button (red) D3, stick D4, etc., and when the first specific display is the large button (white) D2, the second The specific display can display a large button (red) D3, stick D4, etc., and when the first specific display is a large button (red) D3, the second specific display can display a stick D4, etc.). During the non-valid period of detection (for example, T4 to T11 shown in FIGS. 29 to 38), after displaying the first specific display, the first specific display is changed to the second specific display (for example, FIG. After displaying the small button (white) D1 as shown in 32 (C), the small button (white) D1 is changed to the large button (white) D2 as shown in FIG. 33 (G), and further, the large button (white) ( White) D2 is changed to a large button (red) D3 as shown in FIG. 33 (I)), and during the valid period of detection by the motion detecting means (for example, T11 to T13 shown in FIGS. 29 to 38). , Operation effect using the second specific display after the change (for example, large button (red) D3, large button (red) D3U, etc. as shown in FIGS. 33 (J) and 33 (K)) (for example, As shown in FIG. 33 (K), an operation is urged and an effect of notifying the result as shown in FIG. 33 (L) is executed.

According to the above configuration, the effect of production is improved. For example, since the specific display is changed during the non-valid period, the change can be shown and the effect of the effect is improved.

(B2) In the gaming machine of the above (B1), the first specific display is an action effect acting on the specific display (for example, a weak action effect, a medium action effect, and a strong action effect shown in FIG. 27 (C)). Is executed to change to the second specific display (for example, the small button (white) D1 shown in FIG. 34 (C) is a small button (for example, as shown in FIGS. 34 (D) and 34 (E)). White) By executing the weak action effect of displaying the image JS1 and the image JS2 acting on D1, the large button (white) changes to D2 as shown in FIG. 34 (E), and the large button (white) is changed to D2 as shown in FIG. 35 (G). As shown in FIGS. 35 (H) and 35 (I), the button (white) D2 is subjected to a medium-action effect of displaying the image TS1, the image TS2, and the image TS3 acting on the large button (white) D2. As shown in FIG. 35 (I), the small button (white) D1 shown in FIG. 38 (A) is changed to the stick D4 as shown in FIG. 38 (I). ) The stick D4 is changed as shown in FIG. 38 (C) by executing the strong action effect of displaying the image TK1, the image TK2, and the image TK3 acting on the D1).

According to the above configuration, the effect is improved by the action effect.

(B3) In the gaming machine of the above (B1) or (B2), there are a plurality of types of action effects acting on the specific display (for example, a weak action effect, a medium action effect, and a strong action shown in FIG. 27 (C) and the like). There is an effect, etc.), and the rate of change to the second specific display differs depending on which of the action effects is executed (for example, as shown in FIG. 27C, there is a change from the case without change). Since the determination ratios of the weak action effect, the medium action effect, and the strong action effect are different in the case of (weak change, medium change, or strong change), the second action effect is performed depending on which button or the like action effect is executed. The rate of change to a specific display is different).

According to the above configuration, it is possible to increase the expectation for the action effect.

(B4) In any of the game machines (B1) to (B3), there are a plurality of types of action effects acting on the specific display (for example, the weak action effect and the medium action effect shown in FIG. 27C). There are multiple types of display modes of the specific display after the change (for example, large button (white) D2, large button (red) D3, stick D4 shown in FIGS. 25 and 32 to 38). , Large button (white) D2U, large button (red) D3U, stick D4U, etc.), and the ratio of which specific display is changed depends on which effect effect is executed (for example). As shown in FIG. 27 (C), the weak action effect and the medium action are obtained in the case of weak change (1 step change), medium change (2 step change), and strong change (3 step change). Since the determination ratios of the effect and the strong effect effect are different, the ratio of weak change, medium change, and strong change is different depending on which button or the like action effect is executed. For example, before the change. When the small button (white) D1 is executed, the small button (white) D1 changes to the large button (white) D2 when the weak change is executed, and the small button (white) D1 becomes the large button when the medium change is executed. It changes to (red) D3, and when a strong change is executed, the small button (white) D1 changes to stick D4. Therefore, which specific display is used depending on which button or other action effect is executed. The rate of change is different).

According to the above configuration, it is possible to increase the expectation for the action effect.

(B5) In any of the gaming machines (B1) to (B4), there are a plurality of types (for example, push button 31B, stick controller 31A, etc.) of the motion detecting means, and the specific display after the change is supported. The motion effect detected by the motion detection means is executed (for example, as shown in FIG. 37, the motion effect detected by the push button 31B corresponding to the large button (white) D2 after the change is executed, and FIG. 33 The operation effect detected by the push button 31B corresponding to the large button (red) D3 after the change is executed as shown in FIG. 35, and the stick controller corresponding to the stick D4 after the change is executed as shown in FIGS. 35 and 38. Execute the operation effect detected by 31A).

According to the above configuration, it is possible to pay attention to which operation means corresponds to the specific display.

(B6) In any of the gaming machines (B1) to (B5), the specific display executing means has a non-valid period of detection by the motion detecting means (for example, T4 to T11 shown in FIGS. 29 to 38). When displaying the specific display in (etc., etc.), the specific display is displayed in an manner indicating that it is in the non-valid period (for example, as shown in FIGS. 29 to 38, a small button on which the regulation line K is superimposed). (White) D1, large button (white) D2 on which the regulation line K is superimposed, large button (red) D3 on which the regulation line K is superimposed, and stick D4 on which the regulation line K is superimposed are displayed).

According to the above configuration, it is easy to understand that the period is non-valid.

(B7) In any of the gaming machines (B1) to (B6), the specific display executing means displays the specific display over a plurality of variable displays (for example, a plurality of (re) variable displays as pseudo-continuous fluctuations). The specific display can be displayed over, and the specific display can be displayed over multiple variable displays by pre-reading).

According to the above configuration, it is possible to increase the expectation over a plurality of variable displays.

(B8) A notice effect (for example, a cut-in effect) for notifying that the gaming machine according to any one of (B1) to (B7) is controlled to an advantageous state (for example, a big hit gaming state) that is advantageous to the player. , Countdown effect, character drop effect, etc.), the action effect that acts on the specific display is executed by executing the advance notice effect, and the second specific effect is executed by executing the action effect. Changes to the display.

According to the above configuration, it is possible to increase the expectation for a specific advance notice effect.

(B9) The gaming machine according to any one of the above (B1) to (B8) sets the setting state related to the effect to the first state (for example, the state in which the auto button function is disabled) or the second state (for example, the state in which the auto button function is disabled). A setting means that can be set to a state in which the auto button function is enabled (for example, the auto button setting process shown in FIG. 39) and a specific effect (for example, a button notice) when the effect execution condition is satisfied. It is possible to execute a display that reduces the scale of the gauge display, a notice display, a pass / fail display, etc., based on the detection of the operation of the push button 31B in the effects A to C and the decision button effect. The specific effect executing means (for example, the effect processing during variable display shown in FIG. 22) is provided, and the specific effect executing means is the effect in the first state based on the detection result of the motion detecting means. While the specific effect can be executed assuming that the execution condition is satisfied, in the second state, the specific effect can be executed assuming that the effect execution condition is satisfied regardless of the detection result of the operation detecting means (for example, auto). When the button function is enabled, even if the push button 31B is not operated, a notice display, a pass / fail display, a display for reducing the scale of the gauge display, etc. are performed), the setting means. Can change the setting from the first state to the second state based on the detection result of the motion detecting means during execution of the variable display (for example, a portion for executing the process of steps S7103 to S7104 in FIG. 39). Is.

According to the above configuration, it is possible to prevent the hobby from being lowered.

In the above (A1) to (A9) and the above (B1) to (B9), the "motion detecting means" is not limited to the push button 31B and the stick controller 31A, but is an object provided on the housing. With a sensor or the like that detects operations using (structures) (for example, operations that push the entire or part of an object inward or downward, operations that pull it toward you or upward, operations that rotate or slide it, etc.) There may be. Further, it may be a sensor or the like that detects the contact of the player's body (hand, etc.) with the glass surface or the like, or a sensor that detects the movement of the player's body (hand, face, etc.) that does not come into contact with the gaming machine. And so on. That is, the "motion detection means" may be a touch sensor, an infrared sensor, a camera, or the like. When the "motion detecting means" is, for example, a touch sensor capable of detecting a touch on the glass surface, the "specific display" is an image reminiscent of the touch on the glass surface (for example, an image imitating a palm). Etc.).

In addition to the above, changes and modifications can be made arbitrarily without departing from the spirit of the invention. For example, in the above description, when it is decided to execute the button development effect, the button development effect category is determined before the button development effect pattern is determined (see FIG. 26), but the button development effect pattern is directly determined. You may decide. That is, it is not necessary to use the concept of the button development effect category.

Further, the button development effect pattern shown in FIG. 25 is a button development effect pattern in which the "initial" is the "first mode (small button (white))", but the "initial" is the "second mode (large button)". (White)) ”,“ Third aspect (large button (red)) ”, and“ Fourth aspect (stick) ”may be provided.

Further, in the above embodiment, the timing of starting the display of the image such as a button is constant (T4), but the timing of starting the display of the image such as a button may have a plurality of timings. There may be a plurality of timings for each type of image such as a button.

Depending on the display start timing, the ratio of whether or not the image such as a button changes (growth) later and the ratio of how much the image changes may be different. For example, when the display start timing is late, the rate at which the image such as a button changes later is higher than when the display start timing is early, and the rate at which the stick changes may be higher. Further, in an embodiment in which there are a plurality of types of timings from the non-valid period to the valid period (described later), the ratio of the timing from the non-valid period to the valid period may be different depending on the display start timing. For example, when the display start timing is late, the rate at which the timing from the non-valid period to the valid period becomes later than the predetermined timing may be higher than the case where the display start timing is early. Further, in the case where the non-valid period does not change to the valid period (described later), the ratio of whether or not the valid period may be reached may be different depending on the display start timing. For example, when the display start timing is late, the effective period may be higher than when the display start timing is early. Further, in the mode of executing the removal success effect (described later), the execution rate of the removal success effect may be different depending on the display start timing. For example, when the display start timing is late, the execution rate of the removal success effect may be higher than when the display start timing is early.

Further, the button development effect pattern shown in FIG. 25 changes the image such as a button at a maximum of two change timings out of the three change timings (timing 1, timing 2, timing 3), but all (three). ) May change the image, such as a button. That is, a button development effect pattern is provided in which a weak change (1st → 2nd) at timing 1, a weak change (2nd → 3rd) at timing 2, and a weak change (3rd → 4th) at timing 3. May be good. Further, the change timing does not have to be three times, and may be one, two, four or more times.

Further, a button development effect pattern for notifying the confirmation of the big hit may be provided. As an example, a large rainbow-colored button image ("large button (rainbow)") imitating the push button 31B and a rainbow-colored stick controller image ("stick (rainbow)") imitating the stick controller 31A are displayed as "sticks (rainbow)". A button development effect pattern (sometimes referred to as a "big hit confirmed button development effect pattern") is provided in which the "final" is the "fifth aspect" as the "fifth mode", and the fluctuation pattern of the super reach (big hit) (the big hit). In "PB4-X" and "PB5-X"), the button development effect pattern for confirming the jackpot may be determined, but in the fluctuation pattern of super reach (loss) ("PA4-X" and "PA5-X"), the jackpot is determined. The confirmed button development effect pattern may not be determined.

Further, the operating means (push button 31B, stick controller 31A, etc.) may be capable of emitting light at least a part (or the periphery), and the operating means may be changed according to an image such as a button. For example, when no image such as a button is displayed, both the light emitting part of the push button 31B and the light emitting part of the stick controller 31A are turned off, and when the small button (white) is displayed, the light emitting part of the push button 31B is white. When the large button (white) is displayed, the light emitting part of the push button 31B blinks in white (or lights in red), and when the large button (red) is displayed, the push button 31B is lit. The light emitting portion of the stick controller 31A may be lit in red (or blinking in red), and when the stick is displayed, the light emitting portion of the stick controller 31A may be lit in white (or blinking in white). When the light emitting portion of the operating means is blinked, the image such as a button may also be blinked.

Further, in FIG. 25 and the like, the image such as a button corresponds to one of the two operating means (one of the operating means is valid). Specifically, the small button (white), the large button (white), and the large button (red) correspond to the push button 31B, and the stick corresponds to the stick controller 31A. Instead of this, an image such as a button corresponding to both of the two operating means may be displayed. As an example, in any case of the small button (white), the large button (white), the large button (red), and the stick, both the push button 31B and the stick controller 31A may be valid. Since the operation means is changed on the way, by enabling both, it is possible to prevent the situation where the result (win / loss, etc.) is not displayed even though the operation is performed. Further, as another example, the logo mark corresponding to both the push button 31B and the stick controller 31A (for example, the logo mark related to the content used for the production of the pachinko gaming machine 1 and the brand name of the pachinko gaming machine 1). The logo mark, etc.) may be displayed. That is, when the logo mark is displayed during the valid period, the result is displayed regardless of whether the push button 31B is operated or the stick controller 31A is operated.

Further, according to FIG. 27 (C), when the "strong action effect" is executed, it is expected to be mainly a "strong change", but a "medium change" or a "weak change" that is less than expected. In some cases. When the execution of the "strong action effect" results in a "medium change" or a "weak change", the expected "strong change" corresponds to a so-called downfall, and the player may be discouraged. Therefore, when it is a "weak change" or a "medium change", the "strong action effect" may not be determined. As a result, when the "strong action effect" is executed, the "strong change" is confirmed, and the player is not discouraged. Further, when the button image or the like changes after the execution of the "medium action effect", it is expected to be mainly a "medium change", but it may be a "weak change" less than expected. Therefore, when it is a "weak change", the "medium action effect" may not be determined. As a result, when the button image or the like changes after the "medium action effect" is executed, the "medium change" or higher is confirmed, and the player is not discouraged. When there is no change, the "strong action effect" is not determined, but when there is no change, the "medium effect effect" may not be determined in addition to the "strong effect effect".

In addition, the change in the image such as buttons is divided into the degree of change (number of steps) (“weak action effect” that changes one step, “medium action effect” that changes two steps, and “strong action effect” that changes three steps. Etc.) and controlled (managed), but it is classified according to what changes the change of the image such as a button (for example, the second action effect that changes from the first aspect to the second aspect, the first aspect and the second aspect). It may be controlled by a third action effect that changes from the aspect to the third aspect, a fourth action effect that changes from the first aspect, the second aspect, or the third aspect to the fourth aspect, and the like.

Further, in the above embodiment, the super reach is a so-called battle effect in which a ally character and an enemy character confront each other, but the super reach is not limited to the battle effect. For example, in the case of a big hit, the story may be completed successfully (in the case of a loss, the story may not be completed successfully). When the button development effect is executed in the story-based super reach, for example, the result of the story is replaced with the result of the battle effect (win or lose, etc.) according to the operation during the valid period (as an action effect). (Whether or not the story is completed successfully) should be notified.

When the non-valid period changes to the valid period, the effect of removing the image (for example, the regulation line K shown in FIGS. 32 to 38) for notifying that the non-valid period is in effect (hereinafter, "removal effect"). In addition, it may be referred to as a “removal success effect” to distinguish it from the “removal failure effect” described later). For example, between FIGS. 37 (C) and 37 (D), the effect of removing the regulation line K superimposed on the large button (white) D2 (for example, a character (such as a police officer) collects the regulation line K). The effect of sucking the regulation line K to the vacuum cleaner, the effect of burning off the regulation line K with a flame, the effect of the large button (white) D2 itself shaking, etc., and the effect of removing the regulation line K) may be performed. ..

Further, a removal failure effect (an effect in which the removal success effect and at least a part of the effect are common to each other and the image for notifying that the non-valid period is in effect is not removed) may be executed. If the removal failure effect is executed, the super reach may be terminated without the valid period. That is, for example, when the removal success effect is executed in FIG. 37, FIG. 37 (C) → removal success effect → FIG. 37 (D) → FIG. 37 (E) → FIG. 37 (F) → FIG. 37 (G). ), On the other hand, when the removal failure effect is executed in FIG. 37, the transition may be made in the order of FIG. 37 (C) → removal failure effect → FIG. 37 (F) → FIG. 37 (G). ..

In addition, there are multiple types of timing from the non-valid period to the valid period, and when the non-valid period changes to the valid period late, the non-valid period is longer than when it is early, so images such as buttons are sufficient. It may be changed (grown) to. Further, in addition to the case where the removal success effect is executed without executing the removal failure effect even once, the case where the removal success effect is executed after the removal failure effect is executed once or more, or the case where the removal failure effect is executed. The removal success effect may not be executed after being executed once or more. As a result, when the image such as a button is not sufficiently grown, the player considers that it is too early to reach the valid period and the removal success effect is not executed (for example, the effect of trying to remove the regulation line K starts. If it is done, it is hoped that the regulation line K will not be removed in the end, that is, the removal failure effect is executed instead of the removal success effect), but the validity period is when the image such as a button is sufficiently grown. The removal success effect is executed (for example, when the effect of removing the regulation line K is started, the regulation line K is finally removed, that is, the removal failure effect is not performed. The removal success effect is being executed). In other words, it is possible to pay attention to whether or not the production according to the situation is executed.

The image for notifying that the non-valid period is in effect may be another image instead of the image of the regulation line. For example, it may be an image of a chain and a key hung on an image such as a button, an image of a translucent case for storing an image such as a button, or ice to be shown in an image such as a frozen button. May be.

Depending on the type of the image for notifying that the non-valid period is in effect, the ratio of whether or not the image such as a button changes (growth) later and the ratio of how much the image changes may be different. For example, in the case of "chain and key", the rate of change of the image such as a button later may be higher than that of the case of "regulation line", and the rate of change of the stick may be higher. In addition, in a mode in which there are multiple types of timings from the non-valid period to the valid period, the ratio of the timings from the non-valid period to the valid period differs depending on the type of the image for notifying that the non-valid period is in progress. You may let me. For example, in the case of "chain and key", the rate at which the timing from the non-valid period to the valid period becomes later than the predetermined timing may be higher than in the case of the "regulation line". Further, in the case where the non-valid period does not change to the valid period, the ratio of whether or not the valid period may be changed may be different depending on the image for notifying that the non-valid period is in effect. For example, in the case of "chain and key", the percentage of valid period may be higher than in the case of "regulation line". Further, in the mode of executing the removal success effect, the execution rate of the removal success effect may be different depending on the image for notifying that the non-valid period is in effect. For example, in the case of "chain and key", the execution rate of the removal success effect may be higher than in the case of "regulation line".

Further, the image for notifying that the non-valid period is in progress may be changed (grown). For example, when the small button (white) is used, the "regulation line" is set, when the large button (white) is used, the button is changed to "chain and key", and when the large button (red) is used, the "semi-transparent case" is used. You may change the image to notify that the non-valid period is in effect at the same timing as the change timing of the image such as a button, such as changing to "ice" when it becomes a stick. .. Also, for example, when it is a large button (white), it changes from "regulation line" to "chain and key", and when it is a stick, it changes from "chain and key" to "semi-transparent case" and further "ice". The image for notifying that the non-valid period is in effect may be changed at a timing different from the change timing of the image such as a button.

In the embodiment of changing the image for notifying that it is in the non-valid period, the image for notifying that it is in the non-valid period may be changed by the action effect. The action effect of changing the image for notifying that the non-valid period is in effect may be the same (common) as the action effect of changing the image such as a button. In addition, when a common action effect is executed, when the image for notifying that the image such as a button is also in the non-valid period changes, and the image for notifying that the image such as the button is also in the non-valid period is notified. There may be times when both images do not change, and times when either one changes. Further, the action effect of changing the image for notifying that the non-valid period is in effect and the action effect of changing the image such as a button may be different. That is, apart from the action effect of changing the image such as a button, a dedicated action effect of changing the image for notifying that the non-valid period is in progress may be provided.

In addition, there are cases where the image for notifying that the non-valid period is in effect changes (growth) and cases where the image for notifying that the non-valid period is in effect is removed due to the same type of effect. There may be. That is, by executing the action effect of changing the image for notifying that it is in the non-valid period, the notification that it is in the non-valid period is notified as in the case where the above-mentioned removal effect is executed. The image to be used may be removed. That is, when a certain effect (an effect having the properties of both an action effect and a removal effect) is executed, the image such as a button may or may not change, and it is notified that the image is in an ineffective period. There may be times when the image for the purpose changes, times when it is removed, and times when nothing happens. It may be removed after the change (for example, the changed "ice" is removed after the change from the "semi-transparent case" to the "ice"). Regarding the image for notifying that the image is in the non-valid period, two ways of being removed or not being removed have been described, but there are stages in the removal, and the image may be gradually removed. In other words, when a certain effect (effect that has both the properties of action effect and removal effect) or removal effect is executed, the "ice" breaks a little, and again, a certain effect (effect that has both the properties of action effect and removal effect) or removal. The "ice" may be completely cracked and removed when the effect is performed. If the image for notifying that it is in the non-valid period is in the process of being removed, it may not change, or it may be changeable and return to the original state after the change. It may be variable and the above-mentioned intermediate state may be maintained after the change. For example, if the "semi-transparent case" is slightly cracked, it may not change to "ice", it may change to unbroken "ice", or it may change to "ice" which is slightly broken. It may change.

Further, in the above embodiment, the hold data of the first special figure game (first hold information) and the hold data of the second special figure game (second hold information) are not distinguished and are digested in the order of winning (2nd hold information). (See FIG. 18), the second reserved information may be preferentially digested.

Further, in the above embodiment, the “ratio” is not limited to those having a relationship such as A: B = 70%: 30% or A: B: C = 70%: 20%: 10, and FIG. 27. As shown in (B) and FIG. 28 (A), the relationship is such that A: B = 100%: 0% or A: B: C = 70%: 30%: 0 (that is, 100). It is a concept that also includes (there is an allocation of% or 0%).

Further, in the above embodiment, the number of rounds is two types, 8 rounds and 16 rounds, but the number of rounds may be 3 or more. For example, there may be three types: 4R probability variation jackpot, 8R probability variation jackpot, and 16R probability variation jackpot. Further, in the above embodiment, the gaming machine in which only the probabilistic jackpot is provided as the jackpot type is shown, but as described above, the gaming machine may include the non-probability variable jackpot (normal jackpot) as the jackpot type.

Further, in the above embodiment, a mode is shown in which a plurality of types of special symbols such as numbers indicating "0" to "8" and symbols indicating "-" are variably displayed and the display result is derived and displayed. Is not limited to such an embodiment. For example, the special symbol to be variably displayed and the special symbol derived and displayed as a variable display result may be different. In other words, special symbols that are not included in the variable multiple types of special symbols may be derived and displayed as variable display results, and some of the variable multiple types of special symbols are not specially derived and displayed as variable display results. May be included. Further, it is not always necessary to variably display a plurality of types of special symbols, and the variable display may be performed using only one type of special symbol. As a variable display using one type of special symbol, for example, the one type of special symbol may be blinked (the lighting / extinguishing may be repeated alternately). That is, the repetition of turning on and off may be a variable display. Even in this case, the special symbol of the one type may be derived and displayed (lit) at the end, or a symbol different from the symbol of the one type may be derived and displayed at the end. It may be. The same applies to the variable display of other symbols (for example, ordinary symbols, decorative symbols, etc.).

Further, in the above embodiment, the jackpot gaming state is controlled based on the fact that the jackpot symbol is displayed on the first special symbol display device 4A and the second special symbol display device 4B, but the control is performed on the jackpot gaming state. The mode to be used is not limited to this. For example, a specific area is provided in the vicinity of the second start winning opening or inside the second starting winning opening, and the jackpot gaming state is controlled based on the entry (passage) of the game ball into the specific area. You may stay in.

Further, in the above embodiment, in order to notify the effect control board 12 of the variation pattern indicating the variation mode such as the variation time, the type of reach effect, and the presence / absence of the pseudo-ream, one variation pattern designation command is used when the variation is started. Although an example of transmitting is shown, the fluctuation pattern may be notified to the effect control board 12 by two or more commands. Specifically, when notifying by two commands, the game control microcomputer 560 uses the first command to indicate whether or not there is a pseudo-ream, whether or not there is a slip effect, etc. A command indicating the fluctuation time and fluctuation mode before the second stop is sent, and the second command indicates the type of reach and the presence or absence of a re-lottery effect, etc. (2) A command indicating the fluctuation time and the fluctuation mode (after the stop) may be transmitted. In this case, on the effect control board 12, the effect control in the variable display may be performed based on the fluctuation time derived from the combination of the two commands. The game control microcomputer 560 notifies the fluctuation time by each of the two commands, and the effect control board 12 selects the specific fluctuation mode to be executed at each timing. May be good. When sending two commands, the two commands may be sent within the same timer interrupt, and after a predetermined period has elapsed after the first command is sent (for example, the next timer interrupt). In), the second command may be sent. The variation mode shown by each command is not limited to this example, and the order of transmission can be changed as appropriate. By notifying the fluctuation pattern by two or more commands in this way, it is possible to reduce the amount of data that must be stored as the fluctuation pattern specification command.

Further, in the above embodiment, a random number value determination table (display result determination table, jackpot type determination table, and variable category determination table) is stored in the main board 11 and extracted from the main board 11 at the time of starting winning. Based on the random number values (MR1 to MR3), the main board 11 refers to the random number value determination table, and the random number value determination process (determination of whether or not it is a big hit, determination of the fluctuation category, and the case of a big hit). Is the determination of the type of jackpot), and the effect control board 12 receives the determination result determined by the main board 11 and executes the pre-reading advance notice effect based on the received determination result. The execution mode of the pre-reading notice effect is not limited to this. For example, the effect control board 12 stores the random value determination table, and the main board 11 transmits the random number value itself to the effect control board 12 (for example, an effect control command capable of specifying the random number value from the main board 11). Is transmitted to the effect control board 12), the effect control board 12 receives the random number value itself extracted from the main board 11, and refers to the random number value determination table based on the received random number value. The determination process may be executed, and the pre-reading notice effect may be executed based on the determination result of the determination process. That is, the random value determination process may be performed on the effect control board 12. Further, the random value determination process may be performed on both the main board 11 and the effect control board 12. For example, the effect control board 12 may receive a part of the random numbers and execute the random value determination process, and may also receive the determination result determined by the main board 11. Specifically, for example, the effect control board 12 receives random values (MR1 and MR2), determines whether or not a big hit occurs, and if it is a big hit, determines the type of the big hit, and also executes the random value. The determination result of the variation category determined by the main board 11 based on (MR3) may be received. That is, the effect control board 12 can execute the pre-reading advance notice effect based on the determination result determined by itself and the determination result determined by the main board 11.

Further, the update timing of each random number may be different, or the update range of each random number may be different so that the random numbers are not synchronized.

Further, for example, a gaming machine that gives a gaming score for use in a game by using a frequency that is a gaming value of a size specified from the recording information of a gaming recording medium such as a prepaid card or a membership card. The present invention can be applied. Further, the present invention can also be applied to a gaming machine in which a gaming machine in which a gaming ball enclosed in the gaming machine is driven into a gaming area and a player plays a game.

Further, in the above description, it has been explained that the ROM 101 stores data constituting a plurality of determination tables prepared for the CPU 103 to perform various determinations, determinations, and settings. It does not necessarily have to be stored in a table format (including, for example, structures, arrays, etc.). That is, the determination values (determined values) to be compared with the extracted random number values may be collectively stored in the ROM 101, or may be distributed (spotted) in a plurality of locations of the ROM 101 and stored. Alternatively, a mathematical formula or program that outputs a result (for example, a big hit or a loss in the example of FIG. 6) when the extracted random value is input may be stored in the ROM 101. The same applies to the determination table and the like stored in the ROM 121.

Further, in the above embodiment, the pachinko machine is shown as a game machine, but a medal is inserted and a predetermined number of bets is set, and a plurality of types of symbols are rotated according to the operation of the operation lever by the player, and the player If the combination of stop symbols becomes a specific combination of symbols when the symbols are stopped in response to the operation of the stop button by, a slot machine capable of executing a game in which a predetermined number of medals are paid out to the player (for example, a big bonus) The present invention can also be applied to a slot machine equipped with one or more of regular bonus, RT, AT, ART, and CZ (hereinafter, bonus, etc.). For example, in the slot machine to which the present invention is applied, a motion detecting means (effect button) capable of detecting the player's motion and a specific display corresponding to the motion detecting means (effect button image imitating the effect button). The specific display executing means is provided with a specific display executing means for performing the above, and the specific display executing means is more advantageous to the player than the first specific display (effect button image (white)) and the first specific display as the specific display. It is possible to display the second specific display (effect button image (red)) with a high value (for example, high expectation that it will be a bonus, etc.), and after displaying the first specific display, it acts on the specific display. It may be a slot machine capable of displaying the second specific display by executing the action effect.

The program and data for realizing the present invention are not limited to the form of being distributed and provided by a detachable recording medium to the computer device included in the pachinko gaming machine 1, and the computer device and the like in advance. It may be distributed by pre-installing it in the storage device of the machine. Further, the program and data for realizing the present invention are distributed by downloading from other devices on the network connected via a communication line or the like by providing a communication processing unit. It doesn't matter.

The execution mode of the game is not limited to the one executed by attaching a detachable recording medium, but can be executed by temporarily storing the program and data downloaded via the communication line or the like in the internal memory or the like. It may be executed directly by using the hardware resources of other devices on the network connected via a communication line or the like. Furthermore, it is also possible to execute a game by exchanging data with another computer device or the like via a network.

The present invention is not limited to those described above. Further, the specific configuration is included in the present invention even if there are changes or additions within a range that does not deviate from the gist of the present invention, in addition to the above-described embodiment and other embodiments described later.

Further, all or a part of the configurations shown in the above-described embodiment and each modification, and the configurations shown in the following embodiment and modification may be arbitrarily combined.

It should be considered that the above-described embodiment and the following-described embodiment disclosed this time are exemplary in all respects and are not restrictive. The scope of the present invention is shown by the scope of claims rather than the above description and the description below, and is intended to include all modifications within the meaning and scope equivalent to the scope of claims.

The gaming machine of the present invention is also a gaming machine (for example, a pachinko machine) capable of executing a game and being controllable to an advantageous state (for example, a big hit game state, a probabilistic change state, a time saving state, etc.) that is advantageous to the player. Corresponds to motion detecting means (for example, push button 31B, stick controller 31A, touch sensor, infrared sensor, camera, etc.) capable of detecting the motion of a player, and the motion detecting means. Specific display (for example, small button (white) D1, large button (white) D2, large button (red) D3, stick D4, small button (white) D1U, large button shown in FIGS. 25 and 32 to 38. Specific display execution means for performing (white) D2U, large button (red) D3U, stick D4U, etc. (for example, button development effect processing (S529), variable display effect process (S172), etc.), and the game used for the game. A detection means capable of detecting a medium (for example, a gaming area 9010, etc.) (for example, an out-ball detector 90710 shown in FIGS. 144, 148, etc.) and a signal line (for example, a signal line to which a detection signal from the detection means is transmitted). For example, the signal line 90734 shown in FIG. 144), the receiving means for receiving the detection signal (for example, the main board 9011, the predetermined connection portion provided on the main board 9011 side, etc.), and the reception of the detection signal. An abnormality detecting means capable of detecting an abnormality in the state (for example, a CPU 90103 that executes the error notification process of FIG. 145) and a predetermined condition are satisfied (for example, a normal winning ball device 906A serving as a first starting winning opening, a second starting). Payout of game media based on the normal variable winning ball device 906B, which is the winning slot, the general winning slots 9050A to 9050D, which is the general winning area, and the special variable winning ball device 907, which is the large winning slot. The means (for example, a ball payout device, a payout mechanism, etc.) and a predetermined state (for example, a normal state, etc.) different from the advantageous state. Specifically, a probabilistic change flag, a time saving flag, and a round gaming flag are all off. Etc.) and the number of gaming media detected by the detection means (for example, the number of hit balls, etc.) and the number of gaming media paid out by the payout means in the predetermined state (for example, a prize for winning each winning opening). Information display means (for example, display monitor 901130 in FIG. 148) capable of displaying predetermined information (for example, performance information in FIG. 124) calculated based on (for example, the number of balls). When an abnormality in the reception state is detected by the abnormality detecting means, a table by the information displaying means is provided. The display is limited (for example, an error is notified and the performance display is limited as shown in FIGS. 146 and 147), and the specific display executing means has the first specific display (for example, a small button) as the specific display. (White) D1 etc.) and the degree of advantage for the player over the first specific display (for example, jackpot expectation, 16R probability variation jackpot (see FIG. 7)), normal jackpot and probability variation when there is a probability variation jackpot. The second specific display with a high expectation of a big hit (for example, when the first specific display is the small button (white) D1, the second specific display is the large button (white) D2, the large button (red) D3, When the first specific display is the large button (white) D2 such as stick D4, the second specific display is the large button (red) D3, and the first specific display is the large button (red) D3. The second specific display can display the stick D4 or the like), and the first specific display can be displayed during the non-valid period of detection by the motion detecting means (for example, T4 to T11 shown in FIGS. 29 to 38). Is displayed, the first specific display is changed to the second specific display (for example, the small button (white) D1 is displayed after the small button (white) D1 is displayed as shown in FIG. 32 (C), and then the small button (white) D1 is displayed in FIG. 33. The large button (white) D2 is changed as shown in (G), and the large button (white) D2 is changed to the large button (red) D3 as shown in FIG. 33 (I)). In the valid period of detection by (for example, T11 to T13 shown in FIGS. 29 to 38), the second specific display after the change (for example, as shown in FIGS. 33 (J) and 33 (K)) is large. An operation effect using a button (red) D3, a large button (red) D3U, etc. (for example, an effect of prompting an operation as shown in FIG. 33 (K) and notifying the result as shown in FIG. 33 (L). Etc.) is executed, and examples thereof include a game machine.

According to the above-mentioned gaming machine, the effect of production is improved. In addition, it is possible to prevent the information display means from performing an inaccurate display.

In the above-mentioned gaming machine, when an abnormality in the reception state is detected by the abnormality detecting means, the execution of the specific display may be restricted. According to such a configuration, it is possible to prevent the player from giving inaccurate information by performing the effect in an abnormal state. The limitation is not limited to not executing the effect, but may be such as lowering the execution rate of the effect or executing the effect in a manner capable of identifying that an abnormality has been detected. Further, although the first specific display can be displayed, the execution of the second specific display may be restricted.

Further, in the above-mentioned gaming machine, the mode of the specific display may be changed according to the calculated predetermined information. With such a configuration, it is possible to pay attention to the calculated predetermined information and improve the interest.

Further, as an example of a form of a gaming machine capable of preventing display of inaccurate information, a game can be executed and an advantageous state advantageous for the player (for example, a jackpot gaming state, a probability change state, a time saving state, etc.). ) Is a game machine that can be controlled (for example, a pachinko game machine, a slot machine, etc.) and can detect a game medium (for example, a game area 9010, etc.) used for the game (for example, FIGS. 144, 148). The out-ball detector 90710 or the like shown in the above, the signal line to which the detection signal from the detection means is transmitted (for example, the signal line 90734 or the like shown in FIG. 144), and the receiving means for receiving the detection signal (for example, the signal line 90734 or the like shown in FIG. 144). For example, the main board 9011, a predetermined connection portion provided on the main board 9011 side, etc.) and an abnormality detecting means capable of detecting an abnormality in the reception state of the detection signal (for example, the CPU 90103 that executes the error notification process of FIG. 145). Etc.), and the predetermined conditions are satisfied (for example, the normal winning ball device 906A which is the first starting winning slot, the ordinary variable winning ball device 906B which is the second starting winning slot, the general winning slot 9050A to 9050D which is the general winning area, etc. A payout means (for example, a ball payout device, a payout mechanism, etc.) for paying out a game medium based on a special variable winning ball device 907, which is a large winning opening, and a predetermined state different from the above-mentioned advantageous state (for example, a predetermined state (for example, a ball payout device, a payout mechanism, etc.)). For example, the number of gaming media (for example, the number of balls driven) detected by the detection means in a normal state or the like, specifically, a state in which all of the probability variation flag, the time saving flag, and the round gaming flag are off, etc. , Predetermined information calculated based on the number of gaming media paid out by the payout means in the predetermined state (for example, the number of winning balls by winning each winning opening) (for example, performance information in FIG. 124). Is provided with information display means (for example, display monitor 901130 in FIG. 148) capable of displaying (for example, performance display is possible), and when an abnormality in the reception state is detected by the abnormality detection means, the information display is performed. Examples include gaming machines that limit the display by means (for example, notify an error and limit the performance display as shown in FIGS. 146 and 147). Hereinafter, an example of the form example of this gaming machine will be described as another form example.

(Example of other forms)
As described above, the entry of the game medium into the general winning area has an effect on the game as compared with the entry of the game medium into the starting winning area where the variable display of the special symbol is executed by the entry of the game medium. Is low. Further, when the display result of the variable display of the special symbol becomes a specific display result, it is controlled to an advantageous state that is advantageous to the player, but in this advantageous state, the game medium enters the specific winning area where the game medium can enter. Compared to the approach, the interest of the player is low, and it is difficult to enhance the interest. Due to such circumstances, the game nails may be maintained on the game hall side so that it is substantially difficult for the game medium to enter the general winning area.

However, on the gaming machine maker side, it is usual to design the gaming board surface so that the gaming medium enters the general winning area (passes the test) at a predetermined frequency. Therefore, it is desirable that the game field should be in a maintenance state of the game nails so that the game medium enters the general winning area (passes the test) at a predetermined frequency. It is necessary to raise the player's interest in the entry of the game medium into the general prize area and to make the player aware of the frequency of entry of the game medium into the general prize area.

Therefore, in a gaming machine having such a general winning area, there is room to further enhance the interest when the gaming medium enters the general winning area. In the gaming machine according to the embodiment described later, it is possible to enhance the interest of the game in the gaming machine having a general winning area.

Hereinafter, other form examples will be described in detail with reference to the drawings. FIG. 42 is a front view of the pachinko gaming machine according to this embodiment, and shows an arrangement layout of main members. The pachinko gaming machine (gaming machine) 901 is roughly classified into a gaming board (gauge board) 902 constituting the game board surface and a game machine frame (underframe) 903 that supports and fixes the game board 902. Further, the pachinko gaming machine 901 has a glass door frame 903a formed in a frame shape that is openably and closably provided on the gaming machine frame 903. The gaming machine frame 903 is attached to the outer frame so as to be openable and closable by a hinge mechanism. This outer frame is fixed to a so-called gaming island where a plurality of pachinko gaming machines are arranged side by side. By opening the gaming machine frame 903 with respect to the outer frame, a clerk or the like can visually recognize the back side of the gaming machine frame 903 and the inside of the gaming island.

The game board 902 is formed with a substantially circular game area 9010 surrounded by guide rails. A game ball as a game medium is launched and hit into the game area 9010 from a predetermined hitting ball launching device. Further, the game area 9010 includes a left game area 9010A and a right game area 9010B. The game area 9010 is an area through which a game ball can pass in the game board 902, and the left side is the left game area 9010A and the right side is the right game area 9010B with reference to the center of the game area 9010.

A first special symbol display device 904A and a second special symbol display device 904B are provided at a predetermined position of the game board 902 (in the example shown in FIG. 42, on the right side of the game area 9010). The first special symbol display device 904A and the second special symbol display device 904B are each composed of, for example, a 7-segment or dot matrix LED (light emitting diode), and are identified in a special symbol game as an example of a variable display game. A special symbol (also referred to as a "special figure"), which is a plurality of types of possible identification information (special identification information), is variably displayed (variable display). For example, the first special symbol display device 904A and the second special symbol display device 904B can variably display a plurality of types of special symbols composed of numbers indicating "0" to "9" and symbols indicating "-", respectively. do. The special symbols displayed on the first special symbol display device 904A and the second special symbol display device 904B are composed of numbers indicating "0" to "9" and symbols indicating "-". Not limited. Hereinafter, the special symbol variably displayed by the first special symbol display device 904A is also referred to as a "first special symbol", and the special symbol variably displayed by the second special symbol display device 904B is also referred to as a "second special symbol". .. The number of special symbol display devices may be one.

An image display device 905 is provided near the center of the game board 902. The image display device 905 is composed of, for example, an LCD (liquid crystal display device) or the like, and forms a display area for displaying various effect images. In the display area of the image display device 905, the variable display of the first special symbol by the first special symbol display device 904A and the variable display of the second special symbol by the second special symbol display device 904B in the special symbol game are supported. In the decorative symbol display area, which is a variable display unit divided into a plurality of, for example, three, the decorative symbol, which is a plurality of types of identification information (decorative identification information) that can be identified by each, is variably displayed. The variable display of this decorative pattern is also included in the variable display game.

As an example, in the display area of the image display device 905, "left", "middle", and "right" decorative pattern display areas 905L, 905C, and 905R are arranged. Then, in the special symbol game, "left" corresponds to the start of either the variation of the first special symbol by the first special symbol display device 904A or the variation of the second special symbol by the second special symbol display device 904B. , "Middle", and "Right", the decorative symbol display areas 905L, 905C, and 905R start to change the decorative symbol (for example, scroll display in the vertical direction). After that, when the confirmed special symbol is stopped and displayed as a variable display result in the special symbol game, the decorative symbol display areas 905L, 905C, and 905R of the "left", "middle", and "right" on the image display device 905 are displayed. , The fixed decorative symbol (final stop symbol), which is the variable display result of the decorative symbol, is stopped and displayed. As described above, in the display area of the image display device 905, the special figure game using the first special figure by the first special symbol display device 904A or the special figure using the second special figure by the second special symbol display device 904B is used. In synchronization with the figure game, a plurality of types of decorative symbols that can be identified by each are variably displayed, and a definite decorative symbol that is a variable display result is derived and displayed. The derivation display of the display result means that the identification information such as the decorative pattern is stopped and displayed (also referred to as a complete stop display or a final stop display) to end the variable display.

In the image display device 905, as display areas to be the decorative pattern display areas 905L, 905C, and 905R, three areas may be provided so as to be bonded or separated, or to be bonded and separated. .. The display operation in the image display device 905 is controlled by the effect control CPU 90120 mounted on the effect control board 9012 shown in FIG. 43. When the first special symbol display device 904A is executing the variable display of the first special symbol, the effect control CPU 90120 causes the image display device 905 to execute the effect display in accordance with the variable display, and the second special symbol is executed. When the variable display of the second special figure is executed on the display device 904B, the image display device 905 executes the effect display along with the variable display, so that it is possible to easily grasp the progress of the game.

The decorative symbols that are variably displayed in the "left", "middle", and "right" decorative symbol display areas 905L, 905C, and 905R include, for example, eight types of symbols (alphanumerical characters "1" to "8" or Chinese characters. There are numbers "1" to "eight", English letters "A" to "H", eight character images related to a predetermined motif, a combination of numbers, letters or symbols and a character image, and the like. Is composed of, for example, a person or an animal, an object other than these, a symbol such as a character, or a decorative image showing any other figure.). In addition to these eight types of decorative symbols, decorative symbols (designs composed of the characters "abrupt") and blank symbols (also referred to as "2R probable big hits") that correspond to "probable big hits" and blank symbols (also called "2R probable big hits") A symbol that does not constitute a jackpot combination) may be included. Each of the decorative symbols has a corresponding symbol number. The number of decorative patterns is not limited to eight, and may be any number (for example, seven or nine) as long as an appropriate number of combinations such as a jackpot combination and a losing combination can be configured.

During the fluctuation of the decorative symbol, in each of the decorative symbol display areas 905L, 905C, and 905R of "left", "middle", and "right", for example, from the one with the smallest symbol number to the one with the largest symbol number, from the top to the bottom. A flowing scroll display is performed, and when the decorative symbol having the maximum symbol number (for example, "8") is displayed, the decorative symbol having the minimum symbol number (for example, "1") is subsequently displayed. Alternatively, in at least one of the decorative symbol display areas 905L, 905C, and 905R (for example, the decorative symbol display area 905L on the "left"), scroll display is performed from the one with the larger symbol number to the one with the smaller symbol number, and the symbol is displayed. When the decorative symbol having the smallest number is displayed, the decorative symbol having the largest number may be displayed subsequently.

At the lower right of the display screen of the image display device 905, fourth symbol display areas 905A and 905B for displaying the fourth symbol following the decorative symbol, the special symbol, and the ordinary symbol described later are provided. In this embodiment, the variable display of the fourth symbol for the first special figure is performed in synchronization with the variable display of the first special figure, and the display result of the variable display is derived and displayed. The 4th symbol display area 905A for the 2nd special symbol and the 4th symbol for the 2nd special symbol are variably displayed in synchronization with the variable display of the 2nd special symbol, and the display result of the variable display is derived and displayed. A fourth symbol display area 905B for the second special figure is provided.

In this embodiment, the variable display of the decorative symbol is executed in synchronization with the variable display of the special symbol (however, to be exact, the variable display of the decorative symbol is specified as a variable pattern on the effect control CPU 90120 side. It is performed by measuring the fluctuation time recognized based on the command.) When performing the effect using the image display device 905, for example, the effect content including the variable display of the decorative pattern disappears from the screen for a moment. The mode of production is diversifying, such as the production of a moving object that shields all or part of the screen. Therefore, even when looking at the display screen on the image display device 905, it may be difficult to recognize whether or not the variable display is currently being performed. Therefore, in this embodiment, is the state of the fourth symbol currently being variablely displayed by confirming the state of the fourth symbol by further performing the variable display of the fourth symbol on a part of the display screen of the image display device 905? It is possible to reliably recognize whether or not it is. It should be noted that the fourth symbol is always variably displayed by a constant operation and is not erased from the screen or shielded by a shield, so that it can always be visually recognized.

The 4th symbol for the 1st special symbol and the 4th symbol for the 2nd special symbol may be collectively referred to as the 4th symbol, and the 4th symbol display area 905A and the 2nd special for the 1st special symbol. The fourth symbol display area 905B for a figure may be collectively referred to as a fourth symbol display area.

In the variable display (variable display) of the fourth symbol, the fourth symbol display areas 905A and 905B have a predetermined display color (for example, the fourth symbol display area 905A for the first special symbol is white, and the second special symbol is the second. 4 The symbol display area 905B is black), and is realized by continuing a blinking state in which lighting (display) and extinguishing (non-display) are repeated at predetermined time intervals. The variable display of the first special symbol in the first special symbol display device 904A and the variable display of the fourth symbol for the first special symbol in the fourth symbol display area 905A for the first special symbol are synchronized with each other. The variable display of the second special symbol in the second special symbol display device 904B is synchronized with the variable display of the fourth symbol for the second special symbol in the fourth symbol display area 905B for the second special symbol. Synchronization means that the start time and end time of the variable display are the same, and the period of the variable display is the same.

Further, when the jackpot symbol is stopped and displayed on the first special symbol display device 904A, the fourth symbol display area 905A for the first special symbol is lit (displayed) in a display color (for example, red) reminiscent of the jackpot. Will remain. The display color may be different depending on the jackpot type. Further, when the missing symbol is stopped and displayed on the first special symbol display device 904A, the fourth symbol display area 905A for the first special symbol is lit (displayed) in a display color (for example, blue) reminiscent of the missing symbol. Will remain. In this way, the display result of the variable display of the fourth symbol for the first special symbol is stopped and displayed (deriving display) in the fourth symbol display area 905A.

Further, when the jackpot symbol is stopped and displayed on the second special symbol display device 904B, the fourth symbol display area 905B for the second special symbol is lit (displayed) in a display color (for example, red) reminiscent of the jackpot. Will remain. The display color may be different depending on the jackpot type. Further, when the missed symbol is stopped and displayed on the second special symbol display device 904B, the fourth symbol display area 905B for the second special symbol is lit (displayed) in a display color (for example, blue) reminiscent of the missed symbol. Will remain. In this way, the display result of the variable display of the fourth symbol for the second special symbol is stopped and displayed (deriving display) in the fourth symbol display area 905B.

A start winning memory display area 905H is arranged in the display area of the image display device 905. In the start winning prize storage display area 905H, the hold storage display for identifiablely displaying the hold number (special figure hold storage number) of the variable display is performed. Here, the hold of the variable display occurs when the game ball enters the first starting winning opening formed by the normal winning ball device 906A or the second starting winning opening formed by the ordinary variable winning ball device 906B (starting winning). do. That is, the start condition (also referred to as "execution condition") for executing the variable display game such as the special figure game or the variable display of the decorative symbol is satisfied, but the variable display game based on the previously satisfied start condition is being executed. When the start condition for starting the variable display game is not satisfied due to the fact that the pachinko game machine 901 is controlled to the jackpot game state, the variable display corresponding to the established start condition is suspended. Will be done.

As an example, the start winning memory display area 905H is provided with a plurality of display parts whose display colors are changed from left to right in order from the variable display game in which the start condition is first satisfied based on the occurrence of the start prize. There is. Then, when the start condition (first start condition) of the special figure game using the first special figure in the first special symbol display device 904A is satisfied based on the entry of the game ball into the first start winning opening, the display is hidden. One of the display parts in the mode (transparent color) (for example, the display part at the left end of the display parts in the non-display mode) is changed to blue display. Further, when the start condition (second start condition) of the special figure game using the second special figure in the second special symbol display device 904B is satisfied based on the entry of the game ball into the second start winning opening, it is not displayed. One of the display parts in the embodiment is changed to a red display. After that, when either the start condition of the special figure game using the first special figure (first start condition) or the start condition of the special figure game using the second special figure (second start condition) is satisfied, for example. The display at the leftmost display portion is removed, and the display at each display portion is moved to the left one by one. At this time, one of the display parts that have changed to the blue display or the red display (for example, the display part at the right end of the display parts whose display color has changed) returns to the non-display mode.

That is, when a start winning is generated, the holding information (object shown in a circle in FIGS. 42, 72, etc.) corresponding to the special figure game executed based on the starting winning is stored in the starting winning memory display area 905H. Display control that is newly displayed is performed. For example, the hold information is displayed in order from the left in the order in which the start condition of the special figure game corresponding to the hold information is satisfied (in the above example, it is also the order in which the start condition is satisfied). If a new start prize is generated when n hold information is displayed (when n special figure games are held), the n + 1th hold information from the left corresponds to the new start prize. Will be newly displayed. Then, when the start condition of the reserved special figure game is satisfied, the leftmost reserved information corresponding to the special figure game is deleted, and the nth (n ≧ 2) reserved information from the left is left one by one. It will be shifted to and displayed in the n-1st position.

The order in which the start conditions of the special figure game are satisfied is not limited to the order in which the start conditions occur, and the start condition of the special figure game relating to the second special figure is higher than the start condition of the special figure game relating to the first special figure. It may be established with priority (so-called special figure 2 priority change). On the contrary, the start condition of the special figure game related to the first special figure is satisfied with priority over the start condition of the special figure game related to the second special figure (so-called special figure 1 priority change). You can do it.

In the start winning prize storage display area 905H, the player or the like may be able to recognize the special figure reserved memory number by displaying a number indicating the special figure reserved memory number. A display for displaying the number of reserved special figures may be provided together with the start winning memory display area 905H or in place of the start winning memory display area 905H. In the example shown in FIG. 42, together with the start winning prize storage display area 905H, the first hold for identifiable display of the number of special figure hold storages on the upper part of the first special symbol display device 904A and the second special symbol display device 904B. A display device 9025A and a second hold display device 9025B are provided. The first hold indicator 9025A identifiablely displays the first hold storage number as the number of effective start winning balls that have entered the first start winning opening formed by the normal winning ball device 906A. The second hold indicator 9025B identifiablely displays the second hold storage number as the number of valid start winning balls that have entered the second start winning opening formed by the normally variable winning ball device 906B. The first hold indicator 9025A and the second hold indicator 9025B have, for example, the number (for example, 4) LEDs corresponding to the upper limit values (for example, "4") in each of the first hold storage number and the second hold storage number, respectively. Is configured to include. Further, on the right side of the image display device 905, a movable accessory 901000 is provided.

The movable accessory 901000 has a built-in motor and lamp for operating the star-shaped member. The movable accessory 901000 is adapted to operate (rotate operation and lighting) when an effect of notifying a big hit, for example, a variation result advance notice effect or a look-ahead advance notice effect described later is executed.

Below the image display device 905, a normal winning ball device 906A and a normal variable winning ball device 906B are provided. The ordinary winning ball device 906A forms a first starting winning opening that is always kept in a constant open state by, for example, a predetermined ball receiving member. The ordinary variable winning ball device 906B is an electric motor having a pair of movable wing pieces that are changed into a normally open state in a vertical position and an expanded open state in a tilted position by a solenoid 9027 for an ordinary electric accessory shown in FIG. 43. It is equipped with a tulip-shaped accessory (ordinary electric accessory) and forms a second start winning opening. As an example, in the ordinary variable winning ball device 906B, the game ball does not enter or enters the second starting winning opening because the movable wing piece is in the vertical position when the solenoid 9027 for the ordinary electric accessory is in the off state. It is difficult to open normally. On the other hand, in the ordinary variable winning ball device 906B, the game ball enters the second starting winning opening by the tilt control in which the movable wing piece is in the tilting position when the solenoid 9027 for the ordinary electric accessory is in the ON state. It becomes an easy expansion and opening state.

The game ball that has entered the first starting winning opening formed in the ordinary winning ball device 906A is detected by, for example, the first starting opening switch 9022A shown in FIG. 43. The game ball that has entered the second starting winning opening formed in the normally variable winning ball device 906B is detected by, for example, the second starting opening switch 9022B shown in FIG. 43. Based on the detection of the game balls by the first start port switch 9022A, a predetermined number (for example, 3) of game balls are paid out as prize balls, and the first reserved storage number is a predetermined upper limit value (for example, "4"). ) If the following, the first starting condition is satisfied. Based on the detection of the game balls by the second start port switch 9022B, a predetermined number (for example, 3) of game balls are paid out as prize balls, and the second reserved storage number is a predetermined upper limit value (for example, "4"). ) If the following, the second starting condition is satisfied. The number of prize balls to be paid out based on the detection of the game ball by the first start port switch 9022A and the number of prize balls to be paid out based on the detection of the game ball by the second start port switch 9022B. May be the same number or different numbers from each other.

A special variable winning ball device 907 is provided below the normal winning ball device 906A and the normal variable winning ball device 906B. The special variable winning ball device 907 is provided with a large winning opening door that is opened and closed by a solenoid 9028 for the large winning opening door shown in FIG. 43, and the large winning opening door changes between an open state and a closed state. Form the mouth. As an example, in the special variable winning ball device 907, the large winning opening door closes the large winning opening when the solenoid 9028 for the large winning opening door is in the off state. On the other hand, in the special variable winning ball device 907, when the solenoid 9028 for the big winning door is on, the big winning door opens the big winning door. The game ball that has entered the large winning opening formed in the special variable winning ball device 907 is detected by, for example, the count switch 9023 shown in FIG. 43. Based on the detection of the game balls by the count switch 9023, a predetermined number (for example, 15) of game balls are paid out as prize balls.

In this way, although the first start condition and the second start condition are satisfied, the special figure game started earlier is being executed, and the pachinko gaming machine 901 is controlled to the big hit game state. Figure When the start condition for starting the game is not satisfied, the variable display is held. For example, when the first start condition is satisfied, if the first start condition for starting the special figure game using the first special figure based on the establishment of the first start condition is not satisfied, the first hold storage is stored. The number is incremented by 1, and the execution of the special figure game using the first special figure is suspended. Further, when the second start condition is satisfied, if the second start condition for starting the special figure game using the second special figure based on the establishment of the second start condition is not satisfied, the second hold storage is stored. The number is incremented by 1, and the execution of the special figure game using the second special figure is suspended. On the other hand, when the execution of the special figure game using the first special figure is started, the first reserved memory number is decremented by 1, and the execution of the special figure game using the second special figure is started. When this is done, the second reserved storage number is decremented by 1. The added value of the first reserved storage number and the second reserved storage number may be the total reserved storage number or the special figure reserved storage number.

A normal symbol display 9020 is provided at a predetermined position of the game board 902 (in the example shown in FIG. 42, on the left side of the game area). As an example, the ordinary symbol display device 9020 is composed of 7 segments, dot matrix LEDs, and the like like the first special symbol display device 904A and the second special symbol display device 904B, and has a plurality of types of identification information different from the special symbol. The normal design (also called "normal figure" or "normal figure") is variably displayed (variable display). Such a variable display of a normal pattern is called a normal figure game (also referred to as a "normal figure game"). The ordinary symbol display 9020 variably displays a plurality of types of ordinary symbols composed of numbers indicating "0" to "9", symbols indicating "-", and the like. The ordinary symbol display 9020 is not limited to a variable display of numbers indicating "0" to "9" and symbols indicating "-" as ordinary symbols, for example, "○" and "×". Ordinary symbols are variably displayed by alternately lighting the indicated decorative lamps (or LEDs) or by lighting a plurality of decorative lamps (or LEDs) such as "left", "middle", and "right" in a predetermined order. It may be a thing. Above the normal symbol display 9020, the normal symbol hold display 9025C is provided. The normal figure hold display 9025C is configured to include, for example, four LEDs, and displays the normal figure hold storage number as the number of effective passing balls that have passed through the passing gates 9041A and 9041B.

In addition to the above configuration, the surface of the game board 902 is provided with a windmill that changes the flow direction and speed of the game ball and a large number of obstacle nails. Further, as a winning opening different from the first starting winning opening, the second starting winning opening and the large winning opening, for example, four general winning openings 9050A to 9050D which are always kept in a constant open state by a predetermined ball receiving member. There is a winning area.

The general winning openings 9050A to 9050D are composed of ball receiving members projecting forward (on the player side) from the game board surface. The ball receiving member receives the game ball flowing down from above from the opening, and the horizontal length (width) of the opening of the ball receiving member is larger than the diameter of one game ball, but the game ball 2 It is smaller than the diameter of a piece. Therefore, two or more game balls are not connected in the horizontal direction and pass through the opening of the ball receiving member. Further, the distance between the ball receiving members provided with the general winning openings 9050A to 9050D is such that at least one game ball can pass through. Further, a winning ball device for switching the opening and closing of the openings of the general winning openings 9050A to 9050D (for example, an accessory corresponding to the ordinary variable winning ball device 906B for switching the opening and closing of the second starting winning opening) is provided. It is always open. Further, even if the game ball wins in the general winning openings 9050A to 9050D, neither the start condition of the variable display of the special figure game nor the start condition of the variable display of the normal figure game is satisfied based on the prize.

In this embodiment, a predetermined number of prize balls are given to the player as a specific value based on the fact that the game balls have won a prize in the general prize opening, but the present invention is not limited to this. With the winning of the game ball in the winning opening, a variable winning ball device, for example, a normal variable winning ball device 906B for controlling the opening / closing of the second starting winning opening, or a special variable for controlling the opening / closing of the large winning opening. Activating the winning ball device 907 to facilitate the winning of the game ball in the second starting winning opening or the large winning opening may be a specific value given by the winning of the game ball in the general winning opening.

Further, the specific value given to the player may be different depending on the general winning opening. For example, when the game ball wins in the second general winning opening 9050B or the third general winning opening 9050C, 5 Each prize ball is given, but if a game ball wins in the first general winning opening 9050A or the fourth general winning opening 9050D, ten prize balls are given (that is, specific values of different sizes are given. It may be granted). Further, the specific value given when a game ball wins a prize in the second general winning opening 9050B or the third general winning opening 9050C is a predetermined number of prize balls, but the first general winning opening 9050A or the fourth general winning opening 9050A or the fourth general winning opening. When the game ball wins the 9050D, the normal variable winning ball device 906B or the special variable winning ball device 907 may be operated (that is, a specific value of a different type is given).

Further, different effects may be executed according to the specific value given according to the winning of the game ball to the general winning opening. For example, the winning ball may be executed according to the winning of the game ball to the general winning opening. Is given, and the variable winning ball device operates according to the winning of the game ball to the general winning opening (that is, when the type of specific value is different), so that different effects are executed. Is also good. In addition, there are cases where 10 prize balls are given according to the winning of the game ball to the general winning opening, and 5 prize balls are given according to the winning of the game ball to the general winning opening. Different effects may be performed (ie, when the magnitude of the specific value is different).

As shown in FIG. 43, the winning of the game ball to the first general winning opening 9050A, the second general winning opening 9050B, the third general winning opening 9050C, and the fourth general winning opening 9050D is the first general winning opening corresponding to each. It is detected by the mouth switch 9024A, the second general winning opening switch 9024B, the third general winning opening switch 9024C, and the fourth general winning opening switch 9024D. When a game ball is detected by the first general prize opening switch 9024A, the second general prize opening switch 9024B, the third general prize opening switch 9024C, and the fourth general prize opening switch 9024D, a predetermined number (for example, 10) of game balls Is paid out as a prize ball.

As described above, in this embodiment, by providing the winning opening switches corresponding to each of the four general winning openings 9050A to 9050D, the game ball wins a prize in the general winning openings in the game control microcomputer 90100. It is possible to detect not only what was done, but also which general winning opening the game ball won.

The configuration is not limited to the configuration in which a different general winning opening switch is provided for each general winning opening, and a common general winning opening switch may be provided for a plurality of general winning openings. For example, a common general winning opening switch (a switch for detecting that a general winning opening provided in the left game area 9010A has been won) is provided for the first general winning opening 9050A and the second general winning opening 9050B. , A common general winning opening switch (a switch for detecting that the general winning opening provided in the right game area 9010B has been won) is provided for the third general winning opening 9050C and the fourth general winning opening 9050D. You can do it. In addition, a common general winning opening switch (a switch for detecting that one of the general winning openings has been won) is provided for all the general winning openings of the first general winning opening 9050A to the fourth general winning opening 9050D. You may be able to do it.

At the bottom of the game area, there is an out opening for taking in a game ball that has not entered any of the winning openings. The game ball taken into the out port is collected on the game island via a ball collection passage (not shown) connecting to the out port. The game balls that have won in each winning opening (1st starting winning opening, 2nd starting winning opening, large winning opening, 1st to 4th general winning openings) are collected through a winning ball set gutter (not shown) and are balls. It is designed to be collected on the game island via the collection passage. An out-ball detector (not shown) is provided in the ball collection passage. As a result, in the out ball detector, the game ball driven into the game area 9010 (the game ball guided to the out opening without winning any winning opening, and the winning ball set by winning one of the winning openings. Game balls collected in the gutter) Detects all game balls. Every time a game ball is detected by the out-ball detector, a detection signal is input to the effect control board 9012, so that the effect control CPU 90120 totals the number of game balls driven into the game area 9010, that is, the number of outs. It is possible. If the out-ball detector is configured to include a counter whose value increases by 1 each time a game ball is detected, the effect control is performed every time the value of the counter increases by a certain number (for example, 10). The number of outs may be aggregated in a fixed number unit (for example, 10 units) on the effect control CPU 90120 side by outputting a signal for increasing the number of outs to the board 9012.

Speakers 908L and 908R for reproducing and outputting sound effects and the like are provided at the upper left and right positions of the gaming machine frame 903, and game effect lamps 909 are provided around the game area. Decorative LEDs may be arranged around each structure (for example, a normal winning ball device 906A, a normal variable winning ball device 906B, a special variable winning ball device 907, etc.) in the gaming area of the pachinko gaming machine 901.

On the lower surface of the glass door frame 903a, there is an upper plate 9060 that holds (stores) a game ball paid out as a prize ball or a game ball rented out by a predetermined ball lending machine so that it can be supplied to a hitting ball launching device. It is provided. For example, an operation button 9030 that can be operated by a player by a pressing operation or the like is installed at a predetermined position on the front side of the upper surface of the upper plate 9060.

A keyhole 9061 for a locking device (not shown) is provided on the right side of the upper plate 9060. By inserting the key corresponding to the keyhole 9061 into the keyhole 9061 and rotating the key in one direction, for example, counterclockwise, the glass door frame 903a can be opened forward with respect to the gaming machine frame 903. Further, by inserting the key into the keyhole 9061 and rotating the key in another direction, for example, clockwise, the gaming machine frame 903 can be opened forward with respect to the outer frame. In the locking device, a spring is built in the keyhole 9061, and when the key is inserted into the keyhole 9061, rotated counterclockwise or clockwise, and then the key is released or pulled out, the direction in which the keyhole 9061 is turned is opposite. Turn in the direction and return to the neutral position. When the keyhole 9061 is in the neutral position, the glass door frame 903a can be closed and locked with respect to the gaming machine frame 903, and the gaming machine frame 903 can be closed and locked with respect to the outer frame. Is possible. In addition, by opening the glass door frame 903a forward with respect to the gaming machine frame 903, maintenance of the gaming board (gauge board including game nails and winning openings) 902 (for example, measures to eliminate ball clogging). Alternatively, the mode changeover switch 9031 and the display changeover switch 9032, which will be described later, can be operated.

Immediately below the upper plate 9060, a lower plate 9062 for storing a game ball that cannot be accommodated in the upper plate 9060 is provided, and in the lower right of the upper plate 9060, the game ball as a game medium is directed toward the game area. A ball striking operation handle (operation knob) 9063 operated by a player or the like for firing is provided. For example, the hitting ball operation handle 9063 adjusts the elastic force of the game ball according to the operation amount (rotation amount) by the player or the like. The hitting operation handle may be provided with a single-shot firing switch for stopping the drive of the firing motor included in the hitting ball launching device, or a touch ring (touch sensor).

The operation button 9030 is a jog dial that can be pressed and is rotatable. The operation button 9030 is not limited to one that can be pressed or rotated, and may be one that can be touched or pressed, such as a touch panel, or tilted like a lever-type switch. It may be operable, or it may be capable of pressing and tilting operations such as a joystick. Further, instead of the operation button 9030, a sensor capable of detecting a predetermined operation action by the player, such as an infrared sensor, a CCD sensor, or a CMOS sensor, may be used. That is, the operation button 9030 may be configured so that a predetermined operation action by the player can be detected mechanically, electrically, or electromagnetically. The player's operation action performed on the operation button 9030 is a push detection switch (not shown) for detecting the pressing of the operation button 9030 and a rotary encoder (not shown) for detecting the rotation direction and rotation amount of the operation button (jog dial) 9030. Not shown).

Next, the progress of the game in the pachinko gaming machine 901 will be schematically described.

In the pachinko gaming machine 901, the gaming ball that has passed through the first passing gate 9041A provided in the left gaming area 9010A and the second passing gate 9041B provided in the right gaming area 9010B becomes the first passing gate 9041A shown in FIG. 43. The normal symbol start condition for executing the variable display of the normal symbol on the normal symbol display 9020, such as that it was detected by the corresponding first gate switch 9021A and the second gate switch 9021B corresponding to the second pass gate 9041B, is After the establishment, the ordinary symbol game by the ordinary symbol display 9020 is started based on the establishment of the ordinary symbol start condition for starting the variable display of the ordinary symbol, for example, that the previous normal symbol game has ended. To.

In this normal symbol game, when a predetermined time, which is the normal symbol fluctuation time, elapses after the fluctuation of the normal symbol is started, the confirmed normal symbol, which is the variable display result of the normal symbol, is stopped and displayed (deriving display). At this time, if a specific normal symbol (design per normal symbol) such as a number indicating "7" is stopped and displayed as the confirmed normal symbol, the variable display result of the normal symbol becomes "per normal symbol". On the other hand, if a normal symbol other than the normal symbol, such as a number or symbol other than the number indicating "7", is stopped and displayed as a confirmed normal symbol, the variable display result of the normal symbol is "normal symbol loss". Become. In response to the fact that the variable display result of the normal symbol is "per normal", the expansion / opening control (tilted control) is performed in which the movable wing piece of the electric tulip constituting the normal variable winning ball device 906B is in the tilted position. However, normal open control is performed to return to the vertical position after a predetermined time has elapsed.

In the special figure game by the first special symbol display device 904A, the game ball that has entered the first start winning opening formed in the normal winning ball device 906A is detected by the first starting opening switch 9022A shown in FIG. 43. After the first start condition is satisfied, the game is started based on the fact that the first start condition is satisfied, for example, due to the end of the previous special figure game or the jackpot game state. In the special figure game by the second special symbol display device 904B, the game ball that has entered the second start winning opening formed in the normally variable winning ball device 906B is detected by the second starting opening switch 9022B shown in FIG. 43. After the second start condition is satisfied, the game is started based on the fact that the second start condition is satisfied, for example, due to the end of the previous special figure game or the jackpot game state.

In the special symbol game by the first special symbol display device 904A and the second special symbol display device 904B, after the variable display of the special symbol is started and the predetermined time that becomes the special symbol fluctuation time elapses, the variable display result of the special symbol Derived display of the confirmed special symbol (special symbol display result). At this time, if a specific special symbol (big hit symbol) is stopped and displayed as a confirmed special symbol, it becomes a "big hit" as a specific display result, and if a special symbol (missing symbol) other than the big hit symbol is stopped and displayed, it is "missing". ". The specific special symbol (big hit symbol) as the definite special symbol is different depending on the type of the jackpot. For example, the definite special symbol is different between the probable variable jackpot and the non-probable variable jackpot. After the variable display result in the special figure game becomes a "big hit", it is controlled to a big hit game state as a specific state in which a round game advantageous to the player (simply also referred to as a "round") is executed a predetermined number of times.

In the jackpot gaming state controlled after the jackpot symbol is stopped and displayed as a confirmed special symbol in the special figure game, the opening / closing plate of the special variable winning ball device 907 is set to a predetermined period (for example, 29 seconds) or a predetermined number as the first period. By opening the large winning opening in the period until (for example, 9) winning balls are generated, a round game is executed in which the special variable winning ball device 907 is changed to the first state advantageous to the player. To. In this way, the opening / closing plate with the large winning opening open during the execution of the round game receives the game ball falling on the surface of the game board 902, and then closes the large winning opening, thereby causing a special variable winning ball device. The 907 is changed to a second state which is disadvantageous to the player, and one round game is completed. In the big hit state, the number of executions of the round game, which is the opening cycle of the big winning opening, is, for example, 15 times. It should be noted that a plurality of types of jackpot types with different numbers of round game executions may be provided.

After the jackpot state ends, as one of the advantageous states advantageous to the player, time reduction control is executed in which the variable display time (special figure fluctuation time) of the special symbol in the special figure game is shortened as compared with the normal state. It is controlled to the time saving state in which the time is shortened, or to the probabilistic state in which the probability fluctuation control (probability change control) is performed together with the time shortening control.

Here, the normal state is a normal state as a game state different from a specific state such as a big hit game state, a time saving state, or a probability change state, and is an initial setting state of the pachinko gaming machine 901 (for example, when a system reset is performed). The same control as in the state where the initialization process is executed after the power is turned on is performed. On the other hand, in the time saving state, when either of the conditions that the special figure game is executed a predetermined number of times (for example, 100 times) and the variable display result becomes a "big hit" is satisfied first. Then, just finish. In addition, in the probabilistic state, in the variable display of each special figure game and decorative symbol, the probability that the variable display result becomes "big hit" and is further controlled to the big hit game state is higher than in the normal state and the time saving state. improves. Such a probabilistic state continues until the next variable display result becomes a "big hit" or until a predetermined number of times (for example, eight times) of the special figure game is executed.

Jackpot A jackpot (type) that is controlled to a probabilistic state after the game state ends is also referred to as a probabilistic jackpot. The jackpot (type) that is controlled to the time-saving state without being controlled to the probability-changing state after the jackpot gaming state ends is also called a non-probability-changing jackpot.

In the probabilistic state or the time saving state, the normal symbol display 9020 controls the fluctuation time of the normal symbol (normal symbol fluctuation time) in the normal symbol game to be shorter than in the normal state, and the normal symbol is variable in each normal symbol game. Control to improve the probability that the display result will be "per normal", and control the tilt of the movable wing piece in the normal variable winning ball device 906B based on the variable display result being "per normal". The second start condition is to make it easier for the game ball to enter the second start winning opening, such as control to make the tilt control time longer than in the normal state and control to increase the number of tilts than in the normal state. Controls that are advantageous to the player are performed by increasing the possibility of establishment. In the probabilistic state or the time saving state, any one of these controls may be performed, or a plurality of controls may be combined and performed. As described above, the control that makes it easy for the game ball to enter the second start winning opening in the probable change state or the time saving state, which is advantageous for the player, is also referred to as a high opening control. By performing the high opening control, the frequency of the second start winning opening being in the expanded open state is increased as compared with the case where the high opening control is not performed. As a result, the second start condition for executing the special figure game using the second special figure by the second special symbol display device 904B becomes easy to be satisfied, and the special figure game can be executed frequently. The time until the variable display result becomes a "big hit" is shortened. Therefore, in the probabilistic state or the time saving state, the big hit game state is more likely to occur than in the normal state. The period during which the high opening control can be executed is also referred to as a high opening control period, and this period may be the same as the period during which the gaming state in the pachinko gaming machine 901 is controlled to the probabilistic state or the time saving state. The state in which the high opening control is executed is also referred to as a high base state, and the state in which the high opening control is not executed is also referred to as a low base state.

In the "left", "middle", and "right" decorative symbol display areas 905L, 905C, and 905R provided in the image display device 905, a special symbol game using the first special symbol by the first special symbol display device 904A is used. , Of the special figure game using the second special figure by the second special symbol display device 904B, the variable display of the decorative symbol is started corresponding to the start of any special figure game. Then, the period from the start of the variable display of the decorative symbol to the end of the variable display by the stop display of the fixed decorative symbol in each of the decorative symbol display areas 905L, 905C, and 905R of "left", "middle", and "right". Then, the variable display state of the decorative pattern may become a predetermined reach state. Here, the reach state is a decorative symbol that has not yet been stopped and displayed when the decorative symbol that has been stopped and displayed in the display area of the image display device 905 constitutes a part of the jackpot combination (“reach variable symbol”). (Also referred to as) is a display state in which fluctuations continue, or a display state in which all or part of the decorative symbols are changed in synchronization while forming all or part of the jackpot combination. Specifically, in some of the decorative symbol display areas 905L, 905C, and 905R of "left", "middle", and "right" (for example, the decorative symbol display areas 905L, 905R of "left" and "right") in advance. When the decorative symbol (for example, the decorative symbol indicating the alphanumerical character of "7") that constitutes the specified jackpot combination is stopped and displayed, the remaining decorative symbol display area (for example, "medium" decoration) that has not yet been stopped and displayed is displayed. In the display state where the decorative symbol is fluctuating in the symbol display area 905C, etc., or in all or part of the decorative symbol display area 905L, 905C, 905R of "left", "middle", "right", the decorative symbol is a big hit. It is a display state that fluctuates synchronously while constituting all or a part of the combination.

In addition, in response to the reach state, the fluctuation speed of the decorative pattern is reduced, or a character image (effect image imitating a person or the like) different from the decorative pattern is displayed on the display screen of the image display device 905. By changing the display mode of the background image, playing back a moving image different from the decorative pattern, and changing the variable mode of the decorative pattern, a different production operation from before the reach state is executed. May be done. Such an effect operation such as a change in the display mode of the character image, a change in the display mode of the background image, a reproduction display of the moving image, and a change in the variation mode of the decorative pattern is called a reach effect display (or simply a reach effect). For the reach effect, not only the display operation on the image display device 905, but also the sound output operation by the speakers 908L and 908R, the lighting operation (blinking operation) on the light emitting body such as the game effect lamp 909, and the like are brought into the reach state. It may be included that the operation mode is different from the previous operation mode. As the effect operation in the reach effect, a plurality of types of effect patterns (also referred to as "reach patterns") having different operation modes (reach modes) may be prepared in advance. And, in each reach mode, the possibility of becoming a "big hit" (also referred to as "reliability" or "big hit reliability") is different. That is, the possibility that the variable display result will be a "big hit" can be different depending on which of the plurality of types of reach effects is executed. As an example, in this embodiment, reach modes such as normal reach and super reach are preset. Then, when the reach mode of super reach appears, the possibility that the variable display result becomes "big hit" (big hit reliability) is higher than that when the reach mode of normal reach appears.

During the variable display of the decorative pattern, unlike the reach effect, the variable display state of the decorative pattern may be in the reach state, and the variable display result may be a "big hit". Depending on the variable display mode of the symbol, a variable display effect for notifying the player may be executed. In this embodiment, variable display effects such as "pseudo-ream" and "slip" can be executed, and each effect operation is executed in response to the determination of the fluctuation pattern on the main board 9011 side. Whether or not it is decided.

During the variable display of the decorative pattern, unlike the reach effect or the variable display effect such as "pseudo-ream" or "slip", the decorative image such as displaying a predetermined character image or a message image is displayed. Notify the player that the variable display state of the decorative symbol may be in the reach state or the variable display result may be a "big hit" due to the effect operation different from the variable display operation of the symbol. A notice effect for doing so may be executed.

When the special symbol that becomes the lost symbol is stopped and displayed as the confirmed special symbol in the special symbol game, the variable display state of the decorative symbol does not become the reach state after the variable display of the decorative symbol is started. The definite decorative pattern that is a non-reach combination of is sometimes displayed as a stop. Such a variable display mode of the decorative pattern is referred to as a "non-reach" (also referred to as "reachless loss") variable display mode when the variable display result is "loss".

When the special symbol that is a lost symbol is stopped and displayed as a confirmed special symbol in the special symbol game, it corresponds to the fact that the variable display state of the decorative symbol has reached the reach state after the variable display of the decorative symbol is started. Then, after the reach effect is executed or without the reach effect being executed, the definite decorative pattern that becomes a predetermined reach combination (also referred to as a reach loss combination) may be stopped and displayed. Such a variable display result of a decorative pattern is referred to as a variable display mode of "reach" (also referred to as "reach loss") when the variable display result is "loss". The definite decoration symbol that is a non-reach combination and the definite decoration symbol that is a reach loss combination are collectively referred to as a definite decoration symbol that is a loss combination (non-specific combination).

When the special symbol that is the jackpot symbol is stopped and displayed as the confirmed special symbol in the special symbol game, the predetermined reach effect is executed in response to the variable display state of the decorative symbol being in the reach state. Later, a fixed decorative pattern that is a predetermined jackpot combination is stopped and displayed. Here, the definite decorative symbol that is a jackpot combination is, for example, the symbol number that is variably displayed in the decorative symbol display areas 905L, 905C, and 905R of the "left", "middle", and "right" in the image display device 905 is "1". Any one of the decorative symbols from "8" is stopped and displayed on the predetermined effective line in the decorative symbol display areas 905L, 905C, and 905R of "left", "middle", and "right". Anything is fine.

In addition, after the decorative symbol that is the jackpot combination is derived and displayed, the look-ahead that announces and notifies that the pending data whose special symbol display result is "big hit" is stored during the execution of the round in the jackpot game state is pre-reading. The notice effect may be executed.

As described above, the game area 9010 includes a left game area 9010A and a right game area 9010B, and the player adjusts the operation amount (rotation amount) of the ball striking operation handle (operation knob) to adjust the left game area 9010A. It is possible to switch between a left-handed shot that shoots a game ball toward the right side and a right-handed shot that shoots a game ball toward the right game area 9010B.

In the pachinko gaming machine 901, when a game ball is launched into the left game area 9010A (when the game ball enters the left game area 9010A), the right game area is arranged by arranging a game nail or a game ball guiding member (not shown). The game ball is designed to win a prize in the first start winning opening at a higher rate than when the game ball is fired at 9010B. In addition, when the gaming state is in the normal state, the fluctuation time of the normal symbol (normal symbol fluctuation time) is longer than when the gaming state is in the probabilistic change state and the time saving state, and the variable display result of the normal symbol is "per normal symbol". Since the probability of becoming a player is low, the rate at which a game ball launched into the left game area 9010A wins a prize in the second start winning slot under the normal state is extremely low compared to the rate in which the game ball wins in the first starting winning slot. There is.

On the other hand, in the pachinko gaming machine 901, when the gaming ball is launched into the right gaming area 9010B (when the gaming ball enters the right gaming area 9010B), the left is due to the arrangement of a gaming nail or a gaming ball guiding member (not shown). Compared to the case where the game ball is launched into the game area 9010A, the rate at which the game ball wins in the first start winning opening is extremely low, or the game ball does not win in the first starting winning opening. There is. Therefore, even if a right-handed hit is made in the normal state, the ratio of the game ball winning the starting winning opening (either the first starting winning opening or the second starting winning opening) is left-handed in the normal state. Occasionally, it is extremely low compared to the rate at which the game ball wins in the starting winning opening (either the first starting winning opening or the second starting winning opening). Therefore, the player will hit left in the normal state.

Further, the ratio of the game ball launched into the right game area 9010B passing through the second passage gate 9041B is such that the game ball launched into the left game area 9010A is the first due to the arrangement of a game nail or a game ball guiding member (not shown). It is higher than the rate of passing through the 1-pass gate 9041A. The rate at which the game ball fired in the right game area 9010B wins the second start winning opening in the open state is the game fired in the left game area 9010A due to the arrangement of a game nail or a game ball guiding member (not shown). It is higher than the rate at which the ball wins the second starting winning opening in the open state.

Then, in the probabilistic state and the time saving state, the fluctuation time of the normal symbol (normal symbol fluctuation time) is shorter than in the normal state, and the probability that the variable display result of the normal symbol becomes "normal symbol hit" is higher than in the normal state. Therefore, the rate at which the game ball wins the start winning opening (either the first starting winning opening or the second starting winning opening) when hitting right in the probable change state and the time saving state is left in the probable changing state and the time saving state. It is higher than the rate at which the game ball wins the starting winning opening (either the first starting winning opening or the second starting winning opening) when hitting. Therefore, the player will hit right in the probable change state and the time saving state.

Further, the ratio of the game ball fired in the right game area 9010B to the large winning opening in the open state is that the game ball fired in the left game area 9010A is due to the arrangement of a game nail or a game ball guiding member (not shown). It is higher than the rate of winning a prize in the open large prize opening. Therefore, the player will hit right in the big hit game state. In this way, the player strikes left in the normal state, switches to right-handed when the big hit game state occurs, continues right-handed in the probable change state or time-saving state after the end of the big hit game state, and returns to the normal state. With the transition (for example, the end of the probability change state without the big hit game state or the time saving state), it will be returned to the left-handed.

Further, the ratio of the game ball launched in the left game area 9010A to the first general winning opening 9050A or the second general winning opening 9050B provided in the left game area 9010A is the ratio of the first general winning opening 9050A and the second general winning opening 9050A. The game ball launched into the right game area 9010B due to the position where the general winning opening 9050B is provided and the arrangement of the game nail or the game ball guiding member (not shown) is the first general winning opening 9050A or the second general winning opening 9050A. It is higher than the rate of winning 9050B. On the other hand, the ratio of the game ball launched in the right game area 9010B to the third general winning opening 9050C or the fourth general winning opening 9050D provided in the right game area 9010B is the third general winning opening 9050C and the fourth. The game ball launched into the left game area 9010A due to the position where the general winning opening 9050D is provided and the arrangement of the game nail or the game ball guiding member (not shown) is the third general winning opening 9050C or the fourth general winning opening. It is higher than the rate of winning 9050D.

For some or all of the plurality of general winning openings (first general winning opening 9050A and second general winning opening 9050B) provided in the left game area 9010A, only the game ball launched into the left game area 9010A It is possible to win a prize, and the game ball launched in the right game area 9010B may be configured not to win a prize, and a plurality of general prize openings (3rd general prize opening 9050C and 4th general prize opening) provided in the right game area 9010B may be used. For a part or all of 9050D), only the game ball fired in the right game area 9010B can win a prize, and the game ball fired in the left game area 9010A may not win a prize.

In this way, since left-handed hitting is performed in the normal state, there is a high probability that the game ball will win in the first general winning opening 9050A and the second general winning opening 9050B among the four general winning openings, and the big hit gaming state and In the probabilistic state and the time saving state, right-handed hitting is performed, so that there is a high probability that the game ball will win in the third general winning opening 9050C and the fourth general winning opening 9050D among the four general winning openings. As the game area in which the game ball is launched changes according to the game state and the like, the general winning opening where the game ball is likely to win also changes. In the left game area 9010A where the game ball enters in the normal state, a general winning opening is provided at a position where the game ball can easily win, and the right game in which the game ball enters in the big hit game state, the probability change state, and the time saving state. In the area 9010B, a general winning opening may be provided at a position where it is difficult for the game ball to win (or vice versa), so that the frequency of winning the general winning opening may change depending on the game state.

The pachinko gaming machine 901 is equipped with various control boards such as a main board 9011, an effect control board 9012, a voice control board 9013, and a lamp control board 9014 as shown in FIG. 43. Further, the pachinko gaming machine 901 is also equipped with a relay board 9015 for relaying various control signals transmitted between the main board 9011 and the effect control board 9012. In addition, various boards such as a power supply board, an information terminal board, a launch control board, and an interface board are arranged on the back surface of the game board 902 of the pachinko gaming machine 901. The power supply board is a board that supplies power to each board such as the main board 9011 and the effect control board 9012. The power supply board is connected to other boards such as a voice control board 9013, a lamp control board 9014, and a relay board 9015 in addition to the main board 9011 and the effect control board 9012 to supply power. A power switch is provided on the power supply board, and when the power switch is turned on, power is turned on and power supply from the power supply board to each board is started. Further, by turning off the power switch, the power supply to each board is stopped. Further, the main board 9011 includes a payout control board. The payout control board may be provided separately from the main board 9011. The payout control board is a board for controlling the payout of prize balls, and is equipped with a payout control microcomputer. The payout control board is composed of a ball payout device (not shown) or the like in response to reception of a prize ball number command (transmitted as a control signal from the main board 9011) in which data indicating the number of prize balls is set. The payout mechanism (the mechanism for paying out the prize balls) is driven to execute the payout of the prize balls.

The main board 9011 is a control board on the main side, and is equipped with various circuits for controlling the progress of the game in the pachinko gaming machine 901. The main board 9011 is mainly addressed to a sub-side control board including a random number setting function used in a special figure game, a function of inputting a signal from a switch or the like arranged at a predetermined position, and an effect control board 9012. , It has a function to output and transmit a control command as an example of command information as a control signal, and a function to output various information to a hall management computer. Further, the main board 9011 controls lighting / extinguishing of each LED (for example, segment LED) constituting the first special symbol display device 904A and the second special symbol display device 904B to control the lighting / extinguishing of the first special symbol and the second special symbol. Variable display of a predetermined display symbol, such as controlling the variable display of the normal symbol and controlling the variable display of the normal symbol by the normal symbol display 9020 by controlling the lighting / extinguishing / coloring of the normal symbol display 9020. It also has a control function. From the main board 9011, for example, a game control microcomputer 90100, a switch circuit 90110 that captures detection signals from various switches for game ball detection and transmits the detection signals to the game control microcomputer 90100, and a game control microcomputer 90100. A solenoid circuit 90111 or the like that transmits a solenoid drive signal to the solenoids 9027 and 9028 is mounted.

Further, the switch circuit 90110 takes in a signal from the abnormality detection sensor group 9026 (details will be described later) and transmits it to the game control microcomputer 90100. As will be described in detail later, the abnormality detection sensor group 9026 is for detecting an abnormality generated in the pachinko gaming machine 901.

The effect control board 9012 is a control board on the sub side independent of the main board 9011, and receives a control signal transmitted from the main board 9011 via the relay board 9015 to receive an image display device 905, speakers 908L, and 908R. And various circuits for controlling the effect operation by the electric component for effect such as the game effect lamp 909 are mounted. That is, the effect control board 9012 produces effects such as display operation in the image display device 905, all or part of the sound output operation from the speakers 908L and 908R, and all or part of the lighting / extinguishing operation in the game effect lamp 909 and the like. It is equipped with a function to determine the control content for causing a predetermined effect operation to be performed on the electric component for use.

The audio control board 9013 is a control board for audio output control provided separately from the effect control board 9012, and outputs audio from the speakers 908L and 908R based on commands and control data from the effect control board 9012. It is equipped with a processing circuit that executes voice signal processing for this purpose. The lamp control board 9014 is a control board for lamp output control provided separately from the effect control board 9012, and is turned on / off in the game effect lamp 909 or the like based on commands and control data from the effect control board 9012. It is equipped with a lamp driver circuit that drives it.

As shown in FIG. 43, the main board 9011 has a first gate switch 9021A, a second gate switch 9021B, a first start port switch 9022A, a second start port switch 9022B, a count switch 9023, and a first general winning port switch 9024A. , The wiring for transmitting the detection signal from the second general winning opening switch 9024B, the third general winning opening switch 9024C, and the fourth general winning opening switch 9024D is connected.

The first gate switch 9021A, the second gate switch 9021B, the first start port switch 9022A, the second start port switch 9022B, the count switch 9023, and the first general winning port switch 9024A to the fourth general winning port switch 9024D are, for example, Anything having an arbitrary configuration capable of detecting a game ball as a game medium, such as a sensor, may be used. Further, on the main board 9011, a first special symbol display device 904A, a second special symbol display device 904B, a normal symbol display 9020, a first hold display 9025A, a second hold display 9025B, and a normal figure hold display 9025C Wiring for transmitting a command signal for performing display control such as is connected. Further, a wiring for transmitting a signal from the abnormality detection sensor group 9026 is connected to the main board 9011.

The control signal transmitted from the main board 9011 to the effect control board 9012 is relayed by the relay board 9015. The main board 9011 is provided with, for example, a main board side connector corresponding to the relay board 9015, and an output buffer circuit is connected between the main board side connector and the game control microcomputer 90100. The output buffer circuit can pass a signal only in the direction from the main board 9011 to the effect control board 9012 via the relay board 9015, and blocks the input of the signal from the relay board 9015 to the main board 9011. Therefore, there is no room for a signal to be transmitted from the side of the effect control board 9012 or the relay board 9015 to the main board 9011 side.

The relay board 9015 may be provided with, for example, a transmission direction regulation circuit for each wiring for transmitting a control signal from the main board 9011 to the effect control board 9012. In each transmission direction regulation circuit, a diode is connected to the main board connector corresponding to the main board 9011 and a cathode is connected to the effect control board connector corresponding to the effect control board 9012, and one end is connected to the cathode of the diode. The other end is composed of a resistor connected to the ground (GND). With this configuration, each transmission direction regulation circuit can block the input of the signal from the effect control board 9012 to the relay board 9015, and allow the signal to pass only in the direction from the main board 9011 to the effect control board 9012. Therefore, there is no room for a signal to be transmitted from the effect control board 9012 side to the main board 9011 side. In this embodiment, a transmission direction regulation circuit is provided for each wiring for transmitting a control signal on the relay board 9015, and an output buffer circuit is provided between the game control microcomputer 90100 and the main board side connector on the main board 9011. By providing the above, it is possible to prevent an illegal signal from being input to the main board 9011 from the outside.

The control command transmitted from the main board 9011 to the effect control board 9012 via the relay board 9015 is, for example, an effect control command transmitted / received as an electric signal. The effect control commands include, for example, a display control command used to control an image display operation in the image display device 905, a voice control command used to control voice output from the speakers 908L and 908R, and a game effect lamp 909. It contains lamp control commands used to control lighting operations of decorative LEDs and the like.

Such effect control commands include, for example, a game state specification command for designating a game state (normal state, probability change state, or time saving state), a variation start command for specifying a variation start in a special figure game, and a special in a special figure game. A variable pattern specification command that specifies a variation time of a symbol or a variation pattern such as a decorative symbol on the image display device 905, a variable display result notification command that specifies a variable display result such as a special symbol or a decorative symbol, and a decorative symbol on the image display device 905. A decorative symbol stop command that specifies the stop of the variable display of, a jackpot start designation command that specifies the start or end of the jackpot game state, a jackpot end designation command, and a game ball wins in the first start winning opening or the second starting winning opening. The start winning command that is output when, the general winning opening designation command that is output when the game ball wins in the general winning opening, the big winning opening winning command that is output when the game ball wins in the big winning opening, etc. included.

The game control microcomputer 90100 mounted on the main board 9011 is, for example, a one-chip microcomputer, which is a ROM (Read Only Memory) 90101 for storing game control programs, fixed data, and the like, and a game control work. RAM (Random Access Memory) 90102 that provides an area, CPU (Central Processing Unit) 90103 that executes a game control program to perform control operations, and update of numerical data indicating random values independently of CPU 90103. It is configured to include a random number circuit 90104 to be performed and an I / O (Input / Output port) 90105. As an example, in the game control microcomputer 90100, a process for controlling the progress of the game in the pachinko gaming machine 901 is executed by executing the program read from the ROM 90101 by the CPU 90103. At this time, a fixed data read operation in which the CPU 90103 reads fixed data from the ROM 90101, a variable data writing operation in which the CPU 90103 writes various variable data to the RAM 90102 and temporarily stores them, and various variable data in which the CPU 90103 is temporarily stored in the RAM 90102. The variable data read operation, the CPU 90103 receives input of various signals from the outside of the game control microcomputer 90100 via the I / O 90105, and the CPU 90103 goes to the outside of the game control microcomputer 90100 via the I / O 90105. And transmission operation to output various signals is also performed.

In this way, in the game control microcomputer 90100, the CPU 90103 executes the game control program stored in the ROM 90101 to perform the game control. Therefore, the game control microcomputer 90100 (or the CPU 90103) executes the game control computer 90100 (or the CPU 90103). (Or perform processing), specifically, the CPU 90103 executes control according to a program. This also applies to microcomputers mounted on other boards different from the main board 9011.

As shown in FIG. 43, the effect control board 9012 provides an effect control CPU 90120 that performs control operations according to a program, a ROM 90121 that stores an effect control program, fixed data, and the like, and a work area of the effect control CPU 90120. RAM 90122, a display control unit 90123 that executes processing for determining the control content of the display operation in the image display device 905, and a random number that updates numerical data indicating a random number value independently of the effect control CPU 90120. The circuit 90124 and the I / O 90125 are mounted. As an example, in the effect control board 9012, the effect control CPU 90120 executes the effect control program read from the ROM 90121 to execute a process for controlling the effect operation by the effect electric component. At this time, the effect control CPU 90120 reads the fixed data from the ROM 90121, the effect control CPU 90120 writes various variation data to the RAM 90122 and temporarily stores the variation data, and the effect control CPU 90120 is stored in the RAM 90122. Fluctuation data read operation to read various temporarily stored fluctuation data, reception operation in which the effect control CPU 90120 receives input of various signals from the outside of the effect control board 9012 via the I / O 90125, and the effect control CPU 90120 is I / A transmission operation for outputting various signals to the outside of the effect control board 9012 via the O90125 is also performed.

The effect control board 9012 has wiring for transmitting a video signal to the image display device 905 and wiring for transmitting an effect sound signal as an information signal indicating sound number data to the voice control board 9013. Wiring for transmitting an illuminated signal as an information signal indicating lamp data to the lamp control board 9014, wiring for transmitting a control signal to the movable accessory 901000, and the like are connected. Further, on the effect control board 9012, an operation detection signal as an information signal indicating that the player's operation action with respect to the operation button 9030 has been detected is transmitted from a push detection switch (not shown) and a rotary encoder (not shown). Wiring for transmission is also connected. Further, the effect control board 9012 has wiring for transmitting a signal corresponding to the position (first position or second position) of the operation unit in the mode changeover switch 9031 described later, and the operation in the display changeover switch 9032 described later. Wiring for transmitting a signal corresponding to the position of the unit (first position or second position) is also connected.

The ROM 90121 mounted on the effect control board 9012 includes an image display device 905, speakers 908L, 908R, light emitters such as a game effect lamp 909 and decorative LEDs, an operation button 9030, a movable accessory 901000, and an effect accessory. In order to control the effect operation using the effect device (electrical component for effect) including the movable member provided in the above, a plurality of types of pattern data constituting the effect control pattern are stored in advance.

The display control unit 90123 mounted on the effect control board 9012 shown in FIG. 43 determines the control content of the display operation in the image display device 905 based on the display control command from the effect control CPU 90120 or the like. For example, the display control unit 90123 is for executing various effect displays such as variable display of decorative patterns and effect display in reach effect by determining the switching timing of the effect image to be displayed on the screen of the image display device 905. To control. The display control unit 90123 may be configured to include a VDP (Video Display Processor), a CGROM (Character Generator ROM), a VRAM (Video RAM), an LCD drive circuit, and the like.

The I / O 90125 mounted on the effect control board 9012 confirms, for example, the effect control command transmitted from the main board 9011 or the like, the operation detection signal transmitted from the press detection switch and the rotary encoder, and the state of the mode changeover switch 9031. Includes an input port for capturing various signals such as a enable signal and a signal for confirming the state of the display changeover switch 9032, and an output port for transmitting various signals to the outside of the effect control board 9012. It is composed. For example, from the output port of the I / O 90125, a video signal transmitted to the image display device 905, a command (sound signal) transmitted to the audio control board 9013, and a command transmitted to the lamp control board 9014. A command (drive signal) or the like to be transmitted to the movable accessory 901000 is output, such as (illumination signal) is output.

The voice control board 9013 is equipped with, for example, an input / output driver, a voice synthesis IC, a voice data ROM, an amplifier circuit, a volume, and the like. As an example, in the voice control board 9013, the sound number data shown in the sound effect signal transmitted from the effect control board 9012 is input to the voice synthesis IC via the input / output driver. The voice synthesis IC generates voices and sound effects according to the sound number data and outputs them to the amplifier circuit. The amplifier circuit outputs a voice signal obtained by amplifying the output level of the voice synthesis IC to a level corresponding to the volume set by the volume to the speakers 908L and 908R. The voice data ROM stores control data corresponding to the sound number data, and the voice synthesis IC reads out the control data corresponding to the sound number data to generate a voice or a sound effect. The stored data in the voice data ROM may be composed of data showing the output mode of voice and sound effects in a predetermined period in time series.

For example, an input / output driver, a lamp driver, and the like are mounted on the lamp control board 9014. As an example, in the lamp control board 9014, the illumination signal transmitted from the effect control board 9012 is input to the lamp driver via the input / output driver. The lamp driver amplifies the illumination signal and supplies it to the game effect lamp 909 or the like.

In this embodiment, when an abnormality occurs in the pachinko gaming machine 901, the generated abnormality is notified by voice by controlling the speakers 908L and 908R via the voice control board 9013, or the lamp control board 9014 is used. The lighting / extinguishing drive of the game effect lamp 909, the decorative LED, etc. is controlled via the light to notify by light, or an abnormal notification image (error message) is displayed in the display area of the image display device 905 via the display control unit 90123. Notify by displaying. Examples of the abnormality include a magnetic abnormality, a vibration abnormality, a radio wave abnormality, and the like, which are detected by using the abnormality detection sensor group 9026 or the like.

The abnormality detection sensor group 9026 is composed of one or more sensors for detecting an abnormality occurring in the pachinko gaming machine 901. The abnormality detection sensor group 9026 is not limited to the sensor, and may include a circuit for detecting an abnormality, various detection switches not corresponding to the sensor, and the like. The abnormality detection sensor group 9026 may be configured to detect an abnormality. One or more sensors and the like included in each of the abnormality detection sensor group 9026 are prepared according to each type of abnormality. The specific content of the abnormality detection sensor group 9026 may be determined by the specifications of the pachinko gaming machine 901 and the like. Abnormalities that occur in the pachinko gaming machine 901 are phenomena that do not occur or are extremely unlikely to occur in normal games performed in the pachinko gaming machine 901 (for example, magnetic abnormalities and vibration abnormalities that occur when there is an illegal act on the pachinko gaming machine 901. Phenomena such as abnormal radio waves) and phenomena that can hinder the progress of games, and in particular, phenomena that require notification to players and employees of game halls (pachinko shops, etc.).

Examples of the abnormality detection sensor group 9026 include a magnetic sensor that detects magnetism, a vibration sensor that detects vibration, and a radio wave detection sensor that detects a predetermined radio wave (radio wave in a predetermined wavelength band, etc.). For example, these sensors and the like may be included in the abnormality detection sensor group 9026. A known method can be appropriately used for detecting the abnormality. When the game control microcomputer 90100 detects a magnetic abnormality, vibration abnormality, radio wave abnormality, etc. based on the output signal from the abnormality detection sensor group 9026, the abnormality detection designation command for specifying that an abnormality has occurred is the main board. It is transmitted from 9011 to the effect control board 9012, and the abnormality has occurred due to the display of the error message in the image display device 905, the output of the warning sound from the speakers 908L and 908R, the light emission mode when the abnormality occurs in the game effect lamp 909, and the like. Notification is performed. For example, when an abnormality occurs, as shown in FIG. 84 (f), an image of the characters "An error has occurred" is displayed in the error message display area of the image display device 905.

Here, not only the abnormality has occurred due to the notification means such as the image display device 905, the speaker 908L, 908R, and the game effect lamp 909, but also any of the types of magnetic abnormality, vibration abnormality, radio wave abnormality, and opening of the front door. It may be possible to notify identifiable whether or not an abnormality has been detected.

The magnetic anomaly notification is an abnormality notification performed when a magnetic anomaly (an abnormality in which a magnet is in the vicinity of the pachinko gaming machine 901, in which case, there is a possibility of fraudulent activity) is detected. There are fraudulent acts such as moving the game medium with a magnet to make the winning opening win a prize, or clogging a predetermined area with the game medium to guide the game medium to the winning opening. Notification of a magnetic anomaly prevents such an act from occurring. For example, as one sensor of the abnormality detection sensor group 9026, a magnetic sensor for detecting magnetism is provided. The CPU 90103 determines whether or not there is a magnetic anomaly by determining whether the signal from the magnetic sensor exhibits a magnetic force equal to or higher than a predetermined threshold value (indicating a magnetic force → having a magnetic anomaly). When a magnetic anomaly is detected, an abnormality detection designation command for designating that the magnetic anomaly has occurred is transmitted from the main board 9011 to the effect control board 9012, and the image display device 905 or the like notifies the magnetic anomaly. For example, an image with the characters "A magnetic error has occurred" is displayed in the error message display area of the image display device 905.

The vibration abnormality notification is, for example, an abnormality notification that can be executed in a pachinko gaming machine provided with a special variable winning ball device 907. There is a fraudulent act of intentionally shaking the pachinko gaming machine to change the flow direction of the game medium toward the winning opening such as the large winning opening. By notifying the vibration abnormality, it is possible to prevent such an act from occurring. For example, as one sensor of the abnormality detection sensor group 9026, a vibration sensor for detecting vibration is provided. The CPU 90103 determines whether or not there is an abnormality (vibration abnormality) due to vibration by determining whether the signal from the vibration sensor indicates vibration with a strength equal to or higher than a predetermined threshold (strongness equal to or higher than a predetermined threshold). Shows vibration → There is vibration abnormality). When a vibration abnormality is detected, an abnormality detection designation command for designating that the vibration abnormality has occurred is transmitted from the main board 9011 to the effect control board 9012, and the image display device 905 or the like notifies the vibration abnormality. For example, an image with the characters "A vibration error has occurred" is displayed in the error message display area of the image display device 905.

The radio wave abnormality notification is a notification of an abnormality performed when a radio wave abnormality (an abnormality in which a predetermined radio wave reaches the pachinko gaming machine 901, in which case, there is a possibility of fraudulent activity) is detected. By applying radio waves to the start port switch (1st start port switch 9022A and 2nd start port switch 9022B), count switch 9023, etc., these switches can be switched on / off to illegally generate a prize and win a prize ball. There is cheating to get. By notifying the radio wave abnormality, it is possible to prevent such an act from occurring. For example, as one sensor of the abnormality detection sensor group 9026, a radio wave detection sensor for detecting a predetermined radio wave (radio wave in a predetermined wavelength band, etc.) is provided. The CPU 90103 determines whether or not there is a radio wave abnormality by determining whether or not the signal from the radio wave detection sensor indicates reception of the predetermined radio wave (indicating reception of the predetermined radio wave → presence of radio wave abnormality). When a radio wave abnormality is detected, an abnormality detection designation command for designating that the radio wave abnormality has occurred is transmitted from the main board 9011 to the effect control board 9012, and the image display device 905 or the like notifies the radio wave abnormality. For example, an image with the characters "A radio wave error has occurred" is displayed in the error message display area of the image display device 905.

Both the mode changeover switch 9031 and the display changeover switch 9032 are configured by a DIP switch (Dual In-line Package switch), and are provided outside the game area of the game board 902. The mode changeover switch 9031 and the display changeover switch 9032 configured by the DIP switch switch the operation unit between the first position and the second position (for example, in the case of the slide type, the position of the knob is set to one end side and the other end side. By switching to the side), the process (control program) executed by the effect control CPU 90120 can be switched. When the glass door frame 903a is closed with respect to the game machine frame 903, the glass door frame 903a covers the front surface of the game board 902, so that the player cannot operate the mode changeover switch 9031 and the display changeover switch 9032. It has become. The mode changeover switch 9031 and the display changeover switch 9032 are provided by the player via the glass door frame 903a in a state where the glass door frame 903a is closed with respect to the game machine frame 903 (the state shown in FIG. 42). It is not shown in FIG. 42 because it is installed in an invisible position.

As described above, the clerk of the game hall inserts the key into the keyhole 9061, opens the locking device (not shown), and opens the glass door frame 903a forward with respect to the game machine frame 903. The mode changeover switch 9031 and the display changeover switch 9032 provided on the game board 902 can be operated (dIP switch changeover). Then, when the operations of the mode changeover switch 9031 and the display changeover switch 9032 are completed, the glass door frame 903a is returned to the closed state with respect to the gaming machine frame 903, and the key is inserted into the keyhole 9061 to lock the device (shown in the figure). ) Is closed.

When the operation unit of the mode changeover switch 9031 is in the first position, the voltage of the mode changeover terminal of the effect control CPU 90120 is in the Low state, and when the operation unit of the mode changeover switch 9031 is in the second position, the effect control is performed. The voltage of the mode switching terminal of the CPU 90120 is set to High. When the voltage of the mode switching terminal is Low, the effect control CPU 90120 has the operation unit of the mode switching switch 9031 in the first position, that is, the image display device 905 has information for the player (for example, a demo). It is specified that the game mode is to display the screen, etc.), and the information of the winning number management table, which will be described later, is not displayed on the image display device 905. On the other hand, in the effect control CPU 90120, when the voltage of the mode switching terminal is High, the operation unit of the mode switching switch 9031 is in the second position, that is, the information for the clerk in the image display device 905 (for example, It is specified that the maintenance mode is for displaying (the number of winnings to each winning opening, etc.), and the information of the winning number management table, which will be described later, is displayed on the image display device 905.

When the operation unit of the display changeover switch 9032 is in the first position, the voltage of the display changeover terminal of the effect control CPU 90120 is in the Low state, and when the operation unit of the display changeover switch 9032 is in the second position, the effect control is performed. The voltage of the display switching terminal of the CPU 90120 is set to High. When the voltage of the display switching terminal is Low, the effect control CPU 90120 indicates that the operation unit of the display switching switch 9032 is in the first position, that is, the image display device 905 is informed of the number of winnings to the general winning opening. By specifying that the display is not permitted, it is prohibited to display the information based on the display control table (information that can specify the number of winnings in the general winning opening) on the image display device 905, which will be described later. On the other hand, in the effect control CPU 90120, when the voltage of the display switching terminal is High, the operation unit of the display switching switch 9032 is in the second position, that is, the image display device 905 wins a prize in the general winning opening. It is specified that the permission to display the number is given, and the information based on the display control table described later (information that can specify the number of winnings to the general winning opening) is permitted to be displayed on the image display device 905. do.

In this embodiment, the mode changeover switch 9031 and the display changeover switch 9032 are provided on the front side (the surface facing the player) of the game board 902, but the mode changeover switch 9031 and / or the display changeover switch 9032 is used. , May be provided on the back surface side (game island side) of the game board 902. In such a configuration, by rotating the gaming machine frame 903 forward with respect to the outer frame, the mode changeover switch 9031 and / or the display changeover switch 9032 provided on the back surface side of the game board 902 Can be operated.

As a control command transmitted from the main board 9011 to the effect control board 9012, there is a start winning command as described above. The start winning command includes a start winning opening designation command indicating whether the starting winning opening has occurred in the first starting winning opening or the second starting winning opening, or the first starting winning opening or the second starting winning opening. There is a start winning judgment result designation command and the like indicating a big hit judgment result and a big hit type judgment result at the time of winning a game ball.

The CPU 90103 is the effective start winning of the game ball to the first start winning opening, that is, the game ball to the first starting winning opening in a state where the first reserved storage number corresponding to the first starting winning opening is less than the upper limit value. When a prize is detected, a random number for determining a big hit and a random number for determining a big hit type are extracted from the random number circuit 90104, and the extracted random number for determining a big hit and a random number for determining a big hit type are used as the first random number in the random number storage area for the first special figure. It is stored in the storage area corresponding to the number of reserved storages (the first reserved storage number after addition including the valid start winning prize), and a command for designating the "first starting winning opening" is set as the starting winning opening designation command. Further, the CPU 90103 matches the extracted (stored) jackpot determination random number with the jackpot determination value stored in the jackpot determination table according to the current gaming state (normal state, time saving state, or probability variation state). Executes the start winning judgment to determine whether or not.

In this start winning determination, if the big hit determination random number does not match the jackpot determination value in the jackpot determination table, a start winning determination result specification command that specifies "missing" is set. When the big hit judgment random number matches the big hit judgment value of the big hit judgment table, the extracted (stored) big hit type judgment random number is further added to the big hit type judgment table for the first special figure for each big hit type. It is determined which of the determination values stored in is matched. Then, a start winning judgment result specification command for designating the "big hit" of the big hit type corresponding to the matched judgment value is set. For example, a command for specifying "non-probability change jackpot" or a command for specifying "probability variation jackpot" is set as a command for specifying a determination result at the time of starting winning. Then, the set start winning opening designation command (designating the "first starting winning opening") and the starting winning determination result designation command are output to the effect control board 9012.

The CPU 90103 responds to the start winning of the game ball to the first starting winning opening (that is, the first starting winning opening) in a state where the first reserved storage number corresponding to the first starting winning opening has reached the upper limit value. When an invalid start prize (invalid start prize) that is paid out but is not the target of the special figure game is detected, a command to specify the "first start prize opening" is set as the start prize opening designation command, and the judgment result at the start prize is specified. As a command, set blank data that specifies that it is not a valid start prize. Then, the set start winning opening designation command (“first starting winning opening” designation) and the starting winning determination result designation command (blank data) are output to the effect control board 9012.

The CPU 90103 has an effective start winning of the game ball to the second start winning opening, that is, a game ball to the second starting winning opening in a state where the second reserved storage number corresponding to the second starting winning opening is less than the upper limit value. When the winning is detected, the big hit judgment random number and the big hit type judgment random number are extracted from the random number circuit 90104, and the extracted big hit judgment random number and the big hit type judgment random number are used in the second random number storage area for the second special figure. It is stored in the storage area corresponding to the number of reserved storages (the second reserved storage number after addition including the valid start winning prize), and a command for designating the "second starting winning opening" is set as the starting winning opening designation command. Further, the CPU 90103 matches the extracted (stored) jackpot determination random number with the jackpot determination value stored in the jackpot determination table according to the current gaming state (normal state, time saving state, or probability variation state). Executes the start winning judgment to determine whether or not.

In this start winning determination, if the big hit determination random number does not match the jackpot determination value in the jackpot determination table, a start winning determination result specification command that specifies "missing" is set. When the big hit judgment random number matches the big hit judgment value of the big hit judgment table, the extracted (stored) big hit type judgment random number is further added to the big hit type judgment table for the second special figure for each big hit type. It is determined which of the determination values stored in is matched. Then, a start winning judgment result specification command for designating the "big hit" of the big hit type corresponding to the matched judgment value is set. For example, a command for specifying "non-probability change jackpot" or a command for specifying "probability variation jackpot" is set as a command for specifying a determination result at the time of starting winning. Then, the set start winning opening designation command (“second starting winning opening” designation) and the starting winning determination result designation command are output to the effect control board 9012.

The CPU 90103 responds to the start winning of the game ball to the second starting winning opening (that is, the second starting winning opening) in a state where the second reserved storage number corresponding to the second starting winning opening has reached the upper limit value. When an invalid start prize (invalid start prize) that is paid out but is not the target of the special figure game is detected, a command to specify the "second start prize opening" is set as the start prize opening designation command, and the judgment result at the start prize is specified. As a command, set blank data that specifies that it is not a valid start prize. Then, the set start winning opening designation command (“second starting winning opening” designation) and the starting winning determination result designation command (blank data) are output to the effect control board 9012.

In this embodiment, the variable display result of the special figure corresponding to the start winning is determined based on the big hit determination random number and the big hit type determination random number extracted at the time of the start winning, and based on the determination result. Although the look-ahead notice effect is executed, it is not limited to such a form, and the variation pattern of the variable display corresponding to the start prize is determined based on the random number for determination of the variation pattern extracted at the time of the start prize. The look-ahead notice effect may be executed based on the determination result. For example, when the judgment result at the time of starting prize is a fluctuation pattern of super reach, the pre-reading notice effect is executed at a higher rate than the case where the judgment result at the time of starting winning is a fluctuation pattern of non-reach. Then it is good.

Specifically, when the CPU 90103 detects an effective start winning of the game ball to the first starting winning opening, it extracts a random number for determining a variation pattern from the random number circuit 90104, and uses the extracted random number for determining a variation pattern for a big hit determination. Along with the random number and the random number for determining the jackpot type, the random numbers are stored in the storage area corresponding to the first reserved storage number (the first reserved storage number after addition including the valid start winning prize) in the random number storage area for the first special figure. Further, when the CPU 90103 detects an effective start winning of the game ball to the second starting winning opening, it extracts a random number for determining a fluctuation pattern from the random number circuit 90104, and uses the extracted random number for determining a fluctuation pattern as a random number for determining a jackpot and a random number for jackpot determination. Along with the random number for type determination, it is stored in the storage area corresponding to the second reserved storage number (the second reserved storage number after addition including the valid start winning prize) in the random number storage area for the second special figure.

Here, the ROM 90101 corresponds to each of the deviation pattern determination table in which the random number range corresponding to each of the deviation variation patterns shown in FIG. 49 (A) is set and the jackpot variation pattern shown in FIG. 49 (B). The fluctuation pattern determination table for big hits in which the random number range is set is stored.

When the determination result of the start winning determination (display result specified by the start winning determination result specification command) is "missing", the CPU 90103 refers to the losing variation pattern determination table and extracts (stores) it. The random number for determining the variation pattern is determined to be included in the random number range of which variation pattern, the variation pattern corresponding to the random number for determining the variation pattern is specified, and the specified variation pattern is "non-reach off". , "Normal reach loss" or "Super reach loss", set the start winning variation pattern determination result specification command to specify which of the variation patterns.

On the other hand, the CPU 90103 changes for a big hit when the judgment result of the start winning judgment (display result specified by the start winning judgment result specification command) is either "non-probability variable jackpot" or "probable variable jackpot". With reference to the pattern determination table, it is determined which variation pattern random number range the extracted (stored) variation pattern determination random number is included in, and the variation pattern corresponding to the variation pattern determination random number is specified. Then, a command for specifying a variation pattern at the time of starting winning, which specifies whether the specified variation pattern is a "normal reach jackpot" or a "super reach jackpot", is set.

When the CPU 90103 detects an invalid start winning, the CPU 90103 sets blank data for designating that it is not a valid start winning as a command for specifying a variation pattern at the time of starting winning.

Then, the CPU 90103 outputs the set start winning variation pattern determination result designation command to the effect control board 9012 as a start winning command together with the start winning opening designation command and the start winning determination result designation command described above.

The effect control CPU 90120 is a start winning opening designation command designated by the "first starting winning opening" and a start winning determination result specification command including valid data that is not blank data (and a start including valid data that is not blank data). When the winning variation pattern determination result specification command) is received, the starting winning determination result specification command (and the starting winning variation pattern determination result specification command) is first held in the start winning command storage area for the first special figure. Stored in the storage area corresponding to the number of storages (the first reserved storage number after addition including the valid start winning prize), and the start winning slot designation command designated by the "second starting winning slot" and valid data that is not blank data. When a start winning judgment result specification command including (and a start winning variation pattern determination result specification command including valid data other than blank data) is received, the start winning determination result specification command (and start winning variation pattern determination) is received. The result designation command) is stored in the storage area corresponding to the second reserved storage number (the second reserved storage number after addition including the valid start winning prize) in the start winning command storage area for the second special figure. The effect control CPU 90120 confirms the start winning determination result specification command (and the start winning variation pattern determination result specification command) stored in the start winning command storage area, so that the first special feature is set before the start condition is satisfied. It is possible to estimate the display result (and fluctuation pattern) of the figure or the second special figure and execute the look-ahead notice effect.

On the other hand, the effect control CPU 90120 has a start winning opening designation command designated as the "first starting winning opening" and a starting winning determination result specification command including blank data (as well as a starting winning variation pattern determination result specification command including blank data). When the It is possible to store the winning history to the first starting winning opening in the winning history storage area, which will be described later, without storing it in the start winning command storage area (excluded from the execution target of the look-ahead notice effect). When the start winning opening designation command specified by "start winning opening" and the starting winning judgment result specification command including blank data (and the starting winning variation pattern judgment result specification command including blank data) are received, the second starting winning opening is entered. By specifying that an invalid start winning has occurred, the start winning judgment result specification command (and the start winning variation pattern judgment result specification command) is not stored in the start winning command storage area for the second special figure (look-ahead). (Excluded from the execution target of the advance notice effect), it is possible to store the winning history in the second starting winning opening in the winning history storage area described later.

As a control command transmitted from the main board 9011 to the effect control board 9012, there is a variation pattern designation command as described above. As shown below, when the main board 9011 starts the variable display of the special symbol, the main board 9011 determines a fluctuation pattern according to the special symbol display result to be derived and displayed, and notifies the effect control board 9012 of the fluctuation pattern. Output the fluctuation pattern specification command to specify. The effect control data corresponding to each variation pattern is stored in advance in the ROM 90121 of the effect control board 9012, and the effect control CPU 90120 is for effect control corresponding to the variation pattern specified by the received variation pattern designation command. Select the data and execute the effect control according to the selected effect control data.

When the first start condition is satisfied and the variable display of the first special figure is executed, the CPU 90103 determines the big hit determination random number and the big hit type determination random number stored in the random number storage area for the first special figure. In addition, among the random numbers for determining the variation pattern, the random numbers for determining the jackpot and the random numbers for determining the jackpot type in the first storage area (the storage area corresponding to the number of reserved storage = 1), and the random numbers for determining the variation pattern are read, and the subsequent random numbers are read. The jackpot determination random number, the jackpot type determination random number, and the variation pattern determination random number in the storage area are shifted one by one to the previous storage area. Then, it is started to determine whether or not the read out random number for jackpot determination matches the jackpot determination value stored in the jackpot determination table according to the current gaming state (normal state, time saving state, or probability variation state). Perform time determination.

In this start time determination, if the jackpot determination random number does not match the jackpot determination value in the jackpot determination table, the CPU 90103 sets a variable display result notification command for specifying "missing", and together with the jackpot determination random number. It is determined which variation pattern random number set in the deviation pattern determination table includes the variation pattern determination random number read from the first storage area, and the variation pattern determination random number corresponds to the random number. By specifying the fluctuation pattern, the "outlier fluctuation pattern" is determined.

When the big hit judgment random number matches the big hit judgment value of the big hit judgment table, the read big hit type judgment random number is further stored in the big hit type judgment table for the first special figure for each big hit type. It is judged which of the judgment values is matched. Then, a variable display result notification command that specifies the "big hit" of the big hit type corresponding to the matched judgment value is set, and the random number for the big hit judgment and the random number for the fluctuation pattern judgment read from the head storage area are changed for the big hit. The "big hit variation pattern" is determined by determining which variation pattern set in the pattern determination table is included in the random number range and specifying the variation pattern corresponding to the variation pattern determination random number.

Then, the CPU 90103 outputs a set variable display result notification command and a variable pattern designation command for designating the determined variable pattern, together with the variable start command for designating the variable start of the first special figure.

When the second start condition is satisfied and the variable display of the second special figure is executed, the CPU 90103 determines the big hit determination random number and the big hit type determination random number stored in the random number storage area for the second special figure. In addition, among the random numbers for determining the variation pattern, the random numbers for determining the jackpot and the random numbers for determining the jackpot type in the first storage area (the storage area corresponding to the number of reserved storage = 1), and the random numbers for determining the variation pattern are read, and the subsequent random numbers are read. The jackpot determination random number, the jackpot type determination random number, and the variation pattern determination random number in the storage area are shifted one by one to the previous storage area. Then, it is started to determine whether or not the read out random number for jackpot determination matches the jackpot determination value stored in the jackpot determination table according to the current gaming state (normal state, time saving state, or probability variation state). Perform time determination.

In this start time determination, if the jackpot determination random number does not match the jackpot determination value in the jackpot determination table, the CPU 90103 sets a variable display result notification command for specifying "missing", and together with the jackpot determination random number. It is determined which variation pattern random number set in the deviation pattern determination table includes the variation pattern determination random number read from the first storage area, and the variation pattern determination random number corresponds to the random number. By specifying the fluctuation pattern, the "outlier fluctuation pattern" is determined.

When the big hit judgment random number matches the big hit judgment value of the big hit judgment table, the read big hit type judgment random number is further stored in the big hit type judgment table for the second special figure for each big hit type. It is judged which of the judgment values is matched. Then, a variable display result notification command that specifies the "big hit" of the big hit type corresponding to the matched judgment value is set, and the random number for the big hit judgment and the random number for the fluctuation pattern judgment read from the head storage area are changed for the big hit. The "big hit variation pattern" is determined by determining which variation pattern set in the pattern determination table is included in the random number range and specifying the variation pattern corresponding to the variation pattern determination random number.

Then, the CPU 90103 outputs a set variable display result notification command and a variable pattern designation command for designating the determined variable pattern, together with the variable start command for designating the variable start of the second special figure.

When the effect control CPU 90120 receives the variation start command for specifying the variation start of the first special figure, the variable display result notification command, and the variation pattern specification command, the effect control CPU 90120 selects the effect control data corresponding to the variation pattern specification command. At the same time, the final stop symbol (final stop symbol) is determined according to the variable display result notification command. Then, the variable display of the decorative symbol is started, and the effect control is executed based on the selected effect control data. Along with this, among the start winning judgment result specification commands (and the start winning fluctuation pattern judgment result specification command) stored in the start winning command storage area for the first special figure, the first storage area (reserved storage number). The start winning judgment result specification command (and the start winning variation pattern judgment result specification command) of the storage area corresponding to = 1 is deleted, and the start winning judgment result specification command (and the start winning) of the storage area after that is deleted. The time fluctuation pattern determination result specification command) is shifted to the previous storage area one by one.

Further, the effect control CPU 90120 stores the establishment timing of the reach state corresponding to the variation pattern in the ROM 90121, and is decorated so that the reach state is established at the establishment timing of the reach state corresponding to the received variation pattern designation command. Controls the variable display of symbols. That is, the effect control CPU 90120 can grasp the establishment timing of the reach state according to the fluctuation pattern.

When the effect control CPU 90120 receives the variation start command for specifying the variation start of the second special figure, the variable display result notification command, and the variation pattern specification command, the effect control CPU 90120 selects the effect control data corresponding to the variation pattern specification command. At the same time, the final stop symbol (final stop symbol) is determined according to the variable display result notification command. Then, the variable display of the decorative symbol is started, and the effect control is executed based on the selected effect control data. Along with this, among the start winning judgment result specification commands (and the start winning variation pattern judgment result specification command) stored in the start winning command storage area for the second special figure, the first storage area (reserved storage number). The start winning judgment result specification command (and the start winning variation pattern judgment result specification command) of the storage area corresponding to = 1 is deleted, and the start winning judgment result specification command (and the start winning) of the storage area after that is deleted. The time fluctuation pattern determination result specification command) is shifted to the previous storage area one by one.

Further, when the first general winning opening switch 9024A to the fourth general winning opening switch 9024D detects that the game ball has won in the first general winning opening 9050A to the fourth general winning opening 9050D, the game ball is detected in any of the general winning openings. A general winning opening designation command for designating whether or not a prize has been won is output from the game control microcomputer 90100 to the effect control board 9012. That is, when the game ball is detected by the first general winning opening switch 9024A, a general winning opening designation command for designating a prize to the first general winning opening 9050A is output, and the game ball is output by the second general winning opening switch 9024B. When detected, a general winning opening designation command for designating a prize to the second general winning opening 9050B is output, and when a game ball is detected by the third general winning opening switch 9024C, the third general winning opening 9050C is entered. A general winning opening designation command for designating a prize is output, and when a game ball is detected by the 4th general winning slot switch 9024D, a general winning slot designation command for specifying a prize for the 4th general winning slot 9050D is output. ..

Therefore, the effect control CPU 90120 can specify the winning of the game ball to the general winning opening and the winning of the game ball to which general winning opening based on the received general winning opening designation command. .. Further, as described above, the effect control CPU 90120 specifies, when the game ball wins in the first start winning opening or the second starting winning opening, which starting winning opening the game ball wins in. It is designed to receive mouth specification commands. As a result, the effect control CPU 90120 stores information that can identify the general winning opening where the winning has occurred and information that can identify the starting winning opening where the winning has occurred in the winning history storage area of the RAM 90122 according to the order in which the winning is generated. It is possible.

The effect control CPU 90120 determines which of the first general winning opening 9050A to the fourth general winning opening 9050D is the general winning opening designated by the received general winning opening designation command (general winning opening won by the game ball). Confirm and confirm whether the starting winning opening (starting winning opening won by the game ball) specified by the received starting winning opening designation command is either the first starting winning opening or the second starting winning opening. , The winning history for each general winning opening and each starting winning opening is stored in the RAM 90122. For example, if the game ball wins in the order of the second general winning opening 9050B, the first starting winning opening, the first general winning opening 9050A, the second starting winning opening, and the third general winning opening 9050C, [the second general winning opening] The history of the winning opening, the first starting winning opening, the first general winning opening, the second starting winning opening, and the third general winning opening] is stored in the winning history storage area of the RAM 90122.

Further, when the winning to the starting winning opening and the winning to the general winning opening occur within a predetermined period, the game control microcomputer 90100 issues a starting winning opening designation command and a starting winning determination result designation command. , You may send it before the general winning opening designation command. For example, detection by any of the starting port switches 9022A and the second starting port switch 9022B, and by any of the general winning port switches 9024A to the fourth general winning port switch 9024D. When the detection is confirmed almost at the same time (for example, within the same interrupt processing), the game control microcomputer 90100 uses the start winning opening designation command and the starting winning opening determination result designation command as the general winning slot designation command. It is better to give priority to sending first. With such a transmission order, it is understood that the effect control CPU 90120 has already received the start winning opening designation command and the starting winning opening determination result designation command when the general winning opening designation command is received. It is possible, and as a specific effect to be executed based on the winning to the general winning opening, it is possible to execute the look-ahead notice effect based on the previously received start winning determination result designation command.

If the general winning opening is awarded multiple times within a predetermined period, the game control microcomputer 90100 shall transmit a plurality of general winning opening designation commands according to a predetermined priority. do. For example, when the detection by the first general winning opening switch 9024A and the detection by the second general winning opening switch 9024B are confirmed almost simultaneously (for example, within the same interrupt processing), the game control microcomputer 90100 , You may give priority to the general winning opening designation command that specifies the winning to the general winning opening that is more difficult to win. In addition, if the number of prize balls to be awarded differs depending on the general winning opening, the general winning opening designation command that specifies the winning to the general winning opening with a larger number of winning openings may be given priority and sent first. good.

Further, when the count switch 9023 detects that the game ball has won the big prize opening, the big winning opening winning command specifying that the game ball has won the big winning opening is issued from the game control microcomputer 90100 to the effect control board 9012. Is output to. Therefore, the effect control CPU 90120 can specify the winning of the game ball to the large winning opening based on the received large winning opening winning command, and the winning history to the starting winning opening and the winning to the general winning opening described above can be specified. Similar to the history, it is possible to store the winning history for the large winning opening in the winning history storage area.

Further, the effect control CPU 90120 receives a jackpot start designation command for designating the start of the jackpot gaming state until receiving a jackpot end designation command for designating the end of the jackpot gaming state. It is possible to distinguish between the number of times the command is received and the number of times the general winning opening designation command is received. As a result, the number of winnings to the big winning opening and the number of winnings to the general winning opening can be separately aggregated during the period controlled by the jackpot gaming state, and the aggregation result is shown in the image display device as shown in FIG. 48. It is also possible to display it on 905.

Further, when the game ball is launched in the game area 9010, the game ball usually wins a prize in any of the start winning opening, the general winning opening, and the large winning opening at a certain frequency. If the variable display of the decorative symbol is not executed and the game ball has not won a prize in any of the starting winning opening, the general winning opening, and the large winning opening for a predetermined period (for example, 1 minute), the game is played. There is a high possibility that the person is in a non-gaming state in which the player is not playing a game. Therefore, the effect control CPU 90120 does not execute the variable display of the decorative symbol, and receives the start winning opening designation command, the general winning opening designation command, and the large winning opening winning command for a predetermined period (for example, 1 minute). If not, it is possible to determine that the game has ended.

FIG. 44A is a diagram showing an example of the winning number information managed by the winning number management table stored in the RAM 90122. In this winning number management table, the number of winnings to each general winning opening of the first general winning opening 9050A to the fourth general winning opening 9050D is stored. The effect control CPU 90120 can total the number of winnings to each general winning opening for each gaming state based on the big hit start designation command, the big hit end designation command, the game state designation command, and the general winning opening designation command. .. The game state specification command specifies the timing at which the game state changes (the game state specification command in this case specifies the controlled game state, and is transmitted at the end of the jackpot game state or the end of the time saving state, for example. ) Or, it is transmitted at the timing when the variable display of the special symbol is started (the game state specification command in this case specifies the game state when the special symbol game is executed).

In this example, the number of prizes to the second general winning opening 9050B is 50 (total for the entire period), of which the number of prizes in the normal state is 46, the number of prizes in the jackpot game state is 2, and the number of prizes in the probability change state. Is 1, and the number of prizes in the time-saving state is 1. That is, the number of winnings in the left-handed period is 46, and the number of winnings in the right-handed period is 4. In addition, the total number of winnings to the general winning opening is 108, of which 81 is the winning number in the left-handed period and 27 is the winning number in the right-handed period.

In this way, along with the number of winnings to each general winning opening, the number of winnings in the left-handed period and the number of winnings in the right-handed period are individually stored and displayed on the image display device 905 (or corresponding to the pachinko gaming machine 901). It is transmitted to a game device such as a card unit or a call lamp device provided to be displayed on the display device of the game device, or is transmitted to the information management device and displayed on the display device of the information management device. By doing so, in the amusement park, it is possible to grasp the ease of winning a game ball to each general winning opening and to use it for the maintenance of the game nail. For example, if the number of winnings of a game ball to a general winning opening is excessively large or small, it is estimated that the game nail in the vicinity of the general winning opening is bent or damaged, and maintenance of the game nail is performed. It can be performed.

Winning number information of the winning number management table (number of winnings to each general winning opening, number of winnings to the general winning opening in each game state, number of winnings to the general winning opening in the left-handed period and right-handing period, to the general winning opening (Including the total number of winnings) is displayed on the image display device 905 when the operation unit of the mode changeover switch 9031 is in the second position (in the case of maintenance mode), and is displayed in the case of the first position (in the case of the game mode). Do not show. The clerk at the amusement park switches the mode changeover switch 9031 from the first position to the second position to display the winning number information in the winning number management table, and uses this as a reference to perform maintenance on the game nails and to the general winning opening. Make the winning frequency of game balls appropriate. Then, after the maintenance is completed, the mode changeover switch 9031 is returned from the second position to the first position.

In this embodiment, the winning number information in the winning number management table does not depend on the game state (for example, normal state, probability change state, time saving state, jackpot game state), and the execution state of the special figure game (special symbol). Whether or not the variable display is executed, the number of reserved storages of the special figure game), and the execution status of the normal figure game (whether or not the variable display of the normal symbol is executed, the number of reserved storages of the normal figure game) Regardless of this, the image display device 905 is continuously displayed during the period when the operation unit of the mode changeover switch 9031 is in the second position. However, the present invention is not limited to such a form, and the winning number information in the winning number management table may be displayable on the image display device 905 according to the gaming state, for example, the mode changeover switch 9031. The operation unit is in the second position and can be displayed only in the normal state, and even if the operation unit of the mode changeover switch 9031 is in the second position, it is not displayed in the probability change state, the time saving state, and the big hit game state. You can do it.

Further, the winning number information in the winning number management table may be displayable on the image display device 905 according to the execution status of the special figure game. For example, the operation unit of the mode changeover switch 9031 is in the second position. Even if the variable display of the special symbol is not executed and the reserved memory number of the special symbol game can be displayed only during the period of 0, even if the operation unit of the mode changeover switch 9031 is in the second position. , The period during which the variable display of the special symbol is being executed or the period during which the reserved storage number of the special symbol game is not 0 may not be displayed. Further, the winning number information in the winning number management table may be displayable on the image display device 905 according to the execution status of the normal figure game. For example, the operation unit of the mode changeover switch 9031 is in the second position. Even if the variable display of the normal symbol is not executed and the hold storage number of the normal figure game is 0, it can be displayed only, and the operation unit of the mode changeover switch 9031 is in the second position. , The period during which the variable display of the normal symbol is being executed or the period during which the reserved storage number of the normal symbol game is not 0 may not be displayed.

The winning number information stored in the winning number management table is the setting state of the mode changeover switch 9031, the setting state of the display changeover switch 9032, and the display setting by the operation button 9030 (settings of FIGS. 46 (1) to (3)). It is updated based on the reception of the general winning opening designation command regardless of the setting on the screen). Further, the prize number information stored in the prize number management table is transmitted from the information output terminal of the pachinko gaming machine 901 to a game information management device (for example, a hall computer (not shown) provided in the game hall) after the business of the game hall is closed. Then, the information on the number of winnings for each gaming machine is stored in the gaming information management device for each business day. Further, the winning number information stored in the winning number management table is deleted (reset) based on the execution of a specific effect corresponding to the winning history storage area described above in the winning history storage area. Even if it is not erased, the operation button after the transmission to the game information management device is completed, or in the state where the clerk reset operation (for example, the winning number information of the winning number management table is displayed on the image display device 905) It is erased by the operation of 9030).

For example, the clerk of the amusement park determines the operation button 9030 in the state where the winning number information of the winning number management table is displayed on the image display device 905 (the mode changeover switch 9031 is in the second position (display setting) state). By pressing the time (for example, 2 seconds or more), the number of winnings of all items stored in the winning number management table (the number of winnings of each general winning opening and the total number of winnings of general winning openings) can be reset to 0. It is possible.

FIG. 44B is a diagram showing an example of prize number information managed by the display control table stored in the RAM 90122. In this display control table, the number of winnings to each general winning opening of the first general winning opening 9050A to the fourth general winning opening 9050D is stored. The effect control CPU 90120 can total the number of winnings to each general winning opening based on the general winning opening designation command. In this example, the total number of winnings to the general winning opening is 11, of which the number of winnings to the first general winning opening 9050A is 3, the number of winnings to the second general winning opening 9050B is 5, and the number of winnings to the third general winning opening is 5. The number of prizes for the 9050C is 2, and the number of prizes for the 4th general prize opening 9050D is 1.

As shown in FIG. 45, the information on the number of winnings in the display control table (specifically, the display of the number of objects according to the total number of winnings) is when the operation unit of the display changeover switch 9032 is in the second position (in the display setting). Case), and when the display setting of the general winning number is set by the operation button 9030, the display is displayed on the image display device 905. When the operation unit of the display changeover switch 9032 is in the first position (in the case of non-display setting), the display control table wins a prize regardless of whether or not the display setting of the general prize number is set by the operation button 9030. Number information is not displayed (display is prohibited). Further, even when the operation unit of the display changeover switch 9032 is in the second position (in the case of the display setting), when the display setting of the general winning number is not performed by the operation button 9030 (in the case of the non-display setting). Does not display the winning number information in the display control table.

That is, when the clerk of the game hall sets the display prohibition setting of the winning number information by the display changeover switch 9032, the winning number to the general winning opening is not displayed regardless of the display setting operation of the player. There is. Only when the clerk of the game hall sets the display permission setting of the winning number information by the display changeover switch 9032, the winning number to the general winning opening is displayed according to the display setting operation of the player.

Further, in this embodiment, a specific effect (specific effect A: change result notice effect, specific effect B: look-ahead notice effect) based on the winning of the game ball to the general winning opening is executed. As for the effect, as shown in FIG. 45, the operation unit of the display changeover switch 9032 is in the second position (execution permission setting), and the operation button 9030 is used to set the display of the number of general prizes (execution of the specific effect). It can be executed when the setting) has been performed. When the operation unit of the display changeover switch 9032 is in the first position (execution prohibition setting), it depends on whether or not the display setting of the general winning number (execution setting of the specific effect) is performed by the operation button 9030. No specific effect is executed (execution is prohibited). Even if the operation unit of the display changeover switch 9032 is in the second position (execution permission setting), the general prize number display setting is not performed by the operation button 9030 (non-execution setting). No specific effect is executed.

That is, when the clerk of the game hall sets the execution permission of the specific effect by the display changeover switch 9032, the execution of the specific effect is prohibited regardless of the execution setting operation of the player. Only when the clerk of the game hall sets the execution permission of the specific effect by the display changeover switch 9032, the specific effect can be executed according to the execution setting operation of the player.

As described above, in this embodiment, the setting of whether or not to notify the number of winnings to the general winning opening also serves as the setting of whether or not to execute the specific effect, and the operation means for setting is also common. (Amusement place side: display changeover switch 9032, player side: operation button 9030). Not limited to such a form, whether or not to notify the number of winnings to the general winning opening and whether or not to enable a specific effect may be individually set, and may be set by different operation means. May be.

The winning number information stored in the display control table includes the setting state of the mode changeover switch 9031, the setting state of the display changeover switch 9032, and the display setting by the operation buttons 9030 (settings of FIGS. 46 (1) to (3)). It is updated based on the reception of the general winning opening designation command regardless of the setting on the screen). In addition, the winning number information (the number of winnings to each general winning opening and the total number of winnings) stored in the display control table is such that the winning history of the above-mentioned winning history storage area corresponds to the winning history storage area. Even if it is erased (reset) based on the execution of the effect (A or B), it is not deleted, and when the game end determination is made by the effect control CPU 90120, for example, the variable display of the decorative symbol is executed. It is deleted (reset to 0) when the start winning opening designation command, the general winning opening designation command, and the large winning opening winning command are not received for a predetermined period (for example, 1 minute).

When the number of winnings to each general winning opening and the total number of winnings stored in the display control table are reset to 0 based on the game end determination, the general winning opening displayed on the image display device 905 is displayed. The number of winnings is also reset to 0. For example, on the screen of FIG. 47, which will be described later, the coin-shaped object (winning correspondence display) displayed on the right side of the character of "general winning" is no longer displayed, and the number of displayed objects becomes 0. When the number of winnings to the general winning opening is not displayed on the image display device 905, the number of winnings to each general winning opening and the total number of winnings stored in the display control table are determined to end the game. If it is reset to 0 based on, then, when the number of winnings to the general winning opening is displayed on the image display device 905, the total number of winnings stored in the display control table at that time ( For example, the number of objects corresponding to the total number of winnings) will be displayed.

Further, the clerk or the player of the game hall presses the operation button 9030 in a state where the winning number information of the display control table is displayed on the image display device 905 (a state in which an object corresponding to the total winning number is displayed). By pressing for a predetermined time (for example, 2 seconds or more), the number of winnings of all items stored in the display control table (the total number of winnings of each general winning opening and the total winning of the general winning opening) regardless of the game end determination. The number) can be reset to 0, and the winning number information displayed on the image display device 905 is also reset to 0 (all the displayed objects are deleted).

As shown in FIG. 46, the display setting operation of the player is accepted by operating the operation button 9030 while displaying the demo screen which is not related to the progress of the special figure game and the progress of the normal figure game. A state in which the player is not playing a game (for example, the variable display of the decorative symbol is not executed, and the start winning opening designation command, the general winning opening designation command, and the large winning opening winning command are executed for a predetermined period (for example, 1). In the state of not receiving for more than a minute), the demo screen is displayed on the image display device 905, and the screen of FIG. 46 (1) is displayed at predetermined intervals while the demo screen is being displayed.

On the screen of FIG. 46 (1), the message "Please press the enter button to set the display of the general prize number" is displayed, and an image imitating the operation button 9030 is displayed below it, and the operation button 9030 is pressed. An arrow prompting you to press it is displayed. When the player presses the operation button 9030 according to the instruction, the selection screen of FIG. 46 (2) is displayed. On the selection screen, an icon containing the characters "display" and an icon containing the characters "do not display" are displayed, and the message "OK after selecting with the jog dial" is displayed, and the operation button 9030 ( An arrow prompting you to press the jog dial) after rotating it is displayed.

To display the number of winnings in the general winning opening, rotate the operation button 9030 (jog dial) to the left to select an icon containing the characters "display" and enter the general winning opening. To hide the number of winnings, rotate the operation button 9030 (jog dial) to the right to select an icon containing the characters "not displayed". In this example, the icon containing the word "display" is selected.

Then, when the operation button 9030 is pressed with the icon including the character "display" selected in FIG. 46 (2), as shown in FIG. 46 (3), "the number of general prizes is displayed." A message is displayed, and the screen returns to the normal demo screen shown in FIG. 46 (4). By this setting operation, as shown in FIGS. 47 and 48, the number of winnings to the general winning opening can be displayed on the image display device 905, and the player can grasp this. Here, it is assumed that the total number of winnings (for example, the number of objects corresponding to the total number of winnings in FIG. 47) stored in the display control table at the time of completing the setting operation is immediately displayed. The total number of winnings is not displayed immediately after the setting operation is completed, but is displayed on the image display device 905 when the variable display of the special symbol is executed after the setting operation is completed (when the game end determination is no longer performed). You may do so.

On the other hand, if the operation button 9030 is pressed with the icon including the character "not displayed" selected in FIG. 46 (2), the message "The general prize number is not displayed." Is displayed, and FIG. 46 (4). Return to the normal demo screen. By this setting operation, the number of winnings to the general winning opening is not displayed on the image display device 905.

Here, in this embodiment, only when the operation unit of the display changeover switch 9032 is in the second position, that is, on the game hall side, the winning number information stored in the display control table is transmitted to the image display device 905. The image display device 905 has a screen for setting whether or not to display the number of winnings in the general winning opening as shown in FIGS. 46 (1) to 46 (3) only when the display is permitted. It shall be displayed. When the operation unit of the display changeover switch 9032 is in the first position, that is, when the game hall side does not permit the image display device 905 to display the winning number information stored in the display control table. As shown in FIGS. 46 (1) to 46 (3), the screen itself for selecting whether or not to display the number of winnings in the general winning opening is not displayed. As a result, as shown in FIG. 45 described above, it is determined that the number of winnings to the general winning opening is not displayed only by the non-display setting of the display changeover switch 9032 regardless of the display setting / non-display setting of the player. Will be done.

In this way, it is possible to reflect the intentions of the game field and the player regarding whether or not to display the number of winnings of the game ball to the general winning opening. In this embodiment, the player sets whether or not to display the number of winnings in the general winning opening only when the operation unit of the display changeover switch 9032 is set to the second position (display position) on the game hall side. It is possible. That is, in this embodiment, the intention of the playground is prioritized over the intention of the player. Therefore, if the player does not want the player to know the number of winnings in the general winning opening, it is preferable to set the operation unit of the display changeover switch 9032 to the first position (non-display position).

Further, when the intention of the game hall is prioritized over the intention of the player, even though the operation unit of the display changeover switch 9032 is set to the first position (non-display position) on the game hall side (in addition, Although it has already been decided not to display the number of winnings to the general winning opening regardless of the setting on the player side), on the player side as shown in FIGS. 46 (1) to (3). When the setting screen is displayed, it is misunderstood that the player can display the number of winnings in the general winning opening by his / her own setting operation.

In order to prevent such misidentification, in this embodiment, when the operation unit of the display changeover switch 9032 is set to the first position (non-display position) on the game hall side (generally regardless of the setting on the player side). When it has already been decided not to display the number of winnings in the winning opening), the setting screen on the player side as shown in FIGS. 46 (1) to (3) is not displayed. That is, the notification itself of "it is possible to display the number of winnings to the general winning opening according to the setting operation on the player side" is not performed.

Display settings on the game hall side (the operation unit of the display changeover switch 9032 is the second position) and display settings on the player side (icons including the characters "display" on the selection screen of FIG. 46 (2)). When it is decided to display the number of winnings in the general winning opening by pressing the operation button 9030 in the selected state), as shown in FIG. 47 (1), at the lower part of the screen of the image display device 905. The characters "general prize" are displayed. Then, when the game ball wins in the general winning opening (1st general winning opening 9050A to 4th general winning opening 9050D), as shown in FIG. 47 (2), a coin-shaped object is to the right of the character of "general winning opening". (Prize correspondence display) is displayed.

The number of coin-shaped objects displayed on the image display device 905 corresponds to the total number of winnings in the display control table described above. As shown in FIG. 47 (3), each time a game ball wins a prize in the general winning opening (1st general winning opening 9050A to 4th general winning opening 9050D), the total number of winnings in the display control table is added by 1. As a result, the number of coin-shaped objects also increases. Further, the coin-shaped object contains the number "10", which indicates the number of prize balls given when the game ball wins a prize in the general winning opening. Therefore, the player can also grasp the number of prize balls given according to the winning of the general winning opening. The number of prize balls given when a game ball wins a prize in each winning opening (first starting winning opening, second starting winning opening, general winning opening, large winning opening) is stored in ROM 90121 in advance. And.

In this way, by displaying the objects corresponding to the winning of the game ball to the general winning opening and increasing the number of the displayed objects according to the increase in the number of winnings, the player can use the general winning opening. It is possible to easily grasp that the game ball has won a prize and the number of game balls won in the general winning opening.

When the game end determination is made by the effect control CPU 90120, the number of winnings and the total number of winnings of the game balls to each general winning opening stored in the display control table are reset to 0 as described above. As a result, as shown in FIG. 47 (4), all the coin-shaped objects displayed on the right side of the characters of "general prize" are deleted. That is, it is notified that the number of winnings to the general winning opening is 0.

In this way, when the game end determination is made, that is, when it is specified that the gaming machine is in a non-gaming state, the number of winnings to the notified general winning opening is reset to 0 (general). By displaying that there is no prize in the winning slot), it is possible to prevent the player who subsequently plays the game with the gaming machine from knowing the number of winnings in the general winning slot. ..

In this embodiment, by setting the condition for determining the end of the game and the condition for shifting to the demo screen described above as a common condition, the number of winnings to the general winning opening notified at the time of transition to the demo screen is 0. Will be reset to. In this way, when the demo screen is displayed, the number of winnings to the notified general winning openings may be reset to 0.

As described above, when the operation unit of the display changeover switch 9032 is set to the first position (non-display position), the operation unit of the display changeover switch 9032 is set to the second position (display position). When is set not to display the general winning number on the player setting screen (FIG. 46), the display control for increasing the object to be displayed for each winning in the general winning opening shown in FIG. 47 is not executed. .. In these cases, the characters "general winning number" shown in FIG. 47 are not displayed, and the coin-shaped object itself is also displayed regardless of the winning number to the general winning opening (total winning number in the display control table). Do not show.

If the number of objects (referred to as normal objects) to be displayed for each prize in the general winning opening is increased, the screen becomes difficult to see as the number of winnings increases, so that the number of normal objects has reached a predetermined number (for example, 10). In this case, it is preferable to display one special object (for example, an object having a mode different from that of the normal object including the number "100") instead of the predetermined number of normal objects. As a result, it is possible to notify the predetermined number of winnings and the corresponding number of prize balls in the display area of one special object without requiring the display area of a predetermined number of normal objects.

Further, in this embodiment, an example is shown in which the displayed object is increased by 1 for each winning to the general winning opening, but the present invention is not limited to such a form, and a plurality of objects to the general winning opening are shown. The object may be displayed according to the number of winnings. For example, the displayed object may be incremented by 1 for every 5 winnings in the general winning opening.

In addition, the display setting on the game hall side (the operation unit of the display changeover switch 9032 is the second position) and the display setting on the player side (including the characters "display" on the selection screen of FIG. 46 (2)). When it is decided to display the number of winnings to the general winning opening by pressing the operation button 9030 with the icon selected), as shown in FIG. 48, the period controlled to the jackpot gaming state. In, the number of winnings to the general winning opening will be displayed together with the number of winnings to the large winning opening.

FIG. 48 (1) is a screen displayed on the image display device 905 when the jackpot game state is controlled. When the first round game is started, the characters "general winning number" are displayed, and on the right side, the number of winnings to the general winning opening in the big hit game state is displayed, and the "large winning number" is displayed. Character is displayed, and the number of winnings to the big winning opening in the big hit game state is displayed on the right side. In this example, the number of winnings to the general winning opening in the jackpot game state is still 0, and the number of winning balls given when the game ball wins to the general winning opening is 10 [0 × 10]. Is displayed. Further, since the number of winnings to the big winning opening in the big hit game state is still 0 and the number of winning balls given when the game ball wins to the big winning opening is 15, it is displayed as [0 × 15]. Has been done. Further, in the big hit game state, the number of prize balls given according to the winning of the general winning opening [0 × 10] and the number of winning balls given according to the winning of the big winning opening [0 × 15]. Since the total number of and is 0, it is displayed as [total 0 balls].

As shown in FIG. 48 (2), as a result of performing the first round game, the game ball wins seven times in the large winning opening (special variable winning ball device 907), and the general winning opening (first general winning opening 9050A). -The number of general prizes has become 1 and the number of large prizes has been updated to 7 due to the fact that the game ball has won once in the 4th general prize opening 9050D). In addition, the total number of prize balls [1 × 10] given according to the winning of the general winning opening and the number of prize balls [7 × 15] given according to the winning of the large winning opening is 115. Therefore, it is displayed as [115 balls in total]. The number of prize balls given according to the winning of the general winning opening [1 x 10 = 10 balls] and the number of prize balls given according to the winning of the large winning opening [7 x 15 = 105 balls]. And may be displayed individually.

Further, as shown in FIG. 48 (3), as a result of performing the second to fifteenth (final) round games, the game balls are totaled in the big winning opening (special variable winning ball device 907) in the big hit game state. The number of general prizes was 3 and the number of large prizes was updated to 105 because the game balls won a total of 3 times in the general prize openings (1st general prize openings 9050A to 4th general prize openings 9050D) after winning 105 times. ing. In addition, in the big hit game state, the number of prize balls given according to the winning of the general winning opening [3 × 10] and the number of prize balls given according to the winning of the big winning opening [105 × 15]. Since the total number of and is 1605, it is displayed as [1605 balls in total].

In this way, by displaying the number of winnings to the general winning opening separately from the number of winnings to the big winning opening during the period controlled by the jackpot gaming state, the player can only display the number of winnings to the big winning opening. However, I am also interested in the number of prizes in the general prize openings. In addition, by displaying the number of prize balls according to the number of prizes in the large prize opening and the number of prize balls according to the number of prizes in the general prize opening separately, the player can win the prize in the large prize opening. You will be interested not only in the number of prize balls given according to the number of prize balls, but also in the number of prize balls given in response to the prizes in the general winning openings.

It should be noted that the number of winnings to the general winning opening in the probabilistic state or the time saving state may be displayed on the image display device 905, not limited to the number of winnings to the general winning opening during the period controlled by the jackpot gaming state. The number of winnings to the general winning opening in the normal state may be displayed on the image display device 905. Further, the number of winnings to the general winning opening in the right-handed period (big hit game state, probable change state, or time-saving state) may be displayed on the image display device 905, and the general winning in the left-handed period (normal state) may be displayed. The number of winnings in the mouth may be displayed on the image display device 905. Further, the image display device 905 may display the number of winnings in the general winning opening during the period in which the variable display of the special symbol is executed a predetermined number of times (for example, the number of times corresponding to the reserved storage number of the special drawing game).

As described above, when the operation unit of the display changeover switch 9032 is set to the first position (non-display position), the operation unit of the display changeover switch 9032 is set to the second position (display position). When is set not to display the general winning number on the player setting screen (FIG. 46), the number of winnings to the general winning opening during the period controlled by the jackpot gaming state shown in FIG. 48 is displayed. Display control is not executed. In these cases, the character itself of "general winning number" shown in FIG. 48 is not displayed, and the number of winnings to the general winning opening and the number of prize balls corresponding thereto during the period controlled by the jackpot gaming state. , And the total number of prize balls corresponding to the number of winnings in the general winning opening and the number of winning balls corresponding to the number of winnings in the large winning opening are not displayed. Only the number of prizes to the large prize opening and the number of prize balls corresponding to the number of prizes are displayed.

In the example shown in FIG. 47, an example in which the number of prize balls (10) corresponding to the general winning opening is displayed on the object has been described, but the image display device 905 has the number of winning balls corresponding to the general winning opening. It may not be displayed. Further, in the example shown in FIG. 48, an example in which the number of prize balls (10) corresponding to the general winning opening and the number of winning balls given according to the winning to the general winning opening are displayed has been described. These may not be displayed on the device 905.

In this way, it is possible to display only the number of winnings to the general winning opening and not to display the number of prize balls corresponding to the general winning opening or the number of prize balls given according to the winning to the general winning opening. .. With such a configuration, when the number of prize balls corresponding to the general winning openings is changed in the design process of the gaming machine, the display information of the image display device 905 must be changed according to the change. It is possible to prevent the situation of disappearing. On the contrary, only the number of prize balls given according to the winning of the general winning opening may be displayed.

In this embodiment, when the operation unit of the display changeover switch 9032 is set to the first position (non-display position) on the game hall side, the player setting shown in FIGS. 46 (1) to 46 (3). An example in which the screen itself is not displayed (the player is not notified that the number of winnings can be switched between display and non-display) has been described, but the display changeover switch 9032 is not limited to this form. Even when the operation unit is set to the first position (non-display position), the player setting screens shown in FIGS. 46 (1) to (3) are displayed (the number of winnings can be switched between display and non-display). (Notify the player that this is the case).

In such a configuration, even if the player is set to display the number of winnings to the general winning opening on the player setting screen of FIGS. 46 (1) to (3), even if the player is set to display the number of winnings to the general winning opening. The effect control CPU 90120 displays the number of winnings in the general winning opening on the image display device 905 based on the fact that the operation unit of the display changeover switch 9032 is set to the first position (non-display position) on the playground side. Do not (priority is given to the playground setting). At this time, the image display device 905 may display that the number of winnings cannot be displayed due to the priority of the playground setting.

When the operation unit of the display changeover switch 9032 is set to the first position (non-display position), the player setting screen of FIG. 46 (1) is displayed (the number of winnings can be displayed / hidden). This is notified to the player), but the player's setting operation may be invalidated. For example, even if the operation button 9030 is pressed on the player setting screen of FIG. 46 (1), the screen does not move to the selection screen of FIG. 46 (2), and the number of winnings to the general winning opening is displayed. It may not be possible to select whether or not.

As described above, in this embodiment, the game field setting is prioritized over the player setting, but conversely, the player setting may be prioritized over the game field setting. That is, regardless of whether the operation unit of the display changeover switch 9032 is in the first position (non-display position) or the second position (display position), the player setting screens of FIGS. 46 (1) to (3) are displayed. When the operation button 9030 is pressed with the icon including the character "display" selected on the selection screen of FIG. 46 (2) so that it can be displayed on the image display device 905, the number of winnings to the general winning opening is displayed on the image display device. When the operation button 9030 is pressed while the icon displayed on 905 (display control of FIGS. 47 and 48 is executed) and the icon including the character "not displayed" is selected on the selection screen of FIG. 46 (2), a general prize is awarded. The number of winnings in the mouth may not be displayed on the image display device 905 (the display control of FIGS. 47 and 48 may not be executed).

Further, the game hall setting and the player setting may be given the same priority, and it may be determined whether or not to display the number of winnings to the general winning opening according to the order of the accepted setting operations. That is, it may be decided whether or not to display the number of winnings in the general winning opening with priority given to the setting operation (latest setting operation) received last. For example, even when the operation unit of the display changeover switch 9032 is set to the first position (non-display position), the general winning opening is subsequently won on the player setting screens of FIGS. 46 (1) to 46 (3). When the number is set to be displayed, the number of winnings to the general winning opening is displayed (display control of FIGS. 47 and 48 is executed). Further, even if the player setting screens of FIGS. 46 (1) to 46 (3) are set so that the number of winnings to the general winning opening is not displayed, the operation unit of the display changeover switch 9032 is subsequently moved to the second position. When (display position) is set, the number of winnings to the general winning opening is displayed (display control of FIGS. 47 and 48 is executed). On the other hand, even when the operation unit of the display changeover switch 9032 is set to the second position (display position), the number of winnings to the general winning opening is subsequently displayed on the player setting screens of FIGS. 46 (1) to 46 (3). When is set not to display, the number of winnings to the general winning opening is not displayed (the display control of FIGS. 47 and 48 is not executed). Further, even when the player setting screen of FIGS. 46 (1) to 46 (3) is set to display the number of winnings to the general winning opening, the operation unit of the display changeover switch 9032 is subsequently set to the first position. When (non-display position) is set, the number of winnings to the general winning opening is not displayed (the display control of FIGS. 47 and 48 is not executed).

Further, in this embodiment, it is possible to set whether or not the number of winnings to the general winning opening is displayed on the image display device 905 by operating the display changeover switch 9032 by the clerk of the game hall, and the player. By operating the operation button 9030, it is possible to set whether or not to display the number of winnings in the general winning opening on the image display device 905. By operating the switch 9032, it is possible to set whether or not to display the number of winnings to the general winning opening on the image display device 905, while on the player side, the number of winnings to the general winning opening is displayed on the image display device 905. It may not be possible to set whether or not to display (for example, the setting screen on the player side as shown in FIGS. 46 (1) to (3) is not provided). In this way, it may be possible to set whether or not to display the number of winnings in the general winning opening on the image display device 905 only on the amusement park side.

On the contrary, by operating the operation button 9030, the player (and the clerk of the game hall) can set whether or not to display the number of winnings in the general winning opening on the image display device 905. On the other hand, it is possible not to provide a means (for example, not to provide a display changeover switch 9032) that allows only the amusement park side to set whether or not to display the number of winnings to the general winning opening on the image display device 905. In such a configuration, whether or not the player and the clerk of the game hall display the number of winnings in the general winning opening on the image display device 905 by a common setting operation (operation of the operation button 9030). It can be set. In this way, it may be possible for the player and the game hall to set whether or not to display the number of winnings in the general winning opening on the image display device 905 by a common setting operation.

Further, in this embodiment, the winning number information stored in the winning number management table is displayed on the image display device 905, but the winning number information stored in the winning number management table is pachinko. Information is displayed by being transmitted to an information display device provided corresponding to the gaming machine 901, for example, a display device of a card unit provided on the side of the pachinko gaming machine 901, or a call lamp device provided above the pachinko gaming machine 901. It may be displayed on the device. Further, the winning number information stored in the winning number management table is transmitted to an information management device (for example, a hall computer) that manages the game information of the pachinko gaming machine 901, and the general winning opening for each gaming machine is transmitted in the information management device. The number of winnings may be stored and displayed on the display device. In addition, as a configuration in which the mode changeover switch 9031 is not provided in the pachinko gaming machine 901, the winning number information stored in the winning number management table is not displayed on the gaming machine (image display device 905), and the information display device or the information display device It may be displayed only in the information management device.

In this embodiment, the winning number information stored in the winning number management table is displayed on the image display device 905 by setting the mode changeover switch 9031, and is stored in the display control table by setting the display changeover switch 9032. An example in which the winning number information can be displayed on the image display device 905 has been described. As described above, the winning number management table and the display control table are not provided with individual switches for display control. A common switch for performing display control of both the number management table and the display control table may be provided. For example, by setting the common switch as a display setting, both the winning number information stored in the winning number management table and the winning number information stored in the display control table are displayed on the image display device 905, and the common switch is used. By setting the non-display setting, neither the winning number information stored in the winning number management table nor the winning number information stored in the display control table may be displayed on the image display device 905.

In FIG. 49 (A), when a special symbol (missing symbol) other than a specific special symbol (big hit symbol) is stopped and displayed as a definite special symbol, it is determined by the main board 9011 (microcomputer for game control 90100). The out-of-order fluctuation pattern is illustrated. Further, FIG. 49B exemplifies a jackpot variation pattern determined by the main board 9011 (game control microcomputer 90100) when a specific special symbol (big hit symbol) is stopped and displayed as a confirmed special symbol. Has been done. Since the special figure fluctuation time is set for each fluctuation pattern, the effect control CPU 90120 that has received the variation pattern designation command can execute the effect according to the special figure variation time.

Among the out-of-reach variation patterns, PX001 and PX002 are variation patterns that are non-reach out-of-reach effects, PX003 is a variation pattern that is a normal reach-out effect, and PX004 is a super-reach-out effect. It is a fluctuation pattern. Among the jackpot fluctuation patterns, PY003 is a variation pattern that is an effect mode of a normal reach jackpot, and PY004 is a variation pattern that is an effect mode of a super reach jackpot. Here, the fluctuation pattern of the super reach is a fluctuation pattern in which the battle effect is executed after the reach state is established. The fluctuation pattern of the normal reach is a fluctuation pattern in which the battle effect is not executed after the reach state is established.

The battle production is a production that suggests whether or not a ally character and an enemy character battle and win or lose a big hit. In PX004, which is a fluctuation pattern of out of super reach, a defeat effect is executed in which a ally character is defeated by an enemy character, whereas in PY004, which is a fluctuation pattern of a super reach jackpot, a ally character wins over an enemy character. The production is executed.

As described above, the effect control CPU 90120 receives the variable display result notification command and the variable pattern designation command when the start condition is satisfied and the variable display of the special figure is executed in the game control microcomputer 90100. As a result, when the variable display of the special symbol is executed (before the stop display of the confirmed special symbol), the specific special symbol (big hit symbol) is stopped and displayed as the confirmed special symbol of the variable display (that is, the jackpot symbol). It is possible to execute a fluctuation result notice effect for notifying that the game state is controlled).

In the variation result advance notice effect shown in FIG. 50 (a), the variation announcement effect of the first aspect in which only the sound effect in which the voice "Now is a chance!" Is output from the speakers 908L and 908R is executed, and the voice effect are combined. It is possible to execute the fluctuation advance notice effect of the second aspect in which the accessory effect in which the movable accessory 901000 operates (rotating operation and lighting) is executed. Due to such a difference in the effect mode, it is possible to suggest the possibility that the jackpot symbol is derived and displayed as the variable display result of the variable display currently being executed (the start condition is satisfied).

The effect control CPU 90120 is based on the random number for determining the advance notice effect extracted from the random number circuit 90124 when the execution condition of the specific effect (specific effect A: change result advance notice effect) based on the winning of the general winning opening is satisfied. The mode of the variation result notice effect is determined. Specifically, at the timing when the game ball wins in the general winning opening (the timing when the winning condition based on the winning in the general winning opening is satisfied), the mode of the variation result notice effect is determined, and the determined mode is determined. The fluctuation result notice effect is executed at. As will be described later, if the variable display of the special symbol (variable display of the decorative symbol accompanying the variable display) is not executed, the execution of the variable result advance notice effect is suspended or the variable result advance notice effect is performed. Do not execute.

For example, if the variable display result (variable display result of the currently executed variable display) specified by the last received variable display result notification command specifies "missing", the voice effect is produced at a rate of 80%. The change notice effect of the first aspect accompanied by only is executed, and the change notice effect of the second aspect accompanied by the voice effect and the character effect is executed at a rate of 20%. On the other hand, when the variable display result (variable display result of the variable display currently being executed) specified by the variable display result notification command received last specifies "big hit", the voice effect is performed at a rate of 25%. The change notice effect of the first aspect accompanied by only is executed, and the change notice effect of the second aspect accompanied by the voice effect and the character effect is executed at a rate of 75%.

Further, as described above, the effect control CPU 90120 receives a start winning opening designation command and a starting winning prize when an effective starting winning entry to the first starting winning opening or the second starting winning opening occurs in the game control microcomputer 90100. Receives the time judgment result specification command. As a result, before the start condition of the special symbol is satisfied, a specific special symbol (big hit symbol) is stopped and displayed as a definite special symbol of variable display that has not been executed yet (that is, it is controlled to the jackpot game state). ) Is available for pre-reading notice.

In the look-ahead notice effect shown in FIG. 50 (b), in the look-ahead notice effect of the first aspect in which only the sound effect in which the voice "Immediate chance!" Is output from the speakers 908L and 908R is executed, and the voice effect, the movable combination It is possible to execute the pre-reading advance notice effect of the second aspect in which the accessory effect in which the object 901000 operates (rotational operation and lighting) is executed. Due to such a difference in the effect mode, it is possible to suggest the possibility that the jackpot symbol may be derived and displayed as a variable display result of the variable display in which the start condition is satisfied but the start condition is not satisfied. There is.

The effect control CPU 90120 reads ahead based on the random number for determining the advance notice effect extracted from the random number circuit 90124 when the execution condition of the specific effect (specific effect B: look-ahead advance notice effect) based on the winning of the general winning opening is satisfied. Determine the mode of the notice production. Specifically, at the timing when the game ball wins in the general winning opening (the timing when the winning condition based on the winning in the general winning opening is satisfied), the mode of the look-ahead notice effect is determined, and the determined mode is used. A look-ahead notice effect is executed. As will be described later, if the number of reserved memories is 0, the execution of the look-ahead notice effect is suspended or the look-ahead notice effect is not executed.

For example, if the start winning judgment result specification command stored in the start winning command storage area does not include the start winning judgment result specification command that specifies "big hit" (all start winning that specifies "missing"). In the case of the time determination result designation command), the look-ahead advance notice effect of the first aspect accompanied only by the sound effect is executed at a rate of 85%, and the look-ahead advance notice effect of the second aspect accompanied by the sound effect and the accessory effect is executed at a rate of 15%. Perform a look-ahead notice effect. On the other hand, when the start winning judgment result specification command stored in the start winning command storage area includes the start winning judgment result specification command for specifying "big hit", the voice effect is performed at a rate of 10%. The pre-reading notice effect of the first aspect accompanied by only is executed, and the pre-reading notice effect of the second aspect accompanied by the voice effect and the character effect is executed at a rate of 90%.

In this embodiment, the effect control CPU 90120 can execute a specific effect executed based on the winning of the game ball to the general winning opening. The variable result notice effect for notifying whether or not the display result of the variable display being executed is a jackpot symbol is executed as the specific effect A in this embodiment. In addition, the look-ahead notice effect for notifying whether or not the display result of the variable display for which the start condition is not satisfied becomes a big hit symbol, that is, whether or not the reserved memory includes the one determined to be a big hit is performed. It is executed as a specific effect B in the form.

In this embodiment, the setting of whether or not to notify the number of winnings to the general winning opening also serves as the setting of whether or not the specific effect can be executed, and the number of winnings to the general winning opening is notified. When the setting is made (when the operation unit of the display changeover switch 9032 is in the second position (execution permission setting), and the operation button 9030 is used to set the display setting of the general winning number (execution setting of the specific effect). Only when this is done), the effect control CPU 90120 can execute a specific effect.

As described above, the effect control CPU 90120 stores the winning history of the winning opening designated by the received command in the winning history storage area of the RAM 90122 each time the general winning opening designation command and the starting winning opening designation command are received. However, this winning history storage area is provided for each specific effect. That is, in this embodiment, the winning history storage area corresponding to the specific effect A and the winning history storage area corresponding to the specific effect B are separately provided, for example, the first general winning opening 9050A, the second. When a prize is generated in the order of the general winning opening 9050B, the first starting winning opening, the second starting winning opening, the third general winning opening 9050C, and the fourth general winning opening 9050D, the winning history storage area corresponding to the specific effect A and the winning history storage area Winning history corresponding to the specific effect B Winning history of [1st general winning opening, 2nd general winning opening, 1st starting winning opening, 2nd starting winning opening, 3rd general winning opening, 4th] in each of the winning history storage areas Will be remembered.

In the effect mode in which only the specific effect A can be executed, the effect control CPU 90120 stores the winning history in the winning history storage area corresponding to the specific effect A (timing when a prize is generated in any of the winning openings). In), it is confirmed whether or not the winning condition is satisfied, and the execution of the specific effect A is decided based on the fact that the winning condition is satisfied. Further, in the effect mode in which only the specific effect B can be executed, each time the prize history is stored in the prize history storage area corresponding to the specific effect B (at the timing when a prize is generated in any of the prize openings), a prize is won. It is confirmed whether or not the condition is satisfied, and the execution of the specific effect B is determined based on the fact that the winning condition is satisfied. Further, in the effect mode in which the specific effect A and the specific effect B can be executed, each time the prize history is stored in the prize history storage area corresponding to the specific effect A and the prize history storage area corresponding to the specific effect B (any one of them). (At the timing when a prize is awarded to the prize opening), it is confirmed whether or not the prize condition corresponding to the specific effect A is satisfied in the prize history of the prize history storage area corresponding to the specific effect A, and the specific effect A is supported. The execution of the specific effect A is decided based on the fact that the winning condition is satisfied, and it is confirmed whether or not the winning condition corresponding to the specific effect B is satisfied in the winning history of the winning history storage area corresponding to the specific effect B. , The execution of the specific effect B is determined based on the fact that the winning conditions corresponding to the specific effect B are satisfied.

Further, when the execution of the specific effect A (variation result notice effect) is determined based on the establishment of the winning condition, the effect control CPU 90120 sets the specific effect A execution flag. Then, when the variable display of the special symbol (variable display of the decorative symbol accompanying the variable display) is executed at the timing when the winning condition is satisfied, as described above, the specific effect A according to the variable display result is executed. The mode (sound effect only, or both the sound effect and the accessory effect) is determined, the variation result advance notice effect of the determined mode is executed, and the specific effect A execution flag is deleted. That is, the specific effect A is executed at the timing when the game ball wins the general winning opening without suspending the change result advance notice effect.

On the other hand, if the variable display of the special symbol (variable display of the decorative symbol accompanying this) is not executed at the timing when the winning condition is satisfied, the target of the variation result notice effect does not exist, so the execution of the specific effect A is executed. Is put on hold and the specific effect A execution flag is left set. The effect control CPU 90120 can grasp that the specific effect A is determined to be executed by the specific effect A execution flag being set, but the specific effect A is not executed and is in a pending state. It has become. Then, when the start condition of the variable display of the special symbol (variable display of the decorative symbol accompanying the variable display) is satisfied, the mode of the specific effect A is determined based on the variable display result of the variable display to be executed, and the state is set to the hold state. The specific effect A that has been set is executed, and the set specific effect A execution flag is deleted.

Not limited to such a form, if the variable display of the special symbol (variable display of the decorative symbol accompanying the variable display) is not executed at the timing when the winning condition is satisfied, the execution of the specific effect A is suspended. The execution of the specific effect A may be stopped without any reason, and the specific effect A may not be executed even when the start condition of the variable display is satisfied thereafter.

Further, the effect control CPU 90120 sets the specific effect B execution flag when the execution of the specific effect B (look-ahead notice effect) is determined based on the establishment of the winning condition. Then, when the number of reserved storages (hereinafter referred to as the total number of the first reserved storages and the second reserved storages) is 1 or more at the timing when the winning condition is satisfied, as described above, 1 The mode of the specific effect B (only the voice effect or both the sound effect and the character effect) is determined according to the above-mentioned start winning determination result, the pre-reading notice effect of the determined mode is executed, and the specific effect is performed. B Clear the execution flag. That is, the specific effect B is executed at the timing when the game ball wins the general winning opening without suspending the look-ahead notice effect.

On the other hand, when the number of reserved memories is 0 at the timing when the winning condition is satisfied, since the target of the look-ahead notice effect does not exist, the execution of the specific effect B is suspended and the specific effect B execution flag is set. Make it a state. The effect control CPU 90120 can grasp that the specific effect B is determined to be executed by the specific effect B execution flag being set, but the specific effect B is not executed and is in a pending state. It has become. Then, when the starting condition is satisfied (when the number of reserved memories becomes 1 or more) due to the occurrence of a prize in the starting winning opening, the mode of the specific effect B is determined based on the starting winning determination result. The specific effect B that has been in the pending state is executed, and the set specific effect B execution flag is deleted.

Not limited to such a form, if the number of reserved storages is 0 at the timing when the winning condition is satisfied, the execution of the specific effect B is stopped without suspending the execution of the specific effect B, and then the execution of the specific effect B is stopped. Even when the start condition is satisfied and the number of reserved storages is 1 or more, the specific effect B may not be executed.

Further, when the power supply to the pachinko gaming machine 901 is stopped (for example, when a power failure is detected), the effect control CPU 90120 has a prize history storage area (a prize history storage area corresponding to the specific effect A and a prize history storage area). All the winning history stored in the winning history storage area corresponding to the specific effect B and the specific effect execution flag (specific effect A execution flag and specific effect B execution flag) are deleted. As a result, power is supplied to the pachinko gaming machine 901 during the execution of the specific effect (variation result advance notice effect, look-ahead advance notice effect), or in a state where the specific effect has not yet been executed after the execution of the specific effect is decided. Is stopped, and then the power supply is restarted, but the specific effect that was being executed or the specific effect that was decided to be executed is not executed again. That is, during a predetermined period after the power supply to the pachinko gaming machine 901 is started, the winning history and the specific effect execution flag are erased so that the specific effect is not executed. When it is confirmed that the winning conditions have been satisfied based on the winning history since the power supply was started, a new specific effect is executed.

[First production form]
In the first effect mode shown in FIG. 51, the effect control CPU 90120 has a game ball in any of the first general winning openings 9050A to the fourth general winning openings 9050D when the gaming state is (1) the normal state. Each time a prize is won, a prize condition (which is the first prize condition) is established. When the first winning condition is satisfied, it is determined whether or not the specific effect is executed based on the random number for determining the execution of the specific effect extracted from the random number circuit 90124, and the execution of the specific effect A is determined at a rate of 50%. Then, each time the specific effect A is executed, the winning history of the winning history storage area corresponding to the specific effect A (at least the first general winning opening 9050A to the fourth general winning opening 9050D, which is the first winning condition). The winning history of any of them is included) is deleted.

On the other hand, in the effect control CPU 90120, when the game state is (2) the probabilistic change state or the time saving state, each time the game ball wins in any of the first general winning openings 9050A to the fourth general winning opening 9050D. The winning condition (which is the second winning condition) is satisfied. When the second winning condition is satisfied, it is determined whether or not the specific effect is executed based on the random number for determining the execution of the specific effect extracted from the random number circuit 90124, and the execution of the specific effect A is determined at a rate of 20%. Then, each time the specific effect A is executed, the winning history of the winning history storage area corresponding to the specific effect A (at least the first general winning opening 9050A to the fourth general winning opening 9050D, which is the second winning condition). The winning history of any of them is included) is deleted.

In the first effect form and the second effect form to the fourth effect form described later, (1) the ratio of the specific effect being executed based on the winning of the game ball in the general winning opening in the normal state is (2). ) It is higher than the rate at which the specific effect is executed based on the game ball winning in the general winning opening in the probable change state or the time saving state. In the probabilistic state and the time saving state, the player is usually more interested in the winning situation of the game ball in the second starting winning opening and the variable display of the decorative pattern than in the winning situation of the game ball in the general winning opening. Even if a specific effect is executed, it is difficult to create the same kind of interest as in the normal state. Therefore, in the probabilistic state or the time-saving state, the execution rate of the specific effect is lowered as compared with the normal state, and the decrease in the interest of the specific effect is suppressed.

Note that, unlike the first effect mode, the second effect mode to the fourth effect form, which will be described later, do not determine whether or not the specific effect is executed based on the random number for determining the execution of the specific effect. In each of the second effect mode to the fourth effect form, which will be described later, a specific effect can be executed when the winning condition is satisfied, but (2) the winning condition in the probable change state or the time saving state is (1) normal. A larger number of winnings is required than the winning conditions in the state. Therefore, (1) the execution rate of the specific effect in the normal state is higher than (2) the execution rate of the specific effect in the probable change state or the time saving state.

In this way, by changing the execution ratio of the specific effect according to the game state, it is possible to improve the interest when the game ball wins a prize in the general winning opening. Contrary to the examples of the first effect mode to the fourth effect form, (2) the ratio at which the specific effect is executed based on the game ball winning in the general winning opening in the probabilistic state or the time saving state is (2). 1) In the normal state, the ratio may be higher than the ratio at which the specific effect is executed based on the winning of the game ball in the general winning opening.

In the second effect mode to the fourth effect form, which will be described later, as in the first effect form, when the winning condition is satisfied, the presence or absence of execution of the specific effect is determined based on the random number for determining the execution of the specific effect. You may do so. For example, in the second effect mode to the fourth effect form, the first prize condition required in the normal state and the second prize condition required in the probability change state or the time saving state are the same prize conditions, and the first By differentiating the lottery probability when the winning condition is satisfied in the normal state and the lottery probability when the winning condition is satisfied in the probable change state or the time saving state as in the production form, the ratio at which the specific effect is normally executed and the probability change The ratio at which the specific effect is executed in the state or the time saving state may be different.

Further, the specific effect may be executed at different ratios according to not only the gaming state but also the display result of the variable display and the determination result at the time of starting winning. For example, when the display result of the variable display is a big hit symbol, the specific effect may be executed at a higher rate than the case where the display result of the variable display is an off symbol, and the specific effect may be executed at the start winning prize. When there is a hold memory determined to be a big hit, compared to a case where there is no hold memory determined to be a big hit at the time of starting prize (when only a hold memory determined to be off at the time of starting prize exists), A specific effect may be executed at a high rate. Further, the number of times the specific effect is executed in one variable display period is limited to a predetermined number of times (for example, the specific effect can be executed only once regardless of the type, or the specific effect of a different type is classified into various types. It may be possible to execute it only once each time).

[Second production form]
In the second effect mode shown in FIG. 51, when the game state is (1) the normal state, the effect control CPU 90120 is a general of two or more of the first general winning openings 9050A to the fourth general winning openings 9050D. The winning condition (which is the first winning condition) is established when the game ball wins one or more times in each winning opening. When the first winning condition is satisfied, the execution of the specific effect A is determined. Then, every time the specific effect A is executed, the winning history in the winning history storage area corresponding to the specific effect A is deleted.

On the other hand, when the gaming state is (2) the probabilistic change state or the time saving state, the effect control CPU 90120 is used for two or more general winning openings out of the first general winning opening 9050A to the fourth general winning opening 9050D, respectively. The winning condition (which is the second winning condition) is established when the game ball wins two or more times. When the second winning condition is satisfied, the execution of the specific effect A is determined. Then, every time the specific effect A is executed, the winning history in the winning history storage area corresponding to the specific effect A is deleted.

As described above, in the second effect form, and the third effect form and the fourth effect form, which will be described later, the number of winnings to the general winning opening required to execute the specific effect in the normal state and the probability change state or Since the number of winnings to the general winning opening required to execute the specific effect in the time-saving state is different, it is possible to make the player interested in the number of winning balls to the general winning opening according to the gaming state. ..

Further, in the second effect mode, in order to execute the specific effect, at least one game is played for each of two or more general prize openings out of the first general prize openings 9050A to the fourth general prize openings 9050D. The condition is to win a ball. In this way, by setting the winning for each of the plurality of general winning openings as the execution condition of the specific effect, not only whether or not the general winning opening is won, but also the game ball is won in any of the general winning openings. You can be interested in what you did.

In the second effect mode, and in the third effect mode and the fourth effect mode, which will be described later, the start of the jackpot game state is specified based on the fact that the game control microcomputer 90100 controls the jackpot game state. When the effect control CPU 90120 receives the jackpot start designation command, the winning history of the winning history storage area corresponding to the specific effect A and the winning history of the winning history storage area corresponding to the specific effect B are both deleted. It is supposed to be.

Further, in the second effect mode, and in the third effect form and the fourth effect mode, which will be described later, the prize history in the prize history storage area is not deleted based on the change in the gaming state. .. Therefore, the fact that the first winning condition is satisfied means that the first winning condition is satisfied as a result of checking the winning history in the winning history storage area in the normal state, and the winning history is not necessarily limited to the normal state. Based on this, the first winning condition is not always satisfied. Similarly, the fact that the second winning condition is satisfied means that the second winning condition is satisfied as a result of checking the winning history of the winning history storage area in the probabilistic state or the time saving state, and the probable changing state or the time saving state is not necessarily satisfied. The second winning condition is not always satisfied based on the winning history of only the time saving state. Not limited to such a form, the winning history in the winning history storage area is deleted based on the transition from the normal state to the probable change state or the time saving state, and the transition from the probable changing state or the time saving state to the normal state. Is also good. That is, it is confirmed whether or not the first winning condition is satisfied based on the winning history only in the normal state, and whether or not the second winning condition is satisfied based on the winning history only in the probabilistic state or the time saving state. You may try to confirm.

[Third production form]
In the third effect mode shown in FIG. 51, when the game state is (1) the normal state, the effect control CPU 90120 has a general winning opening (first general winning opening 9050A to fourth general) within 120 seconds. The winning condition (which is the first winning condition) is established when the game ball wins a total of three or more times in the winning opening 9050D). When the first winning condition is satisfied, the execution of the specific effect A is determined. Then, every time the specific effect A is executed, the winning history in the winning history storage area corresponding to the specific effect A is deleted.

On the other hand, when the gaming state is (2) the probabilistic change state or the time saving state, the effect control CPU 90120 is connected to the general winning opening (1st general winning opening 9050A to 4th general winning opening 9050D) within 120 seconds. The winning condition (the second winning condition) is established when the game ball wins a total of 5 times or more. When the second winning condition is satisfied, the execution of the specific effect A is determined. Then, every time the specific effect A is executed, the winning history in the winning history storage area corresponding to the specific effect A is deleted.

Here, the period of 120 seconds is started based on the fact that the winning history to the first general winning opening is stored in the winning history storage area of the specific effect A (for example, the timer for the specific effect A is set to 120 seconds). Will be set). If the winning condition is not satisfied within the period of 120 seconds (when the timer for the specific effect A times out), the winning history in the winning history storage area of the specific effect A is deleted without executing the specific effect A. .. On the other hand, if the winning condition is satisfied within the period of 120 seconds (when the winning condition is satisfied before the timer for the specific effect A times out), the specific effect A is executed and the winning history in the winning history storage area of the specific effect A is executed. Is erased.

In this way, the winning frequency (number of winnings within a predetermined period) required to execute the specific effect in the normal state and the winning frequency (predetermined period) required to execute the specific effect in the probabilistic state or the shortened time state. By different from the number of winnings in the game), it is possible to be interested in the frequency of winning in the general winning opening according to the playing state.

Further, in the third effect mode, when the specific effect A targeting the variable display executed at the time of winning the first general winning opening in the predetermined period (120 seconds) is executed (only the variable display period of 1). (When the winning conditions are satisfied by the winning history), a specific effect A that targets a variable display different from the variable display that was executed when winning the first general winning opening in a predetermined period (120 seconds) is executed. (In some cases, the winning conditions are satisfied by the winning history in a plurality of variable display periods).

It should be noted that, as in the third effect mode, the variable display of the special symbol is executed a predetermined number of times as a form in which the specific effect is executed when the number of prizes to the general winning opening in the predetermined period reaches a predetermined number. A specific effect may be executed when the number of winnings to the general winning opening reaches a predetermined number during a certain period. For example, it is specified until all the reserved memories of the special figure game are exhausted, that is, when the number of winnings to the general winning opening reaches a predetermined number during the period in which the variable display of the special symbol corresponding to the reserved storage number is executed. The production may be executed.

[Fourth production form]
In the fourth effect mode shown in FIG. 51, the effect control CPU 90120 has a start winning opening (either a first starting winning opening or a second starting winning opening) when the gaming state is (1) a normal state. , The starting prize opening (either the first starting winning opening or the second starting winning opening), the general winning opening (one of the first general winning opening 9050A to the fourth general winning opening 9050D), and the game ball wins in this order. The winning condition (which is the first winning condition) is established by winning the prize in the mouth. When the first winning condition is satisfied, the execution of the specific effect A is determined. Then, every time the specific effect A is executed, the winning history in the winning history storage area corresponding to the specific effect A is deleted.

On the other hand, when the gaming state is (2) a probabilistic change state or a time saving state, the effect control CPU 90120 has a start winning opening (first starting winning opening, second starting winning opening) and a starting winning opening (first start). One of the winning openings and the second starting winning opening), the general winning opening (one of the first general winning opening 9050A to the fourth general winning opening 9050D), and the general winning opening (the first general winning opening 9050A to the fourth). The winning condition (which is the second winning condition) is established when the game ball wins the winning opening in the order of the general winning opening 9050D). When the second winning condition is satisfied, the execution of the specific effect A is determined. Then, every time the specific effect A is executed, the winning history in the winning history storage area corresponding to the specific effect A is deleted.

In this way, the specific effect is executed on condition that the winning order to the general winning opening and other winning openings (first starting winning opening, second starting winning opening) different from the general winning opening is in a specific order. By doing so, it is possible to be interested not only in the winning situation of the general winning opening but also in the winning order of the general winning opening and other winning openings.

It should be noted that the number of times the game ball wins consecutively in the general winning opening and the number of times the game ball wins consecutively in the other winning openings may be set to have a range. For example, the winning condition may be satisfied by winning three or more consecutively in the starting winning opening and then winning two or more consecutively in the general winning opening. In addition, which of the plurality of general winning openings has won the prize, or which of the plurality of other winning openings has won the prize may also be a winning condition. For example, the winning condition is satisfied when the game ball wins the winning opening in the order of the first starting winning opening, the second starting winning opening, the first general winning opening 9050A, and the second general winning opening 9050B. Is also good. In addition, the winning condition is not limited to the order in which the winning to the general winning opening occurs after the winning to the starting winning opening occurs, but the winning to the starting winning opening occurs after the winning to the general winning opening occurs. May hold.

Further, the winning condition may be satisfied based on the fact that the winning order of the game balls to the plurality of general winning openings is a specific order. For example, when the gaming state is (1) the normal state, the winning condition is that the game ball wins a plurality of general winning openings in the order of the first general winning opening 9050A and the second general winning opening 9050B. If the first winning condition) is satisfied and the gaming state is (2) a probable change state or a time-saving state, the first general winning opening 9050A, the second general winning opening 9050B, and the third general winning opening further The winning condition (which is the second winning condition) may be established by winning a prize in a plurality of general winning openings in the order of the opening 9050C and the fourth general winning opening 9050D.

Further, the winning conditions may be satisfied based on the winning order of the game balls to the plurality of general winning openings and the winning order of the game balls to one or a plurality of starting winning openings in a specific order. .. For example, when the game state is (1) the normal state, the winning condition is that the game ball wins in the order of the first general winning opening 9050A, the first starting winning opening, and the second general winning opening 9050B. When the first winning condition) is satisfied and the gaming state is (2) a probable change state or a time saving state, the first general winning opening 9050A, the first starting winning opening, the second general winning opening 9050B, Further, even if the winning condition (the second winning condition) is satisfied by winning the game ball in the order of the third general winning opening 9050C, the second starting winning opening, and the fourth general winning opening 9050D. good.

In addition, the order of entry to the general winning opening and entry to the starting winning opening is not limited to the order of entry to the general winning opening and entry to the large winning opening. The condition may be satisfied, and the winning condition is satisfied based on the order of entry to the general winning opening and entry to the first passing gate 9041A or the second passing gate 9041B in a specific order. You may do so. In addition, when a specific area where the jackpot type (for example, probabilistic jackpot) is determined based on the entry of the game ball is provided, the order of entry to the general winning opening and entry to the specific area is specific. The winning conditions may be satisfied based on the order.

In the first effect mode to the fourth effect mode, an example of executing the fluctuation result advance notice effect (specific effect A) as the specific effect has been described, but the look-ahead advance notice effect (specific effect B) is executed as the specific effect. May be.

[Fifth production form to eighth production form]
In the fifth effect mode to the eighth effect form shown in FIG. 52, unlike the first effect form to the fourth effect form, there are cases where (1) a normal state and (2) a probable change state or a time saving state. , The winning conditions are not different, and they are common winning conditions. In the examples of the fifth effect form to the eighth effect form, the first prize condition in the first effect form to the fourth effect form, that is, the prize condition adopted in the normal state is provided as a common prize condition, respectively. ing. Then, (1) when the game state when the winning condition is satisfied is the normal state, the variation result advance notice effect (specific effect A) is executed as the specific effect, and (2) the game when the winning condition is satisfied. When the state is a probable change state or a time saving state, a look-ahead notice effect (specific effect B) is executed as a specific effect. As a result, the type of the specific effect can be changed according to the game state when the game ball wins the general winning opening, and the specific effect executed based on the game ball winning the general winning opening. You can improve your interest.

In the fifth effect mode shown in FIG. 52, the effect control CPU 90120 determines the execution of the specific effect at a rate of 50% when the winning condition is satisfied. Then, when the gaming state is (1) the normal state, the specific effect A is executed, and each time the specific effect A is executed, the winning history of the winning history storage area corresponding to the specific effect A and the winning history of the specific effect A are executed. The winning history in the winning history storage area corresponding to the specific effect B is deleted. On the other hand, when the gaming state is (2) a probable change state or a time saving state, the specific effect B is executed, and each time the specific effect B is executed, the winning history of the winning history storage area corresponding to the specific effect A is executed. , And the winning history of the winning history storage area corresponding to the specific effect B is deleted.

In the sixth effect mode to the eighth effect mode shown in FIG. 52, the effect control CPU 90120 executes the specific effect A when the gaming state when the winning condition is satisfied is (1) the normal state. Every time the specific effect A is executed, both the winning history of the winning history storage area corresponding to the specific effect A and the winning history of the winning history storage area corresponding to the specific effect B are deleted. On the other hand, when the gaming state when the winning condition is satisfied is (2) the probabilistic change state or the time saving state, the specific effect B is executed, and each time the specific effect B is executed, the specific effect A is supported. Both the winning history in the winning history storage area and the winning history in the winning history storage area corresponding to the specific effect B are deleted.

In the sixth effect mode to the eighth effect mode, the effect control CPU 90120 issues a jackpot start designation command for designating the start of the jackpot game state based on the fact that the game control microcomputer 90100 controls the jackpot game state. Is received, the winning history of the winning history storage area corresponding to the specific effect A and the winning history of the winning history storage area corresponding to the specific effect B are both deleted. Further, in the sixth effect mode to the eighth effect mode, the winning history in the winning history storage area is not deleted based on the change in the gaming state. Not limited to such a form, the winning history in the winning history storage area is deleted based on the transition from the normal state to the probable change state or the time saving state, and the transition from the probable changing state or the time saving state to the normal state. Is also good.

In the seventh effect mode, the timer for the specific effect is set to 120 seconds based on the fact that the winning history for the first general winning opening is stored in the winning history storage area of the specific effect A and the specific effect B. .. Then, when the timer for the specific effect times out, neither the specific effect A nor the specific effect B is executed, and the winning history of the winning history storage area of the specific effect A and the winning history of the winning history storage area of the specific effect B are recorded. Both are erased. On the other hand, if the winning condition is satisfied before the timeout of the specific effect timer, (1) in the normal state, the specific effect A is executed, and the winning history and the specific effect B in the winning history storage area of the specific effect A are executed. In the case of (2) probabilistic change state or time-shortening state, the specific effect B is executed, and the prize history and the specific effect of the prize history storage area of the specific effect A are executed. The winning history of the winning history storage area of B is deleted.

[9th production form to 12th production form]
In the ninth effect mode to the twelfth effect form shown in FIG. 53, unlike the first effect form to the eighth effect form, there are cases where (1) a normal state and (2) a probable change state or a time saving state. , The winning conditions are different, and the types of specific effects executed based on the establishment of the winning conditions are also different. That is, (1) when the first winning condition is satisfied in the normal state, the fluctuation result advance notice effect (specific effect A) is executed as the specific effect, and (2) the second winning condition in the probable change state or the time saving state. If is satisfied, the look-ahead notice effect (specific effect B) is executed as the specific effect. As a result, the execution rate of the specific effect and the type of the specific effect can be different according to the game state when the game ball wins the general winning opening, and the game ball wins the general winning opening. It is possible to improve the interest of the specific production performed based on the above.

In the ninth effect mode shown in FIG. 53, when the game state is (1) the normal state, the effect control CPU 90120 has a game ball in either the first general winning opening 9050A or the second general winning opening 9050B. Each time a prize is won, a prize condition (which is regarded as the first prize condition) is satisfied, and the execution of the specific effect A is determined at a rate of 50%. Then, each time the specific effect A is executed, only the winning history in the winning history storage area corresponding to the specific effect A is deleted. On the other hand, in the effect control CPU 90120, when the game state is (2) the probabilistic change state or the time saving state, every time the game ball wins in either the third general winning opening 9050C or the fourth general winning opening 9050D. The winning condition (which is the second winning condition) is satisfied, and the execution of the specific effect B is decided at a rate of 20%. Then, every time the specific effect B is executed, only the winning history in the winning history storage area corresponding to the specific effect B is deleted.

In the tenth effect mode shown in FIG. 53, the effect control CPU 90120 has one in both the first general winning opening 9050A and the second general winning opening 9050B when the gaming state is (1) the normal state. When the game ball wins more than once, the winning condition (which is the first winning condition) is satisfied, and the execution of the specific effect A is determined. Then, each time the specific effect A is executed, only the winning history in the winning history storage area corresponding to the specific effect A is deleted. On the other hand, when the game state is (2) the probabilistic change state or the time saving state, the effect control CPU 90120 has two or more game balls in both the third general winning opening 9050C and the fourth general winning opening 9050D, respectively. The winning condition (which is the second winning condition) is satisfied by winning the prize, and the execution of the specific effect B is determined. Then, every time the specific effect B is executed, only the winning history in the winning history storage area corresponding to the specific effect B is deleted.

In the ninth effect mode to the twelfth effect mode, the effect control CPU 90120 issues a jackpot start designation command for designating the start of the jackpot game state based on the fact that the game control microcomputer 90100 controls the jackpot game state. Is received, the winning history of the winning history storage area corresponding to the specific effect A and the winning history of the winning history storage area corresponding to the specific effect B are both deleted. Further, in the ninth effect mode to the twelfth effect mode, the winning history in the winning history storage area is not deleted based on the change in the gaming state. Not limited to such a form, the winning history in the winning history storage area is deleted based on the transition from the normal state to the probable change state or the time saving state, and the transition from the probable changing state or the time saving state to the normal state. Is also good.

In the eleventh effect mode shown in FIG. 53, the effect control CPU 90120 enters the first general winning opening 9050A and the second general winning opening 9050B within 120 seconds when the gaming state is (1) the normal state. When the game ball wins a prize three times or more in total, the winning condition (which is the first winning condition) is satisfied, and the execution of the specific effect A is determined. Then, each time the specific effect A is executed, only the winning history in the winning history storage area corresponding to the specific effect A is deleted. On the other hand, in the effect control CPU 90120, when the game state is (2) the probabilistic change state or the time saving state, the game ball wins a total of 5 times or more in the 3rd general winning opening 9050C and the 4th general winning opening 9050D. As a result, the winning condition (which is the second winning condition) is satisfied, and the execution of the specific effect B is determined. Then, every time the specific effect B is executed, only the winning history in the winning history storage area corresponding to the specific effect B is deleted.

In the eleventh effect mode, the timer for the specific effect A is set to 120 seconds based on the fact that the winning history for the first general winning opening is stored in the winning history storage area of the specific effect A. Then, when the timer for the specific effect A times out, only the winning history in the winning history storage area of the specific effect A is deleted without executing the specific effect A. On the other hand, if the first winning condition is satisfied in the normal state before the timer for the specific effect A times out, the specific effect A is executed and only the winning history in the winning history storage area of the specific effect A is deleted. Further, the timer for the specific effect B is set to 120 seconds based on the fact that the winning history for the first general winning opening is stored in the winning history storage area of the specific effect B. Then, when the timer for the specific effect B times out, only the winning history in the winning history storage area of the specific effect B is deleted without executing the specific effect B. On the other hand, if the second winning condition is satisfied in the probable change state or the time saving state before the timer for the specific effect B times out, the specific effect B is executed and only the winning history in the winning history storage area of the specific effect B is deleted. Will be done.

In the twelfth effect mode shown in FIG. 53, when the game state is (1) the normal state, the effect control CPU 90120 has a first start winning opening, a first starting winning opening, and a second general winning opening 9050B. The winning condition (which is the first winning condition) is established when the game ball wins the winning opening in this order. When the first winning condition is satisfied, the execution of the specific effect A is determined. Then, each time the specific effect A is executed, only the winning history in the winning history storage area corresponding to the specific effect A is deleted. On the other hand, when the gaming state is (2) a probabilistic change state or a time saving state, the effect control CPU 90120 has a second start winning opening, a second starting winning opening, a third general winning opening 9050C, and a fourth general winning opening. The winning condition (which is the second winning condition) is established when the game ball wins the winning opening in the order of 9050D. When the second winning condition is satisfied, the execution of the specific effect B is determined. Then, each time the specific effect B is executed, only the winning history in the winning history storage area corresponding to the specific effect B is deleted.

As in the 9th effect mode to the 12th effect form, the general winning openings (general winning openings and starting winning openings in the 12th effect form) that are the targets of winning the game ball for executing the specific effect are determined according to the game state. By making them different, the specific effect is appropriately executed according to the game state. In addition, in the 9th effect mode to the 12th effect form, in order to establish the target winning opening to be won in order to establish the first winning condition in the normal state and the second winning condition in the probable change state or the time saving state. An example is shown in which the target winning openings to be awarded are all different, but the target winning openings in the normal state and the target winning openings in the probabilistic state or the time-saving state are partially different from each other. It may be common. For example, both the first winning condition and the second winning condition may include winning the second general winning opening 9050B.

[13th production form to 16th production form]
In the thirteenth effect mode to the sixteenth effect form shown in FIG. 54, the ratio of executing the specific effect A when the timing when the first winning condition is satisfied is (1) the period after the reach state is established in the reach fluctuation. However, when the timing at which the second winning condition is satisfied is (2) a period outside the reach fluctuation period or a period before the reach state is established in the reach fluctuation, the ratio of executing the specific effect A is higher.

Here, (1) the period after the reach state is established in the reach fluctuation is specifically a fixed decorative symbol (final stop) after the reach state is established in the variable display of the fluctuation pattern accompanied by the reach effect (normal reach, super reach). It is the period until the symbol) is stopped and displayed. In addition, (2) the period outside the reach fluctuation period or before the reach state is established in the reach fluctuation is specifically the period during which the variable display of the fluctuation pattern accompanied by the reach effect (normal reach, super reach) is executed. It is the period from the start of the variable display of the fluctuation pattern accompanied by the reach effect (normal reach, super reach) to the period before the reach state is established.

The first winning condition and the second winning condition in the thirteenth production form to the sixteenth production form are the same as the first winning condition and the second winning condition in the first production form to the fourth production form, respectively. It has become. In any of the production forms, when the timing when the first prize condition is satisfied is (1) the period after the reach state is established in the reach fluctuation, the ratio of executing the specific effect A is determined by the second prize condition. When the established timing is (2) outside the reach fluctuation period or the period before the reach state is established in the reach fluctuation, the ratio is higher than the ratio of executing the specific effect A. In this way, by changing the execution ratio of the specific effect according to the game period when the winning condition is satisfied, it is possible to improve the interest when the game ball wins the general winning opening.

[17th production form to 20th production form]
In the 17th effect mode to the 20th effect form shown in FIG. 55, when the timing at which the winning condition is satisfied is (1) the period after the reach state is established in the reach fluctuation, the specific effect A is executed and the winning condition is satisfied. When (2) the period outside the reach fluctuation period or the period before the reach state is established in the reach fluctuation, the specific effect B is executed.

The winning conditions in the 17th effect form to the 20th effect form are the same as the winning conditions (common winning conditions) in the 5th effect form to the 8th effect form, respectively. In any of the production forms, if the timing at which the winning condition (common winning condition) is satisfied is (1) the period after the reach state is established in the reach fluctuation, the specific production A is executed and the winning condition is satisfied. When the timing is (2) outside the reach fluctuation period or the period before the reach state is established in the reach fluctuation, the specific effect B is executed. In this way, by executing different types of specific effects according to the game period when the winning conditions are satisfied, it is possible to improve the interest when the game ball wins a prize in the general winning opening.

[21st production form to 24th production form]
In the 21st effect mode to the 24th effect form shown in FIG. 56, when the timing at which the first winning condition is satisfied is (1) the period after the reach state is established in the reach fluctuation, the specific effect A is executed. If the timing at which the second winning condition is satisfied is (2) a period outside the reach fluctuation period or a period before the reach state is established in the reach fluctuation, the specific effect B is executed.

The first winning condition and the second winning condition in the 21st effect form to the 24th effect form are the same as the first winning condition and the second winning condition in the 9th effect form to the 12th effect form, respectively. It has become. In any of the production forms, if the timing at which the first winning condition is satisfied is (1) the period after the reach state is established in the reach fluctuation, the specific effect A is executed and the second winning condition is satisfied. If the timing is (2) outside the reach fluctuation period or the period before the reach state is established in the reach fluctuation, the specific effect B is executed. In this way, the execution ratio of the specific effect is different according to the game period when the winning condition is satisfied, and different types of specific effect are executed according to the game period when the winning condition is satisfied. It is possible to improve the interest when a game ball wins a prize in the general winning opening.

[25th production form and 26th production form]
In the 25th effect mode shown in FIG. 57, unlike the 1st effect mode to the 24th effect form, the general winning opening (1st general winning opening 9050A to 4th general winning opening 9050D) is used regardless of the game state or the game period. The first winning condition is satisfied when the game ball wins a prize three times or more in total. When the first winning condition is satisfied, the execution of the specific effect A is determined. Then, every time the specific effect A is executed, the winning history in the winning history storage area corresponding to the specific effect A is deleted. Further, regardless of the game state or the game period, the second winning condition is satisfied when the game ball wins a total of five or more times in the general winning opening (first general winning opening 9050A to fourth general winning opening 9050D). When the second winning condition is satisfied, the execution of the specific effect B is determined. Then, every time the specific effect B is executed, the winning history in the winning history storage area corresponding to the specific effect B is deleted.

In the 26th effect mode shown in FIG. 57, unlike the 1st effect mode to the 24th effect mode, the general winning opening (1st general winning opening 9050A to 4th general) is within 120 seconds regardless of the game state or the game period. The first winning condition is satisfied when the game ball wins a total of three or more times in the winning opening 9050D). When the first winning condition is satisfied, the execution of the specific effect A is determined. Then, every time the specific effect A is executed, the winning history in the winning history storage area corresponding to the specific effect A is deleted. In addition, regardless of the game state or the game period, the second prize is won by the game ball winning a total of 5 times or more in the general prize opening (1st general winning opening 9050A to 4th general winning opening 9050D) within 120 seconds. The condition is satisfied. When the second winning condition is satisfied, the execution of the specific effect B is determined. Then, every time the specific effect B is executed, the winning history in the winning history storage area corresponding to the specific effect B is deleted.

In this way, the number of winnings to the general winning opening is performed by performing different effects according to the number of winnings to the general winning opening and the winning frequency (the number of winnings within the predetermined period) regardless of the gaming state and the playing period. And the frequency of winning can be interesting. In this example, the effect mode (output voice) differs depending on the number of prizes and the winning frequency to the general prize opening, and the variable display to be notified is different (specific effect A: variable display being executed, Specific effect B: Variable display that has not been executed), but not limited to this, it is different whether or not to suggest the display result of variable display depending on the number of winnings to the general winning opening and the winning frequency (variable display). For example, the effect of notifying the display result of the variable display and the effect not related to the display result of the variable display may be executable, and the effect of suggesting the gaming state or not is different (for example, high probability). It may be possible to execute an effect of notifying that the player is in a state and an effect not related to the game state).

As described above, in this embodiment, the effect control CPU 90120 receives a general winning opening designation command to generate a prize in the general winning opening, and the first general winning opening 9050A to the fourth general winning opening 9050D. It is possible to specify which of the game balls won the prize, and the winning of the starting winning opening was generated by receiving the start winning opening designation command, and the game was played in either the first starting winning opening or the second starting winning opening. It is possible to specify whether or not the ball has won a prize, and it is possible to specify that a prize has occurred in the big prize opening by receiving the big winning opening winning command. Therefore, as the winning number management table, the winning number management table in the form shown in FIG. 58 can be stored and updated.

The second start winning opening is formed by a normal variable winning ball device 906B, and the normal variable winning ball device 906B is open-controlled (opening in which the game ball can be won or is easy to win from a closed state in which the game ball does not win or is difficult to win. By switching to the state), the game ball can be won. Further, the large winning opening is formed by the special variable winning ball device 907, and the special variable winning ball device 907 is open-controlled (the game ball can win or is easy to win from the closed state where the game ball does not win or it is difficult to win). By switching to the open state), the game ball can be won. Therefore, as shown in FIG. 58, the second starting winning slot and the special variable winning ball device 907 are classified into a winning slot in which a game ball can be won by operating the winning ball. On the other hand, the 1st general winning opening 9050A to the 4th general winning opening 9050D and the 1st starting winning opening are always open, and the game ball can be won regardless of the operation of the accessory. It is classified into.

In the prize number management table of FIG. 58, a game ball has won a prize in each of the first general winning opening 9050A to the fourth general winning opening 9050D, the first starting winning opening, the second starting winning opening, and the large winning opening. The number of prize balls sometimes given (the number of prize balls corresponding to each winning opening, 10, 10, 10, 10, 2, 2, 15 in this example) is stored. Then, for each winning opening, the number of winnings (11,36,22,14,754,315,420), which is the number of times the game ball has won in the winning opening, is multiplied by the number of winning balls. The number of payouts (the total number of balls paid out due to the winning of the game ball in the winning opening, 110, 360, 220, 140, 1508, 630, 6300 in this example) is stored.

Then, as the winning ratio, (1) the number of winnings of each winning opening (11, 36, 22, 14, 754, 315, 420, respectively) with respect to the total number of winnings of each winning opening (1572 in this example). And (2) the total number of winnings in each winning opening (1572 in this example), the non-role winning opening (1st general winning opening 9050A to 4th general winning opening 9050D and the 1st starting winning opening) The ratio of the number of winnings (11 + 36 + 22 + 14 + 754), the ratio of the number of winnings (315 + 420) of the character winning opening (second starting winning opening and the large winning opening), and (3) the total number of winnings of each winning opening (3) In this example, the ratio of the number of winnings other than the large winning opening (11 + 36 + 22 + 14 + 754 + 315) to 1572) and the ratio of the number of winnings of the large winning opening (420) are stored.

In addition, as the payout ratio, (1) the number of payouts for each winning slot (110, 360, 220, 140, 1508, 630, 6300, respectively) with respect to the total number of payouts for each winning slot (9268 in this example). And (2) the total number of payouts of each winning opening (9268 in this example), the non-role winning opening (1st general winning opening 9050A to 4th general winning opening 9050D and the 1st starting winning opening) The ratio of the number of payouts (110 + 360 + 220 + 140 + 1508), the ratio of the number of payouts (630 + 6300) of the bonus winning openings (second starting winning opening and large winning opening), and (3) the total number of payouts of each winning opening (3) In this example, the ratio of the number of payouts other than the large winning opening (110 + 360 + 220 + 140 + 1508 + 630) to 9268) and the ratio of the number of payouts of the large winning opening (6300) are stored.

Here, as described above, during the period when the operation unit of the mode changeover switch 9031 is set to the second position (display position), the effect control CPU 90120 displays each information stored in the winning number management table as an image. Displayed on the device 905. Therefore, the clerk of the game hall is paid out by winning the game ball in the character winning opening for the total number of balls (9268) paid out by winning the game ball in each winning opening. It is possible to grasp the ratio of the number of balls (110 + 360 + 220 + 140 + 1508) (hereinafter referred to as "first payout ratio", which is 74.77% in this example). In addition, the total number of balls paid out due to the winning of the game ball in each winning opening (9268) is the number of balls paid out due to the winning of the game ball in the large winning opening (6300). The ratio (hereinafter referred to as "second payout ratio", which is 67.98% in this example) can be grasped.

Here, when the first payout ratio is higher than a predetermined first reference ratio (for example, 70%), the effect control CPU 90120 shall notify to that effect in a identifiable manner. .. In the example of FIG. 58, since the first payout ratio (74.77%) exceeds the first reference ratio (70%), the display area of the first payout ratio is highlighted in a thick frame. Further, when the second payout ratio is higher than a predetermined second reference ratio (for example, 60%), the effect control CPU 90120 shall notify to that effect in a identifiable manner. In the example of FIG. 58, since the second payout ratio (67.98%) exceeds the second reference ratio (60%), the display area of the second payout ratio is highlighted in a thick frame.

As described above, the effect control CPU 90120 can display the first payout ratio and the second payout ratio on the image display device 905, and the comparison result with the predetermined first reference ratio and the second reference ratio can be obtained. It can be displayed in a graspable manner. Even if the first payout ratio and the second payout ratio are displayed on the image display device 905 by, for example, the setting of the display changeover switch 9032 and the setting operation by the operation button 9030, regardless of the setting of the mode changeover switch 9031. At best, when the demo screen is displayed on the image display device 905, the first payout ratio and the second payout ratio may also be displayed. Further, the first payout ratio and the second payout ratio may be displayed regardless of the settings on the playground side or the player side. Further, the first payout ratio and the second payout ratio may be displayed according to the gaming state, and may be displayed, for example, when the jackpot gaming state is controlled.

Further, the effect control CPU 90120 outputs the calculated first payout ratio and the second payout ratio to a gaming device (for example, a card unit or a calling lamp device) provided corresponding to the pachinko gaming machine 901 for gaming. In the device, the received first payout ratio and the second payout ratio can be stored and displayed on the display device. Further, the effect control CPU 90120 transmits the calculated first payout ratio and second payout ratio to an information management device such as a hall computer, and in the information management device, the first payout ratio and the second payout of each gaming machine. It is possible to store the ratio and display it on the display device.

Further, when the game control microcomputer 90100 outputs the general winning opening designation command, the starting winning opening designation command, and the large winning opening winning command to the effect control CPU 90120, the external output information corresponding to these commands is output. Information that can identify which of the first general winning opening 9050A to the fourth general winning opening 9050D the game ball has won, and the winning to the starting winning opening has occurred. Information that can identify whether the game ball has won a prize in the first start winning opening or the second starting winning opening, and information that can identify that a prize has occurred in the large winning opening, the corresponding gaming device. It shall be output to an external device such as (card unit, call lamp device) or information management device (hall computer).

This makes it possible to specify the information corresponding to the general winning opening designation command, the information corresponding to the starting winning opening designation command, and the information corresponding to the large winning opening winning command, that is, the first payout ratio and the second payout ratio. In the external device that has received the information in the above, it is possible to store the winning number management table in the form shown in FIG. 58 for each gaming machine and update it. This makes it possible to grasp the first payout ratio and the second payout ratio for each gaming machine. Further, for each gaming machine, it is possible to grasp whether or not the first payout ratio exceeds the first reference ratio and whether or not the second payout ratio exceeds the second reference ratio.

Further, regarding the totaling period of the winning number information (value of each item in FIG. 44 or 58) stored in the winning number management table of the pachinko gaming machine 901, if no setting is made for the totaling period, the pachinko machine It is a period from the start of the power supply of the gaming machine 901 to the stop of the power supply. As the power supply of the pachinko gaming machine 901 was stopped, the winning number information stored in the winning number management table was reset (the number of winnings to each winning opening became 0), and the power supply of the pachinko gaming machine 901 was resumed. Occasionally, the number of winnings to each winning opening stored in the winning number management table is 0. That is, when the power supply of the pachinko gaming machine 901 is stopped, the winning number information stored in the winning number management table is deleted without being backed up.

The aggregation period of the winning number information (values of each item in FIG. 44 or 58) stored in the winning number management table of the pachinko gaming machine 901 can be set on the game hall side, for example, an operation. It is possible to set the aggregation period (for example, 10 hours, 3 hours, etc.) related to the gaming machine by using the button 9030. Further, in the game device (card unit or call lamp device), the clerk of the game hall inputs a desired totaling period by an input device or the like, and the input totaling period is transmitted to the corresponding pachinko gaming machine 901, and the totaling period is transmitted. It may be set as (stored in RAM 90122). Further, in the information management device (hall computer), the manager of the game hall inputs a desired totaling period by an input device or the like, and the input totaling period is each pachinko gaming machine 901 (for example, a pachinko machine selected as a setting target). It may be transmitted to the gaming machine 901) and set as the aggregation period (stored in the RAM 90122). Then, in the pachinko gaming machine 901, a winning number management table for each set aggregation period (for example, 10 hours) is created, and these are displayed on the image display device 905, or a gaming device (card) provided correspondingly. It is possible to output to a unit (unit, call lamp device) and display it on the display device of the gaming device, or output it to an information management device (hall computer) and display it on the display device of the information management device. ..

In addition, the number of winnings in the winning number management table is based on the information corresponding to the general winning opening designation command, the information corresponding to the starting winning opening designation command, and the information corresponding to the large winning opening winning command output from the pachinko gaming machine 901. In the external device that stores and updates information (values of each item in FIG. 44 or FIG. 58), by setting the aggregation period by the input device provided in the external device, for each set aggregation period (for example, 10 hours). It is possible to create a prize number management table and display it on a display device provided in an external device. For example, when the external device is a gaming device (card unit or call lamp device) provided corresponding to the pachinko gaming machine 901, the winning number management table for each predetermined period related to the corresponding gaming machine is displayed on the display device. If the external device is an information management device that manages game information for each gaming machine, it is possible to display the winning number management table for each predetermined period on the display device for each gaming machine. Will be.

[27th production form]
Both the specific effect A and the specific effect B described above foretell the variable display result in the special figure game depending on the effect mode, but are executed in connection with the winning of the game ball to the general winning openings 9050A to 9050D. As a specific effect, it is also possible to execute an effect not related to the variable display result in the special figure game or the variable display result in the normal figure game. FIG. 59 exemplifies a specific effect C (point-giving effect) as an effect not related to the variable display result in the special figure game or the variable display result in the normal figure game.

In the 27th effect mode shown in FIG. 60 and the 29th effect mode described later, each time the game ball wins a prize in any of the first general winning openings 9050A to the fourth general winning opening 9050D, the specific effect extracted from the random number circuit 90124. Whether or not the specific effect C is executed is determined based on the random number for execution determination, and if it is determined to be executed, the specific effect C is executed. When the specific effect C is executed, the total points of the point storage areas formed in the RAM 90122 are added by 1, and as shown in FIG. 59, the image display device 905 has an image including the characters "1 point". 902000 is displayed.

That is, every time a game ball wins in any of the first general winning openings 9050A to the fourth general winning opening 9050D, a lottery is performed to determine whether or not to give one point, and the lottery is won. In this case, the point-giving effect in which one point is given is executed. Benefits are given to the player according to the total points in the point storage area.

For example, when the total points reach 5 (when winning 5 times), the image display device 905 displays a two-dimensional code for accessing the image providing server. The player can access the image providing server by reading (imaging) the two-dimensional code with the two-dimensional code reader of the information terminal owned by the player, and download the desired standby image or the like to the information terminal. .. Further, when the total points reach 10 (when winning 10 times), the image display device 905 displays a two-dimensional code for accessing the music providing server. The player can access the music providing server by reading (imaging) the two-dimensional code with the two-dimensional code reader of the information terminal owned by the player, and download the desired music to the information terminal.

In the 27th production mode, the timing at which the game ball wins in any of the first general winning openings 9050A to the fourth general winning opening 9050D is the period during which (1) the variable display of the special symbol is executed (within the symbol variation period). ), The specific effect C is executed at a rate of 20%, and (2) during the period when the variable display of the special symbol is not executed (outside the symbol fluctuation period), the specific effect C is executed at a rate of 80%. Execute the specific effect C. The effect control CPU 90120 issues a variation start command for designating the variation start in the special figure game and a variation pattern specification command for specifying the variation pattern such as the variation time of the special symbol in the special figure game and the decorative symbol in the image display device 905. By receiving from the game control microcomputer 90100, it is possible to specify whether or not the variable display of the special symbol is being executed.

As with the specific effect A and the specific effect B, the winning history storage area corresponding to the specific effect C is provided. Every time the specific effect C is executed, the prize history in the prize history storage area corresponding to the specific effect C (at least one of the first general prize opening 9050A to the fourth general prize opening 9050D, which is a winning condition) is won. History is included) is deleted.

Here, the total points of the point storage area formed in the RAM 90122 are set to 10 regardless of the winning history of the winning history storage area (even if the winning history of the winning history storage area is deleted). After reaching (in this example, after the two-dimensional code for accessing the music providing server is displayed), it is reset to 0, and is added again by 1 as the specific effect C is executed.

In the 27th effect mode and the 29th effect mode, which will be described later, a specific effect is performed based on (1) a game ball winning a prize in the general winning opening during the period (within the symbol variation period) in which the variable display of the special symbol is executed. The ratio of execution is lower than the ratio of (2) the specific effect being executed based on the fact that the game ball wins in the general winning opening during the period when the variable display of the special symbol is not executed (outside the symbol fluctuation period). It is set. During the period (1), the player usually wins a general prize because the effect corresponding to the special figure game (for example, the effect of notifying the fluctuation result) is being executed by the image display device 905, the speakers 908L, and the 908R. I am more interested in these effects, including the variable display of decorative patterns, rather than the winning status of the game ball to the mouth. Therefore, even if the specific effect is executed during the period (1), the interest of the specific effect may be impaired. On the other hand, in the period (2), the player is able to execute a specific effect because the effect corresponding to the special figure game, which is normally the object of interest, is not executed. It is easy to be interested in this. Therefore, by executing the specific effect at a higher rate than the period of (1), the interest of the specific effect is appropriately enhanced.

Further, as a specific effect, by executing a specific effect C (point-giving effect) that is not related to the variable display result in the special figure game or the variable display result in the normal figure game, the execution status of the special figure game and the number of reserved memories are determined. However, it is possible to execute a specific effect at an appropriate timing, and the interest of the specific effect is not impaired. For example, when an effect related to the variable display result in the special figure game is adopted as the specific effect, the timing at which the game ball wins the general winning opening is determined by (2) the variable display of the special symbol is executed. If the period is not set (outside the symbol change period), there is no target for the change result notice at this timing. Therefore, the execution is suspended until the specific effect is not executed (the execution of the specific effect based on the prize in the general winning opening is stopped) or the start condition of the variable display related to the special figure game is satisfied (general prize). The specific effect is not executed at the timing when the prize is won in the mouth, and then the specific effect is executed at the timing when the start condition of the variable display related to the special figure game is satisfied). As a result, the execution frequency of the specific effect may decrease, or the winning timing and the execution timing of the specific effect may deviate from each other, resulting in a decrease in interest. Such a problem can be avoided by adopting a specific effect that is not related to the variable display result in the special figure game or the variable display result in the normal figure game as the specific effect.

In the 27th production mode, the timing at which the game ball wins in any of the first general winning openings 9050A to the fourth general winning opening 9050D is the period during which (1) the variable display of the special symbol is executed (symbol variation). If it is within the period), the specific effect C is not executed, and (2) the specific effect C can be executed only during the period (outside the symbol change period) in which the variable display of the special symbol is not executed. Is also good. Further, contrary to the example shown in the 27th effect form, (1) the game ball is specified based on the fact that the game ball wins in the general winning opening during the period when the variable display of the special symbol is executed (within the symbol fluctuation period). The rate at which the effect is executed is higher than the rate at which the specific effect is executed based on (2) the game ball winning the general winning opening during the period when the variable display of the special symbol is not executed (outside the symbol change period). May be set to be high.

[28th production form]
In the 28th effect mode, unlike the 27th effect mode, it is not determined whether or not the specific effect is executed based on the random number for determining the execution of the specific effect extracted from the random number circuit 90124. In the 28th production mode, the timing at which the game ball wins in any of the first general winning openings 9050A to the fourth general winning opening 9050D is the period during which (1) the variable display of the special symbol is executed (within the symbol variation period). ), The specific effect A (variation result notice effect) is executed at a rate of 100%, and (2) the period during which the variable display of the special symbol is not executed (outside the symbol change period). , Does not execute the specific effect A.

As shown in FIG. 50A, the specific effect A is either a first mode in which only the sound effect is executed or a second mode in which the accessory effect is executed together with the sound effect. This is a variable result advance notice effect that suggests the possibility that the jackpot symbol is derived and displayed as the variable display result of the variable display for which the start condition is satisfied, before the variable display result is derived and displayed. Further, as shown in FIG. 50B, the specific effect B is either a first aspect in which only the sound effect is executed or a second aspect in which the accessory effect is executed together with the sound effect. This is a look-ahead notice effect suggesting that the jackpot symbol may be derived and displayed as a variable display result of the variable display in which the start condition is not satisfied even though the start condition is satisfied. Further, as shown in FIG. 59, the specific effect C has a variable display display result (whether or not it becomes a big hit symbol) related to the special figure game and a variable display display result (whether or not it becomes a hit symbol) related to the normal figure game. It is a production that is not related to any of the above), and points are given to the player according to the winning of the general winning opening.

As described above, when the timing at which the game ball wins in any of the first general winning openings 9050A to the fourth general winning opening 9050D is the period (2), the specific effect A is not executed (the above-mentioned "" The process of "holding the execution of the specific effect A and executing it when the start condition of the variable display related to the special figure game is satisfied" is not performed), and it is specified only during the period of (1). The effect A is executed. Every time the specific effect A is executed, the prize history in the prize history storage area corresponding to the specific effect A (at least one of the first general prize opening 9050A to the fourth general prize opening 9050D, which is a winning condition, is won. History is included) is deleted.

In the 28th effect mode, as a specific effect, the specific effect A (variation result notice effect) related to the variable display result in the special figure game executed at the timing when the game ball wins the general winning opening is executed. I try to improve my interest in specific productions. However, if the timing at which the game ball wins the general winning opening is (2) the period during which the variable display of the special symbol is not executed (outside the symbol fluctuation period), there is a target of the fluctuation result notice at this timing. do not do. In this case, the execution of the specific effect A is temporarily suspended (the specific effect A is not executed at the timing when the general winning opening is won), and then specified when the start condition of the variable display related to the special figure game is satisfied. When the effect A is executed, the winning timing and the execution timing of the specific effect may be different from each other, which may rather reduce the interest. Therefore, in the 28th effect mode, when the game ball wins a prize in the general winning opening during the period (2) (outside the symbol change period), the specific effect A is not executed.

In the 28th production mode, if the timing at which the game ball wins in any of the first general winning openings 9050A to the fourth general winning opening 9050D is the period (1) (within the symbol variation period), The specific effect A may be executed at a rate of 80%, and in the case of the period (2) (outside the symbol fluctuation period), the specific effect A may be executed at a rate of 20%. In such a form, when a prize is generated in the general winning opening during the period (2) (outside the symbol fluctuation period), the execution of the specific effect A is temporarily suspended (in the general winning opening). The specific effect A is not executed at the timing of winning the prize), and then the specific effect A is executed when the start condition of the variable display related to the special figure game is satisfied. In this way, the timing at which the game ball wins the general winning opening is either the case of (1) (within the symbol fluctuation period) or the period of (2) (outside the symbol fluctuation period). Also, the specific effect A may be executed, and the specific effect A may be executed at different ratios.

Further, if the timing at which the game ball wins in any of the first general winning openings 9050A to the fourth general winning opening 9050D is the period (1) (within the symbol variation period), the special feature being executed is further executed. The execution ratio of the specific effect A may be different depending on the variable display result of the figure game, whether or not the reach effect is executed in the variable display of the decorative symbol being executed, and the like. For example, when the effect control CPU 90120 decides to use the fixed decoration symbol as the jackpot symbol, the specific effect A is executed at a rate of 80%, and the fixed decoration symbol is set as the off symbol. If it has been decided, the specific effect A may be executed at a rate of 20%.

[29th production form]
In the 29th production mode, the timing at which the game ball wins in any of the first general winning openings 9050A to the fourth general winning opening 9050D is (1) the number of reserved storages (for example, the number of reserved storages and the number of second reserved storages). When (2) the number of reserved storages is 0 but the variable display of the special symbol is executed (within the symbol fluctuation period) In some cases, the specific effect C is executed at a rate of 20%. On the other hand, the timing at which the game ball wins in any of the first general winning openings 9050A to the fourth general winning opening 9050D is (3) the period during which the reserved memory number is 0 and the variable display of the special symbol is not executed (3). If it is outside the symbol fluctuation period), the specific effect C is executed at a rate of 80%.

That is, when the variable display of the special symbol is executed at the timing when the game ball wins the general winning opening, or at least it is decided to execute the variable display of the special symbol ((1) or (2) above). In the case of the period of), the specific effect C is executed at a rate of 20%, and the variable display of the special symbol is not executed and the variable display of the special symbol is displayed at the timing when the game ball wins the general winning opening. If it has not been decided to execute the above (in the case of the period (3) above), the specific effect C is executed at a rate of 80%.

Every time the specific effect C is executed, the prize history in the prize history storage area corresponding to the specific effect C (at least one of the first general prize opening 9050A to the fourth general prize opening 9050D, which is a winning condition) is won. History is included) is deleted.

In the 29th effect mode, when the variable display of the special symbol is executed or at least the variable display of the special symbol is executed at the timing when the game ball wins the general winning opening ((1) above). Or (in the case of the period of (2)), the ratio at which the specific effect is executed is that the variable display of the special symbol is not executed and the variable display of the special symbol is displayed at the timing when the game ball wins the general winning opening. It is set lower than the ratio at which the specific effect is executed when the decision to execute is not made (when the period is the period (3) above). During the periods (1) and (2), the effect corresponding to the special figure game (for example, the variation result advance notice effect and the look-ahead advance notice effect) is being executed by the image display device 905 and the speakers 908L and 908R. , The player is usually more interested in these effects including the variable display of the decorative pattern than the winning situation of the game ball to the general winning opening. Therefore, even if the specific effect is executed during the periods (1) and (2), the interest of the specific effect may be impaired. On the other hand, in the period of (3), the player is able to execute the specific effect because the effect corresponding to the special figure game, which is normally the object of interest, is not executed. It is easy to be interested in this. Therefore, by executing the specific effect at a higher rate than the periods of (1) and (2), the interest of the specific effect is appropriately enhanced.

Further, as a specific effect, by executing a specific effect C (point-giving effect) that is not related to the variable display result in the special figure game or the variable display result in the normal figure game, the execution status of the special figure game and the number of reserved memories are determined. However, it is possible to execute a specific effect at an appropriate timing, and the interest of the specific effect is not impaired. For example, when a look-ahead notice effect that can be executed only when the number of reserved memories is 1 or more is adopted as the specific effect, the timing when the game ball wins the general winning opening is the number of reserved memories. When is 0, there is no pre-reading notice target at this timing. Therefore, the specific effect is not executed (the execution of the specific effect based on the prize in the general winning opening is stopped), or the execution is suspended until the number of reserved memories becomes 1 or more (the general winning opening is won). The specific effect is not executed at the timing, and then the specific effect is executed at the timing when the start condition of the variable display related to the special figure game is satisfied). As a result, the execution frequency of the specific effect may decrease, or the winning timing and the execution timing of the specific effect may deviate from each other, resulting in a decrease in interest. Such a problem can be avoided by adopting a specific effect that is not related to the variable display result in the special figure game or the variable display result in the normal figure game as the specific effect.

In the 29th effect mode, the variable display of the special symbol is executed or at least the variable display of the special symbol is executed at the timing when the game ball wins in any of the first general winning openings 9050A to the fourth general winning opening 9050D. When it is decided to execute (when it is the period of (1) or (2) above), the specific effect C is not executed, the variable display of the special symbol is not executed, and the special symbol is not executed. The specific effect C may be executed only when it is not decided to execute the variable display of (3). Further, contrary to the example shown in the 29th effect mode, is the variable display of the special symbol executed at the timing when the game ball wins in any of the first general winning openings 9050A to the fourth general winning opening 9050D? Or, at least when it is decided to execute the variable display of the special symbol (when it is the period of (1) or (2) above), the variable display of the special symbol is executed at the rate at which the specific effect is executed. If it is not and the decision to execute the variable display of the special symbol is not made (in the case of the period of (3) above), it may be set to be higher than the ratio at which the specific effect is executed.

In addition, the timing at which the variable display related to the special figure game is started (the timing when the start condition is satisfied) and the timing at which the game ball wins the general winning opening are within a predetermined period (for example, within 0.2 seconds, including simultaneous). In the case of, the specific effect may be executed after a predetermined period has elapsed (for example, after 5 seconds have elapsed) after the variable display is started, without immediately executing the specific effect. According to this, although the specific effect is not related to the special figure game immediately after the start condition is satisfied (for example, in the case of the specific effect B or the specific effect C), immediately after the start condition is satisfied. It is possible to prevent misunderstanding that it is related to the special figure game of. In addition, the timing when the game ball wins the start winning opening (the timing when the starting condition is satisfied) and the timing when the game ball wins the general winning opening are within a predetermined period (for example, within 0.2 seconds and including simultaneous). In some cases, the specific effect may be executed after a predetermined period has elapsed (for example, after 5 seconds have elapsed) after the number of reserved storages has increased, without immediately executing the specific effect. According to this, although the specific effect is not related to the special figure game immediately after the start condition is satisfied (for example, in the case of the specific effect A or the specific effect C), immediately after the start condition is satisfied. It is possible to prevent misunderstanding that it is related to the special figure game of.

[30th production form]
In the thirtieth effect mode, unlike the 29th effect form, it is not determined whether or not the specific effect is executed based on the random number for determining the execution of the specific effect extracted from the random number circuit 90124. In the thirtieth production mode, the timing at which the game ball wins in any of the first general winning openings 9050A to the fourth general winning opening 9050D is (1) the number of reserved storages (for example, the number of reserved storages and the number of second reserved storages). If the total number of reserved storages (which is the total number of reserved storages) is within the period of 1 or more, the specific effect B (look-ahead notice effect) is executed at a rate of 100%, and (2) the number of reserved storages is 0. Is the period during which the variable display of the special symbol is executed (within the symbol fluctuation period), (3) the period during which the reserved storage number is 0 and the variable display of the special symbol is not executed (outside the symbol fluctuation period). If is, the specific effect B is not executed.

As described above, when the timing at which the game ball wins in any of the first general winning openings 9050A to the fourth general winning opening 9050D is the period (2) or (3), the specific effect B is not executed. (The above-mentioned process of "holding the execution of the specific effect B and executing it when the number of held storages becomes 1 or more" is not performed), and only in the case of the period (1). The specific effect B is executed. Every time the specific effect B is executed, the prize history in the prize history storage area corresponding to the specific effect B (at least one of the first general prize opening 9050A to the fourth general prize opening 9050D, which is a winning condition, is won. History is included) is deleted.

In the thirtieth effect mode, as a specific effect, the specific effect B (pre-reading notice effect) related to the variable display result of the special figure game held at the timing when the game ball is won in the general winning opening is executed. I try to increase my interest in directing. However, when the timing at which the game ball wins the general winning opening is the period (2) or (3) where the number of reserved memories is 0, there is no pre-reading notice target at this timing. In this case, the execution of the specific effect B is temporarily suspended (the specific effect B is not executed at the timing when the general winning opening is won), and then the specific effect B is set when the number of reserved memories becomes 1 or more. If it is executed, there is a possibility that the interest will be rather lowered due to the difference between the winning timing and the execution timing of the specific effect. Therefore, in the thirtieth effect mode, when the game ball wins a prize in the general winning opening during the period (2) or (3) (the period in which the number of reserved memories is 0), the specific effect B is not executed. ..

In the 30th production mode, when the timing at which the game ball wins in any of the first general winning openings 9050A to the fourth general winning opening 9050D is the period (1) (within the period with reserved memory). Will execute the specific effect B at a rate of 80%, and if it is during the period (2) or (3) (within the period without hold memory), execute the specific effect B at a rate of 20%. You may do so. In such a form, when a prize is awarded to the general winning opening during the period (2) or (3) (within the period without holding memory), the execution of the specific effect B is temporarily suspended. Every time (the specific effect B is not executed at the timing when the general winning opening is won), and then the specific effect B is executed when the number of reserved storages becomes 1 or more. In this way, the timing at which the game ball wins the general winning opening is the period (1) (within the period with hold memory) and the period (2) or (3) (within the period without hold memory). ), In each case, the specific effect B may be executed, and the specific effect B may be executed at different ratios.

Further, if the timing at which the game ball wins in any of the first general winning openings 9050A to the fourth general winning opening 9050D is the period (1) (within the period with reserved memory), the game is further held. The execution ratio of the specific effect B differs depending on the variable display result of the special figure game related to memory and whether or not the reach effect is executed in the variable display of the decorative symbol accompanying the execution of the special figure game related to the reserved memory. You may do so. For example, the effect control CPU 90120 is stored in the start winning command storage area (that is, the variable display result of the special figure game is a jackpot symbol) when the start winning determination result specification command for designating "big hit" is stored in the start winning command storage area. If there is), the specific effect B is executed at a rate of 80%, and the start winning judgment result specification command that specifies "big hit" is not stored in the start winning command storage area (that is,). If there is no hold memory in which the variable display result of the special figure game is a big hit symbol), the specific effect B may be executed at a rate of 20%.

[31st production form]
In the 31st effect mode shown in FIG. 61, the timing at which the game ball wins in any of the first general winning openings 9050A to the fourth general winning opening 9050D is the period during which (1) the variable display of the special symbol is executed (1). If it is within the symbol variation period), the specific effect A (variation result notice effect) is executed at a rate of 100%, and (2) during the period when the variable display of the special symbol is not executed (outside the symbol variation period). In some cases, the specific effect C (point-giving effect) is executed at a rate of 100%.

In this way, the timing at which the game ball wins in any of the first general winning openings 9050A to the fourth general winning opening 9050D is the period (1) and the period (2). It is supposed to execute different types of specific effects. As a result, it is possible to make the general winning opening interested in the production performed when the game ball wins a prize, and it is possible to improve the interest. In addition, every time the specific effect (specific effect A or specific effect C) is executed, the winning history of the winning history storage area corresponding to the specific effect (at least the first general winning openings 9050A to 4th, which are the winning conditions). (Including the winning history to any of the general winning openings 9050D) is deleted.

In the 31st effect mode, the specific effect A (variation result notice effect) related to the variable display result in the special figure game executed at the timing when the game ball wins the general winning opening is executed for the specific effect. I try to improve my interest. However, if the timing at which the game ball wins the general winning opening is (2) the period during which the variable display of the special symbol is not executed (outside the symbol fluctuation period), there is a target of the fluctuation result notice at this timing. do not do. In this case, if no specific effect is executed, the frequency of executing the specific effect will decrease. On the other hand, in order not to reduce the execution frequency of the specific effect, the execution of the specific effect A is temporarily suspended (the specific effect A is not executed at the timing when the general winning opening is won), and then the special effect game is related. If the specific effect A is executed when the start condition of the variable display is satisfied, the winning timing and the execution timing of the specific effect may be different from each other, which may reduce the interest.

In the 31st effect mode, when a game ball wins in the general winning opening during the period (2) (outside the symbol change period), the variable display result in the special figure game or the variable in the normal figure game is changed instead of the specific effect A. By executing the specific effect C that is not related to the display result, such a problem can be avoided. In addition, it is not limited to the form in which a specific effect of any type is always executed (executed at a rate of 100%) for each prize in the general prize opening, but for each prize in the general prize opening, any type is used. The specific effect may be executed at a predetermined ratio (for example, 50%).

[32nd production form]
In the 32nd production mode, the timing at which the game ball wins in any of the first general winning openings 9050A to the fourth general winning opening 9050D is (1) the number of reserved storages (for example, the number of reserved storages and the number of second reserved storages). If the total number of reserved storages (which is the total number of reserved storages) is within the period of 1 or more, the specific effect B (look-ahead notice effect) is executed at a rate of 100%, and (2) the number of reserved storages is 0. Is the period during which the variable display of the special symbol is executed (within the symbol fluctuation period), the specific effect A (variation result notice effect) is executed at a rate of 100%, and (3) the number of reserved storages is 0. In addition, when the variable display of the special symbol is not executed (outside the symbol fluctuation period), the specific effect C (point granting effect) is executed at a rate of 100%.

In this way, the timing when the game ball wins in any of the first general winning openings 9050A to the fourth general winning opening 9050D is the period (1), the period (2), and ( Different types of specific effects are executed depending on the period of 3). As a result, it is possible to make the general winning opening interested in the production performed when the game ball wins a prize, and it is possible to improve the interest. In addition, every time a specific effect (specific effect A, specific effect B, or specific effect C) is executed, the winning history of the winning history storage area corresponding to the specific effect (at least the first general prize that is a winning condition). The winning history of any of the mouth 9050A to the fourth general winning mouth 9050D is included) is deleted.

In the 32nd effect mode, when the timing at which the game ball wins the general winning opening is within the period of (1), that is, when the target of the look-ahead notice exists, the specific effect B (look-ahead notice) is used. When the effect) is executed and it is within the period of (2), that is, when the target of the look-ahead notice does not exist but the target of the change result notice exists, the specific effect A (variation result notice effect) Is executed, that is, when neither the target of the look-ahead notice nor the target of the fluctuation result notice exists in the period of (3), the specific effect C (point-giving effect) is executed.

In this way, by selecting and executing a specific effect that can be executed immediately when the game ball wins in the general winning opening, the interest when the game ball wins in the general winning opening is appropriately improved. I try to let you. In addition, it is not limited to the form in which a specific effect of any type is always executed (executed at a rate of 100%) for each prize in the general prize opening, but for each prize in the general prize opening, any type is used. The specific effect may be executed at a predetermined ratio (for example, 50%).

In the 32nd production mode, if the number of reserved memories is 1 or more at the timing when the game ball wins the general winning opening, whether or not the variable display of the special symbol is executed at that timing. Regardless of that, that is, regardless of whether or not the target of the fluctuation result notice exists, the look-ahead notice effect is executed. That is, in the case of "there are both the target of the fluctuation result notice and the target of the look-ahead notice", the look-ahead notice effect is preferentially executed. Not limited to such a form, when the number of reserved memories is 1 or more at the timing when the game ball wins in the general winning opening, and when the variable display of the special symbol is executed at that timing, the fluctuation result notice When the effect is executed and the variable display of the special symbol is not executed at that timing, the look-ahead notice effect may be executed. That is, when "the target of the change result notice and the target of the look-ahead notice exist", the change result notice effect may be preferentially executed.

[Modifications of the 27th effect form to the 32nd effect form]
Further, in the 27th effect mode to the 32nd effect mode, the execution ratio of the specific effect may be different depending on the state when the game ball wins the general winning opening. The "state" referred to here is a state generated as a result of a game in a gaming machine and is a state based on the game in the gaming machine. The execution ratio of the specific effect shall be different according to the classification of the state. For example, in the 27th effect mode, when the timing at which the game ball wins the general winning opening is within (1) the symbol fluctuation period, if the game state at that time is the normal state, the specific effect is performed at a rate of 30%. C is executed, and if the gaming state at that time is a probable change state or a time saving state, the specific effect C is executed at a rate of 10%. On the other hand, when the timing when the game ball wins the general winning opening is outside the (2) symbol fluctuation period, if the game state at that time is the normal state, the specific effect C is executed at a rate of 100%. If the gaming state at that time is a probable change state or a time saving state, the specific effect C shall be executed at a rate of 60%. According to this, it is possible to further enhance the interest when the game ball wins a prize in the general winning opening.

Further, in the 27th effect mode to the 32nd effect mode, the type of the specific effect to be executed may be different depending on the state when the game ball is won in the general winning opening. For example, in the 31st effect mode, when the timing at which the game ball wins the general winning opening is within (1) the symbol variation period, if the number of reserved memories at that time is 0, the specific effect A (variation result notice). The effect) is executed, and if the number of reserved memories at that time is 1 or more, the specific effect B (look-ahead notice effect) is executed. On the other hand, if the timing at which the game ball wins the general winning opening is outside the (2) symbol fluctuation period, if the number of reserved memories at that time is 0, the specific effect C (point award effect) is executed. If the number of reserved memories at that time is 1 or more, the specific effect B (look-ahead notice effect) is executed. According to this, it is possible to further enhance the interest when the game ball wins a prize in the general winning opening.

In this way, the execution ratio of the specific effect or the classification of the state for different types of the specific effect is (1) the game state is the normal state, or (2) the game state is the probable change state or the time saving state. Or, it is not limited to (1) whether the number of reserved storages is 1 or more, and (2) whether the number of reserved storages is 0. For example, it may be classified as (1) the period after the reach state is established in the reach fluctuation, or (2) the period before the reach state is established in the reach fluctuation. Further, whether (1) the variable display without the reach effect (non-reach variation) is being executed, or (2) the variable display with the reach effect (reach variation) is being executed? It may be the division. Further, it may be classified as (1) a period during which the variable display without the pseudo-continuous effect is executed, or (2) a period during which the variable display with the pseudo-continuous effect is executed. .. Further, even if it is classified as (1) before the execution of the pseudo-continuous effect in the variable display accompanied by the pseudo-continuous effect, or (2) after the execution of the pseudo-continuous effect in the variable display accompanied by the pseudo-continuous effect. good. Further, both the execution ratio of the specific effect and the type of the specific effect may be different according to the difference in these categories.

The specific effect C (point-giving effect) can be switched between execution and non-execution according to the display setting table of FIG. 45, like the other specific effects A and B executed based on the winning of the game ball to the general winning opening. It has become like. Specifically, the display changeover switch 9032 is set to the display setting (second position), and the display is set by the player operation (setting operation using the operation button 9030 on the setting screen of FIG. 46). It can only be executed if. In this way, it is possible to reflect the intentions of the amusement park and the player with respect to whether or not the specific effect C is executed.

In addition, the specific effect C (point awarding effect) is not limited to the one in which 1 point is given for each winning in the general winning opening, and 2 points or 3 points are given for each winning in the general winning opening. It may be something that is done. The number of points to be awarded may differ depending on, for example, which general winning opening the gaming ball has won, and the state of the gaming machine when the gaming ball has won the general winning opening, for example. The gaming state may be different depending on the classification of whether it is a normal state, a probabilistic state, or a time-saving state.

Further, in the specific effect C (point awarding effect), points may be given according to factors other than winning the general winning opening. For example, points are given according to the winning to the starting winning opening. It may be done, or points may be given according to the establishment of the reach state or the like.

[33rd production form]
FIG. 62 illustrates a specific effect D (gauge update effect) as an effect in which the effect mode changes stepwise according to the winning of the game ball to the general winning opening. As shown in FIG. 62, the specific effect D (gauge update effect) is the filling area 902100a in the gauge image 902100 displayed on the image display device 905 in response to the winning of the game ball to the general winning opening. It is a production that can be changed step by step from a minimum of 0 stages to a maximum of 10 stages.

In the example of FIG. 62 (a), the filling region 902100a (black portion in the gauge image) in the gauge image 902100 is set to 0 steps according to the winning of the game ball in any of the first general winning openings 9050A to 9050D. It has increased from (a state in which the white part occupies 10/10) to one stage (a state in which the black part occupies 1/10 and the white part occupies 9/10) (gauge +1). Further, in the example of FIG. 62B, the filling region 902100a in the gauge image 902100 has 0 to 3 stages (black portion) according to the winning of the game ball in any of the first general winning openings 9050A to 9050D. Occupies 3/10 and the white part occupies 7/10) (gauge +3).

In this way, when the filling area 902100a in the gauge image 902100 increases according to the winning of the game ball to the general winning opening and reaches 10 stages (the black part in the gauge image occupies 10/10). In that case, the player shall be given a privilege. For example, as in the above-mentioned specific effect C, the image display device 905 displays a two-dimensional code for accessing the image providing server or the music providing server, and the player can obtain the desired image or music on the image providing server or music. It can be downloaded from the providing server to the information terminal.

Not limited to this, when the filling area 902100a in the gauge image 902100 reaches 10 stages, a special character may be displayed on the image display device 905, and a special music is output as BGM during the game. It may be possible. Alternatively, a variable result notice effect for notifying the possibility that the display result of the variable display related to the special figure game executed at the timing when the filling area 902100a reaches 10 stages may become a big hit symbol may be executed. It is also possible to execute a look-ahead notice effect for notifying the possibility that the display result of the variable display related to the special figure game held at the timing when the area 902100a reaches 10 stages becomes a big hit symbol.

That is, the privilege provided when the filling area 902100a in the gauge image 902100 reaches 10 stages may be an effect not related to the variable display result in the special figure game or the variable display result in the normal figure game. It may be an effect related to the variable display result in the game or the variable display result in the normal figure game. Further, the effect may be related to the gaming state, or may be an effect not related to the gaming state. Further, a different effect may be executed every time the filling region 902100a in the gauge image 902100 reaches 10 stages. Further, different effects may be executed depending on the gaming state or the like when the filling region 902100a in the gauge image 902100 reaches 10 stages.

When the filling area 902100a in the gauge image 902100 reaches 10 stages, a message to that effect is notified by displaying a message on the image display device 905, audio output from the speakers 908L, 908R, etc., and then the gauge image 902100. The filling region 902100a in is reset to the 0 stage. After the reset, the filling area 902100a in the gauge image 902100 will be increased again according to the winning of the game ball to the general winning opening.

In the 33rd effect mode to the 37th effect mode shown in FIGS. 63 to 64, each time the game ball wins a prize in any of the first general winning openings 9050A to the fourth general winning opening 9050D, the identification extracted from the random number circuit 90124. Based on the random number for determining the effect execution, it is determined whether or not to increase the stage of the filling region 902100a (hereinafter referred to as the gauge level) in the gauge image 902100 by one step. Increase by one step. That is, every time a game ball wins in any of the first general winning openings 9050A to the fourth general winning opening 9050D, a lottery is performed to determine whether or not to increase the gauge level by one level. If you win, the gauge level will increase by one level.

In the 33rd production mode, the timing at which the game ball wins in any of the first general winning openings 9050A to the fourth general winning opening 9050D is the period during which (1) the variable display of the special symbol is executed (within the symbol variation period). ), The gauge level increases by one step at a rate of 20%, and (2) a rate of 80% during the period when the variable display of the special symbol is not executed (outside the symbol fluctuation period). Increases the gauge level by one level. The effect control CPU 90120 issues a variation start command for designating the variation start in the special figure game and a variation pattern specification command for specifying the variation pattern such as the variation time of the special symbol in the special figure game and the decorative symbol in the image display device 905. By receiving from the game control microcomputer 90100, it is possible to specify whether or not the variable display of the special symbol is being executed.

Similar to the specific effect A to the specific effect C, the winning history storage area corresponding to the specific effect D is provided. When the gauge level reaches 10 levels, a notification to that effect and privilege grant (for example, display of a two-dimensional code for downloading images and songs, display of special characters, output of special songs, etc.) are accompanied. The winning history of the winning history storage area corresponding to the specific effect D (including at least 10 or more winning histories to the first general winning opening 9050A to the fourth general winning opening 9050D) is deleted.

In the 33rd effect form, and the 34th effect form, the 36th effect form, and the 37th effect form, which will be described later, (1) the general winning opening is performed during the period (within the symbol variation period) in which the variable display of the special symbol is executed. The rate at which the gauge level increases based on the winning of the game ball is that (2) the game ball wins in the general winning opening during the period when the variable display of the special symbol is not executed (outside the symbol fluctuation period). Based on that, the gauge level is set lower than the rate of increase. During the period (1), the player usually wins a general prize because the effect corresponding to the special figure game (for example, the effect of notifying the fluctuation result) is being executed by the image display device 905, the speakers 908L, and the 908R. I am more interested in these effects, including the variable display of decorative patterns, rather than the winning status of the game ball to the mouth. Therefore, even if the gauge level is increased during the period (1), it may adversely affect the interest of the specific production. On the other hand, in the period (2), the player is able to increase the gauge level by increasing the gauge level because the production corresponding to the special figure game, which is normally the object of interest, is not executed. It is easy to be interested in this. Therefore, by increasing the gauge level at a higher rate than the period of (1), the interest of the specific production is appropriately enhanced.

In the 33rd effect mode, the timing at which the game ball wins in any of the first general winning openings 9050A to the fourth general winning opening 9050D is the period during which (1) the variable display of the special symbol is executed (symbol variation). If it is within the period), the gauge level is not increased, and (2) it is possible to increase the gauge level if it is the period during which the variable display of the special symbol is not executed (outside the symbol fluctuation period). Is also good. Further, contrary to the example shown in the 33rd effect form, (1) the gauge is based on the fact that the game ball wins in the general winning opening during the period (within the symbol fluctuation period) in which the variable display of the special symbol is executed. The rate at which the level increases is higher than the rate at which the gauge level increases based on (2) a game ball winning a prize in the general winning opening during the period when the variable display of the special symbol is not executed (outside the symbol fluctuation period). It may be set to be.

[34th production form]
In the 34th production mode, the timing at which the game ball wins in any of the first general winning openings 9050A to the fourth general winning opening 9050D is (1) the period during which the variable display of the special symbol is not executed (outside the symbol fluctuation period). ), The gauge level is increased by one step at a rate of 80%. The timing at which the game ball wins in any of the first general winning openings 9050A to the fourth general winning opening 9050D is (2) the period during which the variable display of the special symbol is executed (within the symbol variation period) and special. When the remaining time until the confirmed special symbol is stopped and displayed as a variable display result in the figure game is 10 seconds or more, the gauge level is increased by one step at a rate of 40%. The timing at which the game ball wins in any of the first general winning openings 9050A to the fourth general winning opening 9050D is (3) the period during which the variable display of the special symbol is executed (within the symbol variation period) and special. When the remaining time until the confirmed special symbol is stopped and displayed as a variable display result in the figure game is less than 10 seconds, the gauge level is increased by one step at a rate of 10%.

The effect control CPU 90120 issues a variation start command for designating the variation start in the special figure game and a variation pattern specification command for specifying the variation pattern such as the variation time of the special symbol in the special figure game and the decorative symbol in the image display device 905. By receiving from the game control microcomputer 90100, it is possible to specify whether or not the variable display of the special symbol is being executed, and until the variable display of the special symbol is completed (the confirmed special symbol is). It is possible to specify the remaining time (until the stop is displayed). For example, by setting the variation time of the special symbol specified by the variation pattern specification command as the value of the variation time timer when the variation start command and the variation pattern specification command are received, the effect control CPU 90120 has the variation time. The remaining time until the timer value times out can be specified as the remaining time until the variable display of the special symbol ends (until the confirmed special symbol is stopped and displayed). Further, when the confirmed special symbol is stopped and displayed as the variable display result in the special symbol game, the confirmed decorative symbol (final stopped symbol) which is the variable display result of the decorative symbol is stopped and displayed. The remaining time until the value of the variable time timer times out can be specified as the remaining time until the variable display of the decorative symbol ends (until the fixed decorative symbol is stopped and displayed).

When the gauge level reaches 10 levels, notification to that effect and privilege grant (for example, display of a two-dimensional code for downloading images and songs, display of special characters, output of special songs, etc.) Along with this, the winning history of the winning history storage area corresponding to the specific effect D (at least the winning history of 10 times or more to the first general winning opening 9050A to the fourth general winning opening 9050D) is deleted.

In the 34th effect mode, (2) the rate at which the gauge level increases based on the fact that the game ball wins in the general winning opening when the symbol is stopped for 10 seconds or more is (3) when the symbol is stopped for less than 10 seconds. It is set higher than the rate at which the gauge level increases based on the fact that the game ball has won a prize in the general winning opening. In the period (3), the player is usually more interested in what the fixed decorative pattern that is stopped and displayed will be, rather than the winning status of the game ball in the general winning opening. Therefore, even if the gauge level is increased during the period (3), it may adversely affect the interest of the specific production. On the other hand, in the period (2), since there is a grace period until the fixed decoration symbol is stopped and displayed, the player is likely to be interested in this by increasing the gauge level. Therefore, by increasing the gauge level at a higher rate than the period of (3), the interest of the specific production is appropriately enhanced.

In the 34th production mode, the gauge level is increased when the timing at which the game ball wins in any of the first general winning openings 9050A to the fourth general winning opening 9050D is the period (2). It is possible, and in the case of the period (3), the gauge level may not be increased. Further, contrary to the example shown in the 34th effect form, (2) the rate at which the gauge level increases based on the fact that the game ball wins in the general winning opening when the symbol is stopped for 10 seconds or more is (3). ) It may be set to be lower than the rate at which the gauge level increases based on the fact that the game ball wins in the general winning opening when it takes less than 10 seconds to stop the symbol.

Further, in the 34th production mode, the timing at which the game ball wins in any of the first general winning openings 9050A to the fourth general winning opening 9050D is a common period (either (2) or (3)). In some cases, the gauge level may be increased at different rates depending on whether the jackpot symbol is stopped and displayed as a variable display result in the special symbol game being executed and the missed symbol is stopped and displayed. For example, the effect control CPU 90120 has a decorative pattern that is executed when the timing at which the game ball wins in any of the first general winning openings 9050A to the fourth general winning opening 9050D is the period (2). If the display result of the variable display is a big hit symbol, the gauge level is increased at a rate of 70%, and if the display result is an off symbol, the gauge level is increased at a rate of 40%, while the first general prize is awarded. When the timing at which the game ball wins in any of the mouth 9050A to the fourth general winning mouth 9050D is the period (3), and the display result of the variable display of the decorative symbol being executed is the jackpot symbol. May increase the gauge level at a rate of 30%, and increase the gauge level at a rate of 10% when the displayed result is an out-of-order symbol.

[35th production form]
As a look-ahead notice effect for notifying the variable display result in the reserved special figure game, the specific effect B is exemplified as described above. In the specific effect B shown in FIG. 50 (b), is the start winning judgment result specification command for specifying "big hit" included in the start winning judgment result specification command stored in the start winning command storage area? Based on whether or not, it is determined whether the effect mode of the look-ahead notice effect is the first aspect (voice effect only) or the second aspect (voice effect and character effect). That is, in the look-ahead notice effect such as the specific effect B, the variable display (hereinafter referred to as target change) that is the target of the look-ahead notice is not notified to the player, and the player grasps the target change. It has become difficult.

As a look-ahead notice effect, it is also possible to adopt an effect of notifying the target change. For example, as described above, in the start prize storage display area 905H, a plurality of display parts whose display colors are changed from left to right in order from the variable display game in which the start condition is first satisfied based on the occurrence of the start prize. Is provided. When the effect control CPU 90120 receives the start winning determination result specification command, if it is a command that specifies "big hit", the display portion corresponding to the command is displayed corresponding to the command that specifies "off". It is possible to execute a hold change effect that is displayed in a special mode (for example, gold) different from that of the part. The target variation in this case is a variable display corresponding to the display portion displayed in a special mode, and the player can grasp the remaining variable display number of times to be executed until the target variation.

For example, if the command specifies "big hit" when the start winning judgment result specification command is received, the display part corresponding to the command is displayed in a special mode at a rate of 70%, and at a rate of 30%. The display part corresponding to the command is displayed in a normal manner. On the other hand, if the command specifies "missing" when the start winning judgment result specification command is received, the display part corresponding to the command is displayed in a special mode at a rate of 5%, and at a rate of 95%. The display part corresponding to the command shall be displayed in a normal manner. In this way, when the display part corresponding to the hold memory generated by the start prize is displayed in a special mode at the time of the start prize, the display part in the special mode is displayed every time the variable display game is executed (the start condition is satisfied). Every), it will move to the left, and when the start condition of the variable display game (variable display that is the target of the look-ahead notice) corresponding to the display part of the special mode is satisfied, the special mode The display part disappears from the start winning memory display area 905H. In such an aspect, the hold change effect is executed during the period from the start winning to the establishment of the start condition of the variable display game corresponding to the starting winning.

That is, when the start condition of the variable display game is satisfied according to the order in which the start condition of the variable display game is satisfied, the hold change effect is executed, so that the display portion displayed in the special mode (the target of the hold change effect) is executed. Depending on the number of display parts in the normal mode (display information corresponding to the hold storage of the variable display that is not the target of the hold change effect) existing to the left of the display information corresponding to the hold storage of the variable display). , It becomes possible to grasp the number of remaining variable display games until the variable display that is the target of the hold change effect is executed.

The timing for displaying the display portion in a special mode is not limited to the start winning prize. For example, at the time of winning a start, the display portion may be displayed in a normal mode, and after a predetermined effect, the normal mode may be changed to a special mode. May be changed from the normal mode to the special mode at the timing when the shift to the left). In these aspects, from the timing when the display part corresponding to the variable display that is the target of the look-ahead notice changes from the normal state to the special mode, until the start condition of the variable display that is the target of the look-ahead notice is satisfied. During the period, the pending change effect is being executed.

In the 35th effect mode, the timing at which the game ball wins in any of the first general winning openings 9050A to the fourth general winning opening 9050D is determined by (1) the pre-reading advance notice effect is not executed and the target change is also executed. If there is no period (when there is no display portion of a special aspect in the hold change effect and it is not the execution period of the target change), the gauge level is increased by one step at a rate of 80%.

In addition, the timing at which the game ball wins in any of the first general winning openings 9050A to the fourth general winning opening 9050D is (2) the pre-reading notice effect is executed, and the remaining variable display number until the target change is 2 or more. If the period is (when there are two or more special figure games for which the start condition is satisfied before the special figure game corresponding to the display part of the special mode in the hold change effect), the ratio is 40%. Increases the gauge level by one level.

Further, the timing at which the game ball wins in any of the first general winning openings 9050A to the fourth general winning opening 9050D is (3) the pre-reading notice effect is executed, and the remaining variable display number until the target change is 1. If it is during the period (when there is one special figure game for which the start condition is satisfied before the special figure game corresponding to the display part of the special mode in the hold change effect), the gauge is at a rate of 20%. The level increases by one level.

Further, when the timing at which the game ball wins in any of the first general winning openings 9050A to the fourth general winning opening 9050D is (4) the execution period of the target change accompanying the end of the look-ahead notice effect (in the hold change effect). During the period during which the variable display based on the establishment of the start condition of the special figure game corresponding to the display portion of the special aspect is executed), the gauge level is increased by one step at a rate of 10%.

When the gauge level reaches 10 levels, notification to that effect and privilege grant (for example, display of a two-dimensional code for downloading images and songs, display of special characters, output of special songs, etc.) Along with this, the winning history of the winning history storage area corresponding to the specific effect D (at least the winning history of 10 times or more to the first general winning opening 9050A to the fourth general winning opening 9050D) is deleted.

In the 35th effect mode, (2) the rate at which the gauge level increases based on the game ball winning in the general winning opening when the remaining variable display count until the target change is 2 or more is up to (3) the target change. When the remaining variable display count is 1, the rate at which the gauge level increases based on the winning of the game ball in the general winning opening, (4) When the remaining variable display count until the target change is 0 (execution of target change) It is set higher than the rate at which the gauge level increases based on the fact that the game ball has won a prize in the general winning opening (during the period). In the period (3), the player is usually more interested in the target change to be executed next than the winning situation of the game ball to the general winning opening. Further, in the period (4), the player is usually more interested in the currently executed target change than the winning situation of the game ball in the general winning opening. Therefore, even if the gauge level is increased during the periods (3) and (4), the interest of the specific production may be impaired. On the other hand, in the period (2), since there is a grace period until the target change is executed, the player is likely to be interested in this by increasing the gauge level. Therefore, by increasing the gauge level at a higher rate than the periods of (3) and (4), the interest of the specific production is appropriately enhanced.

In the 35th production mode, the gauge level is increased when the timing at which the game ball wins in any of the first general winning openings 9050A to the fourth general winning opening 9050D is the period (2). It is possible, and if it is the period of (3) and (4), the gauge level may not be increased. Further, contrary to the example shown in the 35th effect mode, (2) the rate at which the gauge level increases when the number of remaining variable display times until the target fluctuation is 2 or more is (3) the remaining variable until the target fluctuation. It may be set to be lower than the rate at which the gauge level increases when the number of impressions is 1, and (4) the rate at which the gauge level increases during the execution period of the target fluctuation.

Further, in the 35th production mode, the timing at which the game ball wins in any of the first general winning openings 9050A to the fourth general winning opening 9050D is any of the common periods ((2), (3), (4). In the case of (?), The gauge level may be increased at different rates depending on whether the jackpot symbol is stopped and displayed as a variable display result in the target fluctuation and the off-target symbol is stopped and displayed. For example, in the effect control CPU 90120, when the timing at which the game ball wins in any of the first general winning openings 9050A to the fourth general winning opening 9050D is the period (2), the variable display result in the target fluctuation is displayed. If it becomes a big hit symbol, the gauge level is increased at a rate of 70%, and if the variable display result is a missed symbol, the gauge level is increased at a rate of 40%. When the timing when the game ball wins in any of the winning openings 9050D is the period (3), if the variable display result in the target fluctuation becomes a big hit symbol, the gauge level is increased at a rate of 30%. If the variable display result is an out-of-order symbol, the gauge level is increased at a rate of 20%, and the timing at which the game ball wins in any of the first general winning openings 9050A to the fourth general winning opening 9050D is (4). In the case of the period of, if the variable display result in the target fluctuation is a big hit symbol, the gauge level is increased at a rate of 15%, and if the variable display result is a missed symbol, the gauge level is increased at a rate of 10%. May be increased.

[36th production form]
In the 36th production mode, the timing at which the game ball wins in any of the first general winning openings 9050A to the fourth general winning opening 9050D is (1) the period during which the variable display of the special symbol is not executed (outside the symbol fluctuation period). ), The gauge level is increased by one step at a rate of 80%. Further, the timing at which the game ball wins in any of the first general winning openings 9050A to the fourth general winning opening 9050D is the period during which (2) variable display (non-reach variation) without reach effect is executed. In that case, the gauge level is increased by one step at a rate of 40%.

Further, the timing at which the game ball wins in any of the first general winning openings 9050A to the fourth general winning opening 9050D is the period during which (3) the variable display (reach fluctuation) accompanied by the reach effect is executed. In the period before the reach state is established, the gauge level is increased by one step at a rate of 20%, and (4) the variable display (reach fluctuation) accompanied by the reach effect is executed and the reach state is reached. In the case of the period after the establishment, the gauge level is increased by one step at a rate of 10%.

When the gauge level reaches 10 levels, notification to that effect and privilege grant (for example, display of a two-dimensional code for downloading images and songs, display of special characters, output of special songs, etc.) Along with this, the winning history of the winning history storage area corresponding to the specific effect D (at least the winning history of 10 times or more to the first general winning opening 9050A to the fourth general winning opening 9050D) is deleted.

In the 36th production mode, (3) the rate at which the gauge level increases based on the fact that the game ball wins in the general winning opening before the reach state is established in the reach fluctuation is general after (4) the reach state is established in the reach fluctuation. It is set higher than the rate at which the gauge level increases based on the winning of a game ball in the winning opening. In the period (4), the player is usually more interested in the remaining decorative symbols that have not been stopped and displayed after the reach state is established, rather than the winning status of the game ball to the general winning opening. Therefore, even if the gauge level is increased during the period (4), the interest of the specific production may be impaired. On the other hand, in the period (3), since the reach state is not established, the player is likely to be interested in this by increasing the gauge level. Therefore, by increasing the gauge level at a higher rate than the period of (4), the interest of the specific production is appropriately enhanced.

In the 36th production mode, the gauge level is increased when the timing at which the game ball wins in any of the first general winning openings 9050A to the fourth general winning opening 9050D is the period (3). It is possible, and in the case of the period (4), the gauge level may not be increased. Further, contrary to the example shown in the 36th effect mode, (3) the rate at which the gauge level increases during the period during which the reach fluctuation is executed and before the reach state is established is (4). ) It may be set to be lower than the rate at which the gauge level increases when the reach fluctuation is executed and the period after the reach state is established.

[37th production form]
In the 37th effect mode shown in FIG. 64, the rate of increasing the gauge level differs depending on which of the plurality of general winning openings is won. When the timing at which the game ball wins in either the second general winning opening 9050B or the third general winning opening 9050C is (1) the period during which the variable display of the special symbol is executed (within the symbol fluctuation period). The gauge level increases by one level at a rate of 10%. On the other hand, when the timing at which the game ball wins in either the first general winning opening 9050A or the fourth general winning opening 9050D is (1) the period during which the variable display of the special symbol is executed (within the symbol fluctuation period). The gauge level is increased by one step at a rate of 20%.

Further, when the timing at which the game ball wins in either the second general winning opening 9050B or the third general winning opening 9050C is (2) the period during which the variable display of the special symbol is not executed (outside the symbol fluctuation period). The gauge level is increased by one step at a rate of 40%. On the other hand, when the timing at which the game ball wins in either the first general winning opening 9050A or the fourth general winning opening 9050D is (2) the period during which the variable display of the special symbol is not executed (outside the symbol fluctuation period). The gauge level is increased by one step at a rate of 80%.

When the gauge level reaches 10 levels, notification to that effect and privilege grant (for example, display of a two-dimensional code for downloading images and songs, display of special characters, output of special songs, etc.) Along with this, the winning history of the winning history storage area corresponding to the specific effect D (at least the winning history of 10 times or more to the first general winning opening 9050A to the fourth general winning opening 9050D) is deleted.

In the 37th effect mode, the rate at which the gauge level increases differs between (1) within the symbol fluctuation period and (2) outside the symbol fluctuation period, and further, the second general winning opening 9050B or the third general winning opening The rate at which the gauge level increases differs between the case where the game ball wins the 9050C and the case where the game ball wins the first general winning opening 9050A or the fourth general winning opening 9050D. Since the rate at which the gauge level increases differs depending on the general winning opening where the game ball wins, the player becomes interested in which general winning opening the game ball has won, and improves the interest. be able to.

For example, the first general prize provided near the edge of the game area 9010 rather than the prize of the game ball to the second general prize opening 9050B and the third general prize opening 9050C provided near the center of the game area 9010. When it is difficult to win a game ball in the opening 9050A and the 4th general winning opening 9050D, the rate at which the gauge level increases when the game ball wins in the 1st general winning opening 9050A and the 4th general winning opening 9050D. By making the gauge level higher than the rate at which the gauge level increases when the game ball wins in the 2nd general winning opening 9050B and the 3rd general winning opening 9050C, the interest in winning the general winning opening that is more difficult to win is made. It is good to increase it.

In addition, in the 37th production form, when a game ball wins in the 1st general winning opening or the 4th general winning opening, it is possible to increase the gauge level, and the 2nd general winning opening or the 3rd general winning opening can be used. If the game ball wins, the gauge level may not be increased. Further, contrary to the example shown in the 37th production form, the rate at which the gauge level increases when the game ball wins in the first general winning opening 9050A or the fourth general winning opening 9050D is the second general winning opening 9050B. Alternatively, it may be set to be lower than the rate at which the gauge level increases when the game ball wins in the third general winning opening 9050C.

[38th production form]
In the 38th effect mode to the 42nd effect mode shown in FIGS. 65 and 66, it is not determined whether or not the specific effect is executed based on the random number for determining the execution of the specific effect extracted from the random number circuit 90124. Further, in the 38th effect mode to the 42nd effect mode, the gauge level that increases with one winning to the general winning opening is not limited to one stage. For example, as shown in FIG. 62 (b), the gauge level may be increased by three steps according to one winning in the general winning opening.

In the 38th production mode, the timing at which the game ball wins in any of the first general winning openings 9050A to the fourth general winning opening 9050D is the period during which (1) the variable display of the special symbol is executed (within the symbol variation period). ), The gauge level is increased by one step (gauge +1), and (2) the gauge level is three steps during the period when the variable display of the special symbol is not executed (outside the symbol fluctuation period). Increase (gauge +3).

When the gauge level reaches 10 levels, notification to that effect and privilege grant (for example, display of a two-dimensional code for downloading images and songs, display of special characters, output of special songs, etc.) Along with this, the winning history of the winning history storage area corresponding to the specific effect D (at least the winning history of four or more times to the first general winning opening 9050A to the fourth general winning opening 9050D) is deleted.

In the 38th effect form, and the 39th effect form, the 41st effect form, and the 42nd effect form, which will be described later, (1) the general winning opening is performed during the period (within the symbol variation period) in which the variable display of the special symbol is executed. The number of gauge level stages that increase based on the winning of the game ball is (2) that the game ball has won a prize in the general winning opening during the period when the variable display of the special symbol is not executed (outside the symbol change period). It is set to be less than the number of gauge level steps that increase based on. During the period (1), the player usually wins a general prize because the effect corresponding to the special figure game (for example, the effect of notifying the fluctuation result) is being executed by the image display device 905, the speakers 908L, and the 908R. I am more interested in these effects, including the variable display of decorative patterns, rather than the winning status of the game ball to the mouth. Therefore, even if the gauge level is increased a lot during the period (1), it may adversely affect the interest of the specific production. On the other hand, in the period (2), the player is increased by increasing the gauge level because the production corresponding to the special figure game, which is normally the object of interest, is not executed. Is in a situation where it is easy to be interested in this. Therefore, by increasing the gauge level more than the period of (1), the interest of the specific production is appropriately enhanced.

In the 38th production mode, the timing at which the game ball wins in any of the first general winning openings 9050A to the fourth general winning opening 9050D is the period during which (1) the variable display of the special symbol is executed (symbol variation). If it is within the period), the rate of increasing the gauge level by two or more steps is set to, for example, 20% (the rate of changing only one step is 80%), and (2) the period during which the variable display of the special symbol is not executed (2). In the case of (outside the symbol fluctuation period), the rate of increasing the gauge level by two or more steps may be set to, for example, 80% (the rate of changing only one step is 20%). Further, contrary to the example shown in the 38th effect form, (1) the gauge is based on the fact that the game ball wins in the general winning opening during the period (within the symbol fluctuation period) in which the variable display of the special symbol is executed. The number of stages where the level increases is (2) the number of stages where the gauge level increases based on the fact that the game ball wins in the general winning opening during the period when the variable display of the special symbol is not executed (outside the symbol fluctuation period). May be set to increase.

In addition, as a privilege given when the gauge level reaches 10 levels, a privilege having a different value may be given. For example, when the gauge level reaches 10 levels, a two-dimensional code that can download only images may be displayed, or a two-dimensional code that can download images and music may be displayed. At this time, the latter has a greater privilege value than the former. The number of stages in which the gauge level increases may indicate the magnitude of the privilege value given when the gauge level reaches 10 stages. For example, when the timing at which the game ball wins in any of the first general winning openings 9050A to the fourth general winning opening 9050D is (1) the period during which the variable display of the special symbol is executed (within the symbol fluctuation period). In addition, when the privilege value is small, the rate of increasing the gauge level by two or more steps is, for example, 20% (the rate of changing only one step is 80%), and when the benefit value is large, the gauge level is increased by two or more steps. For example, the rate of increase is 40% (the rate of changing only one step is 60%), and (2) the privilege value is small when the variable display of the special symbol is not executed (outside the symbol change period). For example, the rate of increasing the gauge level by two or more steps is 50% (the rate of changing only one step is 50%), and when the privilege value is large, the rate of increasing the gauge level by two or more steps is, for example, 80%. (The rate of changing only one step is 20%).

[39th production form]
In the 39th production mode, the timing at which the game ball wins in any of the first general winning openings 9050A to the fourth general winning opening 9050D is (1) the period during which the variable display of the special symbol is not executed (outside the symbol fluctuation period). ), The gauge level is increased by 3 steps (gauge +3). The timing at which the game ball wins in any of the first general winning openings 9050A to the fourth general winning opening 9050D is (2) the period during which the variable display of the special symbol is executed (within the symbol variation period) and special. When the remaining time until the confirmed special symbol is stopped and displayed as a variable display result in the figure game is 10 seconds or more, the gauge level is increased by 2 steps (gauge +2). The timing at which the game ball wins in any of the first general winning openings 9050A to the fourth general winning opening 9050D is (3) the period during which the variable display of the special symbol is executed (within the symbol variation period) and special. When the remaining time until the confirmed special symbol is stopped and displayed as a variable display result in the figure game is less than 10 seconds, the gauge level is increased by one step (gauge +1).

When the gauge level reaches 10 levels, notification to that effect and privilege grant (for example, display of a two-dimensional code for downloading images and songs, display of special characters, output of special songs, etc.) Along with this, the winning history of the winning history storage area corresponding to the specific effect D (at least the winning history of four or more times to the first general winning opening 9050A to the fourth general winning opening 9050D) is deleted.

In the 39th effect mode, the number of gauge level stages that increase based on (2) a game ball winning a prize in the general winning opening when 10 seconds or more until the symbol stops is (3) less than 10 seconds until the symbol stops. It is sometimes set higher than the number of gauge level stages that increase based on the winning of a game ball in the general winning opening. In the period (3), the player is usually more interested in what the fixed decorative pattern that is stopped and displayed will be, rather than the winning status of the game ball in the general winning opening. Therefore, even if the gauge level is increased a lot during the period (3), it may adversely affect the interest of the specific production. On the other hand, in the period (2), since there is a grace period until the fixed decoration symbol is stopped and displayed, the player is likely to be interested in this by increasing the gauge level a lot. Therefore, by increasing the gauge level more than the period of (3), the interest of the specific production is appropriately enhanced.

In the 39th production mode, when the timing at which the game ball wins in any of the first general winning openings 9050A to the fourth general winning opening 9050D is the period (2), the gauge level is increased by two or more steps. For example, 80% (the rate of changing only one step is 20%), and in the case of the period (3), the rate of increasing the gauge level by two or more steps is, for example, 20% (the rate of changing only one step). Is 80%). Further, contrary to the example shown in the 39th production form, (2) the number of stages in which the gauge level increases based on the fact that the game ball wins in the general winning opening when the symbol is stopped for 10 seconds or more is (2). 3) The gauge level may be set to be less than the number of stages in which the gauge level is increased based on the fact that the game ball has won a prize in the general winning opening when the symbol is stopped in less than 10 seconds.

Further, in the 39th production mode, the timing at which the game ball wins in any of the first general winning openings 9050A to the fourth general winning opening 9050D is a common period (either (2) or (3)). In some cases, the gauge level may be increased at different stages depending on whether the jackpot symbol is stopped and displayed as a variable display result in the special symbol game being executed and the missed symbol is stopped and displayed. For example, the effect control CPU 90120 has a decorative pattern that is executed when the timing at which the game ball wins in any of the first general winning openings 9050A to the fourth general winning opening 9050D is the period (2). If the display result of the variable display is a big hit symbol, the gauge level is increased by 3 steps, and if the display result is an off symbol, the gauge level is increased by 2 steps, while the 1st general winning opening 9050A to the 4th general If the timing when the game ball wins in any of the winning openings 9050D is the period (3), and the display result of the variable display of the decorative symbol being executed is the jackpot symbol, the gauge level is set to 2 levels. If the number is increased and the displayed result is out of order, the gauge level may be increased by one step.

[40th production form]
In the 40th production mode, the timing at which the game ball wins in any of the 1st general winning opening 9050A to the 4th general winning opening 9050D is determined by (1) the pre-reading advance notice effect is not executed and the target change is also executed. If there is no period (when there is no display part of the special mode in the hold change effect and it is not the execution period of the target change), the gauge level is increased by 4 steps (gauge +4).

In addition, the timing at which the game ball wins in any of the first general winning openings 9050A to the fourth general winning opening 9050D is (2) the pre-reading notice effect is executed, and the remaining variable display number until the target change is 2 or more. If the period is (when there are two or more special figure games for which the start condition is satisfied before the special figure game corresponding to the display part of the special mode in the hold change effect), the gauge level is 3. Increase in stages (gauge +3).

Further, the timing at which the game ball wins in any of the first general winning openings 9050A to the fourth general winning opening 9050D is (3) the pre-reading notice effect is executed, and the remaining variable display number until the target change is 1. If it is during the period (when there is 1 special figure game for which the start condition is satisfied before the special figure game corresponding to the display part of the special mode in the hold change effect), the gauge level is increased by 2 steps. (Gauge +2).

Further, when the timing at which the game ball wins in any of the first general winning openings 9050A to the fourth general winning opening 9050D is (4) the execution period of the target change accompanying the end of the look-ahead notice effect (in the hold change effect). The gauge level is increased by one step (gauge +1) during the period during which the variable display based on the establishment of the start condition of the special figure game corresponding to the display portion of the special aspect is executed).

When the gauge level reaches 10 levels, notification to that effect and privilege grant (for example, display of a two-dimensional code for downloading images and songs, display of special characters, output of special songs, etc.) Along with this, the winning history of the winning history storage area corresponding to the specific effect D (including at least three or more winning histories to the first general winning opening 9050A to the fourth general winning opening 9050D) is deleted.

In the 40th production mode, (2) the number of gauge level steps that increase based on the winning of the game ball in the general winning opening when the remaining variable display number until the target change is 2 or more is (3) the target change. When the remaining variable display count up to 1 is 1, the number of gauge level increases that increases based on the winning of the game ball in the general winning opening, (4) When the remaining variable display count until the target change is 0 (target change) It is set to be larger than the number of gauge level stages that increase based on the winning of a game ball in the general winning opening during the execution period of. In the period (3), the player is usually more interested in the target change to be executed next than the winning situation of the game ball to the general winning opening. Further, in the period (4), the player is usually more interested in the currently executed target change than the winning situation of the game ball in the general winning opening. Therefore, even if the gauge level is increased a lot during the periods (3) and (4), the interest of the specific production may be impaired. On the other hand, in the period (2), since there is a grace period until the target change is executed, the player is likely to be interested in this by increasing the gauge level a lot. Therefore, by increasing the gauge level more than during the periods (3) and (4), the interest of the specific production is appropriately enhanced.

In the 40th production mode, when the timing at which the game ball wins in any of the first general winning openings 9050A to the fourth general winning opening 9050D is the period (2), the gauge level is increased by two or more steps. For example, the rate of increasing the gauge level is set to 80% (the rate of changing only one step is 20%), and in the period of (3) and (4), the rate of increasing the gauge level by two or more steps is set to, for example, 20% (only one step). The rate of change may be 80%). Further, contrary to the example shown in the 40th effect mode, (2) the number of steps in which the gauge level increases when the remaining variable display count until the target fluctuation is 2 or more is (3) the remaining until the target fluctuation. It may be set to be less than the number of steps in which the gauge level increases when the variable display count is 1, and (4) the number of steps in which the gauge level increases during the execution period of the target fluctuation.

Further, in the 40th production mode, the timing at which the game ball wins in any of the first general winning openings 9050A to the fourth general winning opening 9050D is any of the common periods ((2), (3), (4). In the case of (?), The gauge level may be increased at different rates depending on whether the jackpot symbol is stopped and displayed as a variable display result in the target fluctuation and the off-target symbol is stopped and displayed. For example, in the effect control CPU 90120, when the timing at which the game ball wins in any of the first general winning openings 9050A to the fourth general winning opening 9050D is the period (2), the variable display result in the target fluctuation is displayed. If it becomes a big hit symbol, the gauge level is increased by 4 steps, and if the variable display result is out of order, the gauge level is increased by 3 steps, and either the 1st general winning opening 9050A to the 4th general winning opening 9050D. When the timing when the game ball wins the prize is the period (3), if the variable display result in the target fluctuation becomes a big hit symbol, the gauge level is increased by 3 steps, and the variable display result becomes an off symbol. The gauge level is increased by two steps, and when the timing when the game ball wins in any of the first general winning opening 9050A to the fourth general winning opening 9050D is the period (4), the variable display in the target fluctuation. If the result is a big hit symbol, the gauge level may be increased by two steps, and if the variable display result is a missed symbol, the gauge level may be increased by one step.

[41st production form]
In the 41st production mode, the timing at which the game ball wins in any of the 1st general winning opening 9050A to the 4th general winning opening 9050D is (1) the period during which the variable display of the special symbol is not executed (outside the symbol fluctuation period). ), The gauge level is increased by 4 steps (gauge +4). Further, the timing at which the game ball wins in any of the first general winning openings 9050A to the fourth general winning opening 9050D is the period during which (2) variable display (non-reach variation) without reach effect is executed. In that case, the gauge level is increased by 3 steps (gauge +3).

Further, the timing at which the game ball wins in any of the first general winning openings 9050A to the fourth general winning opening 9050D is the period during which (3) the variable display (reach fluctuation) accompanied by the reach effect is executed. If it is a period before the reach state is established, the gauge level is increased by 2 steps (gauge +3), and (4) the variable display (reach fluctuation) accompanied by the reach effect is executed and the reach state is established. For subsequent periods, the gauge level increases by one level (gauge +1).

When the gauge level reaches 10 levels, notification to that effect and privilege grant (for example, display of a two-dimensional code for downloading images and songs, display of special characters, output of special songs, etc.) Along with this, the winning history of the winning history storage area corresponding to the specific effect D (including at least three or more winning histories to the first general winning opening 9050A to the fourth general winning opening 9050D) is deleted.

In the 41st production mode, the number of gauge level stages that increase based on (3) a game ball winning a prize in the general winning opening before the reach state is established in the reach fluctuation is (4) after the reach state is established in the reach fluctuation. It is set to be larger than the number of gauge level stages that increase based on the winning of a game ball in the general winning opening. In the period (4), the player is usually more interested in the remaining decorative symbols that have not been stopped and displayed after the reach state is established, rather than the winning status of the game ball to the general winning opening. Therefore, even if the gauge level is increased a lot during the period (4), it may adversely affect the interest of the specific production. On the other hand, in the period (3), since the reach state is not established, the player is likely to be interested in this by increasing the gauge level a lot. Therefore, by increasing the gauge level more than the period of (4), the interest of the specific production is appropriately enhanced.

In the 41st production mode, when the timing at which the game ball wins in any of the first general winning openings 9050A to the fourth general winning opening 9050D is the period (3), the gauge level is increased by two or more steps. For example, 80% (the rate of changing only one step is 20%), and in the case of the period (4), the rate of increasing the gauge level by two or more steps is, for example, 20% (the rate of changing only one step). Is 80%). Further, contrary to the example shown in the 41st effect form, (3) the number of stages in which the gauge level increases when the reach fluctuation is executed and the reach state is not established is (3). 4) The gauge level may be set to be less than the number of steps in which the gauge level increases during the period in which the reach fluctuation is executed and in the period after the reach state is established.

[42nd production form]
In the 42nd effect mode shown in FIG. 66, the number of stages for increasing the gauge level differs depending on which of the plurality of general winning openings is won. When the timing at which the game ball wins in either the second general winning opening 9050B or the third general winning opening 9050C is (1) the period during which the variable display of the special symbol is executed (within the symbol fluctuation period). , Gauge level increases by 1 level (gauge +1). On the other hand, when the timing at which the game ball wins in either the first general winning opening 9050A or the fourth general winning opening 9050D is (1) the period during which the variable display of the special symbol is executed (within the symbol fluctuation period). The gauge level is increased by 2 steps (gauge +2).

Further, when the timing at which the game ball wins in either the second general winning opening 9050B or the third general winning opening 9050C is (2) the period during which the variable display of the special symbol is not executed (outside the symbol fluctuation period). Increases the gauge level by 3 levels (gauge +3). On the other hand, when the timing at which the game ball wins in either the first general winning opening 9050A or the fourth general winning opening 9050D is (2) the period during which the variable display of the special symbol is not executed (outside the symbol fluctuation period). Increases the gauge level by 4 levels (gauge +4).

When the gauge level reaches 10 levels, notification to that effect and privilege grant (for example, display of a two-dimensional code for downloading images and songs, display of special characters, output of special songs, etc.) Along with this, the winning history of the winning history storage area corresponding to the specific effect D (including at least three or more winning histories to the first general winning opening 9050A to the fourth general winning opening 9050D) is deleted.

In the 42nd production mode, the number of stages of the gauge level to be increased is different between (1) within the symbol fluctuation period and (2) outside the symbol fluctuation period, and further, the second general winning opening 9050B or the third general winning The number of steps of the gauge level to be increased is different depending on whether the game ball wins in the mouth 9050C or the game ball wins in the first general winning opening 9050A or the fourth general winning opening 9050D. Since the number of gauge level stages to be increased differs depending on the general winning opening that the game ball has won, the player becomes interested in which general winning opening the game ball has won, and the interest is improved. Can be made to.

For example, the first general prize provided near the edge of the game area 9010 rather than the prize of the game ball to the second general prize opening 9050B and the third general prize opening 9050C provided near the center of the game area 9010. When it is difficult to win a game ball in the opening 9050A and the 4th general winning opening 9050D, the gauge level increases when the game ball wins in the 1st general winning opening 9050A and the 4th general winning opening 9050D. By increasing the number more than the number of stages in which the gauge level increases when the game ball wins in the 2nd general winning opening 9050B and the 3rd general winning opening 9050C, the winning in the general winning opening that is more difficult to win It's a good idea to enhance your interest.

In the 42nd production mode, when a game ball wins in the 1st general winning opening or the 4th general winning opening, the rate of increasing the gauge level by 2 or more steps is, for example, 80% (the rate of changing only 1 step is 20). %), And when a game ball wins in the 2nd general winning opening or the 3rd general winning opening, the rate of increasing the gauge level by 2 steps or more is set to, for example, 20% (the rate of changing only 1 step is 80%). Is also good. Further, contrary to the example shown in the 42nd production form, the number of stages in which the gauge level increases when the game ball wins in the first general winning opening 9050A or the fourth general winning opening 9050D is the second general winning opening. It may be set to be less than the number of stages in which the gauge level increases when the game ball wins in the 9050B or the third general winning opening 9050C.

[Modification example of 33rd effect form to 42nd effect form]
The division as a reference for determining whether or not to increase the gauge level in the 33rd effect form to the 37th effect form, and the number of stages of the gauge level to be increased in the 38th effect form to the 42nd effect form are determined. The criteria for this is not limited to the above example. For example, the division for determining whether or not to increase the gauge level and the division for determining the number of stages of the gauge level to be increased are as follows: (1) the gaming state is the normal state, or (2) the gaming state is. It may be classified as whether it is a probable change state or a time saving state. Further, it may be classified into (1) whether the number of reserved storages is 1 or more, and (2) whether the number of reserved storages is 0. Further, it may be classified as (1) a period during which the variable display without the pseudo-continuous effect is executed, or (2) a period during which the variable display with the pseudo-continuous effect is executed. .. Further, even if it is classified as (1) before the execution of the pseudo-continuous effect in the variable display accompanied by the pseudo-continuous effect, or (2) after the execution of the pseudo-continuous effect in the variable display accompanied by the pseudo-continuous effect. good.

The gauge image 902100 is displayed even when the filling region 902100a is in the minimum 0 stage, but a condition for displaying the gauge image 902100 may be provided. For example, the gauge image 902100 is displayed when the gaming state is in the normal state, and an effect of increasing the gauge level can be executed, but the gauge image 902100 is not displayed when the gaming state is in the probabilistic state or the time saving state (gauge). The effect of increasing the level may not be executed).

The display of the gauge image 902100 and the effect of increasing the gauge level are executed during the period when the predetermined effect is executed, and may not be executed during the period when the predetermined effect is not executed. For example, the gauge image 902100 is displayed when the game ball wins a prize in the general winning opening only during the period when the background image of the decorative pattern displayed on the image display device 905 is a predetermined background image (predetermined effect stage period). Or the gauge level may be increased. Further, the game ball wins a prize in the general winning opening only during the period when the display portion in the starting prize storage display area 905H is displayed in a predetermined mode (for example, white suggesting that the display portion may change to a special mode). When this is done, the gauge image 902100 may be displayed or the gauge level may be increased.

Further, the effect control CPU 90120 is simultaneously executed at the timing when the RTC (real-time clock) (not shown) provided on the effect control board 9012 reaches a predetermined time (at a predetermined time on a gaming machine of the same model). When the effect) is executed, the gauge image 902100 may be displayed or the gauge level may be increased when the game ball wins a prize in the general winning opening during the execution period of the simultaneous effect.

Further, when the gauge level is increased, a predetermined effect sound may be output from the speakers 908L and 908R. At this time, different production sounds may be output according to the number of steps of the gauge level to be increased. For example, when the gauge level is increased by 3 steps, it is compared with the case where the gauge level is increased by 1 step. The volume of the production sound may be increased.

In addition, it is preferable to output a production sound that increases the gauge level at a volume different from that of the production sound related to the special figure game or the production sound related to the normal figure game. For example, the volume of the effect sound that increases the gauge level may be higher than the volume of the effect sound related to the normal figure game, but may be lower than the volume of the effect sound related to the special figure game. Further, the volume of the effect sound for increasing the gauge level may be higher than the volume of the effect sound related to the special figure game, but may be lower than the volume of the error sound for notifying the gaming machine error.

Further, the volume of the effect sound that increases the gauge level may be different depending on the state. For example, the volume in the normal state may be louder than the volume in the probabilistic state or the time saving state.

Further, the specific effect whose production mode changes stepwise according to the winning of the general winning opening is not limited to the specific effect D that changes the gauge level, and the mode of the displayed character is gradually changed. It may change (for example, the size of the displayed character increases or the items owned by the character change), and the characters that the player can select are gradually increased. Is also good. Further, the mode and position of the movable accessory may be changed stepwise, and the emission color of the game effect lamp 909 may be changed stepwise. Further, the sound output from the speakers 908L and 908R may be changed stepwise.

The specific effect D (gauge update effect) can be switched between execution and non-execution according to the display setting table of FIG. 45, like the other specific effects A to C executed based on the winning of the game ball to the general winning opening. It has become like. Specifically, the display changeover switch 9032 is set to the display setting (second position), and the display is set by the player operation (setting operation using the operation button 9030 on the setting screen of FIG. 46). It can only be executed if. In this way, it is possible to reflect the intentions of the amusement park and the player with respect to whether or not the specific effect D is executed.

[43rd production form]
The above-mentioned specific effects A to D are all effects performed based on the winning of the game ball to the general winning opening, but the specific effect is executed when the game ball does not win the general winning opening. You can do it. For example, in the effect control CPU 90120, when the game ball does not win in any of the first general winning openings 9050A to the fourth general winning opening 9050D in the game period of 10 minutes, as shown in FIG. 67. It is possible to execute a specific effect E for displaying an image imitating the form of a general winning opening and a notification image 902200 or the like including the characters "There is no general winning" on the image display device 905.

In this way, the specific effect is not limited to the effect performed based on the winning of the game ball in the general winning opening, but the effect executed based on the fact that the game ball does not win in the general winning opening (general winning). It may be a production that suggests the difficulty of winning a prize in the mouth). That is, the specific effect may be an effect related to a game event of winning a game ball to a general winning opening (an effect executed when a game event occurs or a game event does not occur).

In the 43rd effect mode shown in FIG. 68, the effect control CPU 90120 stores a non-winning determination timer for determining a period during which the game ball has not won a prize in the general winning opening. When the value of the non-winning determination timer is 0 (the initial value at the start of power supply is 0), the effect control CPU 90120 receives a start winning opening designation command and a general winning opening from the game control microcomputer 90100. When either the designated command or the large winning opening winning command is received, 10 minutes is set as the value of the non-winning determination timer and the timer is started. Then, if the general winning opening designation command is received before the non-winning determination timer times out (10 minutes before the timer set), 10 minutes is set again as the value of the non-winning determination timer, and then again. Start the timer.

On the other hand, when the non-winning determination timer times out because the general winning opening designation command is not received before the non-winning determination timer times out, the notification image 902200 is displayed on the image display device 905 as shown in FIG. 67. The specific effect E to be displayed is executed. When the specific effect E is executed, 10 minutes is set again as the value of the non-winning determination timer, and the timer is started again. The specific effect E (display of the broadcast image 902200) is continued for a predetermined period (for example, 10 seconds). The value of the non-winning determination timer in this case is a value according to the elapsed time from the timing when the game ball wins the general winning opening.

Further, the effect control CPU 90120 does not execute the variable display of the decorative symbol, and executes the start winning opening designation command, the general winning opening designation command, and the large winning opening winning command once for a predetermined period (for example, 1 minute). If the command is not received, the game end determination is performed to determine that the game is completed, and the update of the non-winning determination timer is paused (so that the timer value is not updated). When the update of the non-winning determination timer is suspended, the processing due to the non-winning determination timer timing out (specifically, the execution of the specific effect E) is restricted. As a result, the specific effect E is not executed during the period when the game is not performed (execution of the specific effect E is prohibited). When the update of the non-winning determination timer is not paused, the effect control CPU 90120 responds to the processing caused by the non-winning determination timer timing out (specifically, the detection of the timeout when the timer value becomes 0). Execution of specific effect E) becomes possible. Then, when the effect control CPU 90120 receives any of the start winning opening designation command, the general winning opening designation command, and the large winning opening winning command while the update of the non-winning determination timer is suspended. , Resume updating the non-winning judgment timer.

That is, the non-winning determination timer is updated during the period in which the player is playing the game (the game end determination is not made), and is generally 10 minutes during the period in which the player is playing the game. When the number of winnings to the winning opening becomes 0, a time-out occurs (the time-out is detected by the effect control CPU 90120). As a result, when the player is playing the game, the specific effect E is executed if the general winning opening is not won for 10 minutes.

In the above-mentioned production mode, it may be determined whether or not the player is playing a game based on whether or not the game ball is launched toward the game area 9010. For example, a launch detection sensor is provided near the entrance of the game ball in the game area 9010, and it is determined whether or not the player is playing a game depending on whether or not the launch detection sensor detects the game ball. You can do it. Further, it may be determined whether or not the player is playing the game according to whether or not the hitting ball operation handle 9063 is operated (whether or not the firing motor provided in the hitting ball launching device is operating). good.

In this way, when the player does not win a prize in the general winning opening within a predetermined period (10-minute game period) even though the player is playing the game, the specific effect E is executed. Notify that no prize has been awarded to the general prize opening. By this notification, the player can grasp that no prize has been generated in the general winning opening and can use it as a reference (for example, a judgment material for selecting a table) when playing a game. Further, in the game hall, by grasping the pachinko gaming machine 901 in which the specific effect E is executed (or the specific effect E is executed frequently), the game nails are used so that the frequency of winning the general winning opening is higher. It is possible to take measures such as performing maintenance on the machine.

In addition, if the general winning opening is not won even though the game is played by the player, the specific effect E is executed, but the game is not played by the player. When no prize has been awarded to the general winning opening, the non-winning determination timer is paused (to prevent the effect control CPU 90120 from executing the process based on the timeout of the non-winning determination timer). Execution of the specific effect E is restricted.

It should be noted that the specific effect E may be executed even when it is determined that the general winning opening has not been won because the game has not been performed by the player. In this case, the game The specific effect E may be executed at a lower rate than when it is determined that the general winning opening has not been won even though the game is being played by the person.

[44th production form]
As the specific effect E, it is not limited to the one that notifies that the general winning opening has not been won within the predetermined period (the number of winnings to the general winning opening is less than 1), but is not limited to the general effect within the predetermined period. It may be possible to notify identifiable that the number of winnings to the winning opening is less than a predetermined number. In the 44th effect mode, the effect control CPU 90120 stores a winning number determination timer for counting the number of winnings of the game ball to the general winning opening in a predetermined period. When the value of the winning number determination timer is 0 (the initial value at the start of power supply is 0), the effect control CPU 90120 receives a start winning opening designation command and a general winning opening from the game control microcomputer 90100. When either the designated command or the large winning opening winning command is received, 30 minutes is set as the value of the winning number determination timer and the timer is started. At this time, the value of the winning number counter area formed in the RAM 90122 is set to 0. Then, 1 is added to the value of the winning number counter area every time the general winning opening designation command is received during the period until the winning number determination timer times out (30 minutes from the timer set).

Then, when the value of the winning number counter area at the timing when the winning number determination timer times out is less than a predetermined predetermined number (for example, 3), the effect control CPU 90120 is within a predetermined period in the specific effect E. Notify that the number of winnings is less than a predetermined number and / or notify the number of winnings within a predetermined period. For example, the message "The number of general prizes for 30 minutes is less than 3" and / or the message "The number of general prizes for 30 minutes is only 1" is displayed on the image display device 905.

When the specific effect E is executed, 30 minutes is set again as the value of the winning number determination timer, and the timer is started again. The specific effect E is continued for a predetermined period (for example, 10 seconds). In this case, the value of the winning number determination timer is a value corresponding to the elapsed time from the start of the specific effect E. On the other hand, when the value of the winning number counter area at the timing when the winning number determination timer times out is equal to or more than a predetermined predetermined number (for example, 3), the winning number determination timer does not execute the specific effect E. Set the value to 30 minutes again and start the timer again.

Further, the effect control CPU 90120 does not execute the variable display of the decorative symbol, and executes the start winning opening designation command, the general winning opening designation command, and the large winning opening winning command once for a predetermined period (for example, 1 minute). If the command is not received, the game end determination is performed to determine that the game is completed, and the update of the winning number determination timer is suspended (so that the timer value is not updated). When the update of the winning number determination timer is suspended, the processing due to the time-out of the winning number determination timer (specifically, the execution of the specific effect E) is restricted. As a result, the specific effect E is not executed during the period when the game is not performed (execution of the specific effect E is prohibited). When the update of the winning number determination timer is not paused, the effect control CPU 90120 responds to the process of timing out the winning number determination timer (specifically, the detection of the timeout when the timer value becomes 0). Execution of specific effect E) becomes possible. Then, when the effect control CPU 90120 receives any of the start winning opening designation command, the general winning opening designation command, and the large winning opening winning command while the update of the winning number determination timer is suspended. , Resume updating the winning number determination timer.

That is, the winning number determination timer is updated during the period in which the player is playing the game (the game end determination is not made), and 30 minutes have elapsed within the period in which the player is playing the game. (The time-out is detected by the effect control CPU 90120). At the time of the time-out, the specific effect E is executed only when the number of winnings to the general winning opening in the game period of 30 minutes is less than the predetermined number.

In the above-mentioned production mode, it may be determined whether or not the player is playing a game based on whether or not the game ball is launched toward the game area 9010. For example, a launch detection sensor is provided near the entrance of the game ball in the game area 9010, and it is determined whether or not the player is playing a game depending on whether or not the launch detection sensor detects the game ball. You can do it. Further, it may be determined whether or not the player is playing a game according to whether or not the hitting ball operation handle 9063 is operated (whether or not the firing motor provided in the hitting ball launching device is operating). good.

In this way, when the number of winnings to the general winning opening in the predetermined period (30-minute game period) is less than the predetermined number even though the player is playing the game, the specific effect E is executed. It is notified that the number of winnings to the general winning openings in the predetermined period is less than the predetermined number. By this notification, the player can grasp that the frequency of winning a prize in the general winning opening is low and can use it as a reference (for example, a judgment material for selecting a table) when playing a game. Further, in the game hall, by grasping the pachinko gaming machine 901 in which the specific effect E is executed (or the specific effect E is executed frequently), the game nails are used so that the frequency of winning the general winning opening is higher. It is possible to take measures such as performing maintenance on the machine.

Further, if the number of winnings to the general winning opening in the predetermined period is less than the predetermined number even though the game is performed by the player, the specific effect E is executed, but the game is performed by the player. If the number of winnings to the general winning opening in the predetermined period is less than the predetermined number, the winning number determination timer is paused (the effect control CPU 90120 executes a process based on the timeout of the winning number determination timer). By not doing so), the execution of the specific effect E is restricted.

Even if it is determined that the number of winnings to the general winning opening in a predetermined period is less than the predetermined number because the game is not performed by the player, the specific effect E may be executed. , In this case, the specific effect is lower than the case where it is determined that the number of winnings to the general winning opening in the predetermined period is less than the predetermined number even though the game is played by the player. E may be executed.

[45th production form]
In the 43rd effect mode and the 44th effect mode, when the effect control CPU 90120 determines that the number of winnings to the general winning openings within a predetermined period is less than the predetermined number (including 0), the situation at that time. Although it was decided to execute the specific effect E regardless of the above, the execution ratio of the specific effect E may be different depending on the state when this determination is made. In the 45th effect mode, the gaming state at the timing when it is determined that the number of winnings to the general winning opening within the predetermined period is less than the predetermined number (the timing when the non-winning determination timer times out, the timing when the winning number determination timer times out). However, (1) the specific effect E is executed when it is in the normal state, and (2) the specific effect E is not executed when it is in the probability change state or the time-saving state.

The gaming state at the timing when it is determined that the number of winnings to the general winning opening within the predetermined period is less than the predetermined number (the timing when the non-winning determination timer times out, the timing when the winning number determination timer times out) is (1). ) In the normal state, the specific effect E is executed at a rate of, for example, 80%, and (2) in the probabilistic state or the time-saving state, the specific effect E is executed at a rate of, for example, 20%. May be. As described above, it is preferable to execute the specific effect E at different ratios according to the gaming state when it is determined that the number of winnings to the general winning opening within the predetermined period is less than the predetermined number.

[46th production form]
In the 43rd effect mode and the 44th effect mode, when the effect control CPU 90120 determines that the number of winnings to the general winning openings within a predetermined period is less than the predetermined number (including 0), the situation at that time. Regardless of the above, it was decided to execute the specific effect E in a common mode, but the effect mode of the specific effect E may be different depending on the state when this determination is made. In the 46th effect mode, the gaming state at the timing when it is determined that the number of winnings to the general winning opening within the predetermined period is less than the predetermined number (the timing when the non-winning determination timer times out, the timing when the winning number determination timer times out). However, (1) the specific effect E is executed in the first mode (image display + audio output) in the normal state, and (2) the specific effect E is performed in the probabilistic state or the time-saving state. It is executed in two modes (image display only).

Specifically, the first aspect of the specific effect E is to notify the image display device 905 of the fact by displaying an image indicating that the number of winnings to the general winning opening in a predetermined period is less than the predetermined number. It is a mode in which the voice is output by the voice output from the speakers 908L and 908R, and the second aspect of the specific effect E is a mode in which the notification is performed only by the image display and not by the voice output.

The gaming state at the timing when it is determined that the number of winnings to the general winning opening within the predetermined period is less than the predetermined number (the timing when the non-winning determination timer times out, the timing when the winning number determination timer times out) is (1). ) In the normal state, the specific effect E is executed in the first mode at a rate of, for example, 80% (executed in the second mode at a rate of 20%), and (2) in the probabilistic state or the time-saving state. May execute the specific effect E in the first aspect at a rate of, for example, 20% (execution in the second aspect at a rate of 80%). As described above, it is preferable to execute the specific effect E in a different mode according to the gaming state when it is determined that the number of winnings to the general winning opening within the predetermined period is less than the predetermined number.

[Modifications of the 43rd production form to the 46th production form]
The specific effect E executed in the 43rd effect mode to the 46th effect mode is the display setting table of FIG. 45, like the other specific effects A to D executed based on the winning of the game ball to the general winning opening. According to this, the presence or absence of execution can be switched. Specifically, the display changeover switch 9032 is set to the display (second position), and the display is set by the player operation (setting operation using the operation button 9030 on the setting screen of FIG. 46). It can only be executed if. In this way, it is possible to reflect the intentions of the amusement park and the player with respect to whether or not the specific effect E is executed.

For example, if the game hall side does not want to execute the specific effect E, by switching the display changeover switch 9032 to the non-display setting (first position), the specific effect E is not executed regardless of the player setting. .. With such a configuration, the intention of the amusement park side is prioritized and reflected regarding whether or not to execute the specific effect E, that is, whether or not to notify the difficulty of winning the general winning opening. Can be made to.

Further, the value of the non-winning determination timer in the 43rd effect mode, the value of the winning number determination timer in the 44th effect mode, and the value of the winning number counter area, which are stored in the RAM 90122, are both electric. It is not backed up at the time of disconnection, and when the power supply to the pachinko gaming machine 901 is stopped, it is erased accordingly. When the power supply to the pachinko gaming machine 901 is resumed, the initial state of the non-winning determination timer in the 43rd effect mode and the initial state of the winning number determination timer in the 44th effect mode are both invalid. Therefore, the value of the timer is not referred to until the predetermined time is set by the effect control CPU 90120. Further, the initial value of the winning number counter area in the 44th effect mode becomes 0 when the power supply to the pachinko gaming machine 901 is restarted.

In this way, when the power supply to the pachinko gaming machine 901 is stopped, the number of winnings to the general winning opening is erased without being backed up, and when the power supply is restarted, the addition is started again from 0. become. With such a configuration, it is possible to avoid a control burden that requires a backup means in the event of a power failure.

As in the 45th effect mode and the 46th effect form, the classification for making the execution ratio of the specific effect E or the effect mode of the specific effect E different is (1) whether the gaming state is the normal state or (2). ) The gaming state is not limited to the probabilistic state or the time saving state. For example, it may be classified as (1) whether the number of reserved storages is 1 or more, and (2) whether the number of reserved storages is 0. Further, it may be classified into (1) the period after the reach state is established in the reach fluctuation and (2) the period before the reach state is established in the reach fluctuation. Further, whether (1) the variable display without the reach effect (non-reach variation) is being executed, or (2) the variable display with the reach effect (reach variation) is being executed? It may be the division. Further, it may be classified as (1) a period during which the variable display without the pseudo-continuous effect is executed, or (2) a period during which the variable display with the pseudo-continuous effect is executed. .. Further, even if it is classified as (1) before the execution of the pseudo-continuous effect in the variable display accompanied by the pseudo-continuous effect, or (2) after the execution of the pseudo-continuous effect in the variable display accompanied by the pseudo-continuous effect. good. Further, both the execution ratio of the specific effect E and the mode of the specific effect E may be different depending on the difference in these categories.

The specific effect E executed in the 43rd effect mode to the 46th effect mode is executed when the number of prizes to the general winning opening in the predetermined game period is less than the predetermined number. Not limited to such a form, among the first general winning opening 9050A to the fourth general winning opening 9050D, only a specific general winning opening is targeted, and the number of winnings to the specific general winning opening in a predetermined period is a predetermined number. The specific effect E may be executed when the number is less. For example, only the second general winning opening 9050B and the third general winning opening 9050C, which have a higher frequency of winning a game ball than the first general winning opening 9050A and the fourth general winning opening 9050D, are targeted at the general winning opening 9050C during a predetermined game period. The number of winnings may be counted, and the specific effect E may be executed when the counted number of winnings is less than a predetermined number.

Further, in the 43rd effect mode to the 46th effect form, if the number of winnings to the general winning openings within a certain period of time (10 minutes or 30 minutes) is less than a predetermined number, the specific effect E is executed. However, the period for determining the number of winnings in the general winning opening is not limited to this. The period may be defined by the number of times the special figure game is executed, and may be, for example, a period in which the variable display related to the special figure game is executed 100 times. Further, the period may be a period from the start of power supply to the gaming machine to the present time, or may be a period specified by a plurality of business days (for example, one week or one month). Further, the period may be a period controlled to a predetermined gaming state, for example, a period controlled to a normal state (a period in which a game is played by left-handed), a probable change state, or a shortened time. It may be a period controlled by the state (a period during which the game is played by hitting right).

Further, the following method may be used as a method for determining whether or not the number of winnings of the game ball to the general winning opening in the predetermined period is less than the predetermined number.

(A) It may be determined whether or not the number of winnings in the general winning opening is less than the predetermined number for the predetermined number of balls shot in the game area 9010. While the launch motor included in the hitting ball launching device is being driven, approximately 100 gaming balls are launched into the gaming area 9010 in one minute. Therefore, for example, when the number of winnings to the general winning opening for the number of hit balls of 1000 shots (corresponding to the game period of 10 minutes) is less than the predetermined number, the specific effect E may be executed. .. In addition, the ratio of the number of winnings to the general winning opening to the number of shot balls fired in the game area 9010 is calculated, and when the ratio is lower than the predetermined ratio, the specific effect E is executed. May be.

Further, the ratio of the number of winnings to the general winning opening to the number of balls shot into the game area 9010 differs depending on whether the ratio is lower than the predetermined ratio or greater than or equal to the predetermined ratio. You may try to execute a specific effect. For example, if the ratio of the number of winnings to the general winning opening to the number of balls shot into the game area 9010 is low, the character A appears and the frequency of winning to the general winning opening is low. Character B appears when the ratio of the number of winnings to the general winning opening to the number of shot balls fired in the game area 9010 is a medium ratio higher than the low ratio. Then, it is notified that the winning frequency to the general winning opening is at a medium level, and the ratio of the number of winnings to the general winning opening to the number of balls shot into the game area 9010 is higher than the medium ratio. In the case of the ratio, the character C may appear to notify that the winning frequency to the general winning opening is high.

(B) It may be determined whether or not the number of prize balls paid out in response to the winning of the general winning opening in the predetermined period is less than the predetermined number. For example, if 10 game balls are paid out as prize balls when a game ball is won in the general winning opening, the number of prize balls paid out according to the winning in the general winning opening in the game period of 30 minutes. When the number is less than 30 (three prizes), the specific effect E may be executed. Further, whether or not the number of prize balls paid out in response to the winning of the general winning opening for the predetermined number of shot balls (for example, 1000 shots) fired in the game area 9010 is less than the predetermined number. May be determined, and the ratio of the number of prize balls paid out according to the prize to the general winning opening to the number of balls shot into the game area 9010 is calculated, and the ratio is predetermined. When the ratio is lower than the ratio of, the specific effect E may be executed. Further, when the ratio of the number of prize balls paid out in response to the winning to the general winning opening to the number of balls shot into the game area 9010 is lower than the predetermined ratio, or more than the predetermined ratio. In some cases, different aspects of the specific effect may be executed.

In this way, it may be determined whether or not the number of prize balls paid out in response to the winning of the general winning opening is less than the predetermined number. It should be noted that such a form can be applied even in the case where a different number of prize balls are paid out depending on the general prize opening in which the game ball is won.

(C) It may be determined whether or not the number of winnings to the general winning opening is less than the predetermined number (for example, 5) with respect to the predetermined number of winnings to the starting winning opening (for example, 100). The ratio of the number of winnings to the general winning opening to the number of winnings to the starting winning opening may be calculated, and the specific effect E may be executed when the ratio is lower than the predetermined ratio. In addition, the number of prize balls paid out according to the prize in the general prize opening is more than the predetermined number for the predetermined number of prize balls (for example, 10000) paid out in response to the prize in the starting prize opening. It may be determined whether or not the number is small, and the prize balls paid out according to the prizes to the general prize openings for the number of prize balls paid out according to the prizes to the starting prize opening. The specific effect E may be executed when the ratio of the numbers is calculated and the ratio is lower than the predetermined ratio. In addition, when the ratio of the number of prize balls paid out according to the prize to the general prize opening to the number of prize balls paid out according to the prize to the starting prize opening is lower than the predetermined ratio. And, depending on the case where the ratio is equal to or higher than a predetermined ratio, a specific effect of a different aspect may be executed.

Further, for example, the total number of prize balls paid out during the predetermined period when the game state is in the normal state (according to the number of prize balls paid out according to the winning of the starting winning opening and the winning of the general winning opening). Calculate the ratio of the number of prize balls paid out according to the prizes to the general winning openings to the total number of prize balls paid out), and when the ratio is lower than the predetermined ratio , The specific effect E may be executed. Further, the specific effect of different modes may be executed according to the ratio.

(D) It may be determined whether or not the number of winnings to the general winning opening is less than the predetermined number (for example, twice) for the predetermined consumption amount (for example, 1000 yen) in the game machine. , The ratio of the number of winnings to the general winning opening to the consumption amount in the game machine may be calculated, and the specific effect E may be executed when the ratio is lower than the predetermined ratio. In such a form, a different predetermined number (for example, 4 yen is twice, 1 yen is 8) depending on the rental unit price (for example, 4 yen or 1 yen) of the game medium used for the game machine. (Times, etc.), or different predetermined ratios (for example, 2 times / 1000 yen for 4 yen, 8 times / 1000 yen for 1 yen, etc.) are applied. In addition, the specific effect of different modes is executed depending on whether the ratio of the number of winnings to the general winning opening to the consumption amount of the gaming machine is lower than the predetermined ratio or more than the predetermined ratio. You may try to do it.

[47th production form]
In the 47th effect mode shown in FIG. 71, a character is displayed on the image display device 905 based on the fact that the game ball has won a prize in the general winning opening, and within the period in which the character is displayed, the first starting winning opening is entered. Effective start winning of the game ball (that is, winning of the game ball to the first starting winning opening when the first reserved memory number corresponding to the first starting winning opening is less than the upper limit value) and the game to the second starting winning opening. Based on the occurrence of any of the valid start winnings of the ball (that is, the winning of the game ball to the second starting winning opening when the number of second reserved storage corresponding to the second starting winning opening is less than the upper limit value). In the start winning memory display area 905H, a hold change effect is executed in which the display portion corresponding to the hold variable display game including the variable display game based on the generated effective start prize is changed from the normal mode to the special mode. ..

It should be noted that the effect control CPU 90120 holds the display portion corresponding to the variable display game corresponding to the effective start prize to be displayed in a special mode from the beginning without going through the normal mode, based on the occurrence of the effective start prize. You may try to perform a change effect. For example, when a new effective start prize occurs, the displayed character takes an action such as swinging up a cane, and the display part corresponding to the variable display game corresponding to the new effective start prize. May be displayed in a special mode instead of the normal mode (from the beginning of the display of the hold information, the hold information in the special mode corresponding to the variable display game in which the start condition is finally satisfied exists).

Here, in the 47th effect mode, and in the 48th effect mode and the 49th effect mode, which will be described later, each time the game ball wins in any of the first general winning openings 9050A to the fourth general winning opening, the random number circuit 90124 A random number for character determination is extracted from. Then, based on the extracted random numbers for character determination, whether or not to make the character appear, and when the character is to appear, which of the characters A to C is made to appear is determined in the character determination table of FIG. 69. Determined at the indicated rate.

It should be noted that the random number for character determination may be extracted by the effect control CPU 90120 only when a predetermined condition is satisfied. For example, by extracting a random number for character determination on the condition that the character is not controlled by the jackpot gaming state, it is possible to limit the character from appearing during the period controlled by the jackpot gaming state. .. Further, by not extracting the random number for character determination after the reach state is established within the period in which the variable display game is executed, it is possible to prevent the character from appearing after the reach state is established.

In the example of FIG. 69, the effect control CPU 90120 determines that the character A appears at a rate of 10% when the general winning opening designation command for designating the winning to the first general winning opening 9050A is received. It is decided to make character B appear at a rate of 30%, and to make character C appear at a rate of 60%. In addition, when receiving the general winning opening designation command that specifies the winning to the second general winning opening 9050B, it is decided that no character will appear at a rate of 50%, and character A will appear at a rate of 35%. It is decided to make the character B appear at a rate of 10%, and it is decided to make the character C appear at a rate of 5%.

Further, when the effect control CPU 90120 receives the general winning opening designation command for designating the winning to the third general winning opening 9050C, it is determined that no character appears at a rate of 90%, and 10%. It is decided to make character C appear at a rate. In addition, when receiving the general winning opening designation command that specifies the winning to the 4th general winning opening 9050D, it is decided that no character will appear at a rate of 75%, and character C will appear at a rate of 25%. Decide to let.

That is, in this example, when the game ball wins in any of the first general winning opening 9050A and the second general winning opening 9050B provided in the left gaming area 9010A, the third general winning opening 9010B provided in the right gaming area 9010B. Characters will appear at a higher rate than when a game ball wins in either the general winning opening 9050C or the fourth general winning opening 9050D. The player fires a game ball in the left game area 9010A when the game state is in the normal state, and fires the game ball in the right game area 9010B when the game state is in the probability change state or the time saving state. Characters will appear at a higher rate than in the state or the time saving state.

Then, in the 47th effect mode to the 49th effect mode, the specific effect (specific effect F (hold change effect)) is based on the fact that the predetermined conditions (effective start winning, reach state) are satisfied during the period in which the character is displayed. , Specific effect G (variation result notice effect by dialogue)) is executed, so in these effect forms, when the game state is the normal state, the game state is higher than when the game state is the probable change state or the time saving state. Specific effects can be executed at a rate.

As described above, in the normal state, it is disadvantageous as compared with the probabilistic state and the time saving state, and the player's interest in the game, for example, the variable display of the special figure game is low. By increasing the frequency of execution, we are trying to improve the interest. On the other hand, in the probabilistic state and the time saving state, it is advantageous as compared with the normal state, and the player is highly interested in the game, for example, the variable display of the special figure game, so that the appearance frequency of the character and the execution frequency of the specific effect are high. If the price remains high, it may spoil the interest. Therefore, in the probabilistic state and the time saving state, the appearance frequency of the character and the execution frequency of the specific effect are set low.

Not limited to the example shown in FIG. 69, even when a game ball wins in the same general winning opening, the ratio of characters appearing may be different depending on the game state, for example, a normal state. In the case where the character appears at a rate of 50% when the game ball wins in the second general winning opening 9050B, 10% when the game ball wins in the second general winning opening 9050B in the probabilistic state and the time saving state. Characters may appear at the ratio of.

Further, the character can appear only in the normal state, and the character may not appear in the probabilistic state and the time saving state. In this way, to "make the execution ratio of the effect in one state different from the execution ratio of the effect in the other state", the effect can be executed only in one state, and the effect is not executed in the other state. Shall be included. Further, contrary to the example shown in FIG. 69, the appearance ratio of the character in the probabilistic state and the normal state may be higher than the appearance ratio of the character in the normal state.

Further, in the example of FIG. 69, when the game ball wins in the first general winning opening 9050A, the character appears at a higher rate than when the game ball wins in the second general winning opening 9050B. There is. Further, when the game ball wins in the 4th general winning opening 9050D, the character appears at a higher rate than in the case where the game ball wins in the 3rd general winning opening 9050C. In this embodiment, when the game ball is launched into the left game area 9010A, the game ball wins more frequently in the second general prize opening 9050B than in the first general prize opening 9050A, and in the right game area 9010B. When the game ball is launched, the game ball wins more frequently in the third general winning opening 9050C than in the fourth general winning opening 9050D. That is, when the game ball wins in the general winning opening where it is difficult for the game ball to win, the character appears at a higher rate than when the game ball wins in the general winning opening where the game ball is easy to win. On the contrary, when the game ball wins in the general winning opening where the game ball is easy to win, the character has a higher rate than when the game ball wins in the general winning opening where it is difficult for the game ball to win. You may make it appear.

Further, in the example of FIG. 69, the character that may be displayed when the game ball wins in the first general winning opening 9050A and the second general winning opening 9050B, which the game ball frequently wins in the normal state, is Although the characters are A to C, they may be displayed when the game ball wins in the third general winning opening 9050C and the fourth general winning opening 9050D, which are frequently won in the probabilistic state and the time saving state. Character C is the only character with. In the probabilistic state and the time-saving state, which are the game states in which the game interest is higher than the normal state, the situation that "the character appears but the predetermined condition is not satisfied and the character display period elapses" occurs, which causes the interest. Since it is possible that the display period will be reduced, only the character C having the longest display period can be displayed.

Not limited to the example shown in FIG. 69, even when a game ball wins in the same general winning opening, the characters appearing may be different depending on the game state. For example, in the normal state, the first character may appear. 2 Characters A to C may be displayed when the game ball wins in the general winning opening 9050B, but the character when the game ball wins in the second general winning opening 9050B in the probabilistic state and the time saving state. It may be possible that only C is displayed. Also, contrary to the example shown in FIG. 69, the number of characters that may be displayed in the probabilistic state and the normal state is larger than the number of characters that may be displayed in the normal state. May be.

FIG. 70 is a diagram showing a display period of each character displayed on the image display device 905. It is assumed that all of the characters A to C are immediately displayed on the image display device 905 at the timing when the character to be displayed based on the winning to the general winning opening is determined. That is, since the character is displayed immediately after the winning of the general winning opening, the player can easily grasp that the winning of the general winning opening has occurred.

When the character A is displayed on the image display device 905, (1) if the predetermined conditions are not satisfied (effective start winning, reach state is established) within 1 minute from the start of the display, the display of the character A is started. If the character A is erased from the screen at the timing when 1 minute has elapsed, and (2) the predetermined condition is satisfied within 1 minute from the start of the display, the specific effect (specific effect F (pending change effect) based on the fulfillment of the predetermined condition is satisfied. ), Character A is deleted from the screen at the timing when the specific effect G (variation result notice effect) is completed.

The predetermined condition in (1) is a condition related to the game in the pachinko gaming machine 901 (including a condition related to the effect executed with the progress of the game). Even if a valid start prize is generated, if the number of pending variable display games including the variable display game corresponding to the valid start prize is 1, the start condition is satisfied for the variable display game. Since the start condition is satisfied (the hold information is deleted) immediately after the game is played, it is difficult to secure a period for executing the hold change effect by the displayed character. Therefore, if the number of hold of the variable display game after the effective start prize is less than the predetermined number (1 in this example), the hold change effect is not executed, and the number of hold of the variable display game after the effective start prize is the predetermined number. If there are more than 1 in this example, the hold change effect may be executed.

Further, the character may be erased even when the game transitions to the big hit game state or when the game end determination is performed by the effect control CPU 90120 described above. Further, the character displayed on the image display device 905 immediately before the power supply to the pachinko gaming machine 901 is stopped shall not be displayed again after the power supply is restarted. That is, it is assumed that the backup process for displaying the character displayed before the power failure on the image display device 905 again after restarting the power supply is not performed.

It should be noted that when the specific effect F (hold change effect) is executed, the appearing character performs a predetermined action (that is, with the change in the mode of the displayed object), and the hold memory is stored. It shall include both cases where the mode of the corresponding display site has changed and cases where it has not changed. Further, the timing at which the specific effect F (hold change effect) ends is the timing at which the character completes a predetermined action. Specifically, as shown in FIG. 72 (e), the appearing character 903000 (book). In the example, the character A is used, but the flame 903002 emitted from the tip of the cane 903001 possessed by the character B may appear or the character C may appear in the specific effect F (hold change effect) in each hold memory. This is the timing when the action effect that covers the corresponding display portion is performed for a certain period of time (the predetermined action effect period has elapsed).

Further, the fact that the specific effect G (variation result notice effect) is executed means that the appearing character 903100 (in this example, the character B is used, but the specific effect G) is executed, as shown in FIGS. 73 (f) and 73 (g). (In some cases, character A may appear or character C may appear) in (variation result advance notice effect) means that a predetermined line is emitted, and the timing at which the specific effect G (variation result advance notice effect) ends is. This is the timing when the character's dialogue is displayed for a certain period of time (the predetermined dialogue display period has elapsed).

When the character B is displayed on the image display device 905, (1) if the predetermined conditions are not satisfied (effective start winning, reach state is established) within 2 minutes from the start of the display, the display of the character B is started. When the character B is erased from the screen at the timing when 2 minutes have passed, and (2) the predetermined condition is satisfied within 2 minutes from the start of the display, the specific effect (specific effect F (pending change effect) based on the fulfillment of the predetermined condition is satisfied. ), Character B is deleted from the screen at the timing when the specific effect G (variation result notice effect) is completed.

When character C is displayed on the image display device 905, (1) if the predetermined conditions (effective start winning, establishment of reach state) are not satisfied within 3 minutes from the start of display, from the start of display of character C. If the character C is erased from the screen at the timing when 3 minutes have passed and (2) the predetermined condition is satisfied within 3 minutes from the start of the display, the specific effect (specific effect F (pending change effect) based on the establishment of the predetermined condition is satisfied. ), Character C is deleted from the screen at the timing when the specific effect G (variation result notice effect) is completed.

In this way, based on the fact that the game ball has won a prize in the general winning opening, the character is immediately displayed on the image display device 905, so that the player is in a state after the game ball has won a prize in the general winning opening. You can make them recognize that. Further, the period in which the character is displayed is a specific period in which the specific effect can be executed by satisfying the predetermined condition, and even if the predetermined condition is satisfied in the period in which the character is not displayed, the predetermined condition is satisfied. Since the specific effect based on the above is not executed, the player recognizes that "the specific effect is executed if the specified condition is satisfied while the character is displayed", and the game is played in order to satisfy the predetermined condition. It will be done, and the fun of the game will be enhanced until the specific production is executed.

Further, since the display period differs depending on the displayed character, it is possible to make the player interested in which character is displayed. The player who confirms the type of the character can grasp the display period of the character, that is, the period in which a predetermined condition must be satisfied in order to execute the specific effect. As a result, it is possible to enhance the interest until the specific production is executed.

Further, as described above, the appearance ratio of each character, that is, the setting ratio for a specific period in which a predetermined condition must be satisfied differs depending on the general winning opening, so that the player can place the game ball in any of the general winning openings. You will be interested in winning a prize.

(Specific example of specific production F (pending change production))
In the 47th effect mode shown in FIG. 71, when any of the characters A to C is displayed on the image display device 905 and an effective start winning is generated, the character displayed as the specific effect F is displayed. A pending change effect with the action of is executed. As described above, the occurrence of the effective start winning is the winning of the game ball to the first starting winning opening in the state where the first reserved storage number corresponding to the first starting winning opening is less than the upper limit value, and the second. A game ball is won in the second starting winning opening when the number of second reserved storage corresponding to the starting winning opening is less than the upper limit value.

The effect control CPU 90120 has received a start winning opening designation command designated as a "first starting winning slot" or a "second starting winning slot", and a starting winning determination result designation command including valid data that is not blank data. Based on this, it is possible to recognize the occurrence of a valid start prize. FIG. 72 shows a specific example of the pending change effect in the 47th effect mode.

In FIG. 72 (a), the decorative symbol is changed (for example, scroll display in the vertical direction) in the decorative symbol display areas 905L, 905C, and 905R of "left", "middle", and "right", and is stored on hold. It is assumed that the number (the total number of the first reserved storage number and the second reserved storage number) is 2. At this time, in the start winning memory display area 905H, among the variable display games in which the start condition is satisfied but the start condition is not satisfied, the display portion (left end) corresponding to the variable display game in which the start condition is first satisfied. Is displayed in the normal mode, and it is assumed that the display portion (second from the left) corresponding to the variable display game in which the start condition is satisfied is displayed in the normal mode.

At this time, it is assumed that the effect control CPU 90120 decides to make the character A appear at a rate of 35% based on the fact that the game ball wins in the second general winning opening 9050B (see FIG. 69). In FIG. 72 (b), based on this determination, the effect control CPU 90120 displays the character 903000 (character A) having the cane 903001 on the image display device 905. Character A shall appear on the screen immediately after the general prize.

Then, within 1 minute from the appearance of the character A, it is assumed that the effective start winning is generated in the first starting winning opening and the predetermined condition is satisfied. In FIG. 72 (c), the number of reserved storages becomes 3 accordingly, and the display portion (third from the left) corresponding to the variable display game in which the start condition is satisfied is displayed in the normal mode. Whether or not the effect control CPU 90120, which has detected the occurrence of the effective start prize, that is, the establishment of the predetermined condition in the state where the character is displayed, changes the display portion corresponding to each of the three reserved storages from the normal mode to the special mode. Is determined respectively.

Here, the effect control CPU 90120 is a command for specifying each start winning determination result (not blank data) stored in the start winning command storage area for the first special figure and the start winning command storage area for the second special figure. It contains valid data). Then, as shown in FIG. 72 (d), with respect to the start winning determination result designation command for designating the "big hit", the mode of the display portion corresponding to the command is changed from the normal mode to the special mode at a rate of 80%. It is decided that the mode of the display portion corresponding to the command is not changed as the normal mode at a rate of 20%. On the other hand, regarding the start winning judgment result specification command that specifies "missing", it was decided to change the mode of the display part corresponding to the command from the normal mode to the special mode at a rate of 10%, and the rate was 90%. Determines not to change the mode of the display part corresponding to the command in the normal mode.

In this example, regarding the start winning judgment result specification command corresponding to the variable display game in which the start condition is satisfied first and second, the mode of the display portion corresponding to the command should not be changed as the normal mode. Only for the start winning judgment result specification command corresponding to the variable display game that is determined to be (no pending change) and the start condition is satisfied, the mode of the display part corresponding to the command is changed from the normal mode to the special mode. It is assumed that it has been decided to let it (with pending changes).

Then, in the effect control CPU 90120, as shown in FIG. 72 (e), the character 903000 (character A) directs the tip of the cane 903001 toward the start winning memory display area 905H, and the flame 903002 emitted from the tip of the cane 903001. This causes an action effect in which the display portion corresponding to each reserved memory is surrounded.

Further, as shown in FIG. 72 (f), the effect control CPU 90120 has a normal mode of displaying the left end and the second display portion from the left based on the above-mentioned determination as the action effect is executed. With respect to the third display portion from the left, the display mode is changed from the normal mode to the special mode based on the above-mentioned determination. When the action effect is executed for a predetermined period of time, the character 903000 (character A) holding the wand 903001 and the flame 903002 emitted from the tip of the wand 903001 are erased from the screen.

As a result of the change in the mode of the display part accompanying this action effect, for the player, the character 903000 (character A) that appeared based on the winning of the general winning opening took an action, and as a result, the third display part from the left. Recognizes that has changed from a normal mode to a special mode, and expects a variable display game that is executed three times after the currently executed variable display game.

On the other hand, in FIGS. 72 (c) and 72 (d), with respect to the start winning judgment result designation command corresponding to the three variable display games in which the start condition is not satisfied, the mode of the display portion corresponding to the command is usually used. When it is decided not to change the mode as it is (no change on hold), even after the action effect shown in FIG. 72 (e) is performed, as shown in FIG. 72 (g), three hold memories are stored. All of the three corresponding holding sites have not changed in the normal manner.

In this way, the specific effect F (pending change effect) is executed triggered by "the effective start prize has occurred within the period in which the character is displayed", so that the effective start prize is generated during the character display period. It is possible to make people interested in whether or not it is, and it is possible to enhance the interest from the time when the game ball is won in the general winning opening until the specific production is executed. In addition, a game ball is placed in the general winning opening due to the effect configuration of notifying the display result of the variable display game for which the start condition has not yet been satisfied, triggered by the event of winning the general winning opening that is not related to the progress of the variable display game. It is possible to further enhance the interest from winning a prize to the execution of a specific production.

Further, with the action of the character 903000 (character A), whether the display mode of any of the display parts corresponding to the variable display game for which the start condition is not satisfied changes from the normal mode to the special mode. Whether or not, and if it changes, it is possible to pay attention to which display mode changes from the normal mode to the special mode. That is, by suggesting a variable display game that the player can expect, it is possible to improve the interest.

In addition, a common object (character A's action) is an effect that suggests a prize in the general winning opening (character A's appearance) and an effect that suggests a display result of a variable display game for which the start condition is not satisfied (character A's action). By being composed of the character A), it is possible to further enhance the interest from the time when the game ball is won in the general winning opening to the time when the specific effect is executed. Then, the appearance of the character and the action are related to the appearance of the character and the action by suggesting that the winning to the general winning opening not related to the progress of the variable display game and the display result of the variable display game for which the start condition is not satisfied are suggested by a common object. It can increase the interest of the player.

The specific effect F (hold change effect) is a variable display game corresponding to the effective start prize (effective start prize that triggers the determination that a predetermined condition is satisfied) that triggered the execution of the hold change effect (the effective start prize). The display result is announced by targeting each of the pending variable display games including the variable display game in which the start condition is finally satisfied. Targeting only the variable display game (variable display game in which the start condition was finally satisfied) corresponding to the effective start prize (effective start prize that triggered the determination that the predetermined condition was satisfied) was targeted. The display result may be announced. On the contrary, a variable display game (finally, a start condition) corresponding to an effective start prize (a valid start prize that triggers the determination that a predetermined condition is satisfied) that triggered the execution of the hold change effect. The display result may be announced by targeting the variable display game excluding the variable display game in which is established.

(Character erasure process)
Similar to the specific effect A to the specific effect D, the winning history storage area corresponding to the specific effect F (pending change effect) is provided. When the specific effect F is executed, the effect control CPU 90120 erases the displayed character from the screen, and the winning history of the winning history storage area corresponding to the specific effect F (at least the first general winning opening 9050A to the first). 4 The history of winning one or more times to the general winning opening 9050D and the history of winning one or more times to any of the first starting winning opening and the second starting winning opening are deleted (the winning history of FIG. 71). Reset condition).

Further, if the displayed character is erased after the lapse of a predetermined display period without executing the specific effect F, the winning history (at least) of the winning history storage area corresponding to the specific effect F is accompanied by this. The first general winning opening 9050A to the fourth general winning opening 9050D (including one or more winning histories) is deleted (the winning history reset condition in FIG. 71).

FIG. 74 (A) is a timing chart showing a display period of each character when the specific effect F (holding change effect) is executed. In this figure, it is assumed that the variable display game of the decorative symbol is executed in the order of variable display 1, variable display 2, variable display 3, and variable display 4. When the variable display 1 is executed, at the timing of (1), any of the characters A to C is displayed on the screen based on the fact that the game ball wins in any of the general winning openings 9050A to 9050D. To.

When the displayed character is the character A, the character A is hidden at the timing of (2) when one minute has passed from the appearance without the effective start winning. During this period, the variable display 1 ends and the variable display 2 starts, but with the end of the variable display 1 and the start of the variable display 2, the character A is not hidden but is continuously displayed. There is. If a valid start prize is generated within 1 minute from the appearance of the character A, the character A will be hidden after the action effect is completed.

When the displayed character is the character B, the character B is hidden at the timing of (3) when 2 minutes have passed from the appearance without the effective start winning. During this time, the variable display 1 ends and the variable display 2 starts, and further, the variable display 2 ends and the variable display 3 starts, but the variable display 1 ends, the variable display 2 starts, and the variable display 2 starts. With the end of the display 2 and the start of the variable display 3, the character B is not hidden but is continuously displayed. If the effective start prize is generated within 2 minutes from the appearance of the character B, the character B is hidden after the action effect is completed.

When the displayed character is character C, the character C is hidden at the timing when 5 minutes have passed from the appearance without the effective start winning. In this example, since the effective start prize is generated at the timing of (4) before 5 minutes have passed from the appearance of the character C, the action effect is executed without the character being hidden, and the action is performed. At the timing of the end of the effect (5), the display portion corresponding to one or more reserved memories is changed from the normal mode to the special mode. During this time, the variable display 1 ends and the variable display 2 starts, the variable display 2 ends and the variable display 3 starts, and further, the variable display 3 ends and the variable display 4 starts, but it is variable. Character C is not hidden when the display 1 ends and the variable display 2 starts, the variable display 2 ends and the variable display 3 starts, and the variable display 3 ends and the variable display 4 starts. It is displayed continuously.

In this way, once the character is displayed, it will continue to be displayed until "a predetermined condition is satisfied" or "a predetermined period elapses without satisfying the predetermined condition". ing. Then, the character is hidden at the earlier timing of "the predetermined condition is satisfied" and "the predetermined period elapses without the predetermined condition being satisfied".

[48th production form]
In the 48th effect mode shown in FIG. 71, the character is displayed on the image display device 905 based on the fact that the game ball wins in the general winning opening, and the reach state is established within the period in which the character is displayed. Based on this, the dialogue corresponding to the display result of the variable display game (variable display game of the fluctuation pattern accompanied by the reach state) being executed is displayed. That is, the display control of the character is the same as that of the 47th effect mode, but the predetermined condition to be satisfied within the display period of the character and the type of the specific effect executed when the predetermined condition is satisfied are different.

(Specific example of specific production G (variation result notice production))
In the 48th effect mode shown in FIG. 71, when any of the characters A to C is displayed on the image display device 905 and the reach state is established, the character displayed as the specific effect G is displayed. A fluctuation result notice effect with a dialogue display is executed. As described above, the effect control CPU 90120 can grasp the establishment timing of the reach state according to the fluctuation pattern. Therefore, it is determined that the reach state is established when the variable display game with the reach state is executed and the remaining time of the variable display game with the reach state reaches a predetermined timing for establishing the reach state. It is possible to grasp and execute the specific effect G if the character is displayed at this time. FIG. 73 shows a specific example of the variation result advance notice effect in the 48th effect mode.

In FIG. 73 (a), the decorative symbol is changed (for example, scroll display in the vertical direction) in the decorative symbol display areas 905L, 905C, and 905R of "left", "middle", and "right", and is stored on hold. It is assumed that the number (the total number of the first reserved storage number and the second reserved storage number) is 1. At this time, in the start winning prize storage display area 905H, it is assumed that the display portion (left end) corresponding to the variable display game 1 in which the start condition is satisfied but the start condition is not satisfied is displayed in the normal mode. ..

At this time, it is assumed that the effect control CPU 90120 decides to make the character B appear at a rate of 30% based on the fact that the game ball wins in the first general winning opening 9050A (see FIG. 69). In FIG. 73B, based on this determination, the effect control CPU 90120 displays the character 903100 (character B) having the cane 903101 on the image display device 905. Character B shall appear on the screen immediately after the general prize.

Then, in FIG. 73 (c), it is assumed that after the appearance of the character B, the variable display of the decorative symbol that has been executed is completed and the display result is derived and displayed. Here, as a definite decorative pattern, a combination of "2" on the left, "1" on the right, and "3" in the middle, which is a non-reach loss, is derived and displayed. Then, as shown in FIG. 73 (d), the next variable display game is started based on the establishment of the start condition, and along with this, the variable display game in which the start condition is satisfied but the start condition is not satisfied. Does not exist, and the display part at the left end is in a non-display mode.

Then, it is assumed that the reach state is established and the predetermined condition is satisfied within 2 minutes from the appearance of the character B. In FIG. 73 (e), the characters 903050 of "reach!" Are displayed at the upper part of the screen as the reach state is established. The effect control CPU 90120, which has detected the establishment of the reach state, that is, the establishment of the predetermined condition in the state where the character is displayed, determines the dialogue of the character B.

Here, the effect control CPU 90120 confirms whether the display result of the variable display game of the decorative pattern being executed is determined to be a jackpot combination or a loss combination. It should be noted that it may be confirmed whether the last variation pattern specification command received from the game control microcomputer 90100 is the variation pattern specification command for big hits or the variation pattern specification command for loss. ..

Then, as shown in FIG. 73 (f), when it is decided that the display result of the variable display game is a jackpot combination, the character displaying the line of "chance!" At a rate of 25%. It is decided to display it horizontally, and it is decided to display the line of "Fahrenheit !!" next to the character being displayed at a rate of 75%. On the other hand, if it is decided that the display result of the variable display game is a lost combination, it is decided that the line of "chance!" Is displayed next to the character being displayed at a rate of 90%. It is decided to display the line of "Gekijou !!" next to the character being displayed at a rate of%.

In this example, it is assumed that it is decided to display the line of "super heat !!" next to the character being displayed. Based on this determination, as shown in FIG. 73 (g), the effect control CPU 90120 has an effect in which the character 903100 (character B) swings up the cane 903101 and emits the line 903102, which is "heat !!". To execute. When the dialogue 903102 is displayed for a predetermined period of time, the character 903100 (character B) holding the cane 903101 and the dialogue 903102 uttered from the character 903100 are erased from the screen.

As a result, for the player, the dialogue of the character 903100 (character B) that appears based on the winning of the general winning opening may result in the final stop display of the decorative pattern that is a jackpot combination as a result of the reach effect. You can grasp that it is expensive.

In this way, is the reach state established during the character display period by executing the specific effect G (variation result notice effect) triggered by "the reach state is established within the period in which the character is displayed"? It is possible to make people interested in whether or not, and it is possible to enhance the interest from the time when the game ball wins the general prize opening to the time when the specific production is executed. In addition, with the event of winning a prize in the general winning slot that is not related to the progress of the variable display game, the display result of the variable display game for which the display result has not yet been derived and displayed is announced, and the game is played in the general winning slot. It is possible to further enhance the interest from the time the ball wins until the specific production is executed. In addition, the dialogue of the character 903000 (character A) can be focused on, and the interest of the character display effect can be improved.

In addition, a common object is an effect that suggests winning a prize in the general winning opening (appearance of character B) and an effect that suggests the display result of a variable display game in which the display result is not derived and displayed (character B's dialogue). By being composed of (character B), it is possible to further enhance the interest from the time when the game ball is won in the general winning opening to the time when the specific effect is executed. Then, the winning to the general winning opening not related to the progress of the variable display game and the display result of the variable display game that has not been confirmed are suggested by a common object, so that the player's appearance regarding the appearance of the character and the dialogue can be suggested. You can increase your interest.

In the 48th effect mode, the specific effect G in which the character utters a predetermined line is executed when the reach state is established, that is, the variable display of the decorative pattern becomes a predetermined mode. The specific effect G may be executed not only in such a form but also when the variable display of the decorative symbol is executed regardless of the mode of the variable display of the decorative symbol. Further, for example, when the variable display of the decorative symbol is executed, a predetermined advance notice effect different from the specific effect G (for example, a step-up advance notice effect executed immediately after the start of the variable display game) is executed. The specific effect G may be executed.

Further, in the 48th effect mode, an example in which the character is displayed based on the winning of the game ball to the general winning opening is described regardless of the mode of the variable display of the decorative pattern, but the present invention is not limited to such a form. The character may be displayed on the condition that the variable display of the decorative pattern executed when the game ball wins in the general winning opening is in a predetermined mode. For example, the game ball wins in the general winning opening. The character may be displayed on condition that the variable display of the decorative symbol executed at that time is in the reach state (the variable display game of the reach variation pattern is executed).

(Character erasure process)
Similar to the specific effect A to the specific effect D and the specific effect F, a winning history storage area corresponding to the specific effect G (variation result notice effect) is provided. When the specific effect G is executed, the effect control CPU 90120 erases the displayed character from the screen, and the winning history of the winning history storage area corresponding to the specific effect G (at least the first general winning opening 9050A to the first). 4 The winning history of one or more times to the general winning opening 9050D is deleted (the winning history reset condition in FIG. 71).

Further, if the displayed character is erased after the lapse of a predetermined display period without executing the specific effect G, the winning history (at least) of the winning history storage area corresponding to the specific effect G is accompanied by this. The first general winning opening 9050A to the fourth general winning opening 9050D (including one or more winning histories) is deleted (the winning history reset condition in FIG. 71).

FIG. 74 (B) is a timing chart showing a display period of each character when the specific effect G (variation result advance notice effect) is executed. In this figure, it is assumed that the variable display game of the decorative symbol is executed in the order of variable display 1, variable display 2, variable display 3, and variable display 4, and the reach effect is executed only in the variable display 4 among them, and the reach state is reached. Shall be established. When the variable display 1 is executed, at the timing of (11), any of the characters A to C is displayed on the screen based on the fact that the game ball wins in any of the general winning openings 9050A to 9050D. To.

When the displayed character is the character A, the character A is hidden at the timing (12) when one minute has passed from the appearance without the reach state being established. During this time, with the end of the variable display 1 and the start of the variable display 2, the character A is not hidden but is continuously displayed. If the reach state is established within 1 minute from the appearance of the character A, the character A is hidden after the dialogue display effect is completed.

When the displayed character is the character B, the character B is hidden at the timing (13) when 2 minutes have passed from the appearance without the reach state being established. During this time, with the end of the variable display 1 and the start of the variable display 2, the end of the variable display 2 and the start of the variable display 3, the character B is not hidden but is continuously displayed. If the reach state is established within 2 minutes from the appearance of the character B, the character B is hidden after the dialogue display effect is completed.

When the displayed character is the character C, the character C is hidden at the timing when 5 minutes have passed from the appearance without the reach state being established. In this example, since the reach state is established at the timing of (14) before 5 minutes have passed from the appearance of the character C, the dialogue display effect is executed without the character being hidden. During this period, the character C is hidden as the variable display 1 ends and the variable display 2 starts, the variable display 2 ends and the variable display 3 starts, and the variable display 3 ends and the variable display 4 starts. It should not be displayed continuously.

[49th production form]
In the 47th effect mode and the 48th effect form described above, an example is shown in which a specific effect is executed as long as a predetermined condition is satisfied, regardless of which type of character A to C is displayed. However, only when a character of a specific type is displayed, a specific effect of the corresponding type may be executed.

For example, in the 49th effect mode shown in FIG. 71, the specific effect F (pending change effect) is executed based on the occurrence of a valid start prize within the period in which either character A or B is displayed. Even if a valid start prize is generated within the period in which the character C is displayed, the specific effect F (pending change effect) is not executed. Further, the specific effect G (variation result notice effect) is executed based on the fact that the reach state is established within the period in which the character C is displayed, and the character A or B is temporarily displayed. Even if the reach state is established within the certain period, the specific effect G (variation result notice effect) is not executed.

In this way, the predetermined conditions for enabling the specific effect and the predetermined conditions according to the type of the displayed character, that is, the notification mode for notifying that the game ball has won the general winning opening. The type of specific effect executed based on the establishment may be different.

Although the predetermined conditions for enabling the specific effect to be executed are common regardless of the type of the displayed character, the specific condition to be executed when the predetermined condition is satisfied according to the type of the displayed character. The type of production may be different. For example, if a valid start prize is generated within the period in which the character A or B is displayed, the specific effect F (hold change effect) is executed (the specific effect G (variation result notice effect) is not executed). However, if a valid start prize is generated within the period in which the character C is displayed, the specific effect G (variation result notice effect) is executed (the specific effect F (pending change effect) is not executed). May be.

In addition, the predetermined conditions for enabling the specific effect differ depending on the type of the displayed character, but it is executed when the predetermined conditions corresponding to each are satisfied regardless of the type of the displayed character. The types of specific effects may be the same. For example, if a valid start prize occurs within the period in which the character A or B is displayed, the specific effect F (hold change effect) is executed (even if the reach state is established within that period, the specific effect F is specified. Although the effect F is not executed), the specific effect F (pending change effect) is executed even if the reach state is established within the period in which the character C is displayed (a valid start prize is tentatively generated within that period). However, the specific effect F may not be executed).

In addition, if an effective start prize is generated before the establishment of (1) reach state within the period in which the character is displayed, a specific effect F (hold change effect) in which the displayed character takes an action is performed. After executing, the character is erased, and (2) if the reach state is established before the effective start prize, the character being displayed is executed after the specific effect G (variation result notice effect) in which the displayed character utters a line. You may try to erase it. In this way, the possibility that a plurality of predetermined conditions (1) and (2) are satisfied within the display period of one character is set so that the predetermined condition that is satisfied earlier among the plurality of predetermined conditions is satisfied. The specific effect of the corresponding type may be executed.

In addition, if an effective start prize is generated before the establishment of (1) reach state within the period in which the character is displayed, a specific effect F (hold change effect) in which the displayed character takes an action is performed. The character is erased after execution, and (2) even if the reach state is established before the valid start prize, the character is erased after executing the specific effect F (pending change effect) in which the displayed character takes an action. You may try to do it. In this way, there is a possibility that a plurality of predetermined conditions (1) and (2) are satisfied within the display period of one character, and when any of the predetermined conditions is satisfied, a specific effect is performed. You may try to do it.

[Modifications of the 47th effect form to the 49th effect form]
In the example of FIG. 70, when a predetermined condition is satisfied and a specific effect is executed within a predetermined specific period after the character is displayed, the character is deleted before the end of the specific period. However, the character is not limited to such a form, and the character once displayed may be continuously displayed until the end of the specific period even after the specific effect is executed. good.

In such a form, the specific effect may be executed every time a predetermined condition is satisfied within the period in which the character is displayed. For example, when the character C is displayed based on the winning of the general winning opening, the character C does not disappear from the screen and continues for 5 minutes when the character C is displayed even if the valid start winning is generated. Is displayed, and the specific effect F (hold change effect) may be executed every time a valid start prize is generated in the 5 minutes.

In the example of FIG. 70, an example in which the display period of the character is a predetermined fixed period (1 minute, 2 minutes, 5 minutes) has been described, but the display period of the character is not limited to such a form, for example. , The period until the variable display game executed a predetermined number of times is executed, or the period until the variable display game executed when the character is displayed ends, and the character is displayed. It may be a period until the end of the game state (for example, a normal state, a probable change state or a time saving state, a big hit game state).

Further, regardless of the display period, there may be a character that is continuously displayed until a predetermined condition is satisfied. That is, once such a character is displayed, the character is not erased until a predetermined condition is satisfied and a specific effect is executed, regardless of the elapsed time from the start of display.

Further, the display period of the character may be determined before the type of the character to be displayed is determined, and the character may be selected according to the display period. For example, when a game ball wins a prize in a general winning opening, the effect control CPU 90120 determines which of 1 minute, 2 minutes, and 3 minutes the character display period is to be determined. If the display period is 1 minute, character A is selected at a rate of 70%, character B is selected at a rate of 20%, character C is selected at a rate of 10%, and the determined display period is 2 minutes. If, if character B is selected at a rate of 70%, character A is selected at a rate of 15%, character C is selected at a rate of 15%, and the determined display period is 3 minutes, then the character C may be selected at a rate of 70%, character B may be selected at a rate of 20%, and character A may be selected at a rate of 10%. For example, a different display period may be determined depending on which general winning opening the game ball has won, or depending on the game state.

In addition, the predetermined conditions that should be established in order to make the specific effect feasible are not limited to the above-mentioned effective start winning and the establishment of the reach state, but also the occurrence of a big hit game state, a predetermined type of big hit game state (for example, a probability variation big hit, or Occurrence of a jackpot with the largest number of rounds), the number of prize balls awarded in the jackpot game state has reached a predetermined number, and the number of consecutive jackpot game states (consecutive number = probability change state or time reduction after the end of the jackpot game state) The number of consecutive big hit game states controlled by the state + 1) has reached a predetermined number of times, the end of the big hit game state, the control to a predetermined game state (for example, a probable change state), and the display result are a loss combination. Others such as that the variable display game has been played a predetermined number of times, that the variable display game of the fluctuation pattern of "non-reach" ("loss without reach") has been played a predetermined number of times, that the number of reserved memories has reached a predetermined number, etc. Any condition may be used as long as it is a condition, that is, a condition that is satisfied with the game. In addition, the specific effect is not limited to the period during which the variable display of the special symbol is executed, but the variable display of the special symbol (the effect corresponding to the variable display of the special symbol) such as the period controlled by the jackpot game state is executed. It may be performed during a period that has not been done.

In the 47th effect mode and the 49th effect mode, an example is shown in which the notice effect for notifying the display result of the variable display in which the start condition is satisfied but the start condition is not satisfied is the hold change effect. Not limited to, for example, as shown in FIG. 50 (b) described above, depending on whether or not there is a jackpot hold, the effect of only the voice is executed, or the effect of the voice and the movable accessory 901000 is executed. It may be a look-ahead notice effect in which the ratio of the sound is different, or it may be a chance eye advance notice effect as shown in the 50th effect form or the 51st effect form described later. Further, it may be a countdown notice effect in which the player is notified of the remaining variable display number of times until the variable display that is the target of the look-ahead notice.

In the 47th effect mode and the 49th effect mode, after the character is displayed in the general winning opening based on the winning of the game ball, the effective start winning is generated, so that the displayed character is the mode of the hold information. An example of executing a hold change effect is shown, but it is not limited to such a form, and when a game ball wins a general winning opening, a start winning judgment corresponding to each held variable display game is made. Check the result specification command and the start winning variation pattern judgment result specification command, and if there is a variable display game or a variable display game with a reach state where the display result is a big hit, the rate is higher than when it does not exist. You may make a character appear. Further, when there is a variable display game in which the display result is a big hit or a variable display game with a reach state, the ratio of the specific character appearing may be higher than in the case where the display result does not exist. Further, different types of characters may appear depending on whether there is a variable display game in which the display result is a big hit or a variable display game with a reach state, and a case where the display result does not exist. Then, when a valid start prize is generated after the appearance of the character (when a predetermined condition is satisfied), it is preferable that the displayed character executes a hold change effect that changes the mode of the hold information.

Further, in the 47th effect mode to the 49th effect mode, when the character is controlled to the big hit game state, the displayed character is erased, and the game ball is placed in the general winning opening during the period controlled to the big hit game state. Even if the character wins a prize, the specific effect may not be executed by preventing a new character from appearing. As a result, the player's consciousness is concentrated on various effects (for example, fanfare effect, round effect, ending effect, etc.) executed in accordance with the control to the jackpot game state, and these various effects are not disturbed. be able to.

In the 47th effect mode to the 49th effect mode, an example in which a specific effect is always executed when a predetermined condition is satisfied within the display period of the character has been described, but the display of the character is not limited to such a form. Even if a predetermined condition is satisfied within the period, the specific effect may be executed at a predetermined ratio. For example, if the predetermined condition is satisfied within the display period of the character A, the specific effect is executed at a rate of 25%, and if the predetermined condition is satisfied within the display period of the character B, the specific effect is executed at a rate of 50%. Is executed, and if the predetermined condition is satisfied within the display period of the character C, the specific effect is executed at a rate of 100%. The execution ratio may be different.

Here, in the 47th effect mode to the 49th effect mode, if a game ball wins in the general winning opening while the character is displayed, the display of the new character based on the winning in the general winning opening is displayed. It is assumed that the character that has already been displayed is continuously displayed without doing so. That is, the effect control CPU 90120 determines whether or not to display the character and the character to be displayed at the ratio shown in FIG. 69, provided that none of the characters is displayed when the game ball wins the general winning opening. It is assumed that the character is displayed based on the determination.

Not limited to such a form, if a character is displayed when the game ball wins in the general winning opening, the character based on the previous general winning that has already been displayed is replaced (already displayed). The character may be deleted), and the character based on the later general prize may be displayed.

Also, comparing the remaining display period of the character based on the previous general prize that has already been displayed with the display period of the character based on the later general prize, the remaining display period of the character based on the previous general prize is longer. If it is long, it will continue to be displayed, and the character based on the later general prize will not be displayed. If the display period of the character based on the later general prize is longer, it will be replaced with the character based on the previous general prize (already). The displayed character may be deleted), and the character based on the later general prize may be displayed.

In such a form, when the character based on the later general prize is displayed instead of the character based on the previous general prize (the character already displayed is deleted), the display period of the character based on the later general prize is displayed. May be added to the remaining display period of the character based on the previous general prize that has already been displayed (the period in which both are added is set as the display period of the newly displayed character).

Further, in the 47th effect mode to the 49th effect form, if the game ball wins a prize in the general winning opening within the display period of the character, the new character based on the winning in the general winning opening is not displayed. , The remaining display period of the character that has already been displayed may be extended. The period to be extended here (time to be added to the remaining display period) may be a display period (for example, 1 minute if the character A is displayed) specified for the character that has already been displayed. Further, even when a prize is won in the general winning opening within the display period of the character, one of the characters is determined at the ratio shown in FIG. 69, and the determined character (however, newly displayed) is set. The display period (for example, 2 minutes for the character B) corresponding to the character that is not removed may be added to the remaining display period of the character that has already been displayed.

(Display of multiple characters)
Also, if a character is displayed when the game ball wins in the general winning opening, the character based on the previous general winning that has already been displayed (without erasing the already displayed character) will be displayed later. Characters based on the general prize may also be displayed. For example, if a game ball wins a prize in the general winning opening when character A is displayed and it is determined that character B is newly displayed, a new character is added to the already displayed character A. B may also be displayed on the image display device 905.

In such a form, the period obtained by adding the display period of the character based on the later general prize to the remaining display period of the character based on the previous general prize is set as the common display period of both characters. May be. In this case, if the predetermined condition is satisfied before the common display period elapses, the specific effect is executed and either one character or both characters are erased. Further, if the common display period elapses without satisfying the predetermined condition, both characters are deleted.

Further, in a state where both the first character (for example, character A) and the second character (for example, character B) are displayed on the image display device 905, the first predetermined condition (for example, effective) corresponding to the first character is first obtained. When the first specific effect (for example, specific effect F (hold change effect)) based on the establishment of the first predetermined condition is executed together with the establishment of the start prize), the first character is erased and only the second character is displayed. The displayed state is reached, and then the second predetermined condition (for example, the reach state) corresponding to the second character is satisfied, and the second specific effect (for example, the specific effect G (variation result) based on the establishment of the second predetermined condition is satisfied. When the notice effect)) is executed, the second character may also be deleted. Here, the first character and the second character may be characters of the same type.

In such a form, the first predetermined condition and the second predetermined condition may be a common condition (for example, the occurrence of a valid start prize), and in that case, both the first character and the second character are used. While displayed on the image display device 905, the first specific effect by the first character and the second specification by the second character are based on the establishment of the common condition (for example, the occurrence of a valid start prize only once). Both of the effects are executed, and both the first character and the second character are erased.

Further, the first specific effect and the second specific effect may be the same type of effect (for example, specific effect F (pending change effect)), in which case both the first character and the second character are image display devices. When the first predetermined condition (for example, effective start winning) corresponding to the first character is satisfied in the state displayed on the 905, a certain type of specific effect (specific effect F (hold change effect)) is executed, and the first When one character is erased and only the second character is displayed, and then the second predetermined condition (for example, the reach state) corresponding to the second character is satisfied, the same type of specific effect (specific effect F (specific effect F)) is satisfied again. The hold change effect)) may be executed so that the second character is erased.

Further, as in the 49th effect mode, if the first character (character A or B) is displayed, the first specific effect (specific effect) is obtained according to the establishment of the first condition (occurrence of a valid start prize). F) can be executed, and the second specific effect (specific effect G) can be executed according to the establishment of the second condition (establishment of the reach state) as long as the second character (character C) is displayed. It is assumed that only one of the first character and the second character can be displayed on the image display device 905 (both the first character and the second character are not displayed at the same time). Here, when the second specific effect is executed, the second character is the first character when the ratio of being controlled to an advantageous state (for example, a big hit game state) is higher than when the first specific effect is executed. It shall be displayed with priority over the character. For example, when it is decided to display the second character based on the winning of the game ball to the general winning opening when the first character is displayed, the first character is erased and the second character is displayed. Shall be newly displayed. On the other hand, when the second character is displayed, the control to display the first character instead of the second character is not performed.

On the other hand, when the configuration is such that the first character and the second character can be displayed on the image display device 905 at the same time, the first specific effect is executed according to the satisfaction of the first condition, and the second condition is satisfied. It is possible to execute the second specific effect according to the establishment of. However, when both the first specific effect and the second specific effect are intended for the same variable display game and the execution periods overlap (for example, both are variable result advance notice effects of the same variable display game and reach. (When it is executed immediately after the state is established), the second specific effect shall be executed with priority over the first specific effect, and at this time, the first specific effect shall not be executed.

[50th production form]
In the 50th effect mode shown in FIG. 75, a button icon 904000 is newly displayed on the image display device 905 (see FIG. 76 and the like) every time a game ball wins a prize in the general winning opening, and the displayed button icon 904000 is displayed. The types of specific effects that can be executed differ depending on the number of. Here, each of the specific effects in the present effect form prompts the player to perform some operation, and is an effect that can announce the display result of the variable display game based on the detection of the player's movement. There are three types of specific effects: cut-in notice effect (specific effect H), pseudo-continuous notice effect (specific effect I), and chance eye notice effect (specific effect J).

The display information condition of FIG. 75 is the number of button icons 904000 displayed in order to execute each specific effect, and if at least the number of button icons 904000 shown in the display information condition is not displayed, each specific condition is specified. No production is performed. Specifically, the cut-in notice effect is not executed unless one or more button icons 904000 are displayed, the pseudo-continuous notice effect is not executed unless two or more button icons 904000 are displayed, and the chance eye notice effect is If the button icon 904000 is not displayed 3 or more, it will not be executed.

The button icon 904000 displayed on the image display device 905 can be incremented by 1 each time a game ball wins a prize in the general winning opening, and a predetermined maximum number (for example, 5) can be displayed on the image display device 905. Suppose there is. Then, when the specific effect is executed, the number of button icons 904000 obtained by subtracting the number of display of the button icon 904000 required for executing the specific effect from the number of displayed button icons 904000 before the execution of the specific effect is generated. It will be displayed on the image display device 905 after the execution of the specific effect. For example, if (1) the cut-in notice effect (the number of required button icons to be displayed = 1) is executed while the five button icons 904000 are displayed, the button icon after the cut-in notice effect is executed will be displayed. The number of 904000 displayed is 4, and (2) when the pseudo-continuous notice effect (number of required button icon displays = 2) is executed, the number of displayed button icons 904000 after the pseudo-continuous notice effect is executed is 3. , (3) When the chance eye notice effect (the number of required button icon displays = 3) is executed, the number of displayed button icons 904000 after the chance eye notice effect is executed becomes 2.

(Cut-in notice production)
The cut-in notice effect provided as the specific effect H is an effect of notifying the display result of the variable display of the variable display pattern by the content of the characters displayed on the screen after the reach state is established. As shown in FIG. 75, the cut-in notice effect is obtained when (1) a variable display game is executed in a variable pattern accompanied by a reach state while (1) one or more button icons 904000 are displayed. The player is notified to perform a predetermined continuous striking operation, and (3) the player can perform the predetermined continuous striking operation.

If the variable display game is executed in a variable pattern accompanied by a reach state while no button icon 904000 is displayed, the continuous hit operation related to the cut-in notice effect is not notified and the cut-in notice is given. No production is performed. Further, in the variable display game of the fluctuation pattern not accompanied by the reach state, the continuous hit operation related to the cut-in notice effect is not notified, and the cut-in notice effect is not executed.

Further, in the cut-in notice effect, the reach state is established within the period during which the variable display game is being executed, and then the player operates the operation button 9030 a plurality of times, so that the reach effect is executed. The condition is that the variable display game is executed according to the variable pattern to be played. A specific mode of the cut-in notice effect will be described with reference to FIG. 76.

In FIG. 76 (a), the decorative symbol is changed (for example, scroll display in the vertical direction) in the decorative symbol display areas 905L, 905C, and 905R of "left", "middle", and "right", and is stored on hold. It is assumed that the number (the total number of the first reserved storage number and the second reserved storage number) is 1. At this time, in the start winning prize storage display area 905H, it is assumed that the display portion (left end) corresponding to the variable display game 1 in which the start condition is satisfied but the start condition is not satisfied is displayed in the normal mode. ..

The effect control CPU 90120 displays the first button icon 904000 at the left end of the screen based on the fact that the game ball has won a prize in any of the first general winning openings 9050A to the fourth general winning opening 9050D. In FIG. 76B, the screen is updated from the state in which the button icon 904000 is not displayed to the state in which one button icon 904000 is displayed. In addition, with the display of one or more button icons 904000 on the screen in total, the character 904000a of "cut-in" indicating that "the cut-in notice effect can be executed after the predetermined operation suggestion condition is satisfied" is added. It is displayed. The predetermined operation suggestion condition referred to here is that (1) a variable display game of a variation pattern accompanied by a reach state is executed while (1) one or more button icons 904000 are displayed.

Then, in FIG. 76 (c), it is assumed that the variable display of the decorative symbol that has been executed is completed and the display result is derived and displayed. Here, as a definite decorative pattern, a combination of "4" on the left, "2" on the right, and "8" in the middle, which is a non-reach loss, is derived and displayed.

Here, the effect control CPU 90120 determines whether or not the variation pattern of the variable display game is a reach variation pattern accompanied by a reach state, based on the establishment of the start condition of the next variable display game, for the game control microcomputer. Confirm based on the fluctuation pattern specification command received from 90100. Then, when the variable display game to be started has a reach fluctuation pattern, it is determined that the operation suggestion condition for the cut-in notice effect is satisfied.

Then, as shown in FIG. 76 (d), the next variable display game is started based on the establishment of the start condition, and along with this, the variable display game in which the start condition is satisfied but the start condition is not satisfied. Does not exist, and the display part at the left end is in a non-display mode.

In the variable display game of the reach variation pattern, the effect control CPU 90120 executes an effect of displaying the character 904080 of "reach!" When the reach state is established, as shown in FIG. 76 (e). Then, based on the establishment of the operation suggestion condition, as shown in FIG. 76 (f), the characters "continuous hit!", A plurality of downward arrows, and the operation button 9030 are imitated in order from the top in the center of the screen. The image and the continuous hit suggestion information 904100 consisting of a time bar suggesting the remaining period during which the operation is valid are displayed. As a result, the player recognizes that the operation of pressing the operation button 9030 should be continuously performed.

Further, the effect control CPU 90120 erases one button icon 904000 required for executing the cut-in notice effect among the displayed button icons 904000 along with the display of the continuous hit suggestion information 904100. As a result, the number of displayed button icons 904000 becomes 0, and the character 904000a of "cut-in" is deleted from the screen as the specific effect that can be executed does not exist.

It is assumed that the player who recognizes the continuous hit suggestion information 904100 continuously presses the operation button 9030 a predetermined number of times or more. The effect control CPU 90120 updates the display of the time bar according to the elapsed time from displaying the continuous hit suggestion information 904100. When the time bar is displayed, it is in a state of 5 stages out of 5 stages, and it is assumed that the time bar is decremented by 1 stage every 1 second after the display. As shown in FIG. 76 (g), in the effect control CPU 90120, the operation buttons 9030 are pressed a predetermined number of times (for example, 10 times) until the time bar reaches 0 of the 5 stages (for example, within 5 seconds from the start of display). When the above operation is performed, the cut-in mode is determined, and the cut-in screen corresponding to the determined mode is displayed on the image display device 905.

Specifically, the effect control CPU 90120 is when the display result of the variable display game to be executed becomes the final stop symbol of the jackpot combination as shown in FIG. 76 (h) when the continuous hit suggestion condition is satisfied. Decided to display the characters "Chance!" At a rate of 20% and the characters "Fever !!" at a rate of 80%, and the display result of the variable display game to be executed is a lost combination. In the case of the final stop symbol, it is decided to display the characters "chance!" At a rate of 80% and the characters "heat !!" at a rate of 20%.

Then, the effect control CPU 90120 executes a cut-in notice effect for displaying the screen including the determined character on the image display device 905. In the example of FIG. 76 (i), the characters 904200 of "heat !!" are displayed large on the entire screen.

If the operation button 9030 is not operated more than a predetermined number of times (for example, 10 times) within a predetermined period (for example, within 5 seconds) from the start of displaying the continuous hit suggestion information 904100, the effect control CPU 90120 "chance!" And none of the characters "Fever !!" shall be displayed on the screen.

(Pseudo-ream notice production)
The pseudo-continuous notice effect provided as the specific effect I is as if the decorative pattern once temporarily stopped is scrolled up and down again in one variable display game, so that it can be displayed multiple times. It is an effect that makes it look as if the variable display of the decorative pattern is being executed continuously. When re-variation is performed, a pseudo-continuous symbol is used as a decorative symbol in the "middle" decorative symbol display area 905C according to each symbol stop operation of the player (composed of the characters "NEXT" in this example). Shall be suspended.

As shown in FIG. 75, in the pseudo-continuous notice effect, (1) a variable display game was executed with a fluctuation pattern of 8 seconds or more while (1) two or more button icons 904000 were displayed. In this case, it is notified to perform each predetermined symbol stop operation, and (3) the player can execute each predetermined symbol stop operation.

Further, in the pseudo-continuous notice effect, the player operates the operation button 9030 three times (performs each symbol stop operation three times) within the period in which one variable display game is executed. It requires a certain operation time, and is conditioned on the execution of a variable display game having a fluctuation pattern with a fluctuation time of a certain time (8 seconds in this example) or more. A specific embodiment of the pseudo-continuous notice effect will be described with reference to FIGS. 77 and 78.

In FIG. 77 (a), the decorative symbol is changed (for example, scroll display in the vertical direction) in the decorative symbol display areas 905L, 905C, and 905R of "left", "middle", and "right", and is stored on hold. It is assumed that the number (the total number of the first reserved storage number and the second reserved storage number) is 1. At this time, in the start winning prize storage display area 905H, it is assumed that the display portion (left end) corresponding to the variable display game 1 in which the start condition is satisfied but the start condition is not satisfied is displayed in the normal mode. ..

Further, based on the fact that the game ball has won a prize in the first general winning opening 9050A to the fourth general winning opening 9050D, one button icon 904000 is displayed at the left end of the screen, and "cut after the predetermined operation suggestion condition is satisfied". The character 904000a of "cut-in" indicating that "in-notice effect can be executed" is displayed.

Further, the effect control CPU 90120 displays the second button icon 904000 at the left end of the screen based on the fact that the game ball has won a prize in any of the first general winning openings 9050A to the fourth general winning opening 9050D. In FIG. 77 (b), the screen is updated from the state in which one button icon 904000 is displayed to the state in which two button icons 904000 are displayed. In addition, with the display of two or more button icons 904000 on the screen in total, the character 904000b of "pseudo-ream" indicating that "pseudo-ream notice effect can be executed after the predetermined operation suggestion condition is satisfied" is added. It is displayed. The predetermined operation suggestion condition here is that (1) the variable display game is executed with a fluctuation pattern of 8 seconds or more while (1) two or more button icons 904000 are displayed. be.

Then, in FIG. 77 (c), after the second button icon 904000 is displayed, it is assumed that the variable display of the decorative symbol that has been executed is completed and the display result is derived and displayed. Here, as a definite decorative pattern, a combination of "5" on the left, "1" on the right, and "7" in the middle, which is a non-reach loss, is derived and displayed.

Here, the effect control CPU 90120 receives from the game control microcomputer 90100 whether or not the fluctuation time of the variable display game is 8 seconds or more based on the establishment of the start condition of the next variable display game. Check based on the fluctuation pattern specification command. Then, when the fluctuation time of the variable display game to be started is 8 seconds or more, it is determined that the operation suggestion condition of the pseudo-continuous notice effect is satisfied.

When the operation suggestion condition is satisfied, the effect control CPU 90120 determines that the variation pattern of the variable display game to be started is a non-reach variation pattern without a reach state, as shown in FIG. 77 (d). Determines to temporarily stop the pseudo-link symbol (execute re-variation) with a probability of 15%, and decide not to temporarily stop the pseudo-link symbol (do not execute re-variation) at a rate of 85%. On the other hand, when the fluctuation pattern of the variable display game to be started is a reach fluctuation pattern accompanied by a reach state, it is determined that the pseudo-continuous symbol is temporarily stopped (re-variation is executed) with a probability of 100%.

When it is decided to temporarily stop the pseudo-continuous symbol, the effect control CPU 90120 temporarily stops the decorative symbol in the "left" decorative symbol display area 905L according to each symbol stop operation of the player, and the decorative symbol. , The decorative symbol to be temporarily stopped in the "right" decorative symbol display area 905R is determined, and the pseudo-continuous symbol is temporarily stopped in the "middle" decorative symbol display area 905C.

As described above, when the effect control CPU 90120 receives the variation start command, the variable display result notification command, and the variation pattern specification command, the effect control CPU 90120 selects the effect control data corresponding to the variation pattern specification command and the variable display result. The final stop symbol (final stop symbol) is determined according to the notification command. When it is decided to temporarily stop the pseudo-continuous symbol, the "left" and "right" decorative symbols to be temporarily stopped in the decorative symbol display areas 905L and 905R according to each symbol stop operation of the player are determined and confirmed. It may be different from or the same as the "left" and "right" decorative symbols constituting the decorative symbol (final stop symbol).

When it is decided not to temporarily stop the pseudo-continuous symbol, the effect control CPU 90120 displays the "left" decorative symbol display area 905L and the "right" decorative symbol according to each symbol stop operation of the player. In the area 905R and the "middle" decorative symbol display area 905C, the "left", "right", and "middle" decorative symbols constituting the determined fixed decorative symbol (final stop symbol) are oscillated and stopped, respectively. Decide on that. That is, when the re-variation is not performed, it is decided to swing and stop the fixed decorative symbol (final stop symbol) according to each symbol stop operation of the player.

In this way, when the presence / absence of re-variation and the temporary stop symbol for performing re-variation are determined, the next variable display game is started based on the establishment of the start condition, as shown in FIG. 77 (e). Along with this, there is no variable display game in which the start condition is satisfied but the start condition is not satisfied, and the display portion at the left end is in the non-display mode. With the start of variable display of the decorative pattern, as shown in FIG. 77 (f), the characters "press!", The downward arrow, and the operation button 9030 are placed in the decorative pattern display area 905L on the "left" in order from the top. The operation suggestion information 904050 composed of the imitated image is displayed. As a result, the player recognizes that the operation button 9030 should be pressed in order to stop the decorative symbol in the decorative symbol display area 905L on the "left".

Further, the effect control CPU 90120 erases the two button icons 904000 required for executing the pseudo-continuous notice effect among the displayed button icons 904000 along with the display of the operation suggestion information 904050. As a result, the number of displayed button icons 904000 becomes 0, and the characters 904000a of "cut-in" and the characters 904000b of "pseudo-ream" are deleted from the screen as the specific effect that can be executed does not exist.

"Left" decoration As shown in FIG. 77 (g), the player who recognizes the operation suggestion information 904050 displayed in the symbol display area 905L presses the operation button 9030 to display the "left" decoration. The decorative symbol (“1” in this example) is stopped swinging in the symbol display area 905L. The rocking stop is a state in which the decorative pattern is not scrolled in the vertical direction, but is not completely stopped and is swinging (the final stop display is not displayed). Here, the decorative symbol to be oscillated and stopped is a "left" decorative symbol constituting a predetermined combination of temporary stop symbols when it is decided to stop the pseudo-continuous symbol, and is a pseudo. When it is decided not to stop the continuous symbol, it is a "left" decorative symbol constituting a predetermined combination of fixed decorative symbols (final stop symbol).

When the "left" decorative symbol is stopped swinging, the effect control CPU 90120 then displays the operation suggestion information 904050 in the "right" decorative symbol display area 905R, as shown in FIG. 77 (g). .. As a result, the player recognizes that the operation button 9030 should be pressed in order to stop the decorative symbol in the decorative symbol display area 905R on the "right" side.

"Right" decoration As shown in FIG. 77 (h), the player who recognizes the operation suggestion information 904050 displayed in the symbol display area 905R presses the operation button 9030 to display the "right" decoration. The decorative symbol (“2” in this example) is stopped swinging in the symbol display area 905R. Here, the decorative symbol to be oscillated and stopped is a "right" decorative symbol constituting a predetermined combination of temporary stop symbols when it is decided to stop the pseudo-continuous symbol, and is a pseudo. When it is decided not to stop the continuous symbol, it is a "right" decorative symbol constituting a predetermined combination of fixed decorative symbols (final stop symbol).

When the "right" decorative symbol is stopped swinging, the effect control CPU 90120 then displays the operation suggestion information 904050 in the "middle" decorative symbol display area 905C, as shown in FIG. 77 (h). .. As a result, the player recognizes that the operation button 9030 should be pressed in order to stop the decorative symbol in the "middle" decorative symbol display area 905C.

It is assumed that the player who recognizes the operation suggestion information 904050 displayed in the decorative symbol display area 905C of "middle" presses the operation button 9030.

At this time, if the effect control CPU 90120 has decided to temporarily stop the pseudo-continuous symbol based on the table of FIG. 77 (d), it is "middle" as shown in FIG. 78 (i). In the decorative symbol display area 905C of the above, the pseudo-continuous symbol composed of the characters "NEXT" is stopped swinging. As a result, the predetermined combination of the "left", "middle", and "right" temporary stop symbols is displayed as a temporary stop. Then, as shown in FIG. 78 (j), after the temporary stop display for a predetermined time, the decorative symbol changes (for example,) in the decorative symbol display areas 905L, 905C, and 905R of the "left", "middle", and "right". (Scroll display in the vertical direction) is restarted. After the re-variation, the combination of the fixed decorative symbols (final stop symbol) is displayed as the final stop in the decorative symbol display areas 905L, 905C, and 905R of "left", "middle", and "right", and the decorative symbol is variablely displayed. The display result of the game will be confirmed.

On the other hand, when the effect control CPU 90120 has decided not to temporarily stop the pseudo-linking symbol based on the table of FIG. 77 (d), as shown in FIG. 78 (k), it is "medium". The "middle" decorative symbol constituting the combination of the predetermined decorative symbols (final stop symbols) determined in advance in the decorative symbol display area 905C is oscillated and stopped. As a result, the combination of the predetermined "left", "right", and "middle" fixed decorative symbols (final stop symbols) is oscillated and stopped. Then, as shown in FIG. 78 (l), after a predetermined period of rocking stop, the fixed decorative symbols (final stop) are set in the decorative symbol display areas 905L, 905C, and 905R of the "left", "middle", and "right". The combination of the symbols) is finally stopped and displayed, and the display result of the variable display game of the decorative symbols is confirmed.

It should be noted that the effect control CPU 90120 has decided to temporarily stop the pseudo-continuous symbol even if the operation button 9030 is not operated within a predetermined period (for example, within 5 seconds) from the display of the operation suggestion information 904050. In that case, the combination of the temporarily stopped symbols determined in advance shall be displayed as a temporary stop and the re-variation shall be executed. That is, once it is decided to temporarily stop the pseudo-continuous symbol, the combination of the temporarily stopped symbols is automatically displayed as a temporary stop even if the operation is not performed, and the re-variation is executed. And.

In this example, when two or more button icons 904000 are displayed and the operation suggestion condition that the variable display game is executed by the fluctuation pattern with the fluctuation time of 8 seconds or more is satisfied, the operation suggestion condition is satisfied. The operation suggestion information 904050 is displayed regardless of whether or not the variation pattern is accompanied by a reach state (that is, regardless of the effect mode of the specified variation pattern), but the present invention is not limited to such a form. It may be an operation suggestion condition that two or more button icons 904000 are displayed and the variable display game is executed in a variable pattern accompanied by a reach state. In such an operation suggestion condition, when the display result of the variable display game accompanied by the reach state becomes a big hit, the pseudo-continuous symbol is temporarily stopped at a higher rate than when the display result is out of order. It is good to set it to.

Further, when the presence / absence of execution of the pseudo-continuous notice effect is preset for each variation pattern determined on the game control microcomputer 90100 side, that is, by the variation pattern designation command transmitted from the game control microcomputer 90100. In the case where the pseudo-ream symbol is specified to be temporarily stopped, the effect control CPU 90120 is designated to temporarily stop the pseudo-ream symbol when two or more button icons 904000 are displayed. Receiving a variable pattern specification command (executing a variable display game with a variable pattern accompanied by a pseudo-continuous notice effect) may be an operation suggestion condition, regardless of the specified variable pattern as in the above example. , The operation suggestion condition may be that two or more button icons 904000 are displayed and the variable display game is executed with a fluctuation time of a predetermined time or more.

(Chance notice production)
The chance eye notice effect provided as the specific effect J is different from the display result of the decorative pattern that is a jackpot combination as the display result of the variable display game executed before the variable display game that is the target of the look-ahead advance notice. By displaying the chance eye, which is the display result, at the final stop, the player is notified of the display result of the variable display game, which is the target of the pre-reading notice.

In this example, the same odd number of decorative symbols is finally stopped and displayed in the "left" and "middle" decorative symbol display areas 905L and 905C, and "left" is displayed in the "right" decorative symbol display area 905R. By displaying an even-numbered decorative symbol that is one larger than the odd-numbered decorative symbol that is finally stopped and displayed in the decorative symbol display areas 905L and 905C of the "middle", the "left", "middle", and "middle" that are chances are displayed. It is assumed that the combination of the decorative patterns on the right is completed.

That is, the combination of the "left", "middle", and "right" decorative symbols, which is a chance in this example, is any one of "112", "334", "556", and "778". It is possible to display the final stop display of the combination of decorative symbols that is a chance eye according to the player's operation to stop all the symbols.

As shown in FIG. 75, the chance eye notice effect is (1) a variable display game with 3 or more button icons 904000 is displayed, and (2) a variable display game with a reach state is held, and the variable display game is held. When none of the variable display games executed before the display game is accompanied by a reach state, a notification is given to perform a predetermined all symbol stop operation, and (3) a player performs a predetermined all symbol stop operation. It becomes feasible by doing.

In addition, in the chance eye notice effect, in one variable display game, the combination of "left", "middle", and "right" decorative symbols swings when the player operates the operation button 9030 only once. It will be stopped. That is, unlike the pseudo-continuous notice effect in which each symbol stop operation for swinging and stopping each of the "left", "right", and "middle" decorative symbols is required three times in one variable display game. The operation required in one variable display game (all symbol stop operation) is only once. A specific mode of the chance eye notice effect will be described with reference to FIGS. 79 and 80.

In FIG. 79 (a), the decorative symbol is changed (for example, scroll display in the vertical direction) in the decorative symbol display areas 905L, 905C, and 905R of "left", "middle", and "right", and is stored on hold. It is assumed that the number (the total number of the first reserved storage number and the second reserved storage number) is 3. At this time, in the start winning memory display area 905H, each display portion (left end, second from left, and 3 from left) corresponding to 3 variable display games in which the start condition is satisfied but the start condition is not satisfied. It is assumed that each of the second) is displayed in the normal mode.

Here, the effect control CPU 90120 is stored in the start winning command determination command for specifying the start winning command and the start winning command storage area for the second special figure, which are stored in the start winning command storage area for the first special figure. Check the start winning variation pattern judgment result specification command, and among the 3 pending variable display games, the variation pattern corresponding to the variable display game (display part on the left end) where the start condition is first satisfied. Is a non-reach fluctuation pattern, and the fluctuation pattern corresponding to the variable display game (second display part from the left) where the start condition is satisfied is the non-reach fluctuation pattern, and the start condition is satisfied third. It is assumed that the fluctuation pattern corresponding to the variable display game (third display portion from the left) is the reach fluctuation pattern.

Further, based on the fact that the game ball has won a prize a plurality of times (at least twice or more) in the first general winning opening 9050A to the fourth general winning opening 9050D, two button icons 904000 are displayed at the left end of the screen, and "predetermined". The character 904000a of "cut-in" indicating that "the cut-in notice effect can be executed after the operation suggestion condition is satisfied" and "the pseudo-continuous notice effect can be executed after the predetermined operation suggestion condition is satisfied". The character 904000b of "pseudo-ream" indicating the above is displayed.

The effect control CPU 90120 displays a third button icon 904000 at the left end of the screen based on the fact that the game ball has won a prize in any of the first general winning openings 9050A to the fourth general winning opening 9050D. In FIG. 79 (b), the screen is updated from the state in which the two button icons 904000 are displayed to the state in which the three button icons 904000 are displayed. In addition, with the display of three or more button icons 904000 on the screen in total, the character 904000c of "chance eye" indicating that "the chance eye notice effect can be executed after the predetermined operation suggestion condition is satisfied" is added. It is displayed. The predetermined operation suggestion condition referred to here is (1) a variable display game accompanied by a reach state is held while (1) 3 or more button icons 904000 are displayed, and the variable display game thereof. None of the variable display games run before that are accompanied by a reach state.

Then, in FIG. 79 (c), after the third button icon 904000 is displayed, it is assumed that the variable display of the decorative symbol that has been executed is completed and the display result is derived and displayed. Here, as a definite decorative pattern, a combination of "5" on the left, "9" in the middle, and "6" in the middle, which is a non-reach loss, is derived and displayed.

Here, the effect control CPU 90120 is a non-reach variation pattern in which the variation pattern of the variable display game for which the start condition is satisfied is not accompanied by the reach state, based on the establishment of the start condition of the next variable display game. Of the two pending variable display games, the variation pattern corresponding to the variable display game (display portion at the left end) where the start condition is satisfied first is the non-reach variation pattern, and the start condition is satisfied second. Based on the fact that the fluctuation pattern corresponding to the variable display game (second display portion from the left) is the reach fluctuation pattern, it is determined that the operation suggestion condition for the chance eye advance notice effect is satisfied.

When the operation suggestion condition is satisfied, the effect control CPU 90120 is executed twice before the reserved reach variation pattern variable display game (including the variable display game in which the start condition is satisfied). For each of the variable display games), it is determined to request the player to stop all symbols after the variable display is started. In addition, whether the display result of the holdable reach variation pattern variable display game is a jackpot combination or a loss combination is determined by the start winning judgment result specification command corresponding to the variable display game or the start winning variation pattern. Check based on the judgment result specification command.

Then, as shown in FIG. 79 (d), when the display result of the held variable display game of the reach fluctuation pattern is a jackpot combination, all the symbols of the player in the variable display game in which the start condition is satisfied are satisfied. Depending on the stop operation, it is decided to stop the chance eye at a rate of 75% and stop the non-chance eye (loss combination other than the chance eye) at a rate of 25%, and the pending reach fluctuation pattern is variable. If the display result of the display game is a lost combination, it is decided to stop the chance eye at a rate of 25% according to the player's operation to stop all symbols in the variable display game in which the start condition is satisfied. Decided to stop non-chance eyes at a rate of 75%.

When it is decided to stop the chance eyes, the effect control CPU 90120 constitutes the "left" and "middle" decorative symbol display areas 905L according to the player's all symbol stop operations. And an odd number of decorative symbols to be stopped at 905C, and an even number of decorative symbols to be stopped swinging in the "right" decorative symbol display area 905R are determined.

When it is decided not to stop the chance eyes, the effect control CPU 90120 has a "left" decorative symbol display area 905L and a "middle" decorative symbol display area 905C according to the player's all symbol stop operation. , And, in the "right" decorative symbol display area 905R, swing the decorative symbols that make up the fixed decorative symbol (final stop symbol) that does not become a chance according to the variable pattern specified by the variable pattern specification command. Decide to stop. That is, it is decided to swing and stop the definite decorative symbol (final stop symbol), which is a non-chance eye, according to the player's operation to stop all symbols.

In this way, when the presence / absence of the chance eye stop and the stop symbol when the chance eye stop is performed are determined, as shown in FIG. 79 (e), the next variable display game is started based on the establishment of the start condition. Along with this, there are two variable display games in which the start condition is satisfied but the start condition is not satisfied, and the third display portion from the left is the non-display mode. With the start of variable display of decorative symbols, as shown in FIG. 79 (f), the characters "Stop all symbols!" 904200 are displayed in large size in the center of the screen, and the characters "Press!" Are displayed downward in order from the top. The operation suggestion information 904050 composed of the arrow and the image imitating the operation button 9030 is displayed. As a result, the player recognizes that the operation button 9030 should be pressed to stop the decorative symbol in all the decorative symbol display areas 905L, 905C, and 905R of "left", "middle", and "right". do. In the chance eye notice effect, unlike the pseudo-continuous notice effect described above, by operating the operation button 9030 only once, all the decorative symbol display areas 905L of "left", "middle", and "right" are displayed. The decorative design is stopped at 905C and 905R.

Further, the effect control CPU 90120 is accompanied by the display of the characters 904200 of "Stop all symbols!" And the operation suggestion information 904050, and among the displayed button icons 904000, the three buttons required to execute the chance eye advance notice effect. Erase the icon 904000. As a result, the number of displayed button icons 904000 becomes 0, and as there is no specific effect that can be executed, the character 904000a of "cut-in", the character 904000b of "pseudo-ren", and the "chance eye" Character 904000c is erased from the screen.

Next, it is assumed that the player who recognizes the characters 904200 and the operation suggestion information 904050 of "Stop all symbols!" Presses the operation button 9030.

At this time, if the effect control CPU 90120 has decided to stop the non-chance eye based on the table of FIG. 79 (d), as shown in FIG. 79 (g), “left”, In the "middle" and "right" decorative symbol display areas 905L, 905C, and 905R, the combination of fixed decorative symbols (final stop symbols) that does not become a chance is shaken according to the variation pattern specified by the variation pattern specification command. Stop moving. Then, as shown in FIG. 79 (h), after the rocking stop for a predetermined period, the fixed decorative symbols (final stop) are set in the decorative symbol display areas 905L, 905C, and 905R of the "left", "middle", and "right". The combination of the symbols) is finally stopped and displayed, and the display result of the variable display game of the decorative symbols is confirmed. Here, as a definite decorative pattern for the non-chance eye, a combination of "4" on the left, "9" on the middle, and "7" on the right, which is a non-reach loss, is derived and displayed.

If the operation button 9030 is not operated within a predetermined period (for example, within 5 seconds) from the display of the characters 904200 of "Stop all symbols!" And the operation suggestion information 904050, the effect control CPU 90120 is a player. If it is decided to stop the non-chance eye according to the stop operation of all symbols, the fixed decorative symbol that does not become the chance eye according to the variation pattern specified by the variation pattern specification command (final stop symbol) The combination of the above shall be stopped swinging.

Next, as described above, the effect control CPU 90120 determines that the player is required to stop all symbols for the next variable display game, and the start condition of the next variable display game is set. Even when it is established, it is determined whether or not there is a chance stop as in the previous variable display game. That is, as shown in FIG. 80 (i), when the display result of the held variable display game of the reach fluctuation pattern is a jackpot combination, all the symbols of the player in the variable display game in which the start condition is satisfied. Depending on the stop operation, it is decided to stop the chance eyes at a rate of 75% and stop the non-chance eyes at a rate of 25%, and the display result of the variable display game of the pending reach fluctuation pattern is a loss combination In the case of, in the variable display game in which the start condition is satisfied, it is decided to stop the chance eye at a rate of 25% and the non-chance eye at a rate of 75% according to the player's operation to stop all symbols. Decide to stop.

Further, the effect control CPU 90120 operates to stop all symbols of the player when it is decided to stop the chance eyes or when it is decided to stop the non-chance eyes, as in the previous variable display game. The combination of decorative symbols to be stopped swinging is determined according to the above.

In this way, when the presence / absence of the chance eye stop and the stop symbol when the chance eye stop is performed are determined, as shown in FIG. 80 (j), the next variable display game is started based on the establishment of the start condition. Along with this, there is only one variable display game in which the start condition is satisfied but the start condition is not satisfied, and the second display portion from the left is the non-display mode. With the start of the variable display of the decorative symbol, as shown in FIG. 80 (k), the characters 904200 of "Stop all symbols!" And the operation suggestion information 904050 are displayed in the center of the screen. As a result, the player recognizes that the operation button 9030 should be pressed to stop the decorative symbol in all the decorative symbol display areas 905L, 905C, and 905R of "left", "middle", and "right". do.

Next, it is assumed that the player who recognizes the characters 904200 and the operation suggestion information 904050 of "Stop all symbols!" Presses the operation button 9030.

At this time, if the effect control CPU 90120 has decided to stop the chance eye based on the table of FIG. 80 (i), as shown in FIG. 80 (l), "left", " In the decorative symbol display areas 905L, 905C, and 905R of "middle" and "right", the combination of decorative symbols constituting the determined chance eye is oscillated and stopped. Then, as shown in FIG. 80 (m), after a predetermined period of rocking stop, the fixed decorative symbols (final stop) are set in the decorative symbol display areas 905L, 905C, and 905R of the "left", "middle", and "right". The combination of the symbols) is finally stopped and displayed, and the display result of the variable display game of the decorative symbols is confirmed. Here, as a definite decoration symbol for the chance eye, a combination of "1" on the left, "1" on the middle, and "2" on the right, which is a non-reach loss, is derived and displayed.

If the operation button 9030 is not operated within a predetermined period (for example, within 5 seconds) from the display of the characters 904200 of "Stop all symbols!" And the operation suggestion information 904050, the effect control CPU 90120 is a player. Even if it is decided to stop the chance eye according to the operation to stop all the symbols, the fixed decorative symbol (final stop) that does not become the chance eye according to the fluctuation pattern specified by the fluctuation pattern specification command. The combination of symbols) shall be stopped swinging.

Next, it has been determined that the effect control CPU 90120 requires the player to stop all symbols for the next variable display game, that is, the variable display game of the reach variation pattern that is the target of the chance eye advance notice effect. Therefore, when the start condition of the next variable display game is satisfied, it is not determined whether or not the chance is stopped. Then, as shown in FIG. 80 (n), the next variable display game is started based on the establishment of the start condition, and along with this, the variable display game in which the start condition is satisfied but the start condition is not satisfied. Does not exist, and the display part at the left end is in a non-display mode.

In the variable display game of the reach variation pattern, the effect control CPU 90120 executes an effect of displaying the character 904080 of "reach!" When the reach state is established, as shown in FIG. 80 (o).

In the 50th effect mode described above, the cut-in advance notice effect, the pseudo-continuous advance notice effect, and the chance eye advance notice effect are all states after the game ball has won a prize in the general winning opening, that is, the button icon 904000. In the displayed state, it can be executed by the operation of the player according to each notice effect. In this way, by providing a specific effect that is executed on condition that the player operates the game ball after the game ball has won the general prize opening, it is possible to enhance the interest when the game ball wins the general prize opening.

Further, each time the game ball wins in the general winning opening, the button icon 904000 displayed on the screen increases, so that the player can play the game ball in any of the first general winning opening 9050A to the fourth general winning opening. It is possible to recognize that the prize has been won.

Further, if the operation suggestion condition of the cut-in notice effect is satisfied while one or more button icons 904000 are displayed, a notification is given to prompt the repeated hit operation as an operation corresponding to the cut-in notice effect, and two or more button icons 904000 are displayed. When the operation suggestion condition of the pseudo-continuous notice effect is satisfied in the state of being set, a notification prompting each symbol stop operation is performed as an operation corresponding to the pseudo-continuous notice effect, and a chance eye is displayed with 3 or more button icons 904000 displayed. When the operation suggestion condition of the advance notice effect is satisfied, a notification prompting the stop operation of all symbols is given as an operation corresponding to the chance eye advance notice effect, so that the player can execute the specific effect by performing any operation. Can be grasped.

Further, according to the number of displayed button icons 904000, when the number of displays is 1 or more, the character 904000a of "cut-in" is displayed, and when the number of displays is 2 or more, the character 904000b of "pseudo-ream" is displayed and the number of displays. When the number is 3 or more, the character 904000c of the "chance eye" is displayed, so that the player can grasp the type of the specific effect that can be executed according to the number of the displayed button icons 904000. As a result, it is possible to be interested in the number of winning balls of the game ball to the general winning opening.

It should be noted that the type of specific effect that can be executed and the operation required to execute the specific effect may be notified. For example, according to the display number of the button icon 904000, when the display number is 1 or more, the character "continuous hit" is displayed next to the character 904000a of "cut-in", and when the display number is 2 or more, the character "pseudo-ream" is displayed. The character "stop all symbols" is displayed next to the character 904000b, and when the number of displays is 3 or more, the character "stop all symbols" is displayed next to the character 904000c of "chance eye", so that the player can use it. It is possible to grasp the operation required according to the type of specific effect that can be executed.

Here, in this embodiment, there is a case where the operation suggestion conditions corresponding to each of the plurality of types of specific effects are simultaneously satisfied. For example, in a state where two or more button icons 904000 are displayed, when the start condition of the variable display game is satisfied, the fluctuation pattern is a fluctuation pattern accompanied by a reach state, and the fluctuation time of the fluctuation pattern is 8. It may take more than a second. In this case, a notification prompting a continuous hit operation for executing the cut-in notice effect (display of the continuous hit suggestion information 904100) and a stop operation for each symbol for executing the pseudo continuous notice effect are urged. The question is which of the notifications (display of the operation suggestion information 904050 in each decorative symbol display area 905L, 905C, 905R) should be performed. In this embodiment, the one with the larger number of button icons 904000 required to execute the specific effect is preferentially executed. Therefore, the notification prompting each symbol stop operation for executing the pseudo continuous advance notice effect (two or more button icons 904000 are required) is the notification prompting the continuous hit operation for executing the cut-in advance notice effect (one or more button icon 904000 is required). It shall be given priority over.

Further, in the state where 3 or more button icons 904000 are displayed, when the start condition of the variable display game of the non-reach variation pattern is satisfied, the variation time of the non-reach variation pattern is 8 seconds or more, and , The pending variable display game may have a reach fluctuation pattern, and in this case, a notification prompting each symbol stop operation for executing the pseudo-continuous notice effect (in each decorative symbol display area 905L, 905C, 905R). Operation suggestion information 904050 display) or notification prompting all symbol stop operation for executing chance eye notice effect (display of characters 904200 and operation suggestion information 904050 in each variable display game). The question is whether to do. In this case, the notification prompting the stop operation of all symbols for executing the chance eye advance notice effect (3 or more button icons 904000 are required) is the notification prompting each symbol stop operation for executing the pseudo-continuous advance notice effect (button icon 904000). Is required to be 2 or more).

Further, in this embodiment, the number of displayed button icons 904000 is the number of button icons 904000 required to execute the specific effect (1 for cut-in notice effect, 2, 2 chance for pseudo-continuous notice effect). If there are more than 3) in the case of the eye notice effect, the number of button icons 904000 obtained by subtracting the number of button icons 904000 required to execute the specific effect from the number of button icons 904000 initially displayed is the specific. It will continue to be displayed even after the production is executed.

For example, if the chance eye notice effect is executed while four or more button icons 904000 are displayed, one button icon 904000 that is continuously displayed remains even after the chance eye notice effect is executed. The character 904000a of "cut-in" remains displayed on the screen. After that, when the variable display game of the reach fluctuation pattern is started, the operation suggestion condition of the cut-in notice effect is satisfied, and the notification for prompting the continuous hit operation is performed.

Further, in this embodiment, when the variable display game is started, it is determined whether or not the operation suggestion condition corresponding to each specific effect is satisfied (the number of button icons 904000 is confirmed). (I try to check the fluctuation pattern of the variable display game together), but not limited to this form, is the operation suggestion condition corresponding to each specific effect satisfied when the variable display game is being executed? It may be determined whether or not. For example, the effect control CPU 90120 determines whether or not one or more button icons 904000 are displayed at the timing when the reach state is established, and if they are displayed, the continuous hit suggestion information 904100 for causing repeated hits. It may be displayed. Further, in the effect control CPU 90120, whether or not two or more button icons 904000 are displayed at the timing when the remaining time until the end of the variable display game (deriving display of the display result) reaches a predetermined time (for example, 10 seconds remaining). If it is displayed, the operation suggestion information 904050 for performing each symbol stop operation may be displayed. Further, the effect control CPU 90120 holds a variable display game (including a variable display game corresponding to the effective start prize) with a reach state at the timing when the effective start prize is generated, and the variable display game thereof. When none of the variable display games executed before is accompanied by a reach state, it is determined whether or not 3 or more button icons 904000 are displayed, and if they are displayed, all symbols are stopped. The characters 904200 and the operation suggestion information 904050 for displaying "Stop all symbols!" May be displayed. That is, in the variable display game executed at the timing when the display number of the button icons 904000 reaches a predetermined predetermined number (without waiting for the establishment of the start condition of the variable display game to be executed next), a predetermined number is specified. Notification that the operation should be performed or a specific effect may be executed.

Further, the effect control CPU 90120 determines whether or not the variable display game being executed has a reach variation pattern at the timing when the button icon 904000 becomes 1 or more based on the winning of the game ball to the general winning opening. Further, in the case of the reach fluctuation pattern, the continuous hitting suggestion information 904100 for making the continuous hitting may be displayed at the timing when the reach state is established. Further, the effect control CPU 90120 remains until the end of the variable display game being executed (deriving display of the display result) at the timing when the button icon 904000 becomes 2 or more based on the winning of the game ball to the general winning opening. It is determined whether or not the time is longer than the predetermined time (for example, 10 seconds remaining), and if it is longer than the predetermined time, the remaining time until the end of the variable display game (derivative display of the display result) is the predetermined time (for example). At the timing when the remaining 10 seconds), the operation suggestion information 904050 for performing each symbol stop operation may be displayed. Further, the effect control CPU 90120 provides a variable display game with a reach state (a variable display game corresponding to the effective start winning) at the timing when the button icon 904000 becomes 3 or more based on the winning of the game ball to the general winning opening. (Including) is pending, and it is determined whether or not any of the variable display games executed before the variable display game is not accompanied by a reach state, and a variable display game with a reach state is determined. If is on hold and none of the variable display games executed prior to the variable display game are accompanied by a reach state, the all symbol stop operation is performed in the executed variable display game. The characters 904200 and the operation suggestion information 904050 for displaying "Stop all symbols!" May be displayed. That is, in the variable display game executed at the timing when the display number of the button icons 904000 reaches a predetermined predetermined number (without waiting for the establishment of the start condition of the variable display game to be executed next), a predetermined number is specified. Notification that the operation should be performed or a specific effect may be executed.

Further, in the 50th effect mode, the operation suggestion conditions for notifying the user to perform a predetermined operation (continuous striking operation, each symbol stop operation, all symbol stop operation) are all conditions related to the variable display game (display mode and). (Fluctuating time), and an example in which a specific effect is executed during the execution of a variable display game due to a predetermined operation has been described, but the operation suggestion condition is, for example, a hit, not limited to such a form. It may be a condition related to the game state (for example, whether or not it is controlled to the big hit game state, whether or not the big hit type is a probabilistic big hit, and whether or not the number of rounds is more than a predetermined number, etc.), and it may be a big hit. A specific effect may be executed when a predetermined operation is performed in the game state. For example, when the number of displayed button icons 904000 reaches a predetermined number within the period controlled by the jackpot gaming state, a notification is given to the player to perform a predetermined operation, and the predetermined operation is performed. Occasionally, an effect of notifying whether or not the jackpot gaming state is a probabilistic jackpot or whether or not the number of rounds of the jackpot gaming state is greater than a predetermined number may be executed. Further, when the number of displayed button icons 904000 reaches a predetermined number within the period in which the gaming state is controlled to the probabilistic state (however, the effect mode is such that it is difficult for the player to recognize that the game state is the probabilistic state). A notification may be given to urge the player to perform a predetermined operation, and when the predetermined operation is performed, an effect of notifying whether or not the game state is a probable change state may be executed.

Further, in the 50th effect mode, even when the number of displayed button icons 904000 is 1, a notification for prompting a continuous striking operation is performed based on the establishment of the operation suggestion condition, and a cut-in notice effect is executed according to the continuous striking operation. However, the present invention is not limited to such a form, and unless the number of displayed button icons 904000 is a predetermined number or more (for example, 2 or more, or 3 or more), a notification prompting a predetermined operation is not performed (for example,). No notification is performed to prompt any of the continuous hit operation, each symbol stop operation, and all symbol stop operation), and the specific effect is not executed (for example, any of the cut-in advance notice effect, the pseudo continuous advance notice effect, and the chance eye advance notice effect). The specific effect of is not executed either).

(Example of one notification)
Further, in the 50th effect mode, in order to stop the temporary stop symbol in each decorative symbol display area 905L, 905C, 905R, three operations are performed for each area, but the final decorative symbol (final stop symbol) is performed. ) May be stopped in each decorative symbol display area 905L, 905C, 905R, so that the operation may be performed three times for each area. That is, when the effect control CPU 90120 determines the final stop symbol (final stop symbol) according to the variable display result notification command, the operation suggestion information 904050 is displayed in the "left" decorative symbol display area 905L, and the operation button 9030 is displayed. The left symbol constituting the final stop symbol is oscillated and stopped in response to the operation of, then the operation suggestion information 904050 is displayed in the decorative symbol display area 905R on the "right", and the final stop is performed in response to the operation of the operation button 9030. The right symbol constituting the symbol is oscillated and stopped, and finally, the operation suggestion information 904050 is displayed in the decorative symbol display area 905C of "middle", and the middle symbol constituting the final stop symbol is formed according to the operation of the operation button 9030. May be made to stop swinging. In such a configuration, when the combination of jackpot symbols becomes the final stop symbol, the symbol display areas 905L, 905R, and "left", "right", and "middle" are displayed according to the player's three operations. By sequentially stopping the same decorative pattern on the 905C, it is possible to increase the expectation of the player's operation.

In the "left", "right", and "middle" symbol display areas, a combination of special decorative symbols that is different from the combination of normal decorative symbols (for example, images of alphanumerical characters "1" to "8") is placed. By stopping, a notification is given to urge the player to perform a predetermined operation, and whether the display result of the variable display game is a big hit or a miss (or a probable variable big hit) according to the player's predetermined operation. It is also possible to execute a specific effect to notify (whether it will be a non-probability change jackpot, etc.). For example, the special decorative symbol, which is an image imitating the operation button 9030, is stopped in the "left" and "right" symbol display areas (or the normal decorative symbol is displayed in the "left" and "right" symbol display areas. Stop the symbol), and stop the image of the characters "Repeat hit!" In the "Medium" symbol display area. Then, when the player who recognizes the image of the character "continuous hit!" Performs the continuous hit operation, the display result of the variable display game (for example, the image of the character "big hit!" Or "missing" is displayed on the image display device 905. An image of the characters "" may be displayed.

Further, in such a form, according to the image of the character stopped in the "middle" symbol display area (according to the notification mode suggesting to perform a predetermined operation), the variable display game The ratio of the displayed result to be a big hit (or the ratio of being a probable variable big hit) may be different. For example, the operation button 9030 is made longer than when the image of the characters "Repeat hit!", Which suggests that the operation button 9030 is pressed repeatedly in the "middle" symbol display area, is stopped as a special symbol. The rate at which the display result becomes a big hit may be higher when the image of the character "long press!", Which suggests the operation of pressing once, is stopped as a special symbol. In this way, the effect of notifying the display result of the variable display game according to the operation of the player may be executed as a specific effect without going through the reach state. In addition, during the period when the variable display game of 1 is executed, the combination of special decorative symbols is stopped multiple times in the symbol display areas of "left", "right", and "middle", and the special decorative symbol is stopped. The player may perform a predetermined operation each time the combination of the above is stopped. In this case, a notice effect suggesting a display result may be executed for each predetermined operation (excluding the last predetermined operation), and the display result may be notified according to the last predetermined operation. ..

In addition, in the 50th effect mode, each symbol stop operation is effective on condition that two or more prizes are given to the general winning opening, and further, a pseudo continuous notice effect is executed according to each symbol stop operation, and the general winning opening is entered. An example is shown in which the all-symbol stop operation is effective on condition that the prize is won three times or more, and the chance eye notice effect is executed according to the all-symbol stop operation. The condition that the operation is valid) may be conditional on winning four or more times in the general winning opening.

[51st production form]
In the 51st effect mode shown in FIG. 75, unlike the 50th effect mode, the specific effect that can be executed is different depending on the gaming state. In the 51st effect mode, the cut-in notice effect that requires a continuous striking operation can be executed in any of the normal state, the probabilistic state, and the time saving state. On the other hand, the pseudo-continuous advance notice effect that requires each symbol stop operation can be executed only when the game state is in the normal state, and the chance eye advance notice effect that requires all symbol stop operations is in a probable change state or a time-saving state. It can be executed only when.

In the cut-in notice effect and the pseudo-continuous notice effect, the operation suggestion condition may be satisfied at the same time in the normal state. In this case, the pseudo-continuous notice effect requiring a larger number of button icons 904000 is executed. Each symbol stop operation for this is preferentially prompted. On the other hand, since the playable game states are different between the pseudo-continuous advance notice effect and the chance eye advance notice effect, the operation suggestion condition is not satisfied at the same time.

Even if the number of button icons 904000 displayed in the normal state is 3 or more, the character 904000a of "cut-in" and "pseudo-ream" are not executed in the normal state because the chance eye notice effect is not executed. Character 904000b is displayed, but the character 904000c of "chance eye" is not displayed. Even if the number of button icons 904000 displayed in the probabilistic change state or the time reduction state is 3 or more, the character "cut-in" is not executed in the probabilistic change state or the time reduction state. The 904000a and the "chance eye" character 904000c are displayed, but the "pseudo-ren" character 904000b is not displayed.

In this way, the type of the specific effect to be notified, that is, the type of the specific effect that can be executed differs depending on the game state when the game ball wins the general winning opening, so that it is appropriate according to the game state. It is possible to make different interests.

In addition, in this effect mode, the advance notice effect requiring a larger number of button icons 904000 is preferentially executed, but the advance notice effect is not limited to such a form, and the player has a higher expectation for the advance notice effect. It may be executed with priority. For example, if the operation suggestion condition of the cut-in notice effect and the operation suggestion condition of the pseudo-ream advance notice are satisfied for the same variable display game, the notice effect with a higher percentage of big hits (for example, the pseudo-ream advance notice effect). ) Should be prioritized and executed.

[52nd production form]
In the 52nd effect mode shown in FIG. 81, unlike the 50th effect form and the 51st effect form, the button icon 904000 is not displayed according to the winning of the game ball to the general winning opening, and the game ball to the general winning opening is displayed. Whether or not to display any of the characters 904000a to 904000c for each prize, and when displaying, the character 904000a of "cut-in", the character 904000b of "pseudo-ren", and the character 904000c of "chance eye" It determines which of the above is displayed. In FIG. 82 (A), whether or not any of the characters 904000a to 904000c is displayed according to the winning of each general winning opening, and when displaying, which of the characters 904000a to 904000c is displayed. The display information judgment table for determining is shown.

When the game ball wins in the first general winning opening 9050A, the effect control CPU 90120 decides to display the character 904000a of "cut-in" on the screen at a rate of 25%, and "cut-in" at a rate of 75%. It is decided to display the character 904000b of "pseudo-ream" on the screen. In addition, when a game ball wins in the second general winning opening 9050B, it is decided not to display any of the characters 904000a to 904000c at a rate of 50%, and the character 904000a of "cut-in" is displayed at a rate of 25%. It is decided to display it on the screen, and it is decided to display the character 904000b of "pseudo-ren" on the screen at a rate of 25%.

In addition, when a game ball wins in the third general winning opening 9050C, it is decided that none of the characters 904000a to 904000c is displayed at a rate of 80%, and the character 904000a of "cut-in" is displayed at a rate of 10%. It is decided to display it on the screen, and it is decided to display the character 904000c of "chance eye" on the screen at a rate of 10%. In addition, when a game ball wins in the 4th general winning opening 9050D, it is decided not to display any of the characters 904000a to 904000c at a rate of 70%, and the character 904000a of "cut-in" is displayed at a rate of 10%. It is decided to display it on the screen, and it is decided to display the character 904000c of "chance eye" on the screen at a rate of 20%.

Then, as in the 50th effect mode and the 51st effect form described above, when the variable display game of the reach variation pattern is started while the character 904000a of "cut-in" is displayed, the continuous striking operation is performed. A cut-in notice effect is executed according to the continuous hitting operation, and a variable display game of a fluctuation pattern with a fluctuation time of 8 seconds or more is started while the character 904000b of "pseudo-ream" is displayed. In that case, the player is notified to perform each symbol stop operation, a pseudo-continuous notice effect is executed according to each symbol stop operation, and the reach fluctuation pattern is variable in the state where the character 904000c of "chance eye" is displayed. If the display game is on hold and all the variable display games executed before it have a non-reach fluctuation pattern, the player is notified to perform the all symbol stop operation and responds to the all symbol stop operation. Execute a chance eye notice production.

In the example of FIG. 82 (A), when a game ball wins in the first general winning opening 9050A, any of the characters 904000a to 904000c is displayed at a rate of 100%, and the game ball is displayed in the second general winning opening 9050B. If a prize is won, one of the characters 904000a to 904000c is displayed at a rate of 50%, and if a game ball is won in the third general winning opening 9050C, any one of the characters 904000a to 904000c is displayed at a rate of 20%. When a game ball wins a prize in the fourth general winning opening 50C, any of the characters 904000a to 904000c is displayed at a rate of 30%.

In this way, depending on the general winning opening in which the game ball has won, the ratio of notifying the type of the specific effect that can be executed and the ratio of the specific effect that can be executed differ. It is possible to improve the interest by paying attention to whether the game ball enters the game.

Further, the game ball launched in the left game area 9010A is easier to win in the second general winning opening 9050B than in the first general winning opening 9050A, and the game ball launched in the right game area 9010B is in the fourth general winning opening. If it is configured so that it is easier to win the third general winning opening 9050C than the 9050D, it is more difficult to win the general winning opening (the first general winning opening 9050A in the normal state, if it is in the probabilistic state or the time saving state). When a game ball wins a prize in the 4th general winning opening 9050D), the ratio of the specific effect being executed is high.

Further, when a game ball wins in the first general winning opening 9050A or the second general winning opening 9050B, either the character 904000a of "cut-in" or the character 904000b of "pseudo-ren" may be displayed. However, the character 904000c of "chance eye" is not displayed. On the other hand, when a game ball wins in the 3rd general winning opening 9050C or the 4th general winning opening 9050D, either the character 904000a of "cut-in" or the character 904000c of "chance eye" may be displayed. However, the character 904000b of "pseudo-ren" is not displayed.

In this way, the game ball enters any of the general winning openings because the notification mode of the specific effect that can be executed and the type of the specific effect that can be executed are different depending on the general winning opening that the game ball has won. You can pay attention to what you do and improve your interest.

Further, when the game state is the normal state, the game ball is fired in the left game area 9010A, and when the game state is in the probable change state or the time saving state, the game ball is fired in the right game area 9010B. In the normal state in which the game ball wins in the 9050A or the second general winning opening 9050B, the characters 904000a to 904000c are more than in the probable change state or the time saving state in which the game ball wins in the third general winning opening 9050C or the fourth general winning opening 9050D. The ratio of displaying any of the above is high, and the ratio of executing the specific effect is high.

Since the interest is likely to decline when the game state is in the normal state, the decline in interest is prevented by increasing the ratio at which the characters 904000a to 904000c appear and the ratio at which the specific effect is executed. On the other hand, when the game state is a probable change state or a time-saving state, the player's interest is directed to the special figure game or the normal figure game. Since there are cases where the characters 904000a to 904000c appear, the ratio at which the specific effect is executed is set to be lower than the normal state. In this way, it is possible to appropriately different the interests of winning a game ball in the general winning opening according to the game state.

Further, not limited to the example shown in FIG. 82 (A), when the gaming state is in the probabilistic state or the time saving state, the ratio of characters 904000a to 904000c appearing and the specific effect are executed as compared with the case where the gaming state is in the normal state. The ratio may be increased, and contrary to the example shown in FIG. 82 (A), when the game ball wins in the third general winning opening 9050C or the fourth general winning opening 9050D, the first general winning opening is won. The characters 904000a to 904000c may be displayed at a higher rate than when the game ball wins in the mouth 9050A or the second general winning mouth 9050B. Further, in FIG. 82 (A), the pseudo-continuous notice effect can be executed only when the first general winning opening 9050A or the second general winning opening 9050B is won, but similarly, the third general winning opening 9050C Alternatively, a specific effect that can be executed only at the time of winning the 4th general winning opening 9050D may be provided.

Further, not limited to the example shown in FIG. 82 (A), as shown in FIG. 82 (B), a game ball is awarded for each winning opening of the first general winning opening 9050A to the fourth general winning opening 9050D. When the game state is the normal state, the rate at which the characters 904000a to 904000c appear and the rate at which the specific effect is executed are higher than when the game state when the game ball wins is the probability change state or the time saving state. May be made higher. Contrary to the example shown in FIG. 82 (B), when the game ball wins in each general winning opening in the probable change state or the time saving state, when the game ball wins in each general winning opening in the normal state. Characters 904000a to 904000c may be displayed at a higher rate than that. Further, in FIG. 82B, a specific effect that can be executed only when the game state is the normal state may be provided, and the specific effect that can be executed only when the game state is the probable change state or the time saving state may be provided. May be provided.

It should be noted that the rate of displaying characters 904000a to 904000c and the rate of executing a specific effect are not limited to different cases depending on whether the game state is a normal state, a probabilistic state, or a time saving state. For example, whether or not the jackpot game state is controlled, whether or not the number of prize balls given in the jackpot game state has reached a predetermined number, and the number of consecutive jackpot game states (consecutive number = end of the jackpot game state). Whether or not the number of consecutive jackpot game states controlled to the probabilistic state or the time-saving state +1) has reached a predetermined number of times, and whether or not the variable display game in which the display result is a loss combination has continued for a predetermined number of times, "Non- Variable display of variation pattern of "reach" ("loss without reach") Character 904000a ~ The ratio at which 904000c is displayed and the ratio at which the specific effect is executed may be different.

[Display area of each image on the screen of the image display device 905]
The display area of each image that can be displayed on the screen of the image display device 905 may be set as follows. Hereinafter, the maximum width of the image that can be displayed on the screen of the image display device 905 is defined as (X + 1) pixels, and the maximum height is defined as (Y + 1) pixels. Then, the coordinates of the pixels in the upper left corner of the display screen are set to (0,0), and the coordinates of the pixels in the lower right corner of the display screen are set to (X, Y). At this time, as shown in FIG. 83A, the rectangular area defined by the coordinates (0,0) and the coordinates (a, Y) as the vertices is defined as the first area α, and the coordinates (a + 1,0) are defined. The rectangular area defined by the coordinates (X, Y) as the vertices is defined as the second area β. There is no overlapping region between the first area α and the second area β. Further, in this example, the second area β is a wider area than the first area α.

In the first area α, the number of prizes related to the number of prizes in each prize opening, such as the number of prizes in the general prize opening, the number of prizes in the first starting prize opening, and the number of prizes in the second starting winning slot, etc. Numerical information can be displayed. As shown in FIG. 83A, the second area β includes an error message display area 5E, a fourth symbol display area 905A, 905B, a decorative symbol display area 905L, 905C, 905R, and a start winning memory display area 905H. Is provided. In the examples of FIGS. 83 and 84, the background image can be visually recognized in the second area β, but the background image cannot be visually recognized in the first area α.

In this example, the entire image of the background image stored in the ROM 90121 as the effect data has an overall width of (X + 1) pixels as shown in FIGS. 85 (b) and (c) described later, and is the entire image. It is an image in which the height is (Y + 1) pixels, the character D is climbing near the top of the mountain, and the character E is climbing near the foot of the mountain. In the examples of FIGS. 83 (b) (c) and 84 (e) (f), the entire area of the background image [rectangular area defined with the coordinates (0,0) and the coordinates (X, Y) as vertices]. Of these, only the area corresponding to the second area β [a rectangular area defined by the coordinates (a + 1,0) and the coordinates (X, Y) as vertices] is visible to the player. Of the entire area of the background image, the area corresponding to the first area α [the rectangular area defined by the coordinates (0,0) and the coordinates (a, Y) as vertices] is invisible to the player.

Therefore, in the examples of FIGS. 83 (b) (c) and 84 (e) (f), the player is defined with the coordinates (a + 1,0) and the coordinates (X, Y) of the background image as vertices. The character D included in the rectangular area can be visually recognized, but the character E included in the rectangular area defined by the coordinates (0,0) and the coordinates (a, Y) of the background image as vertices cannot be visually recognized.

In the examples of FIGS. 83 (b) (c) and 84 (e) (f), "today's general prize number" which is the total number of prizes to the general prize opening on the day (1) in the first area α. And (2) "Today's navel winning number" which is the total number of winnings to the first starting winning opening on the day, and (3) "Today's total number of winnings to the second starting winning opening on the day" Three items of "Electric chew winning number" are displayed.

In this embodiment, as described above, in the effect control CPU 90120, when a prize is generated in the general winning opening, a game ball is won in any of the first general winning opening 9050A to the fourth general winning opening 9050D. When a general winning opening designation command is received and a winning entry occurs in the starting winning slot, the starting winning slot that specifies whether the game ball has won the first starting winning slot or the second starting winning slot. Receive a mouth specification command. Therefore, the effect control CPU 90120 can individually total the number of winnings to the general winning opening, the number of winnings to the first starting winning opening, and the number of winnings to the second starting winning opening. In this example, (1) "Today's general prizes" is 70, (2) "Today's navel prizes" is 521, and (3) "Today's electric chew prizes" is 217. In this way, by displaying the number of winnings in the general winning opening and the number of winnings in the starting winning opening in a comparable manner, it becomes possible to relatively grasp the winning status in each winning opening.

Further, in the examples of FIGS. 83 (b) and 84 (e), in the second area β, the fourth symbol for the first special symbol is variably displayed in the fourth symbol display area 905A, and is decorated. The decorative pattern is variably displayed in the symbol display areas 905L, 905C, and 905R. Further, in the start winning prize storage display area 905H, a round object is displayed at the left end as one hold information corresponding to one hold of the special figure game. The image of the fourth symbol in the variable display, the image of the decorative symbol in the variable display, and the image of the hold information are all displayed only in the second area β.

It is assumed that the display layer of the fourth symbol, the display layer of the decorative symbol, and the display layer of the hold information are higher than the display layer of the background image. Here, the fact that the display layer of a certain image is higher than the display layer of another image means that when one image and another image are superimposed and displayed, the visibility of one image is visually recognized by another image. It means that display control is performed in preference to gender. Specifically, in the examples of FIGS. 83 (b) (c) and 84 (e) (f), one of the area and the background image in which each image of the fourth symbol, the decorative symbol, and the hold information is displayed. The area overlaps with the area, but in this case, the fourth symbol, the decorative pattern, and the reserved information whose display layer is higher than the background image are easy to see (including visible). On the other hand, display control is performed to make the background image difficult to see (including invisible). Therefore, when viewed from the player, the fourth symbol, the decorative symbol, and the hold information appear to be displayed in front of the background image (on the player side).

Further, in this embodiment, it is assumed that the display layer of the error message is higher than the display layer of the decorative symbol. Specifically, as shown in FIGS. 83 (a) and 84 (f), the area where the decorative pattern is displayed and the area where the error message is displayed overlap, but in this case, the overlapping area With respect to the above, the display control is performed so that the error message whose display layer is higher than the decorative pattern is easy to see (including visible), while the decorative pattern is difficult to see (including invisible). Therefore, when viewed from the player, the error message appears to be displayed in front of the decorative pattern (on the player side).

As a display control for making only the area corresponding to the second area β visible to the player in the entire area of the background image, only the area corresponding to the second area β in the entire area of the background image is used as the background. It is set in the display layer of the image, and the area corresponding to the first area α in the entire area of the background image is not set in the display layer of the background image (that is, [coordinates (a + 1,0) and coordinates (X,) in the background image). It is also possible to use image data of only [a rectangular area defined with Y) as a vertex].

Further, as another display control for making only the area corresponding to the second area β visible to the player in the entire area of the background image, the entire area of the background image is set in the display layer of the background image (that is,). The entire background image [using the image data of the rectangular area defined by the coordinates (0,0) and the coordinates (X, Y) as vertices] is the first in the display layer higher than the display layer of the background image. By setting another background image for winning number information (for example, a white and plain image) in the area corresponding to the area α, the area corresponding to the first area α of the background image of the lower display layer cannot be visually recognized. You can do it. In such a configuration, it is easy to see the image of the display layer lower than the display layer having a predetermined transmittance (for example, a white and plain image) for another background image for winning number information. , It becomes invisible when it is 0%), the image of the lower display layer may be visible, and by setting a predetermined transmittance, the background image of the lower display layer may be visible. The area corresponding to the first area α becomes visible, and the character E becomes visible.

Further, the display layer of the winning number information displayed in the first area α is higher than the display layer of other information that can be displayed in the first area α. Therefore, the visibility of the winning number information does not deteriorate due to the display of other information in the first area α. Further, the display layer of the winning number information may be the same display layer as the error message in which the display area does not exist in the first area α, or may be a display layer higher than the error message, and may be higher than the error message. May be a lower display layer. For example, the display layer of the winning number information is the highest among all the display layers, and is displayed in the display area of other information (whether it is displayed in the first area α or the second area β). However, the visibility may not be reduced.

As shown in FIG. 83 (b), since the variable display of the fourth symbol, the variable display of the decorative symbol, and the display of the hold information are all performed in the second area β, these images are displayed. Depending on what is displayed on the image display device 905, the number of prizes to the general prize opening (“today's general prizes”) and the first start prize as the prize number information displayed in the first area α. The visibility of the number of winnings to the mouth (“Today's number of winnings”) and the number of winnings to the second starting winning opening (“Today's number of electric chew winnings”) is not impaired. As a result, the player can appropriately grasp the winning number information regardless of the variable display of the fourth symbol, the variable display of the decorative symbol, and the display of the hold information.

Then, when the image display device 905 is performing the variable display of the fourth symbol, the variable display of the decorative symbol, and the display of the hold information, if a prize is given to the general winning opening, FIG. 83 ( As shown in d), the number of winnings to the general winning opening displayed in the first area α based on the reception of the general winning opening designation command by the effect control CPU 90120 (“Today's general winning opening number”). Is updated. In this way, if a prize is generated in the general prize opening while the fourth symbol is variablely displayed, the decorative symbol is variablely displayed, and the hold information is displayed, the general prize displayed in the first area α is displayed. The number of winnings in the mouth is updated without disturbing visibility. That is, the variable display of the fourth symbol, the variable display of the decorative symbol, and the display of the hold information do not hinder the visibility when the winning number information is updated. As a result, the player can easily grasp that the winning of the general winning opening has occurred and that the number of winnings of the general winning opening has been updated as a result.

Then, when the variable display of the special symbol ends and the display result is stopped and displayed, as shown in FIG. 83 (c), the variable display of the fourth symbol for the first special symbol ends and the display result stops. At the same time, the variable display of the decorative pattern ends and the display result is stopped and displayed. In this example, it is assumed that the fourth symbol display area 905A is still lit (displayed) in a display color reminiscent of the detachment (the display result is stopped and displayed), and is used as a definite decorative symbol. In the decorative symbol display areas 905L, 905C, and 905R, the out-of-order symbols "5, 3, 1" are stopped and displayed.

Here, as shown in FIG. 83 (c), the fourth symbol that is stopped and displayed (in the state where the display result is derived and displayed) and the stopped display (the display result is derived and displayed). Since all the decorative symbols (in the state) are displayed in the second area β, the number of winnings displayed in the first area α depending on the display of these images on the image display device 905. As information, the number of winnings to the general winning opening ("Today's general winning number"), the number of winnings to the first starting winning opening ("Today's Heso winning number"), and the winning to the second starting winning opening The visibility of the number (“Today's number of winnings for the electric chew”) is not hindered. As a result, the player can appropriately grasp the winning number information regardless of the stop display of the fourth symbol and the stop display of the decorative symbol.

Then, when a prize is generated in the general winning opening when the stop display of the fourth symbol and the stop display of the decorative symbol are performed in the image display device 905, as shown in FIG. 83 (d). , The number of winnings to the general winning opening displayed in the first area α (“today's general winning number”) is updated based on the fact that the effect control CPU 90120 receives the general winning opening designation command. In this way, if a prize is generated in the general winning opening while the stop display of the fourth symbol and the stop display of the decorative symbol are being performed, the number of winnings in the general winning opening displayed in the first area α is increased. , Updated without disturbing visibility. That is, the stop display of the fourth symbol and the stop display of the decorative symbol do not hinder the visibility when the winning number information is updated. As a result, the player can easily grasp that the winning of the general winning opening has occurred and that the number of winnings of the general winning opening has been updated as a result.

In the example of FIGS. 83 (b), (c), and (d), the number of winnings in the general winning opening is updated without disturbing the visibility, but the first starting winning opening is used. Even when a prize is awarded, the first start winning opening is won regardless of the variable display and stop display of the 4th symbol and the variable display and stop display of the decorative symbol, as in the case of the general winning opening. The numbers are updated without disturbing visibility. Further, even when a prize is generated in the second start winning opening, the variable display and the stop display of the fourth symbol and the variable display and the stop display of the decorative symbol do not matter, as in the case of the general winning opening. The number of winnings in the second starting winning opening is updated without disturbing the visibility.

As shown in FIGS. 84 (e) and 84 (f), when the effect control CPU 90120 receives an abnormality detection designation command that specifies that an abnormality has occurred, an error message (in this example, "an error has occurred" occurs in the image display device 905. The image of the characters "I did.") Is displayed. As described above, the display layer of the error message is higher than the display layer of the decorative pattern. Therefore, if the effect control CPU 90120 receives the abnormality detection designation command when the decorative symbol is variably displayed or when the decorative symbol is stopped and displayed, the area where the decorative symbol is displayed and an error occur. With respect to the overlap range with the area where the message is displayed, the display control is performed so that the error message is easy to see (including visible) and the decorative pattern is difficult to see (including invisible). Therefore, in the example of FIG. 84 (b), when viewed from the player, the error message is in front of (or the player side) the decorative symbol in the variable display (or the decorative symbol in the stopped display state). It looks like it is displayed.

As shown in FIG. 84 (f), since the error message is displayed in the second area β, the error message may be displayed in the image display device 905 in the first area α. The number of winnings to the general winning opening ("Today's general winning number"), the number of winnings to the first starting winning opening ("Today's Heso winning number"), and the number of winnings displayed in 2 The visibility of the number of winnings to the starting winning opening (“Today's number of winnings for the electric chew”) is not hindered. As a result, the player can appropriately grasp the winning number information regardless of the display of the error message.

Then, when a prize is generated in the general winning opening while the error message is being displayed in the image display device 905, the effect control CPU 90120 is a general winning as shown in FIG. 84 (g). Based on the reception of the mouth designation command, the number of winnings to the general winning mouth displayed in the first area α (“Today's general winning number”) is updated. In this way, if a prize is given to the general winning opening while the error message is being displayed, the number of winnings to the general winning opening displayed in the first area α is not hindered in visibility. Will be updated. That is, depending on the display of the error message, the visibility when the winning number information is updated is not hindered. As a result, the player can easily grasp that the winning of the general winning opening has occurred and that the number of winnings of the general winning opening has been updated as a result.

In the example of FIGS. 84 (f) and 84 (g), the number of winnings in the general winning opening is updated without disturbing the visibility, but the winning in the first starting winning opening is shown. When it occurs, the number of winnings to the first starting winning opening is updated without disturbing the visibility, regardless of the display of the error message, as in the case of the general winning opening. Further, even when a prize is generated in the second start winning opening, the number of winnings in the second starting winning opening is hindered in visibility regardless of the display of the error message, as in the case of the general winning opening. It will be updated without any problems.

Further, in the example of FIG. 84 (f), the character "An error has occurred" is displayed, which simply notifies that an error has occurred based on the reception of the abnormality detection designation command. Not limited to this, different error messages may be displayed depending on the type of abnormality specified by the abnormality detection specification command. For example, when an anomaly detection specification command that specifies that a magnetic anomaly has occurred is received, the text "A magnetic error has occurred." Is displayed and an anomaly detection specification command that specifies that a vibration abnormality has occurred is received. Occasionally, the text "A vibration error has occurred." May be displayed, and the text "A radio error has occurred." May be displayed when an anomaly detection specification command that specifies that a radio error has occurred is received. ..

In this example, as shown in FIG. 83A, the rectangular area defined by the coordinates (0,0) and the coordinates (a, Y) as the vertices is defined as the first area α, and the coordinates (a + 1). , 0) and the coordinates (X, Y) are defined as the vertices of the rectangular area defined as the second area β, but the first area where the winning number information can be displayed, the decorative symbol, the fourth symbol, and the hold The second area in which the information and the error message can be displayed is not limited to the rectangular area, and may be any area on the screen that does not overlap with each other.

(Display / non-display setting of winning number information)
As described with reference to FIG. 45, the operation unit of the display changeover switch 9032 for operating the glass door frame 903a by opening it forward (the clerk of the game hall can operate it but the player cannot operate it) is the display position (second). Position), and when the player's setting screen (see FIG. 46) is set to display the number of winnings to the general winning opening by the player's operation, the general winning opening is set. Information on the number of winnings related to the number of winnings, etc. is to be displayed.

The examples shown in FIGS. 83 and 84 are display modes of the screen in a state where the setting to display the winning number information is made in this way, and when the setting to display the winning number information is made. In the first area α, not only the number of winnings to the general winning opening, but also the number of winnings to the first starting winning opening (so-called “navel”) and the winning to the second starting winning opening (so-called “Denchu”). The number shall also be displayed. That is, it is possible to set whether or not to display the number of winnings in the first starting winning opening and the number of winnings in the second starting winning opening according to the operation of the display changeover switch 9032 and the operation button 9030.

Here, as described with reference to FIG. 45, when the operation unit of the display changeover switch 9032 is set to be hidden (first position), the winning number information (the number of winnings to the general winning opening) is set by the operation button 9030. , And whether or not the setting to display the number of winnings to the first starting winning opening, the number of winnings to the second starting winning opening, etc.) is set, the winning number information is displayed on the screen of the image display device 905. Do not show. Further, even if the operation unit of the display changeover switch 9032 is set to the display setting (second position), the setting to display the winning number information is not made by the operation button 9030 (in the case of the non-display setting). ), The winning number information is not displayed on the screen of the image display device 905.

The example shown in FIGS. 85 (b) and 85 (c) is a display mode of the screen in a state where the setting for not displaying the winning number information is made in this way, and the setting for not displaying the winning number information is made. In this case, the number of winnings to the general winning opening is not displayed in the first area α, and the number of winnings to the first starting winning opening (so-called "navel") and the second starting winning opening (so-called "electric chew"). The number of winnings to is not displayed either.

In this way, by making it possible to set whether or not to display the winning number information according to the setting operation on the game hall side and according to the setting operation on the player side, it is possible to set according to the convenience of the game field side. In addition, the winning number information can be displayed according to the judgment of the player.

As shown in FIGS. 85 (a), (b), and (c), when the setting is such that the winning number information is not displayed, the error message display area 5E is compared with the case where the winning number information is displayed. Each area of the fourth symbol display area 905A, 905B, the decorative symbol display area 905L, 905C, 905R, and the start winning prize storage display area 905H is common. That is, the display position and display range (image size) of each image of the error message, the fourth symbol, the decorative symbol, and the hold information displayed in the second area β are the setting for displaying the winning number information and the winning number. It does not change with the setting that does not display information. This simplifies the display control associated with the setting change that sets whether or not to display the winning number information.

On the other hand, when the setting is such that the winning number information is not displayed, as shown in FIGS. 85 (a), (b), and (c), the winning number information is set to be displayed (display examples of FIGS. 83 and 84). Unlike, the background image can be visually recognized in the first area α and the second area β. In the example of FIGS. 85 (a), (b), and (c), the first area of the entire area of the background image [rectangular area defined by the coordinates (0, 0) and the coordinates (X, Y) as vertices]. Area corresponding to α [rectangular area defined with coordinates (0,0) and coordinates (a, Y) as vertices] and area corresponding to second area β [coordinates (a + 1,0) and coordinates ( X, Y) and the rectangular area defined as the vertices], that is, the entire area of the background image is visible to the player.

Therefore, in the example of FIGS. 85 (a), (b), and (c), the player is a character included in the rectangular region defined by the coordinates (a + 1,0) and the coordinates (X, Y) of the background image as vertices. In addition to being able to visually recognize D, the character E included in the rectangular area defined by the coordinates (0,0) and the coordinates (a, Y) of the background image as vertices is also visible.

In this way, regarding the display position and display range (image size) of a specific image (error message, fourth symbol, decorative symbol, and hold information), the setting for displaying the winning number information and the winning number information are displayed. While reducing the control burden by not changing (commonly) with the setting that does not, for other images (background image), it is visible with the setting that displays the winning number information and the setting that does not display the winning number information. By making the range different, we are trying to improve the interest when the winning number information is not displayed.

Then, as shown in FIG. 85 (b), when the image display device 905 is performing variable display of the fourth symbol, variable display of the decorative symbol, and display of the hold information, the general winning opening is won. Even when the above occurs, as shown in FIG. 85 (d), the number of winnings to the general winning opening is not displayed because the setting is such that the winning number information is not displayed. Further, as shown in FIG. 85 (c), when the image display device 905 is performing the stop display of the fourth symbol and the stop display of the decorative symbol, a prize is also generated in the general winning opening. As shown in FIG. 85 (d), since the winning number information is not displayed, the winning number to the general winning opening is not displayed.

In addition, in the example of FIGS. 85 (b), (c), and (d), the number of winnings to the general winning opening is not displayed even when the winning to the general winning opening occurs, but the winning number information is shown. If it is set not to be displayed, the number of winnings to the 1st starting winning opening is not displayed even when the winning to the 1st starting winning opening occurs, and the winning to the 2nd starting winning opening occurs. However, the number of winnings to the second starting winning opening is not displayed. In this way, it is possible to set whether or not to display the number of winnings in each winning opening according to the operation of the player.

(Each item of prize number information)
FIG. 86 shows an example of items of the winning number information that can be displayed in the first area α. Note that FIG. 86 shows items related to the number of winnings in the general winning opening, but similarly to the items related to the number of winnings in the first starting winning opening and the second starting winning opening. Items related to the number of winnings can be displayed in the first area α.

It is possible to display "Today's general prize number (A1)" which is the total value of the prizes in each general prize opening from the time when the power of the gaming machine is turned on. The effect control CPU 90120 sets the value of the general winning number counter stored in the RAM 90122 to 0 when the power is turned on, and adds the value of the general winning number counter by 1 each time the general winning opening designation command is received. By doing so, A1 can be aggregated.

In addition, it is possible to display the "today's general winning ratio (referred to as A2)", which is the ratio of A1 to the total number of outs since the power of the gaming machine is turned on. The effect control CPU 90120 sets the value of the out number counter stored in the RAM 90122 to 0 when the power is turned on, and sets the value of the out number counter every time the detection signal output from the out ball detector is received. The total number of outs can be totaled by adding one by one, and A2 can be totaled by calculating the ratio of A1 to the total number of outs.

In addition, it is possible to display "today's general prize ball number (A3)" which is the total value of the prize balls given based on the prizes to each general prize opening from the time when the power of the gaming machine is turned on. In addition, it is possible to display "Today's general prize ball ratio (referred to as A4)", which is the ratio of A3 to the total number of prize balls since the power of the gaming machine is turned on.

The ROM 90121 stores the number of prize balls defined for each of the first start winning opening, the second starting winning opening, the first general winning opening 9050A to the fourth general winning opening 9050D, and the large winning opening. .. The effect control CPU 90120 sets the value of the general prize ball number counter stored in the RAM 90122 to 0 when the power is turned on, and the general prize opening designation command is designated each time the general winning opening designation command is received. By adding the number of prize balls corresponding to the general prize balls to the value of the general prize ball counter, A3 can be totaled. Further, the effect control CPU 90120 sets the value of the prize ball number counter stored in the RAM 90122 to 0 when the power is turned on, and sets the start winning opening designation command, the general winning opening designation command, and the large winning opening. The total number of prize balls can be totaled by adding the number of prize balls corresponding to the prize openings specified by each command to the value of the prize ball counter for each large prize opening command that specifies the prize. By calculating the ratio of A3 to the total number of prize balls, A4 can be totaled.

Further, the effect control CPU 90120 specifies whether the current game state is the low base state or the high base state by designating the game state by the game state designation command, and wins a prize in the low base state. The number information (B1 to B4) and the winning number information (C1 to C4) in the high base state can be separately aggregated.

Specifically, it is possible to display the "general winning number in the low base state (referred to as B1)", which is the total number of winnings in each general winning opening in the low base state, and each general winning opening in the high base state. It is possible to display "the number of general prizes in a high base state (referred to as C1)" which is the total value of the number of prizes in.

When the power is turned on, the effect control CPU 90120 shall set the value of the low-base medium general winning number counter and the value of the high-base medium general winning number counter stored in the RAM 90122 to 0. .. Then, during the period in which the game state specified by the received game state designation command is in the normal state, B1 is added by adding the value of the low-base medium general prize number counter by 1 each time the general prize opening designation command is received. During the period when the game state specified by the received game state specification command is either the probabilistic state or the time saving state, the value of the high-base medium general prize number counter is set for each reception of the general prize opening designation command. By adding one by one, C1 can be totaled.

In addition, it is possible to display the "general winning ratio in the low base state (referred to as B2)", which is the ratio of B1 to the number of outs in the low base state, and the ratio of C1 to the number of outs in the high base state. It is possible to display the "general winning ratio in a high base state (referred to as C2)".

When the power is turned on, the effect control CPU 90120 sets the value of the low-base medium-out number counter and the value of the high-base medium-out number counter stored in the RAM 90122 to 0. Then, in the normal state, the number of low-base medium-outs can be totaled by adding the value of the low-base medium-out number counter by 1 each time the detection signal output from the out-ball detector is received. B2 can be aggregated by calculating the ratio of B1 to the number of outs in the low base. On the other hand, in the probabilistic state or the time saving state, the number of high-base medium-outs can be totaled by adding the value of the high-base medium-out number counter by 1 each time the detection signal output from the out-ball detector is received. It is possible to aggregate C2 by calculating the ratio of C1 to the number of high-base medium outs.

In addition, it is possible to display "the number of general prize balls in the low base state (referred to as B3)", which is the total number of prize balls given based on the winning of each general prize opening in the low base state, and the high base state. It is possible to display "the number of general prize balls in the high base state (referred to as C3)" which is the total value of the number of prize balls given based on the winning of each general prize opening in the state.

The effect control CPU 90120 sets the value of the low-base medium general prize ball number counter and the value of the high-base medium general prize ball number counter stored in the RAM 90122 to 0 when the power is turned on. And. Then, during the period when the game state specified by the received game state designation command is in the normal state, the number of prize balls corresponding to the general prize opening designated by the received general prize opening designation command is set to the low base medium general prize ball number counter. B3 (“general prize ball number in low base state”) can be totaled by adding to the value of, and the game state specified by the received game state specification command is either a probabilistic state or a time saving state. During the period, C3 (“the number of general prize balls in the high base state” is obtained by adding the number of prize balls corresponding to the general prize openings specified by the received general prize opening designation command to the value of the high base medium general prize ball number counter. ") Can be aggregated.

In addition, it is possible to display the "general prize ball ratio in the low base state (referred to as B4)", which is the ratio of B3 to the number of prize balls in the low base state, with respect to the number of prize balls in the high base state. It is possible to display the "general prize ball ratio in a high base state (referred to as C4)" which is the ratio of C3.

When the power is turned on, the effect control CPU 90120 shall set the value of the low-base medium prize ball counter and the value of the high-base medium prize ball counter stored in the RAM 90122 to 0. .. Then, in the normal state, each time the start winning opening designation command, the general winning opening designation command, and the large winning opening winning command are received, the number of prize balls corresponding to the winning openings designated by each command is given to the low base middle prize. By adding to the value of the number of balls counter, it is possible to total the number of low-base middle prize balls, and by calculating the ratio of B3 to the number of low-base middle prize balls, B4 ("low base state" General prize ball ratio ") can be aggregated. On the other hand, in the probabilistic state or the time saving state, the number of prize balls corresponding to the winning openings specified by each command is increased each time the starting winning opening designation command, the general winning opening designation command, and the large winning opening winning command are received. By adding to the value of the base middle prize ball counter, the number of high base middle prize balls can be totaled, and by calculating the ratio of C3 to the number of high base middle prize balls, C4 ("high") It is possible to aggregate the "general prize ball ratio in the base state").

In this way, since the information related to the number of winnings to the general winning opening can be aggregated for each gaming state, the player can grasp the information according to the current gaming state. For example, when the gaming state is a low base state (normal state), attention is paid to the items B1 to B4, and when the gaming state is a high base state (probability change state or time saving state), attention is paid to the items C1 to C4. Become.

The effect control CPU 90120 displays the items B1 to B4 in the first area α when the gaming state is in the low base state, while does not display the items C1 to C4 when the gaming state is in the high base state. , C1 to C4 items may be displayed in the first area α, while items B1 to B4 may not be displayed. Further, although the items B1 to B4 and the items C1 to C4 are displayed in the first area α regardless of the gaming state, the items B1 to B4 are more visible than the items C1 to C4 in the low base state. The items C1 to C4 may be displayed in a manner that is easier to see (for example, larger) than the items B1 to B4 in a high base state.

(Aggregation of prize number information during the set period)
Further, the effect control CPU 90120 can aggregate information on the number of winnings in the period set by the player, and is the total value of the number of winnings in each general winning opening in the set period. D1) ”can be displayed in the first area α.

When the aggregation period corresponding to the operation of the player shown in FIG. 87, which will be described later, is set, the effect control CPU 90120 sets the value of the general winning number counter stored in the RAM 90122 to 0 and aggregates. The value of the timer is set in the set period (aggregation period according to the operation of the player), and the aggregation timer is started. Then, each time the general winning opening designation command is received, the value of the general winning number counter is added by 1 during the set period, and when the totaling timer times out (when the set totaling period has elapsed), the general winning is performed during the set period. The value of the number counter is displayed in the first area α as D1.

During the period when the number of outs is increasing (for example, within a predetermined period after the last detection signal is received from the out ball detector), the aggregation timer is updated, while the period during which the number of outs is not increasing (for example,). After a predetermined period of time has elapsed since the last detection signal was received from the out-ball detector), the aggregation timer may not be updated and may be stopped. In this way, the period during which the game ball is not fired in the game area 9010 may be excluded from the aggregation period.

Further, when the aggregation timer times out and D1 is displayed in the first area α, the value of the general winning number counter is reset to 0 again during the set period, and the value of the aggregation timer is set again during the set period (player's). It is set to the aggregation period according to the operation), and the aggregation timer starts again. Then, the value of the general winning number counter is added every time the general winning opening designation command is received, and when the totaling timer times out again (when the set totaling period has elapsed again), the general winning number counter during the set period The value of is displayed as D1 in the first area α. In this way, for each aggregation period set by the player, D1 corresponding to the aggregation period is displayed.

Further, it is possible to display the "general winning ratio (referred to as D2)", which is the ratio of D1 to the number of outs of the gaming machine in the set period. When the effect control CPU 90120 sets the value of the general prize number counter stored in the RAM 90122 to 0 during the set period, the value of the out number counter stored in the RAM 90122 during the set period is set to 0. By adding the value of the out number counter during the set period by 1 each time the detection signal output from the out ball detector is received, the number of outs in the set period can be totaled and set. D2 can be aggregated by calculating the ratio of D1 to the number of outs in the period.

Further, it is possible to display "the number of general prize balls (referred to as D3)" which is the total value of the number of prize balls given based on the winning of each general prize opening in the set period. Further, it is possible to display the "general prize ball ratio (referred to as D4)" which is the ratio of D3 to the number of prize balls in the set period.

When the aggregation period corresponding to the operation of the player shown in FIG. 87, which will be described later, is set, the effect control CPU 90120 sets the value of the general prize ball counter during the set period stored in the RAM 90122 to 0, and at the same time, sets it to 0. The value of the aggregation timer is set in the set period (aggregation period according to the operation of the player), and the aggregation timer is started. Then, each time the general winning opening designation command is received, the number of prize balls corresponding to the general winning opening designated by the general winning opening designation command is added to the value of the general winning slot counter during the set period, and the totaling timer is set. The value of the general prize ball count counter during the set period when the time-out occurs (when the set aggregation period has elapsed) is displayed in the first area α as D3.

When the total timer times out and D3 is displayed in the first area α, the value of the general prize ball counter is reset to 0 again during the set period, and the value of the total timer is set again during the set period (player). (Aggregation period according to the operation of) is set, and the aggregation timer starts again. Then, the value of the general prize ball counter is added every time the general prize opening designation command is received, and when the totaling timer times out again (when the set totaling period has elapsed again), the general prize ball during the set period The value of the number counter is displayed in the first area α as D3. In this way, for each aggregation period set by the player, D3 corresponding to the aggregation period is displayed.

Further, when the effect control CPU 90120 sets the value of the general prize ball count counter stored in the RAM 90122 to 0 during the set period, the effect control CPU 90120 is also stored in the RAM 90122 during the set period. The value of is set to 0, and the winning slot specified by each command is received each time the starting winning slot designation command, the general winning slot designation command, and the large winning slot winning command that specifies the winning to the grand winning slot are received. By adding the number of prize balls corresponding to the above to the value of the prize ball counter during the set period, the number of prize balls in the set period can be totaled, and the ratio of D3 to the number of prize balls in the set period. It is possible to total D4 by calculating.

Since the general winning opening designation command received by the effect control CPU 90120 specifies which general winning opening the game ball has won, the effect control CPU 90120 has the first general winning opening 9050A to the first. 4 The number of winnings to the general winning openings 9050D is aggregated individually, and the items corresponding to A1 to A4, B1 to B4, C1 to C4 and D1 to D4 are aggregated for each general winning opening, and the aggregated value is calculated. It is possible to display it in the first area α.

Each item related to the number of winnings to the general winning opening shown above, each item related to the number of winnings to the first starting winning opening, which will be described later, and related to the number of winnings to the second starting winning opening. Which of the items is to be displayed in the first area α may be automatically determined according to the gaming state or the like. For example, items B1 to B4 may be displayed in the low base state, and C1 to C4 may be displayed in the high base state. In addition, each item related to the number of winnings to the general winning opening shown above, each item related to the number of winnings to the first starting winning opening, which will be described later, and the number of winnings to the second starting winning opening It may be possible to select which of the related items to be displayed in the first area α by an operation on the playground side (for example, an operation using the display changeover switch 9032 and the operation button 9030), and the player side. It may be possible to select by the operation of (for example, the operation using the operation button 9030).

In addition, each item related to the number of winnings to the general winning opening shown above, each item related to the number of winnings to the first starting winning opening, which will be described later, and the number of winnings to the second starting winning opening For each related item, a reference value corresponding to each item is provided, and the ROM 90121 stores the reference value in association with each item. Therefore, the effect control CPU 90120 confirms whether or not the aggregated value of the item displayed in the first area α has reached the reference value of the item, and if the aggregated value has not reached the reference value. As shown in FIG. 87 (4) described later, it is possible to display a message notifying that the aggregated value of the item displayed in the first area α does not reach the reference value of the item. .. As a result, the player grasps whether or not the aggregated value of the item displayed in the first area α is an advantageous value as compared with the reference value of the item, and selects the gaming machine. It can be used as a judgment material (whether or not the game on the gaming machine should be continued).

Next, a method of setting the aggregation period will be described with reference to FIG. 87. For example, the aggregation period setting screen of FIG. 87 further sets the aggregation period when the selection screen of FIG. 46 (2) described above is selected to display the number of winnings in the general winning opening. A screen that is displayed when a selection screen for selecting whether or not to select is displayed, and when the selection to set the aggregation period is made on the selection screen (when the intention to set the aggregation period is confirmed). And.

On the setting screen of FIG. 87 (1), the message "Please set the aggregation period" is displayed, and an image imitating the operation button 9030 is displayed below it. On the setting screen, an icon containing the characters "10 minutes", an icon containing the characters "30 minutes", and an icon containing the characters "60 minutes" are displayed, and it is called "OK after selecting with the jog dial". A message is displayed, and an arrow prompting the user to press the operation button 9030 (jog dial) after rotating the operation button 9030 is displayed.

To set the aggregation period to 10 minutes, rotate the operation button 9030 (jog dial) to the left to select the icon containing the characters "10 minutes", and then press the operation button 9030 to "set". The message "The period is 10 minutes." Is displayed, and the aggregation period is set to 10 minutes. That is, the setting period of D1 to D4 is 10 minutes. Further, when the aggregation period is set to 30 minutes, as shown in FIG. 87 (1), when the operation button 9030 is pressed with the icon including the character "30 minutes" selected, the operation button 9030 is pressed in FIG. 87 (2). As shown in, the message "The setting period is 30 minutes." Is displayed, and the aggregation period is set to 30 minutes. That is, the setting period of D1 to D4 is 30 minutes. When setting the aggregation period to 60 minutes, by rotating the operation button 9030 (jog dial) to the right and pressing the operation button 9030 with the icon including the character "60 minutes" selected, the operation button 9030 is pressed. The message "The setting period is 60 minutes." Is displayed, and the aggregation period is set to 60 minutes. That is, the setting period of D1 to D4 is 60 minutes.

In this way, it is possible to set a desired aggregation period according to the operation of the player. In the example of FIG. 87, 30 minutes is set as the aggregation period. Therefore, as shown in FIG. 87 (3), the number of winnings to the general winning opening per 30 minutes is displayed as the "general winning number (D1) in the set period" in the first area α. In the example of FIG. 87 (3), 30 is stored as a reference value for the number of winnings to the general winning opening per 30 minutes, whereas the aggregated value of the number of winnings to the general winning opening per 30 minutes is stored. Since it is 37, the aggregated value exceeds the reference value. Therefore, there is no notification that the aggregated value has not reached the reference value.

On the other hand, in the example of FIG. 87 (4), 30 is stored as the reference value of the number of winnings to the general winning opening per 30 minutes, whereas the total number of winnings to the general winning opening per 30 minutes is totaled. Since the value is 29, the aggregated value has not reached the reference value. Therefore, a notification that the aggregated value has not reached the standard value (display of a message "below the standard value (30 times / 30 minutes)") is given.

(Items related to the number of winnings in the starting prize opening)
It should be noted that the effect control CPU 90120 receives a start winning opening designation command for designating which of the first starting winning opening and the second starting winning opening is won when a winning is generated in the starting winning opening. By the same method as the aggregation process when the general prize opening designation command that specifies which of the 1st to 4th general winning openings is received is received, "Today's number of winnings to the 1st starting winning opening (A1). Equivalent) ”,“ Today's 1st starting prize opening ratio (equivalent to A2) ”,“ Today's number of prize balls awarded based on winning the 1st starting winning opening (equivalent to A3) ”, And "The ratio of the number of prize balls given based on the prize to the first start prize opening of the day to the total number of prize balls of the day (equivalent to A4)", and "Today's second start prize opening" Number of prizes (equivalent to A1) ”,“ Today's prize ratio to the second start prize opening (equivalent to A2) ”,“ Number of prize balls awarded based on today's prize to the second start prize opening (Equivalent to A3) "and" Ratio of the number of prize balls awarded based on today's winning to the second starting prize opening to today's total number of prize balls (equivalent to A4) ". Therefore, it can be displayed in the first area α.

In addition, "the number of winnings to the first starting winning opening in the low base state (corresponding to B1)", "the winning ratio to the first starting winning opening in the low base state (corresponding to B2)", "the first in the low base state". The number of prize balls awarded based on the winning of one starting prize opening (corresponding to B3), and the first starting winning opening in the low base state with respect to the number of prize balls awarded in the low base state. The ratio of the number of prize balls awarded based on the winning (corresponding to B4), "the number of winnings to the second start winning opening in the low base state (corresponding to B1)", and "the second start in the low base state". Winning ratio to winning opening (equivalent to B2) "," Number of prize balls awarded based on winning to the second starting winning opening in the low base state (equivalent to B3) ", and" Granted in the low base state The ratio of the number of prize balls given based on the winning to the second starting prize opening in the low base state to the number of prize balls (corresponding to B4) "can be aggregated and displayed in the first area α. Is.

In addition, "the number of winnings to the first starting winning opening in the high base state (corresponding to C1)", "the winning ratio to the first starting winning opening in the high base state (corresponding to C2)", and "the first in the high base state". The number of prize balls awarded based on the winning of one starting prize opening (corresponding to C3), and the first starting winning opening in the high base state with respect to the number of prize balls awarded in the high base state. The ratio of the number of prize balls awarded based on the winning (corresponding to C4), "the number of winnings to the second start winning opening in the high base state (corresponding to C1)", and "the second start in the high base state". Winning ratio to winning opening (equivalent to C2) "," Number of prize balls awarded based on winning to the second starting winning opening in the high base state (equivalent to C3) ", and" Granted in the high base state The ratio of the number of prize balls given based on the prize to the second starting prize opening in the high base state to the number of prize balls (corresponding to C4) ”can be aggregated and displayed in the first area α. Is.

In addition, "the number of prizes to the first start winning opening in the set period (corresponding to D1)", "the winning ratio to the first starting winning opening in the set period (corresponding to D2)", and "the first starting prize in the set period". The number of prize balls awarded based on the prizes given to the mouth (corresponding to D3) "and the prizes given based on the prizes to the first starting prize opening in the set period for the number of prize balls given in the set period. "Ratio of the number of prize balls (corresponding to D4)", "Number of winnings to the second starting winning slot in the set period (corresponding to D1)", "Ratio to winning the second starting winning slot in the set period (corresponding to D1)" "Equivalent to D2)", "Number of prize balls awarded based on winning the second starting prize opening in the set period (corresponding to D3)", and "Setting for the number of prize balls awarded in the set period" The ratio of the number of prize balls given based on the winning to the second starting winning opening in the period (corresponding to D4) ”can be aggregated and displayed in the first area α.

(Display of role ratio (combination ratio), role ratio)
Further, in the gaming machine 901, also in the gaming control microcomputer 90100 of the main board 9011, each winning opening (large winning opening, second starting winning opening, first starting winning opening, first to fourth general winning opening, and the like , Also called "entry area"), the number of game balls entering the area is totaled. Further, in the gaming machine 901, predetermined information such as a combination (combination ratio) and a combination ratio can be displayed on the display monitors 9029 shown in FIGS. 90 and 91 provided on the main board 9011.

As described above, it is usual for the gaming machine manufacturer to design the gaming board surface so that the gaming medium enters the general winning area (passes the test) at a predetermined frequency. In addition, when conducting the test, it is confirmed whether or not the game medium has entered the general winning area at a predetermined frequency. Further, even after the gaming machine is installed, it is confirmed what kind of adjustment is being made, and as a result of the adjustment, whether the gaming medium has entered the general winning area at the frequency as designed. Therefore, in the gaming machine according to the embodiment described later, it is possible to recognize what kind of adjustment has been made in the gaming machine having a general winning area. Hereinafter, the display of the accessory ratio and the like will be described. Hereinafter, the totalization of the game balls and the display of the accessory ratio and the like on the main board 9011 will be described.

The main board 9011 shown in FIG. 90 is a board that controls games. As shown in FIG. 92A, the main board 9011 is enclosed in a board case 90201, and a display monitor 9029 is arranged in the center of the back surface side of the main board 9011. The display monitor 9029 is arranged in front of the main board 9011 when visually recognizing it. Since the main board 9011 cannot be visually recognized when the glass door frame 903a is not opened, the front side when visually recognizing the main board 9011 is the back side of the game board 902 when the glass door frame 903a is opened. This is the front of the door, which is different from the front of the gaming machine 901. However, the front surface when visually recognizing the main board 9011 and the front surface of the gaming machine 901 may be common.

On the main board 9011, information regarding the winning of the game, for example, the number of prize balls by winning the first starting opening (heso), the number of winning balls by winning the second starting winning opening (electric chew), and the large winning opening ( The number of prize balls and the total number of prize balls for winning the prize (attacker) are input and totaled, and the display monitor 9029 is the ratio of the total number of prize balls to the number of prize balls for winning the large winning opening (attacker). The ratio of the number of prize balls by winning the second start winning opening (Denchu) and the number of winning balls by winning the big winning opening (attacker) out of the total number of winning balls (ratio) (%). The role ratio (%) is displayed. The role-ream (relationship ratio) is the ratio of the total number of prize-winning balls to the number of prize-winning balls (the number of consecutive prize-winning balls below) by winning a prize in the big winning opening (attacker). The role ratio is the number of prize balls by winning the second start winning opening (Denchu) and the number of winning balls by winning the big winning opening (attacker) out of the total number of prize balls (the number of winning balls below). Is the ratio. The total number of prize balls (total number of balls won below) is the number of prize balls by winning the big winning opening (attacker), the number of winning balls by winning the second starting winning opening (Denchu), and the big winning opening. It is the total number of prize balls due to winning in the winning openings (first starting winning opening, general winning opening) other than (attacker) and the second starting winning opening (electric chew). The large winning opening (attacker) and the second starting winning opening (electric chew) are variable accessories, and the expected winning ratio of the gaming ball changes as the passable width of the gaming ball fluctuates. be. In addition, the winning openings (first starting winning opening, general winning opening) other than the large winning opening (attacker) and the second starting winning opening (electric chew) are fixed accessories, and the passable width of the game ball is fixed. The expected winning percentage of the game ball is a certain amount.

As a method of totaling and calculating information on winning a game, the number of prize balls (general prize balls) by winning the first starting opening (heso) and the general winning opening (sode) in the number of 6000 prize balls, the first 2 The number of ordinary electric prize balls (the number of electric chew prize balls), which is the number of prize balls by winning the starting prize opening (Denchu), and the special electric role prize, which is the number of prize balls by winning the big prize opening (attacker). The number of balls (the number of attacker prize balls) is totaled. The total is taken as one set, and 10 sets, that is, 60,000 winning combinations (combinations) (%) and winning ratios (%) are calculated. In addition, the number of prize balls (general prize balls), the number of ordinary electric prize balls (the number of electric chew prize balls), and the special electric power by winning the first starting opening (heso) and the general winning opening (sode) to be totaled The number of prize balls (number of attacker prize balls) is recorded in the ring buffer, has a recording capacity of at least 11 sets, and is updated for each set. Furthermore, a considerable amount (for example, several bytes) of 66,000 11 sets of storage is stored, and the cumulative combination (combination) (%) and combination (%) within the range of these numerical values are stored. Can be calculated.

The display monitor 9029 sets the combination (combination) (%) and the combination ratio (%) for 60,000 pieces, and the cumulative combination (relationship) (%) and the combination ratio (%) for a predetermined time (for example, 30). It can be switched and displayed every second). That is, four displays are switched and displayed by one display means. In this case, it takes 2 minutes to display all, but the number of prize balls by winning the first starting opening (navel) and the winning to the second starting winning opening (electric chew) are counted as the game progresses. The number of prize balls will change depending on the number of prize balls and the number of prize balls due to winning a prize in the big winning opening (attacker). Then, for example, if the number of prize balls won after displaying 60,000 winning combination (relationship ratio) (%) is reflected in the 60000 winning combination (%) displayed thereafter. There is a risk that there will be a discrepancy between the role ratio (%) for 60,000 pieces and the role ratio (%) for 60,000 pieces. Therefore, the number of prize balls by winning the first start winning opening (Heso), the number of prize balls by winning the second starting winning opening (Denchu), the number of prize balls by winning the big winning opening (attacker), the total prize balls Such discrepancies can be prevented by inputting numbers and performing aggregation at a predetermined timing in the switching display (for example, display timing of 60,000 winning combinations (combination) (%)). ..

As an example of the calculation method below, the total number of prize balls is 60,000, and the number of prize balls by winning the second start winning opening (Denchu) and the number of winning balls by winning the big winning opening (attacker) A method of calculating the prize ratio (role ratio (%)) when the total number of winning balls is 42,000 will be described. In the following description, the total number of acquired balls means the total total number of gaming media (prize balls) paid out from the gaming machine. Further, the number of winning balls for a character means the cumulative number of game media paid out by winning a prize in the attacker and the electric chew. Further, the number of consecutive winning balls is the cumulative number of game media paid out by winning a prize in the game medium to the attacker. Therefore, the combination (relationship ratio) can be obtained by the following equation (1). Further, the combination ratio can be obtained by the following equation (2).
Roles (relationship) = [Number of consecutive winning balls / Total number of acquisitions] x 100 ... (1)
Role ratio = [(number of consecutive winning balls + number of winning balls) / total number of acquisitions] x 100 ... (2)

When the total number of prize balls is 60,000 and the number of winning balls is 42,000, the prize ratio is calculated as 0.70 decimal point rounded down by dividing 42000 by 60,000).
However, since the microcomputer used in the gaming machine cannot perform the calculation after the decimal point, the calculation by the following method is required.

First, the first calculation method will be described. In the first calculation method, first, the number of winning balls is multiplied by 100 to obtain 4200000. Then divide this 4200000 by 60,000. As a result, 70 is required as a quotient. From the 70 obtained here, the accessory ratio is calculated as 70%. That is, by multiplying the divisor by 100, the calculation result up to two digits after the decimal point can be obtained. Here, when obtaining the calculation result up to three digits after the decimal point, it may be multiplied by 1000.

Next, the second calculation method will be described. In the second calculation method, first, the total number of prize balls is divided by 100 to obtain 600. Then divide 42000 by this 600. As a result, 70 is required as a quotient. From the 70 obtained here, the accessory ratio is calculated as 70%. That is, by dividing the divisor by 100, the calculation result up to two digits after the decimal point can be obtained. Here, when obtaining the calculation result up to three digits after the decimal point, it may be divided by 1000.

In this example, the total number of prize balls is 60,000, but in order to calculate the bonus ratio over a long period of time, a 3-byte area is provided as an area for storing the total number of prize balls. That is, in this example, it is stored as 00EA60h in the storage area of 3 bytes. Similarly, 00A410h is stored in the storage area of 3 bytes for the number of winning balls.

Here, the microcomputer used in the gaming machine can only perform operations between values of up to 2 bytes. Therefore, in order to facilitate the calculation, the lower 1 byte may be truncated.

Here, a third calculation method obtained by simplifying the second calculation method will be described. In the third calculation method, the lower 1 byte 60h is truncated from the total number of prize balls of 00EA60h so that the calculation by the microcomputer used for the game machine can be facilitated, and the total number of prize balls is 00EAh, that is, a decimal number. Calculate 234 in the notation. Similarly, for 00A410h, which is the number of winning balls, the lower 1 byte, 10h, is truncated, and the number of winning balls is 00A4h, that is, 164 is calculated in decimal notation.

Then, in the same manner as in the second calculation method, the total number of prize balls is divided by 100 (273/100) to calculate 2. Then, by dividing 156 by this 2, 78 is obtained as a quotient. From 78 obtained here, the accessory ratio is calculated as 78%.

The third calculation method facilitates the calculation by the microcomputer used in the gaming machine, but causes an error of + 12%. However, if the total number of prize balls and the number of winning balls are both 10 times, the error is + 1%. That is, the error is reduced by lengthening the period for calculating the accessory ratio, and is close to the original value.

Further, the substrate case 90201 is made of a translucent material so that the main substrate 9011 and the display monitor 9029 can be visually recognized. The board case 90201 is formed with a hole (not shown) through which a wiring connector connected to the main board 9011 is inserted, and a heat dissipation hole for releasing heat of an electric component of the main board 9011. The display monitor 9029 provided on the main board 9011 is arranged at a position where the heat dissipation hole is not directly in front of the main board 9011. Therefore, the heat dissipation holes do not block the visibility of the display monitor 9029. In addition, the "direct front" here means a direct front with the main board 9011 as a viewpoint, and means between an employee or the like who wants to visually recognize the main board 9011 and the main board 9011.

Further, the board case 90201 is provided with a sticker for displaying the type, model, specifications, etc. of the main board 9011. These holes, heat dissipation holes, and stickers are arranged so as not to block the display of the display monitor 9029. Specifically, as shown in FIG. 91, when the display monitor 9029 is arranged in the first part of the main board 9011 (for example, the central part of the main board 9011), the second part is different from the first part in the main board 9011. Even if other electrical components or the like are arranged in a portion (for example, a peripheral portion of the main board 9011), a hole portion, a heat dissipation hole, or a seal is arranged in a portion of the substrate case corresponding to the second portion of the main board 9011. good. In particular, the heat dissipation hole is preferably provided in the vicinity of the display monitor 9029 in order to release the heat generated by the display monitor 9029. Even in this case, it is preferable that the heat dissipation hole is arranged at a position not directly in front of the display monitor 9029. According to this, since the display monitor 9029 does not interfere with the visibility, it is easy to confirm the information regarding the winning.

Further, it is preferable that the wiring does not overlap with the portion of the substrate case 90201 corresponding to the second part of the main substrate 9011. Specifically, the portion of the board case 90201 corresponding to the second portion of the main board 9011 does not overlap with the hole portion to which one connector of the wiring is connected and the connection destination to which the other connector of the wiring is connected. To. According to this, it is possible to prevent the visibility of the display monitor 9029 from being obstructed by the wiring.

Further, the main board 9011 is provided with a 7-segment display for displaying the error of the gaming machine, but in order to avoid misidentification with the 7-segment display monitor 9029, the main board 9011 should be separated by a predetermined distance or other electronic components. It is preferable to arrange them so as to sandwich them. The other electronic components referred to here are preferably large-scale control components such as CPUs.

In addition, a storage area in which information related to winning a game is stored (ring buffer, 10 sets total buffer (total information related to winning a game stored in a ring buffer equipped with 10 counters having a maximum of 2 bytes), a prize ball). The total number buffer) is not initialized when the reset button is operated, and may be continuously stored. The ring buffer will be described further later. In addition, the check sum of the stored value is calculated, and initialization is performed when an abnormality is detected, or the value of the number of winning balls is larger than the value of the total number of stored prize balls, or the character is used. Initialization of the storage area where information related to winning a game is stored when an event that cannot occur as a situation is detected, such as when the value of the number of consecutive winning balls is larger than the value of the number of acquired balls. Processing may be performed. Further, the abnormality count error display, the warning display, and the like may be performed without performing the initialization process, the abnormality count error display and the warning display may be performed, or the initialization process may be performed after the initialization process is performed. The abnormal count error display and warning display will be further described later.

In the calculation of the winning combination (%), for example, assuming that the total number of acquired balls is 34321 and the number of winning balls is 19876, 34321 is divided as a divisor from 19876 to calculate the ratio. 1987/34321 = 0.57912 ..., And it is calculated that the role ratio (%) is about 57.9%. Since it is necessary to avoid the calculation with a decimal point when performing the calculation in the game control microcomputer 90100, it is replaced with the following calculation formula. In the division of 1987/34321, the denominator 34321 is divided by 100, the decimal point is rounded down, and 1987/343 = 57.9475 ... Since the decimal point is truncated, it is calculated that the ratio (%) is 57%, and it is displayed on the display monitor 9029. In this example, the value calculated by accurate calculation is an error on the display. There will be no error.

The minimum value in 16 bits is 32768 (0 except for the value of the most significant bit), and the value with the maximum error is when the total number of acquired balls and the number of bonus balls are 32799, respectively. When this is calculated by the above method, 32799/32799 = 100%, and when replaced with the calculation by the game control microcomputer 90100, 32799/327 = 100.3%, which is an error of + 0.3%. When the calculation is performed with the decimal point truncated, for example, when the accurate value is 69.9% and the value calculated by the game control microcomputer is 70.1%, the display value is 1 from 69% to 70%. It is conceivable that an error of% is displayed, but even on the display of an error of 1%, the combination ratio (%) (or the combination ratio) (%) can be displayed with a very small error.

Further, when the above calculation method is used, since the total number of acquired balls is divided by 100, the calculation cannot be performed when the total number of acquired balls is less than 100. Further, when it is less than 32768, the error gradually increases. If it is less than 10,000, the error may exceed 1%, resulting in a larger error. That is, the smaller the total number of acquired balls, the larger the error. Therefore, until the total number of acquired balls (for example, 32768, which is the minimum value of 16 bits) of a specific number or more is totaled by the counter, the combination ratio (%) and the combination ratio (relationship ratio) (%) are displayed on the display monitor 9029. Even if it is not displayed, or even if it is displayed, there is a possibility that an error may be large, even if it is notified by emitting a dedicated lamp, outputting a notification sound, or blinking the displayed value. good.

Further, the display monitor 9029 displays the combination ratio (%) and the combination (relationship) (%) on 7 segments, and each value is switched every predetermined period (for example, every 30 seconds). indicate. In this case, for example, while the combination ratio (%) is displayed for 30 seconds, an event occurs in which a new game medium is awarded to the electric chew or the attacker, and the value calculated accordingly is calculated after 30 seconds. If it is displayed as a value of (%), there is a risk that the value of the combination (%) and the value of the combination (%) will deviate from each other. Therefore, it is preferable that the combination ratio (%) and the combination (relationship ratio) (%) are calculated in the same interrupt and the calculated values are sequentially displayed.

Further, when the numerical value that can be displayed in the 7-segment is double-digit (for example, when two 7-segments are provided), 100% is set as 100 and the display cannot be performed. In this case, 99 may be displayed instead of 100. In the display monitor 9029 shown in FIGS. 91 and 92 (A), the numerical value can be displayed in the lower two digits, but even in this case, the numerical value may be displayed without using the upper two digits. Alternatively, under specific conditions, a numerical value may be displayed in a part of the upper two digits.

Further, in the above calculation method, an example of totaling the total number of acquired balls, the number of winning balls for the bonus, and the number of winning balls for the continuous bonus on the counter is shown. A sensor provided detects that the game medium has won a prize, and based on the detection result, each prize ball number is individually totaled, and then a counter for the number of winning balls and a counter for the number of consecutive winning balls. You may calculate the value to be aggregated in. In addition, a sensor individually provided for the attacker and a sensor provided after the discharge passage for discharging the game medium winning the attacker and the gaming medium winning the electric chew merge, are used, and based on the detection result. The value to be aggregated in the counter of the number of balls acquired as a bonus and the counter of the number of balls acquired as a continuous bonus may be calculated. Hereinafter, the display of the combination (combination ratio) combination ratio will be specifically described. In the following specific example, an example will be described in which the sensor provided for each of the attacker and the electric chew detects that the game medium has won a prize, and the number of each prize ball is individually totaled based on the detection result.

As shown in FIG. 90, a display monitor 9029 is connected to the main board 9011 in the gaming machine 901. As shown in FIG. 91, the main board 9011 is provided on the back surface side of the gaming board 902 (see FIG. 42) provided in the gaming machine frame 903 in the gaming machine 901. On the back side of the game board 902, in addition to the main board 9011, peripheral boards such as an effect control board 9012, a voice control board 9013, a lamp control board 9014, a power supply board, a payout control board, and a launch control board are also provided. There is. The main board 9011 is arranged at a position that does not overlap with each peripheral board other than the main board 9011. The main board 9011 may overlap with each of these peripheral boards. In particular, the main board 9011 may be overlapped so as to be on the upper side of each peripheral board.

The RAM 90102 in the main board 9011 has a first gate passing number counter, a second gate passing number counter, a first starting winning number counter, a second starting winning number counter, a first general winning number counter, a second general winning number counter, and the like. A third general prize number counter, a fourth general prize number counter, and a large prize number counter are provided.

The first gate passing number counter is a counter that counts the number of game balls detected by the first gate switch 9021A. The second gate passing number counter is a counter that counts the number of game balls detected by the second gate switch 9021B. The first start winning number counter is a counter that counts the number of game balls detected by the first start port switch 9022A. The second start winning number counter is a counter that counts the number of game balls detected by the second start port switch 9022B.

The first general winning number counter is a counter that counts the number of game balls detected by the first general winning opening switch 9024A. The second general winning number counter is a counter that counts the number of game balls detected by the second general winning opening switch 9024B. The third general winning number counter is a counter that counts the number of game balls detected by the third general winning opening switch 9024C. The fourth general winning number counter is a counter that counts the number of game balls detected by the fourth general winning opening switch 9024D. The large winning number counter is a counter that counts the number of game balls detected by the count switch 9023.

Further, a clear switch is connected to the main board 9011. The clear switch is arranged on the back surface of the game board 902 at a position where employees and the like cannot easily operate it. By operating the clear switch, the combination (combination ratio) stored in the RAM 90102 and the data used for the combination ratio, which will be described later, are cleared. The clear switch is a switch that is operated when a failure occurs in the calculation of the combination (relationship) or the combination ratio, and the calculation of the combination (relationship) or the combination ratio has to be redone. Is. For this reason, it is a switch that does not need to be operated when collecting data for calculating a normal combination (combination ratio) or combination ratio. When the clear switch is operated, the clear switch operation signal is transmitted to the main board 9011 in addition to clearing the data.

Further, RTC90106 is provided on the main board 9011. The main board 9011 can detect the current time by RTC90106. The RTC90106 can measure a predetermined time, an elapsed time, and the like by making initial settings, but in this embodiment, the RTC90106 can measure the business hours of the amusement park.

As shown in FIG. 92 (A), the main board 9011 is housed in the board case 90201. A caulking pin 9011B is attached to the board case 90201. By providing the caulking pin 9011B, the main board 9011 is completely enclosed in the board case 90201, and fraudulent acts against the main board 9011 are prevented. The substrate case 90201 is a crimped substrate case (hereinafter, also referred to as “crimped substrate case”).

Further, the display monitor 9029 is provided on the main board 9011. Further, a sealing sticker 9011S is attached to the substrate case 90201 to prove that the main substrate 9011 is enclosed. The sealing seal 9011S is attached, for example, across the removed portion of the substrate case 90201. The seal seal 9011S is arranged at a position away from the main board 9011, and is arranged at a position different from the position where the visibility of the display monitor 9029 is obstructed, such as directly in front of the display monitor 9029. As described above, the display monitor 9029 is arranged at a position not hidden by the seal seal 9011S.

The display monitor 9029 includes a four-digit display unit of a first display unit 9029A, a second display unit 9029B, a third display unit 9029C, and a fourth display unit 9029D. The first display unit 9029A to the fourth display unit 9029D are each composed of seven segments composed of seven segments drawing the character "8" and dots arranged on the lower right side of the seven segments. The first display unit 9029A to the fourth display unit 9029D can be lit and blinked in various colors such as red, blue, green, yellow, and white, respectively. It is also possible to display these colors in different colors or so-called rainbows while changing them in a very short cycle.

On the display monitor 9029, each item of display Nos. 1 to 4 shown in FIG. 92 (B) is displayed. The aggregation period is displayed on the first display unit 9029A and the second display unit 9029B of the upper two digits, and the numerical value is displayed as a percentage on the third display unit 9029C and the fourth display unit 9029D of the lower two digits. In display No1, a short-term combination (combination ratio) is displayed, and in display No2, a short-term combination ratio is displayed. Display No. 3 displays the total cumulative winning combination (combination ratio), and display No. 2 displays the total cumulative winning combination.

The short term here means a period in which the number of prize balls paid out (the number of acquired balls) was 60,000. The period for calculating the total cumulative total means the total period after the calculation of the combination (relationship) and the combination ratio is started, or the total period after the calculation of the combination (relationship) and the combination ratio is once reset. do.

In the above example, the winning combination (relationship ratio) and the winning combination ratio are calculated regardless of the gaming state, but may be calculated in consideration of the gaming state. For example, the role ream (relationship ratio) may be a ratio of the total number of prize balls to the number of prize balls due to winning a prize in the big prize opening during the big hit game state. In addition, the role ratio is the total number of prize balls, and the role ratio is the number of prize balls by winning the second start winning opening in the high base state and the big winning opening in the big hit game state. It may be the ratio of the number of prize balls due to the winning of.

When the short-term combination (combination) of display No. 1 is displayed, "y6." Is displayed on the first display unit 9029A and the second display unit 9029B, and the short-term combination ratio of display No. 2 is displayed. Is displayed on the first display unit 9029A and the second display unit 9029B. Further, when the short-term combination (relationship) of display No. 1 is displayed, the short-term combination (relationship) is displayed as a percentage (% display) on the first display unit 9029A and the second display unit 9029B. When the short-term combination ratio of display No. 2 is displayed, the short-term combination ratio is displayed as a percentage (% display) on the first display unit 9029A and the second display unit 9029B.

When the total cumulative combination (relationship) of display No. 3 is displayed, "A6." Is displayed on the first display unit 9029A and the second display unit 9029B, and the total cumulative combination ratio of display No. 4 is displayed. In that case, "A7." Is displayed on the first display unit 9029A and the second display unit 9029B. Further, when the total cumulative combination (relationship) of display No. 3 is displayed, the total cumulative combination (relationship) is displayed as a percentage (% display) on the third display unit 9029C and the fourth display unit 9029D. When the total cumulative combination ratio of display No. 4 is displayed, the total cumulative combination ratio is displayed as a percentage (% display) on the third display unit 9029C and the fourth display unit 9029D.

The main board 9011 is a game ball that has entered the attacker, the first start winning opening, the second starting winning opening, and the first general winning opening to the fourth general winning opening in calculating the winning combination (combination ratio) and the winning combination. The number of intrusions is being totaled. In the main processing, the CPU 90103 includes a first gate switch 9021A and a second gate switch 9021B, a first start port switch 9022A and a second start port switch 9022B, a count switch 9023, and a first general winning port switch 9024A to a fourth general. A state confirmation process for confirming the state (presence / absence of a detection signal) of each switch of the winning opening switch 9024D is performed.

In the state confirmation process of each switch, it is specified which approach area the game ball has entered based on the detection signal output from each switch. Then, when the detection signals are output from the first gate switch 9021A and the second gate switch 9021B, the values of the first gate pass count counter and the second gate pass count counter are added, and the first start port switch 9022A, When the detection signal is output from the 2nd start port switch 9022B, the values of the 1st start winning number counter and the 2nd start winning number counter are added, and when the detection signal is output from the count switch 9023, the detection signal is output. When the value of the large winning number counter is added and the detection signal is output from the first general winning opening switch 9024A, the second general winning opening switch 9024B, the third general winning opening switch 9024C, and the fourth general winning opening switch 9024D. Is the number of game balls entering each entry area (each prize) by adding the values of the first general prize counter, the second general prize counter, the third general prize counter, and the fourth general prize counter. The number of winning game balls to the mouth) is totaled. The value of each counter is stored in the RAM 90102.

In this way, the step for totaling the number of game balls entering each approach area is executed together in a series of processes for confirming the state of the switch corresponding to each approach area (included in the switch state confirmation process). ) Therefore, it is possible to total the number of game balls entering each approach area without executing a separate totaling program, that is, without causing the problem of capacity shortage due to an increase in the number of execution programs. ..

The CPU 90103 of the main board 9011 calculates the number of winning balls by winning each winning opening based on the total number of winning balls in each winning opening, and stores the calculated number of winning balls in the RAM 90102 for each winning opening. Let me. The number of prize balls for winning a game ball is calculated by multiplying the number of game balls paid out by one prize for the winning opening and the number of winnings for the winning opening. The number of prize balls for winning a game ball is predetermined for each winning opening.

As shown in FIG. 93, the number of prize balls for each winning opening classified here is the general winning opening prize ball (the winning ball from the first general winning opening to the fourth general winning opening (sode)). 1st start winning prize ball (prize ball by winning the 1st starting prize opening (heso)), ordinary electric role prize ball (prize ball by winning the electric chew), special electric role prize ball (winning to the attacker) It is the number of prize balls. The RAM 90102 also stores the total number of prize balls. In the CPU 90103, the number of game balls won in the general winning opening and the number of game balls won in the first starting opening are individually totaled, but the number of winning balls in the general winning opening and the first starting opening are totaled individually. The number of game ball winnings may be aggregated. Further, the number of prize balls of the general winning opening prize ball and the number of prize balls of the first starting opening prize ball are calculated separately, but the number of prize balls of the general winning opening prize ball and the first starting opening prize ball are calculated separately. The number of prize balls may be calculated together.

The RAM 90102 includes a ring buffer and an active buffer for storing the number of these prize balls. The ring buffer includes ten first storage areas to tenth storage areas consisting of a counter having a maximum of 2 bytes for storing the number of prize balls by winning a prize in each winning opening for each number of 6000 prize balls. As described above, the ring buffer has a storage area of a predetermined unit (maximum 2 bytes). Further, the active buffer includes a 0th storage area consisting of a counter of up to 2 bytes for storing the number of prize balls by winning a prize in each winning opening for each number of 6000 prize balls. In the 0th storage area, the number of prize balls for each winning opening, which increases with the progress of the game, is added. The 11 storage areas from the 0th storage area to the 10th storage area can store 256 × 256 = 65536 data, and up to 6000 data can be stored with a margin.

Further, the RAM 90102 is provided with a storage area of the total number of prize balls (for 10 sets) stored in the first storage area to the tenth storage area and the total total for each winning opening. The total storage area for 10 sets and the total storage area are composed of counters of up to 3 bytes. Therefore, 256 × 256 × 256 = 16777216 data can be stored, and up to 60,000 data can be stored with a margin. I can remember.

Further, the RAM 90102 is provided with a combination (combination) combination / ratio storage area for storing 10 sets and the total total combination ratio and combination (relationship). In the CPU 90103 of the main board 9011, the winning ratio and the winning combination (relationship ratio) for 10 sets and the total cumulative total are calculated based on the number of prize balls based on the number of winning balls to each winning opening for 10 sets and the total cumulative total. Stores 10 sets and the total cumulative combination ratio and combination (relationship) in the combination (relationship) combination storage area. The combination (relationship) combination storage area for storing the combination ratio and the combination (relationship) of 10 sets and the total cumulative total is composed of a counter of a maximum of 1 byte. For example, when storing 10 sets and the total cumulative combination ratio and combination (relationship) as an integer, a counter with a maximum of 1 byte can store the combination with a margin.

Here, the memory space of the CPU 90103 of the main board 9011 will be described. FIG. 94 is a diagram showing a memory map of the CPU in the main board. The CPU 90103 has a memory space for accessing the above-mentioned built-in registers, ROM 90101, RAM 90102, and the like. Specifically, as shown in the memory map of FIG. 94, the address / data signal line of the ROM 90101 is a built-in ROM area of a 16 Kbyte area of 0000H to 2FFFH (H indicates a hexadecimal number; hereinafter the same) in the memory space. Is assigned to. The CPU 90103 performs various control processes in the built-in ROM area.

Further, the address / data signal line of the built-in register is assigned to the built-in register area of FE00H to FEBFH in the memory space. The CPU 90103 reads data from the built-in register and writes data to the register via the built-in register area.

Further, the address / data signal line of the RAM 90102 is assigned to the RWM area (built-in RAM area) of F000H to F3FFH in the memory space. The CPU 90103 specifies this RWM area to read data from the RAM 90102 and write data to the RAM 90 102. The other areas of the memory space (3000H to EFFFH, F400H to FDFFH, FEC0H to FFFFH in this embodiment) are regarded as unused areas.

Specifically, as shown in FIG. 95, a used area program area, a used area data area, a non-used area program area, and a non-used area data area are assigned to the built-in ROM area. In addition, a free area is allocated between the used area program area and the used area data area. Similarly, free space is allocated between the used area data area and the unused area program area, and between the unused area program area and the unused area data area. The CPU 90103 specifies this built-in ROM area and reads data from the ROM 90101.

Of these, the used area program area is composed of instruction data (opcode) corresponding to each of a plurality of types of instructions executed by the CPU 90103 and supplementary data (operator) required for the CPU 90103 to execute each instruction. The data of the game-related program related to the progress of the game is stored. The game-related program stored in the used area program area includes a game control program, which is a program for controlling the game, and a special symbol display output program, which is a program for displaying special figures, ordinary figures, and the like. There is. These game control programs and special symbol display output programs are stored in the used area program area. The game control program is a program related to the progress of the game, and is a program that controls the progress of the game, such as a big hit lottery program for lottery for the transition to the big hit game state.

The unused area program area is composed of instruction data (operation code) for the CPU 90103 to calculate the combination (combination ratio) and the combination ratio, and supplementary data (operator) necessary for the CPU 90103 to execute each instruction. Data of a program for calculating and displaying a combination (relationship) and a combination ratio (hereinafter, may be referred to as a combination (relationship) combination ratio related program) is stored. The role-ream (relationship) role-ratio-related program includes a role-relationship (relationship) role-ratio calculation program for calculating the role-relationship (relationship) and role-ratio, and a display monitor for the role-relationship (relationship) and role-ratio. A combination (combination ratio) combination display output program for displaying in 9029 is included. In the unused area program area, a combination (relationship) combination ratio calculation program and a combination (relationship) combination ratio display output program are stored. The combination (relationship) combination ratio calculation program is a program different from the progress of the game.

Here, the used area program area and the non-used area program area will be further described. FIG. 96 is a diagram showing a configuration of a used area program area and a non-used area program area in the built-in ROM area. As shown in FIG. 96, in the used area program area, "switch input processing", "digit output processing 1", "jump processing to the unused area (digit output processing 2)", and "error detection processing" are used as game-related programs. "Random number update processing" "Special map processing" "Program processing" "Information output processing" "Prize ball processing" "Test terminal processing" "Vorient processing" "Memory display processing" "Error notification processing" "Unused area (role) Each program of "jump processing to ratio calculation processing)" is stored. Further, in the non-used program area, each program of the combination (combination) "digit output processing 2", "jump processing to the used area (error detection processing)", and "role ratio calculation processing" is stored. In the CPU 90103, the digit output process 1 and the digit output process 2 are shared and executed by one interrupt process. Further, in the digit output process 1 and the digit output process 2, the LEDs in the first special symbol display device 904A, the second special symbol display device 904B, the normal symbol display 9020, and the display monitor 9029 are displayed by dynamic lighting. However, static lighting may be used instead of dynamic lighting.

Of these processes, the program that performs "digit output process 1" corresponds to the special symbol display output program, and the program that performs "digit output process 2" corresponds to the combination (combination) combination display output program. .. Further, a program that performs from "error detection processing" to "error notification processing" (hereinafter, also referred to as "game progress control processing") corresponds to a game control program, and a program that performs "role ratio calculation processing" is a combination. (Continuous ratio) Corresponds to the combination ratio calculation program. In the combination (relationship) combination ratio calculation program, the combination (relationship) and the combination ratio are calculated, and the display pattern when the calculated combination (relationship) and the combination ratio is displayed on the display monitor 9029, in other words. The light emission patterns of the plurality of LEDs (first segment SG1 to seventh segment SG7 and dot SG8 shown in FIG. 108) on the display monitor 9029 are determined.

In the used area data area, reference data (for example, the above-mentioned various lottery data) referred to by the control program stored in the used program area is stored. Further, in the unused area data area, data used for displaying the combination (combination ratio) and the combination ratio is temporarily stored. For example, the unused area data area is provided with a storage area for storing the total number of prize balls for each winning opening and a combination storage area for the total total number of winning combinations. Further, in the unused area data area, an active buffer having a 0th storage area for each winning opening, a ring buffer having a first storage area to a tenth storage area, and the number of winning balls (for 10 sets) for each winning opening. A total storage area and 10 sets of combination (combination) combination storage areas are provided.

In this embodiment, 1 byte (8 bits) of data can be stored in the storage area of the RAM 90102 corresponding to each address of the RAM area, and each of the above-mentioned data (instruction data, supplementary data, reference data) can be stored. , Management data) is data with a number of bytes exceeding 1 byte (for example, 2 bytes), the data is divided and stored in the storage area of the RAM 90102 corresponding to a plurality of consecutive addresses in the RAM control area. is doing.

In addition, the used area program area in which the special symbol display output program and the game control program are stored in the built-in ROM area of the CPU 90103, the combination (relationship) combination display output program, and the combination (relationship) combination calculation program A higher-level address (starting address) different from the stored unused area program area is set.

Specifically, as shown in FIG. 97, the upper address of the subroutine in the used area program area in which the special symbol display output program and the game control program are stored is “00”. The upper address of the subroutine in the unused area program area in which the combination (relationship) combination ratio display output program and the combination (relationship) combination ratio calculation program are stored is set to "01". As described above, the upper address of the program stored in the unused area program area is different from the upper address of the program stored in the used area program area.

As call instructions for each of these programs, "CALLF" and "CALLmn" are used for the programs stored in the used area program area. Further, only "CALLmn" is used for the program stored in the unused area program area, and "CALLF" is not used. The special symbol display output program and the game control program stored in the used area program area are called by "CALLF" or "CALLMn", but here, they are called by "CALLF". In addition, the combination (relationship) combination ratio display output program stored in the unused area program area and the combination (relationship) combination ratio calculation program are called by "CALLmn" and are not called by "CALLF". No. Comparing these calling instructions, "CALLF" is a calling instruction having a shorter tone and a lighter capacity than "CALLMn".

Further, the CPU 90103 includes a Q register. The Q register is a dedicated register for storing the upper address in the built-in ROM area as a fixed value. By providing the Q register, it is possible to call the program without the upper address. A fixed value corresponding to the upper address is set in the Q register. For example, a fixed value "00" is set when calling a program stored in the used area program area, and a fixed value "01" is set when calling a program stored in the non-used area program area. The program. In this way, the Q register can execute the program in the unused area program area by setting a fixed value in the upper address of the unused area program area after setting a fixed value in the upper address of the used area program area. It is possible.

Next, the execution order of the programs in the interrupt processing executed by the CPU 90103 will be described. In principle, the CPU 90103 executes the program in the order of the addresses. Therefore, referring to FIG. 96, when executing the program, the CPU 90103 first executes the "switch input process" in the used area program area, and then performs the "digit output process 1" according to the special symbol display output program. Run. When starting interrupt processing, a fixed value "00" is set in the Q register. In the "digit output process 1", the CPU 90103 uses the digit signals for the special figure and the normal figure obtained in the previous routine as the first special symbol display device 904A, the second special symbol display device 904B, and the normal symbol display device 9020. Execute the process to output to.

After executing the "digit output process 1", the CPU 90103 jumps from the used area program area to the unused area program area, and executes the "digit output process 2" according to the combination (combination) combination display output program. .. When jumping from the used area program area to the unused area program area, a fixed value "01" is set in the Q register. The same applies thereafter. In the digit output process 2, the CPU 90103 executes a process of outputting a digit signal regarding the combination (combination ratio), combination ratio, etc. obtained in the previous routine to the display monitor 9029. Therefore, the "digit output process 1" and the "digit output process 2" are continuously executed.

After performing the digit output process 2, the CPU 90103 jumps from the unused area program area to the used area program area, and performs processing according to the game control program. When jumping from the unused area program area to the used area program area, a fixed value "00" is set in the Q register. The same applies thereafter. The CPU 90103 has "error detection processing", "random number update processing", "special drawing processing", "normal drawing processing", "information output processing", "prize ball processing", "test terminal processing", and "solenoid processing" in the processing according to the game control program. "Memory display processing" and "error notification processing" are executed in sequence. The CPU 90103 generates a digit signal for a special figure, a normal figure, or the like by processing according to these game control programs.

The CPU 90103 executes "error notification processing", and when the processing corresponding to the third program is completed, jumps from the used area program to the non-used area program, and "combined" according to the combination (combination) combination ratio calculation program. Execute "ratio calculation process". The CPU 90103 calculates the winning combination (continuous ratio) and the winning combination by the "combination ratio calculation process", and generates a digit signal for the winning combination (continuous ratio), the winning combination, and the like. In this way, the interrupt processing in the CPU 90103 is completed.

In this way, the CPU 90103 executes the "digit output process 1" and the "digit output process 2" in one interrupt process, and displays the first special symbol display device 904A, the second special symbol display device 904B, and the normal symbol. Display of special figures and ordinary figures on the device 9020, and display of the combination (combination) and combination ratio on the display monitor 9029.

Next, the configuration of the used area program area and the non-used area program area in the built-in ROM area will be described. FIG. 98 is a diagram showing other configurations of the used area program area and the non-used area program area in the built-in ROM area. In this example, as shown in FIG. 98, in the used area program area, "switch input processing", "error detection processing", "random number update processing", "special drawing processing", "general drawing processing", "information output processing", and "award" Each program of ball processing, test terminal processing, solenoid processing, storage display processing, error notification processing, and digit output processing 1 is stored. Further, each program of "digit output processing 2" and "combination ratio calculation processing" is stored in the unused program area.

Next, the execution order of the programs in the interrupt processing executed by the CPU 90103 in this example will be described. Referring to FIG. 98, in executing the program, the CPU 90103 first executes the "switch input process" in the used area program area, and then performs the process according to the third program. The CPU 90103 has "error detection processing", "random number update processing", "special drawing processing", "normal drawing processing", "information output processing", "prize ball processing", "test terminal processing", and "solenoid processing" in the processing according to the game control program. "Memory display processing" and "error notification processing" are executed in sequence. The CPU 90103 generates a digit signal for a special figure, a normal figure, or the like by processing according to these game control programs.

The CPU 130 subsequently executes the "digit output process 1" according to the special symbol display output program. In the "digit output process 1", the CPU 90103 uses the digit signals for the special figure and the normal figure obtained in the previous routine as the first special symbol display device 904A, the second special symbol display device 904B, and the normal symbol display device 9020. Execute the process to output to. However, a digit signal for a special figure or a normal figure obtained in this routine may be output.

Then, the CPU 90103 shifts to the unused area program area as it is, and executes the "digit output process 2" according to the combination (combination) combination display output program. In the digit output process 2, the CPU 90103 executes a process of outputting a digit signal regarding the combination (combination ratio), combination ratio, etc. obtained in the previous routine to the display monitor 9029. Therefore, the "digit output process 1" and the "digit output process 2" are continuously executed.

After that, the CPU 90103 executes the digit output process 2 and then executes the "combination ratio calculation process" according to the combination (combination) combination ratio calculation program. The CPU 90103 calculates the winning combination (continuous ratio) and the winning combination by the "combination ratio calculation process", and generates a digit signal for the winning combination (continuous ratio), the winning combination, and the like. In this way, the interrupt processing in the CPU 90103 is completed.

In this way, the CPU 90103 executes the "digit output process 1" and the "digit output process 2" in one interrupt process, and displays the first special symbol display device 904A, the second special symbol display device 904B, and the normal symbol. Display of special figures and ordinary figures on the device 9020, and display of the combination (combination) and combination ratio on the display monitor 9029.

For example, regarding the configuration of the used area program area and the non-used area program area in the built-in ROM area, the configuration shown in FIG. 96 is referred to as an area configuration pattern A, and the configuration shown in FIG. 98 is referred to as an area configuration pattern B. Further, the configuration of the used area program area and the non-used area program area in the built-in ROM area is an area configuration pattern in which the jump processing between the used area program area and the non-used area program area is excluded from the configuration shown in FIG. Let it be C.

In this case, in the area configuration pattern A, as shown in FIG. 99 (A), in one cycle of the interrupt processing in the CPU 90103, the special symbol display output program → the combination (combination) combination ratio display output program → the game control program → The processing is executed in the order of the combination (relationship ratio) combination ratio calculation program. Further, in the area configuration pattern B, as shown in FIG. 99 (B), in the interrupt processing in the CPU 90103, the game control program → the special symbol display output program → the combination (combination) combination ratio display output program → the combination ( Processing is executed in the order of the combination ratio calculation program. Further, in the area configuration pattern C, as shown in FIG. 99 (C), a special symbol display output program → a game control program → a combination (relationship) combination display output program → a combination (relationship) combination ratio calculation program. Processing is executed in the order of. Hereinafter, the interrupt processing showing the procedure in FIG. 99 (A) is referred to as a first interrupt process, the interrupt process showing the procedure in FIG. 99 (B) is referred to as a second interrupt process, and the interrupt showing the procedure in FIG. 99 (C). The processing is called the third interrupt processing.

Next, the control for displaying the combination (combination ratio) and the combination ratio with respect to the display monitor 9029 by the main board 9011 will be described. Here, the main board 9011 controls to sequentially display a plurality of items related to the combination (combination ratio) and the combination ratio. FIG. 100A is a time chart showing the display time of items displayed on the display monitor. As shown in FIG. 100 (A), when the display on the display monitor 9029 is started, the short-term combination (combination ratio) of the display No. 1 is first displayed. The display of the short-term combination (relationship ratio) of the display No. 1 is displayed in green. In the display of the short-term combination (combination ratio) of the display No. 1, as shown in FIG. 100 (B-1), the character "y" is displayed on the first display unit 9029A, and the character "y" is displayed on the second display unit 9029B. Character is displayed. Further, the short-term combination (relationship ratio) is displayed on the third display unit 9029C and the fourth display unit 9029D. For example, when the short-term combination (relationship) is 41%, the character "4." is displayed on the third display unit 9029C, and the character "1." is displayed on the fourth display unit 9029D.

When the display of the display No. 1 continues for 30 seconds, the short-term combination ratio of the display No. 2 is displayed. The display of the short-term combination (relationship ratio) of display No. 2 is displayed in red. In the display of the short-term combination ratio of display No. 2, as shown in FIG. 100 (B-2), the character "y" is displayed on the first display unit 9029A, and the character "7." is displayed on the second display unit 9029B. Is displayed. Further, the short-term combination ratio is displayed on the third display unit 9029C and the fourth display unit 9029D. For example, when the short-term combination ratio is 63%, the character "4." is displayed on the third display unit 9029C, and the character "3." is displayed on the fourth display unit 9029D.

When the display of the display No. 2 continues for 30 seconds, the total cumulative combination (combination ratio) of the display No. 3 is displayed. The display of the total cumulative combination (relationship ratio) of display No. 3 is displayed in red. In the display of the total cumulative combination (combination ratio) of display No. 3, as shown in FIG. 100 (B-3), the character "A" is displayed on the first display unit 9029A, and "6" is displayed on the second display unit 9029B. The characters "." Are displayed. Further, the total cumulative combination (relationship ratio) is displayed on the third display unit 9029C and the fourth display unit 9029D. For example, when the total cumulative combination (relationship ratio) is 58%, the character "5." is displayed on the third display unit 9029C, and the character "8." is displayed on the fourth display unit 9029D.

When the display of the display No. 3 continues for 30 seconds, the total cumulative combination ratio of the display No. 4 is displayed. The display of the total cumulative combination ratio of display No. 4 is displayed in red. In the display of the total cumulative combination ratio of display No. 4, as shown in FIG. 100 (B-4), the character "A" is displayed on the first display unit 9029A, and the character "7." is displayed on the second display unit 9029B. Is displayed. Further, the total cumulative combination ratio is displayed on the third display unit 9029C and the fourth display unit 9029D. For example, when the total cumulative combination ratio is 68%, the character "6." is displayed on the third display unit 9029C, and the character "8." is displayed on the fourth display unit 9029D.

When the display of the display No. 4 continues for 30 seconds, the short-term combination (combination ratio) of the display No. 1 is displayed as shown in FIG. 100 (B-5). After that, the display of the short-term combination (relationship) of display No. 1 to the total cumulative combination ratio of display No. 4 is sequentially displayed every 30 seconds. Further, as for the display color, only the short-term combination (combination ratio) of the display No. 1 is green, and the short-term combination ratio of the display No. 2 to the total cumulative combination ratio of the display No. 4 is red. In this way, the display monitor 9029 switches and displays the short-term combination (relationship), short-term combination ratio, total cumulative combination (relationship), and total cumulative combination ratio every 30 seconds.

Further, the content displayed on the display monitor 9029 is not limited to the above content and can be appropriately determined. For example, in the above example, characters such as "y" and "A" are displayed on the first display unit 9029A, and numerical values are displayed on the second display unit 9029B to the fourth display unit 9029D. Characters may be displayed on the display unit 9029B, and numerical values may be displayed on the first display unit 9029A, the third display unit 9029C, and the fourth display unit 9029D.

Further, a numerical value may be displayed on all of the first display unit 9029A to the fourth display unit 9029D, and a predetermined ratio or the like and a classification or the like may be indicated only by the numerical value. Alternatively, characters may be displayed in two places of the first display unit 9029A to the fourth display unit 9029D, and numerical values may be displayed in the other two places. Further, a numerical range of characters may be set so that only characters are displayed on the first display unit 9029A to the fourth display unit 9029D. For example, "0" to "30" may be displayed as "P", "31" to "60" may be displayed as "Q", and "61" to "100" may be displayed as "R". The characters to be displayed are not limited to English characters, but may be hiragana, katakana, kanji, or the like. Further, instead of the characters, a symbol having no meaning may be displayed.

Further, when displaying a numerical value or the like on the display monitor 9029, the color or display mode may be changed according to the displayed numerical value. For example, when displaying the combination ratio, if the displayed combination ratio is equal to or less than a predetermined value, it may be displayed in "blue", and if it exceeds the predetermined value, it may be displayed in "red". Further, when the displayed combination ratio is equal to or less than a predetermined value, it may be lit and displayed, and when it exceeds the predetermined value, it may be blinked. In the blinking display, any of the first display unit 9029A to the fourth display unit 9029D may be blinked. For example, the entire first display unit 9029A to the fourth display unit 9029D may be blinked, the first display unit 9029A and the second display unit 9029B, or the third display unit 9029C and the fourth display unit 9029D. You may make two of them blink. The display unit that is not blinking may be turned on or off.

Further, in the main board 9011, when the total number of prize balls in the 0th storage area in the active buffer reaches 6000, which is a predetermined capacity, the storage in the 0th storage area to the 10th storage area in the ring buffer is updated. Furthermore, the storage of the total and total storage area for 10 sets and the storage area for the combination (relationship) combination ratio that stores the combination ratio and the combination ratio (relation ratio) for 10 sets and total total are updated respectively. ..

In the update in the active buffer and the ring buffer, the numerical value stored in the 0th storage area of the active buffer is moved to the 1st storage area of the ring buffer. Further, the numerical values stored in the first storage area to the ninth storage area of the ring buffer are moved to the second storage area to the tenth storage area, respectively. For example, as shown in FIG. 101, the number of prize balls of the general winning opening prize balls in the 0th storage area to the 9th storage area is "27", "81", "120", "36", "225", "87", and "66", respectively. "117" "45" "21". At this time, when the total number of prize balls in the 0th storage area of the active buffer reaches 6000, the number of prize balls of the general winning opening prize balls in the 100 millionth area to the 10th storage area is "27", "81", and "", respectively. Update to 120, "36", "225", "87", "66", "117", "45", and "21". Further, the number of prize balls in the 0th storage area is set to "0", and the number of prize balls in the 10th storage area is erased.

When updating the number of prize balls stored in the 0th storage area to the 10th storage area, the stored number of prize balls may be temporarily erased and then a new number of prize balls may be stored. Alternatively, a new number of prize balls may be stored by overwriting the stored number of prize balls.

Further, the abnormality detection sensor group 9026 shown in FIG. 90 includes a door opening sensor that detects the opening of the glass door frame 903a. The opening of the glass door frame 903a does not correspond to an abnormality when it is performed by an employee, but it often corresponds to an abnormality when it is performed by a person other than the employee. Therefore, in this embodiment, the door opening sensor for detecting the opening of the glass door frame 903a is included in the abnormality detection sensor group 9026. When the door opening sensor detects the opening of the glass door frame 903a, the door opening sensor transmits an opening signal to the main board 9011.

Door opening includes normal opening of the glass door frame 903a by an employee and abnormal opening of the glass door frame 903a by a person other than the employee. Here, the door opening is detected on the assumption that the abnormal glass door frame 903a is opened. Further, even if the employee opens the glass door frame 903a normally, the door opening is detected, but the employee or the like recognizes the opening of the glass door frame 903a. Since there are many, it is possible to prevent any particular problems from occurring.

Subsequently, the control regarding the combination (combination ratio) and the display of the combination ratio executed on the main board 9011 will be described. On the main board 9011, when the power supply from the predetermined power supply board is started, the game control microcomputer 90100 is started, and the CPU 90103 executes a predetermined process which is the game control main process. When the game control main process is started, the CPU 90103 sets the interrupt disabled and then makes the necessary initial settings. In this initial setting, for example, the RAM control area and the RAM data area in the RAM 90102 are cleared. Therefore, when the power supply from the power supply board is started, the data used for displaying the winning combination (combination ratio) and the winning combination stored in the unused area and other areas of the RAM 90102 is maintained without being cleared. To. The data used for displaying the winning combination (combination ratio) and the winning combination stored in the unused area and other areas of the RAM 90102 is cleared by operating the clear switch. In addition, the CTC register built in the game control microcomputer 90100 is set. After making the initial settings, the CPU 90103 can periodically execute the timer interrupt process. The combination (combination) / combination-related processing is executed by this timer interrupt processing. Further, among the combination (relationship) / combination ratio related processing, the combination (relationship) combination ratio display output program is executed in the display switching control process (step S90209 in FIG. 105), and the combination (relationship) / combination ratio display output program is executed in other processing. (Ratio) The combination ratio calculation program is executed. The winning combination calculation process in the winning combination (continuous ratio) winning combination calculation program includes other processing of the winning combination (continuous ratio) and the winning combination calculation. However, in the combination ratio calculation process, the combination (relationship) and combination ratio calculation processing is performed, and a program corresponding to other processing in the combination (relationship) combination ratio calculation program may be separately prepared. good.

FIG. 102 is a flowchart showing the procedure of the combination (combination) / combination-related processing. On the main board 9011, as shown in FIG. 102, it is determined whether or not an abnormal operation is detected in the combination (combination ratio) / combination ratio related processing (step S90101). Whether or not an abnormal operation is detected is determined by whether or not a clear switch operation signal is transmitted from the clear switch.

As a result, when the clear switch operation signal is transmitted and an abnormal operation is detected (step S90101; YES), preparation for warning display is performed (step S90102), and the process proceeds to step S90103. Further, when the clear switch operation signal is not transmitted and the abnormal operation is not detected (step S90101; NO), the winning information is acquired (step S90103). As for the winning information, the game ball is detected by any one of the first starting port switch 9022A, the second starting port switch 9022B, the count switch 9023, and the first general winning opening switch 9024A to the fourth general winning opening switch 9024D. Obtained by.

Subsequently, it is determined whether or not the current time is within the business hours (step S90104). Whether or not the current time is within business hours is measured and determined by RTC90106. As a result, when the current time is within the business hours (step S90104; YES), it is determined whether or not the glass door frame 903a is closed (step S90105). Whether or not the glass door frame 903a is closed is determined by whether or not an opening signal is transmitted from the door opening sensor.

As a result, when the opening signal is not output from the door opening sensor and the glass door frame 903a is closed (step S90105; YES), the attacker wins more than a predetermined number of game balls per unit time. It is determined whether or not the signal is present (step S90106). The unit time and the predetermined number of balls here are set to numerical values assuming a state in which a prize cannot be won in a normal game. Specifically, since the maximum number of launches of the game ball is 100 per minute, it can be appropriately determined, for example, up to 100 per minute. More specifically, the predetermined number of balls is 5 when the unit time is 1 second, or the predetermined number is 30 when the unit time is 10 seconds. The unit time is measured by RTC90106. Further, the number of winning game balls to the attacker is measured by the number of game balls detected by the count switch 9023.

As a result, when the attacker does not win more than a predetermined number of game balls per unit time (step S90106; NO), the number of prize balls is added according to the prize information acquired in step S90103. Processing is performed (step S90107). The prize ball number addition process is performed when the warning display preparation is not performed. Here, if the warning display preparation is being made, the combination (combination) / combination-related processing is terminated as it is. In the prize ball number addition process, the general winning opening (sode), the general winning opening (heso), the ordinary electric role prize ball (electric chew), and the special electric role prize ball (attacker) in the 0th storage area shown in FIG. 93. Add the number of prize balls.

Further, in the prize ball number addition process, a general prize opening (sode), a general winning opening (heso), a normal electric prize ball (electric chew), and a special electric prize ball (attacker) in the 0th storage area in the active buffer. Calculate the total number of prize balls for each prize ball. Here, when the total number of prize balls in the 0th storage area in the active buffer is 6000, which is a predetermined capacity, the numerical value stored in the 0th storage area of the active buffer is stored in the first storage area of the ring buffer. Move it. Further, the numerical values stored in the first storage area to the ninth storage area of the ring buffer are moved to the second storage area to the tenth storage area, respectively. In addition, the numerical value stored in the tenth storage area in the ring buffer is erased.

Subsequently, it is determined whether or not the calculation timer has timed up (calculation timer = 0) (step S90108). As a result, if the calculation timer has not timed up (step S90108; NO), the combination (combination ratio) / combination ratio-related processing is terminated as it is. If the calculation timer is timed up (step S90108; YES), the calculation timer is set (calculation timer = 2000 ms) (step S90109).

Then, it is determined whether or not the number of prize balls (total prize balls) obtained by adding in step S90107 is the calculated execution number (step S90110). The number of calculation executions may be an appropriate number, but for example, as a reference for moving the numerical values stored in the 0th storage area to the 9th storage area in the ring buffer to the 1st storage area to the 10th storage area, respectively. The number can be slightly smaller than the total number of prize balls of 6000, for example, 5900. Further, it is preferable that the number of calculation executions is slightly smaller than the number obtained by subtracting the maximum number of payout balls from 6000.

As a result, if the number of prize balls (total prize balls) is not the calculated execution number (step S90110; NO), the combination (combination) / combination-related processing is terminated as it is. Further, when the number of prize balls is the calculated execution number (step S90110; YES), the winning combination (continuous ratio) and the winning combination ratio are calculated (step S90111). Here, the short-term combination (relationship), short-term combination, cumulative combination (relationship) (total cumulative combination (relationship)), and cumulative combination (total cumulative combination ratio) are calculated respectively. Therefore, the short-term combination (relationship), short-term combination ratio, cumulative combination (relationship), and cumulative combination ratio are all calculated within the same interrupt. After that, preparations for displaying the combination (relationship) / combination ratio are performed (step S90112), and the combination (relationship) / combination ratio related processing is completed.

If it is determined in step S90104 that it is not within business hours (step S90104; NO), and if it is determined in step S90105 that the door frame is not closed (step S90105; NO), the attacker is made per unit time in step S90106. When it is determined that the game balls have won more than a predetermined number of balls (step S90106; YES), preparation for displaying an abnormal count error is performed (step S90113).

Next, the combination (combination ratio) / combination ratio display control process will be described. FIG. 103 is a flowchart showing the procedure of the combination (combination ratio) / combination ratio display control processing. As shown in FIG. 103, in the combination (relationship) / combination display control process, it is determined whether or not the combination (relationship) / combination display is ready (step S90201). When it is determined that the combination (combination) / combination display preparation process has not been completed (step S90201; NO), it is determined whether or not the abnormality count error display preparation has been completed (step S90202).

As a result, when it is determined that the preparation for displaying the abnormal count error is completed (step S90202; YES), the abnormal count error is displayed (step S90203). The abnormal count error display can be appropriately performed. For example, "E" and "R" can be displayed in the upper two digits of the display monitor 9029, and "0" and "1" can be displayed in the lower two digits. Further, when displaying an abnormality count error, a predetermined abnormality count error display may be performed on another display device, for example, an image display device 905, a first special symbol display device 904A, a second special symbol display device 904B, or the like. Then, the game effect lamp 909 may be turned on, blinked, or the like in an appropriate pattern. Alternatively, a predetermined alarm sound may be generated from the speakers 908L and 908R. Alternatively, an appropriate display may be performed on the 7-segment display for displaying the error of the gaming machine provided on the main board 9011. Further, these may be combined.

When the abnormal count error is displayed, the combination (combination) / combination display control process is terminated. Further, in step S90202, when it is determined that it is not determined whether or not the abnormality count error display preparation is completed (step S90202; NO), it is determined whether or not the warning display preparation is completed (step S90204).

As a result, when it is determined that the warning display preparation is completed (step S90204; YES), the warning display is performed (step S90205). The warning display can be appropriately performed so as to be different from the display other than the warning display. For example, "E" and "R" can be displayed in the upper two digits of the display monitor 9029, and "0" and "6" can be displayed in the lower two digits. At this time, the display monitor 9029 may be blinked or may be displayed while changing the display color of the display monitor 9029 in order to indicate that the warning is given. Alternatively, the display may be performed by increasing the brightness of the display of the display monitor 9029. As described above, it is preferable that the warning display is made more conspicuous than other displays. After displaying the abnormal count error, the process may proceed to the determination of whether or not the warning preparation is completed (step S90204). Here, when it is determined that the warning preparation is completed (step S90204; YES)), the abnormality count error display and the warning display are performed. In order to display the abnormal count error and the warning on the display monitor 9029, for example, the abnormal count error display and the warning display may be repeated for several seconds, for example, at intervals of 5 seconds. Further, it may be displayed by another display method.

Further, when displaying a warning, a predetermined warning may be displayed on another display device, for example, an image display device 905, a first special symbol display device 904A, a second special symbol display device 904B, or the like, or a game. The effect lamp 909 may be turned on, blinked, or the like in an appropriate pattern. Alternatively, a predetermined warning sound may be generated from the speakers 908L and 908R. Alternatively, an appropriate display may be performed on the 7-segment display for displaying the error of the gaming machine provided on the main board 9011. Further, these may be combined.

When the warning is displayed, the combination (combination) / combination control process is terminated. Also, when it is determined in step S90204 that the warning display preparation is not completed (step S90204; NO), the combination (combination ratio) / combination ratio control process is also terminated.

Further, when it is determined that the combination (combination ratio) / combination ratio display preparation is completed (step S90201; YES), the display restriction confirmation process is performed (step S90206). In the display restriction confirmation process, a process of determining whether or not to restrict the display of the combination (relationship) / combination ratio is executed. FIG. 104 is a flowchart showing the procedure of the display restriction confirmation process.

As shown in FIG. 104, in the display restriction confirmation process, first, it is determined whether or not an error requiring door opening is detected (step S90301). The door opening error is an error that requires the gaming machine frame 903 to be opened forward from the outer frame in order to clear the error. Except for the abnormal count error, the errors that occur in the gaming machine 901 include, for example, various errors shown in FIG. 106. Each of these errors will be briefly described.

Error 1: Magnet error A magnet error (magnetic error) is an error caused by detecting a magnetic abnormality. When a magnet error is detected, for example, security information is output from the main board 9011 to the hall computer. The magnet error is canceled by turning off the power switch. Further, the security information is output until the power switch is turned off.
Error 2: Prize ball abnormality error The prize ball abnormality error is an error caused by detecting a predetermined number, for example, 2000 or more abnormal prize balls. An abnormal prize ball is, for example, a prize ball paid out when a game ball wins a prize in excess of the count number of the large prize opening. The prize ball abnormality error is canceled by turning off the power switch.
Error 3: Prize ball error The prize ball error is an error that occurs when the winning of the game ball to the winning opening is detected but the winning ball is not paid out. The prize ball error is an error that occurs when an abnormality in the payout switch is detected or an abnormality in the payout case is detected. The prize ball error is canceled by eliminating the error that has occurred, such as canceling the error.
Error 4: Ball out error The ball out error is an error that occurs when the ball out is detected and the game ball to be paid out is not on the back side of the game board 902 when the winning of the game ball to the winning opening is detected. The ball out error is an error that is canceled when the supply of the game ball is started.
Error 5: Radio wave abnormality error The radio wave abnormality error is an error caused by detecting a radio wave abnormality. The radio wave abnormality error is an error that is canceled by turning off the power switch.
Error 6: Main board communication failure error The main board communication failure error is an error caused by a communication failure between the main board 9011 and the payout control board. The main board communication failure error is an error that is canceled when the communication between the main board 9011 and the payout control board is restored.
Error 7: Card unit error The card unit error is an error caused by poor communication between the main board 9011 and the card unit. The card unit error is an error that is canceled when the communication between the main board 9011 and the card unit is restored.
Error 8: Full tank error A full tank error is an error that occurs when the plate (upper plate or lower plate) on which the game ball is to be paid out becomes full and the game ball cannot be paid out. The full tank error is cleared when the game ball is removed from the plate on which the game ball is paid out and the tank is no longer full.
Error 9: Character first start error The character first start error is an error that occurs when an abnormality is detected when the character is started for the first time. The first-time activation error of the accessory is canceled by pressing the operation button 9030.
Error 10: Unauthorized winning error An illegal winning error is an error that occurs when a game ball invades a large winning opening other than during operation. In the gaming machine 901, since the large winning opening is only the special variable winning ball device 907, an illegal winning error is not detected, and it is an error that occurs in a gaming machine having two or more large winning openings. When an illegal winning error is detected, for example, security information is output from the main board 9011 to the hall computer. The fraudulent winning error is cleared after a predetermined time, for example, 3 minutes has elapsed from the output of this security information.
Error 11: RTC-RAM abnormality error The RTC-RAM abnormality error is an error that occurs when the power switch is turned on, an RTC abnormality is detected, and a backup failure is detected. The RTC-RAM abnormality error is cleared after a predetermined time, for example, 60 seconds has elapsed from the occurrence.
Error 12: RAM clear error A RAM clear error is an error that causes a cold start when the power is turned on. When a RAM clear error is detected, for example, security information is output from the main board 9011 to the hall computer. The time for outputting the security information is, for example, 30 seconds. The RAM clear error is cleared after a predetermined time, for example, 31 seconds has elapsed since the error occurred.
Error 13: Vibration detection device error error The vibration detection device error error is an error detected when vibration occurs in the game machine. The vibration detection device abnormality error is canceled after a predetermined time, for example, 60 seconds has elapsed from the occurrence.
Error 14: Door opening error The door opening error is an error that occurs when the glass door frame 903a is opened from the gaming machine frame 903, or when the gaming machine frame 903 is opened from the outer frame. The door opening error is cleared when the opened glass door frame 903a or the gaming machine frame 903 is closed.

Of these errors, error 1 to error 7 are door opening-required errors that require opening from the outer frame of the gaming machine frame 903 in order to clear the error. On the other hand, errors 8 to 13 are errors that do not require opening of the gaming machine frame 903 from the outer frame in order to clear the error, and are not errors requiring door opening. Since the error 14 is a door opening error, it is not necessary to determine whether or not the gaming machine frame 903 needs to be opened.

Returning to the flow shown in FIG. 104, it is determined whether or not the door opening required error is detected, in other words, whether or not any of the door opening required errors of errors 1 to 7 is detected (step S90301). If an error requiring door opening is detected (step S90301; YES), it is determined whether or not the error requiring door opening is set (step S90302).

Here, if the door opening required error flag is not set (step S90302; NO), the door opening required error flag is set (step S90303). If the door opening error flag is set (step S90302; YES), the process proceeds to step S90304 as it is.

Next, it is determined whether or not the measurement timer is set (step S90304). The measurement timer is a timer that measures the time for which the limit of the combination (combination) combination ratio display is continued after the error requiring door opening is canceled. The measurement timer is a timer that measures the time in the set state, and does not measure the time in the reset state.

The time required to continue limiting the combination (combination) combination ratio display after the door opening required error is canceled can be, for example, the time required to cancel the door opening required error or a time somewhat longer than that time. Specifically, it may be 1 minute or 2 minutes, or 5 minutes or 10 minutes. Further, it may be a long time of 30 minutes or more. Further, the time required to cancel the door opening error may be uniformly fixed, or may be set according to the type of the door opening error. For example, for errors 1, 2, 5, etc. that are cleared by turning off the power switch, the time required to clear the door opening error needs to be shortened, and the error that has occurred needs to be resolved. May increase the time required to clear the door opening error.

If it is determined in step S90304 that the measurement timer is set (step S90304; YES), the measurement timer is reset (step S90305). If it is determined that the measurement timer is not set (step S90304; NO), the process proceeds to step S90306 as it is. When the door opening required error is detected, the state in which the measurement timer is set is the state in which the door opening required error is once canceled and then the door opening required error occurs again. Therefore, by resetting the measurement timer in step S90305, if the door opening required error is detected again during the time measurement by the measurement timer, the door opening required error detected later is cleared. The time can be measured with a measurement timer.

Subsequently, it is determined whether or not the door opening required error flag is set (step S90306). As a result, when the door opening required error flag is set (step S90306; YES), the combination (combination) combination ratio display restriction is executed (step S90307), and the display restriction confirmation process is terminated. If the door opening error flag is not set (step S90306; NO), the display restriction confirmation process is terminated as it is. As a restriction on the display of the combination (relationship) combination ratio, for example, the display of the combination (relationship) combination ratio is stopped.

If it is determined in step S90301 that the door opening required error has not been detected (step S90301; NO), it is determined whether or not the door opening required error flag is set (step S90308). As a result, if it is determined that the door opening required error flag is not set (step S90308; NO), the process proceeds to step S90306.

When it is determined in step S90308 that the door opening required error flag is set (step S90308; YES), the door opening required error is once detected and then the door opening required error is cleared. (Step S90309). Subsequently, it is determined whether or not the measurement timer is set (step S90310).

When the measurement timer is not set (step S90310; NO), it is immediately after the door opening error is cleared. In other words, it is in a state where this flow flows only after the error requiring door opening is cleared. At this time, the measurement time t (measurement timer = t) is set in the measurement timer (step S90311). The measurement time t corresponds to the time for continuing the limitation of the combination (combination) combination ratio display after the error requiring door opening is canceled.

Subsequently, it is determined whether or not the measurement timer is timed up (t = 0) (step S90312). Further, when the measurement timer is set in step S90310 (step S90310; YES), it is determined whether or not the measurement timer is timed up (t = 0) as it is (step S90312).

When passing through step S90311, the measurement timer is not 0 (time is not up) (step S90312; NO), so the process proceeds to step S90306 as it is. Further, after the measurement timer is set, it is determined in step S90310 that the measurement timer is set (step S90310; YES). In this case, the measurement time decreases with the loop of the flow, and it is determined that the measurement timer is timed up when the time t has elapsed since the measurement timer was set.

Subsequently, it is determined whether or not the measurement timer is timed up (t = 0) (step S90312). Here, when the measurement timer is timed up (step S90312; YES), the measurement timer and the door opening required error flag are cleared (step S90313). If the measurement timer has not timed up (step S90312; NO), the process proceeds to step S90306 as it is without clearing the measurement timer and the door opening error flag.

If the user does not go through step S90313, the door opening error flag is not cleared, so it is determined that the door opening error flag is set in step S90306 (step S90306: YES). Therefore, the combination (relationship) combination ratio display restriction is executed. Further, when passing through step S90313, since the door opening required error flag is cleared, it is determined in step S90306 that the door opening required error flag is not set (step S90306; NO). Therefore, the combination (combination) combination ratio display restriction is not executed. In this way, in the display restriction confirmation process, it is determined whether or not to execute the combination (combination) combination ratio display restriction. In summary, in the display restriction confirmation process, during detection of an error requiring door opening and until the measurement time (= time to continue limiting the display of the combination (combination) combination ratio) elapses after the error requiring door opening is canceled. At the time of, the combination (relationship) combination ratio display is limited, and at other times, the combination (relationship) combination ratio display is not restricted.

Returning to the flow shown in FIG. 103, it is determined whether or not to execute the display restriction based on the determination performed in the display restriction confirmation process shown in step S90206 (step S90207). As a result, when the display restriction is executed (step S90207; YES), the display restriction is executed (step S90208), and the display of the combination (combination) combination ratio is restricted. Then, the combination (combination ratio) / combination ratio display control process is terminated.

If the display restriction is not executed (step S90207; NO), the display switching control process is executed (step S90209), and the combination (combination) / combination display control process is terminated. The display switching control process is executed by the procedure shown in FIG. 105. FIG. 105 is a flowchart showing the procedure of the display switching control process. As shown in FIG. 105, in the display switching control process, first, it is determined whether or not the short-term combination (combination) display is performed on the display monitor 9029 (step S90401). When the short-term combination (relationship) display is performed (step S90401; YES), it is determined whether or not a predetermined time (30 seconds) has elapsed since the short-term combination (relationship) display was started. (Step S90402). The predetermined time here can be set to any time, for example, 30 seconds (30000 ms). Further, the predetermined time may be a time shorter than 30 seconds such as 5 seconds or 10 seconds, or a time longer than 30 seconds such as 1 minute (60 seconds) or 10 minutes (600 seconds).

Here, if it is determined that the predetermined time has not elapsed (step S90402; NO), the display switching control process is terminated. With the end of the display switching control, the short-term combination (relationship) display will continue. If it is determined that the predetermined time has elapsed (step S90402; YES), the short-term combination ratio display control is performed (step S90403), and the display switching control process is terminated. In the short-term combination ratio display control, the short-term combination ratio is displayed on the display monitor 9029, and a timer for measuring the elapsed time from the start of the short-term combination ratio display is set.

Further, in step S90401, when it is determined that the short-term combination (combination) display is not performed (step S90401; NO), it is determined whether or not the short-term combination ratio display is performed (step S90404). .. When the short-term combination ratio display is performed (step S90404; YES), it is determined whether or not a predetermined time (30 seconds) has elapsed since the short-term combination ratio display was started (step S90405).

Here, if it is determined that the predetermined time has not elapsed (step S90405; NO), the display switching control process is terminated. With the end of the display switching control, the short-term role ratio display will continue. If it is determined that the predetermined time has elapsed (step S90404; YES), the cumulative combination (combination) display control is performed (step S90406), and the display switching control process is terminated. In the cumulative combination (relationship) display control, the cumulative combination (relationship) is displayed on the display monitor 9029, and a timer is set to measure the elapsed time from the start of the cumulative combination (relationship) display. ..

Further, in step S90404, when it is determined that the short-term combination ratio display is not performed (step S90404; NO), it is determined whether or not the cumulative combination (relationship) display is performed (step S90407). .. When the cumulative combination (relationship) display is performed (step S90407; YES), it is determined whether or not a predetermined time (30 seconds) has elapsed since the cumulative combination (relationship) display was started. (Step S90408).

Here, if it is determined that the predetermined time has not elapsed (step S90408; NO), the display switching control process is terminated. With the end of the display switching control, the cumulative combination (combination) display will continue. If it is determined that the predetermined time has elapsed (step S90408; YES), the cumulative combination display control is performed (step S90409), and the display switching control process is terminated. In the cumulative combination ratio display control, the cumulative combination ratio is displayed on the display monitor 9029, and a timer for measuring the elapsed time from the start of the cumulative combination ratio display is set.

Further, in step S90407, when it is determined that the cumulative combination (relationship) display is not performed (step S90407; NO), it is determined whether or not the cumulative combination ratio display is performed (step S90410). .. When the cumulative combination ratio display is performed (step S90410; YES), it is determined whether or not a predetermined time (30 seconds) has elapsed since the cumulative combination display was started (step S90411).

Here, if it is determined that the predetermined time has not elapsed (step S90411; NO), the display switching control process is terminated. With the end of the display switching control, the cumulative combination (combination) display will continue. If it is determined that the predetermined time has elapsed (step S90411; YES), the short-term combination (combination) display control is performed (step S90412), and the display switching control process is terminated. In the short-term combination (relationship) display control, the short-term combination (relationship) is displayed on the display monitor 9029, and a timer is set to measure the elapsed time from the start of the short-term combination (relationship) display. .. In this way, the display switching control process is terminated.

In the short-term combination display control in step S90403 described above, the digit output process 2 by the second program is executed. Similarly, in the cumulative combination (relationship) display control in step S90406, the cumulative combination (relationship) display control in step S90409, and the short-term combination (relationship) display control in step S90412, the digit output process 2 by the second program is executed. Will be done.

In the above-mentioned gaming machine 901, the digit output process 1 and the digit output process 2 are shared, and the digit output process 1 and the digit output process 2 are executed in one cycle of the interrupt process in the CPU 90103. One cycle of interrupt processing in the CPU 90103 is about 4 ms, and the time required for the game progress control process (game control program) is, for example, about 2 ms.

FIG. 107 (A) is a time chart showing the relationship between the signal flow when the third interrupt process is executed and the display state of the monitor or the like, and FIG. 107 (B) is the signal flow when the first interrupt process is executed. It is a time chart showing the relationship between the display state of the monitor and the like. Here, a symbol (character) corresponding to "0" is displayed on the first special symbol display device 904A (SEG1) and "y" is displayed on the display monitor 9029 (SEG2) in the first cycle, and the first special symbol is displayed in the second cycle. Assume an example in which a symbol (character) corresponding to "1" is displayed on the symbol display device 904A and "6." is displayed on the display monitor 9029.

In the third interrupt process shown in FIG. 99 (C), the game progress process (game progress process) is performed between the digit output process 1 (special symbol display output program) and the digit output process 2 (combined role ratio display output program). The game control program) is executed. Therefore, a difference of about 2 ms occurs between the digit output process 1 (special symbol display output program) and the digit output process 2 (combination (combination) combination ratio display output program), which is shown in FIG. 107 (A). As such, there is a delay in the digit output (DG).

As a result, in the first cycle, the symbol corresponding to "0" is clearly displayed on the first special symbol display device 904A (SEG1), but the display monitor 9029 (SEG2) has a display problem. Specifically, the problem with the example of trying to display the character corresponding to "y" on the display monitor 9029 is as follows. As shown in FIG. 108, the first display unit 9029A to the fourth display unit 9029D in the display monitor 9029 include seven segments and eight LEDs arranged in the lower right dot. Assuming that these LEDs are the first segment SG1, the second segment SG2, the third segment SG3, the fourth segment SG4, the fifth segment SG5, the sixth segment SG6, the seventh segment SG7, and the dot SG8, the second segment SG2 and the second The 3rd segment SG3, the 4th segment SG4, the 6th segment SG6, and the 7th segment SG7 are displayed lightly. This problem occurs, for example, because the control for not turning on the display monitor 9029 in the cycle before the first cycle has penetrated to the first cycle. Regarding the characters corresponding to "6." displayed in the second cycle, the second segment SG2, the fourth segment SG4, the sixth segment SG6, and the seventh segment SG7 were clearly displayed, but the first segment was displayed. SG1, 5th segment SG5, and dot SG8 are displayed lightly. This problem also occurs, for example, because the control of lighting the LED of the character corresponding to "y" on the display monitor 9029 in the first cycle has penetrated to the second cycle.

On the other hand, in the first interrupt process shown in FIG. 107 (B), the digit output process 2 (combination (combination) combination display output program) is executed following the digit output process 1 (special symbol display output program). .. Therefore, there is almost no difference between the digit output process 1 (special symbol display output program) and the digit output process 2 (combination (combination) combination ratio display output program), and FIG. 107 (B) shows. As shown in, there is almost no delay in the digit output (DG).

As a result, in the first cycle, the symbol corresponding to "0" was clearly displayed on the first special symbol display device 904A (SEG1). Further, on the display monitor 9029 (SEG2), all the characters corresponding to "y" were clearly displayed. In this way, in the first interrupt process, it is possible to prevent a display defect on the LED of the display monitor 9029.

As described above, in the above-mentioned gaming machine 901, the short-term combination (relationship), short-term combination ratio, cumulative combination (relationship), and cumulative combination ratio are displayed by the display monitor 9029 provided on the main board 9011. .. Further, the display monitor 9029 is provided on the main board 9011 that controls the game so as not to interfere with the visibility. Therefore, it is possible to recognize what kind of adjustments have been made to the game nails (obstacle nails) and windmills provided on the game board.

Further, the display monitor 9029 is arranged in front of the main board 9011 when visually recognizing it. Therefore, it is possible to prevent the visibility of the display monitor 9029 from being hindered. Further, the main board 9011 is arranged at a position where the heat dissipation holes provided in the board case 90201 are not directly in front of the board case 9011. Therefore, the display monitor 9029 provided on the main board 9011 can be prevented from being obscured by the heat dissipation holes. Therefore, it is possible to prevent the visibility of the display monitor 9029 provided on the main board 9011 from being hindered.

Further, the main board 9011 is arranged at a position where it does not overlap with each peripheral board other than the main board 9011. Therefore, the display monitor 9029 provided on the main board 9011 can be prevented from being obscured by peripheral boards such as the effect control board 9012. Therefore, it is possible to prevent the visibility of the display monitor 9029 provided on the main board 9011 from being hindered.

In addition, the display monitor 9029 displays the winning combination (combination ratio) and the winning combination regarding the relationship between the prize balls paid out by the passage of the electric chew or the attacker and the prize balls paid out by the passage of the general winning opening. can do. Further, the display monitor 9029 can switch and display predetermined information such as short-term combination (relationship) and cumulative combination (relationship) at predetermined intervals. Therefore, it is not necessary to provide a display for displaying information about a plurality of periods, which can contribute to a reduction in the number of parts.

In addition, the display monitor 9029 displays the winning combination (continuous ratio) (short-term winning combination (continuous ratio)) and the winning ratio (short-term winning ratio) for each 6000 prize balls. It is possible to easily recognize the numerical value of the period corresponding to a certain unit, such as the number being 6000. The period corresponding to the predetermined unit may be a period other than the number of prize balls of 6000. For example, it may be a period in which the number of prize balls is 1000 or 10,000. Alternatively, time may be used as a unit instead of the number of prize balls. For example, the period corresponding to the predetermined unit may be an appropriate time such as 1 hour, 3 hours, or 10 hours.

In addition, the display monitor 9029 has a combination (relationship) (short-term combination (relationship)) and a combination (short-term combination ratio) for each prize ball number of 6000, as well as a cumulative combination (relationship). And the cumulative combination ratio is switched and displayed. Therefore, it is possible to easily compare the short-term combination (relationship) or short-term combination ratio with the cumulative combination (relationship) or cumulative combination ratio for each predetermined unit. Further, the display monitor 9029 is provided on the main board 9011 housed in the crimped board case. Therefore, it is possible to contribute to the prevention of fraud such as falsifying the display on the display monitor 9029.

Further, the gaming machine 901 is provided with a detection means for detecting and detecting fraud that makes it impossible to display appropriate predetermined information. The fraud here includes, for example, counting the number of prize balls outside the business hours of the game hall, counting the number of prize balls while the door frame is open, and winning a game ball exceeding the allowable number of winnings. The gaming machine 901 operates during the business hours of the game hall, and it is highly probable that the counting of prize balls during the hours other than the business hours is a fraudulent act. Further, the gaming machine 901 plays a game with the door frame closed, and it is highly probable that the counting of prize balls while the door frame is open is a fraudulent act.

Further, during the game of the gaming machine 901, the gaming ball cannot be launched beyond a certain speed. For example, the maximum number of launches of a game ball is 100 per minute. Therefore, the upper limit of winning a game ball in one minute is almost 100. Therefore, for example, when 100 or more game balls are won in 1 minute or 20 or more in 12 seconds, the probability of cheating is extremely high.

In the game machine 901, in order to detect fraud, a prize ball when the game ball is not closed during business hours, when the glass door frame 903a is not closed, or when the attacker wins more than a predetermined number of game balls per unit time. The addition of numbers is excluded. Therefore, it is possible to suppress falsification of information such as role ratios and role ratios due to these frauds. In addition, instead of the number of prize balls when the attacker has won more than a predetermined number of game balls per unit time, fraud may be detected based on the number of payout balls per unit time.

Further, in the above-mentioned gaming machine 901, when the 0th storage area of the active buffer included in the RAM 90102 reaches 6000, which is a predetermined capacity, the numerical value stored in the 10th storage area of the ring buffer is erased. Therefore, it is possible to prevent the ring buffer from running out of capacity.

Further, the ring buffer is provided with a first storage area to a tenth storage area, and when the data in the 0th storage area of the active buffer moves to the first storage area of the ring buffer, the data in the tenth storage area is stored. It will be erased. Therefore, since the data to be erased is set for each predetermined unit, it is possible to prevent the ring buffer from running out of capacity. In addition, it is possible to increase the amount of data that remains without being erased.

When the data in the 0th storage area of the active buffer is moved to the 1st storage area of the ring buffer, the data in the 9th storage area in the ring buffer is moved to the 10th storage area. At this time, the data in the tenth storage area may be erased and the data in the ninth storage area may be moved, or the data in the tenth storage area may be overwritten with the data in the ninth storage area. Even in this case, it is possible to prevent the ring buffer from running out of capacity.

When the data in the 0th storage area of the active buffer is moved to the 1st storage area of the ring buffer, the data in the 10th storage area, which is a part of the storage area thereof, is erased in the ring buffer. Therefore, since the amount of data to be erased can be reduced, it is possible to prevent a shortage of the capacity of the ring buffer, and it is possible to calculate the combination (combination ratio) and the combination ratio with a large amount of data.

When erasing the data in the ring buffer, not only a part of the data in the tenth storage area is erased, but also all the data in the first storage area to the tenth storage area is erased. good. In this case, it is possible to more preferably prevent the capacity shortage of the ring buffer. Further, a part or all of the data in the ring buffer may be erased according to a predetermined condition. For example, at the beginning of business hours, all the data in the ring buffer may be erased, and then a part of the data in the ring buffer may be erased.

Further, in the above example, the movement of data in the ring buffer is described, but the data other than the ring buffer, for example, the storage area for storing the total cumulative total is also erased in part or all in the same manner. You may.

Further, in the above-mentioned gaming machine 901, each data of the short-term combination (relationship), the short-term combination ratio, the cumulative combination (relationship), and the cumulative combination ratio is displayed every 30 seconds. Therefore, each data can be easily compared. The cycle for displaying each data is not 30 seconds, but may be an appropriate cycle. For example, it may be every 10 seconds or every minute. Alternatively, it may be hourly. In addition, the displayed data may be data other than short-term combination (relationship), short-term combination ratio, cumulative combination (relationship), and cumulative combination ratio data, or may be only a part of these data. good.

In addition, when displaying each data of short-term combination (relationship), short-term combination ratio, cumulative combination (relationship), and cumulative combination ratio every 30 seconds, the short-term combination (relationship) is not included. The display is different from the data in. Specifically, short-term roles (relationships) are displayed in red, and other data are displayed in green. Therefore, it is possible to recognize that new data is displayed from the short-term role ream (relationship ratio).

Further, in the above-mentioned gaming machine 901, a warning display is displayed when an abnormal operation is performed. Specifically, when the clear switch is operated, a warning is displayed as an abnormal operation. The clear switch is a so-called emergency switch that is operated when a failure occurs in the combination (combination ratio) or the calculation of the combination ratio. When this switch is operated, the data of the combination (combination) and the combination ratio can be falsified, so that the operation of the clear switch is detected as an abnormal operation. In the gaming machine 901, since this abnormal operation can be warned by a warning display, fraud such as falsification of data can be suppressed.

Further, in the above-mentioned gaming machine 901, the first start port switch 9022A, the second start port switch 9022B, the count switch 9023, the first general winning opening switch 9024A, the second general winning opening switch 9024B, and the third general winning opening switch 9024C. , The winning combination (combination ratio) and the winning combination ratio are calculated based on the number of prize balls obtained based on the detection signal from the fourth general winning opening switch 9024D. For example, using a sensor individually provided for the attacker (count switch 9023) and a sensor provided after the discharge passages for discharging the game medium winning the attacker and the gaming medium winning the electric chew merge. Based on the detection result, when the counter of the number of winning balls and the counter of the number of consecutive winning balls are totaled to calculate the winning combination (combination ratio) and the winning combination, it is specified from which winning opening. It is difficult to do so, and there is a risk that the calculation of the winning combination and the winning combination (relationship) will become complicated. In this regard, the first starting port switch 9022A, the second starting port switch 9022B, the count switch 9023, the first general winning port switch 9024A, the second general winning port switch 9024B, the third general winning port switch 9024C, and the fourth general winning port switch 9024C. By detecting that the game medium has won a prize with the switch 9024D and calculating the winning combination (relationship ratio) and the winning combination ratio based on the number of prize balls obtained from the detection result, based on the winning of each winning opening. You can judge the number of prize balls. Therefore, the combination (combination ratio) and the combination ratio can be easily calculated and can be calculated accurately.

Further, when an error requiring door opening occurs, it is necessary to open the gaming machine frame 903 from the outer frame in order to clear the error. When the gaming machine frame 903 is opened, the main board 9011 provided on the gaming machine frame 903 can be visually recognized from the outside of the gaming machine 901. Therefore, the display monitor 9029 provided on the main board 9011 can be visually recognized by, for example, a player located outside the gaming machine 901.

Here, in the above-mentioned gaming machine 901, when an error requiring door opening occurs, the display of the combination (combination) combination ratio to the display monitor 9029 is restricted. Therefore, even if an error requiring door opening occurs and the display monitor 9029 can be visually recognized from the outside of the gaming machine 901, it is possible to prevent the player from seeing the display of the combination (combination) combination ratio.

Further, the restriction on the display of the combination (combination) combination ratio with respect to the display monitor 9029 is executed when an error requiring door opening occurs. Therefore, due to the occurrence of an error requiring door opening, the gaming machine frame 903 needs to be opened, so that even when the player can see the display monitor 9029 from the outside of the gaming machine 901, the player can see it. It is possible to prevent the display of the role ratio (relationship ratio) from being seen.

In the above-mentioned game machine 901, when a door opening required error occurs, the display of the combination (combination) combination ratio is restricted to the display monitor 9029, but after the door opening required error occurs, the game is played. When the machine frame 903 is opened, the restriction of the display of the combination (combination) combination ratio with respect to the display monitor 9029 may be executed. Even if the restriction on the display of the combination (combination) combination ratio to the display monitor 9029 is executed when the frame 903 for the gaming machine is opened after the error requiring door opening occurs, the combination (relationship) is applied to the player. Ratio) It is possible to prevent the display of the role ratio from being seen.

Further, the limitation of the display of the combination (combination) combination ratio on the display monitor 9029 is measured by a measurement timer for a predetermined time after the door opening error is canceled, specifically, after the door opening error is canceled. It is executed until the duration is elapsed. Therefore, immediately after the door opening required error is cleared, the gaming machine frame 903 is in a state of being opened even though the door opening required error is cleared. At this time, the player or the like can visually recognize the display monitor 9029 from the outside of the gaming machine 901. In this regard, by continuing to limit the combination (combination) combination ratio display until the duration measured by the measurement timer elapses after the door opening error is cleared, the player can be seen from the outside of the gaming machine 901. It is possible to prevent the display of the role ratio (relationship ratio) from being seen.

Further, in the above-mentioned gaming machine 901, the duration is measured after the door opening required error is cleared, but after the door opening required error is cleared, the duration is set after the gaming machine frame 903 is closed. You may measure. In this case, the duration may be set uniformly regardless of the type of the door opening required error, or may be set according to the type of the door opening required error. Further, the time may be shorter than the duration measured after the door opening error is cleared.

The above error requiring door opening is an example, and may be another embodiment. For example, if the error clearing method is different and the error can be cleared without opening the gaming machine frame 903 by the error 1 to the error 7, these may be regarded as an error other than the door opening required error. On the contrary, if the errors 8 to 13 are errors in which the error cannot be cleared unless the gaming machine frame 903 is opened, these may be regarded as door opening required errors. Further, an error other than the error shown in FIG. 106, for example, an error that the game ball cannot be launched from the hitting ball launching device, an error that the ball lending cannot be performed, an error that the game board moves, and the like can be released by the release procedure and the like. It may be an error required. Further, even if it is necessary to open the gaming machine frame 903 in order to clear the error, an error in which the detection of the error is often found outside the business hours of the amusement park, for example, a display abnormality of the image display device 905. In the case of an error that normally requires repair outside business hours, such as an error such as an error, a ROM check screen error, or an error that the electric chew or the big prize opening does not open, it may be treated as an error other than the door opening required error.

Further, in the above-mentioned gaming machine 901, the display restriction mode is canceled, but the display restriction may be another mode. For example, the display of the combination (combination) combination ratio may be made thinner or smaller, or the display monitor 9029 may display a display different from the combination (relationship) combination ratio. As the display different from the combination (combination ratio) combination ratio, an error display may be performed, or for example, a display such as turning on all the segments may be performed.

In the above-mentioned gaming machine 901, since the main board 9011 and the display monitor 9029 provided on the main board 9011 are provided on the back surface side of the gaming machine frame 903, when the gaming machine frame 903 is opened, the combination ( Although the display of the combination ratio is restricted, other aspects may be used. For example, the main board 9011 may be provided on the surface of the gaming board 902 at a position where the glass door frame 903a cannot be visually recognized from the outside of the gaming machine 901 when the glass door frame 903a is closed. In this case, the display monitor 9029 may also be provided on the surface of the gaming board 902 at a position where the glass door frame 903a cannot be visually recognized from the outside of the gaming machine 901 when the glass door frame 903a is closed. In the gaming machine of this aspect, instead of limiting the display of the combination (combination) combination ratio when the gaming machine frame 903 is opened, the combination (combination) when the glass door frame 903a is opened. The display of the combination ratio) combination ratio may be restricted. Further, regarding the continuation of the restriction on the display of the combination (combination) combination ratio, the opening / closing of the glass door frame 903a may be a condition instead of the opening / closing of the gaming machine frame 903. ..

Further, in the above-mentioned game machine 901, the CPU 90103 stores the special symbol display output program and the game control program in the used area program area in the built-in ROM area, and the combination (combination) combination display output program in the non-used area program area. And the role ratio display program is stored. In this way, the special symbol display output program and the game control program, and the combination (relationship) combination display output program and the combination (relationship) combination ratio display program are stored in different areas. It is possible to facilitate the test of the program related to the game. Further, in the CPU 90103, the digit output process 1 and the digit output process 2 are shared and executed by one interrupt process. Therefore, it is possible to simplify the digit output processing.

Further, in order to make the digit output process 1 and the digit output process 2 common, the digit output process 1 and the digit output process 2 are continuously executed. Specifically, as shown in FIG. 99 (A), in the first interrupt processing, the special symbol display output program → the combination (combination) combination display output program → the game control program → the combination (combination) combination ratio. The programs are executed in the order of the calculation program. Further, in the second interrupt processing, as shown in FIG. 99 (A), the game control program → the special symbol display output program → the combination (relationship) combination display output program → the combination (relationship) combination ratio calculation program. The programs are executed in the order of. Therefore, in both the first interrupt processing and the second interrupt processing, between the special symbol display output program (first interrupt processing) and the combination (combination) combination ratio display output program (second interrupt processing). The game control program (game progress control processing) and the combination (relationship) combination ratio calculation program (combination (relationship) combination ratio calculation processing) are not sandwiched. Therefore, since it is possible to prevent the digit output process 2 and the like from being delayed, the LED display defects in the first special symbol display device 904A, the second special symbol display device 904B, the normal symbol display 9020, and the display monitor 9029 can be prevented. It can be prevented, and patterns and characters can be clearly displayed.

When the digit output process 1 and the digit output process 2 are shared, the execution procedure of the first interrupt process shown in FIG. 99 (A) or the second interrupt process shown in FIG. 99 (B) is included. Just do it. For example, any program may be executed before or after the execution order of the first interrupt processing or the second interrupt processing.

Further, in the first interrupt processing and the second interrupt processing, the combination (combination) combination ratio calculation program is executed after the game control program is executed. For this reason, before calculating the combination (combination ratio) combination ratio, processing related to the main part of the game such as a lottery for the transition to the big hit game state is executed. Therefore, the delay of the game can be suppressed.

Further, in the first interrupt processing and the second interrupt processing, the combination (combination) combination display output program is executed after the special symbol display output program is executed. In addition, after executing the special symbol display output program, before the combination (relationship) combination display output program is executed, a specific program such as a game control program or a combination (relationship) combination calculation program is executed. Is not running. Therefore, it is possible to prevent the LED display from being defective in the display monitor 9029.

Further, the special symbol display output program and the game control program stored in the used area are called by using "CALLF" having a short tone. On the other hand, the call using "CALLmn" is performed for the combination (combination) combination ratio display output program and the combination (combination) combination ratio calculation program stored in the unused area, and the tone is changed. No short "CALLF" call is made. Therefore, the progress of the game can be smoothly performed.

Further, the combination (relationship) combination ratio displayed on the display monitor 9029 is determined by the combination (relationship) combination ratio calculation process in the unused area. The combination (relationship) combination ratio calculation program and the combination (relationship) combination ratio display output program are programs that are not related to the progress of the game. Since "CALLmn", which has a relatively long tone, is used for a program that is not related to the progress of the game, waste in the processing of the program can be reduced.

Further, in the non-used area, the call is made by "CALLmn", which has a relatively long tone, so that in the used area, the call can be made by "CALLF", which has a short tone. Therefore, it is possible to use a short-toned and highly versatile instruction such as "CALLF" for a program related to game control executed in the used area.

Further, since the CPU 90103 includes a Q register and calls the program by the Q register, the program can be called without specifying the upper address. However, since the upper address is set as a fixed value, for example, even if it can be used in the used area program area, it may not be used in the non-used area program area, and the versatility may be lowered.

In this regard, the upper address of the used area program area in the CPU 90103 is "00", the upper address of the non-used area program area is "01", and the upper address of the non-used area program area is the upper address of the used area program area. It is different from the address. Further, when calling the program stored in the used area program area, the Q register is set to the fixed value "00". Therefore, since the Q register can be used when calling the program stored in the used area program area, the program stored in the used area program area can be called only by specifying a lower address. Further, since the upper address of the unused area program area is different from the upper address of the used area program area, the call of the program stored in the unused area program area by the Q register is prevented. Further, when calling the program stored in the unused area program area, the Q register is set to the fixed value "01". Therefore, since the Q register can be used even in the unused area program area, the Q register can be used also in the unused area program area while ensuring the versatility of the Q register.

Further, in the above-mentioned gaming machine 901, the display monitor 9029 is arranged in the center of the back surface side of the main board 9011 in front of the main board 9011 when visually recognizing it, but the display monitor is easy to see from an oblique direction. May be arranged. Hereinafter, a plurality of examples will be specifically described with respect to a mode in which the display monitor is arranged so as to be easily visible from an oblique direction (hereinafter referred to as “display monitor arrangement mode”).

The first display monitor arrangement mode is referred to as a first display monitor arrangement mode, the second display monitor arrangement mode is referred to as a second display monitor arrangement mode, and the nth display monitor arrangement mode is referred to as an nth display monitor arrangement mode. A main board 9011 similar to the main board 9011 shown in FIG. 92 (A) is used in each display monitor arrangement mode, and the main boards 9011 all have the same structure. Further, as in the example shown in FIG. 92 (A), the main substrate 9011 is housed in the substrate case 90202. Further, in the description of the first display monitor arrangement mode to the ninth display monitor arrangement mode, the left and right sides are based on the direction in which the main board 9011 is viewed from the front. Therefore, the side where the gaming machine frame 903 opens from the outer frame is on the left side.

[First display monitor arrangement mode]
FIG. 109 is a perspective view of the main board in which the display monitor is arranged in the first display monitor arrangement mode. As shown in FIG. 109, in the first display monitor arrangement mode, the base member 90129A is provided on the back surface side of the main board 9011, and the display monitor 90130A is provided on the base member 90129A. The display monitor 90130A is housed in the substrate case 90202 together with the base member 90129A and the main substrate 9011.

The base member 90129A has a triangular column whose bottom surface is a right triangle, and is arranged so that its height direction is along the vertical direction. The side surface of the triangular prism including one side forming the right-angled portion of the right triangle on the bottom surface of the triangular prism having the shape formed by the base member 90129A is overlapped with the back surface of the main substrate 9011, and the other side forming the right-angled portion in the right triangle. The side surface of the triangular prism including one side extends in a direction perpendicular to the back surface of the main substrate 9011. The side surface of the triangular prism (hereinafter referred to as "inclined surface") including the side facing the right-angled portion in the right triangle is arranged so as to be inclined with respect to the back surface of the main substrate 9011.

The display monitor 90130A is provided on an inclined surface of the base member 90129A. The orientation of the display monitor 90130A is inclined with respect to the back surface of the main board 9011. FIG. 110 is a perspective view showing a state in which the gaming machine frame to which the main board is attached is open from the outer frame. As shown in FIG. 110, in the display monitor 90130A, when the gaming machine frame 903 to which the main board 9011 is attached is opened from the outer frame 903A, the display monitor 90130A is between the gaming machine frame 903 and the outer frame. It is arranged so that it faces the front when viewed from the open part.

When the display monitor 90130A arranged in the first display monitor arrangement mode is opened from the outer frame, the display monitor 90130A faces the front when viewed from the opening portion between the gaming machine frame 903 and the outer frame. Is located in. For this reason, when the clerk or the like confirms the role-relation (combination) role ratio, the clerk or the like does not open the gaming machine frame 903 significantly, but only slightly opens the role-relation (combination) role. You can check the ratio. Therefore, the work of confirming the combination (combination ratio) combination ratio can be easily performed.

[Second display monitor arrangement mode]
FIG. 111A is a perspective view of the main board on which the display monitor is arranged in the second display monitor arrangement mode. As shown in FIG. 111A, in the second display monitor arrangement mode, the base member 90129B is provided on the back surface side of the main board 9011, and the display monitor 90130B is provided on the base member 90129B. The display monitor 90130B is housed in the substrate case 90202 together with the base member 90129B and the main substrate 9011.

As shown in FIG. 91, the main board 9011 is attached to the back surface of the gaming board 902 (see FIG. 43) provided in the gaming machine frame 903. The base member 90129B has a plate shape and is erected on the back surface of the main substrate 9011. Further, the main substrate 9011 and the base member 90129B are substantially orthogonal to each other. The display monitor 90130B is provided on the side surface of the base member 90129B. Therefore, in the display monitor 90130B, the surface of the upright portion erected on the main board 9011 provided in the gaming machine frame 903 on the open portion side of the door frame faces the open portion of the door frame. Have been placed. Further, the display monitor 90130B is arranged at a position protruding from the back surface of the main board 9011.

The display monitor 90130B arranged in the second display monitor arrangement mode is arranged at a position protruding from the back surface of the main board 9011 so as to face a direction orthogonal to the back surface of the main board 9011. Further, the main board 9011 is attached to the back surface of the gaming board 902 provided in the gaming machine frame 903. For this reason, when the clerk or the like confirms the role-relation (combination) role ratio, the clerk or the like does not open the gaming machine frame 903 significantly, but only slightly opens the role-relation (combination) role. You can check the ratio. Therefore, the work of confirming the combination (combination ratio) combination ratio can be easily performed.

In the first and second display monitor arrangement modes, the base members 90129A and 90129B are housed in the substrate case 90202, but even if the base members 90129A and 90129B are formed so as to project to the outside of the substrate case 90202. good.

[Third display monitor arrangement mode]
FIG. 111B is a perspective view of the main board on which the display monitor is arranged in the third display monitor arrangement mode. As shown in FIG. 111B, in the third display monitor arrangement mode, the embedded inclined surface 9011K is formed on the back surface of the main substrate 9011. The buried inclined surface 9011K is formed so as to be inclined with respect to the back surface of the main substrate 9011.

The buried inclined surface 9011K is formed as a part of the printed base material in the main substrate 9011. A display monitor 90130C is provided on the buried inclined surface 9011K of the main board 9011. Since the display monitor 90130C is provided on the buried inclined surface 9011K, when the gaming machine frame 903 is opened from the outer frame, the front surface is viewed from the opening portion between the gaming machine frame 903 and the outer frame. It is arranged so that it faces. Further, the main board 9011 and the display monitor 90130C are housed in the case 90202.

When the display monitor 90130C arranged in the third display monitor arrangement mode is opened from the outer frame, the display monitor 90130C faces the front when viewed from the opening portion between the gaming machine frame 903 and the outer frame. Is located in. For this reason, when the clerk or the like confirms the role-relation (combination) role ratio, the clerk or the like does not open the gaming machine frame 903 significantly, but only slightly opens the role-relation (combination) role. You can check the ratio. Therefore, the work of confirming the combination (combination ratio) combination ratio can be easily performed.

[4th display monitor arrangement mode]
FIG. 112A is a perspective view of the main board on which the display monitor is arranged in the fourth display monitor arrangement mode. As shown in FIG. 112A, in the fourth display monitor arrangement mode, four base members 90129D from the first base member 90129D to the fourth base member 90129D4 are provided on the back surface of the main board 9011. A first display monitor 90130D1 to a fourth display monitor 90130D4 are provided on each of the first base member 90129D1 to the fourth base member 90129D4. The display monitor 90130D is formed by the first display monitor 90130D1 to the fourth display monitor 90130D4. The display monitor 90130D is housed in the substrate case 90202 together with the base member 90129 and the main substrate 9011.

The first base member 90129D1 to the fourth base member 90129D4 all have a common shape. This shape will be described with reference to the first base member 90129D1. The first base member 90129D1 has a triangular column whose bottom surface is a right triangle. The first base member 90129D1 has the same shape as the base member 90129A in the first display monitor arrangement mode, but is smaller than the base member 90129A in the first display monitor arrangement mode.

Specifically, the inclined surface of the base member 90129A in the first display monitor arrangement mode has the same size as the size of the four 7 segments and the dot at the lower right (see FIG. 92 (A)). On the other hand, the inclined surface of the first base member 90129D1 has the same size as the size of one 7-segment and the dot on the lower right. The first display monitor 90130D1 provided on the inclined surface of the first base member 90129D1 can display one 7 segment and a dot at the lower right.

The first base member 90129D1 is arranged at a position slightly to the left of the substantially center position in the height direction of the back surface of the main substrate 9011. The second base member 90129D2 is arranged on the right side of the first base member 90129D1, and the third base member 90129D3 is on the right side opposite to the left side where the first base member 90129D1 is arranged in the second base member 90129D2. Is located in. The fourth base member 90129D4 is arranged on the right side opposite to the left side where the second base member 90129D2 is arranged in the third base member 90129D3. In this way, the first base member 90129D1 to the fourth base member 90129D4 are arranged side by side along the substantially horizontal direction.

A second display monitor 90130D2 is provided on the inclined surface of the second base member 90129D2. Similarly, a third display monitor 90130D3 and a fourth display monitor 90130D4 are provided on the inclined surfaces of the third base member 90129D3 and the fourth base member 90129D4. The first display monitor 90130D1 provided on the first base member 90129D1 displays the content corresponding to the first display unit 9029A of the display monitor 9029 shown in FIG. 92 (A).

The second display monitor 90130D2 provided on the second base member 90129D2 displays the content corresponding to the second display unit 9029B of the display monitor 9029 shown in FIG. 92 (A). The third display monitor 90130D3 provided on the third base member 90129D3 displays the content corresponding to the third display unit 9029C of the display monitor 9029 shown in FIG. 92 (A). The fourth display monitor 90130D4 provided on the fourth base member 90129D4 displays the content corresponding to the fourth display unit 9029D of the display monitor 9029 shown in FIG. 92 (A).

When the display monitor 90130D arranged in the fourth display monitor arrangement mode is opened from the outer frame, the display monitor 90130D faces the front when viewed from the opening portion between the gaming machine frame 903 and the outer frame. Is located in. For this reason, when the clerk or the like confirms the role-relation (combination) role ratio, the clerk or the like does not open the gaming machine frame 903 significantly, but only slightly opens the role-relation (combination) role. You can check the ratio. Therefore, the work of confirming the combination (combination ratio) combination ratio can be easily performed.

[Fifth display monitor arrangement mode]
FIG. 112B is a perspective view of the main board on which the display monitor is arranged in the fifth display monitor arrangement mode. As shown in FIG. 112B, in the fifth display monitor arrangement mode, four base members 90129E from the first base member 90129E to the fourth base member 90129E4 are provided on the back surface of the main board 9011. A first display monitor 90130E1 to a fourth display monitor 90130E4 are provided on each of the first base members 90129E1 to the fourth base member 90129E4. The display monitor 90130E is formed by the first display monitor 90130E1 to the fourth display monitor 90130E4. The display monitor 90130E is housed in the substrate case 90202 together with the base member 90129 and the main substrate 9011.

The first base member 90129E1 to the fourth base member 90129E4 all have a shape common to the first base member 90129D1 to the fourth base member 90129D4 in the fourth display monitor arrangement mode. Further, the first display monitors 90130E1 to the fourth display monitors 90130E4 are the first base members in the same manner as the first display monitors 90130D1 to the fourth display monitors 90130D4 provided in the first base members 90129D1 to the fourth base members 90129D4. It is provided in each of 90129E1 to 4th base member 90129E4.

The first base member 90129E1 is arranged above the back surface of the main substrate 9011 at a substantially central position in the width direction. The second base member 90129E2 is arranged below the first base member 90129E1, and the third base member 90129E3 is arranged below the second base member 90129E2. The fourth base member 90129E4 is arranged below the third base member 90129E3. In this way, the first base member 90129E1 to the fourth base member 90129E4 are arranged side by side along the substantially vertical direction. In this way, the first base member 90129E1 to the fourth base member 90129E4 are arranged in the vertical direction.

A first display monitor 90130E1 is provided on an inclined surface of the first base member 90129E1. Similarly, a second display monitor 90130E2, a third display monitor 90130E3, and a fourth display monitor 90130E4 are provided on the inclined surfaces of the second base member 90129E2, the third base member 90129E3, and the fourth base member 90129E4, respectively. There is. The first display monitors 90130E1 to the fourth display monitors 90130E4 provided on the first base member 90129E1 to the fourth base member 90129E4 have first display units 9029A to fourth display units of the display monitor 9029 shown in FIG. 92 (A). The contents corresponding to 9029D are displayed respectively. Further, since the first base member 90129E1 to the fourth base member 90129E4 are arranged in the vertical direction, the first display monitor 90130E1 to the fourth display monitor 90130E4 are also arranged in the vertical direction. Therefore, the four-digit displays on the first display monitors 90130E1 to the fourth display monitors 90130E4 are arranged side by side in the vertical direction. The four-digit display on the first display monitor 90130E1 to the fourth display monitor 90130E4 may be arranged in the horizontal direction.

When the display monitor 90130E arranged in the fifth display monitor arrangement mode is opened from the outer frame, the display monitor 90130E faces the front when viewed from the opening portion between the gaming machine frame 903 and the outer frame. Is located in. For this reason, when the clerk or the like confirms the role-relation (combination) role ratio, the clerk or the like does not open the gaming machine frame 903 significantly, but only slightly opens the role-relation (combination) role. You can check the ratio. Therefore, the work of confirming the combination (combination ratio) combination ratio can be easily performed.

[6th display monitor arrangement mode]
FIG. 113 (A) is a perspective view of the main board in which the display monitor is arranged in the sixth display monitor arrangement mode. As shown in FIG. 113A, in the sixth display monitor arrangement mode, the base member 90129F is provided on the upper surface of the substrate case 90202 accommodating the main board 9011, and the display monitor 90130F is provided on the upper surface of the base member 90129F. There is. The four-digit displays on the display monitor 90130F are arranged side by side in the vertical direction. The four-digit display on the display monitor 90130F may be arranged in the horizontal direction.

The base member 90129F has a horizontally long substantially rectangular parallelepiped shape. Further, the display monitor 90130F provided on the upper surface of the base member 90129F has four 7 segments and a dot at the lower right (see FIG. 92 (A)). The board case 90202 includes a board case main body 90202A and a lid body 90202B. The base member 90129F is provided on the board case 90202 so as to straddle the board case main body 90202A and the lid body 90202B of the board case 90202.

The display monitor 90130F arranged in the sixth display monitor arrangement mode is provided on the upper surface of the substrate case 90202 and is arranged along the left-right direction. Therefore, when the gaming machine frame 903 is opened from the outer frame, the entire gaming machine frame 903 can be visually recognized from the outside of the gaming machine 901 only by slightly opening the gaming machine frame 903. Therefore, when the clerk or the like confirms the role-relationship (combination) role ratio, the clerk or the like does not open the gaming machine frame 903 significantly, but only slightly opens it. Can be confirmed. Therefore, it is possible to easily perform the work of confirming the combination (combination ratio) combination ratio.

[7th display monitor arrangement mode]
FIG. 113B is a perspective view of the main board on which the display monitor is arranged in the seventh display monitor arrangement mode. As shown in FIG. 113B, in the seventh display monitor arrangement mode, the base member 90129G is provided on the upper surface of the substrate case 90202 accommodating the main board 9011, and the display monitor 90130G is provided on the upper surface of the base member 90129G. There is. The four-digit display on the display monitor 90130G is arranged side by side in the vertical direction. The four-digit display on the display monitor 90130G may be arranged in the horizontal direction. The base member 90129G is provided on the board case 90202 so as to straddle the board case main body 90202A and the lid body 90202B of the board case 90202, similarly to the base member 90129F in the sixth display monitor arrangement mode.

The base member 90129G has a triangular columnar shape whose bottom surface forms a right triangle, and is arranged so that its height direction is along the depth direction of the gaming machine 901. The right-angled portion of the right-angled triangle forming the bottom surface of the triangular prism is arranged on the right side opposite to the left side on which the gaming machine frame 903 opens. Therefore, the upper surface of the base member 90129G is an inclined surface that descends from the opposite side (right side) of the opening side (left side) of the gaming machine frame 903 toward the opening side of the gaming machine frame 903. A display monitor 90130G is provided on this inclined surface.

The display monitor 90130G arranged in the seventh display monitor arrangement mode is provided on the upper surface of the substrate case 90202 and is arranged along the left-right direction. Therefore, when the gaming machine frame 903 is opened from the outer frame, the entire gaming machine frame 903 can be visually recognized from the outside of the gaming machine 901 only by slightly opening the gaming machine frame 903. Therefore, when the clerk or the like confirms the role-relationship (combination) role ratio, the clerk or the like does not open the gaming machine frame 903 significantly, but only slightly opens it. Can be confirmed. Therefore, it is possible to easily perform the work of confirming the combination (combination ratio) combination ratio.

Further, the upper surface of the base member 90129G provided with the display monitor 90130G arranged in the seventh display monitor arrangement mode faces the side where the gaming machine frame 903 opens from the side opposite to the side where the gaming machine frame 903 opens. It is an inclined surface that descends. Therefore, when the display monitor 90130G is viewed from the side where the gaming machine frame 903 is opened, the display monitor 90130G can be easily seen. Therefore, it is possible to more easily perform the work of confirming the combination (combination ratio) combination ratio.

[8th display monitor arrangement mode]
FIG. 114 (A) is a perspective view of the main board in which the display monitor is arranged in the eighth display monitor arrangement mode. As shown in FIG. 114 (A), in the eighth display monitor arrangement mode, the base member 90129H is provided on the left side surface of the substrate case 90202 accommodating the main board 9011, and the display monitor 90130H is provided on the left side surface of the base member 90129H. Has been done. The four-digit display on the display monitor 90130H is arranged side by side in the vertical direction. The four-digit display on the display monitor 90130H may be arranged in the horizontal direction.

The base member 90129H has a horizontally long substantially rectangular parallelepiped shape. Further, the display monitor 90130H provided on the left side surface of the base member 90129H includes four 7 segments and a dot at the lower right (see FIG. 92 (A)). The board case 90202 includes a board case main body 90202A and a lid body 90202B. The base member 90129H is provided on the board case 90202 so as to straddle the board case main body 90202A and the lid body 90202B of the board case 90202.

The display monitor 90130H arranged in the eighth display monitor arrangement mode is provided on the left side surface of the substrate case 90202 and is arranged along the vertical direction. Therefore, when the gaming machine frame 903 is opened from the outer frame, the entire display monitor 90130H can be visually recognized from the outside of the gaming machine 901 only by slightly opening the gaming machine frame 903. Therefore, when the clerk or the like confirms the role-relationship (combination) role ratio, the clerk or the like does not open the gaming machine frame 903 significantly, but only slightly opens it. Can be confirmed. Therefore, it is possible to easily perform the work of confirming the combination (combination ratio) combination ratio.

[9th display monitor arrangement mode]
FIG. 114 (B) is a perspective view of the main board in which the display monitor is arranged in the ninth display monitor arrangement mode. As shown in FIG. 114 (B), in the ninth display monitor arrangement mode, the base member 90129I is provided on the right-hand surface of the substrate case 90202 accommodating the main board 9011, and the display monitor 90130I is provided on the right side surface of the base member 90129I. It is provided. The base member 90129I is provided on the board case 90202 so as to straddle the board case main body 90202A and the lid body 90202B of the board case 90202, similarly to the base member 90129F in the sixth display monitor arrangement mode.

The base member 90129I has a triangular columnar shape whose bottom surface forms a right triangle, and is arranged so that its height direction is along the depth direction of the gaming machine 901. The right-angled part of the right triangle that forms the bottom of the triangular prism is located on the right side. Therefore, the left side surface of the base member 90129I is an inclined surface that moves toward the right side from the upper side to the lower side. A display monitor 90130I is provided on this inclined surface. The four-digit display on the display monitor 90130I is arranged vertically side by side. The four-digit display on the display monitor 90130I may be arranged in the horizontal direction.

The display monitor 90130I arranged in the ninth display monitor arrangement mode is provided on the left side surface of the substrate case 90202 and is arranged along the vertical direction. Therefore, when the gaming machine frame 903 is opened from the outer frame, the entire display monitor 90130I can be visually recognized from the outside of the gaming machine 901 only by slightly opening the gaming machine frame 903. Therefore, when the clerk or the like confirms the role-relationship (combination) role ratio, the clerk or the like does not open the gaming machine frame 903 significantly, but only slightly opens it. Can be confirmed. Therefore, it is possible to easily perform the work of confirming the combination (combination ratio) combination ratio.

Further, the left side surface of the base member 90129I provided with the display monitor 90130I arranged in the ninth display monitor arrangement mode is an inclined surface that moves toward the right side as it descends. Therefore, when the display monitor 90130I is viewed from the side where the gaming machine frame 903 is opened, the display monitor 90130I can be easily seen. Therefore, it is possible to more easily perform the work of confirming the combination (combination ratio) combination ratio.

Further, the display monitors 90130A to 90130I arranged in the first display monitor arrangement mode to the ninth display monitor arrangement mode all have the installation angle of the display monitor with respect to the opening portion between the gaming machine frame 903 and the outer frame. It may be provided in the adjusting means that makes it adjustable. The adjusting means includes, for example, a fixed portion fixed to the base members 90129A to 90129I or the buried inclined surface 9011K, and a mounting portion movable with respect to the fixed portion, and the display monitors 90130A to 90130I are provided on the mounting portion. It suffices to make sure that either one is attached. The adjusting means may be a manual type that can be manually operated by a clerk or the like by opening the gaming machine frame 903, or an electric type that operates a motor or actuator provided in the adjusting means. But it may be. Further, in the case of an electric type, a person who can operate from an office or the like via a communication device or the like may be used.

The range in which the mounting portion can be moved may be, for example, a movement range associated with movement in the up, down, left, and right directions, or may be a movement range associated with rotational movement around an arbitrary rotation axis. Further, the movement range may be a combination of the movement ranges associated with these movements. The display monitors 90130A to 90130I are provided as adjusting means for adjusting the installation angle of the display monitor with respect to the opening portion between the gaming machine frame 903 and the outer frame, so that the gaming machine 901 is installed in the gaming field. Can be adjusted according to your wishes.

Although the arrangement of the display monitors is shown in the first display monitor arrangement mode to the ninth display monitor arrangement mode described above, these arrangement modes may be combined. For example, the display monitor may be arranged so as to straddle the left side surface from the upper surface of the substrate case 90202 by combining the eighth display monitor arrangement mode and the ninth display monitor arrangement mode.

[A game machine equipped with a blade-type variable winning ball device]
In the above example, a variable display game (special figure game) that performs variable display is executed, and when the display result of the variable display in the variable display game (special figure game) becomes a big hit, the big hit game state is controlled. I explained about the Digipachi type game machine. On the other hand, as a so-called honey-type gaming machine in which the jackpot gaming state is controlled by the gaming ball passing through a specific region (V region) provided inside the blade-type variable winning ball device that can be opened and closed. good. Hereinafter, an example in which the present invention is applied to a honey-mono type gaming machine will be described. Hereinafter, the differences between the honey-mono type and the above-mentioned gaming machine 901 will be mainly described, and common explanations may be omitted.

FIG. 115 is a front view of a gaming machine provided with a blade-type variable winning ball device, and FIG. 116 is a front view of a variable winning ball device provided on a gaming board as viewed from the front. As shown in FIG. 115, the pachinko gaming machine 90501 has a glass door frame 90502 formed in a frame shape. On the lower surface of the glass door frame 90502, there is a ball hitting plate (upper plate) 90503. At the bottom of the hit ball supply plate 90503, there is a surplus ball tray 90504 that stores the game balls that cannot be accommodated in the hit ball supply plate 90503, and the speed at which the hit ball launcher launches the game ball (that is, the strength of the spring that plays the game ball). A ball striking operation handle (operation knob) 90505 for adjusting the ball is provided.

The player can adjust the momentum of the game ball launched from the hit ball launcher by rotating the operation knob 90505. Specifically, by rotating the operation knob 90505 to the right, the speed of the game ball launched from the hitting ball launching device gradually increases, and when the speed exceeds a predetermined speed, the launched game ball is launched. Enters the left side area of the game area 90507 from above through the hitting rail. Further, when the operation knob 90505 is further rotated to the right, the launched game ball enters the right area of the game area 90507 from above. Therefore, by changing the amount of rotation while the operation knob 90505 is rotated to the right, the momentum of the game ball launched from the hit ball launcher can be adjusted, and the area where the game ball is driven can be adjusted. ..

A game board is detachably attached to the back surface of the glass door frame 90502. The game board is a structure including a plate-shaped body constituting the game board and various parts attached to the plate-shaped body. Further, a game area 90507 divided by a guide rail is formed on the front surface of the game board.

A blade-type variable winning ball device 90520 is arranged substantially in the center of the game area 90507. Below the blade-type variable winning ball device 90520, a first starting winning opening 90511, a second starting winning opening 90512, and a variable winning ball device 90515 forming a third starting winning opening 90513 are provided. The winning ball that has entered the first starting winning opening 90511 is detected by the first starting opening switch 90511a, and the winning ball that has entered the second starting winning opening 90512 is detected by the second starting opening switch 90512a. Guided by. Further, the winning ball that has entered the third starting winning opening 90513, which can be won by opening the variable winning ball device 90515, is detected by the third starting opening switch 90513a and guided to the back surface of the game board. The variable winning ball device 90515 is opened by the solenoid 90515a. Hereinafter, the first starting winning opening 90511, the second starting winning opening 90512, and the third starting winning opening 90513 may be collectively referred to as a "starting winning opening" or may be referred to as a starting winning opening 90511, 90512, 90513. .. Further, the first start port switch 90511a, the second start port switch 90512a, and the third start port switch 90513a may be collectively referred to as a "start port switch" or may be referred to as a start port switch 90511a, 90512a, 90513a. .. When a game ball wins a prize at the starting prize opening, a predetermined number, for example, five game balls are paid out as prize balls. The number of prize balls paid out by winning a game ball in the starting winning opening may be the same, or may be different for each starting winning opening. For example, the number of prize balls to be paid out when a game ball wins in the first start winning opening 90511 and the second starting winning opening 90512 is set to 5, and the number of prize balls when the game ball wins in the third starting winning opening 90513 is set to 5. The number of payouts may be two.

When the game ball wins in the start winning opening and is detected by the starting opening switch, the blade type variable winning ball device 90520 is controlled to open and close once or twice. By opening / closing control, the left open door 90576A on the left side moves to the left from the initial position, and the right open door 90576B on the right side moves to the right from the initial position, so that the blade type variable winning ball device 90520 is opened. When the left open door 90576A and the right open door 90576B return to the initial positions, the blade type variable winning ball device 90520 is closed. The state in which the blade-type variable winning ball device 90520 operates in response to the winning detection of the starting port switch in this way is referred to as a starting operation state. Hereinafter, the blade type variable winning ball device 90520 may be referred to as an accessory. Further, although various accessories are provided on the game board, the term "accessories" below means a blade-type variable winning ball device 90520.

On the back side of the inside of the blade-type variable winning ball device 90520, an effect display device 90509 using an LCD or the like for displaying the effect is provided. The effect display device 90509 variablely displays (variates) the effect symbol as the identification information. In this embodiment, the effect display device 90509 has, for example, three variable display units (design display areas) of "left", "middle", and "right".

To the right of the blade-type variable winning ball device 90520, a special symbol display 90508 that variably displays a special symbol as identification information is provided. The special symbol display 90508 is composed of, for example, a 7-segment display.

Above the special symbol display 90508, a special symbol start storage display 90518 composed of four LEDs for displaying the number of effective winning balls having a game ball in the starting winning opening, that is, the number of starting memories is provided. The special symbol start memory display 90518 displays up to four start memory numbers in the order of winning. The special symbol start storage display 90518 increases the number of LEDs in the lit state by 1 each time there is a valid start prize in the start winning openings 90511, 90512, 90513. Then, each time the variable display is started on the special symbol display 90508, the number of LEDs in the lit state is reduced by 1 (that is, one LED is turned off). In this example, the special symbol start storage display 90518 shifts the lighting state each time the variable display is started by the special symbol display 90508. As will be described later, since the start storage number is also displayed on the effect display device 90509, it is not necessary to provide the special symbol start storage display 90518.

On the left side of the blade-type variable winning ball device 90520, a normal symbol display 90510 for variably displaying a normal symbol is provided. When the game ball passes through the gate 90532 provided on the right side of the game area 90507 and is detected by the gate switch 90532a, the normal symbol (in this example, the numerical display by the 7-segment LED) is displayed on the normal symbol display 90510. The variable display starts. In this embodiment, in the case of a hit, "7" is stopped and displayed at the end of the variable display, and in the case of a miss, a stop display other than "7" is displayed. In the case of a hit, the variable winning ball device is opened a predetermined number of times and for a predetermined time. The probability of hitting a normal symbol is, for example, 12/13. Above the normal symbol display 90510, a normal symbol start storage display 90541 having a display unit with four LEDs for displaying the number of passing balls that have passed through the gate 90532 is provided. Each time the gate 90532 passes, the normal symbol start storage display 90541 increments the LED that lights up by one. Then, each time the variable display of the normal symbol display 90510 is started, the number of LEDs to be lit is reduced by one.

On the right side of the variable winning ball device 90515, a large winning opening is provided in which the opening / closing plate 90516 is opened by the solenoid 90521 in the specific gaming state (big hit gaming state). The opening / closing plate 90516 is a means for opening / closing the large winning opening. The winning ball that has entered the big winning opening is detected by the count switch 90523. When a game ball wins a prize at the large prize opening, a predetermined number, for example, 15 game balls are paid out as prize balls.

Decorative lamps that blink during the game are provided around the left and right sides of the game area 90507, and an out port 90526 for collecting the game balls that have not won a prize is provided at the lower part.

Further, two speakers 90527 that emit sound effects are provided on the upper left and right outside the game area 90507. A top frame lamp 90528a, a left frame lamp 90528b, and a right frame lamp 90528c are provided on the outer periphery of the game area 90507. Further, decorative LEDs are installed around each structure (blade type variable winning ball device 90520 or the like) in the game area 90507. The top frame lamp 90528a, the left frame lamp 90528b, the right frame lamp 90528c, and the decorative LED are examples of decorative light emitters provided in the gaming machine.

The game ball launched from the hit ball launcher enters the game area 90507 through the hit ball rail, and then falls in the game area 90507. When the hit ball enters the start winning opening and is detected by the start opening switch, if the variable display of the symbol can be started, the special symbol starts to be variablely displayed on the special symbol display 90508, and the effect symbol is displayed on the effect display device 90509. Starts variable display. If the variable display of the symbol is not in a state where the variable display can be started, and the start winning memory number, which is the reserved storage of the variable display of the special symbol on the special symbol display 90508, is not the upper limit number, the starting winning memory number is incremented by 1. That is, the number of lit LEDs in the special symbol start storage display 90518 is increased by 1.

The variable display of the special symbol (“0” to “9”) on the special symbol display 90508 is stopped when a predetermined time has elapsed. If the special symbol at the time of stopping is a jackpot symbol (specific display result: specifically, for example, "3", "7"), the first jackpot gaming state (without going through the starting operation state) of the jackpot gaming states It shifts to the big hit game state to be started). In addition, when it is a small hit symbol (specifically, "1", "2", "4", "5", "6", "8", "9"), it shifts to the starting operation state. do. In the starting operation state, when the game ball wins a prize in the special area provided inside the blade type variable winning ball device 90520, the state shifts to the second big hit game state (the big hit game state started after passing through the starting operation state). .. It should be noted that the gaming state before shifting to the jackpot gaming state is the normal state. In addition, after the jackpot game state is completed, the state shifts to a normal state or a time-saving state (a state in which the variable winning ball device 90515 is easily released by shortening the average fluctuation time of the special symbol or the effect symbol). do. The time saving state can be continued until the variable winning ball device 90515 is opened a predetermined number of times, for example, 100 times, and when the transition condition to the jackpot gaming state is satisfied until the variable winning ball device 90515 is opened 100 times. The game state shifts from the time saving state to the big hit game state. Further, when the variable winning ball device 90515 opens 100 times without satisfying the transition condition to the big hit gaming state, the gaming state shifts from the time saving state to the normal state.

Further, as shown in FIG. 42, in this embodiment, the gate 90532 is provided on the right side of the game area 90507. Therefore, in this embodiment, when the time is controlled to be shortened, it is better to shoot the game ball aiming at the right side of the game area 90507 (so-called right-handed hit) in order to allow the game ball to pass through the gate 90532. It will be advantageous. Further, as shown in FIG. 42, in this embodiment, the large winning opening is provided on the right side of the game area 90507. Therefore, in this embodiment, the game ball is launched (so-called right-handed) aiming at the right side of the game area in order to win the game ball in the big winning opening during the big hit game. On the other hand, in this embodiment, the game ball is launched (so-called left-handed) aiming at the left side of the game area 90507 if it is not in the time saving state or the big hit game (in the normal state).

Further, a left gate 90517 is provided on the left side of the game area 90507, and a game ball that has passed through the left gate 90517 is detected by the left gate switch 90517a. Further, a right gate 90519 is provided on the right side of the game area 90507, and a game ball that has passed through the right gate 90519 is detected by the right gate switch 90519a.

In this embodiment, when a predetermined game state is changed, control is performed to change the game state based on the passage of the game ball through the left gate 90517 and the right gate 90519. Specifically, in this embodiment, the jackpot game is started immediately when the jackpot symbol is derived and displayed, or when the game ball wins in the specific winning slot 90566 in the blade type variable winning ball device 90520. Instead, the jackpot game is started based on the fact that the game ball has passed through the gate. In this embodiment, since the big prize opening is provided on the right side of the game area 90507 (it is hit right during the big hit game), it is a big hit based on the fact that the game ball passes through the right gate 90519. The game is started. It should be noted that the big hit game is not started based on the passing of the game ball through the left gate 90517 and the right gate 90519, but when the big hit symbol is derived and displayed, or when the special winning ball in the blade type variable winning ball device 90520 is specified. The jackpot game may be started immediately when the game ball wins in the mouth 90566, or the jackpot game may be started after a predetermined time has elapsed.

Further, in this embodiment, even when the big hit game is finished, a new variation display can be started based on the fact that the game ball has passed through the left gate 90517 and the right gate 90519. Specifically, in this embodiment, since the ball is hit left in the normal state and hit right in the time-saving state, the game ball has passed through the left gate 90517 when controlled to the normal state after the big hit game is completed. Based on this, a new fluctuation display can be started, and if it is controlled to a time-saving state after the big hit game ends, it will be shifted to a time-saving state based on the passing of the game ball through the right gate 90519, and a new fluctuation will occur. The display shifts to a state where it can be started. It should be noted that, instead of shifting to a state in which a new variation display can be started based on the passage of the game ball through the left gate 90517 and the right gate 90519, when the big hit game is finished or the big hit game is finished. It is also possible to shift to a state in which a new variable display can be started when a predetermined time has elapsed.

Next, the blade type variable winning ball device 90520 will be described. The blade-type variable winning ball device (feature) 90520 is in a state in which a game ball can enter when the left open door 90576A and the right open door 90576B are opened by driving the opening / closing motor 90575. The game ball that has entered the accessory 90520 passes through a passage port or the like and flows down to the lower side of the accessory 90520. In addition, in FIG. 116, the state where the left open door 90576A and the right open door 90576B are closed and the game ball cannot enter the accessory 90520 (difficult to enter) is shown by a solid line, and the left open door 90576A and the right open door are shown. The state in which the 90576B is open and the game ball can enter the accessory 90520 (easy to enter) is shown by a virtual line.

A left movable member 90577 and a right movable member 90578 are provided on both the left and right sides of the accessory 90520, respectively. The moving portion of the left movable member 90577 is the left movable portion 90577A, and the moving portion of the right movable member 90578 is the right movable portion 90578A. The left movable portion 90577A is moved by the left movable portion drive solenoid 90577B, and the right movable portion 90578A is moved by the right movable portion drive solenoid 90578B. The left movable portion 90577A and the right movable portion 90578A move in the vertical direction, respectively.

At the bottom of the accessory 90520, a specific winning opening 90566 forming a specific area is provided. Further, an outlet is provided at the back of the position where the specific winning opening 90566 is provided in the accessory 90520, and inside the accessory 90520, there is a passage for distributing the game ball to the specific winning opening 90566 or the exit. It is provided. The specific winning opening 90566 is provided with a specific area switch 90566A, the game ball winning in the specific winning opening 90566 is detected by the specific area switch 90566A, and the game ball winning in the outlier is detected by the outlier area switch. Will be done. When a game ball wins at the specific winning opening 90566 and the exit opening, a predetermined number, for example, 10 game balls are paid out as prize balls. The number of prize balls paid out by winning a game ball at the specific winning opening 90566 and the outlier may be the same or different. For example, the number of prize balls paid out when the game ball wins in the specific winning opening 90566 may be 10, and the number of prize balls paid out when the game ball wins in the outlier may be 3. Further, when a game ball enters the exit, the prize ball may not be paid out (the number of prize balls is 0).

On condition that the game ball that has entered the accessory 90520 wins the specific winning opening 90566 and is detected by the specific area switch 90566A, it is possible to shift to the second big hit gaming state. Further, when the game ball that has entered the accessory 90520 wins a prize at the exit, it is not possible to shift to the second big hit game state.

An example of how to proceed with the game in this gaming machine 90501 will be described. In the gaming machine 90501, when a game ball wins in any of the first starting winning opening 90511, the second starting winning opening 90512, and the third starting winning opening 90513 in the normal state, it is either a big hit, a small hit, or an outlier. A lottery (hereinafter, also referred to as a "big hit lottery") is executed. As a result of the big hit lottery, it is decided as a big hit, a small hit or a miss. Then, the variation (variable display) of the special symbol and the effect symbol is started, and the symbol corresponding to the result of the big hit lottery is stopped and displayed on the special symbol display 90508.

When the result of the big hit lottery is decided to be a big hit, after the symbol (the symbol corresponding to the big hit) is stopped and displayed on the special symbol display 90508, the game state is changed from the normal state to the big hit game state (first). It shifts to the jackpot game state). In the big hit game state, the big winning opening by the opening / closing plate 90516 is controlled to open / close 16 times (16 rounds, 1 round opening allowable time is 29 seconds). In this embodiment, the number of rounds in the big hit game state is fixed at 16, but the number of rounds (for example, any of 2 rounds, 7 rounds, and 16 rounds) may be determined by lottery or the like. If the result of the big hit lottery is decided to be a big hit, the accessory 90520 is not controlled to the open state. Further, when the result of the big hit lottery is determined to be a big hit, the accessory 90520 may be controlled to the open state.

When the result of the big hit lottery is decided to be a small hit, after the symbol (the symbol corresponding to the small hit) is stopped and displayed on the special symbol display 90508, the accessory 90520 is controlled to be in the open state. The starting operation is started. In the starting operation state, the accessory 90520 is in the open state for 0.9 seconds. The number of times of opening (opening number) is once, twice or three times. In the starting operation state, when the game ball wins the accessory 90520, and the game ball wins the specific winning opening 90566 and is detected by the specific area switch 90566A, a V winning occurs. When the V prize is generated, the gaming state is shifted to the jackpot gaming state (second jackpot gaming state). If the game ball enters the exit and the V prize does not occur, the game does not shift to the second big hit game state. That is, it becomes out of place and maintains a normal state.

If the result of the big hit lottery is determined to be out of order, the special symbol display 90508 may stop and display the symbol (the symbol corresponding to the out of place), and then the accessory 90520 may be controlled to be in the open state. No. In this case, the gaming state does not shift to the jackpot gaming state, and the normal state is maintained.

The jackpot includes a non-time-saving jackpot and a time-saving jackpot. In either case, when the change of the special symbol is completed, the game directly shifts to the 16-round jackpot game state (first jackpot game state) without going through the starting operation state, but in the case of a time-saving jackpot, the jackpot game ends. Later, the gaming state shifts to the time-saving state (on the other hand, in the case of a non-time-saving jackpot, the gaming state after the jackpot game ends is the normal state).

There are three types of small hits, from the first small hit to the third small hit. The first small hit is a small hit in which the accessory 90520 opens once in the starting operation state, the second small hit is a small hit in which the accessory 90520 opens twice, and the third small hit is the accessory. It is a small hit that 90520 opens three times. Further, in the case of disengagement, the accessory 90520 does not perform the opening operation.

Further, when the accessory 90520 wins a V in the first small hit or the second small hit, the second big hit becomes a non-time saving big hit, and after the second big hit gaming state is completed, it is normal. Move to the state. Further, the second big hit in the case of winning a V when the accessory 90520 performs the opening operation in the third small hit becomes a time-saving big hit, and after the second big hit gaming state ends, it shifts to the time-saving state.

Further, the gaming machine 90501 is provided with a main board and a display monitor similar to the main board 9011 and the display monitor 9029 provided in the above-mentioned gaming machine 901, and the main board is used as a combination (combination) or a combination. The ratio is calculated and the calculated combination ratio is displayed on the display monitor. The display monitor is arranged in front of the main board on the main board when the main board is visually recognized so as not to interfere with the visibility. This point is the same as the above-mentioned gaming machine 901. Further, the combination (combination ratio), the calculation procedure of the combination ratio, the display procedure, and the like are the same as those of the above-mentioned gaming machine 901.

The combination (combination ratio) and the combination ratio in the gaming machine 90501 can be obtained by the above equations (1) and (2). The number of prize-winning balls in the gaming machine 90501 is determined by winning a game ball for a variable winning ball device 90515, a specific winning opening 90566 and an exit opening in the blade-type variable winning ball device 90520, and a large winning opening provided with an opening / closing plate 90516. The total number of game balls to be paid out.

Further, the number of consecutive prize-winning balls in the gaming machine 90501 is the number of gaming balls paid out by winning the gaming ball to the large winning opening provided with the opening / closing plate 90516 when the first big hit gaming state is executed. Refers to the total number. Further, when the second big hit game state is executed, the game ball paid out by winning the game ball for the big winning opening provided with the opening / closing plate 90516 (hereinafter, may be referred to as "big winning opening winning"). The total number may be the total number, or the game balls paid out by the big prize opening prize, and the specific winning opening 90566 and the outlier in the blade type variable winning ball device 90520 at the time of V winning which triggered the transition to the second big hit game state. It may be the total number of game balls paid out by winning a game ball for the mouth (hereinafter sometimes referred to as "trigger prize").

The "at the time of V winning that triggered the transition to the second big hit gaming state" in the opportunity winning may be at the time of opening the blade type variable winning ball device 90520 in which the V winning occurred, or the V winning occurred. A series of opening by winning a prize at the starting winning opening that triggered the opening of the blade type variable winning ball device may be included. For example, when the blade type variable winning ball device 90520 is opened by winning a game ball to the third starting winning opening 90513 in which the number of times the blade type variable winning ball device 90520 is opened is 3, and there is a V prize at the time of opening. The opportunity winning may be a winning of a game ball for the specific winning opening 90566 and the outlier of the blade type variable winning ball device 90520 at the time of opening the three times.

In addition, when the number of consecutive winning prize balls is the total number of game balls paid out by the large winning opening winning and the opportunity winning, the winning of the specific winning opening 90566 and the outlier of the blade type variable winning ball device 90520 is the trigger winning. Whether or not it depends on whether or not the V prize that triggered the transition to the second big hit game state occurs. For this reason, the total number of game balls paid out by winning a prize for the specific winning opening 90566 and the outlier of the blade type variable winning ball device 90520 (hereinafter referred to as "the number of temporary memory opportunity winning winning balls") is temporarily stored, and the second big hit game. Even if the number of temporary memory trigger prize balls is added to the number of consecutive bonus winning prize balls as the total number of game balls paid out by the trigger prize when the V prize that triggered the transition to the state occurs. good. The timing for adding the temporary memory opportunity winning prize balls to the number of consecutive prize winning balls may be an appropriate timing. For example, it may be a timing to shift to the second big hit game state and count the number of prize balls of the game ball paid out by the big prize opening prize, or the count of the number of prize balls of the game ball paid out by the big winning opening prize. At the time of starting, the timing may be set immediately before displaying the winning combination (relationship ratio) on the display monitor 9029 during or after counting the number of prize balls of the game balls paid out by the big prize opening prize.

Further, after the temporary memory trigger prize ball is stored, when the V prize that triggered the transition to the second big hit gaming state does not occur, the temporary memory trigger prize ball may be deleted. When the game ball wins in the specific winning opening 90566, the V winning that triggered the transition to the second big hit gaming state has occurred, so that the blade type variable winning ball device 90520 is substantially out of alignment. The total number of game balls paid out by winning a prize in the mouth may be temporarily stored. The judgment that the V prize that triggered the transition to the second big hit gaming state does not occur is that, for example, the V prize does not occur after a predetermined time has elapsed from the opening of the blade type variable winning ball device 90520. can do.

In addition, as the combination (relationship) and the combination ratio displayed on the display monitor, the short-term combination (relationship), the short-term combination ratio, the cumulative combination (relationship), and the cumulative combination ratio are the same as in the above-mentioned game machine 901. And so on. Further, the display monitor may be attached to the main board in the same manner as the above-mentioned gaming machine 901. Further, as the arrangement mode of the display monitor, various arrangement modes described in the mounting mode for the gaming machine 901 may be used.

The above-mentioned gaming machine 90501 is a gaming machine provided with a blade-type variable winning ball device 90520. In a gaming machine provided with such a blade-type variable winning ball device 90520, a combination (combination ratio) and a combination ratio are displayed on the main board. Further, the display monitor is provided on the main board that controls the game so as not to interfere with the visibility. Therefore, it is possible to recognize what kind of adjustments have been made to the game nails (obstacle nails) and windmills provided on the game board.

Further, in the gaming machine 90501 provided with the blade type variable winning ball device 90520, the winning combination (combination ratio) and the winning combination ratio are calculated in a mode different from that of the gaming machine 901. Even in the gaming machine 90501 provided with such a blade-type variable winning ball device 90520, the winning combination (combination ratio) and the winning combination ratio can be calculated and displayed on a display monitor mounted on the main board.

Further, in the gaming machine 90501, among the starting winning openings for opening and closing the blade type variable winning ball device 90520, the variable winning ball device 90515 is used as the third starting winning opening 90513, but the starting winning opening is the first starting winning opening. Only those that are not provided with a variable winning ball device such as the opening 90511 and the second starting winning opening 90512 may be used. Further, the starting winning opening may be only a variable winning ball device such as the third starting winning opening 90513.

The number of prize balls paid out by winning a game ball to the third start winning opening 90513 is added to the number of winning prize balls used to calculate the winning combination, but the first starting winning opening 90511 and the second starting winning opening 90511 and the second. The number of prize balls paid out by winning the game ball to the starting winning opening 90512 is not added to the number of prize balls for winning the prize and the number of prize balls for winning the continuous prize.

Further, in the gaming machine 90501, a big hit lottery is executed by winning a game ball in the starting winning opening, but the big hit lottery is not executed even if the starting winning opening is won, and the variable winning ball device 90520 is always opened. It may be an embodiment in which the operation is performed. Further, instead of the big hit lottery, the lottery for the number of times the variable winning ball device 90520 is opened may be performed, or both the big hit lottery and the lottery for the number of times the variable winning ball device 90520 is opened may be performed. .. Further, in the lottery for the number of openings, the number of times such as once, twice, three times, etc. may be drawn, and 0 times may be included as the target of the number of openings.

Further, the gaming machine 90501 is set to a jackpot gaming state (first jackpot gaming state and second jackpot gaming state), and the gaming machine 90501 is provided with a blade type variable winning ball device 90520 and an opening / closing plate 90516. There is a winning slot. On the other hand, the jackpot gaming state may be set, and only the blade-type variable winning ball device may be provided without providing the jackpot. In this case, in the big hit game state, the blade-type variable winning ball device may open / close or open for a certain period of time.

Further, in the embodiment in which only the blade type variable winning ball device is provided, V winning may be set as a continuation condition of the big hit gaming state. For example, when the game shifts to the big hit game state, the maximum continuous round may be set so that the continuation of the next round is determined when a V prize is won in one round.

(Modification example of display control of winning number information and display items)
(1) In the above embodiment, an example in which items related to the number of winnings to the general winning opening, the first starting winning opening, and the second starting winning opening can be displayed in the first area α has been described. However, for example, items related to the number of times the game ball has passed through the gates 9041A and 9041B may be displayed in the first area α. When the game ball passes through the gates 9041A and 9041B, a pass gate designation command for specifying which gate the game ball has passed through is issued from the main board 9011 (game control microcomputer 90100) to the effect control board 9012 (effect). By transmitting to the control CPU 90120), the effect control CPU 90120 can total the number of times the game ball has passed through the gates 9041A and 9041B and display it in the first area α.

For example, the number of times of passing through the gate (corresponding to A1) of today and today's gate can be determined by the same method as the aggregation process when the general winning opening designation command for specifying which of the 1st to 4th general winning openings has been won is received. Gate passage ratio (corresponding to A2), number of gate passages in low base state (corresponding to B1), gate passage ratio in low base state (corresponding to B2), number of gate passages in high base state (corresponding to C1), high base The gate passage ratio of the state (corresponding to C2), the number of gate passages in the set period (corresponding to D1), and the gate passage ratio in the set period (corresponding to D2) can be aggregated and displayed in the first area α. .. Further, these items can be aggregated for each gate (for each of the gates 9041A and 9041B) and displayed in the first area α.

(2) Further, since the effect control CPU 90120 receives the big prize opening winning command from the game control microcomputer 90100, the number of winnings to the big winning opening can be totaled and the winning to the big winning opening can be counted. The number of prize balls given based on the total can be totaled and displayed in the first area α.

For example, by the same method as the aggregation process when a general prize opening designation command for specifying which of the 1st to 4th general winning openings has been won is received, "Today's large winning openings (A1) "Equivalent)", "Today's prize-winning ratio (equivalent to A2)", "Number of prize balls awarded based on today's prize-winning (equivalent to A3)", "Today's total The ratio of the number of prize balls awarded based on today's prizes to the prizeballs to the number of prizeballs (equivalent to A4), "the number of prizes to the prize holders during the set period (equivalent to D1)" , "Ratio of prizes to the big prize opening in the set period (equivalent to D2)", "Number of prize balls given based on the prize to the big prize opening in the set period (equivalent to D3)", and "In the set period The ratio of the number of prize balls given based on the winning of the big prize opening in the set period to the number of prize balls given (corresponding to D4) "can be aggregated and displayed in the first area α. be.

Here, "the ratio of the number of prize balls given based on today's prizes to the big prize opening to the total number of prize balls of the day (equivalent to A4)" and "the prize balls given during the set period" When the "ratio of the number of prize balls (corresponding to D4) given based on the winning of the big prize opening in the set period to the number" is higher than the predetermined ratio (for example, 60%), a notification to that effect is given. You may try to do it. For example, in the first area α, the message "The prize ball ratio of the big prize opening exceeds the reference value (60%)" may be displayed.

Further, the number of prize balls given based on the winning to the second starting winning opening controlled by the normal variable winning ball device 906B and the opening / closing control by the special variable winning ball device 907 with respect to the total number of prize balls. When the ratio to the total number of prize balls given based on the winning of the large winning opening is higher than a predetermined ratio (for example, 70%), a notification to that effect may be given. For example, a message such as "The prize ball ratio of the prize ball exceeds the reference value (70%)" may be displayed in the first area α.

(3) In the above embodiment, together with the game control microcomputer 90100 on the main board 9011 side, the effect control CPU 90120 receives each command received from the game control microcomputer 90100 when the game ball enters each approach area. An example of totaling the number of game balls entering each approach area has been described. However, in the game control microcomputer 90100 on the main board 9011 side of the game control microcomputer 9011 on the main board 9011 side, the game control microcomputer 90100 on the main board 9011 side enters each approach area. The number of entry of the game ball is totaled, or the effect control CPU 90120 enters each approach area based on each command received from the game control microcomputer 90100 when the game ball enters each approach area. It is also possible to aggregate the numbers.

The number of game balls entering each approach area (counter value corresponding to each switch) aggregated by the game control microcomputer 90100 or the effect control CPU 90120 on the main board 9011 side is transmitted to the effect control CPU 90120. Then, it can be displayed on the image display device 905. For example, by outputting a command for designating the total number of approaches to each approach area from the game control microcomputer 90100 to the effect control board 9012, the effect control CPU 90120 enters each approach area based on the command. It is possible to specify the number of intrusions and display them in the first area α.

It should be noted that the number of entries into each approach area aggregated on the game control microcomputer 90100 side is displayed on the main board 9011 such as the first special symbol display device 904A and the second special symbol display device 904B. It may be displayed in. Further, when the ratio of the number of winnings to the general winning opening to the number of winnings to the starting winning opening does not reach a predetermined reference ratio, the first special symbol display device 904A or the second special symbol display device 904B is used. It is also possible to notify the fact by performing a specific display different from the display result of the variable display of the special symbol. The display device provided on the main board 9011 for displaying the aggregated results is not limited to the first special symbol display device 904A, the second special symbol display device 904B, etc., in order to display the aggregated results. It may be a display device provided exclusively for the device. Further, the display device may have any form such as a lamp, an LED, a 7-segment display, a liquid crystal display device, an EL panel, and a light guide plate.

The value of each counter stored in the RAM 90102 (the number of entries into each approach area) can be, for example, the game state flag (probability change state, time saving state, etc.) stored in the RAM 90102 can be specified by the game control microcomputer 90100. When the reset operation for resetting (flag according to the game state) etc. is performed by the game hall side (for example, a clerk), it is displayed on the first special symbol display device 904A and the second special symbol display device 904B. Alternatively, it may be output from the game control microcomputer 90100 to the effect control board 9012 and displayed on the image display device 905 for a certain period of time. The reset operation is an operation of a reset button (not shown) connected to the main board 9011. The reset button is provided on the back surface side (game island side) of the game board 902, and the game board 902 is rotated forward with respect to the game machine frame 903 by using the hinge mechanism of the game machine frame 903. By doing so, the reset button provided on the back surface side of the game board 902 can be operated.

(4) In the above embodiment, an example in which the winning number information (D1 to D4) in the aggregation period set by the player can be displayed in the first area α has been described, but the example is described in advance regardless of the operation of the player. The totaling period is set in the gaming machine (for example, a specific period (for example, 60 minutes) is stored or set by the operation of the game hall side), and the number of winnings in the set totaling period. Information (corresponding to D1 to D4) may be displayed in the first area α. For example, the number of winnings to the general winning opening per 60 minutes is totaled, the total value is displayed in the first area α, and the total value is less than a predetermined reference value (for example, 60 times / 60 minutes). In that case, it may be notified to that effect.

(5) Further, if the winning of a specific winning opening does not occur for a predetermined period, the first area α may be notified to that effect. For example, if the number of winnings to the general winning opening has not been generated for 10 minutes, the message "No general winning for 10 minutes" may be displayed in the first area α. This predetermined period may be set by an operation on the game hall side (for example, an operation using the display changeover switch 9032 and the operation button 9030), and an operation on the player side (for example, an operation using the operation button 9030). It may be possible to set by.

(6) The above embodiment is also applied to a gaming machine provided with a distribution device such that the winning ratios to the starting winning opening and the general winning opening are a specific ratio (for example, 1: 1). , The winning number information related to the winning number to each winning opening can be displayed in the first area α. For example, the gaming machine disclosed in Japanese Patent Application Laid-Open No. 2014-117434 has a configuration in which the gaming balls accepted by the distribution device are alternately distributed to the first starting winning opening and the second starting winning opening. By providing the sorting device, it is possible to alternately sort the game balls accepted by the sorting device into the starting winning opening and the general winning opening. Also for a gaming machine in which the distribution device alternately distributes the game balls to the starting winning opening and the general winning opening, the above embodiment is applied, and the winning number information related to the winning number to each winning opening is first. It can be displayed in the area α. However, since the number of winnings to the general winning opening is automatically determined according to the number of winnings to the starting winning opening, the ratio of the number of winnings to the general winning opening to the number of winnings to the starting winning opening is displayed as described above. There is no need to let it.

(7) In FIG. 87, the totaling period can be set according to the operation of the player, but the winning number information is reset according to the operation of the player, and the totaling of the winning number information is started from the reset timing. You may do so. For example, when the player performs an operation to start counting, the number of winnings to the general winning opening displayed in the first area α is reset to 0, and then the effect control CPU 90120 issues a general winning opening designation command. The number of winnings to the general winning opening displayed in the first area α may be increased by 1 each time it is received.

Further, the aggregation period once set may be changed according to the operation of the player before the lapse of the set period. For example, although the totaling period is initially set to 30 minutes, the player may perform a resetting operation before the set period elapses to shorten the totaling period to 10 minutes in order to know the totaling result quickly. In addition, although the aggregation period was initially set to 10 minutes, in order to know the aggregation result for a longer period, the player performs a reset operation before the set period elapses to extend the aggregation period to 30 minutes. Is also good. Further, the aggregation period once set may be extended according to the operation of the player after the set period has elapsed. For example, after 10 minutes, which is the set aggregation period, has elapsed and the aggregation result for that 10 minutes is displayed once, the player performs an extension operation in order to grasp the aggregation result for a longer aggregation period. The aggregation period may be extended by 50 minutes to 60 minutes (as a result, both a 10-minute aggregation result and a 60-minute aggregation result including the 10-minute aggregation result can be obtained).

(8) In the demo screen displayed on the image display device 905, or in the first area α in the state where the game is being performed (the state in which the game end determination is not made and the demo screen is not displayed). , An image explaining which of the first starting winning opening, the second starting winning opening, and the general winning opening is the winning opening provided on the game board surface may be displayed. Also, the number of prize balls in each winning opening may be notified.

(9) In the above embodiment, the game field setting is prioritized over the player setting, but conversely, the player setting may be prioritized over the game field setting. That is, regardless of whether the operation unit of the display changeover switch 9032 is in the first position (non-display position) or the second position (display position), the player setting screens of FIGS. 46 (1) to (3) are displayed. When the operation button 9030 is pressed with the icon including the character "display" selected on the selection screen of FIG. 46 (2) so that it can be displayed on the image display device 905, the winning number information is displayed on the image display device 905. (Display control of FIGS. 83 and 84 is executed), and when the operation button 9030 is pressed with the icon including the character "not displayed" selected on the selection screen of FIG. 46 (2), the winning number information is displayed as an image. It may not be displayed on the device 905 (the display control of FIG. 85 is executed).

Further, the game hall setting and the player setting may be given the same priority, and it may be determined whether or not to display the winning number information according to the order of the received setting operations. That is, it may be decided whether or not to display the winning number information with priority given to the setting operation (latest setting operation) received last. For example, even when the operation unit of the display changeover switch 9032 is set to the first position (non-display position), the winning number information is displayed on the player setting screens of FIGS. 46 (1) to 46 (3) thereafter. When set, the winning number information is displayed (display control of FIGS. 83 and 84 is executed). Further, even if the player setting screens of FIGS. 46 (1) to 46 (3) are set so that the winning number information is not displayed, the operation unit of the display changeover switch 9032 is subsequently moved to the second position (display position). If is, the winning number information is displayed (display control of FIGS. 83 and 84 is executed). On the other hand, even when the operation unit of the display changeover switch 9032 is set to the second position (display position), the setting that does not display the winning number information on the player setting screens of FIGS. 46 (1) to 46 (3) thereafter. If is, the winning number information is not displayed (display control in FIG. 85 is executed). Further, even when the player setting screen of FIGS. 46 (1) to 46 (3) is set to display the winning number information, the operation unit of the display changeover switch 9032 is subsequently set to the first position (non-display position). ), The winning number information is not displayed (display control in FIG. 85 is executed).

Further, in this embodiment, the clerk of the game hall can operate the display changeover switch 9032 to set whether or not to display the winning number information on the image display device 905, and the player can set the operation button 9030. It is possible to set whether or not to display the winning number information on the image display device 905 by operating the above, but the present invention is not limited to such a form, and a clerk at the amusement park can operate the display changeover switch 9032. While it is possible to set whether or not to display the winning number information on the image display device 905, the player cannot set whether or not to display the winning number information on the image display device 905 (for example, FIGS. 46 (1) to 4). (The setting screen on the player side as shown in (3) may not be provided). In this way, it may be possible to set whether or not to display the winning number information on the image display device 905 only on the playground side.

On the contrary, the player (and the clerk of the game hall) can set whether or not to display the winning number information on the image display device 905 by operating the operation button 9030, while the game field. It is also possible not to provide a means that allows only the side to set whether or not to display the winning number information on the image display device 905 (for example, the display changeover switch 9032 is not provided). In such a configuration, the player and the clerk of the game hall can set whether or not to display the winning number information on the image display device 905 by a common setting operation (operation of the operation button 9030). .. In this way, it may be possible for the player and the game field to set whether or not to display the winning number information on the image display device 905 by a common setting operation.

(10) The winning number information regarding the number of winnings to each winning opening (general winning opening, first starting winning opening, second starting winning opening, etc.) described with reference to FIG. 86 and the like is the operation unit of the mode changeover switch 9031. Is displayed on the image display device 905 only in the maintenance mode in which is the display position (second position), and the operation unit of the mode changeover switch 9031 is in the non-display position (first position). In the mode, it may not be displayed on the image display device 905. That is, it may be treated in the same manner as the information in the winning number management table shown in FIG. 44 (a).

As described above, the clerk of the amusement park performs a predetermined operation on the winning number information regarding the number of winnings to each winning opening (general winning opening, first starting winning opening, second starting winning opening, etc.) described with reference to FIG. Information that can be displayed on the image display device 905 only when it is performed and that the player cannot normally see may be used. For example, a state in which a player can play a game (for example, a state in which a demo screen is displayed), a state in which a game end determination is not performed (a state in which a special figure game is being executed, a normal figure game). Is information that is not displayed on the image display device 905 in the state where It may be possible to display only (before), or it may be possible to display only for a predetermined period (for example, 1 minute) when an operation for stopping the power supply of the gaming machine is performed. good.

(11) Further, the winning number information regarding the number of winnings to each winning opening (general winning opening, first starting winning opening, second starting winning opening, etc.) described with reference to FIG. It may be possible to display on the image display device 905 even in the mode of. In such a configuration, in the maintenance mode, the winning number information can be displayed in the entire first area α and the second area β, whereas in the game mode, only in the first area α. It may be possible to display the winning number information. That is, the display area of the winning number information may be different depending on the period during which the game is not performed and the period during which the game may be performed.

Further, in the maintenance mode, the winning number information of all the aggregated items is displayed, whereas in the game mode, some items (items set by the game hall side or the operation of the player) or Information on the number of winnings of the predetermined main item) may be displayed. That is, the item of the winning number information to be displayed may be different depending on the period during which the game is not performed and the period during which the game may be performed.

(12) Further, in the game mode, during the period when the demo screen is displayed due to the game end determination, the winning number information can be displayed in the entire first area α and the second area β. On the other hand, during the period when the game end determination is not performed and it is determined that the game is in progress, the winning number information may be displayed only in the first area α. That is, the display area of the winning number information may be different between the period in which it is determined that the game is not performed and the period in which it is determined that the game is being performed.

In addition, during the period when the demo screen is displayed due to the game end judgment, the winning number information of all the aggregated items is displayed, but the game end judgment is not performed and the game is played. During the period determined to be medium, the winning number information of some items (items set by the game playground side or the operation of the player or predetermined main items) may be displayed. That is, the item of the winning number information to be displayed may be different between the period in which it is determined that the game is not performed and the period in which it is determined that the game is being performed.

(13) In the above embodiment, the winning number information is displayed with respect to the display position and display range (image size) of a specific image (error message, fourth symbol, decorative symbol, and hold information) (the setting to display the winning number information. The setting for displaying the winning number information and the number of winnings for other images (background image) are not changed (commoned) between FIG. 83 and FIG. 84) and the setting for not displaying the winning number information (FIG. 85). The visible range is different depending on the setting that does not display the information, but the setting is not limited to such a form, and as shown in FIG. 88, the setting that displays the winning number information (FIG. 88 (a)). By setting not to display the winning number information (FIG. 88 (b)), the display position and display range (image size) of all images including the background image other than the winning number information may be shared. .. As a result, it is possible to reduce the control burden due to the display / non-display setting of the winning number information.

(14) In the above embodiment, the display position and display range (image size) of the decorative pattern are set to display the winning number information (FIGS. 83 and 84) and the setting not to display the winning number information (FIG. 85). ), But the display position and display range of the decorative pattern may be different depending on the display / non-display setting of the winning number information. For example, as shown in FIG. 89, in the setting for displaying the winning number information (FIG. 89 (a)), the setting for displaying the winning number information is not displayed rather than the interval between the decorative symbol display areas 905L, 905C, and 905R (FIG. 89 (FIG. 89). The intervals between the decorative pattern display areas 905L, 905C, and 905R in b)) may be widened. That is, when the winning number information is not displayed, the variable display of the decorative pattern may be executed using the entire screen. In this example, the decorative symbol display area 905L in the case where the winning number information is not displayed is included in the first area α. In this way, when the winning number information is not displayed, the variable display or the stop display of the decorative symbol in the first area α may be allowed. In this way, it is possible to enhance the interest by performing the production using the entire screen.

(15) In the above embodiment, magnetic abnormality, vibration abnormality, and radio wave abnormality are exemplified as the error of the gaming machine, but the error of the gaming machine is not limited to these, and the error of the gaming machine is an abnormality of opening the front door and an abnormality of the payout mechanism. (Abnormality of prize balls, etc.), Abnormal winning of the large winning opening (abnormality of detecting winning in the large winning opening even though the large winning opening is not open), or malfunction of various parts of the pachinko gaming machine 901. And so on.

[Other variants]
The present invention is not limited to the above embodiment, and various modifications and applications are possible. It should be noted that the control and configuration of the gaming machine shown in each of the above-mentioned production forms may be arbitrarily combined, and the control and configuration of the gaming machine shown in each of the above-mentioned production forms and the following modification examples are shown. The control and configuration of the pachinko / pachislot machines may be arbitrarily combined.

In the above embodiment, the game balls that do not pass through the gate 9041B due to the arrangement of the game nails on the game board surface and the members that define the flow direction of the game balls are the third general winning opening 9050C and the fourth general winning opening 9050D. It is possible to win one of them. With such a configuration, even if the game ball does not pass through the gate 9041B in the probable change state or the time saving state, it is possible to expect a prize in the general winning opening provided on the downstream side of the gate 9041B. The decrease can be suppressed. Further, the game ball that has not passed through the gate 9041B may win a prize in either the third general winning opening 9050C or the fourth general winning opening 9050D at a higher rate than the game ball that has passed through the gate 9041B. .. With such a configuration, even if the game ball passes through the gate 9041B infrequently in a probabilistic state or a time-saving state, it is possible to expect a prize in the general winning opening provided on the downstream side of the gate 9041B. It is possible to suppress the decline in the interest in games. Furthermore, by executing a specific effect based on the winning of the general winning opening, it is possible to further enhance the game entertainment.

In the above embodiment, executing the specific effect at different ratios according to the gaming state includes that the specific effect can be executed only in a certain game state and the specific effect is not executed in another game state. .. Further, in the above embodiment, in order to execute the specific effect at different ratios according to the game period, the specific effect can be executed only in a certain game period, and the specific effect may not be executed in another game period. included.

In the above embodiment, in order to execute the effect at a higher rate in the first state than in the second state different from the first state, the effect can be executed only in the first state. In the second state, the effect is not executed. Here, the classification of the first state and the second state is, in addition to the above-mentioned classification according to the game state, the classification according to the number of reserved memories, and the classification according to the execution period of the special figure game (special figure game). Classification according to the type of variation pattern (for example, whether or not the variation pattern of the variable display being executed is a variation pattern with reach effect), or classification according to the type of variation pattern. , Classification according to the specific effect timing (for example, before the establishment of the reach state in the variation pattern accompanied by the reach effect) There is a classification of whether it is after the establishment or before the execution of the pseudo-continuous production in the fluctuation pattern accompanied by the pseudo-continuous production).

In the first effect mode to the twelfth effect form, the specific effect may be executed only in one of (1) a normal state and (2) a probabilistic change state or a time saving state. For example, (1) the specific effect may be executed only in the normal state, and (2) the specific effect may not be executed in the case of the probabilistic change state or the time saving state. Further, in the thirteenth effect mode to the twenty-fourth effect form, either (1) the period after the reach state is established in the reach variation, and (2) the period outside the reach variation period or before the reach state is established in the reach variation. It may be possible to execute a specific effect only in one case. For example, (1) the specific effect can be executed only in the case of the period after the reach state is established in the reach fluctuation, and (2) the specific effect is specified in the case of the period outside the reach fluctuation period or the period before the reach state is established in the reach fluctuation. You may not execute the production.

In the first effect mode to the twelfth effect mode, the execution ratio of the specific effect or the execution state is executed depending on whether the gaming state is (1) a normal state, or (2) a probabilistic change state or a time saving state. Although the type of specific effect is different, when the game state is controlled to the jackpot game state, whether or not the specific effect is executed and the specific effect to be executed are based on the same effect execution conditions as when the game state is the normal state. The type may be determined, or the presence or absence of execution of the specific effect and the type of the specific effect to be executed may be determined based on the effect execution conditions common to those in the probabilistic state or the time saving state. .. Further, the classification of the gaming state is not limited to (1) a normal state, (2) a probabilistic state or a time saving state, and for example, (1) a high base state or (2). It may be a category of whether it is in a high base state, or it may be a category of (1) a jackpot gaming state or (2) a jackpot gaming state.

In the thirteenth effect mode to the twenty-fourth effect mode, the game period is (1) the period after the reach state is established in the reach variation, or (2) outside the reach variation period or before the reach state is established in the reach variation. Whether or not the specific effect is executed and the type of the specific effect to be executed are determined according to the period, but the game period is not limited to such a division, and for example, (1) the number of reserved storages. May be a period of 1 or less, or (2) a period of 2 or more reserved storages, and (1) a period during which variable display of decorative symbols is executed. (2) It may be a division as to whether or not the variable display of the decorative symbol is not executed.

Further, whether (1) the variable display without the reach effect (non-reach variation) is being executed, or (2) the variable display with the reach effect (reach variation) is being executed? It may be the division. Further, it may be classified as (1) a period during which the variable display without the pseudo-continuous effect is executed, or (2) a period during which the variable display with the pseudo-continuous effect is executed. .. Further, even if it is classified as (1) before the execution of the pseudo-continuous effect in the variable display accompanied by the pseudo-continuous effect, or (2) after the execution of the pseudo-continuous effect in the variable display accompanied by the pseudo-continuous effect. good.

In the first to fourth effect forms and the thirteenth to sixteenth effect forms, only one of the specific effect A and the specific effect B can be executed as the specific effect, but both the specific effect A and the specific effect B can be executed. May be feasible. That is, when the winning condition is satisfied, one of the fluctuation result advance notice effect and the look-ahead advance notice effect that meets the predetermined condition is executed (for example, if the number of reserved storages is 1 or less, the change result advance notice effect is executed. However, if the number of reserved storages is 2 or more, the look-ahead notice effect may be executed), or both of them may be executed at the same time. For example, when the pre-reading notice effect is an effect of changing the mode of the display information (display part) corresponding to the hold storage, it is referred to as the above-mentioned change result advance notice effect (voice effect only, or voice effect and character effect). The look-ahead notice effect can be executed at the same time, and the player can grasp that both the change result notice effect and the look-ahead notice effect have been executed. Further, the specific effect to be executed may be determined based on the display result of the variable display and the determination result at the time of starting winning. For example, if the display result of the variable display executed when the winning condition is satisfied is a jackpot symbol, the variable result advance notice effect is prioritized and executed, and the variable display display result executed when the winning condition is satisfied is executed. If there is a hold memory that is determined to be a big hit in the start winning determination, although it is an out-of-order symbol, it is preferable to give priority to the look-ahead advance notice effect.

In the above embodiment, it is set whether or not to display the winning number by the operation button 9030 only during the period determined by the effect control CPU 90120 to be in the non-gaming state (only when the demo screen is displayed). Although the possible examples have been described, the game is not limited to such a form, and is not limited to the game state (for example, the normal state, the probability change state, the time saving state, the jackpot game state), and the execution status of the special figure game (special symbol). Whether or not the variable display of the normal symbol is executed, the number of reserved memories of the special figure game), the execution status of the normal figure game (whether or not the variable display of the normal symbol is executed, and the number of reserved memories of the normal figure game) ), It may be possible to set whether or not to display the number of winnings by using the operation button 9030. That is, whether or not to display the number of winnings by the operation button 9030 even during the period in which the game is performed, for example, the period in which the variable display of the decorative symbol is executed or the period in which the game is controlled to the jackpot game state. It may be configurable. In such a configuration, when the number of winnings to the general winning opening is set to be displayed, it does not depend on the gaming state (for example, the normal state, the probability change state, the time saving state, the big hit game state), and the special figure. The execution status of the game (whether or not the variable display of the special symbol is executed, the number of reserved storages of the special symbol game), the execution status of the normal diagram game (whether or not the variable display of the normal symbol is executed, etc.) The total number of winnings in the display control table is immediately displayed regardless of the number of pending memories of the normal game.

In the above embodiment, there is no limit on the period during which the display changeover switch 9032 can be operated. Therefore, if the glass door frame 903a can be opened on the playground side, the display changeover switch 9032 is operated. , It is possible to set whether or not to display the number of winnings in the general winning opening. Not limited to such a form, the period during which the setting operation can be performed on the playground side may be limited. For example, in a configuration in which the display changeover switch 9032 is not provided, even when setting whether or not to display the number of winnings to the general winning opening on the playground side, the setting screens shown in FIGS. 46 (1) to (3) are displayed. The operation button 9030 shall be used for selection and determination. In such a configuration, depending on the game state (for example, normal state, probability change state, time saving state, jackpot game state), or whether or not the execution status of the special figure game (variable display of the special symbol is executed). , The number of reserved memories of the special figure game) and the execution status of the normal figure game (whether or not the variable display of the normal symbol is executed, the number of reserved memories of the normal figure game), FIGS. 46 (1) to The setting screen shown in (3) may not be displayed. For example, the period controlled by the jackpot game state, the period controlled by the probabilistic state or the time saving state, the period during which the special figure game is executed, the period during which the reserved memory number of the special figure game is not 0, etc. are shown in the figure. It is possible to prohibit the setting operation on the playground side without displaying the setting screens shown in 46 (1) to (3).

In the above embodiment, only when the player is set to display the number of winnings to the general winning opening by switching the display changeover switch 9032 which cannot be operated (the operation unit is set to the second position). , The setting screen (FIGS. 46 (1) to (3)) for allowing the player to set whether or not to display the number of winnings in the general winning opening is displayed. Regardless of the form, it is possible for both the player side and the game hall side to set whether or not to display the number of prizes to the general winning opening as a configuration that does not provide a display changeover switch 9032 that can be operated only by the game hall side. This is the same screen as the common setting screen (FIGS. 46 (1) to (3)) for selecting and deciding whether or not to display the number of winnings in the general winning opening by operating the operation button 9030. The screen) may be displayed. In the configuration for displaying such a common setting screen, even if the clerk of the game hall is set not to display the number of winnings in the general winning opening, the player subsequently determines the number of winnings in the general winning opening. When the setting is set to be displayed, the number of winnings to the general winning opening may be displayed on the image display device 905 by applying the setting received later.

In addition, when the setting is set to display the number of winnings to the general winning opening by switching the display changeover switch 9032 which can be operated only on the playground side (the operation unit is set to the second position), and when the operation button 9030 is operated, it is general. Common information (for example, the number of winnings to each general winning opening and the total number of winnings stored in the display control table) is displayed on the image display device 905 when the number of winnings to the winning openings is set to be displayed. You may let it. In such a configuration, even if the setting is such that the common information is not displayed by switching the display changeover switch 9032, if the setting is made to display the common information by operating the operation button 9030 thereafter, the setting is made. By applying the later accepted settings, common information may be displayed on the image display device 905.

In the above embodiment, a limit may be provided for a period (game state) in which the number of winnings to the general winning opening can be displayed. For example, in the period in which the variable display of the decorative symbol is executed, the number of winnings in the general winning opening may not be displayed during the period from the establishment of the reach state to the derivation display of the confirmed decorative symbol. .. Further, in a predetermined gaming state such as a probability change state or a time saving state, the number of winnings to the general winning opening may not be displayed. In such a form, the setting means (for example, the display changeover switch 9032) on the game hall side determines whether the number of winnings to the general winning opening can be displayed or not displayed in which period (game state). It may be possible to set it, or it may be possible to set it by a setting means (for example, an operation button 9030) on the player side.

In the above embodiment, in the pachinko gaming machine 901, the player inputs a player ID (for example, an ID of a recording medium owned by the player or an ID for personal identification registered on the website) by the operation button 9030. By doing so, it is possible to aggregate game data including the number of winnings to the general winning opening after the player ID is input, and to operate the operation button 9030 when the game in the pachinko gaming machine 901 is finished. Then, the game data aggregated from the input of the player ID and thereafter may be output to the image display device 905 as a two-dimensional code. By capturing a two-dimensional code (information that can identify the player ID and game data) with an information terminal having a two-dimensional code reading function, the player captures the information terminal and an information management server connected to the Internet. Communication is performed with the game data stored in the information management server in association with the player ID specified from the two-dimensional code, and the game data specified from the two-dimensional code is added to the information management server. The game data managed by is updated. The player can access the information management server from the information terminal and check the stored game data (game data associated with the player ID), and as a result, win a prize in the general winning opening. It becomes possible to grasp the number. In such a form, whether or not the two-dimensional code can be displayed on the image display device 905 may be set by the setting means on the game hall side (for example, the display changeover switch 9032), and the setting means on the player side. It may be possible to set by (for example, the operation button 9030).

In such a form, the player may be given a privilege according to the number of winnings to the general winning opening stored for each player ID in the information management server. For example, when the number of winnings to the general winning opening exceeds a predetermined number, the player with the player ID is given a background image, application software, etc. that can be used on the information terminal as a privilege. Is also good. Further, points corresponding to the number of winnings to the general winning opening may be given to the player, and the information management server may manage the number of points owned by the player in association with the player ID. Then, the player may be able to exchange a part or all of the possessed points for the privilege.

In the above embodiment, an example in which the pachinko gaming machine 901 displays the number of winnings in the general winning opening is described, but the number of winnings in the general winning opening is not displayed, and the game ball wins in the general winning opening. It may be a notification of what has been done. For example, the winning notification message may be displayed on the image display device 905 at the timing when the game ball wins in the general winning opening, and the sound effect or voice of the winning notification may be output from the speakers 908L and 908R. You can do it. In such a configuration, as in the above embodiment, whether or not to notify the general winning opening that the game ball has won is set by the setting means (for example, the display changeover switch 9032) on the game hall side. It may be possible, or it may be possible to set it by a setting means (for example, an operation button 9030) on the player side.

(1) In the pachinko gaming machine 901, the winning status to the general winning opening may be notified. Specifically, the image display device 905 has the number of winnings to each general winning opening and the winning frequency (the ratio of the number of winnings to the general winning opening to the number of balls fired into the game area, or the general winning per hour. The number of winnings to the mouth) may be displayed, or the light emitting mode of the game effect lamp 909 may be changed according to the number of winnings to the general winning mouth and the frequency of winning. Further, when a prize is given to the general winning opening, the winning to the general winning opening may be notified by voice from the speakers 908L and 908R. By using such voice notification, it becomes easier for the game or the like to grasp the frequency of winning the general winning opening. Further, when a prize is won in the general winning opening, the hitting ball operation handle, the operation button 9030, or the like may be vibrated. By providing such a bodily sensation notification, it becomes easier for the game or the like to grasp the frequency of winning a prize in the general winning opening.

The number of winnings and the frequency of winning each general winning opening can be displayed on the image display device 905, and are also output to a management device such as a hall computer communicably connected to the pachinko gaming machine 901. It is possible to manage the number of prizes to each general prize opening for each machine. This information can be useful, for example, for the maintenance of gaming machines.

(2) In the pachinko gaming machine 901, a sound effect may be output when a game ball wins a prize in the general winning slot, and a sound effect different from that when winning a prize in another winning slot such as a starting winning slot. It is good to output. In such a configuration, the sound effect at the time of winning may be different for each of the general winning openings. Further, in such a configuration, the sound effect may not be output when a prize is won in a specific general winning opening.

(3) In the pachinko gaming machine 901, the execution rate and the production mode of the advance notice effect may be changed based on the fact that the game ball has won a prize in the general winning opening. In such a configuration, for example, in the first decorative symbol variable display executed after the game ball wins in the general winning opening, the execution rate and the effect mode of the advance notice effect change, and the advance notice effect is changed for a predetermined period, for example, a predetermined variable. Until the number of impressions is executed, it is preferable to continue the execution ratio and the effect mode after the change.

(4) In the pachinko gaming machine 901, the music (BGM) may be changed based on the winning of the game ball in the general winning opening. In such a configuration, for example, the music is changed from the start of the first variable display of the decorative symbol executed after the game ball is won in the general winning opening, and a predetermined period, for example, a predetermined variable display number is executed. Until then, it is better to continue the music after the change. Further, when the number of winnings to the general winning opening reaches a predetermined value, a specific music (for example, a music during a big hit) may be output. In addition, the player plays the music (BGM) from a plurality of songs (BGM) based on the fact that the game ball has won a prize in the general winning opening or the number of winning balls in the general winning opening has reached a predetermined number. Music (BGM) may be selectable.

Further, the music being played may be continuously output based on the fact that the game ball has won a prize in the general winning opening. For example, when the jackpot gaming state is controlled, the music during the jackpot may be continuously output even after the jackpot gaming state ends, based on the fact that the game ball has won a prize in the general winning opening. Further, a stage change may be executed in which the background image of the decorative pattern and the music (BGM) are changed based on the winning of the game ball in the general winning opening. It should be noted that the transition destination stage (background image and music) may be different depending on which of the plurality of general winning openings is won.

(5) In the above embodiment, an example has been described in which the specific effect executed based on the winning of the general winning opening is the variation result advance notice effect and the look-ahead advance notice effect related to the display result of the special figure game. Not limited to such a form, the specific effect may be an effect not related to the display result of the special figure game. For example, a general winning opening in which a game ball has not won may be displayed among a plurality of general winning openings, and a character may appear when the game ball wins in the general winning opening.

(6) In the pachinko gaming machine 901, when the game ball is not won in the general winning opening for a predetermined period even though the gaming ball is launched in the gaming area, or the winning frequency in the general winning opening is less than the threshold value. In some cases, the image display device 905 may be configured to perform a specific notification such as displaying that a prize has not been generated in the general winning opening. In addition, even though the game ball is fired in the game area, if the game ball does not win only in a specific general winning opening among a plurality of general winning openings for a predetermined period, or a winning in a specific general winning opening. When the frequency is less than the threshold value, the image display device 905 may execute a specific notification such as displaying that a prize has not been generated in the specific general winning opening.

(7) In the pachinko gaming machine 901, when the simultaneous production is executed at a specific time (for example, every 60 minutes), according to the number of winnings in the general winning opening until the simultaneous production is executed, or all at once. A specific production may be executed according to the winning of the general winning opening during the production period. Further, the decorative symbol may be changed, the stop symbol may be changed, or the sliding effect may be executed according to the winning of the general winning opening during the variable display of the decorative symbol.

(8) In the pachinko gaming machine 901, each time a game ball wins in the general winning opening, the object displayed on the image display device 905 is increased by one, and the winning and winning times in the general winning opening are recognized. It may be easier. Further, in the pachinko gaming machine 901, only the number of prize balls paid out based on the winning of the general winning opening is cumulatively added, and the number of winning balls paid out based on the winning of the general winning opening. When the number reaches a predetermined number, a specific effect such as displaying "100 shots exceeded!" On the image display device 905 may be executed. If the number of prize balls paid out based on the winning to the general winning opening reaches a predetermined number is the period during which the gaming machine error is notified based on fraud detection or failure detection. It is assumed that the notification of the gaming machine error is displayed with priority over the specific effect, and the specified effect that has been suspended after the notification of the gaming machine error is completed is executed.

(9) In the pachinko gaming machine 901, a winning sound is output every time a game ball wins a prize in the general winning opening, and during notification of the gaming machine error, the notification sound of the gaming machine error is output rather than the winning sound. You may give priority to output. In addition, every time a game ball wins a prize in the general prize opening, the image display device 905 is set to display the prize, and during the notification of the game machine error, the display of the game machine error is given priority over the prize display and output. You may let it.

(10) In the pachinko gaming machine 901, the number of prize balls paid out based on the winning of the game ball to the big winning opening and the winning of the game ball to the general winning opening when controlled to the big hit gaming state. The number of prize balls paid out based on the above may be added and displayed on the image display device 905 as [the number of prize balls paid out in the jackpot gaming state]. In such a configuration, the number of prize balls paid out based on the winning of the game ball to the big winning opening is added to the displayed [number of prize balls paid out in the big hit game state]. At times, it is advisable to add the number of prize balls to be paid out based on the winning of the game balls to the general winning opening. That is, the increase in the number of prize balls per display update may be apparently increased. In addition, the [number of prize balls paid out in the big hit game state] is updated according to the winning timing of the game ball to the big winning opening, and the [in the big hit game state] is updated according to the winning timing of the game ball to the general winning opening. The display may be updated according to the individual winning timing, such as updating the number of prize balls paid out.

(11) In the pachinko gaming machine 901, the number of prize balls may be different depending on the general winning opening. For example, when a game ball wins in the first general winning opening 9050A and the second general winning opening 9050B of the left game area 9010A, 10 prize balls are paid out, but the third general winning opening of the right game area 9010B is paid out. If a game ball wins in the 9050C and the 4th general prize opening 9050D, 5 prize balls may be paid out.

(12) In the pachinko gaming machine 901, an effect of inciting a game ball to be won in the general winning opening may be executed. For example, in a form such as the sixth effect form, the seventh effect form, and the fourteenth effect form, in which a specific effect is executed by winning a game ball in each of a plurality of general winning openings, the plurality of the effect forms are used. Among the general winning openings, the general winning opening in which the game ball has not won is notified by the image display device 905, and an effect suggesting to the player to aim at the general winning opening in which the game ball has not won is executed. It is good to set it to. Further, in a form such as the 8th effect mode and the 16th effect form, in which a specific effect is executed based on the fact that the game balls are won in a specific order in a plurality of winning openings, the winning openings and the winning openings to be awarded It is preferable to notify the order in which the prizes should be won by the image display device 905 so that the player can grasp the order. For example, in order to execute the specific effect A of the eighth effect form, first, "Aim for the first general winning opening!" Is displayed, and after the winning of the first general winning opening 9050A is confirmed, the next "Aim for the 1st start winning opening!" Is displayed, and after the winning to the 1st starting winning opening is confirmed, finally, "Aim for the 2nd general winning opening!" Is displayed and the second After the winning of the general winning opening 9050B is confirmed, the specific effect A is executed.

(13) Further, when the game area 9010 is provided with a guide path for the game ball toward the general winning opening, and the approach sensor can detect that the game ball has entered the guide path. , Based on the fact that the game ball is detected by the approach sensor, an effect of notifying in advance that the game ball will win the general winning opening may be executed. As a result, it is possible to reduce the possibility that the player misses the winning of the game ball in the general winning opening. In addition, a period from the winning of the game ball to the general winning opening to the execution of the payout of the winning ball is secured for a certain period, and the production based on the winning of the game ball to the general winning opening is executed within that period. You may do so.

(14) When a stage on which the game ball can roll is provided below the image display device 905, a general winning opening and an entrance to a guidance path connected to the general winning opening are provided on the stage. The configuration may be set so that the player is interested in whether or not the game ball enters the general winning opening or the entrance to the guidance route.

(15) It is also possible to execute an effect in which the display mode of the object displayed on the image display device 905 is updated every time a prize is won in the general winning opening. For example, the character grows for each prize in the general prize opening, and when the number of prizes reaches a predetermined number (when the character grows to the final stage), a predetermined completion effect (giving a privilege, etc.) is executed. You may do so. In addition, each time a prize is won in the general winning opening, an effect that increases the gauge is executed, and when the predetermined number of prizes is reached (when the gauge reaches the maximum), a predetermined completion effect (giving a privilege) is performed. Etc.) may be executed. In such a form of production, different objects are displayed according to the general winning opening, and when the game ball wins the general winning opening, only the display mode of the object corresponding to the general winning opening is updated. It may be done.

(16) In the above embodiment, the types of specific effects (variation result notice effect, look-ahead notice effect) to be executed differ depending on the gaming state when the winning condition is satisfied, and are output from the speakers 908L and 908R. Although an example in which the sounds are different has been described, the light emitting mode of the game effect lamp 909 may be different depending on the game state, not limited to such a form. In addition, in the probable change state and the time saving state, there are many cases where the production by the game effect lamp 909 and the music to be played are more flashy than in the normal state, so the mode of the specific production is also more. The mode may be easy to understand for the player and flashy.

(17) If the number of winnings to the general winning opening and the frequency of winning are less than the standard values even though a certain number of gaming balls are fired in the gaming area 9010, the player usually knows. Information on a gaming machine that is difficult to handle, for example, a latent probability change state, a limiter, or the like may be notified.

(18) In the above embodiment, an example in which the specific effect is executed immediately after the winning condition is satisfied has been described, but tentatively, the variable display of the special figure is not executed and the reserved storage number (first reserved storage). If the winning condition is satisfied while the number and the total number of the second reserved storages are also 0, neither the fluctuation result advance notice effect nor the look-ahead advance notice effect can be executed. In this case, it is preferable to execute an effect not related to the display result of the special figure game (for example, appearance of a specific character or reproduction of a specific song) as a specific effect.

(19) Further, when the variable display of the special figure is not executed and the winning condition is satisfied when the number of reserved storages (the total number of the first reserved storages and the second reserved storages) is 0. , The execution of the specific effect may be suspended, and then the specific effect may be executed at the timing when the variable display of the special figure is executed or at the timing when the number of reserved storages becomes 2 or more. That is, the specific effect that was suspended based on the fact that the start condition of the special figure game was satisfied or the start condition of the special figure game was satisfied without immediately executing the specific effect based on the establishment of the winning condition. You may try to do it.

(20) In the above embodiment, if the number of winnings in the general winning opening is less than the predetermined number in the predetermined period, the game ball does not win in the general winning opening (for example, "the number of winnings in the general winning opening is small". The message "It's too much.") May be displayed on the image display device 905. Here, it is general only during the maintenance mode in which the information for the clerk (the winning number information stored in the winning number management table) based on the setting of the mode changeover switch 9031 is displayed on the image display device 905. It is preferable to display on the image display device 905 that the game ball does not win in the winning opening. The clerk of the game hall can confirm whether or not there is an abnormality in the winning status of the game ball to the general winning opening by firing the game ball in the game area 9010 for a predetermined period in the maintenance mode. In addition, regardless of the setting of the mode changeover switch 9031, if the number of winnings to the general winning opening in the predetermined period is less than the predetermined number, the image display device 905 displays that the game ball does not win in the general winning opening. You can do it. Further, similar to the display control of the number of winnings in the general winning opening, when the number of winnings in the general winning opening in a predetermined period is less than the predetermined number based on the setting by the display changeover switch 9032 and the operation button 9030, it is general. The image display device 905 may display that the game ball does not win in the winning opening.

(21) In the above embodiment, when the number of winnings to the general winning opening in the predetermined period is larger than the predetermined number, it means that the game ball has excessively won the general winning opening (for example, "to the general winning opening". The message "The number of winnings is too large.") May be displayed on the image display device 905. Here, it is general only during the maintenance mode in which the information for the clerk (the winning number information stored in the winning number management table) based on the setting of the mode changeover switch 9031 is displayed on the image display device 905. It is preferable to display on the image display device 905 that the game ball has won an excessive prize at the winning opening. The clerk of the game hall can confirm whether or not there is an abnormality in the winning status of the game ball to the general winning opening by firing the game ball in the game area 9010 for a predetermined period in the maintenance mode.

(22) In the above embodiment, the pachinko gaming machine 901 transmits the winning number information stored in the winning number management table of the effect control board 9012 to the game information management device that manages the game information, and the game information. The management device manages the winning number information of each gaming machine. Not limited to such a form, the game control microcomputer 90100 outputs a general winning signal when the winning of the game ball to the general winning opening is detected (for example, one pulse signal is output for each winning. By doing so, the gaming information management device may manage the number of winnings to the general winning opening for each gaming machine based on the reception of the general winning signal. In addition, the game information management device uses the game information as the number of winnings in the general winning slot per predetermined period (for example, 1 hour) and the number of winnings in the general winning slot per predetermined number of hit balls (for example, 6000 shots). Or, the winning rate to the general winning opening (the number of winnings to the general winning opening ÷ the number of balls to be driven) may be calculated and managed for each gaming machine.

(23) In the above embodiment, the effect control CPU 90120 has described an example of increasing the number of objects to be displayed on the image display device 905 for each prize in the general winning opening, but the present invention is not limited to such a mode. The mode of the object displayed on the image display device 905 may be changed each time the winning opening is won. For example, the facial expression of the character displayed on the image display device 905 may be changed according to the number of winnings in the general winning opening.

(24) In the above embodiment, when the maintenance mode is set, the information of the winning number management table is displayed on the image display device 905 as information for the clerk (for example, the number of winnings and the number of payouts to each winning opening). The example of notification in the above has been described, but the notification is not limited to such a form, and the notification is made by voice notification using the speakers 908L and 908R, the game effect lamp 909, the decorative LED, and the lighting / extinguishing control of the 7-segment display. May be. In addition, it is not limited to the form of notifying all the information of the winning number management table, and only the information of the winning openings whose payout number, winning ratio, etc. are not within the predetermined standard range (or within the standard range) is notified. You may do so.

(25) In the above embodiment, when the maintenance mode is set, the information of the winning number management table as the information for the clerk (for example, the number of winnings to each winning opening, the number of payouts, etc.) is shown in the game as shown in FIG. Although an example of notifying (displaying) in a mode unrelated to the effect performed in the game has been described, the notification is not limited to such a form, and the notification may be made in a mode corresponding to the mode of the effect executed in the game. good. By notifying in an manner corresponding to the mode of the effect, it is only necessary to confirm the notification mode as to which type of model the information is, as compared with the case where the information is notified only by the table data as shown in FIG. It will be easy to grasp with. The effect executed in the game may be any effect such as a demo screen effect, a notice effect, a reach effect, a big hit effect, etc., and is not limited to the effect displayed on the image display device 905, but the sound. Or a lamp may be used. In addition, notifying in a mode according to the mode of the production means, for example, displaying or outputting a voice so that the character appearing during the advance notice production or the reach production reads out the information of the winning number management table, or whether or not there is a change. Regardless of this, the resident character displayed on the image display device 905 and giving a notice or explaining the game may be displayed and output so that the information in the winning number management table is read aloud. Further, the information is not limited to the character image, and the information of the winning number management table may be displayed together with the background image displayed in the game.

(26) In the above embodiment, an operating means such as a mode changeover switch 9031 operated to display information on the winning number management table as information for the clerk (for example, the number of winnings and the number of payouts to each winning opening). However, the example is described in which the player is inoperable and is provided in a position where only the clerk of the game hall can operate the game. Therefore, it may be provided at a position where it can be operated only by a person concerned such as an inspector, an inspector, or a manufacturer of the gaming machine. Further, it may be provided at a position where it can be operated by a person other than the above-mentioned player.

(27) In the above embodiment, a ring buffer provided with 10 counters having a maximum of 2 bytes is used as a storage area for storing information related to winning a game, but a counter having a maximum of 3 bytes and a counter having a maximum of 4 bytes are used. Can also be provided. At this time, two types of the above-mentioned combination ratio (%) and combination (relationship ratio) (%) are displayed on the above-mentioned display monitor 9029 from the total number of acquired balls of the game medium (prize ball) paid out from the gaming machine. The calculation method is not limited to the above-mentioned method, and may be as follows. As shown in FIG. 117, when the total number of acquired balls, the number of winning balls for a bonus, and the number of consecutive winning balls are totaled by a counter composed of a maximum of 4 bytes, the calculation is performed using the upper 16 bits. You may go. By the way, assuming that the number of acquired balls is 30,000 per day by the 4-byte counter, 4294863225 (4 bytes) / 30000 (number of acquired balls per day) = 143161.2075, 143161.2075 / 365 days. = 392, which is a calculation that can cover the total for 392 years.

(28) In the above embodiment, as shown in FIG. 92A, an example in which the display monitor 9029 is provided in the central portion on the main board 9011 housed in the board case 90201 has been described, but the display monitor 9029 has been described. May be provided at other positions.

For example, as shown in FIG. 118 (A), a main board 9011C without a display monitor and a display board 9011D are provided separately from the main board 9011C, and the main board 9011C and the display board 9011D are connected by a harness 9011E. The display monitor 9029 may be provided on the display board 9011D. In this case, the main board 9011C is used to calculate the combination (combination ratio) and the combination ratio to be displayed on the display monitor 9029 and to receive data for use in these calculations. The main board 9011C transmits the calculated combination (combination ratio), combination ratio, and information regarding control for displaying these to the display board 9011D via the harness 9011E. On the display board 9011D, the combination (combination ratio) and the combination ratio may be displayed on the display monitor 9029 based on the data transmitted from the main board 9011C.

Further, the main board 9011C and the display board 9011D are housed in a board case 90201A which is a caulking board case. The caulking pin 9011B is attached to the substrate case 90201A as in the substrate case 90201 shown in FIG. 92 (A). By providing the caulking pin 9011B, the main board 9011C and the display board 9011D are completely enclosed in the board case 90201A, and fraudulent acts against the main board 9011C are prevented. Further, also in the substrate case 90201A, as in the substrate case 90201 shown in FIG. 92 (A), a hole portion and a heat dissipation hole are provided, and a predetermined seal is provided. These holes, heat dissipation holes, and stickers are arranged so as not to block the display of the display monitor 9029.

Further, as shown in FIG. 118 (B), the display board 9011D may be provided outside the board case 90201B which is a caulking board case, and the main board 9011C may be enclosed in the board case 90201B. In this example, the display board 9011D is connected to the main board 9011C by a harness 9011E.

Further, as shown in FIG. 118 (C), the display board 9011D may be enclosed in the substrate case 90201C, and the main substrate 9011C may be enclosed in the substrate case 90201B. In this example, the display board 9011D is connected to the main board 9011C by a harness 9011E. Further, also in the substrate case 90201C, as in the substrate case 90201 shown in FIG. 92 (A), a hole portion and a heat dissipation hole are provided, and a predetermined seal is provided. These holes, heat dissipation holes, and stickers are arranged so as not to block the display of the display monitor 9029. The substrate case 90201C that encloses the display substrate 9011D does not have to be a caulking substrate case, or may be a caulking substrate case.

Further, as shown in FIG. 118 (D), a label is attached to the surface of the substrate case 90201 shown in FIG. 91 (A), and a caulking use record is described on the label 9011R. May be good. Here, the label 9011R may be arranged at a position where a part of the display monitor 9029 is hidden. By hiding a part of the display monitor 9029 by the label 9011R in this way, for example, when the glass door frame 903a is opened, the player cannot easily visually recognize the combination (combination) or the combination ratio. Can be done. Further, even when the label 9011R is attached, the display monitor 9029 may be attached at a position where it is not hidden.

Further, in the above embodiment, as the movable accessory, an electric accessory such as a large winning opening (attacker) opened and closed by a solenoid and a second starting winning opening (electric chew) is used. Alternatively, a so-called mechanical accessory that opens and closes by the weight of the game ball may be used as a movable accessory. Further, although the display monitor 9029 uses a 7-segment LED, a dot display, a display screen, or the like may be used instead of the 7-segment LED. Further, instead of the LED, a liquid crystal display device, an organic EL, a fluorescent display tube, or the like may be used. Further, the display monitor 9029 is provided with a 4-digit display unit of the first display unit 9029A to the fourth display unit 9029D, but the number of digits is not limited to four and may be another number of digits. For example, it may be 2 digits, 8 digits or 10 digits.

Further, as shown in the above embodiment, the glass door frame 903a or the gaming machine frame 903 is opened regardless of the content to be displayed on the display monitor 9029, for example, the display of the combination (combination ratio) and the combination ratio. We may take measures such as canceling the error. For example, in order to pay out the game ball, a replenishment mechanism for replenishing the game ball (replenishment ball) may be provided on the back side of the game board 902. In this replenishment mechanism, when a ball jam occurs, the glass door frame 903a or the gaming machine frame 903 may be opened to clear the ball jam and release the error. When the glass door frame 903a or the gaming machine frame 903 is opened to clear the error regardless of the content displayed on the display monitor 9029, the combination (combination ratio) or the combination ratio with respect to the display monitor 9029 is performed. Etc. may not be displayed.

Further, at this time, in order to prevent the display of the combination (relationship) and the combination ratio from being displayed on the display monitor 9029, no error has occurred in the display of the combination (relationship) and the combination ratio. May be a condition. The error in displaying the winning combination (combination ratio), the winning ratio, etc. here is, for example, the detection of an abnormal operation determined in step S90101 shown in FIG. 104 or the winning information during business hours determined in step S90104. Acquisition, detection of a predetermined number or more of prizes for the attacker per unit time determined in step S90106 may be detected. On condition that no error has occurred in displaying such a combination (relationship) or combination ratio, the player can see information such as a combination (relationship) or combination ratio. The situation can be suppressed.

Further, the glass door frame 903a or the gaming machine frame 903 is opened to clear the error regardless of the content displayed on the display monitor 9029, and after the error clearing is completed, the combination (combination) with respect to the display monitor 9029 is performed. It is also possible to wait for a predetermined period, for example, 1 minute until the combination or the like is displayed, and display it after the predetermined time has elapsed. After the error occurrence is cleared, the cause of the error occurrence cannot be completely eliminated, and similar errors often occur in succession. By displaying the combination (relationship), combination ratio, etc. on the display monitor 9029 after a predetermined time has elapsed, the player can receive information such as the combination (relationship), combination ratio, etc. even when such an error occurs. It is possible to suppress the situation of being seen. The predetermined period here can be arbitrarily set, and may be a time longer than 1 minute such as 5 minutes or 10 minutes, or a time shorter than 1 minute such as 30 seconds. Further, a predetermined time may be set according to the cause of the error. For example, in the case of ball clogging in the replenishment mechanism and in the case of failure of the image display device 905, the predetermined period of the ball clogging of the replenishment mechanism may be set longer.

Further, the main board 9011 is provided with a display device other than the display monitor 9029, for example, a 7-segment display (hereinafter referred to as "error display") for displaying an error. It is preferable that the error display is arranged at a position away from the display monitor 9029. Specifically, the display monitor 9029 may be arranged at the position of the right side 1/3 of the main board 9011, and the error display may be arranged at the position of the left side 1/3 of the main board 9011. Further, in order to make the display monitor 9029 easy to understand, the location of the display monitor 9029 on the main board 9011 may be printed in characters on the board case 90201, or a sticker may be attached to the board case 90201. You may leave it. Further, the display monitor 9029 may be provided on the payout control board which is a part of the main board 9011.

(29) In the above embodiment,
It was explained that the combination ratio (%) and the combination ratio (relationship ratio) (%) are calculated and displayed on the display monitor using the pachinko gaming machine as an example. You may calculate the value corresponding to the ream (ream ratio) (%) and display these values on the display monitor provided in the slot machine. The display monitor can be provided on the main board of the slot machine, for example, like the above-mentioned gaming machine (pachinko gaming machine) 1.

The role ratio and the combination (relationship) in the slot machine are, for example, the payout of the game value (game value, hereinafter also referred to as "medal") with the progress of the game of the slot machine. It is calculated by whether or not the slot machine is in operation, and whether or not the slot machine is equipped with an accessory other than the first-class special accessory.

For example, a type 1 special character, a type 2 special character, and a normal character are set as the character, and the slot machine is not equipped with the type 1 special character as the character, and the normal character is not installed. When only other bonuses such as objects are mounted, the winning combination ratio is calculated by the number of medals paid out during operation of the bonus with respect to the total number of medals paid out. In addition, if the slot machine is equipped with only the first-class special bonuses and no other bonuses other than the first-class special bonuses, the medals will be paid out in total. It is calculated by the number of medals paid out during the operation of the bonus for the number.

An example of a method of calculating the winning combination (relationship ratio) (%) in the slot machine will be described below. Here, an example in which the first-class special bonus is set to the special gaming state and only the first-class special bonus is mounted as the bonus will be described. The slot machine can start the fluctuation of the symbol by setting the number of bets, and a prize is generated according to the result of the fluctuation of the symbol. For winnings in slot machines, we will shift to a special gaming state that increases the probability of occurrence of grant prizes, grant prizes that accompany the addition of game value, re-game prizes that allow the start of symbol fluctuations without setting the number of bets, and grant prizes. There is a bonus prize. Here, the winning combination (ratio) (%) in the slot machine is the cumulative total of the game value obtained by the award winning as a result of the fluctuation of the symbol during the period in which the fluctuation of the symbol is performed a predetermined number of times. For the above-mentioned pachinko gaming machine (corresponding to the total number of acquired balls), the cumulative total of the gaming value obtained by the award winning as a result of the fluctuation of the symbol during the period of transition to the special gaming state (the above-mentioned). It is expressed as a ratio of (corresponding to the number of consecutive winning balls) in a pachinko machine. For example, in a period in which the symbol is changed 6000 times, when the number of medals, which is an example of the gaming value obtained in the period, is 16000, a prize is awarded during the period of transition to the special gaming state. When the number of medals obtained by the above is 9000, 0.56 obtained by dividing 9000 by 16000 is the winning combination (relationship ratio) (%).

Further, the main board in the slot machine is provided, for example, in the back of the outer frame. Therefore, when the door frame (front door) of the slot machine is opened, the appearance of the main board when the main board is viewed from the outside of the slot machine is different from that of the gaming machine 901. Since reels and the like are stored in the outer frame of the slot machine, the outer frame of the slot machine is often larger than that of the pachinko gaming machine. Further, due to its structure, the main board in the slot machine is often attached to the inner side of the outer frame (the inner side surface of the plate material on the back side). For this reason, when the door frame of the slot machine is opened, it is possible that the light does not reach the main board sufficiently. Therefore, when the display monitor is attached to the main board, the information displayed on the display monitor ( For numerical values, characters, etc.), it is preferable to display them brightly with a large amount of light.

Further, in the slot machine, a display monitor is arranged so that it can be easily visually recognized from an oblique direction with respect to the main board provided at the back of the outer frame. The arrangement that is easy to see from an oblique direction is, for example, an arrangement that faces the front when the door frame is opened from the outer frame and is viewed from the open portion between the door frame and the outer frame. By arranging the display monitor in this way, when the store clerk or the like confirms the role ratio (combination ratio), the store clerk or the like does not open the gaming machine frame 903 greatly, but slightly opens it. You can check the role ratio (combination ratio) just by doing. Therefore, the work of confirming the combination (combination ratio) combination ratio can be easily performed.

When the door frame is opened from the outer frame, the arrangement facing the front when viewed from the open portion between the door frame and the outer frame has an inclined surface like the base member 90129A shown in FIG. 109 and is inclined. The display monitor may be attached to the inclined surface of the base member whose surface faces the open portion between the door frame and the outer frame. Alternatively, the inclined surface may be an embedded inclined surface formed on the main substrate. Including these, the display monitor may be provided on any of the base members 90129A to 90129I provided with the display monitors 90130A to 90130I described above. Further, when the display monitor is provided on the main board, the display monitor may be provided directly on the main board and the main board and the display monitor may be housed in the board case, or the display monitor may be housed on the outside of the board case containing the main board. May be provided.

Further, these display monitors may be provided in an adjusting means capable of adjusting the installation angle of the display monitor with respect to the opening portion between the door frame and the outer frame. By providing a display monitor as an adjustment means that makes it possible to adjust the installation angle of the display monitor with respect to the opening between the door frame and the outer frame, adjustments can be made according to the wishes of the playground where the slot machine is installed. It can be carried out. Further, the adjusting means may be a manual type or an electric type.

Although the main board of the slot machine is provided at the back of the outer frame, it may be provided at another position. For example, it may be provided on the right side surface when viewed from the player side inside the outer frame, or may be provided on the left side surface. If it is provided on the right side of the outer frame, it is provided on the side corresponding to the opening between the door frame and the outer frame. Therefore, when the display monitor is provided on the main board, the display monitor is easy to see. be able to.

Further, in the slot machine as well, the main board may be provided on the back surface side of the door frame as in the pachinko gaming machine. However, in slot machines, there is no equivalent to the game board of pachinko gaming machines, and since the door frame is provided with a viewing window for visually recognizing the reel, the main board is placed at a position avoiding this viewing window. It may be provided. Further, in the pachinko gaming machine as well, instead of providing the main board on the back surface side of the game board, the main board may be provided on the back side of the outer frame or on the left and right sides like a slot machine.

Although an example of displaying the calculated combination ratio (%) and combination (relationship ratio) (%) on a display monitor (for example, 7 segments) provided on the main board is shown, the payout control is not limited to this. A display monitor may be provided on another board such as a board, a game board surface, a game machine frame (underframe), or the like. Further, the present invention is not limited to the one provided with a dedicated display monitor for displaying the combination ratio (%) and the combination (relationship ratio) (%), and is used to display an existing display device (for example, an image display device 905, an error). The 7-segment display, the credit display in the slot machine, the payout number display, etc.) may be used to display predetermined information such as the winning combination (%) and the winning combination (continuous ratio) (%).

Further, in the above-mentioned pachinko gaming machine 901 and the slot machine, the predetermined information is the combination (continuous ratio) and the combination ratio (cumulative combination (relationship) and cumulative combination ratio), but other information may be used. For example, in the pachinko gaming machine 901, the predetermined information may be the number of payouts (= number of prize balls) of the gaming balls. Further, in the slot machine, the machine discount (= (number of medals to be paid out / number of medals to be inserted) x 100) or the difference between the number of medals to be inserted and the number of medals to be paid out may be set. Further, these numerical values may be used as information calculated for each predetermined number of games and for each predetermined number of medals inserted. Further, predetermined information such as a combination (combination ratio), a combination ratio, and a machine discount may be calculated for a predetermined period, for example, 400 games or 6000 games, and the predetermined information for each number of these games may be displayed. In this case, the predetermined period may be displayed together.

In addition, some slot machines are provided with so-called settings. The setting means a numerical value obtained by dividing the probability in the slot machine into stages, and for example, 6 stages from setting 1 to setting 6 are provided. Information such as the combination (combination) and combination ratio displayed on the display monitor as predetermined information may be displayed for each setting, or when displaying for each setting, the setting is also displayed. May be good.

In addition, some slot machines can execute one game with different numbers of medals inserted (number of bets). For example, one game can be executed by selecting the number of inserted medals (number of bets) for executing one game from one to three and inserting the selected number of medals. In such a slot machine, information such as a winning combination (combination ratio) and a winning combination displayed on a display monitor as predetermined information may be displayed for each number of inserted sheets (number of bets). In addition, there are slot machines in which the required number of inserts (number of bets) differs depending on the game state. For example, there is a slot machine in which the required number of inserts is two when the gaming state is in the bonus, and the required number of inserts is three when the gaming state is not in the bonus. In such a slot machine, it may be possible to display information such as a combination (combination ratio) and a combination ratio displayed on a display monitor as predetermined information for each relationship between the game state and the number of inserted cards.

Further, in the slot machine, as predetermined information, in addition to the winning combination (combination ratio) and the winning combination calculated based on the ordinary bonus, the special bonus, etc., for example, the gaming state of the slot machine is advantageous except during the bonus. When a section and a non-advantageous section are set, the ratio of the number of medals paid out in these advantageous sections to the number of medals paid out in the advantageous section and the non-advantageous section is displayed. May be good. Further, on the display monitor, as predetermined information, in addition to the winning combination (combination ratio), the number of continuous games in the advantageous section (hereinafter referred to as "the number of advantageous section games") and the number of games in the advantageous section and the non-advantageous section. The ratio (hereinafter referred to as "advantageous / non-advantageous ratio") may be displayed. The number of continuous games in the advantageous section and the advantageous / non-advantage ratio may be displayed on a dedicated display monitor different from the combination (combination) combination ratio, or may be displayed with a time lag using a common display monitor. good. For example, using a common display monitor, the number of advantageous section games → advantageous / non-advantageous ratio → short-term combination (relationship) → short-term combination ratio → cumulative combination (relationship) → cumulative combination ratio → number of advantageous section games → ... may be displayed in this order.

Further, the number of advantageous section games may be the number of games in the ongoing advantageous section during the continuation of the advantageous section, or may be the number of predetermined games, for example, the number of games per 3000G in the past. Alternatively, it may be the number of games in an advantageous section executed for a predetermined period, for example, on the day. The advantageous / non-advantage ratio may be the number of games between a predetermined number of games, for example, the number of games per 3000G in the past, or may be the advantageous / non-advantage ratio for a predetermined period, for example, the day.

Further, the ratio of the difference between the number of medals inserted and the number of medals paid out in the advantageous section and the difference between the number of medals inserted and the number of medals paid out in the non-advantageous section may be displayed. In short, the ratio of the medals paid out in the advantageous section to the medals paid out in the non-advantageous section may be calculated and displayed. There are various ways of thinking about the relationship between the advantageous section and the non-advantageous section. By lowering the payout ratio of medals in the advantageous section, it is possible to reduce the fluctuation of the increase / decrease of medals. Further, in order to prevent the advantageous section from being too long, a predetermined limit may be set on the advantageous section, for example, a predetermined number of games, an upper limit of medals to be paid out in the advantageous section, a machine discount in the advantageous section, and the like. ..

The advantageous section is a section in which the ratio of the number of medals to be paid out (machine discount) to the number of medals inserted is higher than that of the non-advantageous section. This is a section that is advantageous for players because the machine discount is high. As advantageous sections, in addition to bonuses in which ordinary and special characters are operating, replay time (RT), assist time (AT), assist replay time (ART), etc. can be mentioned. Can be done. The machine percentage in the advantageous section often exceeds 100%, but may be less than 100% (so-called reduced RT, etc.). If the machine percentage in the advantageous section is less than 100%, the more the game is continued, the more medals will be consumed. It will be advantageous.

The term “during replay time” means, for example, a state in which the winning probability (winning probability) of the replay is higher than that in the state other than during the replay time. During the replay time, the replay probability is higher than during the non-replay time, so that the consumption of medals can be reduced, so that the player is in a relatively advantageous state.

During the assist time, for example, when a condition device for displaying a winning combination on a valid line is established when a predetermined condition such as a predetermined operation procedure is satisfied, the operation procedure is navigated. .. The operation procedure can be navigated by, for example, navigating the stop order when stopping three reels in a predetermined stop order, or navigating the symbol when stopping and displaying a predetermined symbol. There is. During the assist time, the operation procedure is not navigated except during the assist time, so it is uncertain whether or not the operation procedure is executed, but during the assist time, the operation procedure is navigated. Therefore, as long as the player follows the navigation, the winning combination can be aligned with the valid line. Therefore, the player is in a relatively advantageous state.

The assist replay time is a state in which the replay time and the assist time are executed at the same time. The slot machine is designed so that the game progresses by increasing or decreasing medals by combining these advantageous sections and non-advantageous sections. Here, each advantageous section such as during bonus, replay time, assist time, and assist replay time is more advantageous than the non-advantageous section, but the degree of advantage may be smaller.

The advantageous section for calculating the ratio displayed as predetermined information may be all or a part of them. For example, in a slot machine provided with a plurality of advantageous sections as advantageous sections, the advantageous section for calculating the ratio displayed as predetermined information may be only the advantageous section in which the machine percentage exceeds 100%. Further, even if it is an advantageous section of the same type, it may be changed whether or not it is an advantageous section for calculating the ratio displayed as predetermined information depending on the transition condition. For example, in a slot machine that shifts to a predetermined number of games immediately after the end of the bonus and after the end of the bonus, for example, after 1000 games have elapsed, the replay shifts immediately after the end of the bonus. The ratio displayed as predetermined information is calculated as the advantageous section for calculating the ratio displayed as predetermined information during the time, and during the replay time shifted after 1000 games have elapsed since the end of the bonus. It may not be an advantageous section for the purpose.

During the replay time that shifts immediately after the end of the bonus, it is a so-called chance replay time that gives the player who has won many medals in the bonus a chance to win more medals. On the other hand, during the replay time that shifts after 1000 games have passed since the end of the bonus period, the player who has lost many medals is in a so-called relief replay time in which the lost medals are relieved. During such a chance replay time, it is an advantageous section for calculating the ratio displayed as predetermined information, and during the salvage replay time, it is an advantageous section for calculating the ratio displayed as predetermined information. You may not do it.

In addition, in calculating other numerical values such as the winning combination (combination ratio), the winning combination, or the machine discount in the slot machine, for the replay, a predetermined number of medals, for example, three medals are inserted and one game is executed. The calculation may be performed assuming that three medals have been paid out. Alternatively, for the re-game, it may be considered that the game has not been played, and other numerical values such as the winning combination (combination ratio), the winning ratio, or the machine discount in the slot machine may be performed.

Further, the ring buffer provided in the RAM 90102 of the pachinko gaming machine stores the number of prize balls for each of the 6000 prize balls by winning a prize in each winning opening. On the other hand, in the ring buffer in the slot machine, for example, the number of medals to be paid out for each advantageous section and the non-advantageous section for each predetermined number of medals to be paid out may be stored, and the number of medals to be paid out for each predetermined number of games may be stored. The number of medals paid out for the section and the non-advantageous section may be stored. The predetermined number of sheets here may be, for example, 500 sheets or 1000 sheets. In addition, the number may be an appropriate number. Further, the predetermined number of games may be 100 games or 400 games. Assuming that the maximum number of medals to be paid out in one game is 15, the maximum number of medals to be paid out in 400 games is 6000. Therefore, the maximum number of payouts in 400 games can be stored with a margin in the storage area of 2 bytes.

In the above embodiment, in order to notify the effect control board (sub side) of the variation pattern indicating the variation mode such as the variation time, the type of reach effect, and the presence / absence of pseudo-ream, one variation is made when the variation is started. An example of transmitting a pattern specification command is shown, but the variation pattern may be notified to the effect control board by two or more commands. Specifically, when notifying by two commands, the main board (main side) has the presence or absence of pseudo-ream, the presence or absence of slipping effect, etc. in the first command before reaching (so-called when not reaching). A command (for example, a previous fluctuation pattern specification command) indicating the fluctuation time and fluctuation mode (for example, the previous fluctuation pattern) of the second stop is transmitted, and the second command determines the type of reach, the presence or absence of a re-lottery effect, and the like. A command (for example, a post-variation pattern designation command) indicating the fluctuation time and the fluctuation mode (for example, the post-variation pattern) after reaching the reach (after the so-called second stop if the reach is not reached) may be transmitted. ..

In this case, the effect control board may perform effect control in the variation display based on the variation time derived from the combination of the two commands. The main board may notify the fluctuation time by each of the two commands, and the effect control board may select the specific fluctuation mode to be executed at each timing. When sending two commands, the two commands may be sent within the same timer interrupt, and after a predetermined period has elapsed after the first command is sent (for example, the next timer interrupt). In), the second command may be sent. The variation mode shown by each command is not limited to this example, and the order of transmission can be changed as appropriate. By notifying the fluctuation pattern by two or more commands in this way, it is possible to reduce the amount of data that must be stored as the fluctuation pattern specification command.

Only one type of off-design (for example, a symbol indicating "-") is displayed during the variable display of the special symbol, and the variable display may be performed by repeating the display and extinguishing of the symbol. .. Further, even if the symbol is displayed during the variable display, the symbol may not be displayed when the variable display is stopped (the symbol indicating "-" may not be displayed as the display result).

In addition, the image display operation in the image display device for executing the device configuration and data configuration of the game machine, the processing shown in the flowchart, etc., the audio output operation in the speaker, and the lighting operation in the game effect lamp and the decorative LED. Various production operations including the above can be arbitrarily changed and modified without departing from the spirit of the present invention. In addition, the gaming machine of the present invention is not limited to a pay-out type gaming machine that pays out a predetermined number of gaming media as a prize based on the occurrence of a prize, but a score is scored based on the occurrence of a winning by enclosing the gaming medium. It can also be applied to an enclosed gaming machine that grants.

The program and data for realizing the present invention are not limited to the form distributed and provided by the detachable recording medium to the computer device included in the gaming machine such as the pachinko gaming machine 901. , It may take the form of being distributed by pre-installing it in a storage device such as a computer device in advance. Further, the program and data for realizing the present invention are distributed by downloading from other devices on the network connected via a communication line or the like by providing a communication processing unit. It doesn't matter.

The execution mode of the game is not limited to the one executed by attaching a detachable recording medium, but can be executed by temporarily storing the program and data downloaded via the communication line or the like in the internal memory or the like. It may be executed directly by using the hardware resources of other devices on the network connected via a communication line or the like. Furthermore, the game can be executed by exchanging data with another computer device or the like via a network.

Further, in the above embodiment, the number of prize balls (general prize balls) and the number of ordinary electric role prize balls (electric chew prize balls) due to winning in the first starting port (heso) and the general prize opening (sode) to be totaled. Number), the number of special electric prize balls (number of attacker prize balls) is recorded in the ring buffer, has a recording capacity of at least 11 sets, and is updated for each set. However, instead of this format, in the present invention, a format having only two types of total cumulative totals as shown in the explanatory diagram of FIG. 119 can be used. Specifically, it has an RWM9010000 for total cumulative storage and an RWM901001 for total cumulative storage, and is related to winning a game in order to display a joint ratio (synonymous with "combined ratio" in the above embodiment) and a combination ratio. Information (Number of prize balls (general prize balls), number of ordinary electric prize balls (number of electric chew prize balls), special electric prize balls The number (number of attacker prize balls)) is accumulated and stored in RWM9010000 and 901001. Furthermore, by deleting the information related to the winning of the game with the RWM9010000 for total cumulative storage at a predetermined opportunity, the consecutive ratios and the combination ratios calculated based on the total from the deleted timing to the present are the short-term continuous ratio and the combination ratio. It can be displayed as a short-term combination ratio, and the connection ratio and the combination ratio calculated based on the aggregation of the total cumulative storage RWM901001 can be displayed as the cumulative combination ratio and the cumulative combination ratio. With such a configuration, it is sufficient to simply have a plurality of storage areas for accumulating and storing information related to winning a game, and there is no need for a process of storing and updating a certain amount of information such as a ring buffer. It is preferable because it becomes.

As a predetermined trigger, for example, the power can be turned on or off. According to this, the information regarding the winning of the game from the power ON can be aggregated, that is, the daily continuous ratio and the combination ratio can be displayed as the short-term continuous ratio and the short-term combination ratio. Further, in this case, if the RWM901002 is provided to save the cumulative value of the total cumulative storage RWM9010000 when erased, and the cumulative value of the RWM901002 is displayed as the short-term continuous ratio and the short-term combination ratio, the power supply can be used. It is preferable because it is possible to display the short-term continuous ratio and the short-term combination ratio for one day before the input. By using a real-time clock or the like as a predetermined opportunity, it is possible to accurately total short-term continuous ratios and short-term combination ratios such as one day and one hour.

Further, as a predetermined trigger, it can be a trigger related to the game such as setting change, door opening, or touch sensor detection of the steering wheel. According to this, even if it is not a period of one day like turning on the power, it is a short-term continuous ratio and a short-term in a predetermined period (between setting change and setting change, between door opening and door opening). It is preferable because the role ratio can be displayed. Further, as a predetermined opportunity, the same effect can be obtained even if the number of times the demo screen is displayed or the number of times the big hit reaches the predetermined number of times.
In addition, instead of the configuration having two RWMs such as RWM9010000 and 901001, two areas may be formed in the RWM area of the memory space.

Further, in the above embodiment, the format as shown in the explanatory diagram of FIG. 120 may be used instead of the ring buffer format. Specifically, in the RWM area of the memory space, the area 9020000 that aggregates the information related to the winning of the game and the area B1 that stores the cumulative result of the information related to the winning of the game in the 6000th item are stored. Area B2, 18,000 ... An area B10 for storing the cumulative result of information regarding the winning of the 60000th game is provided. Then, information on the winning of the game is added to and updated in the area 9020000, and on the condition that the number of prize balls reaches the 6000th, the winning of the game accumulated and stored in the area 9020000 is related. Information (Number of prize balls (general prize balls), number of ordinary electric prize balls (number of electric chew prize balls), special electric prize balls The value of the number (number of attacker prize balls)) is stored in the area B1. Further, on condition that the number of prize balls reaches the 12000th, the information stored in the area B1 is moved to the area B2, and the information regarding the winning of the game accumulated in the area 9020000 is transferred to the area B1. Remember. In this way, the information of the area 9020000 is put into the area B1 every 6000th item, and the information of the other areas is shifted. Further, after the number of prize balls reaches the 66000th, the information regarding the winning of the game stored in the area B10 is deleted, and the information in the area B9 is controlled to be transferred to the area B10.

With this configuration, the connection ratio and the combination ratio calculated based on the aggregation of the area 9020000 can be displayed as the cumulative combination ratio and the cumulative combination ratio. Further, by subtracting the value of the area B10 from the area 9020000, the most recent 60,000 pieces (that is, for 10 approximate hours) can be displayed as the short-term continuous ratio and the short-term combination ratio. Further, by subtracting the value of the area B1 from the area 9020000, the connection ratio and the combination ratio of the latest 6000 pieces (that is, for about 1 hour) can be displayed as the short-term combination ratio and the short-term combination ratio.

Further, instead of the configuration as shown in FIG. 120, it is possible to provide only the area B10 as shown in FIG. 121. According to this, it is not possible to obtain a fine connection ratio or role ratio of about 1 hour, but since the short-term connection ratio and short-term combination ratio of the latest 60000 pieces (about 10 hours) can be displayed, the capacity is also large. Less is preferable.

Further, in the above embodiment, the format as shown in the explanatory diagram of FIG. 122 may be used instead of the ring buffer format. Specifically, it has an RWM9030000 for total cumulative storage and an RWM903001 for total cumulative storage, and information on winning a game (first starting port (heso) and general winning port (sode) in order to display the continuous ratio and the combination ratio. ), The number of prize balls (general prize balls), the number of ordinary electric prize balls (the number of electric chew prize balls), the number of special electric prize balls (the number of attacker prize balls)) are accumulated in RWM9030000 and 903001. Try to remember.
While the RWM9030000 for total cumulative storage accumulates and stores the first prize ball, the RWM903001 for total cumulative storage waits without storing the first to 60,000 prize balls. However, the number of prize balls is accumulated from the 60001th prize ball and stored. According to this, the difference between the total cumulative storage RWM9030000 and the total cumulative storage RWM903001 is 60,000 pieces, and by subtracting the total cumulative storage RWM9030000 from the total cumulative storage RWM9030000, the continuous ratio and the role ratio for 60,000 pieces can be obtained. It can be displayed as a short-term continuous ratio or a short-term combination ratio. Further, the continuous ratio and the combination ratio calculated based on the total of the total cumulative storage RWM9030000 can be displayed as the cumulative continuous ratio and the cumulative combination ratio.

Further, in the above embodiment, the format as shown in the explanatory diagram of FIG. 123 may be used instead of the ring buffer format. Specifically, the cumulative counters 9040000 and 904001 and the total cumulative counter 9040002 are provided, and the total cumulative counter 9040002 includes information on winning a game (first starting port (heso) and general) in order to display the connection ratio and the combination ratio. The number of prize balls (general prize balls), the number of ordinary electric role prize balls (the number of electric chew prize balls), the number of special electric role prize balls (the number of attacker prize balls)) Accumulate and memorize from the first number. The connection ratio and the combination ratio calculated based on the aggregation of the total cumulative counter 9040002 can be displayed as the cumulative connection ratio and the cumulative combination ratio.

On the other hand, two counters, the cumulative counters 9040000 and 904001, display the continuous ratios and combination ratios for 60,000 pieces as short-term continuous ratios and short-term combination ratios. More specifically, first, the cumulative counter 9040000 starts counting from the first prize ball number, and clears when the prize ball reaches the 60,000th place. On the other hand, the cumulative counter 904001 starts counting from the 30,000th and clears when the prize ball reaches the 90,000th. Then, when trying to calculate the short-term continuous ratio and the short-term combination ratio for 60,000 pieces, for example, in the 30001th to 60000th pieces, the calculation is made based on the total of the cumulative counter 9040000, and the 60001th to 90000th pieces are calculated. Is calculated based on the total of the cumulative counter 904001.
In this way, the cumulative counters 9040000 and 904001 are totaled so that the number of prize balls deviates by 30,000, so when trying to display the short-term continuous ratio and short-term combination ratio, at least 30,000 or less. That is, it is possible to display the short-term continuous ratio and the short-term combination ratio within 5 hours before. According to this, it is preferable because it is possible to suppress the increase in capacity and to display the relatively recent short-term continuous ratio and short-term combination ratio.

(Performance display)
Further, in the gaming machine 901, performance information (described later) can be displayed in place of or in addition to the combination (combination ratio) and the combination ratio display. Hereinafter, displaying performance information is also referred to as performance display. In the gaming machine 901, for example, a performance display is executed on a display monitor provided on the main board 9011 (display monitor 901130 or the like shown in FIG. 151, which will be described later).

124 and 125 are explanatory views regarding performance information. FIG. 124 (A) shows an example of items of performance information displayed by the gaming machine 901. In the gaming machine 901, as the performance information, as shown in the item name column of FIG. 124 (A), the real-time base value and the previous cumulative base value can be displayed. The real-time base value of the item number “bL” is a base value (real-time value during measurement) for every 60,000 outs in the normal state. More specifically, the real-time base value is the number of game balls used (launched) in the normal state, up to 60,000 (0 to 59999), and the ratio of the number of prize balls to the number of game balls being measured ( %) Is a value indicating. The previous cumulative base value of the item number "b6" is the base value (cumulative value measured last time) for every 60,000 outs in the normal state. More specifically, the previous cumulative base value is the number of game balls used (launched) in the normal state, and is a value indicating the ratio (%) of the number of prize balls to the number of 60,000 game balls measured last time. ..

The normal state in the performance display is a state managed or controlled by the above-mentioned game state flag. Specifically, both the probability change flag and the time saving flag are off (however, the state where the round game flag is on is excluded). That is, in the performance display, the state in which all of the probability change flag, the time saving flag, and the round game in-game flag are off is called a normal state. The probability change flag is a flag indicating whether or not it is in the probability change state. The time saving flag is a flag indicating whether or not the time saving state is set. The round game flag will be described later.

In addition, although it was explained that the normal state in the performance display is the state in which all of the probability change flag, the time saving flag, and the round game in progress flag are off, the number of prize balls on the other display (main board 9011 side and effect control board 9012 side). In the display related to the above, etc.), the state when all of the probability change flag, the time saving flag, and the round game in-game flag are off may be set as the normal state. For example, the items B1 to B4 in FIG. 86 may be aggregated when all of the probability change flag, the time saving flag, and the round game in-game flag are in the off state. Further, for example, in relation to FIG. 92 (B), it has been explained that the combination (combination ratio) and the combination ratio may be calculated in consideration of the gaming state, but for example, the normal state (probability variation flag, time saving flag, It is also possible to calculate and display the winning combination (combination ratio) and the winning combination ratio in the state where all of the round gaming flags are off).

FIG. 124 (B) shows the values aggregated (updated) on the game control microcomputer 90100 side for the performance display. The base value shown in FIG. 124 (A) is calculated based on the value shown in FIG. 124 (B). Specifically, the above base value is based on the number of winning balls by all winning openings (the number of winning balls by winning the first general winning opening 9050A, and the winning of the second general winning opening 9050B) with respect to the number of hit balls (60,000). Number of prize balls, number of prize balls by winning the 3rd general winning opening 9050C, number of winning balls by winning the 4th general winning opening 9050D, number of winning balls by the 1st starting winning opening, number of winning balls by the 2nd starting winning opening, It is the ratio (%) of the number of prize balls by the big winning opening. That is, in the gaming machine 901, each value shown in FIG. 124 (B) is aggregated in the normal state, and the real-time base value and the previous cumulative base value shown in FIG. 124 (A) are calculated using the aggregated value. Calculate and display.

FIG. 124 (C) shows a display mode of performance information. In the gaming machine 901, the performance information is displayed on the display monitor provided on the main board 9011 according to the display mode shown in FIG. 124 (C). Specifically, when displaying the real-time base value, the gaming machine 901 displays (blinks or lights up) "bL." In the upper two digits of all four digits to indicate that the real-time base value is used. , A number (%) in the range of "00" to "99" or "---" is displayed (lit) in the lower two digits of all four digits. Although the lower two digits of the four digits are the original real-time base value, the real-time base value may be displayed by displaying all four digits including the upper two digits. When displaying the previous cumulative base value, the gaming machine 901 displays (blinks or lights up) "b6." In the upper two digits of all four digits to indicate that it is the previous cumulative base value. A number (%) in the range of "00" to "99" or "---" is displayed (lit) in the lower two digits of all four digits. In addition, although the lower two digits of all four digits are the original previous cumulative base value, the display of all four digits including the upper two digits may be referred to as the previous cumulative base value.

FIG. 125 (A) shows a section (aggregation section, evaluation section) according to the total number of outs (total number of shots). The “factory shipment test section” in FIG. 125 (A) is a section in which the total number of outs is less than 300. The "first section" is the first section of each section managed for each total number of outs of 60,000 (0 to 59999). The "second section" is the second section of each of the above sections. The "third section" is the third section of each of the above sections. In FIG. 125 (A), the following sections are omitted.

FIGS. 125 (B) to 125 (F) show display modes of performance information according to each section (and the number in the section). In each of FIGS. 125 (B) to 125 (F), the left side is the display mode of the real-time base value, the right side is the display mode of the previous cumulative base value, and the arrows pointing in both directions in the center indicate the real-time base value and the previous cumulative base value. Indicates that it will switch.

FIG. 125 (B) shows a display mode of performance information displayed in the factory shipment test section shown in FIG. 125 (A). In the factory shipment test section, as shown in FIG. 125 (B), the upper two digits are "bL. (Blinking)" and the lower two digits are "--- (lit)", and the upper two digits. The previous cumulative base value, in which the two digits are "b6. (Blinking)" and the lower two digits are "--- (lit)", is displayed alternately every 5 seconds. The radial highlights shown in the upper two digits "bL." On the left side of FIG. 125 (B) and the upper two digits "b6." On the right side are blinking. It shows that. The same applies to FIGS. 125 (C), 125 (D), 125 (E), 146, and 147.

FIG. 125 (C) shows a display mode of performance information displayed when the total number of outs is 0 to 5999 in the first section shown in FIG. 125 (A). When the total number of outs is from 0 to 5999 in the first section, as shown in FIG. 125 (C), the upper two digits are "bL. (Blinking)" and the lower two digits are numerical values. The real-time base value of (%) lighting (“32 (lighting)” in the example of FIG. 125 (C)) and the upper two digits are “b6. (Blinking)” and the lower two digits are “−− (”. (Lighting) ”is displayed alternately every 5 seconds with the previous cumulative base value.

FIG. 125 (D) shows a display mode of performance information displayed when the total number of outs is up to 6000 to 59999 in the first section shown in FIG. 125 (A). When the total number of outs is from 6000 to 59999 in the first section, as shown in FIG. 125 (D), the upper two digits are "bL. (Lighting)" and the lower two digits are numerical values. The real-time base value of (%) lighting (“33 (lighting)” in the example of FIG. 125 (D)) and the upper two digits are “b6. (Blinking)” and the lower two digits are “−− (”. (Lighting) ”is displayed alternately every 5 seconds with the previous cumulative base value.

FIG. 125 (E) shows a display mode of performance information displayed when the total number of outs is 0 to 5999 in the second and subsequent sections shown in FIG. 125 (A). When the total number of outs is from 0 to 5999 in the second and subsequent sections, the upper two digits are "bL. (Blinking)" and the lower two digits are as shown in FIG. 125 (E). The real-time base value of the numerical value (%) lighting (“34 (lighting)” in the example of FIG. 125 (E)) and the upper two digits are “b6. (Lighting)” and the lower two digits are numerical values (%). ) Is lit (“33 (lit)” in the example of FIG. 125 (E)), and the previous cumulative base value is alternately displayed every 5 seconds.

FIG. 125 (F) shows a display mode of performance information displayed when the total number of outs is up to 6000 to 59999 in the second and subsequent sections shown in FIG. 125 (A). When the total number of outs is from 6000 to 59999 in the second and subsequent sections, the upper two digits are "bL. (Lighting)" and the lower two digits are as shown in FIG. 125 (F). The real-time base value of the numerical value (%) lighting (“34 (lighting)” in the example of FIG. 125 (F)) and the upper two digits are “b6. (Lighting)” and the lower two digits are numerical values (%). ) Is lit (“33 (lit)” in the example of FIG. 125 (F)), and the previous cumulative base value is alternately displayed every 5 seconds.

Hereinafter, the configuration and the like of the gaming machine 901 in the case of displaying the performance will be described. FIG. 126 is a front view of the pachinko gaming machine. FIG. 127 is a configuration diagram showing various control boards and the like mounted on the pachinko gaming machine shown in FIG. 126. The gaming machine 901 for displaying the performance described above may have the configurations shown in FIGS. 126 and 127, for example.

In FIG. 126, reference numeral 90700 near the tip of the guide rail (near the exit of the game ball) is a launch ball detector provided with a launch detection sensor 90700A (see FIG. 127). FIG. 126 shows an example in which the launch ball detector 90700 is placed near the exit of the guide rail, but at another position of the guide rail (for example, near the center of the guide rail (for example, at the same height as the normal symbol 9020). The launching ball detector 90700 may be arranged at a position (position), a position closer to the hitting ball launching device of the guide rail (near the entrance), etc.). Although some of the appearances of the game effect lamp 909, the operation button 9030, etc. are different, the same configuration as that of FIG. 42 in FIG. 126 is designated by the same reference numeral as that of FIG. 42, and the configuration (the same configuration as that of FIG. 42). ) Will be omitted.

In FIG. 127, reference numeral 901130 is a display monitor that displays performance information. Reference numeral 90700A is a launch detection sensor. In FIG. 127, the same configurations as those in FIG. 90 are designated by the same reference numerals as those in FIG. 90, and the description of the same configurations (the same configurations as those in FIG. 90) will be omitted.

Subsequently, the operation of the gaming machine 901 and the like in the case of displaying the performance will be described with reference to FIGS. 128 to 135.

FIG. 128 is a flowchart showing an example of special figure processing (also referred to as special symbol process processing). In the special figure processing shown in FIG. 128, the CPU 90103 executes the state control processing (step S901101A). The state control process will be described later. Subsequently, the CPU 90103 executes a start winning determination process (step S901102). In the start prize determination process, the CPU 90103 determines whether or not there is a start prize based on the detection signals from, for example, the first start port switch 9022A and the second start port switch 9022B, and determines whether or not the look-ahead notice effect is executed. , Set the transmission of various commands (holding memory count notification command, start winning judgment result specification command, etc.).

Following the start winning determination process of step S901102, the CPU 90103 selects one of the processes of steps S90110 to S901117 according to the value of the special figure process flag provided in the RAM 90102 (game control flag setting unit in the RAM 90102). And execute.

The special symbol normal processing in step S901110 is executed when the value of the special symbol process flag is “0”. In the special symbol normal processing, it is determined whether or not to start the special symbol game by the first special symbol display device 904A and the second special symbol display device 904B based on the presence or absence of the reserved data (reserved storage). In addition, in the special symbol normal processing, whether or not the variable display result is set to "big hit" by using the random number for determining the special symbol display result, and when it is decided to be "big hit", the random number for determining the big hit type is used. Which big hit type to use and the confirmed special symbol in the special diagram game are decided. Further, in the special symbol normal processing, when it is determined that the variable display result is "big hit", the big hit flag provided in RAM 90102 (game control flag setting unit in RAM 90102) is set to the on state and "big hit". Then, the value corresponding to the determined jackpot type is stored in the jackpot type buffer provided in the RAM 90102 (game control buffer setting unit in the RAM 90102). In the special symbol normal processing, for example, when a confirmed special symbol is determined, the value of the special symbol process flag is updated to "1".

The variation pattern setting process in step S901111 is executed when the value of the special figure process flag is “1”. In the variation pattern setting process, a process of determining the variation pattern to one of a plurality of types is performed using a random number for determining the variation pattern. In the variation pattern setting process, for example, when the variation pattern is determined, the value of the special figure process flag is updated to "2".

The special symbol variation process in step S901112 is executed when the value of the special symbol process flag is “2”. In the special symbol variation processing, the first special symbol display device 904A and the second special symbol display device 904B perform processing to change the special symbol, processing to measure the elapsed time from the start of the variation of the special symbol, and the like. .. In the special symbol variation process, when the elapsed time from the start of the special symbol variation reaches the special symbol variation time, the value of the special symbol process flag is updated to "3".

The special symbol stop processing in step S901113 is executed when the value of the special symbol process flag is “3”. In the special symbol stop process, the first special symbol display device 904A and the second special symbol display device 904B stop and display the confirmed special symbol that is the variable display result of the special symbol for a predetermined time (special symbol confirmed display time). And so on. When the special symbol confirmation display time has elapsed in the special symbol stop processing, the value of the special symbol process flag is updated to "0" or "4" with reference to the jackpot flag. Specifically, when the jackpot flag is on (when the confirmed special symbol is a jackpot symbol), the jackpot flag is cleared to turn it off, and the value of the special symbol process flag is updated to "4". On the other hand, when the jackpot flag is off (when the confirmed special symbol is a missed symbol), the value of the special symbol process flag is updated to "0".

The jackpot opening preprocessing in step S901114 is executed when the value of the special figure process flag is “4”. In the big hit opening pre-processing, the process of waiting until the waiting time until the end of the execution time of the fanfare effect (also referred to as the big hit start effect) executed on the side of the effect control board 9012 (the big hit start effect waiting time) elapses. Or, settings are made to open the big prize opening after the waiting time for the production at the start of the big hit has elapsed. In the big hit opening pre-processing, if the setting for opening the big winning opening is made, the value of the special figure process flag is updated to "5".

The process of opening the jackpot in step S901115 is executed when the value of the special figure process flag is “5”. In the process during the opening of the big hit, the process of determining whether or not the condition for returning the large winning opening from the open state to the closed state is satisfied (the elapse of the upper limit time for opening the large winning opening or the winning of the maximum number of prizes) is satisfied, and after the condition is satisfied. Settings are made to return the big prize opening to the closed state. When the setting for returning the big prize opening to the closed state is made in the process during the big hit opening process, the value of the special figure process flag is updated to "6".

The post-processing after opening the jackpot in step S901116 is executed when the value of the special figure process flag is “6”. In the big hit opening post-processing, a process of determining whether or not the number of executions of the round in which the big winning opening is opened has reached a predetermined number of times is performed. In the jackpot opening post-processing, if the number of round executions has not reached the specified number of times, the value of the special figure process flag is updated to "5", and if the number of times reaches the specified number of times, the value of the special figure process flag is set to "7". Update to.

The jackpot end process of step S901117 is executed when the value of the special figure process flag is “7”. In the jackpot end process, a process of waiting until the end of the execution time of the ending effect (also referred to as the effect at the end of the jackpot) executed on the side of the effect control board 9012 (waiting time for the effect at the end of the jackpot) elapses, etc. Is done. In the big hit end process, when the effect waiting time at the end of the big hit has elapsed, the value of the special figure process flag is updated to "0".

FIG. 129 is a flowchart showing an example of the state control process executed in step S901101A of FIG. 128. In the state control process shown in FIG. 129, the CPU 90103 first determines whether or not the value of the special figure process flag is 4 (step S902001). When the value of the special figure process flag is 4 in step S902001 (step S902001; YES), the CPU 90103 determines whether or not the round gaming flag provided in the RAM 90102 (game control flag setting unit in the RAM 90102) is on. (Step S902002). As described above, the round gaming flag is one of the flags that defines the normal state. If the round gaming flag is on in step S902002 (step S902002; YES), the state control process is terminated.

On the other hand, if the round gaming flag is off in step S902002 (step S902002; NO), is the CPU 90103 turned on the state change switching waiting flag provided in the RAM 90102 (game control flag setting unit in the RAM 90102)? It is determined whether or not (step S902003). The state change switching waiting flag is a flag provided to set the state change switching waiting time (described later) only once when the round game in progress flag is off.

If the state change switching waiting flag is off in step S902003 (step S902003; NO), the CPU 90103 sets the state change switching waiting time (step S902004). Specifically, the CPU 90103 is set as a predetermined timer initial value of the state change switching waiting time timer value, which is a storage value of the state changing switching waiting time timer provided in the RAM 90102 (game control timer setting unit in the RAM 90102). Set the status change switching wait time. The state change switching waiting time set in the process of step S902004 is shorter than the big hit start effect waiting time set in step S902299 of the special symbol stop process (FIG. 130). Although the details will be described later, the time T1 in FIG. 136 is the effect waiting time at the start of the big hit, and the time T2 in FIG. 136 is the state change switching waiting time.

Following step S902004, the CPU 90103 sets the state change switching waiting flag to the on state (step S902005). Then, the state control process is terminated.

If the state change switching waiting flag is turned on in step S902003 (step S902003; YES), the CPU 90103 determines whether or not the state change switching waiting time has elapsed (step S902006). In the process of step S902006, for example, it is determined whether or not the state change switching waiting time timer for which the timer initial value is set has timed out (whether or not the state change switching waiting time timer value has become 0) in step S902004. Just do it. If the state change switching waiting time has not elapsed in step S902006 (step S902006; NO), the state control process ends.

If the state change switching waiting time has elapsed in step S902006 (step S902006; YES), the CPU 90103 clears the state change switching waiting flag and puts it in the off state (step S902007), and turns the round gaming flag on. Set (step S902008).

Following step S902008, the CPU 90103 makes settings for ending the time saving state and the probability change state (step S902009). In the process of step S902009, the CPU 90103 executes a process of clearing the time saving flag and the probability change flag to turn it off. Further, in the process of step S902009, when a value (value other than 0) is set in the probability variation number count value which is the stored value of the probability variation counter provided in the RAM 90102 (game control counter setting unit in the RAM 90102). May execute the process of initializing the probability variation count value to "0". Further, in the process of step S902009, when a value (value other than 0) is set in the time reduction count value, which is the storage value of the time reduction counter provided in the RAM 90102 (game control counter setting unit in the RAM 90102). May execute the process of initializing the time reduction count value to "0". The time reduction counter is a counter for counting the number of times (execution number or remaining number) of the special figure game in which the time reduction control or the high opening control is performed. The probability variation number counter is a counter for counting the number of times (execution count or remaining number of times) of the special figure game for which probability variation control is performed.

Following the process of step S902009, the CPU 90103 makes a setting for transmitting a game state designation command from the main board 9011 to the effect control board 9012 (step S902015). Thereby, the change (transition) of the gaming state in the pachinko gaming machine 901 can be notified to the side of the effect control board 9012. Then, the state control process is terminated.

In the state control process shown in FIG. 129, the game state designation command is transmitted regardless of whether the game state changes or does not change, but when the game state changes (for example, a time saving state or a time saving state). The game state specification command may be transmitted only when the probability change state is changed to the normal state). On the side of the effect control board 9012, the current game state is specified based on the game state designation command transmitted from the main board 9011, but instead of this, the current game state is specified based on the hit start designation command or the like. May be specified. The same applies to the state control process shown in FIG. 142.

When the value of the special figure process flag is not 4 in step S902001 (step S902001; NO), the CPU 90103 determines whether or not the value of the special figure process flag is 7 (step S902010). If the value of the special figure process flag is not 7 in step S902010 (step S902010; NO), the state control process is terminated.

When the value of the special figure process flag is 7 in step S902010 (step S902010; YES), the CPU 90103 determines whether or not the round gaming flag is on (step S902011). If the round gaming flag is off in step S902011 (step S902002; NO), the state control process is terminated.

If the round gaming flag is on in step S902011 (step S902011; YES), the CPU 90103 clears the round gaming flag to turn it off (step S902013).

Following step S902013, the CPU 90103 makes settings for starting a time saving state or a probable change state (step S902014). In the process of step S902014, the CPU 90103 sets the probability change flag and the time saving flag to the ON state according to the jackpot type (value stored in the jackpot type buffer; the jackpot type buffer value), and counts the number of probability changes according to the jackpot type. Set the initial value for the value and the time reduction count value. For example, in the case of a probability variation jackpot in which the probability variation state and the time reduction state continue until the next jackpot after the end of the jackpot, the probability variation flag and the time reduction flag are set to the on state. Also, for example, in the case of a probabilistic jackpot in which the probabilistic state and the time saving state continue until the next big hit or the end of 100 special figure games after the end of the big hit, the probabilistic change flag and the time saving flag are turned on. Set, the probability variation count value is set to 100 as an initial value, and the time reduction count value is set to 100 as an initial value. Also, for example, after the end of the big hit, the probabilistic state and the time saving state continue until the next big hit or the 30 times special figure game is completed, and after the 31st special figure game, until the next big hit. In the case of a probability change jackpot where the time reduction state continues until the 100 special figure games are completed, the probability change flag and the time reduction flag are set to the on state, the probability change count value is set to 30 as the initial value, and the time reduction number is set. Set the count value to 100 as the initial value. Also, for example, in the case of a non-probability variable jackpot where the time saving state continues until the next big hit or the end of 100 special figure games after the end of the big hit, the time saving flag is set to the on state and the time saving number of times. Set the count value to 100 as the initial value. Also, for example, in the case of a non-probability change jackpot that does not enter the probability change state or the time reduction state after the end of the jackpot, nothing is done (the probability change flag and the time reduction flag are not set to the on state, and the probability change number count value is also time reduction. Do not set a value for the count value).

Following step S902014, the CPU 90103 executes the process of step S902015 described above, and ends the state control process.

FIG. 130 is a flowchart showing an example of the special symbol stop processing executed in step S901113 of FIG. 128. In the special symbol stop process shown in FIG. 130, the CPU 90103 first determines whether or not the special symbol confirmation display flag provided in, for example, the game control flag setting unit is on (step S902291). Here, the special figure confirmed display in-display flag is set to the ON state by the process of step S902295 in response to the derivation display of the confirmed special symbol that is the variable display result in the special figure game.

When the flag for confirming the special figure is off in step S902291 (step S902291; NO), the CPU 90103 makes a setting for deriving and displaying the confirmed special symbol (step S902292). Subsequently, the CPU 90103 makes a setting for transmitting the symbol confirmation designation command to the effect control board 9012 (step S902293). Subsequently, the CPU 90103 sets the special symbol confirmation display time, which is the stop display time of the confirmation special symbol (step S902294). Specifically, the CPU 90103 is predetermined as a timer initial value of the special figure confirmation display time timer value which is a stored value of the special figure confirmation display time timer provided in the RAM 90102 (game control timer setting unit in the RAM 90102). Set the special figure confirmation display time.

Following the process of step S902294, the CPU 90103 sets the special figure confirmation display flag to the ON state (step S902295), and ends the special symbol stop process.

When the special figure confirmation display flag is on in step S902291 (step S902291; YES), it is determined whether or not the special figure confirmation display time has elapsed (step S902296). In the process of step S902296, for example, if it is determined in step S902294 whether or not the special figure confirmation display time timer for which the timer initial value is set has timed out (whether or not the special figure fluctuation time timer value has become 0). good. If the special symbol confirmation display time has not elapsed in step S902296 (step S902296; NO), the special symbol stop process is terminated.

When the special figure confirmation display time has elapsed in step S902296 (step S902296; YES), after clearing the special figure confirmation display in-display flag to the off state (step S902297), whether or not the jackpot flag is on is determined. Determination (step S902298). If the jackpot flag is on (step S902298; YES), the effect waiting time at the start of the jackpot is set (step S902299). Specifically, the CPU 90103 uses the CPU 90103 as the timer initial value of the jackpot start effect wait time timer value, which is the stored value of the jackpot start effect wait time timer provided in the RAM 90102 (game control timer setting unit in the RAM 90102). Set the production waiting time at the start of a predetermined jackpot. Following the process of step S902299, the CPU 90103 makes a setting for transmitting a hit start designation command from the main board 9011 to the effect control board 9012 (step S902300). Subsequently, the CPU 90103 clears the jackpot flag to turn it off (step S902301), and sets the jackpot start flag provided in the RAM 90102 (game control flag setting unit in the RAM 90102) to the on state (step S902302). Then, the value of the special symbol process flag is updated to "4" which is a value corresponding to the jackpot opening preprocessing (step S902305), and the special symbol stop processing is terminated.

If the jackpot flag is off in step S902298 (step S902298; NO), it is determined whether or not to end the time saving state or the probability change state (step S902306). In the process of step S902306, the CPU 90103 updates each count value according to whether or not a value (a value other than 0) is set in the probability variation count value or the time reduction count value, and changes the time reduction state or the probability variation state. Judge whether to end or not. For example, when a value is set for the time reduction count value (for example, the special figure game that has been digested after the end of the non-probability variable jackpot, in which the time reduction state continues until the next big hit or the completion of 100 special figure games. (When is 100 times or less, etc.), the time reduction count value is subtracted by 1 and updated. Further, the CPU 90103 determines whether or not the updated time reduction count value matches the time reduction end determination value (for example, "0"), and when the updated time reduction count value does not match the time reduction end determination value. Determines not to end the reduced working hours state. Further, for example, when the values are set in the probability change count value and the time reduction count value (for example, the probability change state and the time reduction state continue until the next big hit or the 100 special figure games are completed. When the special figure game digested after the end of the big hit is 100 times or less), the probability variation count value is subtracted by 1 and updated, and the time reduction count value is subtracted by 1 and updated. Further, the CPU 90103 determines whether or not the updated probability variation count value matches the probability variation end determination value (for example, "0"), and when the updated probability variation count value does not match the probability variation end determination value. Determines that the probabilistic state is not terminated, and if it matches, it is determined that the probabilistic state is terminated, and whether or not the updated time reduction count value matches the time reduction end determination value (for example, "0"). Judgment is made, and if the time reduction count value after the update does not match the time reduction end determination value, it is determined that the time reduction state is not terminated. When the CPU 90103 determines to end the probabilistic change state, it clears the probabilistic change flag and puts it in the off state, and when it determines to end the time saving state, it clears the time saving flag and puts it in the off state.

Following the process of step S902306, a setting for transmitting a game state designation command from the main board 9011 to the effect control board 9012 is made (step S902307). Thereby, the change (transition) of the gaming state in the pachinko gaming machine 901 can be notified to the side of the effect control board 9012. Then, the value of the special symbol process flag is updated (initialized) to "0" (step S902308), and the special symbol stop process is terminated.

In the special symbol stop process shown in FIG. 130, the game state designation command is transmitted regardless of whether the game state changes or does not change, but when the game state changes (for example, a time saving state). The game state specification command may be transmitted only when the state changes from the probable state to the normal state. On the side of the effect control board 9012, the current game state is specified based on the game state designation command transmitted from the main board 9011, but instead of this, the effect control is performed independently of the side of the main board 9011. The current gaming state may be specified by counting the number of times the variable display is executed on the side of the board 9012.

FIG. 131 is a flowchart showing an example of the jackpot opening preprocessing executed in step S901114 of FIG. 128. In the jackpot opening preprocessing shown in FIG. 131, the CPU 90103 first determines whether or not the jackpot start flag is on (step S902131). Here, the jackpot start flag is set to the on state corresponding to the jackpot flag being on in the special symbol stop processing (step S902302 in FIG. 130).

If the big hit start flag is not turned on in step S902131 (step S902131; NO), the big winning opening determination process (see FIG. 133) is executed (step S90220), and the process proceeds to step S902138. In this way, by executing the big winning opening determination processing in the big hit opening post-processing in step S901114 in addition to the big hit opening processing in step S901115, the winning (over winning) exceeding the winning upper limit determination value is suitably detected. be able to. For example, over-winning can be suitably detected during the next open waiting (while step S902138 (YES)). The large winning opening determination process will be described later.

In addition, although it was explained that the addition of the number of prize balls when the game balls have won more than the predetermined number of balls in the large prize opening per unit time is excluded, the over prize is not excluded. In other words, even if there is a prize that exceeds the above-mentioned "upper limit judgment value of prize", if the number of prizes in excess is within the range generally assumed as over prize (for example, up to about +3), the prize ball (actual payout). , Reflected in performance information). Exclusion from the addition of the number of prize balls is due to fraudulent activity, and the excess number of prizes is outside the range generally assumed as over prize.

If the jackpot start flag is on in step S902131 (step S902131; YES), it is determined whether or not the jackpot start effect waiting time has elapsed (step S902132). In the process of step S902132, for example, whether or not the jackpot start effect wait time timer for which the timer initial value is set in step S902299 of the special symbol stop process has timed out (the jackpot start effect wait time timer value becomes 0). Whether or not it is) may be determined.

If the effect waiting time at the start of the big hit has not elapsed (step S902132; NO), the big hit opening pre-processing is terminated.

If the effect waiting time at the start of the big hit has elapsed (step S902132; YES), the CPU 90103 clears the flag at the start of the big hit (step S902134). Subsequently, the CPU 90103 clears the large winning opening opening number counter (step S902135). Specifically, the count value of the number of times the large winning opening is opened is initialized to "1". Subsequently, the CPU 90103 reads the jackpot type buffer value (step S902136), and sets the release control pattern corresponding to the read jackpot type buffer value (step S902137). That is, the opening control pattern of the special variable winning ball device 907 (big winning opening) is set according to the big hit type determined in the special symbol normal processing. In the opening control pattern, for example, a large winning opening opening upper limit time for each round is set.

Following the process of step S902137 or the process of step S90220, the CPU 90103 determines whether or not the next release standby is in progress (step S902138). That is, it is determined whether or not it is during the interval period until the big winning opening is opened as the next round. In the process of step S902138, for example, whether or not the round start waiting time timer for which the timer initial value is set has timed out in step S902366 of the big hit opening post-processing (whether or not the round start waiting time timer value has become 0). Should be determined. If the next opening standby is in progress (step S902138; YES), that is, if the interval period has not ended, the jackpot opening pre-processing is terminated.

On the other hand, if it is not in the next opening standby (step S902138; NO), that is, when the interval period ends, the CPU 90103 controls the start of opening the large winning opening (step S902139). For example, the CPU 90103 sets the opening time for opening the large winning opening based on the opening control pattern set in step S902137 and the count value in the large winning opening opening counter, and the large winning opening is opened. To set. Specifically, in the process of step S902139, for example, the CPU 90103 steps as the timer initial value of the open time timer value which is the stored value of the open time timer provided in the RAM 90102 (game control timer setting unit in the RAM 90102). The upper limit time for opening the large winning opening of the corresponding round in the opening control pattern set in S902137 (the upper limit time for opening the opening state) is set. Further, in the process of step S902139, the solenoid 9028 for the big winning door may be set to be turned on by transmitting a solenoid drive signal via the solenoid circuit 90111 or the like. In the case of the first round (when the big hit pre-opening process is executed after the special symbol stop process), the round start waiting time (interval period) is not set (because it is zero), so the step. In the process of S902138, it is immediately determined that the next release waiting is not in progress.

Following the process of step S902139, the CPU 90103 sets the effect control board 9012 to send a notification command during the opening of the winning opening (step S902140). Then, the value of the special figure process flag is updated to "5" (step S902141), and the jackpot opening preprocessing is terminated.

FIG. 132 is a flowchart showing an example of the jackpot opening process executed in step S901115 of FIG. 128. In the jackpot opening process shown in FIG. 132, the CPU 90103 first determines whether or not the jackpot opening upper limit time has elapsed (step S902121). If the upper limit time for opening the large winning opening has not elapsed (step S902121; NO), the large winning opening determination process is executed (step S90220).

FIG. 133 shows the jackpot opening pre-processing (step S901114) of FIG. 131, the jackpot opening processing of FIG. 132 (step S901115), the jackpot opening post-processing of FIG. 134 (step S901116), and the jackpot end processing of FIG. 135 (step S901117). It is a flowchart which shows an example of the big prize opening determination process executed in.

In the large winning opening determination process shown in FIG. 133, the CPU 90103 first determines whether or not the detection signal transmitted from the count switch 9023 is in the ON state (step S90221). If the count switch 9023 is not on (step S90221; NO), the large winning opening determination process is terminated.

When the count switch 9023 is on (step S90221; YES), the transmission setting of the big prize opening winning notification command for notifying the effect control board 9012 of the winning of the game ball to the big winning opening is made. (Step S90222). Subsequently, it is determined whether or not the value of the special figure process flag is “5”, which is a value corresponding to the processing during the opening of the big hit (step S90223). If the value of the special figure process flag is not "5", which is a value corresponding to the processing during the opening of the big hit (step S90223; NO), the large winning opening determination processing is terminated.

If the value of the special figure process flag is "5" corresponding to the processing during the jackpot opening (step S90223; YES), the winning number counter provided in the RAM 90102 (game control counter setting unit in the RAM 90102) is stored. The value is updated so that the winning number count value is added by 1 (step S90224). Then, the large winning opening judgment process is completed. When the process of step S90224 is performed in the large winning opening determination process, the prize ball payout process is executed in the prize ball process. Further, as shown in FIG. 124 (B), if all of the probability change flag, the time saving flag, and the round game in-game flag are in the off state, the number of prize balls by the big winning opening is updated in relation to the performance display. .. However, as shown in FIG. 129, at least during the period from the start of the first round (closed → open of the big winning door) to the end of the final round (opening → closing of the big winning door), the round game is in progress. Since the flag is on instead of off, the number of prize balls by the above-mentioned big winning opening is not updated during the period.

Return to FIG. 132. Following the large winning opening determination process shown in FIG. 133, it is determined whether or not the winning number count value has reached a predetermined winning upper limit determination value (for example, “10”) (step S902126). If the winning upper limit determination value has not been reached (step S902126; NO), the process of opening the jackpot is terminated.

On the other hand, when the upper limit time for opening the large winning opening has elapsed in step S902121 (step S902121; YES), or when the upper limit determination value for winning is reached in step S902126 (step S902126; YES), the opening of the large winning opening is opened. Controls the end of (step S902127). That is, the CPU 90103 determines that the current round game is finished, and sets the large winning opening to be closed. For example, it may be set to stop the transmission of the drive signal to the solenoid 9082. Subsequently, the CPU 90103 clears the winning number counter and initializes the winning number count value to "0" (step S902128). Then, the value of the special figure process flag is updated to "6" (step S902129), and the processing during the jackpot opening process is terminated.

FIG. 134 is a flowchart showing an example of the jackpot opening post-processing executed in step S901116 of FIG. 128. In the big hit opening post-processing shown in FIG. 134, the CPU 90103 first executes the big winning opening determination process shown in FIG. 133 (step S90220). In this way, by executing the big winning opening determination processing in the big hit opening post-processing in step S901116 in addition to the big hit opening processing in step S901115, the winning (over winning) exceeding the winning upper limit determination value is suitably detected. be able to.

After executing the large winning opening determination process shown in FIG. 133, the CPU 90103 updates so that the large winning opening opening count value is incremented by 1 (step S902364). Subsequently, it is determined whether or not the updated large winning opening opening count value has reached the maximum value (step S902365).

In step S902365, the above-mentioned "maximum value" to be compared with the updated large winning opening opening count value is a number obtained by adding 1 to the upper limit number of rounds. That is, the large winning opening opening count value to be compared with the above "maximum value" is the one after the update (step S902364), and the initial value of the large winning opening opening count value is "1" (FIG. 131). S902135), the above "maximum value" needs to be a number obtained by adding 1 to the upper limit of the number of rounds. For example, in the case of a 6-round jackpot (when the maximum number of rounds is 6), the above "maximum value" is "7", and in the case of a 16-round jackpot (when the maximum number of rounds is 16). The above "maximum value" is "17". It should be noted that the "maximum value" may be compared with the large winning opening opening count value before the update instead of the large winning opening opening count value after the update, and compared with the large winning opening opening count value before the update. In that case, the "maximum value" may be set as the upper limit of the number of rounds.

If the count value for the number of times the large winning opening is opened is other than the maximum value (step S902365; NO), the round start waiting time (interval time) is set (step S902366). Specifically, for example, the CPU 90103 has a predetermined timer initial value of the round start waiting time timer value, which is a stored value of the round start waiting time timer provided in the RAM 90102 (game control timer setting unit in the RAM 90102). Set the round start wait time.

Following step S902366, the CPU 90103 makes settings for transmitting a notification command after opening the large winning opening to the effect control board 9012 (step S902367). Then, the value of the special figure process flag is updated to "4" (step S902368), and the post-processing after opening the big hit is completed. In this way, until the updated large winning opening opening count value is determined to be the maximum value by the process of step S902365, the processes of steps S901114 to S901116 shown in FIG. 128 and the like are repeatedly executed. It is possible to execute multiple rounds in which the big winning opening is opened in the big hit game state. Further, by setting the round start waiting time in the process of step S902366, the process of step S901114 shown in FIG. 128 or the like waits for the next opening until the round start waiting time elapses (FIG. 131). Step S902138; YES), the next round can be started with a desired interval period.

If the count value for the number of times the big winning opening is opened is the maximum value in step S902365 (step S902365; YES), the effect waiting time at the end of the big hit is set (step S902369). Specifically, for example, the CPU 90103 has a timer initial value of the jackpot end effect wait time timer value, which is a stored value of the jackpot end effect wait time timer provided in the RAM 90102 (game control timer setting unit in the RAM 90102). As a result, the production waiting time at the end of a predetermined jackpot is set.

Following step S902369, the CPU 90103 makes a setting for transmitting a hit end designation command to the effect control board 9012 (step S902370). Then, the value of the special figure process flag is updated to "7" (step S902371), and the post-processing after opening the big hit is completed. In this way, by setting the effect waiting time at the end of the big hit in the process of step S902369, according to the end of the ending effect executed on the side of the effect control board 9012 (step S902321; YES in FIG. 135), FIG. The special symbol normal processing of step S901110 shown in 128 can be executed.

FIG. 135 is a flowchart showing an example of the jackpot end process executed in step S901117 of FIG. 128. In the jackpot end process shown in FIG. 135, the CPU 90103 first determines whether or not the effect waiting time at the end of the jackpot has elapsed (step S902321). In the processing of step S902321, for example, whether or not the jackpot end-time effect waiting time timer for which the timer initial value is set in step S902369 of the jackpot opening post-processing has timed out (the jackpot end-time effect waiting time timer value becomes 0). Whether or not it is) may be determined. If the effect waiting time at the end of the big hit has not elapsed in step S902321 (step S902321; NO), the big winning opening determination process shown in FIG. 133 is executed (step S90220), and the big hit end process is ended. In this way, by executing the big prize opening determination process in the big hit end process of step S901117 in addition to the big hit opening process of step S901115, the winning (over winning) exceeding the winning upper limit determination value is suitably detected. Can be done.

When the effect waiting time at the end of the big hit has elapsed in step S902321 (step S902321; YES), the value of the special figure process flag is updated to "0" (step S902325), and the execution of the big hit end process is terminated.

The operation of the gaming machine 901 in the case of performing the performance display has been described above with reference to FIGS. 128 to 135, but according to the flowchart shown in FIGS. 128 to 135, it is a definite special symbol in the special figure game. After the symbol is stopped and displayed, it is controlled to the jackpot gaming state, but the round gaming flag is turned on before the opening of the first round. Hereinafter, it will be described in detail.

(A) End of fanfare effect → First opening of special variable winning ball device After the jackpot symbol is stopped and displayed for a predetermined time (special symbol confirmation display time), the CPU 90103 performs the fanfare effect execution time in the special symbol stop process. The waiting time until the end of (step S902299 at the start of the big hit) is set (step S902299 in FIG. 130), and the value of the special figure process flag is updated to "4". Further, in the big hit opening pre-processing, the CPU 90103 opens the big winning opening after the lapse of the waiting time (step S902132 in FIG. 131; YES) (step S902139 in FIG. 131). That is, the special variable winning ball device 907 is in the closed state before the end of the fanfare effect, and is in the first open state after the end of the fanfare effect.

(B) Set the round game flag to the on state → End of fanfare effect When the value of the special figure process flag is updated to "4", the CPU 90103 sets the state change switching waiting time (FIG. 129). Step S902004), after the state change switching waiting time has elapsed (step S902006 in FIG. 129; YES), the round gaming flag is set to the on state (step S902008 in FIG. 129). Then, as described above, the state change switching waiting time is shorter than the effect waiting time at the start of the big hit (execution time of the fanfare effect). That is, the flag during the round game is turned on before the end of the fanfare effect.

From the above (A) and (B), the flag during the round game is set to the ON state → the end of the fanfare effect → the first opening of the special variable winning ball device 907. That is, the flag during the round game is turned on before the opening of the first round.

Further, as described above, a gaming state in which the number of prize balls and the number of hit balls is collected for performance display is referred to as a normal state, and the normal state is specifically a probability change flag, a time saving flag, and a round game. All of the middle flags are in the off state (see FIG. 124). Therefore, at least when the round game flag is on, it does not correspond to the normal state, and at least when the round game flag is on, the number of prize balls and the number of hit balls are not collected for performance display. That is, at least when the round game flag is on, the number of prize balls and the number of hit balls are not reflected in the performance display.

According to the above (A) and (B), since the round game flag is turned on before the opening of the first round, the number of prize balls and the number of hit balls are set from a certain stage before the opening of the first round at the latest. The number is not reflected in the performance display (it is not reflected more accurately). In addition, the expression "at the latest" is when the gaming state during execution of the special figure game before the special figure game in which the jackpot symbol is stopped and displayed is a probability change state or a time reduction state (that is, at least the probability change flag or the time reduction flag). (When one is on), a stage before the above "a certain stage before the opening of the first round" (for example, a stage during execution of the special figure game before the special figure game in which the jackpot symbol is stopped and displayed), etc. This is because the number of prize balls and the number of hit balls are not already reflected in the performance display.

FIG. 136 is an explanatory diagram illustrating a state change switching waiting time and the like. In the figure, the direction from left to right shows the passage of time, and the direction from top to bottom shows the flow of the game ball. The upper part of the figure shows the display of the image display device 905. The lower side of the display of the image display device 905 is, in order from the top, the detection timing of the game ball by the launch ball detector 90700 (launch detection sensor 90700A), and the state (open state) of the special variable winning ball device 907 (large winning door). , Closed state), the winning timing to the big winning opening (the detection timing of the game ball by the count switch 9023) is shown.

As shown in FIG. 136, the jackpot symbol (shown as the confirmed decorative symbol “777” in the image display device 905 in the same figure) is stopped and displayed as the confirmed special symbol in the special diagram game (more details are shown in FIG. 130). When the special figure confirmation display time has elapsed) and the effect waiting time at the start of the big hit (shown as a fanfare effect in the figure) is completed, the special variable winning ball device 907 is opened for the first time (the first R is opened in the figure). (Illustrated as) is performed. The jackpot effect in the image display device 905 is an effect performed during the execution of the jackpot opening process (FIG. 132). In addition to the effect performed during the execution of the jackpot opening process (FIG. 132), the effect performed during the execution of the jackpot opening post-processing (FIG. 134) may also be referred to as a jackpot effect.

The timing t1 shown at the lower part of FIG. 136 is the timing at which the jackpot symbol is stopped and displayed as the confirmed special symbol in the special diagram game. The timing t3 is the timing at which the effect waiting time at the start of the big hit ends and the first opening is performed in the special variable winning ball device 907. The time T1 between the timing t1 and the timing t3 is the jackpot start effect waiting time set in step S902299 of the special symbol stop process (FIG. 130). The timing t2 and the like will be described later.

Further, FIG. 136 schematically shows how three game balls (game ball a, game ball b, game ball c) launched by the hit ball launcher are detected by the launch detection sensor 90700A. The game ball a is detected by the launch detection sensor 90700A at a timing slightly earlier than the timing t1 (for example, during reach production, etc.), and is not detected by the count switch 9023 (for example, the big winning door that is closed). A game ball, etc. that has flowed down the front side). The game ball b is a game ball that is detected by the launch detection sensor 90700A at timing t2, picked up by the big winning door at timing t3 (the moment when it is opened), and detected by the count switch 9023. The game ball c is a game ball that is detected by the launch detection sensor 90700A at a timing slightly later than the timing t2, picked up by the winning door at a timing slightly later than the timing t3, and detected by the count switch 9023.

The time T2 between the timing t1 and the timing t2 is the state change switching waiting time set in step S902004 of the state control process (FIG. 129). The game ball b detected by the launch detection sensor 90700A at the timing t2 flows down the game area 9010 at the slowest possible flow speed after being detected by the launch detection sensor 90700A, and the big winning door immediately after opening. It is assumed that the game ball is picked up by the user and detected by the count switch 9023. In other words, the game ball detected by the launch detection sensor 90700A at a timing earlier than the timing t2 is not detected by the count switch 9023. That is, the timing t2 is the earliest timing at which the game ball picked up by the big winning door at the moment of opening can be detected by the launch detection sensor 90700A.

That is, since there is a game ball detected by the count switch 9023 among the game balls detected by the launch detection sensor 90700A before the opening of the big winning door (for example, during the execution period of the fanfare effect) (for example, the game). (A game ball detected by the launch detection sensor 90700A at any timing of the time T3 like the ball c), even if the game ball is detected by the launch detection sensor 90700A before the opening of the grand prize opening door, the count switch 9023 In order not to reflect the detectionable game ball on the performance display, the round game in-game flag is set to the ON state at the timing t2 (when the time T2 has elapsed) (step S902008 in FIG. 129).

It should be noted that, although it is tentative, when the round game in-game flag is set to the ON state at the timing t3 (when the performance display is not reflected from the opening timing of the big prize opening door), for example, at the time T3 like the game ball c. The game ball detected by the launch detection sensor 90700A at any timing is reflected in the performance display as the number of hit balls, but is not reflected in the performance display as the number of prize balls when a prize is won in the big winning opening. Inconsistencies will occur and accurate performance display will not be possible. On the other hand, if the round gaming flag is set to the ON state at the timing t2 (when the time T2 has elapsed), the above-mentioned problem is solved.

It should be noted that the timing t2 has been described as the earliest timing in which the game ball picked up by the big winning door at the moment of opening can be detected by the launch detection sensor 90700A, but the timing t2 is not limited to this. For example, the timing t2 may be the average timing when the game ball picked up by the big winning door at the moment of opening is detected by the launch detection sensor 90700A, or the timing is later than the average timing. You may. That is, the state change switching waiting time (time T2) set in step S902004 of the state control process (FIG. 129) takes into consideration the flow time of the game ball (launching ball detector 90700 → special variable winning ball device 907). It should be. However, in order to display the performance more accurately, it is preferable to set the above-mentioned earliest timing as the timing t2. The same applies to FIG. 139.

[Modification example of launch ball detector]
FIG. 137 is a front view of the pachinko gaming machine. FIG. 138 is a configuration diagram showing various control boards and the like mounted on the pachinko gaming machine shown in FIG. 137. The gaming machine 901 for displaying the performance may have the configurations shown in FIGS. 137 and 138, for example.

In FIG. 137, reference numeral 90701 above the first passage gate 9041A is a first launch ball detector comprising a first launch detection sensor 90701A (see FIG. 138). All the game balls that pass through the left game area 9010A pass through the first launch ball detector 90701. That is, the first launch ball detector 90701 (first launch detection sensor 90701A) detects all the game balls that pass through the left game area 9010A. Reference numeral 90702 above the second passage gate 9041B is a second launch ball detector comprising a second launch detection sensor 90702A (see FIG. 138). All the game balls that pass through the right game area 9010B pass through the second launch ball detector 90702. That is, the second launch ball detector 90702 (second launch detection sensor 90702A) detects all the game balls that pass through the right game area 9010B.

FIG. 137 shows an example in which the launch ball detectors 90701 and 90702 are arranged above the passage gates 9041A and 9041B, but if all the game balls can be detected, other positions (for example, the passage gates 9041A and 9041B) are shown. The launcher detectors 90701 and 90702 may be arranged below (such as below). In FIG. 137, the same configuration as that of FIG. 126 is designated by the same reference numeral as that of FIG. 126, and the description of the configuration (the same configuration as that of FIG. 126) will be omitted.

In FIG. 138, reference numeral 90701A is a first launch detection sensor. Reference numeral 90702A is a second emission detection sensor. In FIG. 138, the same configurations as those in FIG. 127 are designated by the same reference numerals as those in FIG. 127, and the description of the configurations (the same configurations as those in FIG. 127) will be omitted.

The operation shown in FIGS. 128 to 135 is also applied to the gaming machine 901 having the configurations shown in FIGS. 137 and 138. In other words, the special figure processing in the case of displaying the performance in the gaming machine 901 having the configuration shown in FIGS. 126 and 127, and the special drawing processing in the case of displaying the performance in the gaming machine 901 having the configuration shown in FIGS. 137 and 138. It is common with figure processing.

139 is an explanatory diagram illustrating a state change switching waiting time and the like in the gaming machine 901 having the configurations shown in FIGS. 137 and 138. In FIG. 139, the direction from left to right indicates the passage of time, and the direction from top to bottom indicates the flow of the game ball. The upper part of the figure shows the display of the image display device 905. The lower side of the display of the image display device 905 is, in order from the top, the detection timing of the game ball by the launch ball detector 90701, 90702 (launch detection sensors 90701A, 90702A), and the special variable winning ball device 907 (large winning door). The state (open state, closed state) and the winning timing to the large winning opening (the detection timing of the game ball by the count switch 9023) are shown.

Further, in FIG. 139, three game balls (game ball a, game ball b, game ball c) launched by the hit ball launcher are detected by the first launch detection sensor 90701A (or the second launch detection sensor 90702A) and the like. It is schematically shown how it is done. The game ball a is detected by the first launch detection sensor 90701A (or the second launch detection sensor 90702A) at a timing slightly later than the timing t1, and is not detected by the count switch 9023 (for example, is in a closed state). A game ball, etc. that has flowed down the front side of the big prize opening door). The game ball b is detected by the first launch detection sensor 90701A (or the second launch detection sensor 90702A) at timing t2, picked up by the big prize opening door at timing t3 (the moment when it is opened), and detected by the count switch 9023. It is a game ball to be played. The game ball c is detected by the first launch detection sensor 90701A (or the second launch detection sensor 90702A) at a timing slightly later than the timing t3, and is picked up by the winning door at a timing slightly later than the timing t3. It is a game ball detected by the count switch 9023.

The first launch ball detector 90701 (first launch detection sensor 90701A) and the second launch ball detector 90702 (second launch detection sensor 90702A) can detect the game ball at the same time, but detect the game ball at the same time. Even in this case, it is possible to capture (count) each of the game balls detected at the same time as the number of hit balls. For example, for one of them, the execution timing of the process (process to be counted) executed after the detection may be shifted, and the game balls detected at the same time may be captured as the number of hit balls.

Since the arrangement position of the launch ball detector 90700 shown in FIG. 126 and the arrangement position of the first launch ball detector 90701 and the second launch ball detector 90702 shown in FIG. 137 are different, they are shown in FIGS. 136 and 139. As shown in FIGS. 126 and 138, the time until the game ball launched by the hit ball launcher in the configurations of FIGS. 137 and 138 is detected by the first launch ball detector 90701 (or the second launch ball detector 90702) is shown in FIGS. 126 and 138. In the configuration of FIG. 127, it is longer than the time until the game ball launched by the hit ball launcher is detected by the launch ball detector 90700. Further, in the configurations of FIGS. 137 and 138, the time until the game ball detected by the first launch ball detector 90701 (or the second launch ball detector 90702) reaches the arrangement position of the special variable winning ball device 907 is determined. In the configurations of FIGS. 126 and 127, the game ball detected by the launch ball detector 90700 is shorter than the time required to reach the placement position of the special variable winning ball device 907.

Therefore, the state change switching waiting time (time T2 in FIG. 139) set in the case of the configurations of FIGS. 137 and 138 is the state change switching waiting time (time T2 in FIG. 139) set in the case of the configurations of FIGS. 126 and 127. Time is longer than T2).

The first launch ball detector 90701 and the second launch ball detector 90702 (or the parts (referred to as parts A) including the first launch ball detector 90701 and the second launch ball detector 90702) are attached to the game board 902. On the other hand, it may be removable. Further, the game board 902 may be composed of a component A and one or more components other than the component A, and the component A may be detachable from one or more components other than the component A. For example, in FIG. 137, the portion including the first launch ball detector 90701 and the second launch ball detector 90702 (the portion above the broken line P in the figure) may be removable.

[Modification example using out-ball detector]
FIG. 140 is a front view of the pachinko gaming machine. FIG. 141 is a configuration diagram showing various control boards and the like mounted on the pachinko gaming machine shown in FIG. 140. The gaming machine 901 for displaying the performance may have the configurations shown in FIGS. 140 and 141, for example.

In FIG. 140, reference numeral 90710 in the broken line is an out-ball detector including the out-ball detection sensor 90710A. The out-ball detector 90710 is arranged at a position invisible from the front side, but for convenience of explanation, it is shown by using a broken line in FIG. 140. Further, reference numeral 9052 is an out port. Enter the winning openings (1st general winning opening 9050A, 2nd general winning opening 9050B, 3rd general winning opening 9050C, 4th general winning opening 9050D, 1st starting winning opening, 2nd starting winning opening, large winning opening) The missing game ball is taken into the out port 9052.

The out-ball detector 90710 detects all the game balls launched into the game area 9010 by the hit ball launcher. That is, the game ball launched into the game area 9010 has a winning opening (1st general winning opening 9050A, 2nd general winning opening 9050B, 3rd general winning opening 9050C, 4th general winning opening 9050D, 1st starting winning opening, Either the player enters the second starting winning slot (the second starting winning slot, the large winning slot), or the player enters the out slot 9052 without entering the winning slot. Both the game ball that has entered the winning opening and the game ball that has been taken into the out opening 9052 are finally collected in one path on the back surface (or inside) of the game board 902. Since the out-ball detector 90710 is arranged on the above path, it detects all the game balls launched into the game area 9010 by the hit ball launcher.

FIG. 140 shows an example in which the out ball detector 90710 is arranged at the center in the left-right direction (below the out opening), but if all the game balls can be detected, another position (for example, the right side in the left-right direction) is shown. The out-ball detector 90710 may be arranged closer to the left side in the left-right direction, etc.). In FIG. 140, the same configuration as that of FIG. 126 is designated by the same reference numeral as that of FIG. 126, and the description of the configuration (the same configuration as that of FIG. 126) will be omitted.

In FIG. 141, reference numeral 90710A is an out-ball detection sensor. In FIG. 141, the same configuration as that of FIG. 127 is designated by the same reference numeral as that of FIG. 127, and the description of the configuration (the same configuration as that of FIG. 127) is omitted.

In the gaming machine 901 having the configuration shown in FIGS. 140 and 141, the state control process (FIG. 142) of step S901101B is executed instead of the state control process (FIG. 128 and 129) of step S901101A. The other special drawing processes (each process shown in FIGS. 130 to 135) are also applied to the gaming machine 901 having the configurations shown in FIGS. 140 and 141.

FIG. 142 is a flowchart showing an example of the state control process executed in the gaming machine 901 having the configurations shown in FIGS. 140 and 141. In the state control process shown in FIG. 142, the CPU 90103 first determines whether or not the value of the special figure process flag is 7 (step S92021). When the value of the special figure process flag is 7 in step S902021 (step S902021; YES), the CPU 90103 determines whether or not the round gaming flag is on (step S92022). If the round gaming flag is off in step S92022 (step S92022; NO), the state control process is terminated.

On the other hand, if the round gaming flag is on in step S902022 (step S902022; YES), the CPU 90103 determines whether or not the state change switching waiting flag is on (step S902023).

If the state change switching waiting flag is off in step S902023 (step S902023; NO), the CPU 90103 sets the state change switching waiting time (step S902024). Specifically, the CPU 90103 sets a predetermined state change switching waiting time as a timer initial value of the state change switching waiting time timer value which is a stored value of the state change switching waiting time timer. The state change switching waiting time set in the process of step S902024 is shorter than the effect waiting time at the end of the big hit set in step S902369 of the big hit opening post-processing (FIG. 134). Although the details will be described later, the time T4 in FIG. 143 is the effect waiting time at the end of the big hit, and the time T5 in FIG. 143 is the state change switching waiting time.

Following step S902024, the CPU 90103 sets the state change switching waiting flag to the on state (step S902025). Then, the state control process is terminated.

If the state change switching waiting flag is turned on in step S902023 (step S902023; YES), the CPU 90103 determines whether or not the state change switching waiting time has elapsed (step S902026). In the process of step S902026, for example, it is determined whether or not the state change switching waiting time timer for which the timer initial value is set has timed out (whether or not the state change switching waiting time timer value has become 0). Just do it. If the state change switching waiting time has not elapsed in step S902026 (step S902026; NO), the state control process ends.

If the state change switching waiting time has elapsed in step S902026 (step S902026; YES), the CPU 90103 clears the state change switching waiting flag to turn it off (step S902027), and clears the round gaming flag. Turn off (step S902028).

Following step S902028, the CPU 90103 makes settings for starting a time saving state or a probable change state (step S902029). The process of step S902029 is the same as the process of step S902014 of the state control process (step S901101A) shown in FIG. 129.

Following step S902029, the CPU 90103 makes settings for transmitting a game state designation command from the main board 9011 to the effect control board 9012 (step S902035). Thereby, the change (transition) of the gaming state in the pachinko gaming machine 901 can be notified to the side of the effect control board 9012. Then, the state control process is terminated.

When the value of the special figure process flag is not 7 in step S902021 (step S902021; NO), the CPU 90103 determines whether or not the value of the special figure process flag is 4 (step S902030). If the value of the special figure process flag is not 4 in step S902030 (step S902030; NO), the state control process is terminated.

When the value of the special figure process flag is 4 in step S902030 (step S902030; YES), the CPU 90103 determines whether or not the round gaming flag is on (step S902031). If the round gaming flag is on in step S92032 (step S902032; YES), the state control process is terminated.

If the round gaming flag is off in step S90231 (step S92031; NO), the CPU 90103 determines whether or not the effect waiting time at the start of the big hit has elapsed (step S902032). In the process of step S90232, as in the process of step S902132 of the jackpot opening preprocessing (step S901114) shown in FIG. 131, the jackpot start in which the timer initial value is set in step S902299 of the special symbol stop process shown in FIG. It suffices to determine whether or not the time effect waiting time timer has timed out. If the effect waiting time at the start of the big hit has not elapsed in step S902032 (step S902032; NO), the state control process ends.

If the effect waiting time at the start of the big hit has elapsed in step S902032 (step S902032; YES), the CPU 90103 sets the round gaming flag to the on state (step S902033).

Following step S902033, the CPU 90103 makes a setting for terminating the time saving state or the probable change state (step S902034). The process of step S902034 is the same as the process of step S902009 of the state control process (step S901101A) shown in FIG. 129.

Following the process of step S902034, the CPU 90103 executes the process of step S902035 described above, and ends the state control process.

FIG. 143 is an explanatory diagram illustrating a state change switching waiting time and the like in the gaming machine 901 having the configurations shown in FIGS. 140 and 141. In FIG. 143, the direction from left to right indicates the passage of time, and the direction from top to bottom indicates the flow of the game ball. The upper part of the figure shows the display of the image display device 905. The lower side of the display of the image display device 905 is the state (open state, closed state) of the special variable winning ball device 907 (large winning opening door) and the winning timing to the large winning opening (game by the count switch 9023) in order from the top. (Ball detection timing), the detection timing of the game ball by the out ball detector 90710 (out ball detection sensor 90710A) is shown.

As shown in FIG. 143, in the special variable winning ball device 907, the final opening (shown as the opening of the final R in the figure) is completed, and the jackpot end effect (shown as the ending effect in the figure) is performed.

The timing t4 shown at the lower part of FIG. 143 is the timing at which the final opening of the special variable winning ball device 907 ends (the timing at which the large winning door is closed). The timing t4 is also the start timing of the ending effect. The timing t6 is the end timing of the ending effect. The time T4 between the timing t4 and the timing t6 is the jackpot end effect waiting time set in step S902369 of the jackpot opening post-processing (FIG. 134). The timing t5 and the like will be described later.

Further, FIG. 143 schematically shows how three game balls (game ball d, game ball e, game ball f) launched by the hit ball launcher are detected by the out ball detection sensor 90710A. .. The game ball d is picked up by the big winning door at a timing slightly earlier than the timing t4, detected by the count switch 9023 at a timing slightly later than the timing t4, and is detected by the count switch 9023 at a timing slightly earlier than the timing t5. It is a game ball detected by 90710A. The game ball e is picked up by the big winning door at timing t4 (the moment when it closes), is detected by the count switch 9023 at a timing later than timing t4, and is detected by the out ball detection sensor 90710A at timing t5. It is a game ball. The game ball f is a game ball that is not detected by the count switch 9023 (for example, a game ball that has flowed down the front side of the closed big winning door), and is more than timing t5 (further than timing t6). It is a game ball detected by the out ball detection sensor 90710A at a late timing.

The time T5 between the timing t4 and the timing t5 is the state change switching waiting time set in step S902020 of the state control process (FIG. 142). The game ball e picked up by the big prize opening door at timing t4 moves to the position detected by the out ball detection sensor 90710A at the slowest possible speed after being picked up by the big winning door. It is assumed that the game ball is detected by the count switch 9023) and the out ball detection sensor 90710A. In other words, the game ball detected by the out-ball detection sensor 90710A at a timing later than the timing t5 is not detected by the count switch 9023. That is, the timing t5 is the latest timing at which the game ball picked up by the big winning door at the moment of closing can be detected by the out ball detection sensor 90710A.

That is, since there is a game ball detected by the count switch 9023 among the game balls detected by the out ball detection sensor 90710A after the big winning door is closed (for example, during the execution period of the ending effect) (for example, the game ball is detected by the count switch 9023). A game ball detected by the out ball detection sensor 90710A at any timing of the time T5 such as the game ball d), a count switch even if the game ball is detected by the out ball detection sensor 90710A after the big winning door is closed. In order not to reflect the game ball that can be detected by 9023 on the performance display, the round game in-game flag is cleared to the off state at the timing t5 (when the time T5 has elapsed) (step S902028 in FIG. 142). That is, until the timing t5 (time T5), the flag during the round game is kept on and is not reflected in the performance display.

It should be noted that, although it is tentative, if the round gaming flag is cleared to the off state at timing t4 (when the performance display is reflected from the closing timing of the big winning door), the big winning door is won before timing t4. Then, when the game ball (the game ball launched at a timing slightly earlier than the game ball d) detected by the out ball detection sensor 90710A after the timing t4 wins the big prize opening, the number of prize balls is displayed as a performance. However, there is an inconsistency such as the number of shot balls being reflected in the performance display, making it impossible to accurately display the performance. On the other hand, if the flag during the round game is cleared to the off state at the timing t5 (when the time T5 has elapsed), the above-mentioned problem is solved.

It should be noted that the timing t5 has been described as the latest timing at which the game ball picked up by the big winning door at the moment of closing can be detected by the out ball detection sensor 90710A, but the timing t5 is not limited to this. For example, the timing t5 may be the average timing at which the game ball picked up by the big winning door at the moment of closing is detected by the out ball detection sensor 90710A, or at an earlier timing than the average timing. There may be. That is, the state change switching waiting time (time T5) set in step S902020 of the state control process (FIG. 142) takes into consideration the movement time of the game ball (special variable winning ball device 907 → out ball detector 90710). It should be. However, in order to display the performance more accurately, it is preferable to set the above-mentioned latest timing as the timing t5.

FIG. 144 is a configuration example of the out-ball detector. The out-ball detector 90710 described above may be, for example, the one shown in FIG. 144 (A). The out-ball detector 90710 shown in FIG. 144 (A) includes a main body 90720 and a harness 90730. The main body 90720 detects an opening (passing portion) 90721 through which a game ball that has entered one of the winning openings or a game ball taken into the out opening 9052 passes, and an out ball detection that detects a game ball that passes through the opening 90721. A sensor 90710A and a connection portion 90722 are provided. The harness 90730 has a signal line 90734 to which connection portions (connection portions 90732, 90733) are connected at both ends, a connection portion (connector) 90732 for connecting to the connection portion 90722 on the main body 90720 side, and a main board 9011 side. It is provided with a connection portion (connector) 90733 for connecting to a predetermined connection portion (not shown) provided. Note that FIG. 144 (A) (also the same applies to FIG. 144 (B)) shows a state in which the main body 90720 and the harness 90730 are connected. In the connection portion (connection portion 90733, connection portion on the main board 9011 side), the out-ball detector 90710 (harness 90730) and the main board 9011 can be attached and detached. Further, the main body 90720 and the harness 90730 may be detachable at the connection portion (connection portion 90722, 90732).

The game balls that have entered any of the winning openings or the game balls that have been taken into the out opening 9052 are finally collected in one path, and all of them pass through the opening 90721. When the game ball that has passed through the opening 90721 is detected by the out ball detection sensor 90710A, a detection signal indicating that the game ball has been detected is output to the main board 9011 side via the harness 90730. Since the game balls detected by the out-ball detector 90710 are totaled (counted) as the number of hit balls, the out-ball detection sensor 90710A may be referred to as a count switch.

The out-ball detector 90710 may be used when the harness 90730 is disconnected from the main body 90720 (when the connection portion 90722 on the main body 90720 side and the connection portion 90732 on the harness 90730 side are not properly connected) or when the harness 90730 is used. Whenever there is a disconnection (intermediate disconnection of the signal line 90734, disconnection between the signal line 90734 and the connection portion 90732, disconnection between the signal line 90734 and the connection portion 90734, etc.), the signal that is always on is mainly used. It is configured to output to the board 9011 side. Therefore, in the error detection process described above, the CPU 90103 can detect harness disconnection and the like by monitoring the signal input from the out-ball detector 90710. For example, the CPU 90103 may determine that the harness is pulled out or the wire is broken when the ON signal is continuously input for a predetermined time or longer.

Further, at least a part of the detection signal output by the out-ball detector 90710 when the game ball passes through the opening 90721 may be composed of a predetermined on / off pattern. When at least a part of the detection signal is composed of a predetermined on / off pattern, the CPU 90103 can detect garbled signals due to noise or the like by monitoring the signal input from the out ball detector 90710.

Further, the out-ball detector 90710 may include a clasp 90740 having a screw hole 90741 as shown in FIG. 144 (B). Alternatively, the out-ball detector 90710 (main body 90720) may be capable of attaching a clasp 90740. The clasp 90740 is an example of a fixing member for fixing the main body 90720 to the gaming machine 901 or the like, and is any kind as long as the main body 90720 can be fixed to the gaming machine 901 or the like. May be good.

Further, the harness 90730 (at least a part of the connection portion 90732, 90734, signal line 90734) may be protected by a cover or the like. Further, the main body 90720 and the harness 90730 may be separate bodies. That is, the main body 90720 of the out-ball detector 90710 may be connectable to the harness 90730 which is a separate body.

FIG. 145 is a flowchart showing an example of error notification processing of an error related to performance display. FIG. 146 is an example of a display mode for notifying an error related to performance display. In the error notification process shown in FIG. 145, the CPU 90103 determines whether or not a reception abnormality related to the reception of the detection signal output from the out-ball detector 90710 is detected (step S901200).

If there is an abnormality in the out-ball detector 90710 (for example, harness disconnection, disconnection, signal garbled, etc.), the CPU 90103 detects the out-ball in a process different from the error notification process (error detection process described above). A reception abnormality related to the reception of the detection signal output from the device 90710 is detected. For example, the CPU 90103 may determine that the harness is disconnected or disconnected when the ON signal continues for a predetermined time. Further, at least a part of the detection signal output from the out-ball detector 90710 is composed of a predetermined on / off pattern, and the CPU 90103 receives an input signal different from the predetermined on / off pattern. If there is, it may be determined that the signal is garbled.

If the reception abnormality is not detected in step S901200 (step S901200; NO), the CPU 90103 determines whether or not the reception error flag provided in the RAM 90102 (for example, the game control flag setting unit) is on (step S901200; NO). Step S901201). If the reception error flag is on in step S901201 (step S901201; YES), the CPU 90103 clears the reception error flag to turn it off (step S901202), and proceeds to step S901205. If the reception error flag is off in step S901201 (step S901201; NO), the process of step S901202 is skipped and the process proceeds to step S901205.

If the reception abnormality is detected in step S901200 (step S901200; YES), the CPU 90103 determines whether or not the reception error flag is on (step S901203). If the reception error flag is off in step S901203 (step S901203; NO), the CPU 90103 sets the reception error flag to the on state (step S901204) and proceeds to step S901205. If the reception error flag is turned on in step S901203 (YES in step S901203; YES), the process of step S901204 is skipped and the process proceeds to step S901205.

Following any of the processes of step S901201 (NO), step S901202, step S901203 (YES), and step S901204, it is determined whether or not the reception error flag is on (step S901205).

If the reception error flag is off in step S901205 (step S901205; NO), the CPU 90103 controls so that the performance display is performed according to the normal mode (normal mode) (step S901206). In the process of step S901206, the CPU 90103 controls so that the performance display is performed according to the display modes shown in FIGS. 125 (B) to 125 (F). Then, the error notification process is terminated.

If the reception error flag is turned on in step S901205 (step S901205; YES), the CPU 90103 controls so that the error notification mode is displayed (step S901207). In the process of step S901207, for example, the CPU 90103 controls so that the display according to the display mode of FIG. 146 (A) is performed. In the display mode of FIG. 146 (A), the upper two digits are “−− (blinking)” and the lower two digits are “−− (lighting)”. Then, the error notification process is terminated.

If a reception abnormality occurs related to the reception of the detection signal by the out-ball detector 90710, the number of hit balls (FIG. 124 (B)) is not updated as a matter of course, but the number of prize balls in each winning opening ( FIG. 124 (B)) is not updated either. That is, the CPU 90103 has the first start port switch 9022A, the second start port switch 9022B, the count switch 9023, and the first one, as in the case of the combination (combination) / combination-related processing (FIG. 102, etc.). Each winning information is acquired (received) by detecting a game ball by any of the general winning opening switch 9024A to the fourth general winning opening switch 9024D, but in a situation where the number of hit balls is not updated, the winning is won. The prize ball number addition process based on the information is not performed.

According to the error notification process shown in FIG. 145, the upper two digits are normally displayed as "bL. (Blinking, lighting)" or "b6. (Blinking, lighting)" (FIG. 125 (B)). ~ FIG. 125 (F)), “−− (lit)” is displayed when reception is abnormal (FIG. 146 (A)). That is, when the reception is abnormal, the display of the upper two digits is displayed in a display mode that is not normally displayed. Therefore, it can be easily recognized that it is not normal by looking at the display of the upper two digits.

The display mode shown in FIG. 146 (A) is an example. For example, in the process of step S901207, it may be controlled so that the display is performed according to the display mode of FIG. 146 (B) instead of the display mode of FIG. 146 (A). Similar to FIG. 146 (A), the upper two digits of FIG. 146 (B) are also displayed in a display mode that is not normally displayed. Therefore, it can be easily recognized that it is not normal by looking at the display of the upper two digits.

Further, for example, in the process of step S901207, it may be controlled so that the display according to the display mode of FIGS. 146 (C) and 146 (D) is performed. The upper two digits "E. (blinking)" in FIG. 146 (C) and the upper two digits "Er. (blinking)" in FIG. 146 (D) are reminiscent of "Err". Therefore, the abnormality can be easily recognized by looking at the display of the upper two digits (or the upper second digit).

Further, in FIGS. 146 (A) to 146 (D), the lower two digits are “−− (lighting)”, but the lower two digits may be “−− (blinking)”, or another display. It may be an embodiment.

When it is normal, that is, in the display by the process of step S901206, the display contents are as shown in FIGS. 125 (B) to 125 (F) according to the section shown in FIG. 125 (A) and every 5 seconds. However, when it is abnormal, that is, in the display by the process of step S901207, even if a reception abnormality occurs in any section shown in FIG. Even after that), the displayed contents do not change. That is, the display when it is abnormal is simpler than the display when it is normal. Therefore, it is possible to accurately recognize that it is not normal (or abnormal) without giving confusion or extra burden.

FIG. 147 is an example of a display mode for notifying an error related to performance display. The display of FIGS. 146 (A) to 146 (D) described above is displayed even if a reception abnormality occurs in any of the sections shown in FIG. 125 (A) and 5 seconds have passed from the start of the display. The content does not change, but even when it is abnormal, according to the section shown in FIG. 125 (A) and every 5 seconds, for example, as shown in FIGS. 147 (A) to 147 (E). The displayed contents may be changed. The display mode of FIGS. 147 (A) to 147 (E) is different from the display mode of FIGS. 125 (B) to 125 (F) in that the lower two digits are blinking. According to the error notification mode of FIG. 147, since the display content changes depending on the section, in addition to being abnormal, the section at the time of abnormality occurrence (immediately before the occurrence) (section shown in FIG. 125 (A)) and It is also possible to recognize the real-time base value at the time of an abnormality (immediately before the occurrence) and the previous cumulative base value.

In addition, the lower two digits showing the real-time base values in FIGS. 147 (B) to 147 (E) and the lower two digits so as not to show the real-time base value and the previous cumulative base value to the player when the gaming machine frame 903 is opened. , The lower two digits indicating the previous cumulative base values in FIGS. 147 (D) and 147 (E) may be, for example, "Er. (blinking)". That is, in FIGS. 147 (A) to 147 (E), the lower two digits may be "−− (blinking)" or "Er. (blinking)". According to the display mode, it is possible to recognize the section (section shown in FIG. 125 (A)) at the time of occurrence of abnormality (immediately before occurrence) in addition to the fact that it is not normal.

In the flowchart shown in FIG. 145, when the error (abnormality) is resolved, the display returns to the normal mode (step S901206), but when the error is resolved, the error notification is performed without returning to the normal mode display. The display of the aspect (step S901207) may be continued. Further, when the error is resolved, the display may be restored to the normal mode, but the notification that the error has occurred may be continued.

As a first example, after the error is resolved, the lowest (fourth digit) dot is blinked (or lit) in the display of the normal mode (FIGS. 125 (A) to 125 (F)). May be good. As a second example, a display monitor different from the display monitor 901130 (for example, one with a single digit) is arranged on the main board 9011, and after the error is resolved, the display monitor 901130 returns to the normal mode display. At the same time, a display monitor different from the display monitor 901130 may continue to notify that an error has occurred (for example, "E. (blinking)").

To be precise, the first example described above is the same as the display of the normal mode when the error is resolved (except for the blinking (lighting) of the lowest dot notifying that the error has occurred). (Same) is displayed, but in the display mode of the first example, in order to provide information provided (displayed) in the display of the normal mode (except for the lowest dot, the display of the normal mode is used). (Because they are the same), it was expressed as returning to the display of the normal mode. In addition, the display monitor (display monitor different from the display monitor 901130) that notifies that there is an error in the second example above is such that the display is not cleared when the power is turned off such as a power failure, like the display monitor 901130. do. That is, the information that there was an error is prevented from being cleared due to a power failure such as a power failure.

In addition, in the mode of displaying the performance information as well as the mode of displaying the combination (combination ratio) and the combination ratio described above, the clear switch is connected to the main board 9011 and stored in the RAM 90102 by the operation of the clear switch. You may clear the data used for the performance display. The clear switch in the mode of displaying the performance information is operated when the calculation of the performance display has to be redone, such as when a failure occurs in the calculation of the performance information. When the clear switch is operated, a clear switch operation signal is transmitted to the main board 9011 in addition to clearing the data, as in the mode of displaying the connection ratio) and the combination ratio.

When the clear switch is operated in the mode of displaying the performance information, the error display is the same as when the clear switch is operated in the mode of displaying the combination (combination ratio) and the combination ratio (FIGS. 102 and 103). The warning table may be displayed in a display mode different from the display mode (display mode shown in FIGS. 146 and 147). Further, when the clear switch is operated when the reception is abnormal, both the error display and the warning display may be performed. For example, the error display and the warning display may be displayed in order. When performing the performance display according to the display mode shown in FIG. 147, for example, the error display (real-time base value), the error display (previous cumulative base value), and the warning display may be displayed in order.

Further, in the mode of displaying the performance information as well as the mode of displaying the combination (combination ratio) and the combination ratio described above, the main board 9011 may be provided with an error display separately from the display monitor 90130. good. When the error display is provided on the main board 9011 separately from the display monitor 90130, it is preferable that the error display is arranged at a position away from the display monitor 9029. In the configuration in which the display monitor 90130 and the error display are provided on the main board 9011, when a reception abnormality occurs, information indicating the reception abnormality is displayed on the error display, and FIG. 146 is displayed on the display monitor 90130. It may be displayed according to the display mode shown in FIG. 147.

Further, when a reception abnormality occurs, for example, the first special symbol display device 904A is displayed with a predetermined error on the second special symbol display device 904B or the like so that the reception abnormality can be recognized. You may do it. Further, a predetermined error display may be performed on the image display device 905 by transmitting an abnormality detection designation command for designating that a reception abnormality has occurred, or the game effect lamp 909 is lit and blinked in a predetermined pattern. A predetermined sound (including a voice) may be generated from the speakers 908L and 908R.
Further, by transmitting information indicating that a reception abnormality has occurred, an information display device (for example, a display device of a card unit provided on the side of the pachinko gaming machine 901, a call lamp provided above the pachinko gaming machine 901). The device, etc.) or the information management device (hall computer, etc.) may be able to recognize that the reception is abnormal.

In addition, other devices (error display, first special symbol display device 904A, second special symbol display device 904B, image display device 905, game effect lamp 909, speaker 908L, 908R, information display device, information management device Etc.), the display may be erased on the display monitor 90130 regardless of whether or not the reception abnormality can be recognized. That is, in the event of a reception abnormality, for example, all four digits of the display monitor 90130 are all turned off (the "off" does not mean that the display is hidden in "blinking", but is always hidden). Alternatively, one digit (or two or three digits) of all four digits of the display monitor 90130 may be turned off. That is, the display when the reception is abnormal (display by the process of step S901207) limits the display when it is normal (display by the process of step S901206) (display to recognize that the reception is abnormal). Anything that limits the performance display by doing so, something that limits by erasing a part or all of the performance display, etc.) may be used.

FIG. 148 is a flowchart showing an example of timer interrupt processing (game control timer interrupt processing) performed by CPU 90103. In the game control timer interrupt process shown in FIG. 148, the CPU 90103 first executes an error detection process (step S9010), and if an error (abnormality) is detected, an error is notified (step S9011). In the processing of steps S9010 and S9011, the CPU 90103 monitors, for example, the signal output from the out-ball detector 90710, detects a reception abnormality of the signal output from the out-ball detector 90710 (step S9010), and receives the reception abnormality. Is detected on the display monitor 901130 or the like (step S9011).

Following step S9011, the CPU 90103 executes a random number update process (step S9012). In the random number update process of step S9012, the CPU 90103 updates, for example, a game random number (for example, a big hit determination random number, a big hit type determination random number, a variation pattern determination random number, etc.) used on the main board 9011 side. Following step S9012, the CPU 90103 executes special symbol processing (special symbol process processing) (step S9013). In the special drawing process of step S9013, the CPU 90103 executes various processes shown in FIGS. 128 to 135, 142, and the like, for example.

Following step S9013, the CPU 90103 executes the performance information update process (steps S9014A, S9014B). Details of the performance information update process will be described later. Subsequently, the CPU 90103 executes the performance information display process (step S9015). In the performance information display process of step S9015, the CPU 90103 displays, for example, the performance information updated in the performance information update process (steps S9014A, S9014B) on the display monitor 901130 as shown in FIG. 125.

Following step S9015, the CPU 90103 executes the prize ball processing (step S9016). In the prize ball processing in step S9016, the CPU 90103 calculates the number of prize balls based on the detection signals of various switches, and controls the payout mechanism so that the calculated number of game balls are paid out. Following step S9016, the CPU 90103 executes a normal symbol process (ordinary symbol process process) (step S9017). In the normal symbol processing in step S9017, the CPU 90103 controls, for example, the variable display of the normal symbol on the normal symbol display 9020 and the operation of the movable wing piece on the normal variable winning ball device 906B. Following step S9017, the CPU 90103 executes information output processing (step S9018). In the information output process of step S9018, the CPU 90103 may be, for example, an information display device (for example, a display device of a card unit provided on the side of the pachinko gaming machine 901, a call lamp device provided above the pachinko gaming machine 901, or the like). Various information such as jackpot information, start information, probability fluctuation information, and abnormality information is output to an information management device (hall computer, etc.). Then, the game control timer interrupt processing is terminated.

The process of steps S901 to S9018 shown in FIG. 148 describes a part of the process executed in the game control timer interrupt process, and the CPU 90103 describes the game control timer interrupt process in steps S901 to S9018. Processing other than (for example, switch processing for inputting (determining) the state of detection signals input from various switches, processing for transmitting an effect control command from the main board 9011 side to the effect control board 9012 side, etc.) can be executed. be.

In the case of the configuration of FIG. 127, in the above switch processing, the first start port switch 9022A, the second start port switch 9022B, the count switch 9023, the first general winning port switch 9024A to the fourth general winning port switch 9024D, and the firing detection. The detection signal of the sensor 90700A or the like is output to the CPU 90103. In the case of the configuration of FIG. 138, the detection signals of the first launch detection sensor 90701A and the second launch detection sensor 90702A are output to the CPU 90103 instead of the launch detection sensor 90700A. In the case of the configuration of FIG. 141, the detection signal of the out-ball detection sensor 90710A is output to the CPU 90103 instead of the firing detection sensor 90700A.

Further, the execution order of each process of the game control timer interrupt process steps S901 to S9018 shown in FIG. 148 is an example. Therefore, for example, the CPU 90103 may execute the information output process before the random number update process, or may execute the normal map process immediately after the special figure process.

Further, the grouping (unit of each process) of each process such as the error detection process (step S9010) and the error notification process (step S9011) is an example. Therefore, for example, as shown in FIG. 145, the CPU 90103 may execute the error notification process (step S9011) and the performance information display process (step S9015) as one process. In the error notification process of FIG. 145, the process of step S901206 (process of controlling so that the performance display is performed according to the normal mode) becomes the performance information display process (step S9015) of the game control timer interrupt process of FIG. 148. Equivalent to.

The relationship between the error notification process (step S9011) and the performance information display process (step S9015) in the game control timer interrupt process of FIG. 148 and the error notification process of FIG. 145 will be supplemented. As described above, the error notification process of FIG. 145 may be regarded as a combination of the error notification process (step S9011) and the performance information display process (step S9015) of FIG. 148, but it may be simply regarded as one. For convenience of explanation (for the purpose of explaining that the display mode (normal mode, error notification mode) of the display monitor 901130 differs depending on the presence or absence of an abnormality), it may be regarded as one. ..

Further, FIG. 148 shows the game control timer interrupt process when displaying the performance information, but the same applies to the game control timer interrupt process when displaying the combination (combination ratio) and the combination ratio. That is, the performance information update process (step S9014A) of FIG. It may be a process. The relationship between the error notification process (step S9011), the performance information display process (step S9015), and the like in the game control timer interrupt process of FIG. 148 and each process shown in FIGS. 102 to 105 is the game of FIG. 148. The relationship between the error notification process (step S9011) and the performance information display process (step S9015) in the control timer interrupt process and the error notification process in FIG. 145 is the same.

FIG. 149 is a flowchart showing an example of the performance information update process (step S9014A) executed in the game control timer interrupt process shown in FIG. 148. FIG. 150 is a flowchart showing an example of the performance information update process (step S9014B) executed in the game control timer interrupt process shown in FIG. 148.

The CPU 90103 executes the performance information update process (S9014A) of FIG. 149 in the embodiment of the state control process (step S901101A) of FIG. 129. That is, the performance information update process (S9014A) of FIG. 149 is the launch ball detector 90700 (launch detection sensor 90700A), or the first launch ball detector 90701 (first launch detection sensor 90701A) and the second launch ball detector. It is performed in a configuration comprising 90702 (second firing detection sensor 90702A). On the other hand, the CPU 90103 executes the performance information update process (S9014B) of FIG. 150 in the embodiment of the state control process (step S901101B) of FIG. 142. That is, the performance information update process (S9014B) of FIG. 150 is executed in a configuration including an out-ball detector 90710 (out-ball detection sensor 90710A).

In the performance information update process (S9014A) of FIG. 149, the CPU 90103 first determines whether or not the probability change flag is on (step S9020). If the probability variation flag is not on in step S9020 (step S9020; NO), the CPU 90103 determines whether or not the time saving flag is on (step S9021).

If the time saving flag is not on in step S9021 (step S9021; NO), the CPU 90103 determines whether or not the round gaming flag is on (step S9022). At the start of the jackpot gaming state shown in FIGS. 136 and 139, the round gaming flag sets the state change switching waiting time (FIG. 136, FIG. 139) set in step S902004 of the state control process (FIG. 129). Since the off state is changed to the on state in step S902008 after the lapse of time T2), whether or not the process of step S9022 is after the state change switching waiting time (time T2) has elapsed at the start of the jackpot gaming state. It can be said that it is judging.

If the round gaming flag is not turned on in step S9022 (step S9022; NO), that is, before the state change switching waiting time (time T2) has elapsed, the CPU 90103 determines the number of prize balls and the number of balls to be driven. Add and calculate the base value which is the performance information (step S9023). In the process of step S9023, the CPU 90103 adds, for example, the number of prize balls corresponding to the winning openings specified from the detection results (detection signals) of the various switches of the various winning openings (FIG. 124 (B)), and the firing detection sensor. The number of shot balls is added based on the detection result (detection signal) of 90700A or the like (FIG. 124 (B)), and then the real-time base value and the previous cumulative base value are calculated (FIG. 124 (A)). Then, the performance information update process (step S9014A) is terminated.

On the other hand, if the probability change flag is on (step S9020; YES) in step S9020, the time saving flag is on (step S9021; YES) in step S9021, or the round gaming flag is on in step S9022 (step S9021; YES). Step S9022; YES), the performance information update process (step S9014A) is terminated without performing the process of step S9023.

In the performance information update process (S9014B) of FIG. 150, the CPU 90103 first determines whether or not the probability change flag is on (step S9030). If the probability variation flag is not on in step S9030 (step S9030; NO), the CPU 90103 determines whether or not the time saving flag is on (step S9031).

If the time saving flag is not on in step S9031 (step S9031; NO), the CPU 90103 determines whether or not the round gaming flag is on (step S9032). At the end of the jackpot gaming state shown in FIG. 143, the round gaming flag is set after the state change switching waiting time (time T5 in FIG. 143) set in step S902024 of the state control process (FIG. 142) has elapsed. Since the on state is changed to the off state in step S902028, the process of step S9032 also determines whether or not the state change switching waiting time (time T5) has elapsed at the end of the big hit game state. I can say.

If the round gaming flag is not turned on in step S9032 (step S9032; NO), that is, after the state change switching waiting time (time T5) has elapsed, the CPU 90103 determines the number of prize balls and the number of balls to be driven. Add and calculate the base value which is the performance information (step S9033). In the process of step S9033, the CPU 90103 adds, for example, the number of prize balls corresponding to the winning openings specified from the detection results (detection signals) of the various switches of the various winning openings (FIG. 124 (B)), and detects the out balls. The number of shot balls is added based on the detection result (detection signal) of the sensor 90710A (FIG. 124 (B)), and then the real-time base value and the previous cumulative base value are calculated (FIG. 124 (A)). Then, the performance information update process (step S9014B) is terminated.

On the other hand, if the probability change flag is on (step S9030; YES) in step S9030, the time reduction flag is on (step S9031; YES) in step S9031, or the round gaming flag is on in step S9032 (step S9032). Step S9032; YES), the performance information update process (step S9014B) is terminated without performing the process of step S9033.

According to the performance information update process (step S9014A) of FIG. 149 and the performance information update process (step S9014B) of FIG. The number of prize balls and the number of hit balls, which are the basis of the display, are added. As shown in FIGS. 149 and 150, the performance information update process (step S9014A) of FIG. 149 and the performance information update process (step S9014B) of FIG. It is the same in that it refers to the state of the flag, adds the number of prize balls and the number of hit balls, and calculates the base value which is the performance information, but both are the state of the flag during the round game and waiting for the state change switching. Since the relationship with time is different (specifically, in the performance information update process (step S9014A) of FIG. 149, the round gaming flag is off before the lapse of time T2, and the performance information update process of FIG. 150 (step S9014B). Then, after the lapse of time T5, the round game in-game flag is off), which was explained by separate drawings.

The processing shown in FIGS. 148 to 150 is a detection result by the switch processing when all of the probability change flag, the time saving flag, and the round game in-game flag are in the off state (output results of various switches of various winning openings, firing detection sensor). The output result of 90700A etc.) is reflected (added) as performance information, and the detection result by switch processing is not reflected as performance information when at least one of the probability change flag, the time saving flag, and the round gaming flag is in the ON state. It is a process. That is, the game ball is detected in the switch process regardless of the state of the flag, but it is a process of determining whether or not the detection result is reflected as the performance information according to the state of the flag. However, when the probability variation flag, the time reduction flag, and the round game in-game flag are all off, the number of prize balls and the number of hit balls are reflected as performance information, and the probability variation flag, the time reduction flag, and the round in-game flag are reflected. If at least one is in the ON state and the number of prize balls and the number of hit balls are not reflected as performance information, other processes may be used. For example, when the probability variation flag, the time saving flag, and the round game in-game flag are all off, the switch processing regarding the number of shot balls (launch detection sensor 90700A, first launch detection sensor 90701A, second launch detection sensor 90702A, out ball detection). (Detection by the sensor 90710A) may be executed, and if at least one of the probability change flag, the time saving flag, and the round game in-game flag is in the ON state, the switch process relating to the number of balls to be driven may not be executed. That is, it may be a process of determining whether or not the switch process regarding the number of balls to be driven is executed according to the state of the flag. Regarding the switch processing related to the number of prize balls (detection by the first start port switch 9022A and the second start port switch 9022B, the count switch 9023, the first general winning port switch 9024A to the fourth general winning port switch 9024D, etc.), it is actually Since it is necessary to pay out, the switch processing related to the number of prize balls is executed regardless of the state of the flag, and as in the processing shown in FIGS. 148 to 150, whether or not the detection result is reflected in the performance information of the flag is set. It may be determined according to the state.

FIG. 151 is an example of the arrangement position of the out ball detector. FIG. 151 (A) is a perspective view showing a state in which the gaming machine frame 903 that supports and fixes the gaming board 902 is opened from the outer frame 903A. A main board 9011 or the like is mounted on the back surface side of the game board 902. The main board 9011 is provided with a base member 901129, and the base member 901129 is provided with a display monitor 901130. The display monitor 901130 is housed in the substrate case 90202 together with the base member 901129 and the main substrate 9011.

As shown in the figure, the display monitor 901130 shown in FIG. 151 (A) (the same applies to the display monitor 901130 in FIG. 151B) has the back surface of the main board 9011 in the center in the left-right direction and on the upper side in the up-down direction. Although it is arranged, the display monitor 901130 may be arranged at another position on the back surface. For example, the back surface of the main board 9011 may be arranged at the center in the left-right direction and on the lower side in the up-down direction. When it is arranged on the upper side of the back surface of the main board 9011, it is convenient that the displayed contents are easy to see when the store clerk or the like confirms the displayed contents while standing. Further, when it is arranged on the lower side of the back surface of the main board 9011, it is convenient for the displayed contents to be easily seen when a clerk or the like sits down or bends down to check the displayed contents. Further, various wirings (signal lines) may exist above the main board 9011 of the game board 902. Then, it is assumed that such wiring may bend or the bundled wiring may come off and cover the main board 9011. When the display monitor 901130 is arranged on the lower side of the back surface of the main board 9011, it is less likely that the flexible wiring will cover the display monitor 901130 as compared with the case where the display monitor 901130 is arranged on the upper side, which is convenient. Further, although related to the above, the display monitor 901130 shown in FIG. 151 (A) (the same applies to the display monitor 901130 of FIG. 151 (B)) has the same appearance as the display monitor 90130A shown in FIG. The arrangement is the same. However, the appearance of the display monitor 901130 and the mode of arrangement on the main board 9011 are not limited to those shown in FIG. 151. For example, the display monitor 901130 may have an appearance such as the display monitors 90130B, 90130C, 90130D, 90130E, 90130F, 90130G, 90130H, 90130I shown in FIGS. 111 to 114.

In FIG. 151 (A), the game board 902 (for example, the bottom, the bottom, etc. of the game board) has a winning opening (first general winning opening 9050A, second general winning opening 9050B, third general winning opening 9050C, fourth). An opening (hole at the exit of the game ball) for discharging the game ball that has entered the general winning opening 9050D, the first starting winning opening, the second starting winning opening, and the large winning opening) or the game ball taken into the out opening 9052 to the outside. ) 902A is provided. The passages a, b, and c shown by the broken lines are passages (ball collection passages) through which the game balls that have entered the winning opening and the game balls that have been taken into the out opening 9052 pass. Whether the game ball has entered the winning opening or has been taken into the out opening 9052, it passes through any of the passages a, b, and c, and is finally discharged to the outside through the opening 902A. Will be done.

As shown in FIG. 151 (A), the out-ball detector 90710 is provided on the game board 902 side. Specifically, the out-ball detector 90710 is provided at a position where the game ball discharged from the opening 902A can be detected. That is, like the opening 902A, the out ball detector 90710 is provided in the flow path for discharging the game ball that has entered the winning opening and the game ball that has been taken into the out opening 9052.

The game ball detected by the out-ball detector 90710 is collected by the ball receiving member 901700 provided on the outer frame 903A side (game island side). Further, the signal line 90734 of the out-ball detector 90710 is connected to the main board 9011. That is, the game ball discharged from the opening 902A of the game board 902 passes through the opening 90721 of the out ball detector 90710 and is collected on the game island by the ball receiving member 901700. Further, the game ball passing through the opening 90721 is detected by the out ball detection sensor 90710A, and the detection signal is output to the main board 9011.

An opening (a hole at the exit of the game ball) 901701 is provided at the bottom of the ball receiving member 901700 (a portion on which the game ball rides), and although not shown, the bottom portion is inclined toward the opening 901701. is doing. That is, the game ball that has reached the ball receiving member 901700 from the game machine 901 (opening 90721) passes through the opening 901701 and is discharged to the outside (lower side) of the ball receiving member 901700.

As shown in FIG. 151 (B), the out ball detector 90710 may be provided on the outer frame 903A side (game island side). In the example of FIG. 151 (B), the out-ball detector 90710 is provided at a position where the game ball discharged from the opening 901701 of the ball receiving member 901700 can be detected. That is, like the opening 901701, the out ball detector 90710 is provided in the flow path for discharging the game ball that has entered the winning opening and the game ball that has been taken into the out opening 9052, and is provided in the opening of the ball receiving member 901700. The game ball discharged from 901701 is detected. In FIG. 151 (B), the clasp 90740 is not shown.

Further, FIG. 151 (A) shows an example in which the out-ball detector 90710 is installed by using the clasp 90740, but the out-ball detector 90710 may be installed by using a fixing member other than the clasp 90740. The same applies to the example of FIG. 151 (B).

Further, in FIGS. 151 (A) and 151 (B), the out-ball detector 90710 is an external component, but the game board 902 or the like may be provided with the out-ball detector 90710 from the beginning. For example, in FIG. 151 (A), the out-ball detector 90710 may be provided below the opening 902A of the game board 902 (the same position as in FIG. 151 (A)). Further, the out-ball detection sensor 90710A may be provided in the opening 902A of the game board 902 (the opening 902A of the game board 902 corresponds to the opening 90721 of the main body 90720). The same applies to the example of FIG. 151 (B).

Although three passages (passages a, b, and c) are shown in FIG. 151 (A), the game ball that has entered the winning opening and the game ball that has been taken into the out opening 9052 finally reach the opening 902A. If it is, the number and shape of the passages are not limited to the example shown in FIG. 151 (A). The same applies to the example of FIG. 151 (B).

The state change switching waiting time (time T5 in FIG. 143) set in the process of step S902024 in FIG. 142 includes the time required until the game ball picked up by the big winning door is detected by the count switch 9023. It is affected by the time required for the game ball detected by the count switch 9023 to be detected by the out ball detection sensor 90710A. Specifically, the shorter the required time, the shorter the state change switching waiting time (time T5) can be (not necessarily shortened).

Therefore, for example, in order to shorten the state change switching waiting time (time T5), in the configuration of FIG. 151 (A), the time until the game ball detected by the count switch 9023 is discharged from the opening 902A is shortened. You may do so. Specifically, the length of the passage (for example, passage a) through which the game ball detected by the count switch 9023 passes is shortened, or the game ball that has passed through the passage is tilted to immediately enter the opening 902A. And guidance may be provided. In addition, in the configuration of FIG. 151 (B), instead of or in addition to the above, the time until the game ball discharged from the game machine 901 (opening 90721) reaches the opening 901701 of the ball receiving member 901700 is short. It should be. As an example, the inclination of the bottom of the ball receiving member 901700 may be increased.

The opening 902A of the game board 902 and the opening 901701 of the ball receiving member 901700 may be widened so that the game ball is not clogged and the game ball flows quickly, or the game board 902 may be widened. A plurality of openings may be provided, or a plurality of openings may be provided in the ball receiving member 901700.

When the opening 902A of the game board 902 is widened, a plurality of out ball detectors 90710 (out ball detection sensor 90710A) are provided so that the game balls discharged from the widened opening 902A can be detected without omission. You may do it. The same applies to the case where the opening 901701 of the ball receiving member 901700 is widened. Further, when a plurality of openings are provided in the game board 902, a plurality of out-ball detectors 90710 corresponding to the respective openings are provided so that the game balls discharged from the respective openings can be detected without omission. An out-ball detection sensor 90710A) may be provided. The same applies to the case where the ball receiving member 901700 is provided with a plurality of openings.

When a plurality of out-ball detectors 90710 (out-ball detection sensor 90710A) are provided, the game balls can be detected at the same time. , Each of the game balls detected at the same time may be captured as the number of hit balls.

As described above, the gaming machine 901 that performs the performance display described with reference to FIGS. 124 to 151 is
A launching device (for example, a hitting ball launching device) for launching a game medium (for example, a gaming ball, etc.) into a gaming area (for example, a gaming area 9010, etc.) is provided, and advantageous conditions are satisfied (for example, first and second). Derived display of definite special symbols that are big hit symbols and small hit symbols in special symbol display devices 904A and 904B, derivation display of definite decorative symbols that are big hit combinations in image display device 905, passage of game balls in a specific area, etc.) It is a gaming machine that can be controlled to an advantageous state (for example, a big hit game state, a probability change state, a time saving state, etc.) that is advantageous to the player based on the above.
A detection means capable of detecting a game medium launched into the game area (for example, a launch ball detector provided on a guide rail (FIG. 126), a launch ball detector 90701, 90702 provided in the game area (FIG. 137)). Etc.) and
A variable winning means (for example, a special variable winning ball device 907 or the like) capable of changing the game medium launched into the gaming area into an open state in which a winning is possible, and
Predetermined conditions are satisfied (for example, the normal winning ball device 906A which is the first starting winning opening, the ordinary variable winning ball device 906B which is the second starting winning opening, the general winning opening 9050A-9050D which is the general winning area, and the large winning opening. A payout means (for example, a ball payout device, a payout mechanism, etc.) for paying out the game medium based on the special variable winning ball device 907, etc.
A determination means capable of determining whether or not it is in an advantageous state (for example, a CPU 90103 or the like that determines whether or not it is in a gaming state based on a probability change flag, a time saving flag, or the like).
The number of gaming media detected by the detection means in a predetermined state different from the advantageous state (for example, a normal state or the like; specifically, a state in which all of the probability change flag, the time saving flag, and the round gaming flag are off, etc.) For example, predetermined information (for example, the number of prize balls to be won in each winning opening) calculated based on the number of balls to be driven and the number of game media paid out by the payout means in the predetermined state (for example, the number of prize balls by winning each winning opening). For example, it is provided with an information display means (for example, the display monitor 901130 of FIG. 151) capable of displaying (for example, performance display is possible) of the performance information of FIG. 124.
The variable winning means is
The change to the open state based on the establishment of the advantageous condition (for example, as shown in FIGS. 136 and 139, the big hit symbol is stopped and displayed at the timing t1, and the big winning opening is displayed at the timing t3. The door changes from a closed state to an open state, etc.),
The determination means is
A predetermined period before the variable winning means changes to the open state (for example, as shown in FIGS. 136 and 139, time T3 before the timing t3 when the large winning door changes from the closed state to the open state). From the timing t2, etc.), it is determined that the advantageous state is obtained (for example, as shown in the state control process of FIG. 129, the round gaming flag is turned on at the timing t2 when the state change switching waiting time (time T2) elapses. Set to state, etc.).

Thereby, accurate predetermined information (performance information) can be calculated. Specifically, the game ball detected by the launch detection sensor 90700A or the first launch ball detector 90701 (second launch ball detector 90702) at any timing of the time T3 (for example, the game ball in FIG. 136). By not including c) etc. in the calculation of the performance display, an accurate base value can be calculated.

In addition, the above-mentioned gaming machine 901 is
It is provided with variable display means (for example, first special symbol display device 904A, second special symbol display device 904B, image display device 905, etc.) for performing variable display and deriving and displaying display results.
A state (for example, a state at timing t2) before a predetermined period of change to the open state is
A special state after the display result of the variable display executed by the variable display means is derived and displayed (for example, a state in which the fanfare effect is executed in the image display device 905 as shown in FIGS. 136 and 139). Is.

Thereby, accurate predetermined information (performance information) can be calculated. That is, the predetermined information does not include the game ball (the game ball c shown in FIGS. 136 and 139) that is fired after the fluctuation is stopped (after the stop is displayed) and may win the special variable winning ball device 907. (Performance information) can be calculated.

In the above embodiment (FIGS. 129, 136, 136, etc.), the fanfare effect is turned on from the off state during the round game during the execution of the fanfare effect after the jackpot symbol is stopped and displayed. The flag during the round game may be changed from the off state to the on state before the execution of (during the execution of the reach effect, etc.). For example, if the execution time of the fanfare effect is short (for example, a few seconds, etc.), the game ball that may win the special variable winning ball device 907 is a launch detection sensor before the start of the fanfare effect. Since it may be detected by 90700A or the first launch ball detector 90701 (second launch ball detector 90702), the game ball that may win the special variable winning ball device 907 should not be included in the performance display. In addition, the flag during the round game may be changed from the off state to the on state before the fanfare effect is executed. Specifically, for example, the round gaming flag may be set to the ON state at a timing prior to the timing at which the special symbol is stopped and displayed with reference to the special symbol fluctuation time. It should be noted that the flag during the round game may be changed from the off state to the on state at the start of the execution of the fanfare effect.

Further, in the above-mentioned gaming machine 901,
The detection means is detachable (for example, as shown in FIG. 137, the first launch ball detector 90701 and the second launch ball detector 90702 include the first launch ball detector 90701 and the second launch ball detector 90702. The portion above the broken line P including the broken line P is removable, etc.).

As a result, even if the detection means is not provided, it can be dealt with. It also facilitates maintenance.

Further, in the above-mentioned gaming machine 901,
The detection means
It is configured as a unit that can be arranged on a game board (for example, a game board 902 or the like) forming a game area (for example, the first launch ball detector 90701 and the second launch ball detector 90702 are shown in FIG. 137. The part above the broken line P of is configured as a unit).

This facilitates maintenance. Also, different models can be used in common.

Further, in the above-mentioned gaming machine 901,
In the game area,
Areas through which the game medium launched by the launcher can pass include a left game area (for example, left game area 9010A and the like) and a right game area (for example, right game area 9010A and the like).
The unit (for example, a portion above the broken line P in FIG. 137) is
A left-side detection means (for example, a first launch ball detector 90701) for detecting a game medium passing through the left gaming area and a right-side detection means (for example, a second launch) for detecting a game medium passing through the right game area. Sphere detector 90702 etc.) and included.

As a result, it can be detected regardless of where it is fired in the game area.

Further, in the above-mentioned gaming machine 901,
The detection means
The launching ball detector 90700 is provided on the upstream side in the flow path of the game medium with respect to any winning area provided in the game area (for example, as shown in FIG. 126, the launching ball detector 90700 is a normal winning ball device 906A, It is provided above the normal variable winning ball device 906B, the general winning openings 9050A to 9050D, and the special variable winning ball device 907. Also, as shown in FIG. 137, the first launch ball detector 90701 and the second launch ball. The detector 90702 is provided above the normal winning ball device 906A, the normal variable winning ball device 906B, the general winning openings 9050A to 9050D, and the special variable winning ball device 907).

As a result, it can be reliably detected.

Further, the gaming machine 901 that performs the performance display described with reference to FIGS. 124 to 151 is
A launching device (for example, a hitting ball launching device) for launching a game medium (for example, a gaming ball, etc.) into a gaming area (for example, a gaming area 9010, etc.) is provided, and advantageous conditions are satisfied (for example, first and second). Derived display of definite special symbols that are big hit symbols and small hit symbols in special symbol display devices 904A and 904B, derivation display of definite decorative symbols that are big hit combinations in image display device 905, passage of game balls in a specific area, etc.) It is a gaming machine that can be controlled to an advantageous state (for example, a big hit game state, a probability change state, a time saving state, etc.) that is advantageous to the player based on the above.
A variable winning means (for example, a special variable winning ball device 907 or the like) capable of changing the game medium launched into the gaming area into an open state in which a winning is possible, and
A variable winning control means (for example, a CPU 90103 that executes the special drawing process shown in FIG. 128) capable of performing a round game for changing the variable winning means to the open state a predetermined number of times, and
A game medium that has passed through any of the winning areas provided in the game area (first general winning opening 9050A, second general winning opening 9050B, third general winning opening 9050C, fourth general winning opening 9050D, first starting winning). To eject the mouth, the game ball that won any of the second start winning mouth, the big winning mouth, etc.) and the game medium that did not pass through any of the winning areas (the game ball, etc. taken into the out mouth 9052). (For example, a position where a game ball discharged from the opening 902A of the game board 902A can be detected as shown in FIG. 151 (A) and a ball receiving member 901700 as shown in FIG. 151 (B). A detection means (for example, an out-ball detector 90710 or the like) provided at a position where a game ball discharged from the opening 901701 can be detected and capable of detecting a game medium passing through the flow path, and the like.
Predetermined conditions are satisfied (for example, the normal winning ball device 906A which is the first starting winning opening, the ordinary variable winning ball device 906B which is the second starting winning opening, the general winning opening 9050A-9050D which is the general winning area, and the large winning opening. A payout means (for example, a ball payout device, a payout mechanism, etc.) for paying out the game medium based on the special variable winning ball device 907, etc.
A determination means capable of determining whether or not it is in an advantageous state (for example, a CPU 90103 or the like that determines whether or not it is in a gaming state based on a probability change flag, a time saving flag, or the like).
The number of gaming media detected by the detection means in a predetermined state different from the advantageous state (for example, a normal state or the like; specifically, a state in which all of the probability change flag, the time saving flag, and the round gaming flag are off, etc.) For example, predetermined information (for example, the number of prize balls to be won in each winning opening) calculated based on the number of balls to be driven and the number of game media paid out by the payout means in the predetermined state (for example, the number of prize balls by winning each winning opening). For example, it is provided with an information display means (for example, the display monitor 901130 of FIG. 151) capable of displaying (for example, performance display is possible) of the performance information of FIG. 124.
The variable winning control means
The round game is started based on the establishment of the advantageous conditions (for example, the big winning door is controlled from the closed state to the open state based on the stop display of the big hit symbol).
The determination means is
From the end of the predetermined number of round games and the change of the variable winning means to the closed state until a predetermined period elapses (for example, as shown in FIG. 143, the large winning opening door changes from the open state to the closed state. When the advantageous state is determined (for example, as shown in the state control process of FIG. 142, the timing at which the state change switching waiting time (time T5) elapses) is determined from the timing t4 to the timing t5 when the time T5 has elapsed. Clear the round game flag to the off state at t5, etc.).

Thereby, accurate predetermined information (performance information) can be calculated. Specifically, the game ball detected by the out ball detector 90710 at any timing of the time T5 (for example, the game ball d in FIG. 143) is not included in the calculation of the performance display, so that it is accurate. Base value can be calculated.

Further, in the above-mentioned gaming machine 901,
The state when the predetermined period elapses (for example, the state at timing t5, etc.) is
This is a special state after the predetermined number of round games is completed (for example, a state in which the ending effect is executed in the image display device 905 as shown in FIG. 143).

Thereby, accurate predetermined information (performance information) can be calculated. That is, even if the game ball is detected by the out ball detector 90710 during the ending effect, the game ball that may win the special variable winning ball device 907 (game ball d or the like shown in FIG. 143) , Accurate predetermined information can be calculated because it is not included in the calculation of predetermined information (performance information).

In the above embodiment (FIGS. 142, 143, etc.), the round gaming flag is changed from the on state to the off state during the execution of the ending effect after the final round, but after the ending effect is executed (time saving). The flag during the round game may be changed from the on state to the off state during the first variable display in a normal jackpot. For example, when the execution time of the ending effect is short (for example, a few seconds, etc.), the game ball that may win the special variable winning ball device 907 is the out ball detector 90710 after the ending effect is completed. Since it may be detected by, the round game in-game flag is changed from the on state to the off state after the ending effect is executed so that the game ball that may win the special variable winning ball device 907 is not included in the performance display. You may. Specifically, for example, the state change switching waiting time set in step S902024 of FIG. 142 may be made longer than the effect waiting time at the end of the big hit. It should be noted that the flag during the round game may be changed from the on state to the off state at the end of the execution of the ending effect.

Further, in the above-mentioned gaming machine 901,
The detection means is removable (for example, the out-ball detector 90710 is removable by a clasp 90740 as shown in FIG. 144 (B)).

As a result, even if the detection means is not provided, it can be dealt with. It also facilitates maintenance.

Further, in the above-mentioned gaming machine 901,
The detection means
It is configured as a unit that can be placed on a game board (for example, a game board 902 or the like) that forms a game area (for example, for the out-ball detector 90710, the game board 902 is shown in FIG. 151 (B). It is configured as a unit that can be placed in.)

This facilitates maintenance. Also, different models can be used in common.

Further, the gaming machine 901 that performs the performance display described with reference to FIGS. 124 to 151 is
A gaming machine capable of executing a game and being able to control an advantageous state (for example, a jackpot gaming state, a probability change state, a time saving state, etc.) that is advantageous to the player.
A detection means capable of detecting a game medium used for a game (for example, a game area 9010, etc.) (for example, an out-ball detector 90710, etc. shown in FIGS. 144, 151, etc.) and
A signal line to which the detection signal from the detection means is transmitted (for example, the signal line 90734 shown in FIG. 144) and the like.
A receiving means for receiving the detection signal (for example, a main board 9011, a predetermined connection portion provided on the main board 9011 side, etc.) and
An abnormality detecting means capable of detecting an abnormality in the reception state of the detection signal (for example, a CPU 90103 that executes the error notification process of FIG. 145) and
Predetermined conditions are satisfied (for example, the normal winning ball device 906A which is the first starting winning opening, the ordinary variable winning ball device 906B which is the second starting winning opening, the general winning opening 9050A-9050D which is the general winning area, and the large winning opening. A payout means (for example, a ball payout device, a payout mechanism, etc.) for paying out the game medium based on the special variable winning ball device 907, etc.
The number of gaming media detected by the detection means in a predetermined state different from the advantageous state (for example, a normal state or the like; specifically, a state in which all of the probability change flag, the time saving flag, and the round gaming flag are off, etc.) For example, predetermined information (for example, the number of prize balls to be won in each winning opening) calculated based on the number of balls to be driven and the number of game media paid out by the payout means in the predetermined state (for example, the number of prize balls by winning each winning opening). For example, it is provided with an information display means (for example, the display monitor 901130 of FIG. 151) capable of displaying (for example, performance display is possible) of the performance information of FIG. 124.
When an abnormality in the reception state is detected by the abnormality detecting means, the display by the information display means is restricted (for example, an error is notified and the performance display is restricted as shown in FIGS. 146 and 147).

This makes it possible to prevent the information display means from performing an inaccurate display. For example, if a fraudulent act such as pulling out the harness 90730 (connection portion 90732, 90733) in order to show the value of the performance display well is performed, at least the performance display by the display monitor 901130 is restricted. It is possible to prevent the numbers due to fraudulent activity from being displayed as if they were valid.

Further, in the above-mentioned gaming machine 901,
When the abnormality of the reception state is detected by the abnormality detecting means, the display mode of the information display means is changed to indicate that the abnormality of the reception state is detected (for example, as shown in FIGS. 146 and 147). Is notified by changing etc.).

This makes it possible to confirm without providing a new display means.

Further, in the above-mentioned gaming machine 901,
The abnormality detecting means can detect the disconnection of the signal line (for example, it can be detected by monitoring the signal input from the out-ball detector 90710).
It is possible to notify the outside (for example, the game effect lamp 909, the speaker 908L, 908R, the display device of the card unit, the call lamp device, the hall computer, etc.) that the disconnection of the signal line is detected.

This makes it possible to recognize the door without opening the door.

Further, in the above-mentioned gaming machine 901,
The detection means is configured as a unit (for example, the out-ball detector 90710 is configured as a unit that can be arranged on the game board 902 as shown in FIG. 151 (B)).

This facilitates maintenance. Also, different models can be used in common.

Further, in FIGS. 124 to 151, a pachinko gaming machine is shown as a gaming machine for displaying performance, but a predetermined number of bets is set by inserting a medal, and a plurality of types of symbols are set according to the operation of the operation lever by the player. A game in which a predetermined number of medals are paid out to the player when the combination of the stop symbols becomes a specific combination of symbols when the symbol is stopped in response to the operation of the stop button by the player by rotating (rotating the reel). It is also applicable to slot machines capable of executing (for example, slot machines equipped with one or more of big bonus, regular bonus, RT, AT, ART, CZ (hereinafter, bonus, etc.)).

For example, a slot machine that displays performance is a slot machine that can execute a game and can be controlled to an advantageous state (for example, a bonus) that is advantageous to the player, and is a game medium used for the game (for example, a medal). A detection means capable of detecting (for example, an inserted medal sensor or the like) and a signal line to which a detection signal from the detection means is transmitted (for example, a detection signal by an inserted medal sensor or the like) are slotted. A signal line output to the main board side of the machine, etc.), a receiving means for receiving the detection signal (for example, a main board of a slot machine, a predetermined connection portion provided on the main board side, etc.), and the detection signal. An abnormality detecting means (for example, the CPU of the main board of the slot machine) capable of detecting an abnormality in the reception state of the slot machine and a predetermined condition are satisfied (for example, a combination (role) of a specific symbol is stopped on each reel). Detected by the payout means for paying out the game medium based on (for example, a hopper motor for paying out the medals stored in the hopper tank from the medal payout outlet) and the detection means in a predetermined state different from the advantageous state. Information that can display predetermined information (for example, information indicating the ratio of the number of payouts to the number of inserts) calculated based on the number of game media and the number of game media paid out by the payout means in the predetermined state. It is provided with a display means (for example, a display unit provided on the main board of the slot machine), and when an abnormality in the reception state is detected by the abnormality detection means, the display by the information display means is restricted (for example, an error). , And restricts the display of information indicating the above ratio, etc.) It may be a slot machine.

1 ... Pachinko game machine 2 ... Game board 3 ... Game machine frame 4A ... 1st special symbol display device 4B ... 2nd special symbol display device 5 ... Image display device 5H ... Start winning memory display area 6A ... Normal winning ball device 6B … Ordinary variable winning ball device 7… Special variable winning ball device 8… Speaker 9… Lamp 11… Main board 12… Production control board 13… Voice control board 14… Lamp control board 15… Relay board 16… Character control board 17… Movable accessory 20 ... Ordinary symbol display 21 ... Gate switch 22A ... 1st start port switch 22B ... 2nd start port switch 23 ... Count switch 31A ... Stick controller 31B ... Push button 100 ... Game control microcomputers 101, 121 ... ROM
102, 122 ... RAM
103 ... CPU
104, 124 ... Random number circuit 105, 125 ... I / O
120 ... CPU for production control
123 ... Display control unit 126 ... RTC circuit 901 ... Pachinko game machine 902 ... Game board 903 ... Game machine frame 903a ... Glass door frame 903A ... Outer frame 904A, 904B ... Special symbol display device 905 ... Image display device 906A ... Ordinary prize Ball device 906B ... Ordinary variable winning ball device 907 ... Special variable winning ball device 908L, 908R ... Speaker 909 ... Game effect lamp 9011 ... Main board 9012 ... Production control board 9013 ... Voice control board 9014 ... Lamp control board 9015 ... Relay board 9020 … Ordinary symbol display 9021… Gate switch 9022A, 9022B… Starting port switch 9023… Count switch 9029… Display monitor 9030… Operation button 90100… Game control microcomputer 90101, 90121… ROM
90102, 90122 ... RAM
90103 ... CPU
90104, 90124 ... Random number circuit 90105, 90125 ... I / O
90120 ... CPU for production control
90123 ... Display control unit 901000 ... Movable accessory

Claims (1)

A gaming machine that can execute a game and can be controlled to an advantageous state that is advantageous to the player.
Motion detection means that can detect the player's motion,
A specific display execution means that performs a specific display corresponding to the operation detection means, and a specific display execution means.
A detection means that can detect the game medium used for the game,
A signal line to which the detection signal from the detection means is transmitted, and
A receiving means for receiving the detection signal and
An abnormality detecting means capable of detecting an abnormality in the reception state of the detection signal,
Withdrawal means for paying out game media based on the condition that certain conditions are met,
Information capable of displaying predetermined information calculated based on the number of game media detected by the detection means in a predetermined state different from the advantageous state and the number of game media paid out by the payout means in the predetermined state. Display means and
Equipped with
When an abnormality in the reception state is detected by the abnormality detecting means, the display by the information displaying means is restricted.
The specific display execution means is
As the specific display, it is possible to display a first specific display and a second specific display that is more advantageous to the player than the first specific display.
During the non-valid period of detection by the motion detecting means, after displaying the first specific display, the first specific display is changed to the second specific display.
A gaming machine characterized in that an motion effect using the second specific display after the change is executed during the valid period of detection by the motion detection means.

Images